Standard Specification of OMAN

Ref.
Title
1.1
Scope of Section
1.1.1
Description
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1 .4
Standard Specifications Generally
Ref.
Trtle
1-1
1.8
Control of Site
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-8.1
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.2
1.6.3
Keeping Site Cleer of Water
1.7
Control of Traffic and Access
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.6
1.7.6
Maintenance and Protection of Traffic
Itema In the Bill of Ouantltf11
1.8
Control ofWoHcs
1-7
1.8.1
Setting out of Worb
1.8.2
1.8.3
Surveying Equipment and Ac:cessorles
17
1-7
Page No.
Abbreviation., Tltle end Tenna

Units of Meesurement
1.1.5
Standards
1-2
1.2
Project Works
1 ~2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
TheWorb
Silence of Specifications
1.3
Project Site
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.4
Intent of Contract
The Site
Contractor' Wort Areas

Site Survey and lnveatlgatlon
Meaaurement and Basis of Payment
lteme in the Bill of Quantities
Contractor's Site Facllttles
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
Items in the Bill of Quantities
1.5
Engineer's Facilities
1.!i.1
1.5.2
1.6.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.6.8
1.6.9
1.5.10
1.5.11
1.6.12
General
Contractor' Compound and Buildinge

Meaauremem and Basis of Payment
Site Fadlltles for the Englneer~mployer:

Computere for the Engineer
Telephones for the Engineer I Employer
Car Port for the Engineer
Cameras for the Engineer
Thennometera
Test Equipment
Inspection FIIC!IItles
Surveying Equipment for Engineer
MeaSYrement and Baals of Payment
ltemain the Bill of Quantities
12
12
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
13
13
13
1-3
1-3
1-3
13
1*3
1.9
1-6
1-6
15
1-6
1-6
1-5
1.9.1
1.911 .1
1.9. 1.2
HI
1-6
1-6
Site Cleaning During Progress of Works 1-6
Site Cleenlng
final Clean. Up on Completion

Measurement and Basis of Pavment
Maintenance of Ona-Way Traffic

TemporafY Structure
Haul Rout111 for Heavy Vehicles
Measurement and Basla of Payment
16
16
1...S
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1 7
1-7
Existing Underground Servicea and

Obstructiona
1.8.3.1
1.8.3.2
1.8.3.3
1.8.4
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
l?age No.
Notices to Concerned Authoriti es

Categories of Obstructions
Existing Utilities
Measurement and Baaiw of Payment
General and Contractual

Obligations
17
1-7
1 7
1-8
1-8
1-8
Health. Safety and Environmental Program 1-8

Health, Safetv aod Envlronmentlll P111n
HI
Health, Safety and linvironment

Representatives:
1.8.2
Use of Exploaives
1:9.2.1
Control Measures
1.9.2.2
Blasting Procedures
1.9.2.3
lixplosi ves inventorv
1.8.3
Flra Precaution
Measurement and Baals of Payment
1.9.4
19
1-9
1 9
1-9
19
t-4il
1 9
Ref.
Title
1.10
Management Procedures
1.10,1
1.10.2
Commencement. Pfogn~m and Progn~SS

Records and Measurement.
1-10
1-11
1.10..3
1.10.4
Project Admlnllltratlon
Progress Photogn~pha/ Vldeoe
1-11
1.10.6
MN~Urement and
1.10.6
Buts of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quantities
1.11
Subm ittals
PagaNo.
1-10
1 11
1-12
112
h12
1.11.1
1.11.2
Genen~l
1-12
Action SubrnltQIIs
111..3
Informational Submittals
1.11.4
1,11.6
Contractor' Review end Approval
1-13
114
1-14
1.11.6
Engineer Action
Record (As-Built) Drewing
1.11.7
1,11.8
Measufl!'nent and Buis of Payment

Items In the Bill of Quentltiea
1 14
115
1-15
116
1.12
Control of Materials and Standards

for Sampling and Testing
1-16
1.12.1
Storage of Materials
1.12.2
1.12.3
Hendling Materials
Meterfale Supplied bv Employ
Locel Material Sourcea
1.12.4
1.12.5
1.12.8
1-15
1-15
1 16
1-16
Sources of Supply and Quality

Requirement.
1-16
Certificates of Guarentee and Pnxluc:tlon
Plant lnepection.
1.12.7
Samplfng and Testing Proctduru
1.12.-'7.1
SamPIng
1-16
MB
1,12.7.2
Source Tests
1 16
1-16
1.12:7.3
1.12.7.4
1.12.7,5
Quality Cantrol Tests
1-16
Cantroi Tests
Check TI!Sts
1-16
1-16
1. 12.7.8
1.12.8
Precedence of Mlllterials and Testing

Specifications
Unacceptable Materials
1.12.9
Measurement and Basis of Payment
1.13
Contractor's Plant
and Equipment
1.13.1
General
1 17
1-17
1-17
1-17
1 17
Ref;
Title
1. 13.2
Contractor's SChedule of Plant end

Equipment
Provision an~ Use of Plant
and Equipment
1;13.3
Page No.
1. 13.4
Measurement and Buts of Payment
1.14
Contractor's Temporary Works

anCI Services
1.14.1
H 7.
M7
1 17
1-17
Temporary Facilities
1-17
1.14.1.1
Genll'ally
1.14:1.2
Temp0n1ry Site Facilities
1. 14.2
Scaffolding and FeiN Work
1.14.3
Water Supply
1.14.4
Electrldty Supply
1,14.6
Dlllllllfonal and Warning Signa
1 17
1-18
1-18
118
1-18
1.14.6
ProJect Sign Board
1-18
1-18
1. 14.7
1. 14.8
Meuun1mentend Basis of Peyment

1 19
1.16
Commemorative Plaque and

Opening Ceremony
1-19
1.16.1
1 18
Commemorative Plaque
Opening ceremony
1-19
119
1.15.4
Meesurement and Baals of Payment

Items In the Bi11 of Ouanthles
1.16
Measurement and Payment
1-19
1.16.2
1.15.3
119
119
1.18.1
General Method of Measurement
t.19
1.18.2
Scope of Peyment
1-19
J
1.1
1.1.1
Scope of Section
Description
1
This Section describes the general requirements
that apply to all sections of the Specification where
relevant. All sections of the Specification are to be read
In conjunction with this Section.
1.1.2
Standard Specifications Generally
The Standard Specification is generic. The

requirements of each section are intended to provide
sufficient information and instruction to the Contractor
unless additional requirements are stated in the Special
Specification. Particular requirements are stated In the
Standard Special Specification, which is to be read in
conjunction with the sections of this Standard
Specification. In the event of any conflict between this
Standard Specification and the Special Specification, the
Special Specification shall govern.
1.1.3
Abbreviations, Title and Terms
The following abbreviations used in the

Specification end on the Drawings shall have the
meanings ascribed to them below:
AASHTO
ABS
ACI
AISC
AlSI
ANSI
API
ASTM
AV.
AWG
AWS
bit.
as
asse
BST
BSEN
CB
CBR
cone
CIE
CISPR 15
DBSC
DIN
EN
Equiv
FSS
GGBFS
American Association of State Highway

and Transportation Officials
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
AmeriCBn Concrete Institute
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
American National Standards Institute
American Petroleum Institute
American Society for Testing and
Materials
average
American wire gauge
American Welding Society
bitumen/bituminous
British Standard
bituminous slurry seal coat
bituminous surface treatment
British Standard harmonized with
European Norm/ Standard
circuit breaker
California Bearing Ratio
concrete
Commission lnternationale de I'Eclairage
Limits and Methods of Measurement of
Radio disturbance characteristics of
Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment
double bituminous seal coat
Deutsches Institute Fur Normalizieung
European Norm/ Standard
equivalent
Federal Standard Specification (USAI
Ground-granulated blast-furnace slag
hwy
ht
H:V
IEC
lEE
ISO
LEED
LL
LS.
max
MCCB
min
MUTCD
MV
N.C.
NEC
NEMA
N.O
OS
pav't
P.C.
PCC
PE
PFA
P.l.
P.L
PLMCS
PTFE
PVC
qty
RC
RCP
rdwy
ROW
SBSC
SCM
S.G.
51
Sta
SWG
TBSC
uPVC
VOE
wgt
1.1.4
highway
height
horizontal:verticel
International Electrical Commission
Institution of Electrical Engineers (UKI
International Organization for
Standardization
Leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design
liquid limit
lump sum
maximum
molded case circuit breaker
minimum (or minute)
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices
Medium Voltage
Normally Closed (electrical contact)
National Electrical Code (UKI
National Electrical Manufacturers'
Association (USA I
Normally Open (electrical contact)
Oman! Standards
pavement
prime cost
Portland cement concrete
polyethylene
Pulverized fly ash
plasticity index
plastic limit
Public Lighting Management and Control
System
Polytetranuoroethylene
polyvinyl chloride
quantity
reinforced concrete
reinforced concrete pipe
roadway
right-of-way
single bituminous seal coat
Supplementary cementing material/s
specific gravity
Systeme International D'Unites
Station (location along a survey line)
standard wire gauge (UK)
triple bituminous seal coat
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
Verband Deutscher Electrotechnlker
weight
Units of Measurement
Throughout the documentation units of measurement

are referred to by symbols as follows:
nr
number
mm
millimeterIs
em
centimeter/s
m
meter/s
lin.m
linear meter/s
km
kilometer/s
11
~
~
Mlnif'trv of Transport & CoolmunlcoUo"s DGRLT
~~<G~n~ral
sq.mm
sq.cm
sq.m
ha
cu.m
gm
kg
t
ml
ltr
Pa
Mpa
N
kN
MN
A
rnA
w
kW
kj
c
Hz
rpm
kmlh
sec
min
h
mS
dB
dBA
ppm
in.
ft
sq.in
sq.ft
cu.ft
lb.
psi
gal
gal(lmp)
mph
HP
USG
1.1.5
.
~
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
~
square millimeter/s
square centimeter/s
square meterfs
hectare/s
cubic meter/s
gramfs
kl logram/s
metric ton (1,000 kg)
milliliterIs
liter/s
Pascalls
Mega Pascal/s = Nfsq.mm
Newton/s
kilo Newtons
mega Newtons
amperes
milli amperes
volt/s
Wan
kilowatt
kilojoule/s
Celsius {Centigrade)
Hertz {Frequency)
revolutions per minute
kilometers per hour
seconds
minute/s (or minimum)
houris
milli Siemens
decibel!s
decibels absolute
parts per million
inch/inches (1 in . .., 25.4 mm)
foot/feet (1ft .. 0.3048 m)
square i nch/inches
square foot/feet
cubic foot/feet
poundls (weight)
pounds per square inch
gallon/s (U.S.)
gallon/s (Imperial)
miles per hour
horsepower
American gage
Standards
Reference to Standards and Codes of Practice shad

be taken as those versions current at the date of issue of
the Tender Documents.
2
Where t he Specification states that the
recommendations of a Code of Practice or a Standard
must be complied with, then the recommendations
become mandatory. Where there are alternative
recommendations the Contractor may adopt any of them
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
1.2
Project Works
1.2.1
The Works
The Works comprised by the Project are as shown

on the Drawings and defined in the Special Specification.
Except where otherwise stated, the Co~~otractor shall
construct and complete the whole of the Works and
provide evarything necessary for such construction and
completion.
1.2.2
Intent of Contract
Tha intent of the Contract is to provide for the

construction and completion in every detaD, and the
subsequent maintenance of the Works described. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, toolt ,
equipment. transportation, supplies and facilities and
shall carry outall Permanent and Temporary
2
Works and an other items necessary for the proper
completion of the Works in accordance with all
requirements of the Contract.
3
Where the Specifications or Drawings describe any
porti ons of the Works in outline only, and not in
complete detail, the best current engineering practice
shall prevail and only first quality materials and
workm1nshi p shall be used.
1.2.3
Silence of Specifications
The apparent silence of the Specifications, Drawings or

other Cont ract Documents as to any detail or the
apparent omission from them of a detailed description
concerning any Works or requirements, shall be
regarded as meaning that current best engineering
practice shall apply and sha~ be to the approval of the
Engineer.
1.3
Project Site
1.3.1
The Site
The Site of the Works Is as shown on the Drawings

and described i n the Special Specificati on. The
Contractor wib be given possession of such parts of the
Site as are required to execute the Works in accordance
with the agreed Program or as are reasonably required
for him to progress the Works.
1.3.2
Contractor's Work Areas
The Contractor shall make all necessary

1rr1ngements, including payment if need be, regarding
l!ny land outside the Site that may be needed as work
areas. The Employer will not accept any liability in
respect of such land.
2
The Contractor shall locate and se:ect sites outside
the rightofway for t he use of his plant and equipment,
and for siting his site offices, workshops, other
accommodation and Tempor ary Works. or any other
l-2
Sultnn.,te of Omot
General)
uses which are essential for execution of the Contract.

The Contractor shall take the necessary measures for
using these sites and shall be responsible for all
expenses that may become due in return for such use.
Prior to using any land owned by public or private
owners outside the Site, the Contractor shall obtain the
approval of the concerned authorities and the Engineer.
3
The Contractor, if so required by the Engineer,
whether before or after completion of the Works, shall
remove his construction plant, properly clean and
remove all debris from the site and shall, wherever
applicable, remedy all damage and pay all money due to
land owners in return for using their land.
1.3.3
Site Survey and Investigation
Before commencing work on Site, the Contractor

shall carry out a topographical survey of the Site, in
conjunction with, or as directed by the Engineer. This
survey shall include such parts of the Site as the
Engineer may direct. to record the Site limits,
dimensions, ground levels, obstructions and other
features and the survey shall establish base lines and
points for future setting out and also record the basis for
re-measurement of e)(cavation and earthwork, where
applicable. The Contractor shall submit the site survey
drawings to the Engineer for approvaL
2
The Contractor shall inspect the Site to identify
obstacles above and below ground such as fences,
services, wells, paved areas, underground tanks, utilities
and pits, and shall record them on the site survey
drawing end photographically if instructed.
3
The Contractor shall carry out subsurface and
other site investigations as are necessary to verify any
information provided to him by the Employer and to
ascertain the nature of the ground and facilitate
execution of the Works. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to verify the stability of side slopes in cut
areas by specialized staff. The Contractor, at his own
expense shall execute any required site investigation
prior to cutting in the relevant areas. The proposal for
the site investigation program as well the final
recommendation shall be approved by the Engineer.
1.3.4
No separate measurement or payment will be

made, for any part of Sub-section 1.3 except as stated
below. All other work is considered t o be subsidiary to
other sections and the costs are deemed to be included
in the prices for other items stated in the Bill of
Quantities.
2
If the Engineer specifically orders that a sub-surface
soil investigafon shall be done by the Contractor,
payment will be made at the rate stated in the Bill of
Quantities for the complete work, including provision of
all equipment, performance of tests and provision of a
report.
1.3.5

Soil investigation and report
1.4
Contractor's Site Facilities
1.4.1
Contractor's Compound and

Buildings
{LS.)
The Contractor shall establish a compound for his

facilities at a location to be approved by the Engineer. He
shall provide, furnish and equip as necessary, all
buildings and facilities as required for his own and
Subcontractors' use; including but not limited to site
offices and mess rooms with appropriate sanitary
facilities; workshops, sheds and stores; site toilets,
I atrines and the like.
1.4.2
The Contractor shall be paid a two stage sum for

the mobilization and demobilization of his facilities equal
to the Lump Sum in the Bill of Quantities. 60% of the
sum will be paid at the completion of the mobilization
and the remaining 40% on issuance of the Certificate of
Completion for the Whole of the Works.
2
The Contractor shall be paid a monthly sum for
maintaining his facilities. No payment for maintenance
of the facilities will be made beyond the end of the
Contract period (aher approved extensions of Time for
Completion have been included I.
1.4.3
i.
ii.
Mobilization and demobilization of Contractor's

facilities
(lump Sum)
Maintenance of Contractor's facilities
(type) (nr of units)
(nr of months)
1.5
Engineer's Facilities
1.5.1
General
A ll facilities provided for the Engineer's and/ or

Employer's staff shall remain available until three
months beyond the issuance of the Certificate of
Completion or until such earlier time as the Engineer
may decide.
2
All buildings, equipment and utilities provided by
the Contractor shall remain the property of the
Contractor and will be returned to him on completion or
when no longer required, unless stated otherwise i n the
Special Specifications.
1.5.2
Site Facilities for the

Engineer/Employer:
The Contractor shall provide service and m aintain,

and remove when instructed, the offices. other
accommodation, services, surveying equipment and
~~
MinhJtrv
or
T..-anaport &
~~<G~~eral
Communle~tlone
OGRlT
laboratory facilities for the use of the Engineer and

Employer as described below and In the Special
Specification.
2
Offices shalt be of proprietary manufacture, of
insulated and weather tight construcllon, with lockable
entrai"'Ces and operable windows, hardwearing easy
clean surfaces and robust and secure fittings:
Incorporate sanitary facilities to the extent
required for the number and gender of
c;:ersonnel to be accommodat ed.
Support on suitable foundations.
3
The Contractor shalt provide and maintain all
necessary services for the offices and facilities, including
but not necessarily limited to the following;
1.5.3
Computers for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide for the exclusive use

of the Engineer' s staff, new PC equipment, original
l'censes and peripheral hardware together with latest
versions of ell associated Microsoft software (Excel,
Ward, PawerPoint and AutoCADf Primavera and
Antivi rus programs with requi red regul ar updates and
user licenses for software and accessories. necessary
cabling and workstation desks. all as detailed i n the
Special Specification.
2
The Contractor shall service and maintain computer
equipment regularly and provide all associated
consumables, stationery and paper supplies as and
when requested.
Heating and airconditioning.

Electric lighting and power.
1.6.4
Water supply.
Potable water supply.
Drainage system.
Fire fighting appliances.
Cleaning f ecit ities and services and general
attendance.
Telephone.
Computers
Camera
Thermometers
Colored Photocopiers.
Telephones for the Engineer I

Employer
The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the

exclusive use of the Engineer's and/or Employer's staff,
appropriate and adequate telephone/fax faci ijties and
services as detailed in the Special Specification, for the
duret! on of the project.
2
The Contractor shan pay for all connection, service
and user charges and costs arising in connection with
the provi sion of telephone/fax facilities for the Engi neer,
i ncluding the cost of all local calls.
3
The telephone/fll)( service shall provide a separate
excl\lsive connection ensuring privacy of conversation
for the Engineer.
Fax machines.
4
The Contractor shall provide new furniture and
equipment suitable far the i ntended user.
5
All office accommodation and facilities, services
and equipment shall be continuously available to the
Engineer in full working order within four weeks of t he
start of the mobilization period unless otherwise stated
in the Special Specifications, and before any permanent
construction operations are commenced. However, the
Engineer may permit work to commence before the full
facilities are available if adequate facilities are provided
by the Contract or. If the Contractor fails to provide the
required facilities he shall bear the cost of alternative
arrangements made by t he Engineer.
6
Maintenance of the offices shell include supplies of
pencils, pens, drawing paper, other st ationery, survey
pegs, brushes, paint and similar consumable materials,
as required by the Engl neer.
7
The Contractor shall submit fully detailed proposals
for all facilities to the Engi neer and obtain approval prior
to hl re or purchase and delivery to the Site.
8
The Contractor shall service and maintain and clean
t he Engineer's offices on a daily basis; provide all
consumables and supplies as and when requested,
including drinking wat er, gas and stocks for making tea
and coffee beverages.
1..
1.5.5
Car Port for the Engineer
1 The Contractor shall provide a car port shade structure

a:;fjacent t o t he Engineer's offices. sufficiently sized and
arranged to accommodate a minimum of 10 vehicles
unless stated otherwise In the Special Specifications.
The Contractor shall provide appr opriate hard standing
and adjoining walkways, and submft detailed proposals
to the Engineer and obtain appro\181 prior to fabrication
and erection.
1.5.6
Cameras for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide for the exclusive use

of the Engineer's staff new cameras as detailed in the
Special Specfficatian, each equipped with the following
features;
Digital camera minimum 8 mega pixels
Auto focus (Not fixed) lens
Self wind and rewind
Bulttin flash.
2
The Contractor shall submit a proposal for approval
prlor to purchase.
Sultanata cf Ornan. Stl!dor<! Specifica~c
1.5.7
Thermometers
The following shall be provided on Site:

Maximum and minimum thermometer for
measurement of atmospheric temperature.
Thermometer/s for measurement of concrete.
asphalt and ground temperature.
1.5.8
Test Equipment
The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer

all test equipment required for carrying out tests on
materials, Plant or finished work required by the
Specification.
1.5.9
Inspection Facilities
The Contractor shall provide all ladders, access

lighting, facilities. etc. and such other assistance as the
Engineer may require enabling full access to inspect any
part of the works in a safe manner.
1.5.10
Surveying Equipment for Engineer
The Contractor shall supply and maintain a

separate set of surveying equipment and accessories in
full working order for the sole use of the EngIneer, and
shall replace any equipment end accessories whenever
directed by the Engineer during the progress of the work,
as detailed in the Special Specification.
1.5.11
Laboratory
The Contractor shall provide, furnish, equip,

maintain, staff and clear away on completion materiels
testing laboratories in approved locations, manned by
suitably qualified personnel as detailed in the Special
Specification, and shall carry out all site testing required
under the Specification or as directed by the Engineer.
2
The Contractor shall provide skilled technicians and
unskilled laborers of the types end numbers stated in the
Special Specifications. Personnel once assigned to the
laboratory shall not be removed except at the direction,
or with the approval, ofthe Engineer.
3
The laboratory shall be an approved weather tight

air conditioned movable or stationary building or trailer
as required by the Contract and shall be located on Site
as agreed with the Engi near.
4
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the
laboratory equipment, apparatus and consumable
supplies, including stationery and test forms, needed for
execution of all standard tests required by the ContracL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval within 15 days of the start of mobilization a
complete listing of the equipment, apparatus and
supplies. The list shall include names of the
manufactures, and descriptive literature shell be
attach ad as necessary or appropriate.
1.5.12
Provision of the Engineer's office and other.

accommodation, furnished and equipped as specified,
and provision of laboratory fully furnished and
operational as specified, shall each be measured and
paid for at the monthly rate per building stated in the Bill
of Quantities.
2
Maintenance of the Engineer's office, other
accommodation, equipment and provision of the
required services shell be measured and paid for
monthly during the period which the facilities are
available in full working order.
3
No payment for maintenance of the Engineer's
office and accommodation will be made for any period
of delay beyond the Time for Completion or extended
Time for Completion if relevant.
4
Maintenance of the site laboratory and mobile site
laboratory shall be measured and paid for monthly end
shall Include for chemicals end other consumables. No
payment will be made for any period of delay beyond
the end of the Time for Completion or extended Time for
Completion if relevant.
5
If the Specification does not call for provision of a
site laboratory, no separate payment will be made for
samples and tests on materials, the cost of which will be
deemed to be included in the rates for the relevant items
in the Bill of Quantities.
Provision and maintenance of surveying equipment

for the Engineer is measured as a monthly item for the
whole period of the Contract.
7
made, for any other items in this Sub-section, including
computers, telephones, digital camera, thermometers,
test equipment, fax machine and colored photocopier,
inspection facilities and car port, all of which costs are
deemed to be included in the rates for other items stated
in the Bill of Quantities.
1.5.13

Provision of Engineer's office
(nr of months)
ii
Maintenance of Engineer's office

(nr of months)
iii
Provision of surveying equipment
iv
Maintenance of surveying equipment (type)

(nr of units I
(nr of months)
Provision of Engineer's accommodation

(nr of months)
vi
Maintenance of Engineer's accommodation

(type I (nr of units)
(nr of months)
vii
Provision of laboratory
(type)
(nr of months)
(nr of months)
'V
~
Mlniatrv of TrnnapOrt &. Communlcntlons . OGRL t
./"--~<General
viii
Maintenance of laboratory
(type)
(nr of months)
1.6
Control of Site
1.6.1
Keeping Site Clear of Water
The Contractor shall take all met sures to keep the

Site free from standing, flowing or tidal water, including
temporary drainage, pumping and dewatering if
necessary.
1.6.2
Site Cleaning
1.6.2.1
Site Cleaning During Progress of Works
Anparts of the Site, and adjacent roads affected by

the Works, shall be maintained in a clean and tidy
condition throughout the Works. All Wllste and surplus
materials and other rubbish resulting from the Works or
otherwise, shall be cleared away at intervals as directed
by the Engineer,
If the Contractor fails to remove any surplus or
2
waste materials from the Site within 3 days after being
instructed to do so by the Engineer, these materials may
be removed by others at the Contractor's expense.
1.6.2.2
Final Clean Up on Completion
The entire Site shell be delivered up Ol'l completion

of the Works, In a dean, neat and presentable new
condition, all as specifEed hereunder and as described in
the General Conditions of Contract
2
Spoil tips, borrow pits and deposited materials
shall be trimmed and regularized to profiles and levels
as directed. Flow of water courses affected by the tips or
pits shall be maintained without interruption and any
agreement concerning these sites, existing between the
Employer and tile persons or authorities concerned,
shell be observed.
3
Temporary markings, coverings and protection
shall be removed unless otherwise instructed by the
Engineer.
1.6.3

made, for any part of Sub-section 1,6, all of which work
is considered to be subsidiary to other sections. The
costs ere deemed to be included in the prices for other
items stated i n the Bill of Quantities
1.7
Control of Traffic and Access
1.7.1
Maintenance and Protection of

Traffic
In order to facilitate movement of traffic safey

through and around the construction area, the
Contractor shall supply. erect and maintain signs,
Hi
delineators, signal lights, traffic barricades and other

facilities necessary for safe and efficient directing and
handll ng of traffic on or around the work site by
diversions. Adequate safety zones and protective
barriers shall be provided around working areas.
2
The Contractor shall draw up hls proposals for
protection of ttaffic based an the provisions described in
the Special Specification and after coordination with and
approval of the Royal Oman Pollee and other Concerned
Authorities. The Contractor shall submit the proposals
with drawings and pr ograms to the Engineer for his prior
approval.
3
Movement of equipment from the one part of the
Site to another along routes being used by the public
(whether public highway or diversions provi ded by the
Contractor) shall be in accordance with the Treffic
Regulations. Material falling on the road as a result of
operations shall be removed immediately.
The Contractor sha ll provide flagmen with the sole
4
duty of directing public traffic tl!rough or around the Site..
5
Sign faces far temporary signs shall comply with
the 11ighway Design Standards..
1.7.2
Maintenance of OneWay Traffic
Whenever it becomes necessary to operate one-way

traffic along a section of road the Contractor shall
provide a single-lane of not less than 3.5m wide and
keep it permanently open for traffic. The l ength of any
single-lane working shall not exceed 500m. If
construction Is going on at more than one adjacel'lt
section, the Contractor shall organize the work in a way
that results In the minimum amount of obstruction and
delay t o uaffic. No two single lane worki ng sections shall
be closer than 1km.
1.7.3
Temporary Structures
Temporary traffic bearing structures shall be capable of

carrying the same live loads as permanent st ructures.
1.7.4
Haul Routes for Heavy Vehicles
The Col\tractor shall prepare proposals for routes

to be used by heavy vehicles particularly far hauling till
materials.. Routes shall where possible, avoi d existing
roads 11nd bullt-up areas. Signs shall be provided end
maintai ned to direct construction traffic to and from haul
routes. Details of haul routes and signage shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval withi n a period
not exceeding one month prior to the commencement of
work in the relevant area and the signs shd be erected
prior to actual commencement of the work.
2
Haul routes shall operate using oneway or twoway traffic systems as required by the Engineer. If at
any time the Engineer considers tllat any section of the
route needs repai r work. the Engineer may withdraw his
approval until the Contractor has executed the necessary
repairs to thee nglneer's sati sfaction.
Sulczu111t of Om on. Sl.lod.:ltd S!*llieal<Oil> for Road & Br ~e Con.true~o
General)
3
If and where it is necessary for Contractor's plant or
vehicles to cross public highways and where required by
the Engineer, all such crossings shall be equipped with
manually controlled traffic lights.
During extended
periods when the Contractor's plant is not using the
crossing, the traffic signals shall be switched off and the
advance warning signs obscured.
Stationary vehicles, equipment, huts, stockpiles of

materials, etc., shall be kept well clear of crossing points
so that persons using the highway and the haul road
shall have adequate sight distance at all times.
1.7.6
Maintenance and protection of traffic is measured

as a monthly item which is deemed to cover far all costs
of this Sub-section 1.7 and to be full compensation for all
labor, materials and equipment and any other costs,
including laying and removal of road material, unless
stated otherwise.
2
Where diversions are required by the Engineer (or
by the Royal Oman Police through the Engineer) to be
surfaced with bituminous materials, the bituminous
surfacing, the sub-base shall be paid per cubic meters
(cu.m), and the prime coat will be paid by square meter
applied (sq.m).
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, modification of the

lines or grade is required, before or after survey, the
Engineer will issue detailed instructions to the
Contractor who shall revise the setting out accordingly.
4
Setting out utility works shall be as shown on the
Drawings or as instructed on Site. Stake-out shall be
revised if, in the opinion of the Engineer, modifications
of I ine or grade are required.
5
The Contractor shall be responsible for preserving

all existing stakes, marks and monuments and if any
construction stakes or marks are destroyed or disturbed,
the Contractor shalt replace them at his own expense.
6
The Contractor shall record details of all grid lines,
existing ground I evels, setting-out stations, bench marks
and profiles on the site setting-out drawing. This
drawing shall be retained on the Site throughout the
duration of the Contract and handed over to the
Engineer upon completion of the Works.
7
All dimensions and levels on the Drawings and the
Site, shall be checked particularly the correlation
between components and the work in place. Materials
and components shall not be ordered, or work carried
out, until discrepancies have been resolved with the
Engineer.
1.8.2
1.7.6
i.
ii.
m.
iv.

Maintenance and protection
of traffic
Supply and compacting of
sub-base an diversions where
ordered by the Engineer
Supply and compacting of
bituminous base course an
diversions where ordered by
the Engineer
Prime coat (rate of application I
1.8
Control of Works
1.8.1
Setting out of Works
(months)
(cu.m).
Surveying Equipment and

Accessories
The Contractor shell provide sufficient and suitable

surveying instruments and other equipment and
accessories for his own use in setting out and leveling of
the Works, and also to enable the Engineer to check the
setting out.
(cu.m).
(sq.m)
The Contractor shall, prior to any setting out,

submit a planned method of operations for setting aut
the Works to the Engineer for his approval. The plan
shall include the accuracy. positions of the various types
of stakes, method of marking stakes, and methods to be
used for protecting stakes, etc. No survey work shall
proceed without to the Engineer's approval of the
Contractor's plan.
2
The Contractor shall give written notice to the
Engineer at least 24 hours before he intends to survey
and set aut any portion of the Works. Such notice shall
include the time, location and type of work to be set out.
3
The Contractor shall set out the Works, inform the
Engineer when setting out is complete and obtain
Engineer's approval before proceeding with construction.
The accuracy of survey equipment and accessories

may be verified at any time by the Engineer end any
unsatisfactory
equipmentslinstruments
shall
be
promptly calibrated or removed and replaced by the
Contractor at its own expense.
1.8.3
Existing Underground Services and

Obstructions
1.8.3.1
Notices to Concerned Authorities
Before any clearing and excavation is started. the

Contractor shall issue suitable written notice of his
intentions and work programs to all relevant authorities
and public bodies and in return shall obtain a permit of
no-objection. The respondents shall be requested to
indicate on the working drawings provided by the
Contractor the position of any underground services in
which they have an interest.
1.8.3.2
Categories of Obstructions
Obstructions shall be classified as follows:

Existing private and public owned utilities, above
and below ground, which are required to be
protected, adjusted. relocated or removed.
1-7
~
~
Mlr>ISif'V of Tr.,nsporot & Commor>lc.,tlone,
OG~~T
./"'..
~<:General
Obstacles, above end below ground (other then

utilities), which ere required to be taken down,
dismantled, demolished or excavated, relocated
and removed, as appropriate.
1.8.3.3
Existing Utilities
Utilities shall Include, but are not be limited to,

existing water lines, gas lines, telephone lines, lalaj, fiber
optics, wire lines, service connections. water and gas
and oil meters and valve boxes, light poles and masts,
pylons, cableways, signals, end ell utility appurtenances
within the limits ofthe proposed construction.
2
The costs of all work concerning verification and
identification of existing utilities. Including excavating
any trial pits, detection means, mapp-ng detailing of
drawings and co-ordination with respective authorities
shall be fully borne by the Contractor
Utility diversions may be specified or directed by

the Engineer to be carried out by the Contractor, or
alternatively the Employer may make arrangements for
such works to be executed by other partles-
execution of work pertaini ng to all utility adjustments,

relocations and removals. The Contractor shall schedule
construction activities so as to avoid or minimize any
potenti al delays. inconvenience or damage to the Works
that may result from utility interference or the operttions
of adjustment, relocations end removals.
6 The Contractor shall be responsible for safeguardi ng
and protecting aU utilities and appurtenances
encountered during the Works. The Contractor sl\aQ be
responsi ble for the costs of making good any damage
arising out of its own negligence.
1.8.4
No separate measurement or payment will be made,

for any part of Sub-section 1.8, which work is considered
to be subsidiary to other sections. The costs are deemed
to be included i n the prices for other items st.ted in the
Bill of Quantities.
1.9
General and Contractual

Obligations
1.9.1
Health, Safety and Environmental

Program
The Contractor shall;
i.
ii.
iiL
iv.
v.
Take into account that the diversion work

shall be carried out to the requirements and
approval of the utility authorities and/or
under their supervision, and also, where
required by the utility authorities. specialist
diversion works shall be carried out by
accredited specialist contractors.
Verify and identify the existing utilities by
excavating trial pits and other measures
Including detection means and shall liaise
with the relevant authorities and map these
utilit ies and prepare detailed and accurate
existing utilities drawings, identifying the
utilities that are in service and those that are
dead or abandoned. Submit these existing
utilities drawings. which shall be accurate
and detailed, giving location of utilities in
plan and section, with all pertinent data ofthe
respective utility, to the Engineer and to the
utility authority.
Work out and develop, in coordination w ith
the utility authority and the Engineer, the
approved utilities diversion schemes that will
be required to enable the execution of the
work and also maintain continued operation
of utilities services in the area for the users.
Provide superintendence for the execution of
the utility diversions whether they are carried
out by the Contractor directly or by other
parties em played by the contractor.
Provide accurate As-Built Drawings of all
permanent utility diversions that are
executed under the Contract.
5
The Contractor shall take into account, in his
Program of Work, the time effort involved in the
18 .
In addition to the requirements of the provisions of

the General Conditions of Contract and ocher contract
requirements, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
the necessary safety personal protective equipment
(PPEI in compliance with i nternational standards
including but not limited to safety shoes, reflective vests,
helmets, and safety harnesses. etc,_., and shall submit
for the EnQ""eer's approval, within 15 days after the
effective date of the notice to proceed for the Works, a
proposed Safety Program covering the matters
described below;
1.9.1.1
Health, Safety and Environmental Plan
The Health. Safety and Environmental Plan shall

contain but not be limited to the following:
i.
Safety Policy and Strategy_
ii.
Statutory end Contractual Framework for

Safety.
ia.
Management Safety Responsibilities_
iv.
Safety Training and awareness_
v.
Safety Revl ews.
vl.
Safety Method Statements.
vii.
Reporting and Investigation.
viii.
Contingency Arrangements.
ix.
Safety Inspections and Audits.
)(_
Accident Procedures,
xi.
Site cleanliness and removal of rubbish..
xiL
Labor messing facilities.
xHI.
Monthly Report_
Sutt.. nnto of Omo
xiv.
Compliance with current applicable national

and local environmental legislation end
contractual environmental obligations.
2
The Contractor shall take into account that the
works under this Contract may be undertaken
simultaneously with other contracts. The Contractor is to
coordinate safety procedures with the Engineer and
Safety Representatives from other contractors to
implement and maintain a common safety strategy.
If in the opinion of the Engineer there is an
3
infringement or breach in the approved Health and
Safety Plan, the Engineer reserves the right to instruct
the Contractor to undertake immediate corrective action
without any liability for any additional costs or time
implication incurred by the Contractor in undertaking the
corrective action.
Upon the Engineer's approval of the Safety
4
Program the Contractor shall, for the full term of the
Contract, operate the Safety Program, maintain accurate
records of safety act;vities and accident, and submit
safety and accident reports to the Engineer on the
approved forms.
1.9.1.2
Health, Safety and Environmental

Representatives:
The Contractor shall include within the Health,

Safety and Environmental Plan the name of the
company's qualified Safety Officer. He shall also submit
the name and qualification of a Health, Safety and
Environment representative on site, responsible for the
implementation of the Health, Safety and Environmental
Plan on site. This site representative shall remain on site
during operational working hours and shall coordinate
with the safety representatives of other package
Contractors.
2
Appointment of the site Health, Safety and
Environment Manager will be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
1.9.2
Use of Explosives
1.9.2.1
Control Measures
The Contractor shall not use explosives without the

express permission from the Engineer and controlling
authority. The Contractor shall abide by all rules and
regulations of the concerned authorities regarding
purchasing, transportation, storing, handling and using
the explosive materials.
2
Explosives and detonators shall be stored in special
buildings as approved by the concerned authorities.
These secured buildings shall be located and clearly
marked in English and Arabic "DANGER -EXPLOSIVES"
as approved by the Concerned Authorities. Explosives
and detonators shall be stored ' n separate buildings.
3
All possible precautions shall be taken against
accidental fire or explosion, and to ensure that the
explosives and detonators are kept in proper and safe

condition.
4
Explosives and detonators shall always be
transported in separate special vehicles and kept apart
until the last possible moment. Meta11ic tools shall not
be used to open boxes of explosives.
1.9.2.2
Blasting Procedures
Ensure that blasting is only carried out by

experienced personnel. Priming, charging, stemming
and shot firing shall be carried out with greatest regard
for safety and in strict accordance with the rules and
regulations of the concerned authorities. Adequate
warning of blasting shall always be given and all
persons confirmed as clear from the a rea before blasting
takes place.
2
Ensure that police and other concerned authorities
are kept fu liy informed of the blasting program so that
they may be present when blasting takes place if they so
require.
3
Ensure that explosive charges are not excessive,
charged boreholes are properly protected, and proper
precautions are taken for the safety of persons and
property.
4
The Contractor shall prepare a survey report for the
surroundings evident with photos for status before and
after blasting.
1.9.2.3
Explosives Inventory
The Contractor shall maintain an up-todate

inventory of all explosives and explosive devices and
shall submit a monthly report to the Engineer, detailing
the use of all explosives by date and location.
1.9.3
Fire Precautions
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to

prevent personal injury or death or damage to the Works
or other property from fire. Fire fighting arrangements
shall be made as required by the concerned authorities.
2
Adequate and fully operationa I firefi ghting
equipment shall be furnished and maintained by the
Contractor in all vulnerable areas and as instructed by
the Engineer. Workmen shall be trained in the operation
of such equipment and provision of fire fighting facilities
3
Adequate water for firefighting shall be available
and outlets located so as to be readily accessible.
4
All equipment shall
property maintained.
1.9.4
be
regularly
tested and

made, for any part of Sub-section 1.9, which work is
considered to be subsidiary to other sections. The costs
are deemed to be included in the prices for other items
stated in the Bill of Quantities.
19
~
/'-...../
Mlnlstv of Tllnaport & Communlco>tlona
DGRLT
/"..~<:General
1.10
Management Procedures
xi.
1.10.1
Commencement, Program and

Progress
Activities for Temporary Works to be

supplied and constructed and the dates for
supply, construction and removal
xii.
Dates for submission by the Contractor of

shop drawings-Working drawings. samples
and the like and dates for approval by the
Engineer, in accordance with Conditions of
Contract.
xiii.
Dates for submission of the cross-sections.
xiv.
Dates and times for work to be performed by

other Contractors or for materials and plant
to be supplied by the Employer
)(V_
Duration and earliest/latest dates for testing

and commi ssioning plant and engi neering
installations.
xvi.
Bar chart showing earliest dates and total

float of activities.
Commencement: After receipt of the Order to

Commence, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer's
Representative, at least 7 days in advance, of the
proposed date for commencing work on Site.
2
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall co-ordinate the
construction activities to assure efficient and orderly
installation of each part of the Works. The Contractor
shall co-ordinate construction operations included under
differing sections of the Specifications that are
dependent upon each other for proper execution.
i.
ii.
ili.
Where installation of one part of the work is

dependent on the installation of other
components, either before or after its own
installation, schedule construction activities
in the sequence required to obtain the best
results.
Guidance: The Contractor shall abide by the

following:
Where availability of space is lim ited or

restricted by access or security, co-ordinate
installat ion of the different components to
assure maximum accessibility at desired
times for required maintenance service and
repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate
items scheduled for later installation.
3
Program: Unless stated In the Special Specification
that the Contractor may submit a program In bar chart
form only, the Contractor shalt provide for the Engineer's
review in accordance with Conditions of Contract, a
computer-based program !n critical path network (CPN)
form, showing at least the following information:
i.
The Engineer will guide the Contractor in the

determinati on of the level of detail to
Included In the CPN
li.
Construction activities will not ba scheduled

to e)(ceed twenty-five (25) consecutive
working days without the approval of the
Engineer
ii~
One day wiD be the smallest tima unit used
Hardware: The computer hardware shall be PC

compatible.
6
Computer Software: Project management software
shall be of tha professional high.end type (i.e.
"Primavera" project management software latest version
or of similar capabiliti es).
7
Resource Schedules: The computer program used
for preparing the program shall also be used for
preparation of resource schedules to be submitted to the
Engineer with the program. The resource schedules
shall show at least the following information;
i.
Contract milestones (Engineer' s Notice to

Commence, Commencement Date, date for
completion of Sections of the Works, date for
completion of the whole ofthe Works. etc.)
ii.
Duration of each construction activity in

working days
l.
Quantity o f materials to be used for each

activity
iii,
Earliest/latest start and completion dates for

each construction activity
ii.
iv,
Free float time for each activity
Numbers and classes of workmen to ba

employed on the Site for each activity
iii.
v.
Total float time for each activity
Numbers and classes of equipment to ba

used for each activity
iv.
Histogram for workmen by class and overall

classes
v.
Histogram for equipment by class and 0\lerall

classes.
vi.
Cost of each activity as Contract rates
vli,
Duration and earliest/latest dates

procurement of materials and plant
viii.
Duration and earliest/latest dates for activities

to be performed by Subcontractors
ix.
Number of working days per week
x.
Number of working shifts per day for each

constn.ctlon activity
1-10
for
8
Cash Flow Estimate: The computer program used
for preparing the program shall also be used to prepare
t he cash flow estimate to be submitted by the Contractor.
9
Monitoring: The Contractor shaN monitor progress
of the Works and the supply of resources and cash flow
compared with the program. schedules and estimate,
update the program with actual progress data monthly
Sult~:~nato
af Omat
and shall revise the program, schedules and estimate as

required by Conditions of Contract. Copies of revised
program etc. and notices of actual and forecast delays
and shortfalls shall be promptly given to the Engineer.
10 Computer Program: The Contractor shall provide
the Engineer with a copy of the computer diskette of the
target program, updated and new target program,
schedules and estimates.
1.10.2
Records and Measurements
Labor Record: The Contractor shall provide each

week a record showing the number and description of
workmen employed each day on the Works including
those employed by Subcontractors.
Materials and Plant Record : The Contractor shall
2
provide each week a record showing the quantity and
description of all materials and plant delivered to the
Site complete with copies of delivery notes.
3
Equipment Record: The Contractor shall provide
each week a record showing the number, type and
capacity of all Contractor's Equipment, excluding hand
tools, daily employed on the Works.
Daily Work Record: The Contractor shall provide
4
each day a record showing activities performed and
locations in which work has been carried out and any
other matter requested by the Engineer's Representative.
5
Monthly Report: The Contractor shall provide
monthly reports which summarize the daily and weekly
reports end deliver to the Engineer's Representat.ve not
later than one week following the end of each month.
6
Wages Books and Time Sheets: The Contractor
shall keep accurate and proper wage books and time
sheets showing wages paid to and time worked by
workmen and, when required, produce such wage books
and time sheets for inspection by the Engineer's
Representative. Separate records should be kept of
Omani end expatriate staff.
7
Climatic Conditions: The Contractor shall measure
and keep an accurate daily record of and submit to the
Engineer's Representative at the end of each week:
i.
Air temperatures: maximum and mnimum
ii.
Humidity
iii.
Rainfall: total in mm and hours.
1.1 0.3
Project Administration
Engineer's
Site
Meetings:
The
Engineer's
Representative will hold site meetings once a month or
more frequently if he deems necessary for the efficient
management of the Works and he will distribute minutes.
The Contractor shall attend all such meetings and secure
the attendance of Subcontractors and others if requested
by the Engineer's Representative.
2 Contractor's Site Meetings: The Contractor shall hold
such meetings as are necessary for co-ordination of
work and Subcontractors and review of progress.
3
Co-ordination of Trades and Subcontractors: The
Contractor shall co-ordinate the work of all trades and
Subcontractors so as to avoid delay and disruption or
abortive work. The Contractor shall provide all drawings.
dimensions and other information required for the
proper execution of subcontract works and of associated
builder's work and accept responsibility for the accuracy
and fitness of subcontract works.
4
Quality Control: The Contractor shall prepare and
submit for approval by the Engineer a proposal for the
quality control management of the project. This proposal
shall incorporate the requirements set out in B.S.5750 or
its equivalent and shall be incorporated into the
Procedures Manual and will form an integral part of the
Contractor's management procedures for the project.
This proposal shall include, but not be restricted to:
i.
Provision and maintenance of a quality

control program throughout the project,
ii.
Inspection and testing of products, both on

and off Site, by independent professional
inspection and testing companies,
iii.
Provision
of
equipment,
iv.
Verification of affidavits and certificates that

selected material meets the specified
standards,
v.
Maintenance
quality
of
documentation in accordance
various procedures identified
documents.
inspection
and
testing
control
with the
in these
5 Procedures Manual: The Contractor shall prepare and

agree with the Engineer a Procedures Manual for the
administration of the Project.
1.10.4
Progress Photographs/ Videos
The Contractor shall submit each month progress

photographs of at least five different subjects taken from
approved locations agreed by the Engineer. A minimum
of twenty photographs shall be taken each month and
five (5) colored gloss prints of each provided to the
Engineer.
2
Format: 200 x 250-mm smoothsurface color prints
on single-weight commercialgrade stock, enclosed
back to-beck in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for
standard ring binding.
3
Identification: On back of each print, provide an
applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the
following information:
i.
Name of Project
ii.
Name of Employer.
iii.
Name of Engineer.
iv.
Name of Contractor.
v.
Date photograph was taken.
vi.
Description of vantage point, indicating

location, direction (by compass point), and
1 11
~~
Ministry of Tl'&naport & Commaunlcat.Qna. OGRt-r
~~<:General
elevation or
applicable.
area
of
construction,
as
ii.
Concurrent Revlew:
Where concurrent
review of submittals by sub-consultants. the
Employer, or other parties is required, allow a
maximvm of thirty five (351 days for initial
review of each submittal of cross sections or
as-built drawings, end fourteen (141 days for
all other submissions Including shop
drawings or working drawings.
IIi.
If intermediate submittal is necessary,

process it in the same manner as the initial
submittal.
lv.
Allow Fourteen (14) days for processing each

re-submittal.
4
Digital Images:
Submit a complete set of
corresponding digital image electronic files with each
submittal of prints. Identify electronic media with date
photographs were taken.
Digital image files shall be for the Engineer's and
Employer s free and unrestricted use.
5
The Contractor shall, if requested by the Engineer.
submit progress videos as required.
1.10.5

made, for any part of Sub-section 1.10 except for the
progress photographs and videos. All other activities
and submittals are considered to be subsidiary to other
sections and the costs are deemed to be included in the
unit rates fo r other items stated in the Bill of Quantities.
2
Progress Photographs will be measured and paid
as an item at each month of the construction period at
the unit rate in the Bill of Quantities
3
Videos will be measured and paid as an item at
each month of the construction period at the rate in the
Bill of Quantities
3
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block
on each submittal for identification.
i.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared
each submittal on label or title block.
ii.
Provide a space approMimately 100 x 125 mm

on label or beside title block to record the
Contractor's review and approval markings
and actiol'l taken by the Engineer.
iii.
Include the following information on label for

processing and recording action taken:
a.
Contract name.
b.
The Employer's name.
c.
Date.
Provision of 5 sets of photos
(monthl
d.
Name and address of the Engineer.
ii.
Provision of 2 sets of videos (typel (month)
e.
Name and address of the Contractor.
f.
Name and address of su bcontractor.
g.
Name and address of supplier,
1.1 0.6
1.11
1.11.1
Submittals
General
Submittals Schedule: Submlt list of submittals and

time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities. Submittals shall include: shop/
workl ng drawings, as-built drawings, cross sections,
materials, testing, method statements and any other
required submittal in compliance with the Specifications
and other Contract Documents.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal
2
review. including time for re-submittals, as follows .
Time for review shall commence on the Engineer's
receipt of submittal.
i.
1-12
Initial Review: Allow a maximum of twenty

one {211 days for initial review of each
submittal of cross sections or a s-built
drawlngs, and seven (71 days for all other
submissions including shop drawings or
working drawings. Allow additional time if
processing must be de layed to permit
coordination wit h subsequent submittals.
The Engineer will advise the Contractor when
a submittal being processed must be delayed
for coordination.
h.
Name and address of manufacturer.
i.
Unique Identifier, including

number.
j.
Number and title

Specification Section.
k.
Drawing number and detail references,

as appropriate.
I.
Other necessary identification.
of
revision
appropriate
4
Deviations:
Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate and identify on submittals, deviations from the
Contract Documents.
5
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are
required for final submittal, and unless the Engineer
observes non-compliance with provisions of the Contract
Documents, i nitial submittal may serve as final submittal
i.
For submittals requiring concurret1t review.

submit one extra copy in addition to specified
number of copies to the Enginee r.
6
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually
and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal using a tra"smittal form attached to a
cover letter. The Engineer will discard, without review,
s ubmitt11ls received from sources other than the
Contractor.
Sultllnoto gf Oman
I.
Cover Letter:
On attached, numbered,
separate
sheeUsf,
prepared
on
the
Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, rev1s1ons
other than those requested by the Engineer
on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements of the Contract Documents,
Including minor variations and limitations.
Include the same label Information as the
related submittal.
a.
ii.
..,.,...........,. .,..
Include the Contractor's certification

stating that information submitted
complies with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
,~.""'~""'
b.
i.
Contract name.
b.
The Employer's name.
c.
Date.
d.
Destination (To :f.
e.
Source (From :f.
f.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer,

and supplier, as applicable.
g.
Category and type of submittal.
h.
Submittal purpose and description.
i.
Submittal and transmittal distribufon

record.
j.
Remarks.
k.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final

submittals
to
manufacturers.
subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, author;ties having
and
jurisdiction, and others as necessary for
performance of construction activities.
Show distribution on transmittal forms.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each

submittal, as fo lows, unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
Initial Submittal : Submit a preliminary

single copy of each submittal where
selection of particular characteristics is
required.
The Engineer will return
submittal with options selected.
Preparation:
Include
information, as applicable:
the
following
a.
Dimensions; in 51 units unless

otherwise indicated or directed.
b.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
c.
Schedules.
d.
Compliance with specified standards.
e.
Notation of coordination requirements.
f.
Notation of dimensions established by

field measurement.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns,

and similar fullsize drawings, submit shop
drawings on sheets at least A4 size, and no
larger than Al size. unless otherwise
approved.
iii.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each

submittal, as fellows:
Action Submittals
General: Prepare and submit action submittals

required by individual Spec'fication Sections.
Final Submittal: Submit four (4) copies,

unless otherwise indicated.
Submit
additional copies where copies are
required for operation and maintenance
manuals. The Engineer will retain two
copies; remainder will be returned.
Mark up and retain one returned copy
as a Record (As-Built) Document.
ii.
7
Use for Construction: Permit only final submrttals
with appropriate approved stamp, or other mark
indicating action taken by the Engineer, to be used in
connection with construction.
1.11.2
General>/".__. ;. .; ;.;
2
Shop and Work Drawings: Produce newly prepared,
contract-specific, information, drawn accurately to scale.
Shop drawings should not be based on reproductions of
the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
Transmittal Form: Use a form acceptable to

and approved by the Engineer. Provide
locations on form for the following
Information:
a.
a.
Initial Submittal:
Submit one ( 11
correctable, translucent, reproducible
print end one (1) blue- or black-line
print. The Engineer will return the
reproducible print.
b.
Final Submittal: Submit three (3) blue

or black-line prints, with one ( 1)
separate electronic file, format of which
will be advised by the Engineer, unless
otherwise indicated. Submit additional
prints where prints are required for
operation and maintenance manuals.
The Engineer will retain two (21 prints;
remainder will be returned. Mark up
and retain one returned print as a
Record (As-Built) Drawing with two (2)
electronic files en CO-Rom.
3
Subcontract list:
Prepare and submit a list
identifying subcontractor individuals or firms proposed
for principal portions of the Works, including those who
are to fabricate products or equipment to a special
design. Include the following Information in tabular
form:
i.
Name, address, and telephone number of

entity performing subcontract.
ii.
Number end title of related Specification

Section(s) covered by subcontract.
113
""'-..J/'.../
Mlnltrv ol Tranaport & Communlc.,tlone DGRlT
~
~<General
Mi.
1.11.3
Drawing number and detail references, as

appropriate, covered by subcontract.
Informational Submittals
General:
Prepare and submit informational
submittals required by other Specification Sections.
i.
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each

submittal, unless otherwise indicated. The
Eng' neer will not return copies.
ii.
Certificates and Certifications:

Provide a
notarized statement that includes signature of
the Contractor, testing agency. or design
for
preparing
professionel
responsible
certification. Certificates and certifications
shall be signed by an officer or other
Individual authorized to sign documents on
behalf of the company.
2
Qualification Data : Prepare written information that
demonstrates capabilities and experience o f firm or
person. Include fists of completed projects with project
names and addresses. names and addresses of
engi neers and employers, and other Information
specified.
3
Materiel Certificates: Prepare written statements
on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements.
4
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a
qualified testing agency, on testing egency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material
for compliance with requirements.
Prepare reports
5
Preconstruction Test Reports:
written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency' s
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests
performed before installation of product, for comprl8nce
with performance requirements.
6
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written
by a qualified testing agency. on testing agency's
standard form, Indicating and interpreting results of
compatibility tests performed before Installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
1.11.4
Review each submittal and check for compli ance

with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions.
Mark with approval stamp before
submitting to the Engineer.
2
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a
uniform, approval stamp. Include Contract name and
location, submittal number. Specification Section title
and number. name of reviewer, dat e of the Contractor's
approval. and statement certifying that submittal has
been reviewed, checked, coordinated and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.1 1.5
1 1
Engineer's Action
General: The Engineer will not revi ew submittals

that do not bear the Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without actio!\.
2
Engineers Action:
The Engineer's review is
limited only to checking con formance with information
given and the design concept expressed In the Contract
Documents. It is not conducted too- the purpose of
determining the accuracy and comple!eness of details,
dimensions or quantities, nor substantiating integrity or
compatibi lity. or confirmi ng instructions for Installation
or performance. The Engineer's approval does not in
any way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with specified provisions end the Contract
Document requirements.
3
Action Submittals: The Engineer will review each
submittal, make marks to Indicate corrections or
modifications required. and return it to the Contractor.
The Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action
stamp and wHI mark stamp appropriately to indicate
action taken, as follows;
i.
Final Unrestricted Release:

Where the
submittal is marked "APPROVED", the wort
covered by tile submittal may proceed
provided it complies w ith the Contract
Documents. Final acceptance of the wort will
depend on that compliance.
l i.
Final-but-Restricted Release:
Where the
submittal is marked APPROVED AS NOTED",
the work covered by the submittal may
proceed provided it complies with both the
Engineer's notations and corrections on the
submittal and the Conttact Documents. Final
acceptance of the work wiH depend on that
compliance.
Iii.
Returned for Re-submittal:

Where th11
submittal I s marked " NOT APPROVED, REVISE
AND RESUBMIT", do nat proceed with the
work covered by the submittal, including
purchase, fabrication, delivery, or other
activity for the product submitted. Revise or
prepare a new submittal according to the
Engineer's notations and corrections.
7
Field Test Reports: Prepare reportS written by a
qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, Indicating and Interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after
product is Installed in its final location, for compliance
with requirements.
8
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports
Indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies w ith requirements. Base reports on evaluation
of tests performed by manufacturer and w itnessed by a
qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
Contractor's Review and Approval
iv.
Rejected: Where the submittal is marked

"NOT APPROVED, RESUBMIT" or "REJECTED",
do not proceed w ith the work covered by the
submittal. Prepare a new submittal for a
product that complies with the Contract
Documents.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents

4
will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
1.11.6
2
Record Drawings:
drawings as fo~ lows:
ii.
Submit copies of record
Initial Submittal: Submit two sets of plots

from record CAD drawing files and the
original marked-up record prints.
The
Engineer will initial and date one set of plots
and mark whether general scope of changes,
additional information recorded, and quality
of drafting are acceptable. The Eng'neer wHI
return one set of plots and record prints
together with
review
comments,
for
completing, printing, binding, and final
submittal.
After incorporating the
Final Submittal:
Engineer's initial submittal review comments,
submit original marked-up record prints set.
Submit sets of as-built drawings as follows:

One [1) set electronic format: [in CD-ROM)
One (1 I set of PDF format: (In CD-ROM I
One (1) bound sets of prints (A1 Size)
One (1 I set of any other document/report about the
project,
Test
results
and
any
other
i nformationldocuments.
4
Record Specifications: Submit two [2) copies of
record specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications.
5
Miscellaneous Records: Submit two [2) sets of
original miscellaneous records.
1.11.7
i.

Provide as-built drawings, record
drawings and record specifications and

miscellaneous records as specified
[Lump Sum)
1.12
Control of Materials and

Standards for Sampling and
Testing
1.12.1
Storage of Materials
Record (As-Built) Drawings
Within 1 month of completion of each section of

the Works, the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the
relevant drawings showing all details of permanent
works as constructed. The Engineer will approve these
as 'As- Built' drawings or instruct corrections as
appropriate.
i.
1.11.8

made, for any part of Sub-section 1.11 except for As
Built Drawings. All other submittals are considered to be
subsidiary to other sections and the costs are deemed to
be included in the rates for other items stated in the Bill
of Quantities
Materials shall be so stored as to assure the

preservation of their quality end suitability for the Works.
Stored materials, approved before storage, may again be
Inspected prior to their use in the Works. Stored
materials shall be located so es to facilitate their prompt
inspection.
2
Where materials ere stockpiled on Government or
private property, such sites shall be abandoned
immediately upon consumption of all stockpiled
materials and the natural surface sha II be restored as far
as practice ble to the origins I condition by the Contractor
end to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.12.2
Handling Materials
All materials shall be handled in such manner as to

preserve their quality and suitability for the Works.
Aggregates shall be transported to the Works in vehicles
which are constructed to prevent loss or undue
segregation of materials after loading and unload"ng.
1.12.3
Materials Supplied by Employer
The Contractor shall be responsible for all materials

furnished by the Employer and shall make good any
shortages or deficiencies, from any cause whatsoever, or
any damage which may occur, after delivery of such
materials.
1.12.4
local Materi al Sources
When material sources are not designated on the

Drawings, or in other documents, the Contractor shall be
responsible for t ocating and providing suitable materia Is
from approved sources.
2
Any information provided In the tender documents
about sources of local materials is considered as a
guideline only and does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility in respect of investigation and supply of
suitable materiels as specified.
Materials, regardless of their source, shall not be
3
incorporated in the Works until approved by the
Engineer.
2
The AsBu'lt Drawings shall be measured and paid
as Lump Sum [LS.) in the Bill of Quantities.
l -1ti
~~
Ministry of Trnnaport & Communication
DGRLT
~~<General
1.12.5
Sources of Supply and Quality

Requirements
All materials, including manufactured articles, and

machinary incorporated in the Works, shall meet aD
specified quality requirements and be approved by the
Engineer. Priority will be given to locally produced
Omani material, where applicable.
2
The Contractor shall, before placing any purchase
order for any materials intended for incorporation in the
Works, submit for approval a complete description of all
such materials, names of the firms from whom he
proposes to purchase them and copies of all test reports
verifying conformity with the provislons of the
Specifications. Materials shall not be ordered without
tha approval of the Enginear. When diracted by the
Engineer or otherwise specified, the Contractor shall
submit suitable samples for approval.
3
The Engineer shall have the right to retest all
materials which have been tested and accepted at the
source of supply after delivery to the Site and prior to
incorporation into the Works and to reject any such
materials which are clearly defective or. when retested.
do not conform with the Specificat ions.
1.12.6
Certificates of Guarantee and

Production Plant Inspections
All shipments of materials shall be accompanied by

a Manufacturer's Certificate of Guarantee or Test
Certificate from an approved independent qualified
laboratory approved by the Engineer. A ll certified
materials delivered to the Site shall undergo additional
laboratory testing if required by the Engineer.
Issuance of an i nvalid or erroneous Certificate of
2
Guarantee shall be just cause for rejectiol'lo of the
materials without further testi ng.
1.12.7
Sampling and Testing Procedures
1.12.7. 1
Sampling
1
Samples of all materials shall be submined to the
Engineer for inspection, testing and acceptance before
incorporati on in the Works. All m aterials being used will
be subject to l nspection, testing, or rejection at any time
prior to such incorporation.
2
Where untested and unaccepted materials have
been used without approval of the Engineer, such use
shall be at the Contractor's risk and the work may be
rej ected by the Engineer.
1.12.7.2
Source Tests
All source samples shall be taken by the Con1ractor

in the presence of the Engineer, using approved
sampling procedures. All source approval tests shall be
performed under the supervision of the Engineer or,
when so specified, by an independent laboratory
1-115
approved by the Engineer and

Contractor.
engaged by the
2
After approval of any source of materials, the
Contractor shall produce from such source only to the
extent that materials produced are of substantially the
same quality as the approved samples.
3
The El'lgineer w ill period'cally oreler retesting of
previously approved sources to verify that they continue
to conform to the Specifications and may order retesting
at the same or at a different laboratory from the one
If
performing the original source approval tests.
retesting Indicates that a previously approved source no
l onger conforms with the Specifications. the Contractor
shall forthwith cease production from such source.
1.12.7.3
Quality Control Tests
Quality control tests for materials shall be

performed by the Contractor prior to submitting any
materials to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor
shall submit details to the El'lgineer of his quality control
testi ng program.
2
The Engineer mey declare the Contractor's qual ity
contra! testing program unacceptable i f frequent
rejections of submitted materials occur when subjected
to the project control t ests.
1.12.7.4
Control Tests
All control sampl es shall be taken jointly by the

Engi neer and the Contractor. Tests shall be performed
in the site laboratory, or in situ as appropriate, under the
supervision of the Engineer.
2
The Engineer may order retesting of any material i f
t here has been a significant delay 11'1 the construction
operations or i f he determines that the material has
deteriorated since its origi nat acceptance.
Material
which does not conform to the Specifications will be
rejected and shall be removed from the Works and
replaced or corrected by the Contractor. The Engineer
may order additional testing t o ascertain the extent of
unacceptable material.
1.12.7.6
Check Tests
The Engineer may periodicany order check tests to

verify the accuracy of project contra! testing and
equipment. The Engineer may direct that check tests be
performed by qualified persons other than those
normally responsi ble f or project control testing, or he
may direct that the sampl es be sent to the Employer's
central laboratory or to an approved Independent
laboratory for testing.
2
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all
necessary test report forms and expendable materials
requlfed to perform all required tests. Copies of all test
results will be issued to the Contractor.
Sultarulto of Omen
B d2aCOI'Olru
General)/~------.
1.12.7.6
Precedence of Materials and Testing

Specificefons
All references to methods of testing or

specifications of AASHTO, ASTM and others will be
deemed to refer to the latest methods of testing as
specified in the Contract Documents.
2
Unless otherwise specified, AASHTO methods of
sampling and testing shall be adopted where available.
In the case of absence of an appropriate AASHTO
specification, the ASTM or BS specification shall govern.
1.12.8
Unacceptable Materials
All materials not conforming to the requirements of

the Specifications at the time they are used will be
rejected and shall be removed immediately from the Site
unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
If defect from rejected materiels, has been
2
corrected. such remed[ed materials, shall not be used
until Engin&er's approval has been given.
1.12.9
No separate measurement or payment will be made, for

any part of Sub-section 1.1 2, which work Is considered to
be subsidiary to other sections. The cost of the work is
deemed to be included in the rates for other items In the
Bill of Quantities.
1.13
1.13.1
Contractor's Plant and

Equipment
General
Plant and equipment used on the Works shall be of

sufficient size and in such mechanical condition es to
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents end
shall be available for use when required by the Engineer.
The Engineer may order removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory plant or equipment.
2
Wherever plant or equipment of a particular size or
type is specified, the Contractor may request permission
to use an alternative type in place of that specified. In
such cases, the Contractor shall furnish evidence to the
Engineer thet the production of the plant or equipment
proposed is at least equal to that of the specified type.
1.13.2
Contractor's Schedule of Plant and

Equipment
The Contractor shall submit together with h's T&nder,

a detailed schedule of the numbers and types of plant
and equipment which he proposes to use on Site to
cerry out the Works. The schedule shall contain full
details for each item, including type, manufacturer,
model, id&ntification number, veer of manufacture,
number of years in use, and, for all new and previously
used items, the manufacturer's brochures, catalogues

and specifications.
1.13.3
Provision and Use of Plant and

Equipment
The Contractor shall furnish all plant and

equipment listed in his schedule and necessary for
construction of the Works. Such plant and equipment
shall be delivered to the Site, inspected, and approved
by the Engineer prior to commencement of the particular
work for which it is intended Any plant or equipment.
or part thereof, which becomes excessively worn or
defective shall be promptly repaired or replaced, as
required by the Engineer.
2
The Contractor shall not remove from the Site and
shall not use for other projects any approved plant or
equipment without the permission of the Engineer.
1.13.4
No separate measurement or payment will be made, for

any part of Subsection 1.13, which work Is considered to
be subsidiary to other sections. The cost of the work is
deemed to be included in the unit rates for other items In
the Bill of Quantities.
1.14
Contractor's Temporary Works

and Services
1.14.1
Temporary Facilities
1.14.1.1
General
The Contractor shell provide all Temporary Works

and services and Contractor's Equipment and tools
required for the efficient and safe execution of the Works,
including but not limited to:
i.
Temporary roads, hard standings, sleeper

tracks and the like.
ii.
Temporary fences, gates and barriers.
iii.
Temporary offices, stores,

latrines and compounds.
iv.
Scaffold, ladders, hoists, crenes and the like.
v.
Temporary screens, chutes. coverings, roofs

and rainwater pipes for protection of the
Works and personnel.
vi.
Transport and vehicles on and off Site.
vii.
Fixed and movable mechanical plant and

equipment.
mess rooms,
viii.
Smalltools.
ix.
Temporary water and power supplles and

site lighting.
x.
Temporary drainage.
2
Locations: The Engineer's approval shall be
obtained for the intended locations of all spoil heaps,
Temporary Works and services.
1-17
Ret.
Title
~geNo.
2.6.3.5
Drainage Blanket
2.6.3.6
Subgrade Construction on Sabkha

and Gypsum Rich Soils
SubgrMfe Construction on top
~-14
2.6.3 :7
o~DuneSand
Method of MHSUrement
215
2-15
Bnlt of P-vment
Itema In the Bill of Quantftl
2115
216
2.6.4
2.8.5
2.6.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.2.1
2.7.2.2
2.7.2.3
2.7.2.4-
Excavation and Backfilling

for Structures
Delcripdon
Elccevlltlon
Genetal
2~14
2-15
2-115
2-15
Temporary Support System
215
2-16
Excavation fOf Major Structures
216
Excavation for Box Culverts, Pipe

Culverts and Miscellaneous Structuru 2-16
2.7.3
2.7.3.1
2.7.3.2
BackfiUlng
Genetal
2-17
2 17
Backfilling for Box Culveru, Pipe

Gulverts and Miscellaneous Structures 2-18
2.7.4
Method of MHSUr.ment
2.7.6
2.7.8
Ba1T1 of Payment
Items in the Bill of Ouantitl
2.8
Earthwork for Pipe Trenches
219
2-19
2-19
2-19
2.8.1
DeiGription
2-19
2.8.2
2!8.2.1
Materials
2.8.3
2.8.3. 1
2.8.3.2
2.8.3.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.8
eon.trudlon
220
22o
2-20
2-20
Beckfill Material
Excavation for Pipe Trenches
Backfilling
2-21
Restoration of Surfaces
221
ethod of MNSUrernent
Basis of P.-,ment
lterna In tfie Bill of Quantftf
2-~1
2-21
2-22
Sult<mato of Omnn, Stor>d.lrd Spc<lfiellons lor Rood
e. Bold;o Con:tAAtiot
Eanhworks)
2.1
Clearing and Grubbing
2.1.3
2.1.1
Description
Clearing and grubbing is measured in square meters

of the cleared area within the limits described in It em 1 of
Clause 2.1 .1 above and approved by the Engineer.
This Sub-section describes removal and satisfactory

disposal of all vegetation, surface debris and scattered
stones end rocks within the limits of the actual road width
(including the toes of fill and cut slopes and an additional
5m wide band from both sides). easement areas and
borrow pits.
2
Removal of structures and similar obstructions and
removal of utilities are specified In Sub-section 2.2
"Removal of Structures and Obstructions".
2.1.2
Construction Requirements
The Contractor shall set out the approved

construction limits and the Engineer will designate all
trees, shrubs, plants, vegetation, etc and other items that
are to remain within the right-of-way (ROW).
The
Contractor shall carefully preserve all such items from
damage or defacement.
Trees to be removed and
delivered for replanting shall be carefully handled.
2
All surface objects, trees, stumps, roots, stones and
rocks (up to 0.2 cu.m. or 500 kg individual size or weight),
and other protruding obstructions not designated to be
retained shall be cleared or grubbed to ground level. Nonperishable solid objects (such as boulders, rocks, concrete
blocks. etc.) which will be a minimum of 2m below the
sub-grade or finished ground level may be left
undisturbed at the Engineer's discretion. If such nonperishable objects are encountered wit hin 2m below the
subgrade or finished ground level, they will be removed
and considered as unsuitable material, paid under
Unclassified E)(cavation.
Stump holes and other holes from which
3
obstructions are removed within the limits of construction,
shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted in
accordance with Sub-section 2.5 - "Embankments". Small
holes that are inaccessible to compaction I tamping
equipment shall be filled and tamped manually using a
steel rod with e 10-15cm diameter steel disc attached to its
end.
4
Perishable mat erial shall be disposed of or burned
under the constant care of competent watchmen at such
times and in such a manner that any vegetation or other
items designated to remain in the ROW, or other adjacent
property, will not be jeopardized. Burning shall be carried
out in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances.
Mat11rlals, stones, rocks, and debris which cannot be
5
burned and perishable materials, shall be removed from
the ROW and disposed of at dumping areas off the Site,
approvl!d by the concerned authorities, provided
permission of the respective property owners has been
obtained in writing to dump such materials on t heir land.
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements
with property owners for obt aining such written
permission at his own expense.
Method of Measurement
2
Trees with a trunk diameter 300mm or more when
measured 750mm above existing ground level are
measured by the number removed and delivered to the
Employer or disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
2.1.4
Basis of Payment
The area of completed and accepted clearing and

grubbing work measured as provided for above, will be
paid at the unit rates steted in the Bill of Quantities. which
rates shall be full compensation for labor, equipment and
other items necessary for completion of the work..
Removal of trees with trunk 300mm diameter or
2
greater will be paid for by the number removed as stated
above. Removal of trees with trunk less than 300mm
diameter is deemed to be included in the rate for clearing
end grubbing
Rates for ell clea ring and grubbing and tree removal
3
shall include for filling holes and depressions with
material as specified
2.1.5
i.
ii.

Clearing and grubbing
Removal and delivery or disposal of trees of
300mm trunk diameter or greater
2.2
Removal of Structures and

Obstructions
2.2.1
Description
This Sub-section describes the removal, wholly or In

part, and satisfactory disposal of all buildings, fences,
structures, abandoned pipelines, and any other
obstructions, es show n on the Drawings or directed by t he
Engineer, which are not designated or permitted to remain,
Including salvaging of designated materiels and backfilling
the resulting trenches, holes and pits.
2
The Contractor shall e)(amine the Site and record for
himself all obstructions and utilities before the
commencement of the Works.
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
General
The Contractor shall raze, remove and dispose of all

buildings, foundat ions, structures, fences and other
obstructions, any portions of which are on the ROW,
e)(cept utilities and items for which other arrangements for
removal have been made. All designated salvageable
material shall be removed, without causing unnecessary
damage, and in sections or pieces which may be readily
2-1
~~
M;nicry of Trnnport & Communlcot;orift OGRLT
~~<::earthworks
transported, and shall be stored by the Contractor at

approved locations, for later use or possession of others.
2
Unusable perishable material shall be destroyed.
Non-perishab'e material may be disposed of off the Site,
provided permission of the respective property owners
has been obtained in writing to dump such materials on
their land.
3
Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall
be f l ied to the level of the surrounding ground and, if
within the prism of construction, shall be compacted to
the type of compaction within the range for the adjacent
roadway embankment as specified in Sub-section 2.5 'Embankments'.
Salvaged pipe culverts and other re-usable materials
4
shall be stored at accessible approved locations on Site
and shall become the property of the Employer.
2.2.2.2
Removal of Bridges, Culverts and Ditches
1
Bridges. culverts and other drainage structures in
locations traversed by traffic shall not be removed until
arrangements. detours and traff<e management plans have
been made by the Contractor and approved by ROP to
maintain the flow of traffte.
2
Substructures in watercourses shall be removed
down to the level of the nature! stream bed. Those parts
outside the stream shall be removed to 300 mm below
natu ral ground surface. Where such portions of existing
structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new
structure, they shall be removed to the extent necessary to
accommodate construction of the proposed structure.
3
Steel bridges and timber bridges, designated to be
salvaged shall be dismantled without causing unnecessary
damage. Steel members shall be match marked, unless
this requirement is w aived by the Engineer. All salvaged
material shall be stored as p reviously specified for reuse
or possession of others.
Blasting or other operations necessary for removal of
4
existing structures or other obstructions, and which may
damage new construction in the vicinity. shall be
completed prior to commencing the new construction.
Explosives shall be used only as permitted by the
appropriate security authorit ies and shall be approved by
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall observe the
requirements of Section 1, Sub-section 1.9, Clause 1.9.2
for all b' asting operations
5
The Contractor sha" carry out a structural survey of
all the existing buildings and structures located within the
blasting influence distance. The survey shall include
detailed photographic records for the adjacent buildings
and structures before and after blasting, in order to avoid
latet claims by public.
2.2.2.3
Removal of Pipes
1
All p ipes unless otherwise directed shall be removed
and precautions taken to avoid breaking or damaging the
pipes. The Contractor shall exercise utmost care during
the remove! of pipes so as to avoid unnecessary damage.
22
2.2.2.4
Removal of Walls. Mortared and Loose Riprap,

Gabions, Rocks and Boulders
Masonry walls, mortared and loose riprap, gabions

and accumulated stones. large rocks and boulders of
ind;vidual size greater than 0.2 cu.m.or greater than 500 kg
in weight which lie within the limits of the Works, shall be
removed and disposed of as directed.
2.2.2.5
Removal of Fertees and Gates
1
When fences and gates enclosing pasture land or
farm land are to be removed, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer sufficiently in advance to permit the property
owner reasonable time to construct alternative fencing or
make other suitable arrangements.
2.2.2.6
Removal of Wells, Shafts and Falajs
1
Existing wells and shafts. abandoned or active, which
lie within the limits of the Works, shall be dismantled,
backfilled. end completed. A ll salvaQeable materials shall
be removed and stored It approved locations on S~e . All
sa'vageable material shall become the property of the
Wells shaD be filled to the level of the
Employer.
surrounding ground and, if within the prism ol
construction, shall be compacted after obtaining the
Engineer's permission to the type of compaction within
the range designated.
2.2.2.7
Removal of Utilities
1
The Contractor shall liaise with the Engineer and
shall notify all Utility Authorities and co-operate and
coordinate w ith them in respect of removals and
relocations.
2
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings,
realignment or relocation of active utilities will be to the
approval of the respective authorities and such work shall
be coordinated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
perform the necessary coordination with the relevant
utility authorities ahead of time in order to avoid
unnecessary delay to the Works.
3
The removal of all disconnected or abandoned
utilities w ithin the ROW shall be performed by the
Contractor as directed by the Engineer, unless the utility
authorities indicate their intention to carry out such
removal and salvaging of materials, fittings, parts, etc.
4
The Contractor shall liaise with the Engineer and
shall advise each affected utility authority in writing of his
proposed construction schedule and shall arrange for
inspection, disconnection or interruption of services by the
utility authorities as appropriate.
5
The Contractor shall be responsible for supporting
and protecting realigned utilities and existing utilities that
are to remain in place, for the duration of the Contract and
shall provide all necessary Temporary Works in this
respect, all in compliance with Section 1, Sub-section 1.8,
Clause 1.8.3 ... ~and the requirements of the relevant utility
owner. Any damage caused to utilities and attributable to
the Contractor shall be repaired at his expense.
6
All excavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Subsections 2.3 -'Road Excavation'. 2.5'Embankments' and Subsection 2.7 - 'Excavation and
Backfilling for Structures', as appropriate.
2.2.2.8
Removal of Existing Pavement
The Contractor shall remove, wholly or in part. as

shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer,
existing asphalt, tiles and/or concrete pavement layers,
and any granular or stabilized base courses., including
disposal of debris and salvaging of designated materials,
and backfilling the resulting holes where and as instructed
by the Engineer.
2
The Contractor shall examine the Site and record all
obstructions and utilities that may be affected by removal
of existing pavements at the commencement of the Works.
3
The Contractor shall raze, remove and dispose of old
pavement of different types, (i.e. down to the bottom of
the base coursel or as directed by the Engineer, for the
portions which are within the limit of Works.
4
Unusable perishable material shall be disposed of in
accordance with the applicable laws and ordinances. Nonperishable material may be disposed of off the Site.
provided permission of the concerned authorities and/or
the respective property owner has been obtained in
writing to dump such materials on their land.
5
Cavities left by pavement removal shall be filled to
the level of the surrounding ground and, if within the
prism of construction, shall be compacted to the type of
compaction specified in Subsection 2.6 - 'Subgrade
Construction'.
6
The Contractor shall be responsible for supporting
and protecting existing Utilities that are to remain in place,
for the duration of the Contract and shall provide all
necessary Temporary Works in this respect. Any damage
caused to utilities and attributable to the Contractor shall
be repaired at his ellpense.
will not be paid for directly but will be considered as

subsidiary work rel ated to other items in the Bill of
Quantities.
2.2.4
Basis of Payment
The quantities of completed and accepted work,

measured as provided for above, will be paid for at the
relevant unit rates stated in the Bill of Quantities which
rates shall be full compensation for equipment, tools,
labor, materials, transporting end dumping, and for other
items necessary for the proper completion of the work.
2.2.5

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
lli.
xii.
xiii.
7
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall
ensure that pavement removal operations are completed
without applying extreme vibration and heavy loading that
might damage the existing underground utilities.
xiv.
Removal of Ellisting Road Furniture
xv.
2.2.2.9
Road Furniture items such as curbs, tiles, steel and

concrete safety barriers, lighting poles, sign boards, etc.
which lie within the limits of the Works, shall be removed
and disposed of as directed.
xvii.
2.2.3
llviii.
Removal of structures and obstructions is measured

by number, length, area or volume as appropriate for the
relevant work, unless Item 2.2.3 (21. applies. The rates
shall include in full for the removal, storage, protection
and disposal of the structure or obstruction, including
If the Bill of Quantities does not contain separate
2
items for removal of structures and obstructions, this work
xvi.
xix.
xx.
xxi.
xxii.
Removal of elCisting building (type and

descriptionl,
(Nr. or Length I
Area I Volume as appropriatel.
Removal of reinforced concrete (type,
location, and dimensionsl,
(cu.ml.
Removal of mass concrete (type, location
and dimensionsl.
( cu.ml.
Removal of prestressed concrete (type.
location and dimensionsl.
( cu.m.l
(lin.m.l
Removal of curbs (Typel.
Removal of Tiles (Type and Sizel. (sq.ml.
Removal of pipe culverts (type
and diameterl.
(lin.m.l
Removal of existing pavement
(cu.ml.
(description and type),
Removal of reusable reed studs, (nrl.
Removal of steel safety barrier including
post and foundations (dimensions and
(lin.ml.
Typel,
Removal of concrete safety barrier
including foundations
(dimensions end Typal.
(lin.m.l
Removal of sign boards including
post and foundations (sizel,
(nrl.
Removal of Floodwey marker posts and
foundations (sizel.
(nr.l
Removal of reusable steel safety barrier
including post and foundations
(dimensions and Typel.
(lin.m.l
Removal of reusable concrete safety
barrier including foundations (dimensions
and Type I,
(lin.ml.
Removal of reusable sign board including
post and foundations (sizel,
(nr.l
Removal ol reusable Floodway marker
posts including foundations (sizel. (nrl.
Removal of drainage protection
(sq.m.l
works (typal.
Removal of existing fences and
gates (description and typeI.
(lin.m.l
Removal of existing block and
masonry wells (Size and Typal
(cu.ml
Removal of ditches (Type end
widthl.
(lin.ml.
Removal of bridges (dimensions.
2-3
~~
Mlnit.rv of Trnnaport & Communicot;an .. OGRLT
~~<:earthworks
xxiii.
xxiv.
xxv.
xxvi.
type and description)

(nr).
Removal of rocks and boulders
larger than 0.2cu.m. or 500 kg
(description),
(cu.m).
Removal of wells and shafts {description
and location),
(nr).
Removal of sand dunes (location
and description)
(cu.rn.)
Removal of Light Poles including
cabling and foundation {Size),
(nr).
2.3
Roadway Excavation
2.3.1
Description
il.
iii.
No excavation material shall be wasted without

3
w ritten permission from the Engineer.
4
If the Contractor chooses to excavate suitable
material to waste or put it to other uses, and replace it by
borrow excavation for emblnkment areas, this shall be
undertaken at no extra cost to the Employer.
5
This Subsection describes excavation in the cut

sections of the roadway, including watercourses, ditches
and wadi relocations {but excluding borrow pits and
structural excavation) an as and where shown on the
Drawings. and hauling the ellcavated materl4l either to
locations for roadway embankments or to stockpiles or to
waste.
2
The work also includes any necessary elCC8vations
outside the ROW ordered by the Engineer to safeguard
and protect the Works, including diversion of ellisting
wadi channels; ellcavatlon of materials obstructing or
impairing the flow along stream channels; and excavation
of unstable materials which may slide or encroach into
ditches or onto the ROW. Disposal of all such excavated
materials shell be as instructed by the Engineer.
2.3.2
Classification of Roadway Excavation
Road excavation shall be considered as 'Unclassified

Excavation' which includes all materials encoul'ltered of
any nature including silts, clays, sand, gravel, granular
materials, all cohesive and fractured, jointed cohesionless
materials and/or massive rock and unsuitable material.
2
Any information concerning properties of the soil
which may be shown on the Drawings, in the Bill of
Quantities, In supplementary reports, or as a result of
discussion with the Engineer or others shall be considered
as gratis and shall not be a basis for the Contractor's
determineron of his bid prices.
2.3.3
2.3.3.1
Utilization of Excavated M;tterials
All materials removed from the excavation shall be

used in the formation of the embankment, sub-grade,
shoulder, dykes, and at such other places as directed.
unless it Is declared unsuitable and ordered to be wasted
by the Engineer.
Unsui table material shall include:
I.
Unstable materials incapable of being
compacted to the specified density using
mechanical compaction methods at optimum
moisture content for the equipmenl being used
for compact' on.
2...
Material too wet to be compacted and where

drcumstances prevent suitable in place drying
prior to incorporation into the work.
Materials which are otherwise unsuitable for
use in or under the embankment
Excavated rock which i s not i mmediately suitable for
i ncorporatlon in the works can either be broken down to

acceptable sizes or wasted at Contractor's own expense. If
such material Is wasted or used In concrete, granular
subbase, aggregate base, asphalt mixtures or any other
works, the Contractor shall replace it by borrow
excavation for embankment at no extra cost to the
Employer.
6
Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer, salvaged materials such as ellistlng concrete,
bituminous or other pavements shan. be stockpiled for a
specific purpose or for future use. Such materials shall be
excavated and handled in a manner that will exclude
forei gn or undesirable material. Stockpiles shall be neatly
formed and maintained in an approved manner.
7
Where specified or directed by the Engineer, suitable
topsoil material shall be stockpiled during excavation
operations and shall subsequently be spread 1nd
compacted on embankment slopes and elsewhere as
directed, to facilitate re-growth of vegetation.
2.3.3.2
Drainage of Excavation Areas
During construction, surfaces in excavation areas

shall be adequately drained at all times. Side ditches or
gutters emptying from cut to embankment shall be so
constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by
erosion.
2
The Contractor shall, at an early stage of the Works,
provide adequate drainage by scheduling ditch and other
construction so as to prevent saturation or erosion of
embankments and cut slopes. All such drainage ctches
and construction grades shall be cleaned and trimmed at
r8Qular intervals and when directed to maintain an
unobstructed runoff of stormwater during construction.
3
Damage to the Works attributable to saturation or
erosion of slopes during the period of execution through
failure to provide adequate drainage shall be repaired by
the Contractor at his own expense.
4
Whenever groundwater is encountered which may
adversely affect construction, the Contractor shall advise
the Engineer who will evaluate the situation and order
necessary remedia l measures.
2.3.3.3
Obliteration of Disused Roadways
Obliteration of roadways which are no longer in use

shall include filling of all ditches and rough grading of the
Sultanata af Omnn.
Stn~rd Spe<lflcotion
for Rod & Brld;e CoR>Iruttlon 2010
Earthworks)
old roadway to produce within the ROW a neat and well

drained ground surface.
2.3.3.4
for potential failure planes and the necessary remedial

measures shall be taken, as approved by the Engineer, at
the Contractor's expense.
Rock Blasting
2.3.3.5
Rock blasting explosives may comprise a diversity of
systems. including dynamite explosives. watergels. slurry
explosives and slurry blasting agents, pumpable blasting
agents, emulsion explosives and aluminized explosives.
Whenever Instructed by the Engineer, blasting shall be
carried out alter pre-splitting the rock mass by using small
localized charges in pre-drilled holes.
2
When blasting of rock slopes is carried out, a
reasonably uniform face shall be left, regardless of
whether or not the excavation is carried beyond the
specified side slopes as shown on the Drawings. All
breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as
directed. A dust control system shall be designated by the
Contractor and shall be implemented during rock blasting
after obtaining the Engineer's approval.
3
All drilling and blasting shall be done in such a
manner as will most nearly complete the excavation to the
required grade lines, and produce the least possible
disturbance of the material to be left in place. Blasting by
means of drill holes. tunnels, or any other methods shall
be entirely at the Contractor's risk. Explosive materials
shall be stored and kept under the constant survei lienee of
the Royal Oman Police.
4
Where necessary or directed, the Contractor shall
provide heavy mesh blasting mats or controlled blasting
for protection of persons, properties, and the Works. If, In
the opinion of the authorities and the Engineer, blasting
would be dangerous to persons or adjacent structures, or
is being carried out in an unsafe or unacceptable manner,
the Engineer may prohibit blasting and order the rock to
be excavated by other means.
5
During explosion works, traffic shall be suspended
from the routes linking to the Site and all diversions and
other arrangements shall be carried out in full
coordination with the Royal Oman Police. The Contractor
sha II secure approval of his schedule for such
interruptions and his proposed methods for safeguardng
the public and property.
6
Excessive blasting will
not
be
permitted.
Overbreakage and the backfi IIi ng thereof shall be at the
Contractor's expense. Any material outside the approved
cross section limits which may be shattered or loosened
because of blasting shall be removed by the Contractor at
his own expense. All rock slopes with loose material shall
be scaled by w orkmen and all loose material removed at
7
Backfilling of overbreakage shall be carried out as
directed, using approved soil or crushed materials or other
special aggregate or cyclopean concrete, as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Undrained
pockets shall not be left in the surface of the rock.
8
Followi ng blasting, cleaning and scaling rock slopes,
the face, benches and back of the slope shall be inspected
Excavation of Unsuitab' e Material
Unsuitab)e materials are materia' s that do not

comply with the requirements for suitable materials as
descr'bed under Clause 2.5.2 below.
2
Where excavation to finished grades and cross
sections exposes unsuitable material in the sub-grade,
slopes or ditch inverts, etc the Engineer may require the
Contractor to remove the unsuitable material and backfill
the excavated areas using approved material.
The
Contractor shall plan his operations so that necessary
cross section measurements are taken before such backfill
is placed.
3
Unsuitable material shall be disposed off as directed
Wasted unsuitable material shall not be deposited on any
cropland.
4
When the Contractor is directed to excavata
unsuitable material below the surface of the original
ground in fill areas, other than that required for clearing
and grubbing, the depth to which unsuitable material shall
be removed will be determinad by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall plan the excavation so that cross sections
are taken before and after material has been removed.
2.3.3.6
Slopes, Sub-grade and Ditches
All excavated slopes, subgrada end ditches shall be

finished true to l ines, grades and cross sections as shown
on the Drawings.
2
Slopes, except in massive rock or other material
which requira special treatment, shall be trimmed to
slopes not steeper than the specified slope angles and
rounded at top and bonom to a smooth profile to blend in
with the adjacent terrain. Material shall not be loosened
beyond the specified slope lines. High cut areas shall
continuously be monitored by an engineering geologist or
a geotechnical engineer.
3
In cuts where earth overlays a rock formation, slopes
shell ba benched in an approved manner.
4
Ditches of all types shall be excavated and trimmed
neatly in conformity with the specified grades and cross
sections. All projecting rock, stumps, roots or similar shall
be removed. Ditches include side ditches, interception
ditches in the berm of cut slopes, furrow ditches, irrigation
ditches, wadi relocations, etc.
5
Where the sub-grade is composed of rock as defined
in Sub section 2.6 - 'Sub-grade Construction', it shall be
undercut to a depth of 200 mm below top of sub-grade to
allow for subsequent placing and compaction of the
leveling sub-grade layer in accordance with Sub-section
2.6 - 'Sub-grade Construction', paragraph 2.6.3.1.
6
The sub-grade in cut, where the soil is unsuitable for
retention as the sub-grade layer, shalf be sub-excavated to
a depth of 200 mm below top of sub-grade to allow for
subsequent placing and compaction of the sub-grade layer.
~~
Mlnletry of Trnnaport & Communlcntlon OGRLT
~~<Earthworks
If the material of the sub-grade is suitable for retention as

sub-grade layer then it shall be scarified to the required
depth, watered and compacted in accordance with Section
2.6 - 'Sub-grade Construction', paragraph 2.6.3.1.
The Engineer will periodically check all or any pan of

the work, to determine conformance to the correct lines,
grades and elevations. Tolerances on finished sub-grade
levels and on levels of the surface at the underside of the
subgrede layer shall be as specified in Sub-section 2.6 ' Sub-grade Construction', Paragraph 2.6.3.3.
8
In cases where rock or soil excavations reveal that
the adopted cut s!opes are not suitable and If failures
occur during or after comp"etion of the excavation works
and while the Contractor is still on Site, the Engineer may
request the Contractor to re-excavate according to the
newly established cut s'opes, the extra work w ill be
measured and valued as Unclassified Excevatlon at the
same rate given in the Contract. However, in such case,
the Contractor may submit a proposal for any other
alternative solution for the stability of the cut slopes, for
the Engineer's apprafsal and final decision.
2.3.3.7
Unstable Materials outside Right-of-Way
Materials outside the ROW or ditch slopes which, In

the opinion of the Engineer, are potentially unstable and
liable to slide or encroach into the ROW or into the ditches.
shall be excavated end disposed of as specified for
unsuitable mater,.l, unless it is approved for use as
embankment fill.
2.3.3.8
Disposal of Unsuitable and Surplus Material
Unsuitable and surplus materials disposed of within

approved areas shall be spread, leveled and shaped as
directed so as to present a neat and t idy appearance. No
materials shall be disposed of in such a way as to
adversely affect natural drainage courses or to cause
damage to the highway or adjacent public or private
property.
2
If approved by the Employer, Government land may
be used for disposal to the maximum extent practicable. If
private land is used for disposal, the Contractor shall
secure the consent of the landowner or tenant and, if
necessary, and at his own elCpense, pay for the use of such
land. The use of cropland for disposal purposes will not
be permitted.
2.3.4
All excavated materiel of whatever type !except for

unauthorized undercut below top of sub-grade or
excavations taken wider than requiredl shall be measured
as 'Unclassified Excavation' which shall be deemed to
include all materials encountered of any nature. including
silts, clays, sand, gravel and granular materials and
fractured, jointed and massive rock, whether weak or
strong, and unsuitable material, as approved and
i nstructed by the Engineer.
2-6 .
2
Unclassified Excavation shall be measured by cu m.
of material excavated, hauled away and either wasted,
stockpiled. or deposited on or in vicinity of roadw ay
embankments and dykes. Measurements sheU be of
volumes computed from the cross sect ions shown on the
Drawings and the original ground elevations taken jointly
by the Engineer and the Contractor after clearing and
grubbing operltions. Rates shall include fur costs of
supponing sides of elCcavatlon where necessary, keeping
elCcavations free from water, proper formation of
embankments, trimming of slopes, preparation and
completion of the roadway, sub.grade, dykes and
shoulders and scarifying for suitable sub-grade material.
3
Excavation of un stable material lfrom areas outside
the ROW) shall be measured by cu.m. of material
excavated, hauled away and disposed of as ditected,
completed and accepted Measurements ShiiU be of
volumes computed from surveyed cross sections of
original and final ground elevations.
When cross
sectioning is impractical in the oplnion of the Engineer,
approval may be given to measure volumes in the
vehicles removing such excavated material.
4
Ditch excavation and excavation of unstable material
are considered pen of the unclassified excavation.
5
Roct blasting, backfilling of overbreakage, trimming
and grading of cut slopes, ditches and of other belowsubgrade surfaces, drainage of excavation areas, obl iteration
of disused roadways, end other ancillary excavation
Works shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall
be considered as subsidiary work the costs of which wiil
be deemed to be Included in the rates for Unclassified
EJ(cavation
6
Excavation under water shaD be measured by cu.m.
of material excavated, hauled away and disposed of as
directed, completed and accepted (including any side
support or other enabling works). Measurements shall be
of volumes computed from surveyed cross sections of
original and final ground elevttions.
When cross
sectioning is impractical in the opinion of the Engi neer,
approval may be given to measure volumes i n the
vehicles removing such excavated material.
7
Hauling of excavated materials shall not be
measured for direct payment, but shall be cons'dered as
subsidiary work the cost of which will be deemed to be
included in the rates for Unclassified Excavation,
regardless of the distance required for hauling the
materials to an approved dumping area.
E;ccavation, Stockpiling and recompaction o f suitable
8
topsoil material shall be measured by cubic meter, laid,
completed and eccepted as directed by t he Engineer.
2.3.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted worlc,

measured as provided for above, w ill be paid for at the
unit rates for the various items in the BUI of Quantities,
which tate shaD be full compensation for equipment, tools,
Sult11nnto of Om"n. S:olld.Jrd $J10dfi<:otion for
~od
l!o Brldgo Contr<r<!lon 10
Earthworks)
labor, materials, transporting and hauling, and for other

2.3.6
i.
r.
iii.
lv.
Unclassified Excavation
Excavation of unstable material
outside RightofWay
Unclassified Excavation under water
Excavate and Stockpile Suitable topsoil and
recompact as directed
2.4
Borrow Materials
2.4.1
Description
This Sub-section describes excavation of suitable

material from borrow pits, channels and designated
borrow areas and hauling to locations of embankments or
to stockpiles, all as shown on the Drawings, or as directed
by the engineer.
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating
suitable borrow pits and for the suitability and sufficiency
of borrow materials to meet the specified embankment
and other backfilling requirements.
3
Borrow pits shall be utilized if there is insufficient
suitable excavated material to satisfy the embankment
and other backfilling requirements or if the Contractor
chooses to excavate suitable material to waste or put it to
other uses, and replace it by suitable material excavated
from borrow pits at the Contractor's expense.
2.4.2
Location of Borrow Pits
Generally, the borrow pits shall not be located within

50 m from the toe of embankment stope or top of cut or
formed slope, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2
In no casa shalt borrow pits be located within 200 m
downstream of a drainage structure without the written
approval of the Engineer. Unauthorized borrow pits shall
be backfilled and compacted, as directed by the Engineer,
at the Contractor's expense.
3
In each case where a borrow pit is proposed within
privately-owned property, the Contractor shall secure the
consent of tha landowner in writing, if necessary, and
shalt, pay for the use of the material and land. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for any claims for
compensation or complaints arising out of borrow pit
operations.
4
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability
ofthe side slopes of borrow pits and channels at all times,
until the pit or channel is abandoned.
Details of the Contractor's proposed haul routes and
5
traffic arrangements in relation to borrow pit operations
shall be submitted for approval before any borrow
excavation commences.
6
Overburden and any unsuitable top layers within
each borrow pit shall be completely removed and
stock pit ed in the vicinity, ready for re-use prior to

abandonment of the pit.
7
Prior to abandonment of any borrow pit or borrow
area, the Contractor shall spread and level the original
overburden over the exposed surfaces and clean up, grade
and contour the pit or area and the adjoining properties
occupied during execution of borrow operations, whether
Government, or privately-owned, all to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
2.4.3
Borrow Material
Borrow shall be material approved by the Engineer

as meeting the requirements for the particular
embankment, backfill or other use for which the material
is intended.
2
The Contractor shall submit representative samples
of materials from each of the proposed borrow pits or
borrow areas. A minimum of three sets of tests shall be
performed for each borrow area for each type of materi at.
No borrow material shall be brought to the site or used in
the Works before its approval.
3
The Engineer will periodically require follow-up
testing of borrow materials to verify that no change in
quality has occurred since the original approval.
2.4.4
Borrow Excavation shall be measured by cu.m. of

suitable material excavated, hauled and used in the proper
formation of embankments, including trimming of slopes,
preparation and completion of the roadway sub-grade,
shoulders end dykes.
2
The quant;ty of borrow excavation shall be
determined by calculating the total quantity of filling after
compaction and deducting therefrom the total quantity of
unclassified excavation less an allowance for material
condemned by the Engineer as unsuitable for filling.
2.4.6
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work,

unit rates for borrow excavation in the Bill of Quantities ,
which rate shall be full compensation for equipment, tools,
labor, materials, transporting hauling and placing, and for
other items necessary for the proper completion of the
work.
2.4.6

Borrow excavation.
2.5
Embankments
2.5.1
Description
This Sub-section describes construction of roadway

embankments, including preparation of the areas upon
which they are to be placed; placing and compacting
approved material within areas where unsuitable material
has been removed; and placing and compacting approved
27
~~
MinJ111try of Tn,napoM & Cornrnuoicntlona
OGRLT
~~<Earthworks
embankment material In holes, pits and other depressions

within the constructed area, all in accordance with the
lines, grades and cross sections shown on the Drawings.
2.5.2
Materials
Materials suitable for embankment shall be of classes

A 1, A-2-4, A-2-5 or A3 'when confined' groups as in
AASHTO M145 and complying with Table 2.5.2.1, and
shall be used when available, except for rock fill
embankments. If material of this character is not available,
then material from A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4. A-5, groups IAASHTO
M1451 may be used provided it complies with the
requirements of Table 2.5.2.1; however, special attention
shall be given to its suitability for the particular
construction
Requl111menb
1
2
3
4
s
6
Maximum dry density not less than 1.7

IAASHTO T-180 Method 0 }
Organic matter not more t han 6% IAASHTO T267)
6
Where embankments are to be constructed using
material classified as A3 {AASHTO M 1451 or other
material subject to side slope erosion or requiring
confinement for stabilization purposes, the embankment
plating or confining layer shall be constructed using
AASHTO M 145 Class A-1-a, A-1-b, or A-2-4 materials or as
otherwise approved.
7
The material used in rockfill embankments shall
consist predominantly of rock fragments of such size that
the material can be placed in layers of the thickness
prescribed conforming to the requirements stated in Table
2.5.2.2. The size distribution of rockfill shall be determined
according to CIRIA Special Publication 83: Manuat on the
use of Rock in Coastal and Shoreline Engineering Appendix 2.
Requl~
Gypsum content not more than 5%.

No use of A-6, A-7 soil (AASHTO M-145)
also be used in these conditions, except for the top

600mm of the embankment.
'
Maximum size not more than 1/2 of the layer

thickness
2
The 200 mm depth of embankment sub-grade layer
immediately below the bottom of sub base shall consist of
selected sub-grade materiel having a 4-day soaked C.B.R.
of at least 25% when tested in accordance with AASHTO
T193 and when compacted at 100% Modified Proctor
Density in accordance with AASHTO T-1800, with a
gradation and P.l. as specified under Sub-section 2.6 'Sub-grade Construction'.
3
The 600 mm depth of embankment immediately
below the sub-grade layer shall consist of suitable
material having a 4-day soaked C.B.R of at least 15% when
compacted to 95% maximum dry density in accordance
with AASHTO T-1800 and tested in accordance with
AASHTO T193 with a P. l. not more than 15%. If rockfill is
used for the bottom 400 mm depth then these
requirements shall apply to the top 200 mm depth below
the sub-grade layer.
particle
size _...... 1/2
loose ll1yer
Passing 0.42mm ISii!Ve 1 40) ........ 25% maximum

-
Plasticity Index (P.I.IIess than 20%

4-day soaked C.B.R. should not be less than 8%
IAASHTO T-193) when compacted at 100%
maximum dry density in accordance with
AASHTO T-180 Method D.
Table 2.5.2.1: Soil Suitable for Embankment
Maximum
thickneSs
Uniformity coefficient, Cu...... .5 mln!mum. w hera

c.= D.,IO,D
Da =the Particle sl!e at which 60% passes
D10 =the Particle size at which 10% passes
Table 2.5.2.2: Rock Suitable for Embankment
8
Rockfill material shall be obtained from quarries and
shan be sound, dense, hard and durab!e rock capable of
being spread and compacted as specified. lndividuaol
pieces ere to be clean and angular. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to excavate material from rock
cuts, whether by blasting or other means, so that aU
excavated materials are of suitable size.
9 When suitable materials of widely divergent

characteristics are drawn from different sources, such
materials may, if approved, be mixed to meet the
embankment requirements. Rock and other materials shall
be incorporated In such manner as to avoid segregation
and an eccumulation of boulders, etc., at the toe of
embankment slopes.
10 Logs, trees. stumps, weeds, heavy grass, vegetable
matter or other undesirable and non compatible materials
shall not be pl aced in embankmel"'ts.
11 Rocks larger than 100 mm in any dimension shall not
be used as fi fl material In arees where piling works are to
be carried out.
4
Rockfill shall not be used in the top 200 mm of the
embankment below the sub-grade. If found necessary and
if approved by the Engineer, weter may be added es
required to achieve maximum compaction.
2.5.3
2.5.3.1
General
5 In ereas subject to flooding and prolonged inundation

of the embanll:ment, such as at bridge and culvert sites,
the material used in embankment shatl conform to
AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b, A2-4. RockfiU can
Prior to placing embomkment material on any area.

the ground shall have been cleared and grubbed as
specified In Sub-section 2.1 -'Clearing and Grubbing', and
the
foundation
prepared
as
specified
herein.
2-8
Sultllt>bt" of Omnn. Stond.rd S~llcotiont for Road & Btidi!O CotJMruCiion 2010
Earthworks)
2
Equipment used for foundation preparation and for
placing, spreading and compacting embankment materials
shall be of approved types and furnished in sufficient
numbers for the purposes intended. Provision and use of
such equipment shall conform with Section 19 'Plant and
Equipment'
3
Draglines shall not be used to construct embankment
unless approval Is given and only when special
procedures are adopted to keep the layers uniform and the
embankment properly graded and welldrained at all times.
4
Surfaces of embankment layers shall be kept
properly shaped and drained at all times. The Contractor
shall utilize a sufficient number of motor graders or
tractors to level and maintain the surface of each layer of
embankment during all placing and compacting
operations.
5
Whenever feasible, trucks, scrapers, tractors, loaders
and other heavy hauling equipment shall be routed over
the embankment in such a manner as will contribute
effectively to compaction of the fill material.
6
Where an embankment is to be constructed over an
area previously occupied by a building basement, cellar,
irrigation canal, well, any previous excavation, or adjacent
to structures, and where the proper use of normal
is
not
practicable,
the
compaction
equipment
embankment shall be constructed and compacted in
accordance with the backfilling requirements of Sub
section 2.7 - 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures'
until the use of normal compaction equipment is
practicable. Layers shall not exceed 200 mm thickness
(before compaction) and shall be compacted to the degree
of compaction specified for the embankment. The
embankment construction under this item shall be
measured and paid under the requirements of Clause
2. 7 .4.8:' Unclassified Structural Excavation'
7
Each embankment layer shall be tested and approved
prior to placing the following layer in accordance with
Clause 2.5.4 'Testing'.
8
The Engineer may at any time order suspension of
delivery of materials to the embankment sites until
previously delivered materials have been properly placed
and preceding layers are leveled and uniformly compacted
to the specified density.
9
Unacceptable material placed in any embankment
shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor at his
own expense, immediately after receiving the Engineer's
instructions in this regard. Any expected delay with the
removal of such material shall be coordinated and agreed
with the Engineer.
10 The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability
of all embankments and shall replace all embankment
sections which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have been
damaged or displaced due to carelessness or neglect on
the part of the Contractor, or due to normally occurring
natural causes, such as storms, and not attributable to the
unavoidable movement of the natural ground upon which
the embankment is constructed.
11 All embankment side slopes shall be neatly finished

true to the lines and not steeper than the slope angles as
shown on the Drawings. The bottom (toe) of side slopes
shall be graded to a well rounded, smooth profile to blend
in with the adjacent terrain.
12 Where directed by the Engineer, the side slopes of
rockfill embankments shall be thoroughly blanketed with
A 1, A-2-4 materia I, and compacted to the satisfaction of
the Engineer
13 The Engineer may permit the Contractor to utilize
suitable surplus material at his own expense to widen
embankments or flatten slopes, etc within the right-of-way.
Surplus material used in such manner shall be compacted
to 90 per cent of maximum density. When widening
embankments, the Contractor shall bear the cost of
modifying the culverts and any protection work necessary.
14
Rockfill shall not be used within 5m of a structural

element {next to bridge abutments footings, etc). In some
specific cases, rock fragments not exceeding 75mm
particle size may be used next to structural elements, but
only after obtaining the Engineer's approval on the
location and extent of the work.
15 Rockfill shall not be used within 600 mm of top and

bottom of box and pipe culverts. Subgrade material shall
be used in these areas up to width excavated for
structures.
16 Potable or sea water can be used for all embankment
construction works, except that only potable water shall
be used for compaction of fill material within 1m from all
surfaces of structures.
2.5.3.2
Trial Embankments Sections
If shown on the Drawings, or if required by the

Engineer, a trial embankment shall be constructed. The
trial section shall be at least 2 lanes wide by 100 m long at
approved locations at or adjacent to the Site. Compaction
and other equipment used shall be as specified in Section
19 'Plant and Equipment'.
2
The initial sections of rock embankment shall serve
as the trial sections for rock fill, in order to establish the
optimum degrees of consolidation for the different layer
thickness. This shall be obtained by compaction trials
correlating number of passes of the roller with settlement
of the layer, or by different approved methods. The
maximum permitted layer thickness shall be related to the
unit weight of the vibratory roller and for compaction, as
given in Table 2.5 3.1 and shall not exceed 800 mm loose
thickness.
~~
Mlnjtrv of Transport & Communlcntions
OGRI..T
_/'"'....~<:Earthworks
Maximum
of
bver
Minimum~ Mea*
n.- Thlclcneul
IIC;hn Wldthl
~mm
2300-2900
500mm
2900-3600
600mm
700mm
800mm
3600 - 4300
4300-5000
,. 6000
I
I
For multip!e rollers, this shall be assumed as

the high axle load.
Table 2.5.3.1 : Maximum Layer Thickness/Minimum Roller

Mass Requirements
2.5.3.3
Foundation Preparation
If the original surface upon which embankment is to

1
be placed is an existing pavement, the surface shell be
ploughed, scarified, or otherwise broken up regardless of
the height of the embankment to be placed thereon.
2
Clearing and grubbing, and removal of tree stumps,
shell be undertaken. The degree of compaction for the
area to be cleared shall then be determined. The top 150
mm of the surface on which the embankment is to be
placed shell be scarified, brought to a uniform moisture
content within the specified range, and compacted to the
density speci fied for the embankment. Hard and smcoth
surfaces are to be roughened before filling is pieced.
3
Where embankment is to be placed over t opsoil
containing unsuitable organic material which does not
meet the requirements of Table 2.5.2.1, the ground shall
be stripped off to a depth of 200mm and the cleared
surface shall be scarified to a mi nimum depth of 200mm
or as directed by the Engineer, brought to a uniform
moisture content within the specified range, and
compacted to the density specified for the embankment.
4
Where embankment is to be placed and compar;ted
on hillsides or where new embankment is to be
compacted egeinst exist ing embankments or where
embankment is built part width at a time, the slopes
steeper than 3:1 (H:V) when measured at right angles to
the road centerline shell be continuously benched as the
embankment rs brought up in layers. Benching shall be of
sufficient width to permit operation of spreading end
compaction equipment, and in any case not less than 2 m
wide except where insufficient width is available between
existi ng and new embankments. Each horizontal cut shan
begin at the Intersection of the original ground and the
vertical sides of the previous cuts. The vertical face of
each bench shall not be less than 1 m in height and not
exceed 2 m. Approved benching shall be measured as
unclassified excavatl on.
Where embankment is to be placed and compacted

on wadi slopes, the entire slope area shall be graded and
trimmed to remove any vertical faces and overhangs. The
final graded slope shell not be steeper than 1.5H:1V. The
slope shall then be continuously benched as the
embankment Is brought up In layers, a ll as described
above for embankment on hillsides.
210
6
Rockfill shall not be placed on any slopes steeper
than 1:1. All slopes steeper than 1:1 shall therefore be re
graded to a slope of 1:1 or milder and all vertical faces end
overhangs removed.
2.5.3.4
Embankment Construction
1
Roadway embankment consisting of soil or granular
materiel shell be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding
200 mm compacted thickness, compacted as specified and
approved prior to placing the next layer. The thickness of
the first laver over areas of Class A3 dune sand may
exceed 250 mm in order to bridge these areas.
Approximately uniform thickness of each layer shall be
achieved prior to compaction. As the compaction of each
layer progresses, continuous leveling and working of the
material shall be carried out to ensure uniform density.
The correct moisture content shall be maintained at all
t imes.
2
Where embankments are to be constructed to a
height in excess of 1.5 m above top of original ground
level, the Engineer may approve layers up to 250 mm
compacted thickness if these layers are located at depths
greater than 1.5m from the final elevation of embankment
and if the Contractor's equipment and the nature of the
material result in the required density throughout the layer
thickness.
3
When the moisture content of the embankment
material does not fall w ithin the required moisture range,
(optimum moisture :1: 2%1 water shall be added and
thoroughly mixed into the soil by approved methods or
the material shall be aerated, whichever is necessary to
adjust the material to the required moisture content.
4
When water is added to embankment material, the
amount added shall be suffteient to provide a moisture
content within the required range plus a reasonable
additional amount to compensate for evaporation and
other unavoidable losses. Water added in excess of th is
amount shall be removed by aeration or other approved
means at the Contractor's expense. Satisfactory methods
and suffiCient equipment shall be used for the furnishing
end hand ing of the water in a manner that w iN minimize
loss due to evaporation or waste.
5
Embankments that consist of rock-soil materiel w ith
sufficient soil to make rolling feasi ble shall be placed and
compacted in an approved manner end to the required
degree of compaction. Water shall be added as end when
dltected to assist in the compaction of such materials.
6
In the case of embankments which are to be formed
of approved rocksoil material containing an appreciable
quantity of rock fragments (normally not exceeding 30%
greater than 80mm) and which cannot be placed in layers
of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing,
or otherwise breaking down the fragments, the
embankment may be constructed in layers not exceeding
in thickness twice the average size of the largest rock
fregments and in any case not exceeding 600 mm lbefore
compaction).
Sultanbto of Orr>rtn, Stn~>rd Spedfi~Uonf for A~d & Brkl~ Con;~ ruction 2il D
Earthworks)
7
Rockfill materials shall be placed in such a manner
that the larger rocks are well distributed and the voids are
filled to the maximum practical extent by smaller particles
of rocks, gravel or approved granular materials. Each I ayer
shall be bladed into a neat and homogeneous mass pr' or
to compaction. Any rocks found protruding from the
leveled surface shall be removed end replaced by smaller
particles.
Initial breakdown compaction shall be
performed with heavy bulldozers. The top level of each
layer must be surveyed before and after compaction and
approved by the Engineer before the nelCI layer is placed.
Oversize rock pieces {i e. exceeding the maximum particle
size defined in Table 2.5.2.2 by not more than 10%) may
be used in high rockfill embankments to a level 3 meters
below sub.grade.
2.5.4
Testing
2.5.4.1
General
For verification of material, moisture content,

compaction, thickness and other properties of the
materials or workmanship the Engineer shall at all times
have access to all parts of the Works and Site. AU
sampling and testing of material and work shall be carried
out as specified to the satisfaction the Engineer.
2
Materials shall be tested in accordance with BS 930,
AASHTO T96, AASHTO T204, AASHTO T205, AASHTO
T104, AASHTO T176, BS 1377. AASHTO M145, ASTM
01556 and other applicable and relevant standards.
3
The Engineer shall test the compacti on of
embankment materials in accordance with the
Specification to ensure that adequate compaction or
consolidation has been achieved. All such tests shall be
fully documented by the Contractor, in an approved
manner.
In the case of cohesionless, free draining rocksoil
4
materials, where maximum density tests fail to produce a
well defined moisture/density relationship, the relative
density test shall be used. Alternatively an electronic
compaction meter or any other approved test equipment
shall be provided by the Contractor and used to determina
the degree of compaction achieved.
5
To determine the degree of compaction for
embankment consisting of rock fill, average differential
settlement values shall also be determined from surveys
of an adequate number of grid point elevations as directed
by the Engineer at the commencement of, during and after
embankment construction. (Refer to Item 6 of Paragraph
2.5.4.3 below).
6
For rockfill embankments. the modulus of soil
reaction shall be determined by the plate bearing test;
using the method given in AASHTO T222.
2.5.4.2
Standards of Compaction for Soil and Granular

Materials
The following compaction standards shall apply to

embankment materials other than predominantly rock
materials. The 'maximum density' of soil type materials

shall be the modified maximum density determined in
accordance with AASHTO T 180 (Method 0). The 'relative
densty shall be the relative density determined in
accordance with ASTM 0 4254, which identifies the state
of compactness of the material with respect to its loosest
and densest state. The relative density shall be the
standard to which the field density is referred for
comparison in the case or cohesionless, free draining
granular materlals.
2
Soil type materials shall be compacted to at least
90% modified maximum density for the full depth of
embankment; except for the 600 mm of embankment
material immediately below the subgrade layer that shall
be compacted to at least 95% modified maximum density.
Moisture content shall be within plus or minus 2% of
optimum at the time of compaction.
3
Cohesionless, free draining granular materials (of 75
mm maxi mum size, with not more than 15% passing 0.075
mm (No. 200) sieve and a plasticity index (PI) not
exceeding 20%1 shall be compacted to at least 70% of
relative density for the full depth of embankment. The 600
mm depth of such material immediately below the sub
grade layer shall be compacted to at least 75% of relative
density.
4
Minimum soil tests required during the construction
of sub-grade andfor embankment ere:
One sample for CBR, classification (AASHTO
M145), and laboratory (Moisture density) or
relative density compaction from each source
prior t o use. Each sample shall represent not
more than 5,000 cubic meters.
One sample for classification representing not
more than 3,000 cubic meters of the material in
use.
For every completed layer, one fie' d density
shall be determined for each 1500 square
meters or 100 linear meters, whichever is less
Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D
1556 or ASTM 0 2167 orBS 1377 Part 9.
2.5.4.3
Degree of Compaction for Rock Fill Materials
To
ensure
proper compaction
of rockfill
embankments, the Contractor shall conduct compaction
tests such as the plate load bearing test or other approved
equivalent tests using equipment and materials available
in order to determine the best compact' on control criteria.
2
A rockfill test section shall be placed on a firm
surface approved by the Engineer, end the material and
1ayer thickness shall conform to the requirements of these
specifications.
3
The test section shall be of sufficient dimensions to
permit the establishment of at least twenty leveling points
on a 5 meter {5m) square grid, and no fewer than 3 points
on any one line and no point less than three meters from
the edge of the layer. The arrangement of the leveling
points shall be approved by the Engineer.
2 11
"V~
Mlniurv of Trnnapart & Communicntlana DGRLT
_./"'-..~<:earthworks
4
Compaction shall then commence with a m inimum
of three passes of a v ibratory roller, as shown In Table
2.5.3.1. Leveling points shall then established, short
lengths of pa'nted steel bars hammered flush with the
surface of the rockfill are suitable for this purpose. A level
reading shall be taken at each leveling point on top of a
moveable 300 mm square flat steel plate with a hole
drilled in the center of the plata to enable a visual check to
be made that the plate is located centrally over the bar.
5
Further readings shall be taken at the leveling points
after two additional passes with the roller. If the average
settlement is less than half of one per cent (0.5%) of the
average compacted layer thickness, or as determined by
t he Engineer, the rockfill compaction test is deemed
comp'lete.
6
If the average settlement is more than half of one
percent (0.5%). two additional passes of the roller are
required and the leveling procedure shall be repeated. If
the average settlement is then less than half of one
percent (0.5%1. of the average compacted layer thickness
the test is deemed complete. If not, this step shall be
repeated.
7
The total number of passes of the rolling equipment
necessary to obtain the required result will establish the
minimum number of passes to be used on the rock
embankments. However, in no case shall the number of
passes be less than five (5).
This verification Pf'Ocedure shaDI be conducted for
8
each change of material and at least once each week
during the initial stages of construction until a reliable
rolling pattern is established. The frequency vermcation
procedure can than be reduced as approved by the
Engineer.
9
Documentation of the rockfill compaction tests shall
be maintained by the Contractor in the project records and
shall be copied to the Engineer.
2.5.4.4
No separate Items are included in the Bill of

Quantities for embankments. The cost is deemed to be
included in the items for excavation and borrow
excavat ion stated in Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4..
212
3
Surplus materials utilized at the Contractor's option
within the ROW but, beyond the cross sections shown on
the Drewings. are not measured as part of the
embenkment.
4
Benching described under Item 4 of Paragraph 2.5.3.3
is meesured as Unclassified Excavetion, under Clause
2.3.4.
5
No adjustments or allowances are made in respect of
expansion or shrinkage of earthwork volumes which may
occur during excavation and compaction.
6
Embankment foundation treatment such as stripping,
scarifying and re-compaction of topsoil containing
unsuitable organic material, as detailed in Item 3 of
Paragraph 2.5.3 3 is not measured but shall be considered
as subsidiary work the costs of which are deemed to be
included in the rates for excavation and borrow elC cavation
in Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4
7
Scarifying old pavement beds. construction of the
trial embankment section if it is outside the pavement,
foundation, preparation. testing, including furnishing and
using an approved type electronic compaction meter and
grid pattern consolidation surveys, 1nd all other ancillery
embankment work are not measured, but shall be
considered as subsidiary work the costs of which are
deemed t o be included in the rates for excavation and
borrow excavetion in Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4
2.5.6
Basis of Payment
No separate payment will be made for any work in

this Sub-section 2.5. The cost of al l work for embankments
is deemed to be included under Sub-sections2.3 and 2.4.
Monitoring Settlement of Rockfill
On completion of the embankment, the Contractor

shall carry out Pf'IICisa leveling of the crest of the
embankment. This shall consist of leveling transverse
sections {a minimum of five points) at a maximum spacing
of 30 m along the embankment. These shall be referenced
to 11 stable approved datum. Leveling shall be carried out
at suitable time Intervals until the average rate of
settlement over a period of one month does not exceed
0.1 mm par day. No permanent pavement construction
will be permitted until the specified criteria are achieved.
Adequete t ime sha~l be allowed in the construction
program for the settlement survey.
2.5.5
2
The volume of embankment displaced by pipe
culverts, box culverts and associated end walls shell be
deducted from the measured volume of embankment. No
deduction shall be made for pipes less than 500 mm in
diameter and associated end walls.
2.5.7
No items are included in the BiU of Quantities. AU

items under Sub-section 2.5 are subsidiary to other items.
2.6
Sub-grade Construction
2.6.1
Description
This Subsection describes construction of the sub

grade layer and preparing the sub-grade surface ready to
receive the pavement structure including shoulders, ali as
shown on the Drawings.
2
The subgrade layer is the 200 mm minimum depth
of selected mat erial immediately below the sub-grade
surface. or as defined in the Drawings or d lrected by the
Engineer.
3
Wherever shallow ground water ls expected under
the roadway and wherever damage to the pavement
layers is potential due to water impact. a suiteble
subsurfece drainage blanket shall be Installed under the
Sult<Snato of Omnn, St>nliorJ SPICf.coUon' lor Road !o 9rid~ Conlructl0!12010
Earthworks)
sub-grade of the roadway. Drainage blanket is a course of

washed granular material placed to cut off upward
capillary flow of pore water under paved areas, where and
as shown on the Drawings.
2.6.2
i.
Materials
Sub-grade material shall consist of suitable materials

of Classes A-1, A-2-4 or A25 having a 4-day soaked CBR
of not less than 25% when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T 193 when compacted at 100% of modified
proctor AASHTO (T-1800) and having a maximum P.l. of
12% and Gypsum Content not exceeding 3%.
The
Maximum Dry Density of Sub-grade material shall be
equal or greater than 1.9 t/cu.m. Sub-grade gradation she II
be reasonably smooth without gap grading. All material
shall pass 75 mm sieve. The percent of material passing
the 0.075 mm (No. 2001 sieve shall not exceed 18% and
shall not be less then 5%. Where directed by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall screen the sub-grade material at his
own expense. The top 200mm sub-grade material shall
not contain more than 0.2% total Sulphate content and
0.05% total Chloride content.
2
If e drainage blanket is shown on the Drawings to be
Installed directly underneath the sub-grade, the sub-grade
material shall respect the filter criteria specified under
Item 5 of this Clause 2.6.2.
3
Aggregate material for use in drainage blanket shall
be rapid draining crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel conforming to the properties stated in Table 2.6.2.1
below:
p~
Range
Permul:iility in m/day - ASTM 02434

Effective PorositY
% F.ractured Faces- (COE Method)
.
Cu 100010101
..
LA. Abrasion - AASHTO T96
California Bearing Ratio (CBRlAASHT0Tt93
300. 1500
0.25
Min. 75%
>3.5
<40
>30%
Table 2.6.2.1 : Properties of Rapid Draining Materials for

use In Drainage Blanket
4
The gradation of the rapid draining material for use
in drainage blanket shall be as provided In Table 2.6.2.2
below:
SfW!~~n
ParoentPa~
(mm)
I"'
38.0 (1-112 in.)

25.0 (1 in.)
100
70-100
19.0 (314 in.)
55-100
12.5 (112 in.)
. 40-BO
.9;5 (318 in,)
- - 4175 (No._4)
5
The layer directly underneath the drainage blanket
and the one directly above it shall satisfy the following
filter criteria:
30-65
10-50
2.4(No. 81
0-25
1.2 (No. 161
0-5
Table 2.6.2.2: Gradation of Rapid Draining Materials for

use in Drainage Blanket
ii.
iii.
iv.
The 15% size of filter (01 5 Filter] shall not be

greater than 4 times the 85% size of the
surrounding
material
(085
Surrounding
material):
015 Filter< 4 085 Surrounding material.
The 15% size of filter (D15 Filter) shall not be
less than 4 times the 15% size of the
surrounding
material
(015
Surrounding
material I:
D15 Filter> 4 015 Surrounding material.
The 50% size of filter (050 Filter) shall not
exceed 25 times the 50% size of the
surrounding
material
(050
Surrounding
material I:
D50 Filter< 25 050 Surrounding material.
The plasticity Index of the portion of all filter
materials passing sieve # 40 shall not exceed
6%.
The filter materials shall not contain more than
5% material passing through sieve # 200.
2.6.3
2.6.3.1
Sub-grade in Cut
Where tha sub-grade is located in rock, the sub-grade,

unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, shall be
undercut to a depth of 200 mm by drilling or blasting as
directed. No rock shall project more than 50 mm above
the undercut surface elevation. The sub-grade layer shall
then be constructed using approved sub-grade material.
2
Where the sub-grade is on in-situ soil which is of a
quality and CBR value at least equal to those specified for
sub-grade, the 200 mm depth of such material
immediately below top of sub-grade shall be scarified and
all roots, sod, vegetable and other undesirable matter and
stones larger than 75 mm in any dimension shall be
removed. The material shall then be brought to uniform
moisture content within the specified range and
compacted to 100% AASHTO T 180 (Method OJ maximum
density.
3
Where the sub--grade is on in-situ soil which is
unsuitable for retention as the sub-grade layer, such
material immediately below tha top of sub-grade layer
shall be sub-excavated to a depth of 200 mm, hauled away
and disposed of unless approved for use as embankment
fill. The sub-grade I eyer shall then be constructed using
approved sub-grade material, as specified for sub-grade in
embankment. If the material below sub-grade does not
consist of suitable materials satisfying the requirements of
top 600mm embankment, it shall ba excavated for further
200mm and replaced by suitable material to satisfy the
requirements of the top 600mm of the embankment.
2-13
~~
Mlnitrv of Transport & Communlcotlorta OGRLT
/"'--..~<:Earthworks
4
The underlying natural material shall be scarified,
leveled and rolled. The surface of the natural soil shall be
a pproved by the Engineer before placement of suitable
material.
ii.
2.6.3.6
2.6.3.2
Sub-grade in Embankment
Surface Tolerances
A ll finished levels, lines and grades shall be in

accordanee with the details shown on the Drawings. Each
cross section shall be checked at maximum intervals of 20
m, at each change in cross slope and elsewhere as
directed.
2
The tolerances on levels o f finished sub-grade, top of
embankment under the sub-grade layer and subexcavated {undercut) surface shall be as given in Table
2.6 3.1 .
s~
Tolerances
Finished Subgrade Soli
+10 or-30 mm
Rock (if approved)
+50 or -50 mm
To p of Embankment or Sub
excavated Surf!!~ _oil_ __
+10 or-30mm
Table 2.6,3.1: Tolerances on Elevations of Finished Subgrade
If i nstructed by the Engineer, when the finished sub

3
g rade surface is tested with a 4 m long straightedge
placed parallel to, or at right angles to the centerline, the
maximum depression of the surface from the straight
edge shall be 30 mm.
2.6.3.4
Drainage Blanket
Wherever and as shown on the drawings, place

drainage blanket under roadway pavements on prepared
sub-grade as follows:
i.
Compact drainage blanket to required cross
sections and thickness to not Jess than 95
percent of maxi mum dry density according to
ASTM 01557,
214
Where the road subgrade passes over sabkha are3s

or gypsumrich soils with a high water table the
Contractor shall take the special precautions mentioned
below if the sabkha or the gypsum -rich soils are
encountered within the top 1m below the sub-grade level.
2
These precautions sha ~ include but shall not be
limited to the construction of suitable temporary haul
roads for all construction plant operating in the area. Such
haul roads shall be constructed, at the Contractor's
expense. using rock fill and geotextiles as necessary to
ensure a safe stable surface,
If directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall
3
construct sub-grade and embankment (where applicable)
over sabkha areas or gypsum-r ich soils with a surcharge
of excess material that shall remain in place t ill all
appreciable settlement has stopped. The Contractor shall
provide a means of monitoring the settlement. The
Engineer shall decide when appreciable settlement has
stopped.
4
Unless a specific treatment for using geotextiles,
geogrids or geosynthetics is described elsewhere in the
contract, work over sabkha or gypsum-rich soils shall
consist of initially stabilizing the existing weak soil by
laying and rolling rock fill layer type l according to Table
2.6.3.2 below. This operation should be continued by
adding and rolling type 1 rock fill layer with steel vibratory
roller till the layer is completely stabUised.
5
A layer of geotextile fabric shall be laid over the
compacted type 1 pervious material. A layer of 50mm
pervious backfill type 2 according to Table 2.6.3-2 shall be
laid over the stabilised layer to protect the geotextile fabric.
~
US at.nd..-cl
Sieve Size
Maintenance of Finished Sub-grade
The finished and approved sub-grade shall be

continuousey m aintained i n a smooth, well compacted and
properly drained condit ion unti l the sub-base (or base)
course is constructed. Reapprov<tl of the sub-grade w iU be
required if the overlying course is not constructed withil"'
14 deys of sub-grade completion or if the subgrade layer
is damaged by traffic or any other causes prior to the
placement of the sub-base layer.
2.6.3.5
Preparation of Sub-grade Construction on

Sabkha and Gypsum Rich Soils
The 200 mm minimum dopth of embankment

immediately below top of sub-grade shaJJ consist of
selected, approved sub-grade material. The material shall
be spread in one layer over the full width of the top of
embankment, brought to a unifQ(m moisture content
within the specified range and compacted to 100%
AASHTO T 180 {Method OJ ma)(imum density.
2.6.3.3
Place drainage blanket in layers not exceeding

150mm compacted thi ckness each. with no
layer less tha n 75 mm thick when compacted.
:
[
-'-
&Inch
5inch
4inch
21nch
11/Zlnch
314 inch
112 inch
318 inch
No.4
No,S
No. 16
No. 200
_]p1
100
85 100
75 - 90
45 - 65
35 - 55
20 35
10 2i
5 - 20
JYp,_2
100
95 100
70 100
0. 55
0 10
.
.
-
.
.
.
.
0 3
Table 2.6.3.2: Definition ofType 1 and Type 2 Rockfill
Materials for Sabkha Treatment
Sutt:mata of Omnn, Strn:l>td S;>e<ifoe.Uonlor Rood e. Br
Cot\$lJUCioat
Earthworks)
6
A layer of 200mm thick capillary break rock fi II type 1
shall be laid over type 2 pervious backfill to receive the
required road layers after the above operation.
2.6.3.7
Preparation of Subgrade Construction on top of

Dune Sand
Dune sand roadbed shall be compacted only after

being confined by special means and methods that shall
be approved by the Engineer. These methods may include
the construction of an edge dyke of various materials on
both sides of the road to provide the necessary
confinement.
2
Dune sand material will be allowed to receive dry
compaction only if the material is tested and proven to be
A-3 type and only in case where the Proctor test showed a
maximum dry density at 0 % moisture. Otherwise, the
material shall be brought to uniform moisture content
within the specified range and shall be compacted to 100%
AASHTO T 180 (Method Dl maKimum density.
2.6.4
2.6.5

unit rates for the relevant items in the Bill of Quantities ,
which rate shall be full compensation for supplying
materials, transporting, hauling and placing. for labor,
equipment, tools and other items necessary for the proper
completion of the work.
2.6.6
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Sub-grade preparation in cut is be measured by sq.m.

2
of top width of sub-grade layer computed from cross
sections shown on the Drawings. The rate shall include for
all eKcavation below top of subgrade, scarifying removing
undesirable matter and compacting of replaced matter
where necessary.
3
Drainage blanket shall be measured by cubic meters
of aggregate materials, furnished, screened, washed,
placed, spread, compacted, completed and accepted.
Measurement shall be of volumes computed from the
cross sections shown on the Drawings and of the field
measurements of area and compacted depth of each trial
section. No allowance shall be made in the measurement
for overdepth and/or overwidth construction, regardless of
the Engineer's permission for it to remain in place.
4
Sub-grade construction on sabkha or gypsum-rich
soils shall be measured by sq.m. of top width of sub-grade
layer computed from the cross sections shown on the
Drawings The rates shall include for all e~<cavation below
top of sub-grade, scarifying, removing undesirable matter,
construction of temporary haul roads, any rockfill,
geotextile or gee-synthetics used, surcharge materials,
compaction and completion and any accessories all as
specified in Paragraph 2.6.3.6 and as shown on the
relevant drawings,.
5
Sub-grade construction on top of dune sand shall be
measured by sq.m. of top width of sub-grade layer
computed from cross sections shown on the Drawings.
The rates shall include for all excavation below top of sub
grade, scarifying removing undesirable matter, installation
and dismantling of the confinement structure or side
embankment and compacting the soil layers as specified

Sub-grade preparation in cut
(sq.m.)
Drainage blanket
(cu.m.l
Preparation of sub-grade
construction on sabkha or
gypsum-rich soils
(sq m .l
Preparation of sub-grade construction on top of
dune sand
(sq.m.)
2.7
Excavation and Backfilling for

Structures
2.7.1
Description
Sub-grade layer in embankment is not measured

separately but is included as part of the computation for
the volume of embankment.
Basis of Payment
This Sub-section describes eKcavation in any

material for buildings and pump houses; bridges. culverts,
pipe culverts, under-drains;
drainage and utility
structures; flood areas cutolfwalls; retaining walls of all
types; and for other major and minor structures; including
all necessary clearing and grubbing; bailing; drainage;
pumping; dewatering; sheeting; temporary shoring and
cribbing; construction of temporary cofferdams or cribs;
backfilling with suitable approved material to the level of
original ground or to the top level of any adjacent
embankment; and disposal of all surplus or unsuitable
excavated material, all as shown on the Drawings, or as
directed by the Engineer.
2
The work also includes removal of those portions of
existing structures below ground which would in any way
obstruct or interfere with construction of new structures.
3
The Contractor will be deemed to have satisfied
himself, at the time of tendering, as to the type and nature
of soils and rock that will be encountered in structural
excavations.
2.7.2
Excavation
2.7.2.1
General
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a sufficient

time in advance of the beginning of any excavation for
structures so that the Engineer may, where necessary,
survey and record the cross sectional or longitudinal
elevations and measurements of the existing ground and
existing structures affected by the proposed structure.
Any materials removed or excavated before these
measurements have been taken and approved by the
Engineer will not be paid for.
21!5
~~
Mlnitrv of Trnnaport & CommunicnUon
DGRLT
~~<::Earthworks
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of
all foundation and trench excavations whether supported
or not. Approval of the Contractor's support system or
omission of a support system for any excavations will not
absolve the Contractor from his sole responsibility in this
regard.
3
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions,
including shoring or other means, to protect employees
and others in the excavation and on the ground above.
4
The sjdes of all foundation pits and trenches
shallower than 1.5m shall be vertical and adequately
supported unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Sides
more than 1.5 m in depth shall be sloped at a stable slope
or supported in an approved manner unless the material
through which the p"t or trench is cut is deemed to be
sufficiently self-supporting and not requlrlng support.
5
Pits and trenches shall be kept free from water until
footing concrete has been placed or pipes have been
The Contractor shall minimize, as far as
installed.
practicable, the length of t ime excavated areas are open.
The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of damage
due to weather, equipment, and other causes during
periods when the excavations are left open.
6
The Contractor shall plan the Works so that no
excavation is left in an exposed condition for a period
greater than 30 days unless otherwise approved.
7
Where excavation is adjacent to public highways and
walkways, warning lights, barriers and barricades shall be
provided to t he Engineer's satisfaction. No excavation
shall be left in an exposed condition for more than 7 days
unless otherwise approvecl
8
For excavation in material sensitive to moisture {stiff
clays, marls, etc.) the excavation shall be cleaned end a
concrete blinding layer cast immediatelY on completion of
the excavation.
9
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any sign
of failure or cracks within or around the excavation
i mmediately when such signs are noticed.
2.7.2.2
Temporary Support System
When a temporary support system is required to

prect adjacent property or to protect the public during
construction, the Contractor's design for suc:h support
system shall be submitted for approval prior to
commencing its construction.
2
All temporary support systems shall be designed
with adequate factors of safety to serve with minimal
maintenance, for the duration of its intended use, and
shall include adequate safety provisions to protect the
public from construction activities.
3
Notwithstanding any approval of temporary support
systems, t he Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
adequacy of their design and construction and for
maintenance and all necessary safety precautions
assoc::iated therewith.
216
2.7.2.3
Excavation for Major Structures and Bridges
Foundations for buildings, pump houses and other

major structures and bridges, shall be excavated In
accordance with the dimensions as shown on the
Drawings and shall be of sufficient size to permit placing
of the full w:dth and lengths of the footings.
2
Excavation shall be carried down to the levels shown
on the Drawings or as established by the Engineer based
on previous investigations No concrete shall be placed
prior to approval ofthe excavation pit.
3
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the
bottom of all excavations shall be covered with a 75mm
minimum depth of lean {blinding) concrete Class 15 to
serve as a working platform.
4
Foundation pits or trenches shall be of sufficient sile
and provide minimum sufficient working space to permit
construction of structures or structure footings of the full
width and length shown on the Drawings.
5
Where footings are constructed using formwork, the
el<cavations shall generally not el<tend more than 500 mm
beyond the maximum dimension on each side of the
proposed footing unless add itional working space is
clearly required and approved by the Engineer. Any
unauthorized overwidth of excavation beyond the lateral
limits or depths shown on the drawings or approved by
the Engineer shall be backfilled with selected fill or lean
concrete as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's
el<pense.
6
Where footings are located, in or adjacent to firm,
original ground and where formwork is not required or
ordered, any unauthorized overdept h excavation below
the approved elevat ion of base of footing shall be
backfilled w ith blinding concrete.
7
Where excavation to rock foundation is required, the
excavation shall proceed in such a manner as t o allow the
solid rock to be exposed and prepared In horizontal beds
or properly serrated for receiving the concrete. All loose
and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed.
8
When unstable material or other unsuitable material
is encountered below foundation elevation, the Contractor
shall excavate such material and replace it with suitable
backfill material or concrete to the depth as di reeled by the
Engineer.
9
If temporary works are requi red for maintaini ng t he
excavation dry, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
design and execution of the works. The proposed design
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approva I but, such
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his sole
responsibility in this regard.
2.7.2.4
Excavation for Box Culverts, Pipe Culverts and

Miscellaneous Structures
Excavation shalt be carried out to the limits required

for construction and to the depth required for bedding
material or removal of unsuitable material. All trerdl
S\lftanftlo gf Omnn, SLmd:lrd SpeaficoLonolor Rod !k Brld110 Cormruotlon 20!0
Earthworks)
excavation shall proceed upgrade, commencing at the

downstream end.
2
Foundation material supporting the bedding or
structure shall be AASHTO M 145 Class Ala, A1b or A
2-4 compacted to 95% AASHTO T 180 maximum density.
If the natural material does not meet the classification
requirements, it shall be sub-excavated to a depth of at
least 200mm and replaced with material meeting the
specified requirements. Any rock or hard material within
200 mm of the bottom of the pipes shall be similarly sub
excavated and replaced with material meeting the
specified requirements.
If no special bedding material is required, the
3
foundation for precast and prefabricated culverts shall be
formed to the shape of the culvert, including all
protrusions. The shaping shall extend to 25% of the
height of culvert.
4
Where rock is encountered in the toe wall excavation
for concrete box culverts or concrete cut-off-walls for
floodway, embankment protection and pipe culverts and
the rock is of such quality as will prevent erosion, part of
the toe wall may be eliminated in the rock strata as
directed and the toe wall shall be keyed Into the rock strata
in a satisfactory manner. The minimum thickness of the
key shall be as shown on Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
5
Precast concrete pi pes and metal pipes shall be
Installed in trenches cut into previously constructed and
compacted embankment or from top of sub-grade. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings, trench width shall not
be greater than the external diameter of the pipe plus 500
mm on each side.
6
In the case of metal pipes, the bottom of the trench
shall be shaped to a template so that at least 10% of the
overall height of pipe or arch will be in contact with the
bottom of the trench as excavated. Recesses shall be
excavated to receive any parts of the pipe which extend
below the outside perimeter. Where rock, hardpan or
other unyielding material is encountered it shall be
removed below design grade or as ordered by the
Engineer for a depth of at least 200 mm and backfilled as
specified.
7
Trenches for cast in-situ pipes shall be cut into
previously constructed and compacted embankment from
top of sub-grade or embankment height or twice the
nominal span of the pipe whichever is less. Trench width
shall not be greater than the external diameter or span of
pipe plus 500 mm on each side when external forms are
used, or the external span of pipe including protection
plus 100 mm on each side when external forms ere not
used.
8
When excavation is required for installation of ducts,
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion
of the excavation. No duct shall be laid until the depth
and cross section of the excavation has been approved.
Over-width or over-depth excavation for precast
9
concrete pipes shall be made good at the Contractor's
expense by prov1s1on of an in situ concrete cradle or

increased thickness of concrete bedding as di reeled, or by
the use of other approved suitable materials.
10 Over width excavation for in situ concrete pipes shall
be made good at the Contractor's expense by concrete
bedding brought up to the external haunch of the pipe or
by the use of other approved suitable materials.
11 Over depth excavation for metal pipes shall be made
well by furnishing and backfilling an approved, fine
granular material containing not more than 0.5% of
combined chlorides and sulfates.
2.7.3
Backfilling
2.7.3.1
General
1
The Contractor sha II obtain approve I for his proposed
meth ad and rate of pi acing of backfill before work
commences.
2
Backfill materials shall be uniformly graded granular
material, capable of being compacted to required
compaction, and having adequate permeability to permit
free drainage through it. Backfill material shall also
conform to the requirements listed in Table 2.7.3.1 below:
SurfKe
R.qu_lrement.
Minimum D1a value
--
1 mm
Maximum Plasticity Index
10 pt~r cent
Requirements for bridges, culverts etc. shaii be

spt~cifled in subsequent sections
as
Table 2.7.3.1: Requirements for Backfill Materials

Backfill material shall not be placed against any
3
structure until approval is given. Unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings structures shall be backfilled to the same
requirements as specified for the adjacent embankment.
Backfill shall be placed in level I ayers for the full
4
width of the excavated area until the elevation of the
original ground or surrounding embankment is reached.
Backfill next to walls, between columns or in other
confined areas, shall be compacted by approved hand or
portable equipment.
Each successive layer of backfill shall contain only
5
sufficient material to ensure proper compaction and in no
case shall any layer be greater than 150 mm thickness
(alter compaction). The moisture content of the backfill
material shall be uniform and within the moisture range
designated. Backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of
the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T 180
(Method Dl.
6
Jetting of fills or other hydraulic methods involving
or likely to involve liquid or semi-liquid pressure will not
be permitted.
7
Water shall be drained from the areas to be backfilled
wherever practicable. In cases where, in the opinion of
the Engineer, it is not practicable to drain the areas to be
backfilled, the initial backfill material shall consist of
~~
Ml,latry of Trnnaport & CommunlcnUona DGRLT
../"'--.~<:Earthworks
crushed, open graded material ~onform ing to the

gradation given in Table 2,7.3.2 below:
ASTMSJeve
..
318"
No.4.
No. 30
No. 200
Percentage Passing Size
.,
-
.
100
---
<85
<45
<5
Table 2.7.3.2: Requirements for Open Graded BackfillGradation

Such material may be deposited below the standing water
level without compaction. Above the water level normal
laying and compaction will be considered.
8
Addi!Tonal water to be added during placement of
backfill material to achieve required compaction shall be
fresh water or brackish water approved by the Engineer.
9
Minimum tests required during backfilling operations
to verify material are:
One Proctor test for each structure.
One gradation of materials when materials
changed.
One plasticity index and field density for 50"-i
of the layers and for each footing and
abutment as i nstructed by the Engineer.
2.7.3.2
Backfilling for Box Culverts, Pipe Culverts,

Bridge and Building Foundations, Walls.
Abutments and Miscellaneous Structures
Structures shall not be subject to the pressures of

backfilling or to live loads until the 28-day strength of the
concrete has been reached, unless a shorter period is
approved in speci.t circumstances where the load is
suffiCiently small as not to constitute a risk of any damage
to the structure in the opinion of the Engineer. This period
m ay be extended if subnormal curing condit1ons exist.
2
Backfill placed around culverts shall be deposited on
both sides to approximately the same level at the same
time. Special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging
action against the structure and slopes bounding the
excavation shall be stepped, where necessary. to prevent
such wedge action occurring.
5
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, when
special permeable backfill (sheathing) is to be placed
against the back faces of retaining walls or wing walls, it
shall consist of a continuous covering of approved type
proprietary filter cloth protected by a continuous wall of
200mm minimum thickness precast, porous (no-fines)
concrete blocks laid with dry joints. Prior to construction
of the block wan, ensure that aUunderdrains or perforated
pipes are laid along the base of the wall under the
sheathing, as shown on the Drawings.
Backfill material for culverts, pipe culverts and
6
miscellaneous structures within 300 mm of any part of the
structure shall be Class A-1-a. A-1-b or A-2-4, The 200 mm
mlnlmum thickness of sub-grade layer shall consist of
approved sub-grade material placed and compacted to
100% maximum density as specified under Sub-section
2.6 - 'Sub-grade Construction'. The backfill shall be
completed to the level of the original ground or to the top
elevation of any adjacent embankment.
7
Backf~ling around and over pipe culverts shall not
commence until headwalls and wingwalls have been
constructed and attained the specified 28-day strength.
B
Water used for compaction of backfill around metal
pipes and rei nforced concrete structures shall be from an
approved source and shall not contain more than 0.5%
combined chlorides and sulphates nor contai n other
potentially harmful mi nerals.
9
When pipes or other structut es temporari'ly extend
above the grade of the part ia~ ly constructed embankment,
the Contractor sha ll construct the fill over the structure of
sufficient depth to protect the structure from any damage
resulting from construction or other traffic.
10 The Contractor shall complete the backfill around box
cu'verts t o the level of the original ground line and to the
full width of excavation area. If the top of culvert extends
11bove the orignal ground line the Contractor shall
continue the backfill to the top of culvert and for a w idth of
3 m on each side of the culvert f or the full width of
roadway embankment. If the embankment is in place at
the time of backfilling, the Contractor shall backfill atound
the culvert to the top of embankment
3
An backfill intended to support false work loads,
I ncluding temporary fills shall be selected to support the
required load. As a minimum, such material shall be
AASHTO M 145, Class A-1-a, A-1-b or A-2-4, compacted to
90% of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T
180 (Method 0).
1 1 Backfill around pipe culverts shall be completed to

the level of original ground line and to the full width of
excavation area. If t he top of the culvert extends above
the original ground l ine the Contractor shall continue the
backfill to the top of culvert for a width of 1.5 times the
m aximum external width of the culvert on each side of the
culvert centerline to the f ull width of the roadway
embankment. If the embankment is in place at the time of
backfilling, the Contractor shall backfill around the culvert
to the top of culvert or as shown on the Drawings.
4
Backfill around bridge and building foundations,
abutment walls and retai ning walls shall be completed to
the level of the original ground Iine and to such heights
above original ground line or to the levels as shown on
the Drawings. Care shall be exercised to prevent forward
movement of the wall.
12 Any existing roadway pavement cut through,

damaged or removed during excavation for pipe culvert
Installation shall be reinstated, after pipe installati on and
ttench backfilling, using approved base and surfacing
course m 01terials at least equive.lent to those in the original
pavement. Materials and construction shall conform t o the
218
Sultnbto of Omnn. Stoi><Uord Spe<illcollonolor Rood & Bri. Construcuon 20l~
Earthworks)
relevant requirements
specification.
Sections
and
of
this
13 Miscellaneous structures other than pipe culverts

shall be backfilled in accordance with the methods
specified. Compaction of backfill when structures are
outside the roadway rightofway or in approach roads,
minor roads or similar areas, shall be to 90% of maximum
density as determined by AASHTO T 180 (Method D).
2.7.4
All structural excavation, of whatever type, shall be

measured as 'unclassified' which shaH be deemed to
include all materials encountered of any nature, including
silts, clays, sand, gravel and granular materials and
fractured, jointed and solid rock.
2
Structural excavation is measured by cubic meter of
material excavated for the major structures hauled away
and disposed of as directed, or stockpiled. Measurement
of structural excavaton shall be from original ground
levels or ground levels after removal of all unclassified
highway excavation. Limits shall not be greater than
vertical planes 500 mm from the maximum dimension, on
each side of the footing or other controlling portion of the
structure. Where structures are constructed against
natura I ground or rock, excavation limits shall be the
dimensions of the structure as shown on the Drawings.
Bottom limits shall be the ordered foundation levels. Only
material excavated from its original position shall be
measured for payment. No measurements shall be made
of structural excavation in embankments previously
constructed by the Contractor.
3
Additional excavation in unstable material or other
unsuitable material encountered below foundation level
shall be measured as part of the unclassified structural
excavation.
4
Structural Excavation under Water shall be measured
by cu.m. of material excavated for the major structures,
hauled away and disposed of as directed, or stockpiled on
or in the vicinity of the Works, and the excavated areas
backfilled, completed and accepted.
5
Unauthorized overdepth and overwidth excavation in
soil and rock and the backfill material including blinding
concrete required fn such cases, shall not be measured for
direct payment, but shall be considered as subsidiary work
the costs of which will be deemed to be included in the
rates for structural excavation
6
Structural excavation in any material or under water
for box culverts less than one sq. m. in external cross
section, and structural excavation for pipe culverts,
underdrains (subsoil drains). pits, catchbasins. manholes,
inI ets, energy dissipaters, slope protection, fence posts,
guardrail posts, lighting columns, sign posts, signal
supports and all other minor structures, shall not be
measured for direct payment, but shall be cons dered as
subsidiary work the costs of which will be deemed to be
included in the rates and prices for the relevant items..
7
Unless spec'fied
otherwise in
the special
specifications, temporary cofferdams, tern po ra ry support
system, bailing, dra' nage, dewatering, pumping, sheeting,
concrete blind'ng layers and all other Temporary Works
shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall be
considered as subs' diary work the costs of which will be
deemed to be included in the rates tor structural
excavation.
8
Backfilling to structural excavation shall not be
measured separately but is considered as subsidiary work
the cost of which are deemed to be included in the rates
for structural excavation
9
Any blinding concrete used at the bottom of
excavations, as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by
the Engineer shall be measured and paid for in accordance
with the relevant method of measurement under Clause
5. 1.5 of Section 5 'Concrete and Concrete Structures'.
2.7.5
Basis of Payment

unit rates for the various items in the Bill of Quantities ,
labor. materials, transporting, hauling, placing, and for
work.
2.7.6
l

Unclassified structural excavation
(depth 0 to 2ml
lcu.m.l
ii. Unc,assified structural excavation

12m <depth < 4m)
(cu.m.)
ili. Unclassified structural excavation

(depth>4ml
(cu.m.J
iv. Structural Excavation under Water
(cum.)
2.8
EARTHWORK FOR PIPE

TRENCHES
2.8.1
Description
This Subsection describes requirements for

excavation of trenches in any material for water supply,
sewage, stormwater drainage and irrigation pipes, and all
other associated works, including all necessary clearing
and grubbing, bailing, draining, shoring, planking,
strutting and supporting the sides of excavation. The work
includes backfilling with suitable approved material and
disposal of the excess material to designated and
approved tip locat'ons.
2-19 '
~
~
Mlnltrv of Trnnaport &
/"-.~<:earthworks
2.8.2
Materials
2.8.2.1
Backfill Material
C:ommun~cnUon&
OGRLT
I.
Initial backfill (up to 300 mm above the top of the

pipe) shall be selected fill, sand or other approved material
and shall conform to the fol!owing:
Standln:l
19
Percent by Weight
P-.fng for Plpee
other th.n uJ"IC
'
100
4.76
25- 100
100
1.19
10 - 75
25- 75
0.354
5 - 30
10- 30
0.177
3-10
3 - 10
0.074
0-5
0 -5
Sieve Size
_jmml
Pen:.nt lr(
Wefoht P.A~na '
foruPVCP,J~
Table 2 8 21: Requirements for Initial Backfill Gradation

2
For GAP pipes, graded crushed stone 2.fl3.8 mm shall
be used for initial backfilling.
3
The remainder of the trench shal l be backfilled with
suitable material either from material removed in the
course of excavating the trench, or impor1ed from
approved borrow pit. In either case the backfill materiel
shall be nonplastic. The percentage by weight passing a
No. 200 (0.075 mml sieve shell not exceed 15%. The
percentage passing a 63 mm sieve shall be 100.
2.8.3
Construction
2.8.3.1
Excavation for Pipe Trenches
The Contractor shall not commence excavation of

any section of work until a full supply of pipes and fittings
is avallab1e for that section.
2
During excavation, material suitable for backfilling
shall be piled at sufficient distance from the sides of the
trench as to avoid overloading and prevent cave in. All
excavated material not required. or unsuitable for
backfilling shall be removed and carted away to an
approved dumpng area.
3
Trenches shall be excavated to such depths as will
permit the pipes to be laid at elevations, slopes or depths
of cover indicated on the drawings, and at uniform slopes
between Indicated elevations.
4
Where excavation depth exceeds the level indicated
on the drawings and is not authorized in writing by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall place backfill or concrete to
the required bottom level, as instructed by the Engineer,
all at his own expense.
5
Trenches shall ba excavatld with vertical sides
between the bottom level and 300 mm above the top of
the pipe.
6
Trench width up to 300 mm above the crown of the
pipe shall not exceed the folfowing:
220
For pipes not exceeding 65 mm diameter.

Nominal diameter plus 300 mm.
ii.
For pipes over 65 mm and not exceeding 600
mm diameter: Nominal diameter+ 600 mm.
Iii.
For pipes over 600 mm diameter: Nominal
diameter+ 1000 mm.
7
Where the above specified trench widths are
exceeded; the Contractor shall provide additional pipe
protection or pipes of increased strength if the Engineer
calls for such measures. all at his own expense.
Excavation of trenches with battered sides will not be

permined w ithin 4m of any building or other structure.
9
When the pipes are to be laid in embankments or
other fill areas, the embankment or fill area shall first bo
fllled and compacted as specified to the proposed finished
grade or to a height of at least 300 mm above the top of
pipe whichever is lower. The trench shall then bo
excavated as in undisturbed material.
10 When pipes are to be laid under existing pavements.
trenches shall be excavated carefully and to m inimum
widths. Methods that w WI give straight and ver1ical face
shall be used. The pavement sha:l be kept at its origina l
level and cond;Uon.
1l In combined trenches where one pipe is at a lower
level than an adjacent pipe the following shall be applied:
I.
The whole trench shall have a depth related to
the lower pipe and the thickness ofthe bedding
shall be increased to the upper pipe as
necessary.
li.
The lower pipe shall be backfilled with
thoroughly compacted granular material up to
a level of 0.30 meters above the higher pipe.
12 Final excavation to the correct grade level for trench
beds shall be carried out immediately before laying beds
or pipes. Unstable material, rock projections, boulders and
hard spots shall be removed and replaced with approved
f~ ling material, that will be compacted as instructed. Local
soft spots shall be compacted by tamping In bedding
material.
13 The bonoms of trenches shall be accurately graded
to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom
qua~ant of each section ol the pipe. BeU holes shall be
excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to
eliminate point bearing. Any material that may cause point
bearing shall be removed.
14 The Contractor shall report to the Engineer any
unsuitable or weak ground material that may be found
below the indicated excavation levels before executing
any trimming of the excavation, pipe laying. concreting, or
other work. Where, in the judgment of the Engineer the
bottom of the trench is unsuitable. such material shall be
removed to the width and depth ordered by the Engineer.
The trench shall then be made up by backfilling with
approved material.
t 5 Where rock is encountet ed, the t rench shall be
elCcavated to 150 mm be!ow bed level and replaced with
granular materill, concrete, or blinding grade as directed.
S.'-~o M Omoo. "'~'"'"'""'~' "'''"' 0 ,,... """"""'~
x=
Earthworks)
2.8.3.2
Backfilling
Trenches shall not be backfilled at joints until after

that section of the pipeline has successfully passed the
specified tests.
2
Initial backfill or surround up to a level of 300 mm
above top of the pipe, shall be placed end hand
compacted in 150 mm layers. The backfill shall be brought
up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of
the pipe, Care shall be taken to ensure thorough
compaction ofthe fill under the haunches of the pipe.
3
Suitable backfill shall be placed and well compacted
in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick after compaction.
Heavy compactors shall not be used until there Is 600 mm
cover over pipes.
4
Unless otherwise specified each layer shall be
compacted to at least 95% maximum density for
cohesionless soils and 90% maximum density for cohesive
soils.
5
Backfilling trenches for pipes with concrete beds and
or surrounds shall not start before 24 hours after placing
concrete. Heavy compactors shall not be used and traffic
shall not be allowed before the elapse of 72 hours after
placing the concrete.
6
When the backfill material is too wet from rain or
excessive application of water, no compaction shall be
done. In this case the work shall be suspended until the
previously placed and new materials have dried
sufficiently to permit proper compaction. Other measures
shall be taken if necessary to obtain proper compaction.
7
Temporary crossing are to be provided over trenches
to prevent construction traffic damaging pipes after
backfilling.
2.8.3.3
Restoration of Surfaces
Restoration of asphalt, concrete, gravel pavements

and the likes shall be of materials and thickness to match
the existing pavement. Materials and workmanship shall
be in accordance with local authority requirements and as
2
Restoration of pavement shall be done according to
the existing pavement quality and level to ensure that new
pavement matches the existing to provide uniform surface
with the existing profile.
3
Grassed areas shall be restored by spreading
approved fertile soil over affected area after backfilling.
Seeding. fertilizers and water shall be applied until grass is
restored to its former condition.
4
Surface grading shall be carried out to restore all un
surfaced areas and any adjoining areas disturbed to
provide a level, smooth surface.
5
The Contractor shall proceed with restoration of
surfaces as soon after completion of other work as is
practicable, but in no case more than 10 days after
backfilling of trenches and other excavated areas.
Restoration shall be completed within 20 days from the
start of restoration.
2.8.4
Trench excavation and backfill shall be paid for per

cu.m. measured in horizontal layers for the different depth
categories shown in the Bill of Quantities. Trench length
shall be measured between outer surfaces of manholes or
chambers. Trench width shall be as specified or shown on
Drawings. Depth of excavation shall be the depth of every
horizontal layer. Excavation for bedding is included as
trench excavation.
2
Rates for trench excavation and backfill shall include
for:
i.
Excavating in any material encountered
including rock.
Blasting, barring, wedging or other quarrying
ii.
methods for rock excavation.
El<cavation et any level.
iii.
iv.
E)(cavating curved on plan.
v.
Allowance for working space.
Increase In bulk for e)(cavating.
vi.
vii. Excavating below water table and dewatering
as necessary.
viii. Keeping excavations free from water.
ix.
Leveling, compacting, trimming and grading
bonoms and trimming sides and bonoms of
excavation.
x.
Supporting the sides of excavation.
xi.
Filling with material as specified and
compacting around pipes and beds multiple
handling of excavated material and excavation
from borrows and transporting about the Site.
xii. Segregation of the various classes of excavated
spoil and stock piling as may be directed by the
Engineer.
xiii. Disposal of surplus e~<cavated material
including depositing and consolidating where
directed on Site or removing from Site and
depositing at a tip to be provided and paid for
by the Contractor.
xiv. Pipe bedding, initial backfill or gravel, and final
backfilL
xv. Filling over-excavation with material as
specified
xvi. Consolidation of primary backfill (initial
backfill) material using water or hand tamping.
xvii. Compaction of secondary backfill (main
backfill) material.
xviii. Reinstatement
of
unpaved
surfaces.
(Reinstatement of paved surfaces shall be
made and paid for according to Sections 4 or
12 as appropriate)
2.8.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed end accepted work,

unit rates for the various items in the Bill of Quantities,
labor, materials, transporting, hauling. placing, and for
221
~~
Mtnitrv ot Trnnaport & Comnunkntlon&
OG~LT
~~<:Earthworks

work.
2.8.6
i.
1i
~~
lv
Trench excavation and

2-2.2
backfilling (Depth up to 2m I
backfilling (Depth> 2m< 3m)
backfilling (Depth >3m < 4ml
backfilling (Depth> 4m)
Ref.
11tle
3.1
Materials for Sub-Base

and Base Courses
Page No.
3.3.3.8
3-1
3.1 .1
Description
3-1
3.1.2
Mattrillls
3.1.3
3.13.1
Genen~l
3-1
3-1
31.3.2
Requirementa lor Materlllll

Sources end P.rocluctlon
Stockpiling
3.1.3.3
Sampling and Testng
3.2
Granular Sub-Base Course
3.2.1
Description
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Materials
CoMtNc:tlon Requlrementa
Subgrade Surface Preperetion
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3.2.3.2
Equipment
3-2
3-2
3-3
3.2.3.3
3.2.3.4
3.2.3.5
Construction ofTrial Sections

Stockpiling of Granullll' Material
Mixing and Spreading
3-3
3-3
3.2.3.6
Compaction
3.2.3.7
3.2.3.8
Tolerances
Maintenance of Completed Sub-base
Testing
3.2.3.9
32.4
3"3
3-3
3-4
3-4
S-4
3.2.5
3.2.6
Bal1 of Payment
3-4
3--4
ltema In the Bill of Ouantltlea
3-4
3.3
Aggregate Base Course
3-5
3.3.1
o..cripllon
3-6
3.3.2
3.3.21
Meterillb
3.3.3
Conmuc:tion Requirementa
Crushed Stone Aggregate
3-6
3-5
H
3.3.3.1
Suriece Preparation
3-6
3.3.3.2
3.3.3.3
Equipment
Construction of Trial Sections
3-6
3-6
Jl.6
3.3.3.4
3.3.3.5
3.3.3.6
Stockpiling of Aggregate Materiels

Compaction
3.3.3.7
Tolerances
Ref.
3-8
3-8
3-7
3.3.3.9
3.3.4
Toitle
Page No.
Maintenance of Completed Base

Testing
3i7
3-7
Method of Menurement
Balls of Payment
3-8
3-8
ltema In the 8111 of Ouantltlee
318
3.4
Stabilized Base Courses
3-8
3.4.1
Description
3.4.2
3.4.21
Material
Soli for Cement Stabilisation
3-8
3-8
3.4.2.2
Cement as Stabilising Agent
3.4.2.3
3.4.2.4
3.4.2.5
B tumen as Stabilising Agent

Ume as Stabilising Agent
Water
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.4.2.6
3.A.3
3 4 3.1
3.4.3.2
Mix Design
Conatruellon Requlrementa
Surfaee Preparation
Construction of Trial Seetlon
3l8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3"9
3-t
3-9
3-9
3.4.3.3
Cement Stebihsetion Procedures -
3.4.3.4
Plant Mixing
Cement Stabi isetion Procedures
Batch MiiCing
3-10
3.4.3.5
Cement Stablisetion Procedures .

Continuous Mixing
3-10
3.4.3.6
Cement Stabilisation Procedures

Mixed in Pleee Proeeclures
Cement Stabtl sat1on Procedures
3-10
Piecing of Stationary Plant Mixes
3i11
3.4.3.7
3-10
34 3.8
Cement Stabilisation Procedures

Compaction and Finish1ng
3.4.3.9
Curing of-Cement Stabilised Courses
3.4 3.10
3.4.3.11
Testing of Cement Stabilised Courses 3-12

Bitumen Stabilisation Procedures
M'xOesign
Bitumen Stebilsetion Proeeclures -
3-12
3.4.3.12
Stationary Plant Mi!dng
:J.12
S.tumen Stabilisation Procedures

Mixed in Place Procedures
3-12
3.4.3.13
3-11
3-12
Ref.
3.4.3.14
3.4.3.15
3.4.3,16
3.4.3,17
3.4.3.18
3.4.3.19
3.4.3.20
3.4.3.21
3.4.3.22
3.4.3.23
3.4.3.24
3.4.3.25
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
Title,
Page No.
Bitumen Stabilisation Procedures

Pl~~eing and Spreading Stationary
Plant Mixes
Bitumen Staliilisation Procedures Compaction end Finishing
Bitumen ~tabilil!ltion Procedures Tolerances and Replacement
of Unsatisfactory Areas
Bitumen Stabilisation Procedures T.;inQ of Bitum~n Statillised Courses
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
Lime Stabilisation P.rocedures

3-13
Mfx Design
Ume Stabilisation Procedures - Safety
3>13
Precautions
Ume Stabilisation Procedures
Station~~ry Plant Mixing
l-13
Ume Stabilisation Procedures Mbced
3-13
in Place Procedures
Ume Stabilisation l"toc::edures - Placing
llfld Spreading St~tionary Plant Mixes 3-13
Ume Stabilisation Procedures
Compaction and Finishing
3-13
Ume Stabilisation Procedures Tolerencesand Replacement
3-13
of Uns.atisfactory Anlas
Testing of Lime Statillised Courses
3-14
3-14
3-14
Balis of Peyment
3-14
ltema In the Bill of Quantities
Sultanate or Omn. St1'1d1rd Specific~!ont for F!Md I< Brldg. Co11<u uc:tion 2fl10
Gr anular Sub-Base. Aggregate Base Course and Stabi lized Base Courses
3.1
3.1.1
Materials for Sub-Base and Base

Courses
Description
This Sub-section describes general requirements for

materials for construction of granular sub-base, aggregate
base and stabilised base courses, all as and where shown
on the drawings.
3.1.2
Materials
Materials for use in the construction of the sub-base

and base courses for flexible and rigid pavements may
Include any or all of the following:
I.
Screened or partially crushed granular material,
consisting of well graded gravel including sand
and silt, or crushed stone or crushed gravel for
sub-base course construction.
ii.
Crushed stone for base course construction.
2
All material sources and the quality of materials shall
be approved prior to procuring or processing material
from such sources. Inspection, sampling, testing and
retasting as necessary, shall be as specified hereunder for
specific materials.
3
Storage and handling of all materials shall conform
to the relevant requirements of this specification and as
approved by the Engineer. Materials shall be stored on
hard, clean surfaces or as directed by the Engineer.
3.1.3
General Requirements for Materials
3.1.3.1
Sources and Production
The Contractor shall be responsible for locating

sources and manufacturers of materials In accordance
with the requirements of this Specification in the
quantities and rates of production needed to complete the
work on time.
2
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the location,
suitability and quantity of materials available; extent of
work necessary to obtain the materials, and to crush,
screen and wash them; and the length of haul to the Site.
3
Prior to starting quarry or borrow pit operations; the
Contractor shall obtain written permission from the
authorities or owners concerned.
4
Screening plants or crushing and screening pi ants
shall not be put into operation until approved by the
Engineer. If, after any plant Is put into operation, it fails to
perform as intended, the Contractor shalt either rectify the
defects in the existing plant to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, or shall provide alternative approved plant.
5
Approval of the crushing and screening plants and
other equipment shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibi lilies in respect of producing granular
materials and aggregates which conform to this
Specification and in the quantities required for the
completion of the work on time.
3.1.3.2
Stockpiling
Stockpile areas shall be surveyed prior to stockpiling

to establish control points and to obtain e record of
existing cross sections for future use in determining
stockpile quantities. The areas shall be adequately drained
at all times.
2
Stock pi ling procedures shall not result in noticeable
degradation or segregation of the stockpiled material, or
introduction of foreign materials into the stockpile, or
coning. Heights of granular material and aggregate
stockpiles shall not exceed 3 m berms.
3.1.3.3
Sampling and Testing
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, 10 days

prior to the scheduled beginning of crushing and
screening operations, a statement of origin indicating the
aggregate source and the quarry location and
qualifications, as well as the types and composition of all
stone and/or gravel aggregates and granular materials
proposed for use In the work.
2
Samples for testing shall be taken by the Contractor,
in the presence of the Engineer. Duplicate samples shall
be submitted to the Engineer for future reference, if
instructed. Sampling shall be in accordance with AASHTO
T2. The Contractor shall conduct the tests in the site
laboratory, or have the tests carried out at an approved
external laboratory.
In order to ascertain the properties of granular and
3
aggregate materials, the Contractor shall submit for
testing representative samples of all materials intended
for incorporation in the work, prior to starting quarry or
borrow pit operations. The representative samples shall
be taken by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
4
Tests performed by the Contractor shall be uti Iized in
assessing the locations, extent of deposits and quantities
of materials which, when properly processed, will conform
to this Specification, and shall In no way obviate the need
for further testing by the Engineer. Approval of specific
sources of materials shall not be construed as final
approval and acceptance of materials from such sources.
5
Processed materials shall be tested and approved
before being stockpiled on Site or incorporated in the
work and may be inspected and tested at any time during
their preparation, storage and usa. Materials aweiting
testing and approval shall not be unloaded and mixed
with materials previously approved. If the grading and
quality of any materials delivered to the Site do not
conform to the grading and quality of the established
control samples, the Engineer will reject such materials.
6
The Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect
any and all materials used or to be used, at any time
during or after their preparation, or while being used..
Unsatisfactory materials, whether in place or not. shall be
removed promptly from the Site. The Contractor shall
furnish all necessary labor, transport, tools and equipment
required by the Engineer for such inspections.
3-1
~~
Mlniatrv of Tranapof't & Communlcatlona. OGRLT
~~<Granular and Stabilised Subbase,
Basecourse and Stabilised Subgrade
3.2
Granular Sub-Base Course
accordance with AASHTO T 96 (Los Angeles Abrasion

Test).
3.2.1
Description
6
The granular material shall have a 4-day soaked CBR
of not less than 60% when compacted at 100% of modified
proctor AASHTO IT 180-DI and tested In accordance with
AASHTO T 193.
This Sub-section specifies standards for granular

sub-base material, mixing, spreading on prepared
subgrade, compacting and finishing.
3.2.2
Materials
Granular material for use in sub-base courses shall

be naturally occurring gravel, blended as necessary with
fine or coarse material and screened to produce the
specified gradation. Crushing of natural granular material
shall not normally be required, unless for the purpose of
meeting the gradation requirements, or, when shown on
the Drawings, to produce a higher quality sub-base with
improved mechanical stability.
2
Gravel shall consist of hard, durable and sound
stones, free from dirt, organic maner, shale or other
deleterious substances.
3
Granular materials shall meet the requirements of
Class A, B or C shown in Table 3.2,2.1, and as specified on
the Drawings, when tested In accordance with AASHTO T27 after dry mixing and just before spraading and
compacting. The class of granular material shall be as
shown on the Drawlngs or otherwise as selected by the
Engineer based upon the test results of the materials
survey, and projected traffic. The actual gradation shall, in
all cases, be conti nuous and smooth within the specified
limits for each cla$5.
P.eraent l:ly weight p_.lng
Sleve ~n
(aquare opening~)
50mm
90- 100
37.:5mm
25'm m
19mm
~-
4>
9.5mm
I~
4.76mm
2.00 mm
0.425mm
o.o75mm
~ -
55
- 85
...__..._
~-~~
- ~1
,___
50.85
- - . 40 - 70
-35-70
35-65
30 60
1 -
20 - 50
25-50
L__:_
10 - 30
15-30
5 15
5-15
r- -
100
__..
0-10
Table 3.2.2.1: Gradation of Granular Sub-Base Material by

Class
4
The material shall not contain more than 5% clay
content .at any stage of construction when tested in the
Hydrometer Test in accordance with AASHTO T88.
5
The loss In weight of granular material shell not
exceed 40% after 500 revolutions, when tested in
3-2 .
12 The maximum permitted swell for the granular

material used in the subbase courses shell be 1.0%, when
tested in accordance with ASTM 04829.
14 Only potable water shall be used for mixing granular

subbase material.
t
r.L
11 The granular material shall have a minimum sand

equivalent value of 28. when tested in accordance with
ASTM 02419.
_..._ ,
;---
100
10 The granular material shall not contain more than

3 % gypsum and shall be free from organic content.
13 The Granular Sub-base Course material sha ll have

chloride content of less than 3.5 percent and sulphate
content of less than 2.0 percent when tested in accordance
with BS 812.
o... c
63mm
9
If additional fine material Is required to correct the
gradation of the granular material, or for adjusting the LL
or P.l. of the fraction passing 0.425 mm (No 401 sieve. It
shall be uniformly blended and mixed with the granular
material. Additional fine material for these purposes shall
be obtained from the crushing of stone, gravel. or slag.
ClaB
8
The portion of granular material, including any
blended material, passing the 0.425 mm (No. 401 mesh
sieve shall have a liquid limit ILL.) of not more than 25
and a plasticity Index (P.I.) not greater than 6 when tested
iruccordance with AASHTO T 89 and T 90.
CI... A
When tested for soundness in accordance with

7
AASHTO T 104, the material shall not show signs of
disintegration, and the percentage loss in weight after 5
cycles shall not exceed 12% in the case of the sodium
sulfate test and 18" In the case of the magnesium sulfate
test.
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Subgrade Surface Preparation
Prior to subgrade surface preparation, the sub-grade

shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
of Sub-section 2.6 and properly maintained and kept well
drained thereafter.
2
At all special grade control points, such as at bridge
structures, existing pavements, etc the sub-grade shall be
lowered to a depth sufficient to permit construction of the
sub-base course to the specified elevations and thickness.
Transitions shall be of sufficient length to avoid abrupt
changes of grade and shall be within plus or minus 3% of
the final design grade unless otherwise directed. Surplus
materia l shall be removed and disposed of.
3
The sub-grade shall be inspected and approved
Immediately prior to commencement of sub-base
construction. Any soft, yielding material shall be removed
Sultanate ol Oman, St<oodrd Speofications far R4od & Bndge Ccnttr~on 21)1 0
Granular
Sub~Base.
Aggregate Base Course and Stabilized Base Courses
and replaced by approved topping material. Holes,

depressions and other irregularities shall be made good as
directed and the subgrade re-compacted as necessary end
finished ready to receive the sub-base course.
3.2.3.2
Equipment
1
Equipment used to handle. place, spread, water,
compact and finish sub-base shall conform with the
requirements of Section 19 of these Specifications and
with the Contractor's approved equipment list.
3.2.3.3
1
If directed by the Engineer, before commencement of
subbase construction, the Contractor shall lay and
compact trial sections of varying thickness of sub-base.
Each trial section shall be 2 lanes wide by 50 m long, at
approved locations on or close to the Site. Each trial
section shall be laid using the same materials. mix
proportions,
m1x1ng, spreading
and
compaction
equipment, and construction procedures. proposed for
use in the work.
2
The objectives of these trials shall be to determine
the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment and the loose
depth measurements that witt result in the specified
compacted layer depths, to verify the field moisture
content, end to identify the relationship between the
number of compaction passes and the resulting density of
the su b-bese material.
3.2.3.4
Stockpiling of Granular Material
Stockpiling procedures shall

requirements of Sub-section 3.1.
conform
to
the
2
Methods used for stockpiling granular material and
removing it from stockpiles shall not result in significant
degradation or segregation or the introduction of
sig nificent amounts of foreign materials or extraneous
maner.
3
Granular material adversely effected, in the opinion
of the Engineer, by stockpiling or handling procedures,
shall not be incorporated in the work regardless of
previous approval of such material, until the deficiencies
have been rectified in an acceptable manner.
3.2.3.5
Mixing shall generally be performed in hatching

plants. Mixing in stockpiles shall be done only if approved
by the Engineer and under his supervision. The amount of
water added, as approved by the Engineer, shall be such
that the material will be uniform and within the specified
moisture content range at the time of compaction.
Weni ng of granular material in trucks before or during
delivery to the Site will not be permined. However, water
shall be added to the material, if necessary, during placing
and compaction of subbase material.
2
The sub-base material shall be placed on the
subgrade in a uniform layer or layers not exceeding 200
mm thickness (after compaction) with the necessary
control guide wire requirements. Where the required

thickness is greater than 200 mm but less than 400 mm.
the material shall be placed in layers of equal thickness.
3
If approved by the Engineer, when heavy duty
vibratory compaction equipment is used the maximum
layer thickness may be increased up to 300 mm {after
compaction) provided compaction tests with appropriate
testing equipment based on successful Site trials indicate
that the specified compaction standard will be anained
and will be uniform through the thickness.
4
The subbase material shall be placed to the required
width using an approved paver/finisher or grader if
approved by the Engineer. However, any pavers or
graders used for placing the sub-base material shall be
equipped with calibrated sensors to maintain the design
levels and thicknesses.
Water shall be applied by
approved spraying equipment and thoroughly mixed with
the sub-base material.
5
The material shall not be handled in such a way as to
cause segregation. If the spreading equipment causes
segregation in the material, or leaves ridges or other
objectionable marks on the surface which cannot be
readily eliminated or prevented by adjustment of the
equipment, the use of such equipment shall be
discontinued and it shall be replaced by a spreader or
grader cape ble of spreading the material in a proper
manner.
All segregated material shall be removed and
6
replaced with wellgraded material. 'Skin' patching will
not be permined. Only minor surface manipulation and
watering to achieve the required surface tolerances will be
permitted during the compaction process.
7
Neither hauling nor placement of material will be
permined when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the
weather or surface conditions are such that hau Iing
operations will cause cutting or rutting of the subgrade or
cause contamination of the sub-base material.
3.2.3.6
Compaction
The Contractor shall plan the sequence of operations

so that the least amount of water will be lost by
evaporation from uncompleted surfaces.
If the
uncompleted surface material loses water due to
evaporation, the Contractor shall appty additional water as
required to prevent raveling or excessive drying.
2
The sub base materiel shall be compacted by means
of approved compaction equipment. progressing
gradually from the outside towards the center, with each
succeeding pass uniformly overlapping the previous pass.
3
Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness of
each sub-base layer is tho roughly and uniformly
compacted to 100% AASHTO T 180 (Method 0) maximum
density. Final rolling of the completed course shalf be by
means of an approved self-propelled roller. Rolling shall
be accompanied by sufficient blading. to insure a smooth
surface, free from ruts or ridges and having the proper
3-3
~
~
Ministry of Tronopon & Commurolcotlona
OGRLT
../"".
~<:Granular and Stabilised Subbase. Basecourse and Stabilised Subgrade
shape. When additional water is required, It snail be

applied in an approved manner.
4
Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction
equipment snail be compacted by use of ponable
mechanical tampers until tne required standard of
compaction is achieved.
5
Each layer shall be completely compacted and
approved prior to delivery of materials for the subsequent
tayer.
6
Prior to placing a subsequent layer, the existing
surface shall be made sufficiently moist as directed, to
ensure proper bond between the layers.
7
The edges and edge slopes of the sub-base course
shall be bladed or otherwise dressed to conform to the
lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings and to
present straight, neat lines and slopes as free of loose
material as practicable.
8
Material which has dried out prior to final
compaction, or which has dr1ed and de-compacted
subsequent to final compaction, shall be watered and recompacted using approved equipment and procedures. If
the Contractor is unable to return the material to its
original or specified condition with respect to compaction,
thickness end surface tolerances, the Contractor shall
remove the material and reconstruct the sub-base course
on a re-approved subgrade.
9
The water shall be clean and free from deleterious
substances. Water from doubtful sources shall not be used
until tested in accordance with AASHTO T26 and approved.
10 Sea, brackish or saline water shall not be used In the
mixing, spreading end compacting operations for
aggregate sub-base coursEL
3.2.3.7
Tolerances
The fully compacted and completed sub-base course

shall conform to the lines, grades and cross sections as
shown on tne Drawings.
2
The elevations of the finished sub base course shall
be checked by the Contractor in tne presence of the
Engineer at maximum intervals of 20 m and at
intermediate points as directed.
3
The tolerances on elevations of finished surface shall
be plus 10 mm to minus 20 mm. Minus tolerance shall be
compensated by the subsequent layer.
4
When the finished surface is test ed with a 3 m long
straightedge, placed parallel to, or at right angles to the
centerl!ne, the maximum deviation ofthe surface from the
testing edge between any 2 contact points shall not
exceed 10 mm.
5
All areas which exceed the specified tolerances shall
be corrected by removing the defective sections of sub
base and reconstructing tnem or, if approved, by
scarifying, adding new material, or removing extra
mat erial, mixing and re-compacting and finishing to the
specified standard.
3-4
3.2.3.8
Maintenance of Completed Sub-base
Following completion and acceptance of tne subbase course, it snail be maintained in good condition prior
to laying the base course .. The subbase shall be bladed.
broomed end otherwise maintained, keeping it free from
raveling and other defects until such time as the base
course is placed. Water shall be app!ied at sucn times and
in such quantities as directed by the Engineer.
3.2.3.9
Testing
Every 1000 cu.m . of subbase material, or whenever

there is a change In the material source. shall be subject to
a full set of tests as listed in Table 3.3.3.1 after placing and,
if found satisfactory. shan be approved for compaction.
This approval shall not be deemed to constitute
acceptance of the sub-base course.
2
Sampling and testing shall conform with tne relevant
requirements of this specifica tion and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
3
Compacti on shall be tested in accordance with
AASHTO T 191 or AASHTO T 205. If there is a delay
between the construction of any layer and the following
layer, if necessary and required by the Engi near the
compaction of the lower layer may be re verined t o ensure
that it has not loosened due to traffic, passage of
construction equipment, adverse weather conditions or
otherwise.
3.2.4
Granular sub-base course is measured by cu m. of

compacted sub-base. Measurement shalt be of volumes
computed from the cross sections shown on the Drawi ngs
and shall be calculated from the top surface area of each
layer, excluding the tapered edges..
2
No measurement shall be made for direct payment of
overdepth construction, regardless of the Engineer's
permission for it to remain In place.
3.2.5
Basis of Payment

labor, locating sources of supply, supplying materials,
sampling and testing, screening, crushing. transporting,
stockpiling, laying, mixing end compacting and for extra
material in tapered edges, and other items necessary for
the proper completion ofthe work.
3.2.6
i.
Granular Sub Base Course (Class AI
cu.m
ii.
Granu lar Sub-Base Course (Class Bl
cu.m
iii.
Granular SubBase Course (Class Cl
cu.m
Granular Sub-Base, Aggregate Bas e Cours e and Stabilized Base Courses
3.3
Aggregate Base Course
3.3.1
Description
This Sub-section specifies standards for crushed

aggregate base course material, mixing, spreading on
prepared sub-base course or sub-grade, compacting and
finishing.
3.3.2
Materials
3.3.2.1
Crushed Stone Aggregate
9
The crushed aggregate base course material shall
have a 4-day soaked CBR of not less than 80% when
compacted at 100% of modified proctor AASHTO (T180 Dl
and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 193.
Per cent bv -loht paulng
Sieve Duignlltlon t-(.qure openfnga)
Class A
ClnsB
ClassC
Aggregate for use in base course construction shall

be either crushed stone or crushed gravel. The fine
aggregate shall consist of screenings obtained from
crushed stone, gravel, or sand. Aggregate may be washed,
if directed, to remove excessive quantities of clay, silty
clay or Slllts.
2
Crushed stone shall consist of hard, durable particles
or fragments of stone, free from dirt or other objectionable
matter, and shalt contain no more than B% of flat,
elongated particles when tested according to ASTM 04791
and, soft. or disintegrated pieces when tested according to
ASTM C235 and C123.
3
Crushed gravel shall consist of hard durable stones,
rocks, and boulders crushed to specified sizes and shall be
free from excess flat, elongated. soft or disintegrated
pieces, dirt. or other objectionable matter
4
The method used in production of crushed gravel
shall be such that the finished product shall be as uniform
as practicable. The crushing of the gravel shall result in a
product, which shall have at least 90% by weight of
particles with at least one fractured face. All stones, rocks,
and boulders of inferior quality occurring in the pit shall
be wasted.
5
Any material passing 4.75 mm (No. 41 sieve and
produced in the crushing process shall be incorporated in
the base material up to the gradation limits required for
the base course aggregate.
6
Crushed aggregate for base course delivered to road
site shall meet the requirements of Class A, 8 or C
gradations as shown In Table 3.3.2.1 when tested In
accordance with AASHTO T 27 after mixing with water
and just before spreading and prior to compacting. The
class of aggregate shall be as shown on the Drawings. The
actual gradation shall, in all cases, be continuous and
smooth within the specified limits for each class. Gap
graded aggregate will not be accepted. If gradation is
tested after compaction a tolerance of 3% is allowed in
upper limit for percentage of material passing sieve 200.
7
The amount of the fraction of material passing the
0.075mm (No. 200) mesh sieve shall not exceed one half
the fraction passing the 0.425mm (No. 40) mesh sieve.
8
The loss In weight shall not exceed 40% after 500
revolutions, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96
(los Angeles Abrasion Test).
.
-
63mm
100
50mm
90-100
37.5mm
60-90
100
2Smm
42-77
60-100
100
19mm
35-70
55-85
B0-100
12.5 mm
25-60
4.75mm
15-40
2.00mm
10-25
0.425mm
5-15
o.o75mm
2-9
--
- - 20-45
25 50
15 30
35-60
30-60
8 15
3-10
Table 3.3.2.1; Gradation by Class of Aggregate Base

Couree
10 When tested for soundness in accordance with
AASHTO T 104, the material shall nat show signs of
disintegration and the loss by weight shall not exceed 12%
in the case of the sodium sulfate test and 18% in the case
of the magnesium sulfate test.
11 The aggregate material shall not contain more than
2% gypsum and shall be free from organic content
12 The aggregate material shall have a minimum sand
equivalent value of 50, when tasted in accordance with
ASTM 02419.
13 The maximum permitted swell for the aggregate
material used in the base courses shall be 0.5%, when
tested in accordance with ASTM 04829.
14 The portion of aggregate, including any blended
material, passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) mesh sieve shall
have a liquid limit (LL) of not more than 25 and plasticity
index (P.I) of not more than 6 when tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 89 and T 90.
15 If additional fine material is required to correct the
aggregate gradation, or for adjusting the LL or P.l. of the
fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. it shall be
uniformly blended and mixed with the aggregate material
plant at the crushing plant or by an approved plant.
Reworking of the material in situ to obtain the specified
gradation will not be permitted. Additional fine material
for these purposes shall be obtained from tha crushing of
stone, gravel, or slag.
16 The Aggregate Base Course material shall have
chloride content of less than 3 5 percent and sulphate
content of less than 2.0 percent when tested In accordance
with BS 81 2.
315
~~
Mlnlatry of Tronaport & Communication
DGRLT
/"-.~<:Granular end Stabilised Subbase,
17 Only potable water shall

aggregate base material.
Basecourse end Stabilised Subgrade
be used for mixing
3.3.3
3.3.3.1
Surface Preparation
The sub-base course shall be in accordance w ith the

requi rements of Sub-section 3.2 and properly maintained
and leapt well drained thereafter.
2
The sub-base surface shall be inspected and
approved prior to commencement of base construction.
Holes, depressions and other irregularities shall be made
good as directed and the sub-base re-compacted as
necessary and finished ready to receive the base course.
3
Where no sub-base course Is required or shown on
the Drawings, and the aggregate base course is placed
d>recUy on completed sub-grade, preparation of the
subgrllde surface shall be as specified In Paragraph 3.2.3.1.
3.3.3.2
Equipment
Equipment used to handle, place, spread, water,

compact and finish base course shall conform with the
requirements of Section 19 and with the Contractor's
approved equipment list.
3.3.3.3
If directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall lay

and compact trial sections of varying thickness of basa.
Each trial section shall be 2 lanes wide by 50 m long, at
approved locations on or close to the Site. Each trial
section shall be laid using the same materials, mix
mixing.
spreading
and compaction
proportions,
equipment, and construction procedures, proposed for
use in the Works.
2
the adequacy of the Contractors equipment and the loose
depth measurements that will result in the speci fied
compacted layer depths, to verify the field moisture
content for compaction, and to identify the relationship
between the number of compaction passes and the
resulting density of the base course material
3.3.3.4
Stockpiling of Aggregate Materials
Stockpiling procedures shall conform to the relevant

requirements of Sub-section 3. 1.
2
Methods used for stockpiling ~ggr898te materials
and removing them from stockpiles shall not result in
significant degradation or introduction of significant
amounts of foreign materials or extraneous metter.
3
Aggregate materiels adversely affected. in the
opinion of the 'E'nglneer, by stockpiHng or handling
procedu res, shall not be incorporated in the work
regardless of previous approval of such material, until the
deficiencies have been rectified In an acceptable manner.
J.6
3.3.3.5
All components of base course material shall be

premixed with water in a pugmill mixing plant. The
amount of water added, as determined, shall be such that
t he material will be uniform and within the specified
moisture content range at the time of compaction. Other
methods of mixing will be allowed only if directed by the
Engineer, provided such met hodlsl do not reduce t he
quality of work. The Contractor shall demonstrate, In the
presence of the Engineer, his ability to attain the
requirement given ln this Specification.
2
The premixed material shall be placed on the subbase In a uniform layer or layers not exceeding 200 mm in
thickness !after compaction) with the necessary control
guide wire requirements. Where the required thickness is
greater than 220 mm but less than 400 mm, the material
shall be placed In layers of equal thickness.
3
If approved by the Engineer when heavy duty
vibratory compaction equipment is used, the maximum
layer thickness may be incteased up to 300 mm (after
compaction) provided compaction tests with appropriate
testing equipment based on successful Site trials indicate
that the specified compaction standard w WI be attained
and will be uniform through the thickness.
4
The base course materiel shall be placed to the
required width using an approved paver/finisher. However,
any pavers or finishers used for placing the base material
shall be equipped with calibrated sensors to maintain the
design levels and thicknesses. The material shall be
delivered such that It Is ready for compaction without
further shaping.
5
The material shall not be handled In such a way as to
cause segregation. If the spreader causes segregation in
the material, or leaves ridges or ot her objectionable marks
on the surface which cannot be readily eliminated or
prevented by adjustment of the spreader operation, the
use of such sp reader shatl be discontinued and it sha be
replaced by a spreader capable of spreading the material
in a proper manner.
All segregated material shall be removed and
6
replaced with well-graded material. 'Skin' patching will
not be permitted. Only mi nor surface manipulation and
watering to achieve the required surface tolerances will be
permitted dwing the compaction process.
Hauling or placement of material will not be
7
permitted when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the
weather or surface conditions are such that hauling
operations will cause cutti ng or rutting of the sub-base or
subgrade or cause contamination of the base course
material.
3.3.3.6
Compaction
The Contractor shall plan the sequence of operations

so that the least amount of water will be lost by
evaporation from uncompleted surfaces.
If the
uncompleted surface loses weter due to evaporation, the
Sultannt of Oman. St>1'111.1rd Spoaf.at.ons lor flood & BndG C<!nllfLICI!c;
Granular Sub-Base. Aggregate Base Course and Stabilized Base Courses
Contractor shall apply additional water as required to

prevent raveling or eKcessive drying..
2
The base course material shall be compacted by
means of approved compaction equipment, progressing
gradually from the outside towards the center, with each
succeeding pass uniformly overlapping the previous pass.
3
Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness of
each base layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted to
100% AASHTO T 180 (Method 0) maximum density. Final
rolling of the completed course shall be by means of an
Rolling shall be
approved self-propelled roller.
accompanied by sufficient blading, to ensure 11 smooth
surface, free from ruts or ridges 11nd having the proper
shape. When additional water Is required, it shall be
applied in an approved manner.
Any areas inaccessible to normal compaction

equipment shall be compacted by use of portable
mechanical tampers until the required standard of
compaction is achieved, or to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Each laver shall be completely compacted and

approved prior to delivery of materials for the following
laver.
6
Prior to placing a following layer, the surface shall be
made sufficiently moist as directed, to ensure proper bond
between t he lavers.
The edges and edge slopes of the base course shall

be bladed or otherwise dressed to conform to the lines
and dimensions shown on the Drawings and to present
straight, neat lines and slopes as free of loose material as
practicable.
8
Material which has dried out prior to final
compaction, or which has dried and de-compacted
subsequent to final compaction, shall be watered and recompacted using approved equipment and procedures. If
the Contractor is unable to return the material to its
original or specified condition with respect to compaction,
thickness and surface tolerances, for the final layer only
the Contractor shall scarify the material and reconstruct
the base course on a re-approved sub-base surface or to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.3.3.7
Tolerances
5
The tolerances on layer thickness, after being
compacted and finished, shall not exceed +10mm and
5mm.
6
The thickness of the finished base course shall be
checked at 20m intervals along the road by taking levels
on the centerline and both shoulders.
7
All areas which exceed the specified tolerances shall
be corrected by removing the defective sections of base
course and reconstructing them or if approved, by
scarifying and adding new material, or removing extra
material, and re~ompacting and finishing to the specified
standard.
3.3.3.8
Maintenance of Completed Bass Course
Following completion and acceptance of the base

course, it shall be maintained by the Contractor until the
subsequent pavement layers are laid .. The surface shall be
broomed, rolled and otherwise maintained, keeping it free
from raveling and other defects until such time as the
following course is placed. Water shall be applied at such
times and in such quantities as directed.
3.3.3.9
Testing
Every 1000 cu.m. of base course material, or

whenever there is a change in the material source, shall be
subject to a full set of tests as listed in Table 3.3.3.1 after
placing and if satisfactory shall be approved for
compaction and use. This approval shall not be deemed
to constitute acceptance of the base course for full
payment purposes.
Source of M.t.-fe..
Re!*ldon
Required
Required
RequJr.cl
T..te
foreH
T..teln
1'nta
IAI
2
The elevations of the finished base course shall be
checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
at intervals of 20m on straight lines and of 10 m on curves,
and at intermediate points as directed.
3
The tolerances (for final layer only) on elevations of
finished surface shall not exceed +5mm or -10mm.
4
When the finished surface is tested with a 4 m long
centerline, the maKimum deviation of the surface from the
eKceed tOmm.
~n
Required for
eJITest.ln
IBI
IBI
IAI
1.Gradation
of Materials
AASHTO
T27
2.Piasticity
Index
AASHTO
The fully compacted and completed base course
shall conform to the lines, grades and cross sections as
Control on Site !The Road)
Minimum
one test
for each
source
1. Proctor
AASHTO
T1SO.D
T89&T90
3.Abrasion
AASHTO
T96
Mliiimum
one test for
every1000
cu.m. of
every layer,
or
whenever
Materials
changed,
whichever is
less
2.
Gredatlon
of Materials
AASHTO
T27
4. C.B.R.
AASHTO
T193
3. Plasticity
Index
AASHTO
5.Sand
equivalent
ASTM
T89&T90
II
3-7
~
_/'.,../
Mlolalry of
Tronapo~ &
Cornmunlc,tlon OGRLT
~~<\:Granular and Stabilised Subbase. Basecourse and Stabilised Subgrade
Source of Materl1lt
Control on Sltl ~ ROid)
RepMJclon
Required
T..U
(A)
Requll'ld
for IN
Required
Tutl
T..Uin
(B)
Repedtfon
R.qulntd for
Ill Tall In
CB)
IAI
0 2419
4. C.B.R.
AASHTO
T193
6.Percent1g
e of
fractured
Grain
5. Abr8110n
AASHTO
T96
'
7.Thin and
elongated
pieces
ASTM
04791
'
;
i'
)
7. Ciay
lumps&
friable
particles
ASTMC235
andC123
8. Field
Density
Aggregate Base Course (Class AI
cu.m
ii.
Aggregate Base Course (Class BJ
cu.m
iii.
Aggregate Base Course (Class C)
cu.m
3.4
Stabilized Base Courses
3.4.1
Description
3.4.2
Materials
3.4.2.1
Soil for
AASHTO Sieve
to
the
Compaction shall be tested in accordance with

3
AASHTO T 191, AASHTO T 205 or any acceptable method.
If there is a significant delay between the construction of
any layer and the following layer. the Engineer may
requlre the compac!ion of the lower layer to be re-verified
to ensure that It has not loosened due to ttaffic, passage of
construction equipment, adverse weathl!!r conditions or
otherwise.
3.3.4
Aggregate base course shall be measured by cu.m.

of compacted base course. Measurements shall be of
volumes computed from the cross sections shown on the
Drawings and shall be calculated from the top surface area
of each layer, excluding the tapered edges .
2
No meuurement shaH be made for direct payment of
overdepth construction, regardle$S of the Engineer's
permission for It to remain In place.
3-8
"'~llinG ~ m...l
50 mm
100
4.75 mm
50 100
1.80mm
37 - 80
..
15.- 50
4251Jm
75 11m
020
0-3
211m
Table 3.4.2.1; Soil for Stabilization
Base and Sub-Base Course Materials

conform
Stab~ization
Sand and gravel soils sha ll have the following

particle size distribution given in Table 3.4.2.1.
Table 3 3.3.1: Raqulred Tests and Minimum Repetition for
Sampling and testing shall

2
requlrements of this specification.
I.
This Sub-secti on specifies stabilized base courses

composed of sand. sandy gravel. sandy clay soU or similar.
stabilized with cement or bitumen or lime as appropriate
and as shown on the Drawings.
Test for every

2000sq.m.
and for every
lmr_
9.
Thickness
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above, will be pai d for at the
unit rates for the various Items in the Bill of Quantities,
which rate shall be full compensation for equipment, toots,
labor. locating sources of supply. supp ying materials,
sampling and testing, screening, crushi ng, transporting
stockpiling. laying. mixing and compacting and for extra
material in tapered edges. and other items necessary for
the proper completion ofthe worlc.
3.3.6
6. Sand
equivalent
ASTM
D2419
3.3.5
2
The mlxinplace method of construction shall be
used only on sites with naturally occurrlog sand and
gravel mixture. For the central plant method of
construction, the materials shall be selected by t he
Contractor from other sources complying with the
requirements of this Clause and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
3.4.2.2
Cement as Stabilizing Agent
Cement for stabilization shall be ordinary Portland

cement or sulfate resisting cement, as shown on the
Drawings. or as Instructed by the Engi neer. Portland
cement shan conform to the requirements of BS12 Part 2
or AASHTO M85 Type I for ordinary and rapid hardening
types. and 854027 Part 2 or AASHTO M85 Type V for
sulfate resl5tlng cement.
Granular SubBase, Aggregate Base Course and Stabilized Base Courses
2
At least two silos shall be used for cement storage.
Before recharging a silo it shall be emptied completely
and cleaned out. Duri ng the time of charging a sil o shall
not be used for batching.
3
The stored cement shall be free-flowing and free of
lumps. Cement shall not be stored for longer than 4
months. Cement that has remained in store for a period
greater than 4 months, or of which there is doubt as to
quality shall be re-tested by standard mortar tests to
determine whether it still meets the requirements of the
standards.
water to be used with the naturally occurring soil so es to

obtain e stabilized mixture with the following properties:
I.
ii.
4
Curing seal shall consist of approved proprietary
curing compound, or MC-70 cutback bitumen to prime
coat standard as specified in Section 4.
3.4.2.3
Bitumen as Stabilizing Agent
Bitumen may include streight run (penetration gradel

bitumen; AC cutback bitumen, MC cutback b;tumen, or
cationic emulsified bitumen, Type SS. Penetration grade,
cutback bitumen and emulsified bitumen shall conform to
all rei evant requirements herein.
iii.
iv.
2
The selection of suitable bitumen will depend on the
properties of the material to be stabilized and shall be
subject to laboratory and field trials by the Contractor,
under the supervision of the Engineer.
3
When the material moisture content is high, the
material must be dried before the use of penetration grade
bitumen or viscous cutback bitumen and plant mixing of
materials as appropriate.
4
When the natural moisture content of the material is
low, use cutback bitumens or emulsified bitumens as
appropriate.
3.4.2.4
Lime as Stabilizing Agent
Hydrated lime (calcium hydroxide( and quicklime

{calcium oxidel shall conform to AASHTO M216. Mixing of
different brands of lime or use of lime from different mills
will not be permitted.
2
Lime slurry shall be a homogeneous pumpable
mixture of lime and water. Slurry shall be a premixed
material in which the lime solids content shall be not less
than 30% by weight.
3.4.2.5
Water
The water shall be clean and free from impurities, oil,

acid, salts, alkali, organic matter, and other potentially
deleterious substances. Water from doubtful sources shall
not be used until tested In accordance with AASHTO T26
and approved.
3.4.2.6
Mix Design for Cement StabilizBd BasB
Before starting the work of stabilization. soil-cement

trial mixes shall be carried out. The proposed mix design
shall be submitted by the Contractor for approve I by the
Engineer. It shell show the percentage of cement and
The minimum cube compressive strength shall

be 5.0 N/mm2 after molding and storage at a
minimum humidity of 95% for a period of 7
days. The molding shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T134 and the strength testing shall be
in accordance with BS 1881. The cement
content of trial mixes shall be adjusted until
this strength Is achieved.
The maximum volume change (swelling( shall
be 2% and the maximum loss In weight shall
be not more than 8%, when cylinders are
molded and tested in accordance with AASHTO
T 135, Method B.
Cement content and water content of the mix
on the Site shall each be within 0 2% to +2%
of the approved mix design.
The total salt content of the cement stab:lized
base course mixture shall meet the following
requirements: The total chloride content (sum
of both acid soluble and water soluble
chlorides( expressed as chloride ion, when
tested in accordance with BS 1881, shall not
exceed 0.10 percent by weight of dry cement.
The total sulfate content expressed as S03,
when tested In accordance with BS 1881, shell
not exceed 3 percent by weight of dry cement.
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
Surface Preparation
Prior to placing of stabilized base on sub-base or

subgrade. the subgrade shall have been properly
completed end approved as specified in Sub-section 2.6
end the sub-base shall have been properly completed and
approved as specified in Sub-section 3.2.
3.4.3.2
Construction of Trial Section
If instructed by the Engineer before commencement

of stabililation work and after completion of laboratory
mix design, the Contractor shall lay a trial section or
stabilized material 2 lanes wide by 50m long, at an
approved location on or near to the Site.
2
This trial section shalt be laid using the same
materials, mix proportions, mixing, spreading and
compaction equipment, and construction procedures that
are proposed for use in the work.
The trial section shall serve as a field verification of
3
the laboratory mix design. The results of the dry density
and moisture content measurements made in the trial
section wiH be used in association with the laboratory
tests to establish the moisture content and mi nimum per
cent compaction to be attained in the stabilization work.
4
The trial section shall also demonstrate the adequacy
of m'xing. spreading and compaction equipment and the
suitability of the methods and organization proposed.
~~
M'ninrv or Transport & Communications. DGALT
~~<Granular e nd Stabilised Subbase, Basecourse end Stabilised Subgrade
3.4.3.3
Cement Stabilization Procedures- Plant Mixing
When cement and granular or crushed material are

to be mixed in a stationary plant, the plant shall be an
approved type pugmill mixl ng plant of either the batch
mix type with revolving blade or rotary drum, or the
continuous mixi ng type. Proportioning of materials and of
water may be by either weight or volume.
2
Cement shall be added in such a manner that it is
uniformly distributed during the mixing operation. Safe,
convenient facilities shall be provided for sampling
cement in the supply line to the weigh hopper or pugmlll.
3
Means shall be provided whereby the Engineer may
verify the amount of water per batch or the rate of flow for
continuous mixing. The time of the addition of water and
the points at which it Is introduced Into the mixer shall be
as approved.
4
The charge Tn a batch mixer, or the rate of feed to a
continuous mixer, shall not exceed that which will permit
complete mixing of all of the material. Dead areas in the
mixer, in which the material does not move or i s not
sufficiently agitated. shall be corrected.
5
The moisture content of the completed mixture shall
be not m ore than one per cent below optimum moisture
content at the point of delivery to the work area.
feeders which continuously supply the correet amount of

granular material in proportion to the cement and so
arranged that the proportion of each size of granular
material can be separately adjusted if more than ona size
is used. Storage facilities containing fine material shall be
equipped with vibrating units which shall vibrate the side
walls of the feeder to prevent any hang-up of materials
while the plant is operating.
A control system shall be provided that will
close down the plant when the material in
any storage facility approaches the strike-off capacity of
the feed gate. The plant wi D not be permitted to operate
unless the control system Is In proper working order.
2
automati~ally
3
The feeder for the granular material shall be
mechanically or eleetrlcal1y driven. Mechanically driven
feeders shall be direetly connected with the drive on the
cement feeder. The drive shaft on the feeder shall be
equipped with a revolution counter reading to 0.1 of a
revolution. Electrically driven feeders shall be actuated
from the same circuit that services the motor driving the
cement feeder.
4
The cement feeder and the granular material feeders
shall be equipped with devices by which the rate of feed
can be determined while the plant Is In full operation.
3.4.3.6
3.4.3.4
Cement Stabilization Procedures - Batch M ixing
Cement St1bi~zation Procedures M ixed in

Place Procedures
Batch mixi ng plants shall be equipped with a

sufficient number of paddles of a type and arrangement to
produce a uniformly mixed batch.
Mixed in place procedures wi ~ normally be permitted

when the granular materilll to be stabilised is in-situ site
material.
2
The mixer platform shall be of ample size to provide
safe and convenient access to the mixer and other
equipment.
3
The mixer shall be equipped with a timing device
which will indicate by a definite audible or visual signal
the expiration of the mixing period. The device shall be
accurate to within 2 seconds.
2
Plant and equipment for pulverizing (if required) and
for mixing all materials will be approved on the basis of
preliminary trials to establish that such plant and
equipment are capable of producing the spe~ified degree
of mixing and uniformity of stabilized material for the full
thickness of each layer.
Single pass or multi-pass
equipment may be used.
4
The time of mixing a batch shall begin after all
ingredients are in the mixer and shall end when the mixer
is half emptied.
Mixing shall continue until a
homogeneous mixture of uniformly distributed and
properly coated materials of uniform appearance is
produced. The time of mixing shall not be less than 30
seeonds. When blending of different sizes is required, the
materials shall be blended as they enter the mixer.
3
The mixing equipment shall be equipped with a
device for controlling the depth of processing and the
mixing blades shall be maintained or reset periodically so
that the correct depth of mixing is obtained at all times.
Cement shall be spread ahead of the mixer by means of a
cement spreader, fitted with a device to ensure a uniform
and controllable rate ofspread of cement transversely and
longitudinally.
5
Cement for each batch shall be weighed on scales
separate from the aggregate belching scales.
Each
cement scale graduation shall be approximately 0.001
times the total capacity of the scales. The total capacity
shall not be greater than twice the amount of cement
required when the plant is operated at full capacity. No
scale shall be used with a capacity less than 500 kg.
4
If multi-pass equipment Is utilized, the fine cohesive
fraction (if any) of the material shall first be pulverized to
the required depth with successive passes and the
moisture content adjusted if it is more than 3% below the
value required for compaction. Cement shall then be
spread and mixing continued with successive passes unti l
the required depth and uniformity have been achieved.
3.4.3.5
Cement Stabilization Procedures - Continuous

Mixing
1
Continuous mixing plants shall be designed such that
granular materia:ls are drawn from the storage facility by
3-10 .
5
If it is necessary to adjust the moisture content of the
material to the optimum for completion, water shall be
added during the m ixing operation using a water sprayer
of such design that the water Is added in a uniform and
controllable manner both transversely and longitudinally.
5ultnftla of Oman, Sl.l~nd

..::.
rtl
...:...:.
Sp
.::........;...4l
.;...;.O___
roa
_d_&
_B_
~
....:....
_
C..
_n_s_
tr_
....t
_l_
or__
20 ""
Granular Sub-Base, Aggregate Base Course and Stabilized Base Courses
6
Te mrxmg equipment shall be set so that it cuts
slightly into the edge of any adjoining completed lane so
as to ensure that ail material forming the layer has been
properly processed. The Engineer may approve the use of
scarifiers or preperizers ahead of the mixing equipment.
The output of the mixing equipment shall be such that a
minimum rate of 20 lin.m.lh measured longitudinally of
completed stabilized layer can be maintained in order to
permit satisfactory compaction of the mix.
3.4.3.7
be provided with a fully automatic and adjustable screed

that strikes off and distributes the materi at to the fu II width
being spread and to the surface tolerances specified.
9
The spreader shall be equipped with grade sensing
controls to automatically control the longitudinal grade
and transverse slopes of the screed. Screed action
includes any cutting, crowding, or otherwise that produces
a finished surface texture of uniform appearance.
3.4.3.8
Cement Stabilization Procedures Placing of
Stationery Plant Mixes
Immediately prior to depositing the mix, the surface

1
area to be covered shall be moistened and kept moist.
2
The cement stabilized mix shall be protected against
moisture loss during transporting, by use of suitable
covers. The mix shall be deposited on the roadbed at a
prescribed quantity which shall provide the compacted
thickness for the width being spread without resort to
sponing, picking up, or otherwise shifting the mixture.
Segregation shall be prevented and the mix shall be free
from pockets of coarse or fine materials.
3
The mix shall be spread in widths of not less than 2
lanes, insofar as the width of surface permits.
Longitudinal construction joints shall fall within 300 mm of
lane lines. The mix shell be spread by one or more
spreaders operating in a staggered position across the
surface. If traffic conditions require that less than 2 lanes
be spread, not more than 2 hours shall elapse between the
times of placing the material in adjacent lanes.
4
The compacted thickness of any one layer shall not
exceed 200 mm and shall be not less than 80 mm. When
more than one layer is placed. the surface of the lower
layer of compacted mix shall, until covered with the next
layer, be kept moist with water or a curing seal as
specified.
5
In the case of areas inaccessible to mechanical
spreading equipment, the mix may be spread in one layer
by approved methods only. After spreading, the material
shall be thoroughly compacted to the required lines.
grades, and cross section by means of pneumatic tampers,
or other approved compacting equipment.
6
Use of motor graders will not be permined during
spreading or compacting operations. Motor graders may
be used only to trim the edges and surface after
compaction in order to finish within the specified
tolerances.
7
A motor grader may be classified as a self-propelled
mechanical spreader if it has been equipped with end
wings on the blade, has the blade locked in a position
perpendicular to the direction of travel, and Is equipped
with cross slope and automatic grade controls that meet
the requirements for the specified type of spreading.
8
Each layer of the mix shall be spread in one
operation with an approved type self-propelled
mechanical spreader such that the layer is made ready for
compaction without further shaping. The spreader shall
Cement Stabilization Procedures Compaction

and Finishing
Immediately upon completion of spreading or

spreading and mixing in place operations, and completion
of shaping, the mix shall be initiaHy compacted by one
complete pass using approved type rollers.
2
If the finished surface after initial compaction is
outside the specified tolerance, all high spots shall be
trimmed off to within the specified tolerance. Filling of
low areas by drifting or hauling of trimmed material will
not be permined.
Following trimming, the finished surface shall be
3
finally compacted to not less than 100% of the laboratory
density of the approved job mix specimens as determined
by AASHTO T 134.
Final compaction shall be
accomplished in such a manner that no loose material
remains on the surface and ell tear marks are eliminated.
4
The surface tolera nc:es shall conform with the
toler anc:e requirements for Aggregate Base Course.
Where any areas are lower than the allowable tolerance,
the stabilised layer shall be removed and fresh stabilised
mix placed and properly compacted and finished, unless
filling of the low areas with bituminous concrete or
cement concrete is approved.
5
If the superimposed course will be cement concrete,
the low areas may, if approved, be filled with concrete at
the time and during the same operation that the concrete
pavement is placed.
6
When the superimposed course will be bituminous
concrete, the low areas may, if approved, be filled with
bituminous concrete to the same standard. This filling
sha~l be carried out as a separate operation prior to
placing the bituminous concrete course (unless the
thickness to be placed is too small to make this
practicable).
7
Not more than 2 hours shall elapse between the time
water is added to the mixed materials and the time of
completion of initial compaction. Final compaction shall
be completed withi n 30 minutes of initial compaction.
8
At the end of each day's work and when operations
are delayed or stopped for more than 2 hours, a vertical
construction joint shall be made in the fully compacted
layer, perpendicular to the centerline. Additional mix shall
not be placed until the constructfon joint has been
approved.
9
One hour after the stabilized mix has been finally
compacted; vertical longitudinal joints shall be
constructed by cutting Into the existing edge to a depth of
3-11
~~
Mlnitrv of Tronaport & CommunlcntJona. OGRlT
../"-.~<Granular end Stabilised Subbase,
Basecourse and Stabilised Subgrade
approxi mately 100 mm. The mix cut away shall be

discarded. The face of the cut joints shall be moistened in
advance of placing the adjacent lane.
3,4.3.9
Curing of Cement Stabilized Courses
Curi ng seal as specified shall be applied uniformly to

the completed surface at a rate of between 0.5 and 1.2
kg./sq.m., or as determined by the Engineer. The curing
seal shall be applied on the same day that final
compaction s performed and as soon as practicable
thereafter. The surface shall be kept moist until the seal is
applied,
2
Damage to the curing seal or stabilized surface shall
be promptly repaired by an approved manner.
3.4.3.10
Testing of Cement Stabilised Courses
For every 5,000 sq.m. of each stabilised layer or for

each day's completed area (whichever is smal ler) the
following sampling and testing shall be carried out~
In situ density of a minimum of 3 samples
(taken immediately after final compaction)
determined In accordance with AASHTO T 191
or T 205 and which shall be not less than 100%
of the density of the approved laboratory mix.
Cement content in accordance with AASHTO T
211 .
Gradation of mix in accordance with AASHTO
T27.
Moisture - density relationship for mix sampled
fresh from the Site, in accordance with
AASHTO T 134 if the source of the material is
changed.
Compressive strength of a set of 3 test
specimens molded and cured In accordance
with AASHTO T 134 and T 126, and tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 22.
3.4.3. 11
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures - Mix Design
The material to be stabilized shall be a sand. sandy

gravel or silty or clayey gravel and sand material with a P.l.
not exceeding 12% and L L not exceeding 25% and with
not more than 30% passing a 0.075 mm (No. 2001 sieve.
2
Bitumen-soil mix proportions shall be established by
field laboratory trial mixes, carried out In the presence of
the Engineer.
The compressive strength shall be
determined in accordance with AASHTO T 167 and in such
a way as to ensure that the optimum composition of the
mix is established.
3
The laboratory trial mixes, after being air cured for a
period of 7 days and tested in accordance with AASHTO T
167, shall have a minimum compressive strength at 25
degrees C, of 2 MN/sq.m. (20 kg/sq.cm.) and a Marshall
stability at 60 degrees C, of 2.000 N (204 kg). The Index of
Retained Strength when tested using a Marshall mould
shall be not less than 70%.
3-12
3.4.3.12
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures Stationary

Plant Mixing
When approval is given to utilize stationary plant for

mixing, whether batch mixing plant or continuous type
mixing plant, the plant and equipment and handling and
mixing procedures shall conform with the relevant
requirements of Section 4 "Bituminous Pavement and
with the appropriate requirements specified herein for
plant mixing of cement stab~ized materials.
3.4.3.13
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures- Mixed in

PI ace Procedures
Approved type multi-pass or approved type purpo$ebuilt, single-pass equipment shaH be utilized for on Site
mixing and placing. Operators shall be trained and fully
experienced in the operation of such equipment.
2
Multi-pass equipment may consist of suitable
bitumen distributor and motor graders or as otherwise
approved.
The process of pulverizing the fine grained cohesive
3
fraction (if any I of the granular material shall be as
specified for cement stabilized courses. Bitumen, of the
type and grade selected by the Engineer, shall then be
applied to the surface using approved type heating and
pressura distribution equipment. Emulsified bitumen shall
not normally require heating.
4
Spreading and mixing of the bitumen and granular or
other material shalt be carried out as specified for cement
stabilized courses.
3.4.3.14
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures - Placing and

Spreading Stationary Plant Mixes.
The placing and spreading of stationary plant mixes

shall be as specified for cement stabilized courses.
3.4.3.15
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures Compaction

and Finishing
Compaction of bitumen stabilized courses to 100% of

laboratory density of approved job mix specimens,
finishing, and provision of longitudinal joints, shall be as
specified for cement stabilized courses.
3.4.3.16
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures Tolerances

and Replacement of Unsatisfactory Areas
Finished surface tolerances and the rectification

procedures for any areas which fail to meet such
tolerances, shall be as specified for cement stabilized
courses.
2
Where high spots require trimming after initial
compaction, raking or similar procedures may be required.
If the area is unduly damaged or pined, the stabilized mix
shall be removed and replaced with fresh stabilized mix
spread and properly compacted and finished,
Sultannte af Oman. S~l'ld.lnl ;.,..- out ,.,. ot food So
Granular
3.4.3.17
Sub~Base,
Aggregate Base Course and Stabilized Base Courses
Bitumen Stabilization Procedures - Testing of

Bitumen Stabilized Courses
For every 5,000 sq.m. of each stabilized layer or for

each day's completed area (whichever is the smaller) the
following sampling and testing shall be carried out:
i.
(taken immediately after completion of final
compaction) determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 191 or T 205 and which shall be not
less then 100% of the density of the approved
laboratory mix.
ii.
ill.
iv.
3.4.3.18
Composition of the mix by extraction in

accordance with AASHTO T 164. The variation
from the approved job-mix, based on results of
4tests, shall not exceed the following:
Aggregates passing
No. 200 (0.075 mm)
1 percent
Asphalt content
0.2 percent
Compressive strength in accordance with
AASHTO T 167, of samples before compaction.
The minimum compress've strength value shall
be not less than the value specified under Item
3 of Paragraph 3.4.3.11.
Marshall stability in accordance with AASHTO
T245, of samples before compaction. The
minimum Marshall stability value shall be not
less than the value specified under Item 3 of
Paragraph 3.4.3.11.
Lime Stabilization Procedures- Mix Design
The material to be stabilized shall be a clayey gravel,

clayey sand or lean clay soil with not more than 50%
passing 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve and plasticity index
greater than 10%.
2
The lime content and optimum moisture content
shall be determined in the field laboratory and In the
presence of the Engineer. Cylinders molded in accordance
with AASHTO T 220 shall be cured and tested at 7 days
and 28 days.
Load rate of application shall be in
accordance with AASHTO T 22.
The minimum
compressive strength at 7 days after molding shall be one
MN/sq.m. (10 kg./sq.cm.l.
3
Lime content and water content of the mix shall each
be within -0.2% to +2.5% of the approved mix design
percentages.
3.4.3.19
dgo Conotruct!O< 2Ctl0
operators. Working operations should take into account

the wind direction to minimize the dust problem and
consequent eye or skin irritation to any personnel in the
vicinity.
3
When hydrated lime is used, precautions shall also
be taken against the effects of prolonged exposure to the
skin.
3.4.3.20
Mixing
When approva I is given to utiliza stationary pia nt for
mixing, whether batch mixing plant or continuous type
mixing plant, the plant and equipment and handling and
mixing procedures shall be as specified for cement
stabilization and as specified herein for plant mixing of
lime stabilized materials.
3.4.3.21
2
Suitable methods for handling quicklime shall be
adopted, including fully mechanized or bottom dump
handling equipment and protective clothing worn by the
Lime Stabilization Procedures - Mixed in Place

Procedures
Mixed in place procedures will normally be permined

when the soil to be stabilized is insitu site materiaL
2
Spreading and mixing of the lime and soil material
shall be carried out as specified for cement stabilized
courses.
3.4.3.22
Lime Stabilization Procedures - Placing and

Spreading Stationary Plant Mixes
Placing and spreading of stationary plant mixes shall

be as specified for cement stabilized courses.
3.4.3.23
Lime Stabilization Procedures - Compaction

and Finishing
Compaction of lime stabilized courses to 100% of

laboratory density of approved job mix specimens,
finishing and provision of longitudinal joints, shall ba as
specified for cement stabilized courses with the following
modifications:
i.
When quick lime is used, the layer shall not be

compacted immediately alter spreading the lime,
as hydration of the Iime will cause damage to the
compacted layer. The time within which the
compaction shall be completed will be as
estimated in the laboratory.
ii.
Compaction shall not taka place after lime

hydration. Any lime stabilized materiBI that has
been mixed or deposited after lima hydration,
shall be removed end replaced with fresh
material, mixed and treated as specified.
Lime Stabilization Procedures- Safety

Precautions
Special precautions shall be taken when handling

quicklime as it will rapidly corrode equipment and can
inflict severe skin burns to personnel coming in contact
with it.
Lime Stabilization Procedures - Stationary Plant
3.4.3.24
Lime Stabilization Procedures- Tolerances and

Replacement of Unsatisfactory Areas
Finished surface tolerances and the rectification

procedures for any areas which fail to meet such
tolerances shall be as specified for cement stabilized
courses.
3-13 .
~
~
Mlniatry of TrDnaport & Cammun,c&tlona DGALT
/".~Gra~ular ;n~ ~tabilised Subbase, Basecours e and Stabilised Subgrade
3.4.3.25
Testing of Lime Stabilized Courses
For every 5,000 sq.m. of each stabilized layer or for

each day's completed area !whichever is the smallerl the
following sampling and testing shall be carried out:
i.
!taken immediately after completion of final
compactionl determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 191 or T 205 and which shall be not
less than 100% of the density of the approved
laboratory mix.
ii.
Lime content in accordance w ith AASHTO T
232.
iii.
Gradation of mix in accordance with AASHTO
T27.
iv.
If the source of materials cha~~Qes, the moisture
- density relationship in accordance with
AASHTO T 134 and gradation of the new mix in
accordance w ith AASHTO T27.
v.
Compressive strength o f a set of 3 test
specimens molded and cured in accordance
with AASHTO T 134 and T 126, and tested in
accordance w ith AASHTO T 22.
3.4.4
Cement stabil ized course. bitumen stabilized course

and lime st abilized course shall each be measured by cu.m.
of compacted stabilized course. Measurements shaD be of
t he area and thickness dimensions shown on the
Drawings.
Curing seal shall be measured by sq.m. of areu
2
computed from the length and width of the completed
sections shown on the Drawings.
3.4.5
Basis of Payment

unit rates for the various items l n t he Bill of Quantities,
which rate shall be full compensat>on for equipment, tools,
labor, locating sources of supply, supplying materials,
samp ling and testing, screening, crushing, transporting,
stockpiling, laying. mixing and compacting and for extra
m1teri11l in tapered edges, and other Items necessary for
the proper completion of the work.
3.4.6
i.
Cement Stabilized Base Co urse

(thicknessl
cu.m
IJ.
Bitumen Stabilized Base Course

(thicknessl
ou.m
iii.
Lime Stabilized Base Course

(thickness).
cu.m
Curing Seal
sq.m
iv.
3-14
&utt.nate of Oman, St.ndetd lpeci~ '"' RMd &!!ridge Conllrud- 2D11J
Ref.
Title
4.1
Materials for Bituminous

Construction
4.1 .1
4.1.2
4.1 .2. 1
4.1..~2
4.1.2 3
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.5.1
Page No.
Description
Aggregate Matarfala Gene111lly
Sources. and Production
Stockpiling
4-1
...,
Ref.
TltJe
4.2.5.2
Prime Coat Application
4.2.5.3
4.2.5.4
Tack Coat Application
Page No.
Polymer Modified Tack Coat
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
...,
4.2.6
4.2.7
Method of Maaaurement
Baala of Paymem
4.2.8
ltema In the BUI of Quamitln
4-12
4-12
...1
4.3
Bituminous Courses
4--12
-4.3.1
4.3.2
Deac:rlptlon
4-12
Materials
4-13
4.3.3
4.3.4
4-13
4-14
4-1
... 1
Aggregetn for Bituminous Paving Mbt"

Aggregates for Sallf Coats
4-1
4-3
Bitumen Generally
4-3
4-3
4.2
Prime and Tack coats
4--10
43.13
Job Mixes and ProJect Mixes

Equipment
General
Mixing Plant
Spreacfng and Finishing Equipment
Conatructfon of Trfal Sections
Mixing Procedures
Surface Preparation
Delivery, Spreading and Finishing
Delivery of Mix to Site
Satt'ng Out and Reference Wnes
Spreading and Finishing
Jilints and Edges
Compaction
Surface Tolerancea
Determination of ThlclcMaa of Couraea
Method of Meauremem
Basis of Payment
4.21
4.2.2
4.2.21
Descrlpclon
4-10
4.4
Bituminous Base Course
4-21
Mllterfala
Medium Cunng Cutback B.tumen
4-10
4-10
4-10
4.4.1
4.4.2
Delctfpdon
4-21
4.4.3
Meterfals
Job Mix 1nd Project Mbc
Equipmem
4-21
4-21
4-21
4.4.6
Construdfon ofTrial Section
4-21
4.4.5
4.4.7
Mixing Procedures
Surt.ce Preparation
4-21
...22
4.1 52
4153
Type and Grade

Transporting Bitumen
Storage of Bitumen
4.1.5.4
4.1.5.5
S.mplng and Testing
4.1.8
4.1.6;1
Heating of Bitumen
Bitumen Produc:ta
Penetration Graded Bitumen
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
41.6.2
S.turrien Modifier and.Mod,fied
4.1.6.3
4.1.6.4
c.s
Bitum1nous Material
Rapid'Curing IFIC) Cutback S.tumen
4-7
MediumCuring [MCJ Cutback Bitumen 4l7
Slow-Curing ISC!Cutback B:tumen
4-7
4.1.6.5
4.1.6.6
Emulsified-Bitumens Gene111lly
4.1.6. 7
Anionic EmulsfiedBitumen
4.1 .6.8
Cationic Emul!lified Bitumen
4.1 .7
Method of Meesurernem and Baala
of Payment
4.2.22
4 .2.2 3
Rapid-Curing CUtback Bitumen

Slow-Curing Emulsified Bitumen
Equipment
4.2.3
4.2.4
Construction of Trial Sectlona
4.2.5
Application Procedures
4 2.5.1
Med um Curing Cutback Bitumen
41-7
4-8
C.10
4-10
4-1 0
4-11
4-11
...,,
4-11
4.3.4.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.43
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.8.1
4.3.8.2
4.3.8.3
4.3.8.4
4.3.8.
43.11
-4.3.10
4.3.11
-4.3.12
.....
4-14
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-18
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-20
4-20
4-21
Ref.
Title
Page No.
4.4.8
Delivei'V. Spreading and Ffnllhlng
Genl!flll
4.4.8.1
4.4.~.2
4.4.8.3
4.4.8
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4,4.13
4.4.14
4.6
4.5.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.5.8.1
4.5.8.2
4.5.8.3
4,5,8.4
4.5.9
4.6.10
4.5.11
4.5.12
4.5.13
4.5.14
Rollers
Sandard of Compaction
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
Surface Tolerances
4-~
Determination ofThlcknea
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
Method of Meaaurement
Baals of Payment
Bituminous Binder and Wearing

Courses
4-23
Delcrlptlon
Materials
Job Mix and ProJect Mix

Equipment
Conatructlon of Trial Sections

Mixing Proc:eclunt1
Surface preparation
Delivery, Spreading and Flnllhlng
General
Rollers
Sl:lllndard of Compaction
Skid Resistance and Surlace Texture
Surlace Tolerances
Determination of Thickness
Method of Meawrement
Baals of Payment
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-23
Jt-23
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4.6
Bituminous Seal Coats- Surface

Dressings
~25
4.6.1
4.11.2
4.11.2.1
4,6.2.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.6.6
4.8.8
4.11.6.1
4.6.6.2
Description
Material
Bitumen
Aggregates
Equipment
Cottatructlon of Trial Section

Rates of Application
CoMtnlctlon Requlremem.
General
Surface Preparation
4!25
4-25
4125
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
41-25
4126
Ref.
4.6,6.3
4.6,11.4
4.6.6.5
4.6.6.6
4,6.11.7
4.6.6.8
Title
P.~ge No.
Heating of Bitumen
Spreading Slurry Seal
Spraying of Bitumen
Application of Aggregate
Rolling and Brooming
"""26
4>27
Maintenance and Protection of Sealed

Surlacn
4.6.7
4.8.8
4.6.9
4.8.10
4-2!5
4'26
4'26
Tolerances and Records

Balla of Payment
Items In the Bill of Ouantiti111
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-28
4.7
Bituminous Leveling Course and

Patching Work
4-28
4.7.1
4.7.2
4 .7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4 .7.9
4 .7.10
4.7.11
4 .7.12
4 .713
4.7.14
Description
Items In the BHI of Quantities
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-29
4.8
Bituminous Cold Mix Courses
4-29
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8A
4 .8.6
4.8.6
4.8.7
4.8.8
4.8.9
4.8.10
4.8.11
4.8.12
4.8,13
4.8.14
Description
Materials
Equipment
Mixing Proolduntl
Surface Preparation
Sampling and Teatlng
Surface T olerences
Determination of ThldcniiU
Method of Meaurement
Baals of Pavment
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-30
Sampling and Teatfng
4--30
Surface Tollll'lnces
Detennlnatlon of Th~
4-30
4-30
M.thod of MeRUrement
4--30
Baals of Payment
4-30
4-30
Materfell
Job Mix and ~ Mix
Equipment
Conecruc:tfon of Trial Section
Mixing Procedures
Surface Preparation
Itame In the Bill of Quantitfea
Ref.
Title
4.9
Pavement Repairs and

Reinstatement
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4
4.9.6
4.9.8
4.9.7
4.9JI
4.9.9
4.9.10
Page No.
Oeacription
Metariak
Equipment
Prepanrtlon of Pevament
Placing and Anllhlng Repair Materiels
Surface Tolerances
Beale of Payment
hems In the Bill of Quantltiu
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-32
Bituminous Pavement Widening 4-32
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
4 10.3.1
4.10.3.2
410.4
410.6
410.8
Oeecrlption
Method of Measuremer.t
Buia of Payment
4-32
ltllfReln the Bill of QuantIt' "
4-32
4.11
Recycled Bituminous Mixes
4-32
4.11.1
Description
Materials
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.11.4
4.11.6
4.11.8
4.11.7
4.11JI
4.11.9
4.11.10
4.11 .11
4.11 .12
4.11.13
4.11.14
4.12
4.12.1
Conetruction Requirementa
Co,_.ruction
Traffic: Control

Equipment
Conltruc:tion ofTrl., Sedlona
Mhclng Proceduraa
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
Surface Tolerances
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
Detennlnltlon ofThldcnae
Method of MUIUrement
Basra of P.-,ment
4-34
4-34
Items In the Bill of Ouantrtiee
4-34
Surface Preparetion
Title
4.12.2
Refllfence Documents for Profiler

Rlc!Nbllity TMting
4.12.3
4.12A
4.12.6
4.12.8
4.12.7
4.12.8
4.12.9
4.12.10
Tenninology
4-30
4.10
Materials
Ref.
4-33
Surface Rtdeabllfty
Measurement
4-34
DMCription
4-34
Testing Equipment
Testing Procedure
Submittals
Required Rldeability
Basis of Payment
Page No.
4-34
4-34
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
S~ltanntu
of Om11n. Sto!'ld/\1 St>e<; loe&tlo lor Rood & Br dge !:onotfUCIJOr 20 0
Bituminous Pavement)
4.1
Materials for Bituminous

Construction
4.1.1
Description
This Sub-section includes specifications for materials

for use In the construction of the various bituminous
pavement courses including the following:
i.
Coarse and fine mineral aggregates and filler.
ii. Bitumen products including penetration graded
emulsified
bitumens,
cutback
bitumens,
bitumens, modified bitumens, and rejuvenating
agents for use In bituminous courses and surface
treatments.
iii. Polymers for bitumen modification, Elastomers
such
as
Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS)
copolymers or Plastomers such as Polyethylene
(PE) polymer, as shown on the drawings.
2
All materials sources and the quality of materials
proposed for use in the work shall be approved prior to
procuring or processing material from such sources.
Inspection, sampling, testing end retesting as necessary,
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3
Storage and handling of all materials shall conform
to the relevant requirements of these specifications.
Materials shall be stored on hard, clean surfaces.
4.1.2
Aggregate Materials Generally
4.1.2.1
Sources and Production
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the location

of the sources of agg regale materials, the length of haul to
the site, the suitability and quantity of materials available;
extent of work necessary to obtain the material available;
the work requl red to open the quarry and to crush, screen
and wash Uf necessary) the materials to meet the specified
gradation.
Prior to starting quarry operat' ons, the Contractor
2
shall obtain written permission from the authorities or
owners concerned.
3
Crushing end screening plants shall not be put into
operation prior to their approval. If, after any plant is put
into operation, it fails to perform as intended, the
Contractor shall either rectify the defects in the existing
plant to the satisfaction of the Engineer, or shall provide
alternative approved pia nt
4
Approval of the crushing and screening plants and
other equipment shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities in respect of producing aggregates
which conform to the Specifications and in the quel\tities
required for the completion of the work.
4.1.2.2
stockpile quantities. The areas shall be adequately drained

at all times.
2
Stockpiling procedures she II not result in degradation
or segregation of the stockpiled materiel, or introduction
of foreign materials into the stockpile.
Heights of
aggregate stockpiles shall not exceed 5 m.
4.1.2.3
Sampling and testing procedures shall conform to

the relevant requirements of this Specification.
2
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, 30 days
prior to the scheduled start of crushing and screening
operations, a statement of origin and composition of all
aggregates proposed for use rn the work.
In order to ascertain the properties of aggregate
3
materials, the Contractor shall submit for testing,
representative samples of all materials intended for
Incorporation in the work, prior to starting quarry
operations. The representative samples shall be taken by
the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. Tests sha II
be performed by the Contractor at his laboratory or at an
approved outside laboratory
4
Test results shall be utilized by the Contractor in
assessing the locations, extent of deposits and quantities
of materials which will conform to the Specification when
properly processed. Any special tests that may be required
by the Engineer shall be carried out by the Contractor, in
his own laboratory, or an outside laboratory, approved by
the Engineer. Engineer's approval of test results shall in
no way obviate the need for further testing if required by
the Engineer. Approval of specific sources of materials
shall not be construed as final approval and acceptance of
materials from such sources.
5
Processed materials shall be tested and approved
before being stockpiled on Site or incorporated in the
work and may be inspected and tested at any time by the
Engineer during thai r preparation, storage and use.
Questionable materials awaiting testing and approval,
shall not be unloaded and mixed with materials previously
approved. If the grading and quality of any materials
delivered to the Site do not conform to the grading and
quality of the established control samples, the Engineer
will reject such materials.
6
Samples shall satisfy all specified test requirements.
The Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect any
and all materials used or to be used, at any time during or
after their preparation, or while being used during
progress of the work. Unsatisfactory materials, whether in
place or not, shall be removed promptly from the Site.
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary materials, labor,
tools and equipment and transport required by the
Engineer for such inspections.
Stockpiling
Stockpile areas shall be sufl/eyed prior to stockpiling

to establish control points and to obta;n a record of
existing cross sections for future use in determining
4.1.3
Aggregates for Bituminous Paving

Mixes
Aggregates for use in bituminous base course,

binder course, leveling, wearing and cold mix courses
~~
MlniiU:ry of Tt'nneport & Con1municnJona OGRL.T
~~<:Bituminous Pavement
shall consist of crushed stone. The coarse fraction of the

aggregates for use in bituminous wearing course shall
consist of 100'~ crushed stone from a hard, high quality
Gabbro and/or nonves<cular Basalt.
2
Coarse aggregate shall be the fraction of crushed
l!ggregate material retained on 4.75 mm (No. 41 sieve.
Fine aggregate shall be the fraction of crushed aggregate
materi al passing 4.75 mm (No.4) sieve. Mineral filler shall
be added when the combined grading of coarse and fine
aggregates is deficient in material passing 0.075 mm (No.
2001 si eve.
Percent.pallina
Sleve
Size
~ ~ co_UTH~
ClA
ClB
25
100
100
19
60-90
:0
4
Aggregates shall be free of gypsum and the coarse
fraction of the aggregate shall not contain more than 5%
chert when tested in accordance with AASHTO T113.
12.5
9.5
4267
5
Aggregates shall be of uniform quality, free from
decomposed stone, organic matter and shale.
4.75
25-50
2.36
3
The material from hot bins passing the number 40
sieve (0.425mml when tested in accordance with AASHTO
T 90 shall be non plastic. In addition the material from cold
bins should not have PI greater than 4.
6
The percentage by weight of friable particles, c!ay
tumps, and other deleterious matter shah not exceed 1%
as determined by AASHTO T 112.
7
Aggregate particles shall be clean, hard, durable and
sound. Crushing shall result in a product such that, for
particles retained on 4.75 mm (No. 41 sieve. at least 90%
by weight shall have 2 or more fractured faces, when
tested in accordance with ASTM 05821 .
8
The flakiness index and the elongat ion index test
shall be conducted in tJCcordance w ith BS 812, the
following are maximum limits;
Bitum(noua
Index
Bitumlnou
Blnder&BIIH
Wearing
eou....
Aaki ness Index FJ

~longation_lnde)(_E.t
25
~~5
..
30
30
Aggregates for Bituminous Mixes

9
Aggregates shall be washed if directed, to remove
any clay lumps, organic matter, adherent dust or clay films
or other extraneous or deleterious matter that may
prevent or detract from proper adhesion of bit umen to the
aggregate particles.
10 Mineral filler shall consist of finely divided mineral
matter such as limestone dust, hydrated lime; other non
plastic mi neral filler, free from clay and organic impurities;
o r Portland cement, conforming to AASHTO M 17, The
gradation of the mineral filler shall comply with the
requirements ofTable 4.1.3 2:
SlenSize
'
PBI'CIIftt Paalng bv M -
0.600 mm (No . 301

0.300 mm (No. 50)
0.075 mm (No. 200) -~ -
.100
95 100
.
_ _7_0 - 100 -~-Tabla 4.1.3.2: Gradation of Mineral Filler for Bituminous
Mi)(es
<1-2 .
(mm)
Bfndllf'
cOil,..
Y!!n~ co~~~
a..
A
Cia.
B
100
65-100
100
100
60-80
4772
56-80
40-60
3(}.56
3556
51 71
2~
34-54
2.00
15-31
19-36
22-36
--
90. 100
7393
1.18
2036
22-38
0.600
14-26
18-30
0.425
820
a-20
8-20
0.300
820
1022
0.150
7-15
917
0.075
215
28
2-8
28
2-8
Table 4 1.3.3: Gradation of Aggregates for Bituminous

Mixes
12 The loss in weight of aggregate after 500 revolutions,
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96, shal l not
exceed 35% for binder and base courses. and 25% for
wearing course.
Coursn
Table 4.1 .3.1 : Flakiness and Elongation Indices of
11 Combined coarse and fine aggregates for bituminous

mixes, including m i neral filler, when tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 27 and T11, shall conform to the
gradations shown In Table 4.1.3,3.. For the Gradation of
Leveling Course, this should be provided in the Special
Speci fications depending on the particular conditions of
the Project,
13 When tested for soundness In accordance with

AASHTO T 104 the coarse aggregate (retained on No.4
sieve) shall not show signs of d isintegration and the loss
by weight after 5 cycles shall not eKceed 10% In the case
of the sodium sulfate test and 12% in the case of the
maonesium sulf ate test
14 When tested for resistance to stripping in accordance
with the AASHTO T-182 at least 95% coated particles
should be achieved. If resistance to stripping is not
achieved then anti-strlpping agent should be used. For
additional stripping resista:nce requirements for wearing
course layer, refer to Sub-section 4.5,
15 Polish stone value (PSV) of coarse aggregates used
in the wearing course m ix when tested according to BS
812 shall be at least 60%.
16 The sand equivalent for fine aggregates, when tested
in accordance w ith AASHTO T45. shall be 1 minimum of
75.
Soltonnto of Otnon, Starld.ud Ssctc.stions .,Of' Ro:Jd A Dlid'oe Com1
4.1.4
Aggregates for Seal Coats
Cover aggregates for bituminous seal coats shall

consist of screenings of crushed stone. Aggregate for
slurry seals shall consist of crushed stone fines or natural
sand blended with not less than 50% crushed stone fines.
For heavy-duty applications slurry aggregate shall consist
of 100% crushed fines. Wadi gravels shall not be used for
seal coats, suitability of suggested crushed stone fines for
use in slurry seal shall be demonstrated prior to use.
2
Aggregates shall be free of crystaltine or amorphous
gypsum (expressed as 503). and shell not contain more
than 5% chert when tested in accordance w'th AASHTO
T113.
3
Aggregate particles shall be clean, hard, durable and
sound. For particles retained on 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve, at
least 90% by weight shall have 2 or more fractured faces
and 100% by weight shall have one or more fractured
faces, when tested in accordance with ASTM 05821 .
4
Flakiness index and elongation index tested in
accordance with BS 812 shall not exceed 25% for each of
flakiness and elongation index. The percentage by weight
of clay Iumps and friable particles as determined by
AASHTO T 112 shall not exceed 3%. Light wei ght
aggregate of specific gravity of 2 or less shall not exceed
3% as determ'ned by AASHTO T 113.
If necessary aggregates shall be washed, or
5
processed by an approved alternative method, to remove
any clay lumps, organic matter, adherent dust or clay films
or other eX1raneous or deleterious matter that may
prevent or detract from proper adhesion of bitumen to the
aggregate particles.
6
Cover aggregates and aggregate for slurry seals,
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 and T 11,
shall conform to the gradations given in Table 4.1 .4.1.
Double Bituminous Surface
Treatment Aggregate
1.
rt
Application
Application
(Gtedlna Bl
IG111dlng Cl
Sieve
Oealgnatlon
(Square
openingI
25mm
100
19mm
90 100
2().55
100
12.5mm
9.5mm
Sluny
Aggregllt
e
_l
D-o15
58100
100
4.75mm
()..5
10.30
91)..100
2.36mm
0 10
65'90
0-5
45-70
1.1_!! m!f!
0.60mm
0.30mm
0.15 mm
0.075mm
o-o.5
Cl-0.5
30-50
18-30
1()..20
5-15
Table 4.1.41: Gradation of Aggregates for Seal Coats
The loss in weight of aggregate after 500 revolutions,

7
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96 (Los
Angeles Test), shall not exceed 35%.
8
When tested for soundness in accordance with
AASHTO T 104, tha aggregates shall not show signs of
disintegration and the loss by weight shall not exceed 10%
in the case of the sodium sulphate test or 12% in the case
of the magnesium sulphate test.
When tested for resistance to stripping in accordance

with AASHTO T 182, at least 95% of the aggragate surface
area shall remain coated with a bitumen f~ m. If resistance
to stripping is not achieved then anti stripping agent
should be used.
10 Polish stone va'ue (PSV) of coarse aggregates used

in the upper layer of seal coats when tested according to
BS 812 shall be at least 60%.
11 The sand equivalent for fine aggregates, when tested
in accordance with AASHTO T45, shall be a minimum of
75.
12 Table 4.1.4.2 below summarizes the required
aggregate properties listed under items 7 to 11 above;
Specfflc.tloo
Standerd Test
MethDCI
Requirementa
AASHTOT96
Max. 35%
Soundness in
Sodium Sulphate
AASHTOT104
Max.10%
Soundness In
Magnesium
Sulphate
AASHTOT104
Max.12%
Resistance to
stripping
AASHTOT 182
Min. 95%
Polish Stone Value

{PSVJ of;coarse
aggregates
BS 812
Min. SO%
Aggragete P.roperty
Loss In we1ght of
aggregate after 600
revolutions
(Los Angeles
Abrasion)
- --
Sand Equivalent for

Fine Aggregate
AASHTOT175
Min. 75
Table 4.1.4.2: Properties of Aggregates for Seal Coats
4.1.5
Bitumen Generally
4.1.5.1
Type and Grade
Bitumen shall be petroleum derivative penetration

grade 6070 (unless otherwise shown in the Special
Specification), conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO M20. When more than one type or grade is
specified under any item, the Engineer will select the type
and grade to be used in the work. If the specified grade is
not locally available in the market, the Contractor shall be
deemed to have considered any additional costs
associated with the import of bitumen in his contract price,
~
~
Mlniatrv at Trnnn.port & Cnmn1unJcntlon. OORLl
/"-..
~<\Bituminous Pavement
4.1.5.2
Transporting Bitumen
All t ransporting of bitumen shall be by conveyances

that are free from contamination. Tank cars or tan!{ trucks
used for transporting bitumen shall be carefully inspected,
drained, and cleaned if necessary, before loading, to
prevent contamination of the bitumen from resi dues of
previous 1oads. Bitumen may also be delivered and
transported in metal drums.
2
Tank trucks or trailers used to transport bitumen shall
be equipped with an approved sampling device which
shall be bul l! i nto the tank or re-circulating or discharge
line in such a manner that a sample can be drawn during
clrcul ation or discharge.
4.1.5.3
Storage of Bitumen
The Contractor shall provide an adequate storage

facility for bitumen, at the site of the mixing plant. This
facility shall be clean and stable and provided with cover
and shelter from excessive temperatures
No open fires or smoking shall be allowed in or
2
around the storage facility _
3
The storage capacity shall be sufficient to maintain a
uniform operation while allowing for delayed shipments
and time for testing, Different batches of bitumen shall be
separated, so as to allow for easy identification.
4
If the bitumen is delivered to the site in metal drums.
on arrival the drums shall be inspected for perforations,
rusting, melting or any other defects that could cause
poUution or chemical changes to the bitumen.
Depending on the severity of each case, the Engineer shall

decide whether to retain or reject the affected drums.
5
The stored bitumen products should be protected
from temperatures which may exceed the range of 5
degrees C to +50 degrees C.
4.1.5.4
3
Thermometers of approved type and adequate range
{calibrated in 2 degrees C increments) for accurately
measuring the temperature of the bitumen while heating,
shall be located so as t o be readily visible and shall be
kept clean and in proper working order at all times.
4
Where storage tanks are required, their capacity shall
be sufficient for at least one day's production.
5
Bitumen materials, wasted through careless handling
or rendered unsuitable for usa by overheating shall not be
used in the work.
4.1.5.5
2
Tanks for heating and storage of bitumen shall be
capable of heating the material, under effective and
positive control at a!l times. to the specified temperature.
The system shall provide uniform healing for the entire
contents of the tank. The circulation system shall be of
adequate size to ensure proper and continuous circulation
of the bitumen during the entire operating period.
Suitable means shall be provided, either by steam or oil
jacketing, or other insulation, fot maintaining the required
1
Procedures for sampling of bituminous materials
shall conform to AASHTO T 40.
2
General requirements and procedures for sampling
and testing of the various types of bitumen shall conform
to the requirements of the relevant sections of these
specifications.
3
Testing for conformity of bitumen products shall be
carried out to AASHTO Standard Methods listed in
AASHTO M 20 and other specified standards.
4.1 .6
Bitumen Products
4.1.6.1
Penetration Graded Bitumen
The various grades of penetration graded bitumen

material shall conform generally with the requirements of
AASHTO M 20 as given in Table 4.1 ,6.1 ,
._,_,_
-~
PIINIIIItrlltfCJ!I G~
40-50
Requirement
Ductility at 25'C
Heating of Bitumen
Heating equipment shall be of an approved type.

Any method of agitation or heating that introduces free
steam or moisture into the bitumen will not be approved.
During the process of its manufacture, conveyance,
storage, or construction use, bitumen of whatever type
shall not be heated to temperatures more than 10 degrees
C above the maximum application temperature specified
for the respective type of bitumen nor above 170 degrees
C, whichever is the lower. Materials heated in excess of
these temperatures will be rejected and shall not be used
i n the work.
-4....
temperature of bitumen, weigh buckets, spray bars, and

other containers.
(em)
Kinematic Viscosity
at 135'C (eStI
Penetration at 25c
(0.1mm)
Softening Point {C)
Specific Gravity at
25c
Loss on heating to
163"C (% W1)
Penetration of
residue% of
original
Solubility In
Trichloroethylene
(%W1)
Ash content {% W1)
Flashpoint
(Cleveland Open
Cup) 1c)
60- 70 .,
80 - 11!!1
Min Malt Min Max Min MIIX .
..._,
100
'1001 too- liOO'
280
240
40
50
60
50
58
200... - I
'' ----,.
70
85
100
- --.......48: -
-. ---- .
.
r
56
1.01 1.06 1.01 1.06
r-'
99
54
50
_.., .....--.,
r-'1
99
99
1.()
1.0
250
250
1.0
58
48
48
... , ._
0.8
,._,
0..8
1.0
I
.
~I
' t.O
i
225
Table 4.1.6.1: Properties of Penetration Grade Bitumen
Sultanl'flt of Onton, Standd Spec.l.c.sons I r fio.,d & Bndge Comtruc!oot
2
Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the
AASHTO standard method listed in AASHTO M 20
3
Penetration bitumen application temperature range
shall be as given in table 4.1.6.2. Actual Mixing and
Compacting Temperature of Asphalt Concrete shall be
determined from Kinematic Viscosity of Bitumen as shown
lnMS-2.
f'eft
4o.1iO
80170
801100
Application
Temperature rCJ
150170
145-165
140160
i.
Compatibility with original bitumen: The

modified bitumen shall be tested for
compatibility with the polymer modifier to
ASTM 05892 for both softening point and
dynamic shear (DSRI. The difference In deg C
between the softening points of the respective
top and bottom portions of the tube sample
shall not exceed 4 deg C. The separation ratio
based on G shall have an average G value
!(top + bottom) I 21 within 0.8 to 1.2 of the
initial G value. Alternative compatibility test
eccord'ng to ASTM D5841 can be carried out in
lieu of ASTM 05892, only in cases where the
Contractor and supplier can prove that the
ASTM D5892 cannot be adopted for the type of
polymer proposed.
ii.
Mixing and compaction temperatures: The

mixing and compaction temperatures shall be
established in the laboratory by determining
the Brookfield viscositY of the approved
polymer modified bitumen at three different
temperatures 135 deg C, 165 deg C and 195
deg C. The established mixing and compaction
temperatures shall then be evaluated and
finalized based upon successful site trials.
iii
Proportion of modifier in the mix: Depending

upon the results of the tests specified in Table
4.1.6 3 below, the proportion of modifier to be
used and the quality control procedures during
mixing shall be determined in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations to
provide the optimum characteristics of the mix
as specified below.
Table 4.1.6.2: Appllatlon Temperature by Bitumen Grade
4.1.6.2
Bitumen Modifier and Modified Bituminous

Material
An approved modifier shall be incorporated in all

penetration graded bituminous material immediately prior
to the time of use, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
2
The types and penetration grades of the original
bituminous materials shall be submitted by the polymer
supplier/contractor for the Engineer's approval.
3
The Contractor shall provide evidence of his
experience to prove that he Is currently supplying and
using polymer modified bitumen on similar projects with
successful results and performance. The Contractor shall
submit data, which Indicate that the product has a proven
record of performance regarding compatibility with
asphaltic concrete mixtures, blending of the product with
the asphalt cement and placing and compacting the
mixture.
4
The
reduced
adhesive
bitumen
bitumen.
modified bitumen shall demonstrate significantly

temperature susceptibility andfor improved
qualities. The workability of the modified
shall be unchanged from that of unmodified
5
Unless specified otherwise under this Specification,
mixing and preparation of modified bitumen shall be
carried out in accordance with the modifier manufacturer's
lnstructio ns, and to the approval of the Engineer.
6
The Contractor shall subm't a method statement for
the preparation of polymer modified bitumen (PMB)
blending, including the type of polymer intended for use,
for the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall propose
the type of polymer he intends to use and shall
demonstrate through testing that the modified asphalt
meets all the specification requirements. Blending of the
asphalt cement and the modifier shall be done by the
supplier of the modifier in a mobile mixing p'ant adjacent
to the Contractor's aspholt plant on Site. The Contractor
shall submit for the Engineer's approval a comprehensive
OA/QC program to ensure that the pre-blended polymer
modified asphalt is delivered, stored in suitable cond't'ons,
incorporated in the bitumen mix and laid in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instruct'ons. The
minimum requirements for this program shall include but
shall not be limited to the following :
7
The minimum requirements and tests to be
performed on the modified bitumen shall be liS follows:
i.
If Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) polymer is

used, it shall have the following properties:
Butadiene-Styrene Ratio =70130.
Block Styrene = 30%.
Hardness Shore A = 80.
Density ASTM D792 = 0.93 - 0.95 g/cm3.
ii.
If Polyethylene polymer is used, it shall be

polyolefinic, primarily low densitY polyethylene
and shall meet the following requirements:
Test Property
Specification
Density
0.910 min
ASTM D792
0.940 max
Melt Index
Melting Point
iii.
1.0-15.0
ASTM D 1238
110"-135" c
The ratio of modifier to bitumen in the

completed mix shall be between 4 and B parts
of modifier for 100 parts of bitumen, according
4-5
~~
Mlnlatrv of Tronaport & CommunlcatSona. OGRLT
to the manufacturer's recommendations. which

must confirm that the modified bitumen w ill
meet the requirements of Tab~e 4.1.6.3 and will
prove the optimized propenies of the modified
bi nder at the proposed proportion of modifier.
iv,
The modified bitumen propenies shall comply

with the requirements of the latest revision of
AASHTO M320 specifications and to the
requirements of Table 4.1.6.3 below.
v.
The Contractor shall obtain from the

mal\ufacturer and provide to the Engineer
periodical cenificates stating that the modifier
Is being i ncorporated in the bitumen mix in
accordance with the with the approved OA/QC
program.
Frequency of
'T..cfng
agreed w ith the

Manufacturer
at each batch
Property
Tut Stlndard
1.
Penetration, 25 c. 1OOg, 5s, dmm
ASTMD5
2.
Softening Point, c
ASTMD36,
AASHTOT53
Mil\. 65
3.
Viscosity !Brookfield) at 135" C, max 4C
ASTMD4402
3000 CP
4.
Flash Point Temp, min c
AASHTOT48
230
every 500t
AASHTOTP5
76 "C
every 500t
1%
at each batch
AASHTOT301
75
at each batch
WY500t
Requfrementl
Raf
5.
6.
Dynamic Shear before RTFOT, G"lsln il,

Min. 1.00 kPe, test temperature 10
red/a, c, (Where G* = Dynemlc Shear
Modulus and il = phase angle)
Rolling Thin Film Oven IRTFOI Mass
Loss,
maJC, %
--
AASHTOT240
-- -ASTM 08084,
to be
--
7.
Elastic Recovery , 25" C, 10cm

elongation, % after RTFOT
8.
Dynamic Shear after Rolling Thin Film

Oven Test IRTFOTI. G*lsin i), Min. 2.2
kPa, test temperature ~ 10 rsdls, "C
-
AASHTOTP5
76 "C
Compatibility Test
ASTMD5892
See requirements
under Item 6 of
Paragraph 4.1.6.2
9.
Continue d on page 4 7
....,
at each batch
at each batch
Table 4.1.6.3: Modified Bitumen IPerfonnance Gradel

Properties
every 500 t
Suttonnto of Ornon St&"'ldilrd Sptcafoations fOt Ro3d l. Bridoe Conuructc.
8
The elastic recovery specified under Item 7 of Table
4 1.6.3 above corresponds to modified bitumen with either
an elastomer or a blend of elastomer and plastomer
polymers. Should the Contractor opt to use plastomer
type polymer only, for the asphalt modification, then the
elastic recovery requirement can be replaced by a set of
tests that shall be carried out at the start of the project,
with each set containing three samples, and the resu ts
shall conform to the following Table 4.1.6.4:
Property
Teltsc.ndenl
Requlrementa
..,._.,.Aging v.... Relldue
Pressure Aging
Vessel (PAV)
Aging
Temperature, c.
()ynlimlc Sheer,
AASHTOR28
110
oc
RCCutback
Grade
RC -
AASHTOT315
90- 115
105- 135
Medium-Curing (MCJ Cutback Bitumen

2
AASHTO standard methods listed in AASHTO M 82.
MC cutback bitumen spraying temperature ranges
3
shall be as follows:
37"C
Report
AASHTOT313
oc
4.1.6.5
Spraying
Tempc
MC
30
21-63
MC
70
45 - 80
MC
250
70- 110
MC -
BOO
95. 125
MC - 3000
110-145
Slow-Curing (SCJ Cutback Bitumen
SC cutback shall conform to the requirements of

1
ASTM 0 2026 which covers Grades SC-70, SC-250, SC-800,
and SC-3000, and are shown in Table 4.1.6.7.
AASHTOT314
oc
oc.
Table 4.1.8.4: Additional Tests Required for Plastomer
2
Samp1ing and testing shall be in accordance with the
appropriate ASTM standard methods.
3
SC cutback bitumen spraying temperature ranges
SC Cutback
Grade
Type Polymer
9
The percentage of the polymer to be mixed with the
conventional bitumen to modify the latter shall be based
on tests to satisfy the job miK formula.
10 The modifier shall be pre-blended into the
conventional bitumen before mixing with the aggregate in
the hot mix plant.
11 Blending Equipment: The production of the modified
bitumen shall require a specialized high shear blending
machinery to ensure complete and controlled dispersion
and chemical reaction of the modifiers with the
conventional bitumen.
4.1.6.3
800
RC 3000
MCCutback
Grade
e 60s, "C.
Direct tension.
Failure scrain,
minimum 1.0%
Test temperature
0 1.0 mmlmin,
40-75
65 - 105
1
MC cutback shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 82, which covers Grades MC-30, MC-70, MC250, MC-800 and MC-3000 and are listed In Table 4.1.6 6.
GsinO,
MaKimum 5000
kPa,
Test temperature
0 10 redls. OC.
Physical
Hardenino
Creep Stiffness,
S, Mulmum 300
MPa m-value,
minimum 0.300
Test temperaCure
70
RC - 250
RC 4.1.6.4
Spraying
Temp"C
Rapid-Curing (RC) Cutback Bitumen
RC cutback shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 81 , which covers Grades RC-70, RC-250, RC800, and RC-3000 and are listed in Table 4.1.6.5
2
AASHTO standard methods listed in AASHTO M 81 .
3
RC cutback bitumen spraying temperature ranges
4.1.6.6
Spraying
Temp"C
SC 70
45.80
sc - 250
70 110
SC - BOO
95 - 125
sc - Jooo
110-145
Slow-Setting
(55
and
CSS)
Emulsified
a tumens Generally
Selection and use of emulsified bitumens shall
generally be in accordance with the recommendations in
AASHTO R 5, subject to the following requirements.
2
The manufacturer shell furnish samples of the base
bitumen used in the emulsion.
3
When samples of undiluted emulsion are not readily
avail able for test purposes, tests may be made on the
diluted emulsion and the respective specifications
modified to reflect the changes in properties resulting
from d'lution of the b' tumen.
4-7
~~
MinlRtry of Trnnport & Conmunlent5onn
OGRLT
../"'..~<Bitumlnous Pavement
4
AU emulsified bitumens shall adhere firmly to the
surface of the mineral aggregate or the highway surface
as appropriate. Failure of the emulsified b' tumen to
perform satisfactorily on the job shall be deemed cause
for its rejection regardless of satisfactory laboratory test
results.
4.1 .6.7
Anionic Slow-Setting (SSI Emulsified Bitumen
Anionic emulsified bitumens shall, prior to dilution,

conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 140, for Types
SS-1 and 55 1h and as ~sled in Table4.11.
2
SampHng and testing shall be in accordance with
AASHTOT59.
3
Emulsified bitumen spraying temperature range shall
be set so that appropriate viscosity for each app~ication Is
achieved, if specific viscosity curves are not available the
range values, generally considered as guidance, shall be
25 65 degrees C. The temperature range for pugmill
mixing for medium and slow setting types shall be 1565
degrees C.
RC-70
Par-m~llt'lrest
t<ineffiatic Viseaslty at 60 oc
centistokes
FINh Point (Tag, open-cupl
Water percent
Distillation Test:
Distillate percentage by volume of total
distillate to 360 oc
- To 190
To 2250C
. . ..
To 2600C
To 3150C
Residue from distillation to 360 oc volume
w rcentage of s11mDie by difference
Tests on residue from d istillation:
Absolute viscosity at
60 oc poises
Ductility, 5 em/min.
at 2.5 OC
Solubility in Trichloroethylene,
oercent
- Spot test with: . - St11ndard Naphta
Naphtha-xylene solvent.
oercent )!Yiene
- Heptanexylene solvent.
percent xYlene
oc-
--
em
Min
70
140
0.2
Min
Max
Min
250
500
BOO
1600
3000
27
27
27
,-----,
0.2
.- - 35- .
55
65
600
2400
600
l . -._.
-
60
801::"
2400
-....._j
100
99
RC-30
- RC-800
MIX
10
50
70
85
Table 4.1.6.5: Properties of R.C. Cutback Bitumen
..a
RG-250
'
Max
.
.
"
Min
oc
100
0.2
- - - ..,_,-16
.
46
75
75
600
2400
.-
0.2
'
- .- .
2.5
70
80
600
2400
r-:----'
100
6000
__j
~
--,
99
Max
,---,
99
Negative for all grades
Negative for ell grades

100
99
- -
Sultftnnto of Omon
S~'ld.ord
Spoeol.c.:lloOIIo< liNd l!o ll do- Consttuc::
MC.70
MC-30
Parameter/Tnt
Kinematic Viscosity at 60 c
centistokes
Flash Point (Tag, apen cup ] ~
Water percent
Distillation Test:
Distillate percentage by
volume of total distillate to
360"C
To 225"C
To260"C
To3150C
_
Residue from distillation to
360 OC volume percentage of
saiTJ)Ie ~ difference
Tests on residue from
dlsti nation:
Absolute viscosity et 60 c
poises
Ductility, 5 em/min. 111 25 c
em
Solubility In Trichloroethylene,
percent
Spot test with:
MC-3000
MC800
MC-250
Min
Mu
Mfn
Max
Min
! Mu
Min
Mu
Min
MIX
30
60
70
140
250
500
BOO
1600
3000
6000
38
66
66
66
38
0.2
0.2
0.2
25
70
93
0
20
65
20
60
90
15
60
10
55
87
40
75
0
45
35
80
0
15
15
75
50
55
ff1
75
80
300
1200
300
1200
300
1200
300
1200
300
100
100
99
99
100
100
99
99
- Standard Naphtha
100
99
0.2
0.2
1200
I
-.-.......
-
Naphtha-xylene solvant,
percent xylene
- Haptene-xylene solvent,
percent xylene

Table 4 1.6.6: Properties of M.C. Cutback Bitumen
SC-70
PariHM!efiTea
Klnemetlc Viscosity et 60
1-~St
Flesh Point (Cleveland open
cup) cieQrees c
Distillation Test
total d istillate to 360 c
Volume ~ Solubility in
trichloroethylene ~
Kinematic viscosity on
distillation residue at 6QC,St
Asphalt residue:
ResidUe of 100 p enetration, '16
Ductility of 100 pene~tion
residue et 25-t, em Water,%
SC-3000
SC-800
SC-250
Min
Mu
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
70
140
250
500
BOO
1600
3000
6000
66
79
107
10
30
20
99
99
70
50
60
100
100
0.5
0.5
Table 4.1.6.7: Properties of S.C. Cutback Bitume n
100
93
--2
12
99
99
20
160
40
350
70
80
100
100
"
-=-
0.5
0.5
~
~
Min a try of Trnnport & Communic.atJona OGRLT
../"'.~<Bituminous Pavement
S.htsfng
.-
Viscosity, Saybolt
1
, Furol at 25
St(lj"age stability
tesl, 24h %
Cement mixing test,
!
:c.
Min
MIX
20
100
j
i
Sl-1h
Min
MIX
S$-1
20
100
"
Sieve test. %
Residue by
distillation %
TastS on residue
from distillation
test: Penetration, 25
100 a. 5 s
Ductility. 25c, 5
cmlmin,cm
0.1
0.1
57
57
_J
200
40
90
100
40
40
97.5
117.5
Table 4.1 6.8: Properties of Anionic Emulsified Bitumen

Slow-Setting
(CSSI
Emulsified
Bitumen
Cationic emulsified bitumens shall, prior to dilution,
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 208, for Types
CSS4 and as ~sled in Table 4.1.6.9.
SloWs.ilifto --- -
= Min
Tests on emulsions:
Viscosity, Saybolt Furol at
25-"C s
Storage sta~...,.,.. 24-h,
- .% ...
Particle charge test

Sieve test, %
Cement mixing ti!St, %
Distillation:
Residue .%
Tests on residue from
distillation tast:
Penetration, 25"~ 100_fl, 5 s
Ouctilitv. 25"C, 5 em/min, em
Solubility
In
trichloroethylene% _____ __
20
~-
-~ MIX
Prime and Tack coats
4.2. 1
Descri ption
_,
..
.. 1-
57
100
100
4.2.2
Materials
4.2.2.1
Medium Curing Cutback Bitumen
0.10
2.0
-'
-250
Rapid-Curing Cutback Bitumen
RC cutback bitumen (for tack c:oatsl shall be Grades

AC70 or RC250 as appropriate and as specified in Subsection 4.1 - 'Materials for Bituminous Construction', or as
4.2.2.3
Positive
This Sub-secti on describes requirements for

furnishing and applyi ng MC cutback bitumen prime coat
to a previously constructed sub-base or aggregate base
course, highway shoulders, or concrete pavement; and
furnishing and applying RC cutback bitumen or emulsified
bitumen as a tack coat to a previously constructed
bituminous base or wearing surface to provide bond for a
superimposed bituminous course; all as and where shown
on the Drawi ngs.
4.2.2.2
~
Slow-Setting Emulsified Bitumen
Slow-setting emulsified bitumen (for tack coats)

shall be slow setting Grades SS-1, SS-1h or CSSl , as
appropriate and as specified in Sub-section 4.1 'Materials for Bituminous Construction'. or as required by
the Engineer.
4.2.2.4
Polymer Modified Bituminous Tack Coat
40
97.5
Table 4.1.6.9: Propertie& of Cationic Emulsified Bitumen

Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with
AASHTOT69.
3
Emulsified bitumen spraying temperature range shall
be set so that appropriate viscosity for each application ls
achieved, if specific viscosity curve is not available the
-410
4.2
MC cutback bitumen (for prime coatsl shall be as

recommended by ASTM 0 2399. Generally MC 70 shall be
used uoless otherwise specified
- - CS$-1
1
No separate measurement and no items are i ncluded
I n the Bill of Quantities for the materials described in this
Sub-section. Measurement and payment provisions are
I ncluded in the appropriate Sub-sections of this Section 4.
'
Solubility in
trlchforoethylene %
Cationic
Method of Measurement and Basis of

Payment
'
4.1.6.8
4.1.7
-~
range values, generally considered as guidance shall be

25-65 degrees C. The temperature range for pugmill
mixing for medium and slow setting types shall be 15-65
degrees C.
The polymer modified tack coat materia l shall be as

specified in Sub-section 4.1, the original base binder
(before polymer modification! shan be penetration grade
bitumen and the polymer modified bitumen binder shall
be as specified under paragraph 4.1.6.2. The viscosity o f
the binder used for the polymer modified tack coat
(Brookfield viscosity determined as per ASTM 044021 at
application temperature shan range between 200 and 400
CP. The softening point and elastic recovery at 25" C (after
RTfOTI of the polymer mod'fied tack coat shall not be less
than eo c and 90% respectively.
Sultnnlllto af Oman. Suncl"'d Speco!;c.otiotls lor llod I:. Bn<
4.2.3
Equipment
Equipment used for diluting emulsified bitumen,

heating cutback bitumen, spraying cutback and emulsified
bitumen, and for application of blotting material to prime
coals, shall conform with the relevant requirements of this
Specification and with the Contractor's approved list of
equipment.
4.2.4
The Engineer may require trial sections to be

constructed prior to the commencement of on-site prime
or tack coat applications. The Contractor shall construct
trial sections using varying application rates of bitumen,
as selected by the Engineer. Each trial section shall be 2
lanes wide by 50 m long, at approved locations on or close
to the site.
2
Each trial section shall be constructed using the same
materials, m1x1ng and spraying equipment, and
construction procedures, proposed for use in the Works.
3
the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment and the most
suitable application rates for cutback bitumen prime and
tack coats, or emulsifi ad bitumen tack coats.
4
The Contractor shall not proceed with any on-site
coat applications until the methods and procedures
established in the trials have been approved.
4.2.6
Application Procedures
4.2.5.1
Medium Curing Cutback BiiUmen
All equipment used for surface cleaning, heating

bitumen (if required) and application of prime and tack
coats, shall be adequate for the purposes intended and
shall be approved before use.
2
All surfaces to receive prime or tack coats shall
conform to the specified tolerances and compaction
requirements and shall be properly cleaned using power
brooms or power blowers.
The surfaces shall be
approved before applying any bitumen material.
3
Application of prime coats and tack coats shall be
performed only when the surface to be treated is
sufficiently dry for tack coat and sufficiently moist for
prime coat, and when the atmospheric temperatura is
above 1O"C for the application of tack coat, 15"C for the
application of prime coat. No application is to be
performed if there is fog, rain, strong winds, dusty
conditions, or dust storms.
4
The surfaces of all structures, curbs, gutters and
other highway appurtenances shall be protected in an
approved manner to prevent them from being splattered
or stained with bitumen or damaged during equipment
operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for making
good any such staining or damage to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
5
Traffic shall not be permitted on surfaces after they
have been cleaned end prepared for prime or tack coat
application.
6
If there are undue delays in scheduling priming or
subsequent paving after priming, the surface tolerances
and compaction of the granular course shall be reverified
and deficient areas corrected or replaced in an approved
manner at the Contractor's expense.
7
The Contractor shall maintain prime coats and tack
coats intact until they are covered by the subsequent
pavement course. Any area where the coats have been
damaged shall be cleaned of all loose material, any
surface defects repaired and the coat re-applied at the
Contractor's expense.
Traffic control measures shall
conform to the requirements of the relevant Sections of
this Specification.
4.2.5.2
Prime Coat Application
If required by the Engineer, when the surface is an

untreated subgrade or a granular surface, the cleaned
surface shall be given a light application of water and
allowed to dry to the condition deemed appropriate by the
Engineer before the bituminous material is applied.
2
Heating of MC cutback bitumen and its temperature
at the time of application shall conform to the relevant
requi remenls of Sub-section 4.1.
3
Areas to be primed shall be as shown on the
Drawings and including 200 mm widths outside the edges
of the pavement line; top of embankment slopes to
pavement lines; and between curbs or gutter edges for
bridge checks.
4
Application rates for prime coat will be determined
by the Engineer from the trial sections, and shall be
generally within the following ranges:
Range of AppiM=.tfan
R.t for Prim c.t
Type of Surface
Untreated subgrade surfaces,
should!!rs subbase and base courses
'
Bridge weariilg surfaces, asphalt
overlay on existing concrete
gavements
Other surfaces
kg.lsq.m.
0.81 .75
0.1-0.4
as determined
from field tests
or trials
Table 4.2.5.1: Range of Application Rates for Prime Coat

5
The Engineer may order additional trial sections
and/or alter the previously established rates of application
during progress of the work.
6
Prime coat (MC-701 cutback, or other grade If ordered
by the Engineer, shall be applied at the rate selected by
the Engineer, using approved type pressure distributors
operated by skilled workmen. The spray nozzles and
spray bar shall be adjusted and frequently checked so that
uniform distribution Is ensured. Spraying shall cease
immediately upon any clogging or interference of any
~~
Mlnitrv ot Trnnaport S. Communications
OGRLT
/'-~<:Bituminous Pavement
nozzle, and corrective measures taken before spraying is

resumed.
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The rate of application

shall be between 0.25 and 0.5 kg./sq.m .
7
Hand spraying will be approved only for priming
small patches or inaccessible areas that cannot be primed
by normal operation of the pressure distributor.
2
The polymer modified tack coat shell be applied at a
temperature ranging from 1ao C to 190 C.
B
Application of prime at the junction of spreads shall
not ba excessive. Any excess shall be removed from the
surface and any skipped areas or recognized deficiencies
shall be corrected by use of hand sprays.
9
When required by the Engineer, a light covering of
blotting material shall be applied to the prime coat 48
hours after spraying and when it has not dried sufficiently
to withstand damage by traffic. The blotting material shall
be smooth fine sand, or other approved material.
10 Prime coats shall be cured for 3 days before
construction traffic is allowed on it or before the
succeedlng pavement layer is placed, or as directed by the
Engineer, depending on weather conditions.
4.2.6.3
Tack Coat Application
Tack coat shall be applied to the areas shown on the

Drawings on clean dry surface, and the rate shall be as
ordered by the Engineer. Emulsified bitumen shall be
diluted and thoroughly mixed with an equal amount of
water before application.
2
Heating of RC cutback bitumen and Its t emperature at
the time of application shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 4.1 'Materials for Bituminous
Construction'. Where slowsetting emulsified bitumen (SS
or CSS Typal is used for tack coat, it shall not normally
require heating except in temperatures below 20 degrees
c.
3
The rate of application shall be approved by the
Engineer and after trial tests are carried out it shall be
between 0,1 and 0.5 kg.lsq.m, depending on whether RC
cutback or emulsified bitumen is used and on the surface
condition of the bituminous course on which the tack coat
is to be sprayed, The resulting bitumen residue shall be at
least 0.35 lcg.fsq.m. The Engineer may alter the previously
established rates of application during progress of the
work, if he deems it necessary.
4
The tack coat shall be allowed to dry only until it is in
a suitable tacky condition to receive the superimposed
bituminous course.
Tack coat application shall not
proceed so far in advance of the following course that it
dries out completely.
Spraying procedures shall be as specified for prime
5
coat application.
6
Blotting material shaP not be applied to tack coats.
4.2.5.4
Polymer Modified Tack Coat
Polymer modified tack coat shall be hot applied over

the prepared polymer modif111d or unmodified bituminous
layers to receive the polymer modified bituminous layer,
as indicated on Drawings. The type of tack coat and its
rate of application shall be compatible with the polymer
modified bituminous layer that will be appl ied on top of i t
4-12
4.2.6
Bituminous prime coat shall be measured by the

square meter of the areas shown on the cross section at
the appropriate rete specified by the Engineer.
2
Bituminous tack coat shall be measured by the
square meter of the areas shown on the cross section at
the appropriate rate specified by the Engineer.
Polymer Modified Bituminous tack coat shall be
3
measured by the square mater of the areas shown on the
cross section at the appropriate rate specified by the
Engineer.
Surface preparation, protective measures to avoid
4
staining or damage to appurtenances, blotting of prime
coats when required, and cleaning stains and repairing
damage caused by equipment, prim ing or spraying tack
coat at areas outside the edge of the pavement line, etc.,
shall not be measured f or direct payment, but shall be
considered as subsidiary work, the costs of which are
deemed to be included in the rates stated in the Bill or
Quantities.
4.2.7
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above, w ill be paid for at the
unit rates lor the various items in the Bill of Quantities ,
materials. transporting and placing, labor. equipment,
too Is and other items necessary for the proper completion
of the work.
4.2.8
;,
i i.
iii.

Bituminous prime col t.
Bituminous t ack coat.
Polymer modified t ack coat.
4.3
Bituminous Courses
4.3.1
Description
This Su bsection describes requirements for

furnishing materials, mixing at a central mixing plant, and
spreading and compacting various bitumi n01.1s concrete
and other bitumi nous mixes, all as and where shown on
the Drawi ngs.
2
Requirements with
particular application to
bituminous base course, binder and wearing courses,
leveling course, cold mix courses or recycled bituminous
courses are specified in the respective Sub-secti ons
relating to such courses.
Sultnnntu of Omon. Stondrd Specilic..tliooo le< ~ & 9ndacr Conslructioo
4.3.2
Materials
Bituminous plant mixes shall generally be composed

of coarse mineral aggregate, fine mineral aggregate,
mineral filler or cement if required, and penetration
graded bitumen, polymer modified bitumen (for
performance graded bitumens} with mix additives if
specified, cutback bitumen or emulsified bitumen
appropriate to the type of bituminous course to be
constructed.
AU materials shall conform
2
4.3.3
to
the
relevant
Job Mixes and Project Mixes
At least 30 days prior to the date on which the

Contractor Intends to begin production at the mixing plant,
and after receiving approval of the aggregates, and
delivery to the Site of the bitumen specified, the
Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed job mix
formula.
7
In order to meet the requirements, an approved
additive such as Portland cement, hydrated lime or liquid
anti-strip agent, may be required in the job mix. Portia nd
cement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 85.
Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 207,
Type N. Cement or hydrated time will normally be
required in the approximate range of 23% by weight of
the aggregates and shall be added at the cold feed in dry
or slurry form as directed. liquid anti-striping agent, if
needed, will normally be required In the approximate
range of 0.6-1.0% by weight of the bitumen, or according
to the manufacturer's specifications.
8
Upon receipt of approval of the job mix formula, the
Contractor shall adjust his mixing plant to proportion the
individual aggregates, mineral filler and bitumen to
produce a final mix within the tolerances given in Table
4.3.3.1. The approved final mix that shall be used in the
daily production is called the 'project mix'.
Speelffed Tolerencn
Slwe Dwfgnetlon
l.quare opening&)
2
The job mix formula shall stipulate a single
combined grading of all aggregate and filler materials
showing the specific percentage by weight passing each
sieve size and the specific percentage by weight of each
material to be used in the total mix.
3
The job mix formula shall be established by the
Contractor, under the supervision of the Engineer, in the
field laboratory. Mix design procedures shall conform to
the Marshall method of mix design and relevant
procedures contained in Asphalt Institute Manual MS2.
All trial mixes shall be prepared and tested by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engneer.
4
The job mix formula shall specify a combnation of
mineral aggregates, including filler and bitumen {plus
bitumen modifier if any) in such proportions as to produca
a job mix which is within the limits of the specified
gradation and bitumen content ranges and which meets
the Marshall Test requirements, as prescribed for each
particular type of b' tumen course. It shall also stipulate the
mixing temperature at discharge from the mixer which,
unless otherwise directed, shall be 170 degrees C (for the
conventional unmodified asphalt).
5
The Marshall Test procedure shall be used to
determine the percentage of bitumen to be incorporated in
the mix. The job mix formula shall take into consideration
the absorption of bitumen into the aggregates. Air voids
shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure given
in the Asphalt Institute Manual. MS-2. The recommended
range of bitumen content is as follows:
r=
.....
I~
Aggregate
CIA
Aggragete
9.5 mm and above
+ or-5.0%
+or-5.0%
4.75 mm
+or-4.0%
2.36 mm
+ or-4.0%
.
2.00 mm
+or-4.0%
0.15 mm (No. 801
+or-3.0%
0.075 mm (No. 2001
+or-1.0%
+or - 1.0%
CIUIB
+or-4.0%
Bitumen Content
+or - 0.2%
Temperature of Mix
on dlscharae
+or-5.0%
Table 4.3.3.1: Maximum Variations of Project Mhc from

Approved Job Mix
9
Any deviation from these limits shall be made only
with the approval ofthe Engineer.
10 Conformance to gradation requirements will be
determl ned on the extracted aggregate in accordance with
AASHTO T 30. The bitumen content shall be determined
in accordance with AASHTO T 164 or AASHTO T 308.
Bituminous base and binder courses: 3% to

3.8%.
Bituminous wearing course: 3.2% to 4.0%.
11 The Engineer will test the project mix at least twice

daily during plant operation and, if necessary, direct the
Contractor to readjust the pia nt to conform to the job mix
formula.
If, due to differing cold feed or hot bin
gradations, the Contractor cannot consistently produce a
project mix meeting the job mix requirements, production
shall cease, the job mix shall be redesigned and
reapproved and the plant readjusted to produce a new job
mix.
6
When compacting specimens in accordance w"th the
Marshall Test procedure, the number of blows applied
with the compaction hammer sha1 be 75 on each side,
unless otherwise specified.
12 The participation of the Engineer in the preparation

of the job mix formula shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for producing project mixes
meeting the specified requirements.
ii.
'
~
~
IVIi'llatry of Trnnaport & Commu'llcntlona
4.3.4
Equipment
4.3.4.1
General
OGR~ T
Plant and equipment for mixing, transporting.

spreading and compacting bituminous mixes, shall
conform with the requirements of the relevant subsections
of these specificatfons and to the Contractor' s approved
equipment list.
4.3.4.2
Mixing Plant
Bituminous mixes shall be produced in an approved

batch mixing plant of adequate size with a minimum
capacity of not less than 80 tonlhr and a mixer capacity of
not less than 750 kg. batch. The plant shall conform to the
relevant requirements of AASHTO M 156.
2
A mechanical batch counter shall be installed as part
of the timing device and shall be designed to register only
completely mixed batches.
3
The mixing plant shall be fully equipped to control
the gradation of hot dry aggregates and of cold damp
aggregates. A suitable dust collection system shall be
installed, capable of returning all dust to the mixture
whenever required. Suitable filters shall be incorporated
whenever the mixing plant Is in the vicinity of town, or
whenever they are required by law.
4
The cold feed system shall be of continuous belt feed
type or other approved system. It should be easlly
modified to a11ow hydrated lime slurry to be added to the
mlx prior to heating, and dry powdered lime added after
heat<ng.
5
An approved automatic weighing, cycling and
monitori ng system shall be installed as part of the
batching equipment. Facilities for easy sampling of the
aggregates from the hot bins whilst the plant is in
operation shall also be provided.
6
The Contr.&ctor shell systematically inspect end verify,

~n the presence of the Engineer. on a weekly basis and
also whenever suspect the following key operational
aspects of the mixing plant:
State of repair of the screens. and their frame
mountings.
Proper working of cold and hot bin gates.
Accuracy of belching scales for filler,
aggregates and bitumen.
Proper working of the nozzles of the mixer
bitumen sprayer.
State of repair of the paddle tips and liners of
the mixer.
7
The Contractor shall furnish, for reference and
retention by the Engineer, one complete set of the
manufacturer's instruction and operating manuals for the
mTxl ng plant intended for use.
8
At the commencement of the contract. 2 copies each
of the latest editlons of Asphalt tnstitvte Specification SS-1
and Manuals MS-2, MS-3, MS-8 and MS-22 shall be
furnished by the Contractor for use by the Engineer's
supervisory staff and, in addition. one copy of each as
4-U
appropriate shall be issued to each of the Contractor's

senior staff Involved in bituminous course work. At the
end of the Contract 1!1 the copies shall become the
property of the Employer.
4.3.4.3
Spraading and Finishing Equipment
1
Bituminous courses shall be spread and finished
using approved type, self-contained, power-propelled
pavers of sufficient capacity to be capable of laying up to
80 ton/hr. Pavers shan be provided with electronically
controlled vibratory screed or strike-off assembty with
devices for heating the screed, and shall be capable of
spreading and finishing the various courses of bituminous
plant mix to the proper thickness and in lane and shoulder
widths applicable to the typical cross sections shown on
the Drawings, and in Incremental widths between 2.4 m
and 8 m. If the geometry of the cross section allows, wider
pavers will be required to cover the full width of the
pavemant section in order to avoid longitudinal
construction joints.
2
The pavers shall be equipped with calibrated sansors
to control tha road profile in accordance with the design
3
The pavers shall employ mechanical devices such as
equalizing runners, straightedge runners, evener arms or
other compensating devices, to maintain trueness of
grade and confine tha edges of the mix to true lines
without the use of stationary side forms. Joint leveling
devices shall be provided for smoothing and adjusting
longitudinal joints between lanes.
4
The paver shall be equipped with a receiving hopper
having sufficient capacity for a uniform spreading
operation.
The hopper shaP be equipped with a
distribution system to placa the mix uniformly in front of
the full length of the screed.
5
The screed or strike,off assambly and e)(tensions
shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required
evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging
the mix.
6
The paver shall be capable of being operated at
forward speeds consistent with satisfactory laying of the
mix. Speed shall be fully adjustable between 3 m,min and
6 m/min.
7
The automatic controls shall consist of an automatic
linkage arrangement such that, through the process of
automaticaliy adjusting the screed thickness control, tha
mix can be placed and finished to a predetermined grade
and a uniform crown or cross section.
Articulated
averaging beams utilized for grade control shall be at least
9 m in length.
8
If during construction, the spreading and finishing
equipment in operation leaves in the pavement surface
tracks or indented areas or other objections ble
irregularities that are not satisfactorily corrected by
scheduled operations, the use of such equipment shall be
discontinued and other satisfactory spreading and
finishing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
Sultnnnto of On,Qn. St:~:..-.d

::.:;
.:.
d.:
S:::
"'""
:::.,
' _ _..;,'o
: :_ __:l!o:.::
Bn
:::
"doe
~.::
Co
:::n=::
a truet
::,::":::.:20
"' ::_"""
9
The Contractor shall make available, for reference by
the Engineer, the manufacturer's instruction and operating
manuals for each paver intended for use.
4.3.5
Unless otherwise directed, the bitumen tamperature shall

be as given in Table4.3.6.1.
Type and
Gl'llde of
Immediately prior to finalization of the job mix

formula, the Contractor sha II lay trial sections of tha
various bituminous mixes intended for use in the work.
Each trial section shall be 2 lanes wide by 100 m long at
approved locations close to the Site. Each trial section
shall ba laid using the same materials, proposed job mix,
mixing, spreading and compaction plant and spreading
and compaction procedures, proposed for usa in the work.
2
Each trial section shall seNe as a field verification of
the job mix design. The mix density achievable and the air
voids at that density shall be determined and, if less than
required, the job mix formula shall be adjusted
accordingly.
3
Each trial section shall aIso demonstrate the
adequacy of hauling, spreading and compaction
equipment and the suitability of the construction methods
and organization proposed.
4
If the trial section meets the required specification,
the job mix formula will be approved.
5
The trial section shall be carried out at the
Contractor's expense and is to be removed from Site, if
4.3.6
Mixing Procedures
Each aggregate ingredient shall be heated and dried

such that tha temperature recorded in the hot fines bin
after screening does not exceed 170 degrees C. If any
aggregates contain excess moisture so as to cause
foaming in the mixture or their temperature is in excess of
170 degrees C, they shall be removed from the bins and
disposed of as directed.
2
Immediately after heating, the aggregates shall be
screened into at least 3 sizes and conveyed into separate
bins ready for botching and mixing with the bitumen.
When the aggregates furnished are of such size and
grading that separating into 3 bins is impractical, the
number of required separations may, if approved, be
reduced to 2 only. Screening operations shall produce, at
plant operating capacity. gradations in each of the sizes of
heated and dried aggregates that are reasonably uniform
and will result in the production of a mix conforming to
the job mix requirements.
3
The dried and heated aggregate and (cold) mineral
filler shall be combined in the plant in the proportionate
amounts as determined by the job mix. Just prior to
bitumen entering the mixer, the anti-stripping additive, if
required, shall be thoroughly mixed with the bitumen
which shall then be introduced into the pugmill mixer in
the proportionate amount determined by the job mix.
4
The temperature of tha bitumen upon entering the
pugmill she II be within 1 5c of the aggregate temperature.
Max.
Tempem ure "C
Alphah
Im mediately aft
diKh ra from
Puamlll
80 - 10Q !!_en.
160
60-70 pen.
165
40-50 pen.
170
Table 4.3.6.1: Bitumen Temperature

5
Any conventional (unmodified) bituminous mix
subjected to higher temperature than those shown in
Table 4.3.6. 1 shall be rejected.
6
The mixing temperature for the polymer modified
bituminous mixture shall be as determined under Subsection 4.1, paragraph 4.1.6.2.
7
The mixing lime required fn order to obtain a
homogeneous mix and adequate coating of the
aggregates with bitumen shall be determined by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. This time she II
be determined whenever the source of aggregate for the
mix changes.
B In batch plants, mixing time shall begin upon entry of

bitumen into the pugmill.
9
Mixing time for mixing plants will be determined by
the following formula or other approved methods: Mixing
time (sec)= Pugmill dead capacity ikg.) divided by pugmill
output (kg./sec)
4.3.7
Surface Preparation
When the bituminous mix is to be placed on a

prepared subbase, or base, the surface shall be prepared
to meet the appropriate specified compaction and surface
tolerance requirements. The surface shall then be primed
es specified in Sub-section 4.2 -'Prime and Tack Coats'.
No bituminous mix shall be laid on a prime coat until it
has been inspected and approved.
2
When the bituminous mix is to be placed on an
existing bituminous surface, the surface shall be cleaned
of all foreign malarial and broomed free of dust Any
loose, broken or shattered bituminous material along the
edges of the existing surface shall be removed and the
exposed surface, and a sufficient width of the shoulder
adjacent to the edge of the existing surface, shall be
shaped, bladed, compacted and broomed to provide a
uniform firm layer for the new surface course.
3
Broken, soft, or unstable areas of existing bituminous
surface, aggregate base or granular subbase shall be
removed and replaced. The areas she II be excavated to a
depth as directed and refilled with the specified
bituminous mix.
4
Prior to placing of the bituminous mix on an existing
bituminous surface when required, a tack coat as specified
in Subsection 4.2 - 'Prime and Tack Coats' shall be
4-15 .
~
~
Mlnlatry of Tranport & Communlcntlona
DGRl f
applied to the existing surface at the rate determined by

the Engineer. No mixture shall be laid on a tack coat until
it has been inspected and approved.
4.3.8
4.3.8.1
Delivery of Mix to Site
A sufficient number of haul vehicles shall be

provided so that adequate supplies of mix are delivered to
ensure that continuous paving will be achieved.
2
Hauling equipment for aggregates and bituminous
mixes shall consist of vehicles having dump bodies
suitable for dumping materials i n a windrow or in
spreader boxes. The bodies shall be so constructed that
their volume measurement can be accurately determined.
They shall be constructed and maintained such that loss of
materials during hauling operations will not occur. Dump
controls shall be capable of operation from the driver's
seat.
3
Hauling equipment for hot bituminous mixes shall
have t ight, clean, smooth metal beds which are
periodically thinly coated with a lime solution or other
approved material to prevent adherence of the mix. All
hauling units shaD be equipped with a canv{ls or other
approved type of cover which shall be used to cover the
hot material upon loading at the mixing plant and shall
not be removed until the mix is discharged into the paver.
Hot mix material may be transported without such cover
only If permitted by the Engineer in special circumstances.
4
The dispatching of the hauling vehicles to the Site
shall be so scheduled that all material delivered is placed
at least 90 minutes before sunset to allow sufficient lime
for compaction, unless the use of artificial light Is
approved. Delivery of material shall be at a uniform rate
and m al\ amount well within the capacity of the paving
and compacting equipment.
5
The mix at delivery to the paver shall be I"'Ot more
than 10"C below discharge temperature at the mixing
plant. The minimum temperature for the commencement
of breakdown rolling ls 120"C. Mix loads of temperature
tess than 120"C shall not be accepted, and the load shall
be disposed of and another load used. If there is
consistent failure to meet the temperature requirement the
Engineer shall order paving operations to stop until
suitable measures are taken by the Contractor to ensure
that temperature requirements are met.
6
Each haul vehicle shall be weighed after each loading
at the mixing plant and accurate records shall be kept of
the gross weight and net weight of each load, for each
vehicle and dates and time of loading
4.3.8.2
Setting Out and Reference Lines
The Contractor shall survey the centerline profile and

crown of t he existing surface or base and determine a
reference grade line which w ill be submitted for approval.
A refe ren~;e line of wire or suitable cord shall be Installed
at a uniform grade parallel to the approved reference
4-16
grade line such that conformance with the required

geometries. surface tolerance and m inimum thickness
requirements shall be ensured. The reference line shall be
supported at am maximum spacing unless there is
noticeable sag in the line or the pavement surface, in
which case the maximum spacing shall be 4m.
2
The reference line shaD be maintained taut and free
from sags at all times during spreading and initial
compacting operations.
3
Ewcept where the paver is matching a previously
placed layer, a wire or cord reference line shall be installed
on both sides ofthe paver fort he initial bituminous course
being laid.
Thereafter only one reference line will
normally be required, if the paver is equipped with
adequate automatic super elevation control.
4.3.8.3
Bituminous mixes shall be laid onlv when the air

temperature is at least 5 degrees C or above, when the
existing surface is free from moisture, and when the
weather is not foggy, rainy, dusty or excessively windy
(particularly at low temperaturesl .
2
After comple!lon of surface preparation, the
bituminous mix shall be spread and finished true to crown
and grade by approved automatically controlled
bituminous pavers. The mix may be spread and finished
by approved hand methods only where the Engineer
determines that machine methods are impracticable.
Hand methods Include heated hand tampers of at least 10
kg. weight and approved type mechanical {vibratoryl
tampers.
3
The paver shall spread the bituminous mix without
tearing the surface and shall strike a finish that is smooth,
true to cross section, uniform in density and texture and
free from hollows, transverse corrugations and other
irregularities.
4
The paver shall be operated at a speed which gives
the best results for the type of paver being used and which
coordinates satisfactorily with the rate of delivery of the
mix to the paver. A uniform rate of placement shall be
achieved without repeated intermittent operation of the
paver.
5
The mix shall be delivered to the paver in time to
permit completion of spreading, finishing and ~;ompaction
of the m ix during day tight hours.
6
If during laving, the paver is repeatedly delayed
because of lack of mix or if the paver stands at one
location for an extended period, resulting in the {unrolled I
mat under and adjacent to the rear of the spreader falling
below the minimum temperature for breakdown rolling,
the affected portion of mat shall be cut out and discarded
and a transverse joint shall be constructed. Paving shall
not recommence until the Engineer is satisfied that paving
wi l proceed without interruptions.
7
Contact surfaces of curbing, gutters, manholes, and
similar structures shall be painted with a thin, uniform
coating of tack coat material. The bituminous mixture
shall be placed uniformly high near the contact surfaces

so that after compaction it will be 10 mm above the edge
of such structure.
If during the paving operations the spreading and
B
finishing equipment in operation leaves in the pavement
surface tracks or indented areas or other objectionable
irregularities that are not satisfactorily corrected by the
scheduled operations, the use of the equipment shall be
discontinued. until faults are corrected to the approval of
the Engineer. If this is not possible, other satisfactory
spreading and finishing equipment shall be provided by
the Contractor.
9
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, where
successive bituminous layers are to be placed, the surface
of each existing layer shall be swept clean with a power
broom, or by other approved means and a tack coat
applied at the rate designated by the Engineer and in
accorda nee with the relevant requirements of Sub-section
4.2.
10 Transverse joints in succeeding layers shall be offset
by at least 2 m. Longitudinal joints shall be offset at least
150mm.
11 Bituminous mix shall be spread in one or more
layers so that, after rolling, the nominal thickness of each
layer of the compacted bituminous material shall be
between 2 and 3 times maximum size of aggregate. This
maximum thickness may be Increased slightly when such
increase is more appropriate to total pavement thickness
and provided the Engineer determines that such increased
thickness will not be detrimental to the quality of the
finished bituminous course, and the Contractor can show
that the required density is attained throughout the layer
thickness.
12 Transitions and structure approaches shall meet the
design criteria for geometries, the surface tolerance
specifications, and shall not be visually discontinuous or
abrupt in appearance.
13 Side roads, entrances and lay-bys shall be paved in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
4.3.8.4
Joints and Edges
All joints between old and new pavements or

between successive days' work shall be such as to ensure
thorough and continuous bond between the old and new
material.
2
Before placing fresh mix against previously laid
asphalt layers or against old pavement, the contact
surface shall be saw-cut to e near vertical face, and shall
be sprayed or painted with a thin uniform coat of tack coat
material unless otherwise directed. Longitudinal joints
shall be made by overlapping the paver screed on the
previously laid material (cut back as necessary! and
depositing a sufficient amount of fresh mix so that the
joint formed will be smooth and tight.
3
The Contractor shall schedule paving operations so
as to minimize the exposure of the leading lane of
longitudinal joints prior to the completion and compaction
of the joint. As a minimum, the leading lane shall not be

laid in advance of the adjacent trailing lane by more than
one half day of paving, and in no case shall the leading
lane be more than 0.5 km ahead of the trailing lane
without approve I. In the event of failure to conform to
these requirements, the Engineer may temporarily
suspend paving on the leading lane.
4
Unsupported edges of bituminous layers shall be
rolled immediately following the rolling of the longitudinal
joint. The material along the unsupported edge may, if
approved, be raised slightly by hand methods, to ensure
that the full weight of the roller will bear fully on the edge
material.
5
On completion, the longitudinal edges of bituminous
pavement shall be true to the width and alignment as
shown on the Drawings. The edges shall be cut back if
necessary prior to rolling, additional mix placed manually
in a longitudinal strip adjoining each pavement edge, and
the edge rolled down to a neat 3:1 (horizontal:verticall
slope or as shown on drawings.
6
Transversa joints shall be carefully constructed and
thoroughly compacted to provide a smooth riding surface.
Joints shall be straight-edged and string-lined to assure
smoothness and true alignment. If the joint is formed with
a bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a straight line and
vertical face, it shall be checked with a straight edge
before fresh material is placed against it to complete the
joint. If a bulkhead is not used to form the joint and the
roller is permitted to roll over the end of the new material,
the I ine shall be located back of the rounded edge a
sufficient distance to provide a true surface and crosssection. If the joint has been distorted by traffic or by
other means, it shall be trimmed to line. In either case, the
joint face shall be painted with a thin coating of
bituminous materia I before the fresh material is pi aced
against it.
4.3.8.5
Compaction
Rollers shall be operated by competent and

experienced
operators
in
accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, copies of which shall be
submitted to the Engineer. Rollers shall be kept in
operation continuously if necessary, so that all parts of the
pavement receive substantially equal compaction at the
time desired.
2
After spreading and strike-off, and as soon as the mix
conditions permit the rolling to be performed without
excessive shoving or tearing, the mixture shall be
thoroughly and uniformly compacted, using approved
types, sizes and numbers of rollers. Rolling shall not be
prolonged to the pol nt where cracks appear or shoving or
displacement occurs.
~
~
Min a try of TrBnllport & Comrnunicotlona DGRLT
_.../"...~<Bituminous Pavement
successive trips by at least one half the width of the rear

wheels. Alternate trips of the rollers shall be of slightly
differing lengths.
3
Rollers shall be of self-propelled 2aMie tandem or
three wheel steel-tired, pneumatic-tired and vibratory steel
wheel types, in proper operating condition, capable of
reversing without backlash or tearing of the surface, and
shall be operated at speeds slow enough to avoid
displacement ofthe bitumi nous mi)(.
12 The speed of the rollers, rolling pattern and, i n the

case of vibratory rollers, the frequency and amplitude of
vibration, shall be approved by the Engineer. To prevent
adhesion of the mix to the rollers, the wheels shall be kept
properly and lightly moistened with water. An excessive
use of water w ill not be permitted.
4
Initial breakdown rolling shall be carried out by use
of 2 dual-drum vibrating steel-wheeled vibratory rollers
each of minimum weight 7,000 kg. and with vibrating
frequency of 2,0003,000 cycles/min. These rollers shall be
purpose made for compaction of hot bituminous courses.
13 The rolling pattern, type and number of rollers shall

be established by a site trial so as to achieve the requi red
compaction.
The approved rolling pattern shall be
followed.
5
Intermediate rolling shall be carried out by use of at
least 2 self-propelled, tandem pneumatic smooth-tired
ro~ers each capable of e)(erting contact pressures of up to
690 KN./sq.m. (100 psi) and ballast adjustable to ensure
uniform wheel loadings.
14 The Initial or breakdown ro"ing shall be followed by

intermediate rolling involving 3 coverages with
pneumatic-tired rollers unless otherwise specified.
6
Final rolling shall be carried out by use of two, 2axle
tandem steel-tired static rollers each of minimum weight
10,000 kg. capable of exerting contact ptessures of up to
65 kg /cm1 (350 lb/in.).
15 Fin'shing rolling shall then be carried out by means

of 2-axle tandem power steel rollers unless otherwise
designated, If. the specified density is not achieved,
changes shall be made In size and number of rollers being
used to ensure the compaction requirements are met.
7
Prior to use on Site of pneumatic-tired roners, the
Contractor shall furnish, for reference and retention by the
Engineer, manufacturers' charts or tabulations showil'1g
the contact areas and contact pressures for the full range
of t ire inflation pressures and for the full range of tire
loadings for each type and size of compactor t ire to be
used. The Conttactor shall ensure ttlat tire pressures are
maintained at all times in conformity with such charts or
tabulations. The ma)(imum allowable tolerances shall be
plus or minus 35 KN./sq.m. (5 psi).
16 The average compacted density for all bituminous

courses shall be equal to or greater than 98% of the
average Marshall bulk specific gravity for each dey's
production unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. It is
also required that 90% of the results shall be greater than
the minimum specification tolerance limit of 96.3%.
8
Rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed,
generally with the drive roll or wheels nearest to the pavar.
Recommended speeds are shown in Table 4.3.8.1 (kmlh. ).
~pnd af R~len
Roll8r1Vpe
Steel Tlted
Statlc Rollers
Pneumatic
Tired Rollers
Vibratory
Rollers
4.3.9
(l(m:.tlr.)
' BI'NkdoWn
lntennecllate
R~llna
R~llna
R~llna
41.5
Flnllh
5
4.5
-
---
Table 4.3.8.1 Recommended Speeds of Rollers

9
11 vibratory rollers are used, when it is required to
change direction the vibration shall be turned off before
the roller is stopped, and turned on after motion in the
new direction begins.
10 RoiJing shall begin as soon as the mixture will bear
the roller weight without undue displacement. lhe
minimum temperature of the mat at which rolling shall be
allowed to start is 120"C.
11 Breakdown rolling shall consist of 3 complete
coverages of each of the 2 rollers specified in Item 4 above
unless otherwise directed. Rolling shall be longitudinal,
begirming at the low side of the spread of material and
proceeding towards the high side, overlapping on
418
17 Any miM that becomes loose. broken. mixed with

foreign material, or which is in any way defective in finish
or density, or which does not conform In all other respects
with the specified requirements shall be removed,
replaced with suitable material and properly finished.
Sampling and testing shall conform to

requirements of tl!e relevant Sub-sections of
Specification and Table 4 3.9.1.
the
the
2
The Marshall bul.k specific gravity shall be
determined in accordance with AASHTO T 166. The
Marshall sper;imens shaD be prepared from the same
material used in construction. taken from samples of fresh
bituminous mix at the m ixing plant or from trucks
delivering miM to the Site. Oven heating for up to 30
minutes to maintain the heat of the sample is permissible.
3
The bulk specific gravity of the miM as placed and
compacted in situ shall be determined from 100 mm
nominal diameter core samples, or slab samples cut from
each compacted layer on the roael at locations designated
by the Engineer who may require additional tests to
determine limits of areas deficient in density, or for
recheck.
4
Samples
for in-situ
bulk
specific
gravity
determinations shall be taken in sets of 2 from each
pavement location. Minimum frequency of sampling for
each bituminous layer shell be one setllene/500 m, with a
minimum of one set per day of placing bitumi nous layers.
SultanniD Df O!Man. sr.w.ud Spectl.u~ono lor Ro..S & Bndoe Cmnlluct""'
Frequency of Tall Required
!B)
IAI
won:~
4-1
Materi als used in
bituminous mix (at
batchina Dlantl
T~requency
Tab at aouroe of
material
for ell tab

mantloned under IAI
1 Specific gravrty
& water absorption
2. Abrasion Test
3. Chert content
4. Clay lumps &
friable materials
5. Flalcy and elongated
pertieles
6. S~undness
4-2
Materials used in
bituminous mx (from
hotbinsl
T..U lit road alta
Frequency for all

teltamantloned
under (B)
- Test for each

Soun:e
- Test for each 1,000
eu.m ofasphalt
produced
- When materials
quality changes
As requested
-=='
1 Gradation
2. Specific gravrty
and water
absorption
3. PlasticitY index
Test for each soun:e

When materials
quality changes
As requestad
4. Sand equNalent
5. Stripping with
4-3
Bituminous mix
design for each
course {from hot bins)
asphalt
1. Complete mix
For each project
design in accordance
1 When results are not
with American Asphalt 1 c ons;stent with the mix
Institute (MS2)
clesic:tn results.
2. Loss of stability
-As requested
4-4
Bituminous M x
Marshall stabloty for
each laver
At batchlng plant
1. Stability
2. Flow
3: Extrilction (binder
content & gradation!_
4. Airvolcb
5. Voids'" mineral
ag_g_~tes
6. Daily Marshall
densitY
Tnt for each day's

production
Test for every 200
cu.m of asphalt
produced per day
Test for each
batching plant
As requested
1. Stability
2. Flow
3. Extraction'(binder
content & gradation)
4. Air voids
5. Voids rn rriiniiral
Test each 3
working days
Test for each
batchlng plant
As requested
~tes
6. Dally Marshall
den~
-Test each 200

lin.m., per lane
7. Loss of stability
- Once a week
and for batch
l11yar
As~uested
-Test each 3
working days
B. Loss of st11tillity
As -~uested
Table 4.3.9-1 Frequency of Testing for Bituminous
6
The Contractor s hall, w hen necessary, furnrsh and
Pavement
apply cold water. ice. or other coo ling subs tance to the
surface of the pavement to prevent the sampling from
5
The Contractor shall cut the samples with an
shattering or d isintegrat ing. The Cont ractor shall fill end
approved core drill in the presence ol the Engineer. The
compact ell test holes at his own expense.
equipment shel l be capable of cutting the mixture w ithout
shatte ring the edges or otherwise disturbing the density of
the specimen.
7. Compaction
density
& thickness (after
final compaction)
--
~
/'...,/
Mlnlatry of Tronport & Communlctlon DG!U T
4.3.10
Surface Tolerances
The fully compacted and completed bituminous

course shall conform to the lines, grades end cross
sections as shown on the Drawings.
2
The elevations of the finished course shall be
checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
at maximum intervals of 10m and at intermediate points
as directed.
3
The fin!shed surface is tested with a 3 m long
centerline, the maximum deviation of the surface from the
exceed the tolerances specified for each type of
bituminous course laid, as shown under Paragraphs
4.4.10.1 and 4.5.10.1 for the bituminous base end wearing
courses, respectively. All areas which exceed the specified
tolerances shown under Paragraphs 4.4.10.1 and 4.5.10.1
shall be corrected by removing the defective sections of
bituminous course and reconstructing them, or if
approved by the Engineer, by increasi ng the thickness of
the succeeding course(s).
4
The finished surface shell also be tested using the
rolling straight edge, and the areas which exceed the
specified tolerances shown under Paragraphs 4.4.10.2 and
4.5.10.2 shall be corrected by removing the defective
sections of bituminous course and reconstructing them, or
if approved by the Engineer, by increasing the thickness of
the succeedlng course(s).
5
The tolerances specified for evenness of finished
surfaces for all types of bituminous courses, shell not
invalidate the tolerances specified for construction
thickness and elevations of such courses.
4.3.11
Determination of Thickness of
Courses
The Contractor shall compensate for minor

deficiencies in the thickness of anv bituminous course in
the pavement structure by increasing the thickness of the
subsequent bituminous course. After completion of the
final (wearing) course anv deficiencies in the thickness of
any course which have not been compensated for by
increasing the thickness of a subsequent course, will be
considered deficiencies in the final (weari ng) course.
2
Cylinder core samples shall be taken as specified for
in situ bulk specified gravity core samples.
3
Thickness of bituminous courses shall be determined
by average caliper measurement of cores, rounded
upwards to the nearest mm.
4
Paved sections to be measured separately shall
consist of each 300 lin.m. section in each traffic lane. The
last section in each traffic lane shall be 300 m plus the
fractional part of 300 m remaining. Other areas such as
intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramps, etc. shall be
measured as one section and the thickness of each shall
be determined separately. Small irregular unit areas may
be included as part of another section.
.C-20
5
One core shall be taken from each section by the
Contractor at approved locations and in the presence of
the Engineer. When the measurement of the core from
anv paved section is not deficient by more than 5 mm
from the specified thickness, the core will be deemed to be
of the specified thickness as shown on the Drawings.
6
When the measurement of the core from any paved
section is deficient by more than 5 mm but not more than
20 mm, 2 additional cores spaced at not less than 100m
shall be taken and used together with the first core to
determine the average thickness of such section.
7
When the measurement of the core from anv paved
section is less than the specified thickness by more than
20 mm. the average thickness of such section shall be
determined by taking additional cores at not less than 5 m
intervals parallel to the centerline in each direction from
the affected location until, In each direction, a core is taken
which is not deficient by more than 20 mm. Exploratory
cores for deficient thickness will not be used in average
thickness determinations.
B
Any deficiencies in the tota l thickness of bituminous
courses shall be subject to a proportional reduction in the
volume of final (surface) course measured for payment, or
complete removal and replacement, as shown in Table
4.3.11. 1 below.
Alternatively, the Contractor shall
construct at his own expense, a surface course overlay, if
practicable In the judgment of the Engineer. Any such
overlay shall be a minimum of 40 mm compacted
thickness and to the specified standard of the course It is
overlaying.
9
If the deficiency in total thickness of the asphalt
lavers is from 0 to 3mm, full payment will be made, on
condition that deficiencies are not found In more than 10%
of the total project. Deficiencies between 3mm and 10mm,
80% of the fuP payment for the bitum"nous courses wlll be
made.
~ In
the
Thlc:kn.e of
lndlvldu.l AapMit
byll'l
DetlclenGy "' the
Th~ofTotal
S5mm
5-20mm
> 2ri~m (~r 25%

of design
t hickness}
Action
AapMit layll'l
>
S3mm
Full~ment
3 - 10mm
BO%~ment
tomin (o~ 15%

of design
thickness!
...
Remove and
replace
Table 4.3.11-1: Tolerance& In bituminous concrete layer

thicknesses
4.3.12
Conventional and polymer modified bituminous

courses are measured in the respective Sub-sections for
each type of bituminous course transported, furnished,
spread,
compacted,
completed
and
accepted.
Measurement shaD not indude the rolled down edge
strips of bituminous courses placed outside the edge of
paving shown on the Drawi ngs.
J
i
Sutt"ru'to of Ornon.
Sta:'\d~srd SpecfJUt~ons
fO( RDI!Id & Bridoa Cortstruet,ic:
til
2
Bituminous prime and tack coats are measured as
prescribed In Sub-section 4.2.
3
Bituminous overlays constructed by order of the
Engineer to correct deficiencies In total thickness of
bituminous courses or to compensate for major
deficiencies in the thickness of any underlying bituminous
course, shall not be measured for direct payment, but
shall be considered as subsidiary work the costs of which
will be deemed to be included In the respective rates for
bituminous courses. stated in the Bill of Quantities.
4
Establishment of the job mix formula, surface
preparation, construction of joints, hand painting of
contact surfaces, remedial treatment of surface
irregularities, cutting of cores and slabs for testing or
measurement purposes, reinstatement of core and slab
areas of pavement, rolled down longitudinal bituminous
edge strips, additional thickness of bituminous course in
excess of the speciii ad thickness, and other ancillary items
shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall be
considered as subsidiary work the costs of which will be
deemed to be included in the respective rates for
bituminous courses stated in the Bill of Quantities.
4.3.13
Job Mix and Project Mix

Contractor in accordance with the procedures and
requirements of Subsection 4.3.
2
The job mix for bituminous base course shall
conform to the following composition limits as shown in
Table 4.4.3.1.
Para"l.ter
Vlllua
Marshall stability at BO"C (Kg.)
1200
Flow(mms)_
2 3;5
Voids in mineral aggragete, (VMAJ
12%
{minimuml
Air voids
4-7%
Voids filled with bitumen, (VFBJ
50to70%
of
Marshall
stability
by
submerging specimens In water at 60oC
for 24 h. compared to stability
maasured after submersion in water at
60"C for 30 minutes
Max_ 25%
% Air voids at refllul
Min. 2%
Loss
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above and as measured in the
various Subsections of Section 4, will be paid for at the
materials, transporting and placing, labor, equipment,
tools and other items necessary for the proper completion
of the work.
4.4
Bituminous Base Course
4.4.1
Description
Materials
All materials shall conform

to
the
relevant
2
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, bitumen
for base course construction shall be
penetration
greded bitumen.
oono
For modified bitumen, unless otherwise shown on

3
the Drawings, bitumen for base course construction shall
not be lower than
penetration graded bitumen
modified with one of the polymers specified in Subsection 4.1, Paragraph 4.1.6.2 and as per these same
specification requirements.
oono
Table 4.4.3.1 : Job Mix Requirements for Bituminous Bue

Cout&e
3
Prior to final approval, the proposed job mix, but
with a bituminous content at the upper percentage limits
shall be compacted to refusal, (400, 500 and 600 blowsl
end the resulting voids in the mix shall not be less than
2%.
4
After the job mix formula has been established and
approved, all mixes furnished shall conform to it within
the stated tolerances.
This Sub-section describes requirements for

spreading and compacting conventional or polymer
modified bituminous base course on an approved
aggregate base course or granular subbase, as shown on
the Drawings.
4.4.2
4.4.3
5
The job mix formula shall be re-established if the
source of aggregate, filler or bitumen changes.
4.4.4
Equipment
Plant and equipment for mixing, hauling, placing and

compacting bituminous base course material, shall
conform to the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4_3.
4.4.5
Construction of Tria I Sections
Trial sections shall be constructed as and where

directed and in accordance with the relevant requirements
of Sub-section 4.3.
4.4.6
Mixing Procedures
Handling and mixing of bitumen {including modifier

and antistripping agent, if any land aggregates (including
mineral filler if requiredl shall be in accordance with the
relevant requirements of Subsaction 4-3-
~
~
Minlatry of Trnnaport &. COnlmunlcat.iona . OGRL T
/"-.~<Bituminous Pavement
4.4.7
Surface Preparation
Preparation of the surface upon which the

bi tuminous base course mix is to be laid. shall be
appropriate to the type and condition of such surface and
shall conform with the relevant requirements of Sub
section 4.3.
4
The longitudinal regularity of the surfaces of base
course as measured by the rolling straight-edge set at 5
mm shall be such that the number of surface irregulariti es
is within the relevant limits stated in Table 4.4 10-2. No
irregularity exceeding 10 mm shall be permitted.
Length
4.4.8
4.4.8.1
General
The delivery, spreading and finishing of bituminous

mix for base course shall conform with the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 4.3 and to the following
panicular requirements.
4.4.8.2
Rollers
The rollers, rolling sequence, pattern and speed sh11l

be as stipulated in Sub-section 4.3, Paragraph 4.3.8.5.
2
The number of rollers used for any stage of rolling
may be reduced by the Engineer to one, provided that the
base course width being compacted is less than 5.5 m and
provided an equivalent standby roller is available on Site
as replacement in the event of breakdown of the operating
roller.
4.4.8.3
Standard of Compaction
The compacted density of the bituminous base

course shaD be equal to or greater than 98% of the
average Marshd bulk density for each day s production or
otherwise as directed by the Engineer.
4.4.9
Sampling and testing shall conform to the relevant

requirements of Sub-section 4.3, and T able 4,3.9,1,
. Max. permitted number of

surface Irregularities
300m
75m
20
Table 4.4.10.2: Tolerances on bituminous base course

surface irregularity when tested by rolling straight-edge
4.4.11
Procedures for determining the average compacted

thickness of bituminous base course shall conform with
the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.3 and to the
following panicular requirements.
2
Cores for thickness measurements shall be used to
determine if changes are necessary in the constructed
thickness of succeeding bituminous layers to rectify any
thickness defiCiencies in the bituminous base course.
3
In cases where the bituminous base course will not
be covered by superimposed binder or wearing courses,
the base course shall be deemed to be the final (weari ngl
course for the purposes of determining the proponion of
wearing course volume measured for payment or for the
purposes of any overlay ordered to correct deficiencies. In
such cases. the surface base course layer shall meet the
Surface Tolerance requirements specified under Clause
4.5.1 0 for wearing courses.
4.4.12
Surface tolerences shall conform with the relevant

requirements of Sub-section 4.3 and to the following
panicular requirements.
Conventional or polymer modified bituminous base

course shall each be measured in cubic meters of mix
furnished, spread, compacted, completed and accepted.
Measurement shall be based on the areas and thickness as
shown on the Drawings o r otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
2
The tolerances on elevations of finished bituminous
base course surface shall be not greater than + 6 mm.
3
When the finished surface is tested with a 3 m long
centerline. the maximum deviation of the surface from the
testing edge between any two contact points shall not
exceed 5 mm (Table 4.4.10.1).
2
Where bituminous base course Is intended to serve
as a wearing course, any deficiencies in thickness shall,
unless an overlay is constructed at the Contractor's
expense, result in a proponion only of the base course
volume being measured for payment. Proponions shall
be determined in accordance with the thickness
deficiencies stated in Sub-section 4.3, Table 4.3.11.1.
4.4.10
Surface Tolerances
tohnnc:.
Action
Surface elevation
Max.
6mm
Surface Irregularity
(3m straight edge)
Max.
5mm
Replace (min. 15m

length of road)
. -Raplace (min. 15m
length of road )
Prqperty
--
Tabla 4.4.10.1 Tolerances on bituminous basa course

surface elevation and straight edge Irregularity
422 .
4.4.13
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above, w ill be paid for at
!he unit rates for the various items in the Bill o f
Quantities, which rate shall be full compensation for
supplying materials, transporting and placing, for
labor, equipment, tools and other items necessary for
9ultarnoto of Om on. Sraoc!rd SPKliiC.>tiono lor liNd & Bridge CoMIIUC!ior
4.4.14
I.
ii.

Bituminous base course (Class A, Bl.
Polymer modified b1t base course (Class A, Bl.
4.5
Bituminous Binder and Wearing

Courses
4.5.1
Description

spreading and compacting bituminous binder course and
bituminous wearing course on an approved base course,
as shown on the Drawings.
4.5.2
Materials
4
The Job mix formula shall be re-established if the
source of agg regale, filler or bitumen is changed.
5
When tested for resistance to water damage In
accordance with AASHTO T-283 'Resistance of Compacted
Asphalt Mixtures to Moisture-Induced Damage', the
conventional and polymer modified bituminous wearing
course mixtures shall have a retained tensile strength
greater than or at least equal to 80%. In cases where the
anti-stripp'ng agents are not successful In providing the
specified tens"le strength ratio, the Contractor shall
consider alternative means, such as the use of hydrated
lime to achieve this purpose.
4.5.4

requirements of Sub-section 4.1
to
the
relevant
2
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. bitumen
for binder and wearing courses construction shall be sono
penetration graded bitumen. or any other suitable grade
for the climatic condition of the project.
3
For polymer modified bitumen, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings, bitumen for binder and wearing
courses construction shall not be lower than sono
penetration graded bitumen modified with one of the
polymers specified in Sub-section 4.1, Paragraph 4.1.6.2..
4.5.3
3
After the job mix formula has been established and
approved, alt subsequent mixes shall conform to it within
the allowable tolerances, as shown in Table 4.5.3.1.
The job mix formula shell be established by the

Contractor in accordance with the procedures end
2
The job mix for bituminous binder and wearing
courses shell conform to the following composition limits
as shown in Sub-section, Table 4.5.3.1.
Equipment

compacting bituminous binder and wearing courses
materia I shall conform to the relevant requirements of
Sub-section 4.3
4.5.5

of Sub-secfon 4.3..
4.5.6
Mixing Procedures
Handling and mixing of bitumen (including modifier

and anti-stripping agent, if any I and aggregates (including
mineral filler if required! shall be in accordance with the
relevant requirements of Sub-section 4 3.
4.5.7
Surface preparation
Binder
Coune
Wearing
Coune
Marshall stability at BO"C ( Kg.l
1300
1400
Preparation of the surface upon which the

bituminous binder and wearing course mixes are to be
laid, shall be appropriate to the type and condition of such
surface and shall conform to the relevant requirements of
Sub-section 4.3.
Flow(mmsl
2-4.5
2-5
4.5.8
13-14%
1-4--15%
4.5.8.1
General
4-7%
4-7%
50 to
70%
50 to
70%
Max
25%
Max
25%
Pn:~perty
Voids in mineral aggregate

IVMA)
Airvolds
Voids fillad with bitumen, (VFBI
Loss of Marshall stability by
submerging specimens in water
at eoc for 24 b. comp11red to
stability measured 11fter
submersion in w11ter at 60"C for
30 minutes
% Air voids at refusal
The delivery, spreading and finishi-ng of bituminous

mix for binder and wearing courses shall conform with the
relevant requirements of Subsection 4.3 and to the
following particular requirements.
4.5.8.2
Min 2%
Min 2%
Table 4 .5.31 Job Mix Requirement for Bituminous Binder

and Wearing Course
Rollers
The rollers, rolling sequence, pattern and speed sha II

be as stipulated in Sub-section 4.3, Paragraph 4.3.8.5.
2
The number of rollers used for any stage of rolling
may be reduced by the Engineer to one, provided that the
course width being compacted is less than 5.5 m in width,
and provided an equivalent stand-by roller is available on
~
~
Mlnlstry of Trnnport 6 Communlcntlons OGRLT
~~<Bituminous Pavement
Site as replacement, In the event of breakdown of the

operating roller.
The compacted density of the bituminous binder and

wearing courses shall be not less than 98% of the average
Marshall bulk density for each day's production.
5
The combination of the permitted tolerances In the
levels of the different pavement layers, excluding
aggregate base and sub-base courses, shall not result in a
reduction of thickness by more than 10 mm from the
specified thickness, as shown on the Drawings, nor a
reduction in the final wearing course thickness by more
than 5 mm from that specified or shown on the Drawings.
4.5.8.4
4.5.11
4.5.8.3
Standard of Compaction
Skid Resistance and Surface Texture
Surface Texture: Conventional and polymer modified

bituminous wearing course layer shall have a texture
depth of at least O.Bmm tested in accordance with tl'le
Sand Patch Test ASTM E 965. One Test shall be done
every 500m length of constructed road.
4.5.9

requirements of Sub-section 4 3 and Table 4.3.9.1.
4.5.10
Surface Tolerances
Surface tolerances sha ll conform w:th t he relevant

requirements of Sub-section 4-3 and to the following
particular requirements.
2
Tolerances on elevations of finished bituminous
binder and wearl ng course surfaces shall be not greater
than + 6 mm when compared to the design profile shown
on the drawings.
3
When the finished binder or wearing course surface
is tested with a 3 m long sttaightedge, placed parallel to,
or at right angles to the centerline, the maximum
devia!lon of the surface from the testing edge between
any two contact points shall not exceed 3 mm (Table
4.5.10-1).
Property

thickness of bituminous binder and wearing courses shall
conform to the relevant requ irements of Sub-section 4,3,
Clause 4.3. 11 and the tolerances/deficiencies shall comply
with the relevant requirements of Table 4.3.1 1.1 and with
the requirements of Item 2 following.
2
Cores for thickness measurements of the binder
course sh;~lt be used to determine if changes are
necessary in the constructed thickness of the wearing
course to rectify any thickness deficiencies in the binder
course.
4.5.12
Conventional and polymer modified bituminous

binder course and bituminous wearing courses shall each
be measured by the cubic meter of mix transported,
furnished, spread, compacted, completed and accepted.
Measurement shall be based on the areas and thickness as
shown on t he Drawings or otherwise directed by the
Engineer,
2
Deficiencies in thickness of the wearing course shall,
unless en overlay is constructed at the Contractor's
expense. result In a proportion only of the wearing course
area being measured for payment. Proportions shall bo
determined in accordance with the thickness defic ienci ~
stated- in Sub-section 4_3, Table 4.3. 11 .1
AGtlon
Toter.nc:e
Replace {minimum
Surface
Max, 6mm
elevation
15m length ofroad)
Surface
Replace (minimum
I rregularity {3m
Max, 3mm
15m length of road)
straloht.edQI!)_ - - - - Table 4.5.10. 1: Tolerances on bituminous wearing course
surface elevation and straight edge Irregularity
4
The longitudinal regularity of the surfaces of the
finished binder or wearing course as measured by the
rolling straight-edge set at 5 mm shall be such that the
number of surface irregularities is within the relevant
limits stated in Table 4.5. 102. No irregularity exceeding 10
mm shall be permitted.
Length
300m
75m
Max. permitted number of

surface Irregularities
15
----------------
Table 4.5.10.2: Tolerances on bituminous wearing course

surfacl! irregularity when tested by rolling straight-edge
~4
4.5.13
Basis of Payment

too Is and other items necessary for the proper completion
of the work.
4.5.14
i.
ii.
iii.
iv,
Items in the Bill of Qua ntitl es

Bituminous binder course.
Bituminous wearing course (Class A, B).
Polymer modified bituminous binder course.
Polymer modified bituminous wearing course
(Class A, B).
Sultnnnto of Oonon.
St:>el~rd ~r,u~ono
lor lio.><l & llridgo Const~;, 20
4.6
4.6.1
Bituminous Seal Coats- Surface

Dressings
Description

furnishing of materials and one or more applications of
cutback bitumen and cover material, or a single
application of emulsified bitumen, or spreading emulsified
bitumen slurry, to previously prepared base course or
wearing course surfaces, as shown on the Drawings.
2
Bituminous slurry seal coat {BSSCJ shall consist of
spreading and screeding a mixture of emulsified bitumen,
sand aggregate and water.
3
Single bituminous surface treatment {SBST) shell
consist of a single application of cutback or straight run
bitumen, and sand aggregate ores specified.
4
Double bituminous surface treatment {DBST) shall
consist of an application of cutback or straight run
bitumen and coarse graded cover aggregate followed not
less than 5 days later by a second application of cutback or
straight run bitumen and medium graded aggregate, or as
specified.
4.6.2
Materials
4.6.2.1
Bitumen
Bitumen for SBSD end DBSD (surface dressing)

applications shall be rapid-curing RC-800 grade,
conforming to the relevant requirements of Sub-section
4.1 and AASHTO M-81.
2
Bitumen for BSSC {slurry) applications shall be a
cationic, slow senl ng emulsified bitumen Grade CSS-1
conforming to the relevant requirements of Su b-sectlon
4.1.
4.8.2.2
Aggregates
Cover aggregates sha II consist of screenings of

crushed stone or crushed gravel. Aggregate for slurry
seals shall consist of crushed stone or gravel fines or
natural sand blended with not less than 50% crushed fines.
For heavy duty applications slurry aggregate shall consist
of 100% crushed fines.
2
The properties of cover end slurry seal aggregates
and their gradations shall be in accordance with the
relevant requirements of Sub-section 4,1.
4.6.3
4.6.4
Before commencement of Site seal coat applications,

the Contractor shall construct trial sections using varying
application rates for bitumen and for aggregates, as
selected by the Engineer. Each trial section shall be two
lanes wide by 50 m long, at approved locations on or close
to the Site.
2
Each trial section shall be constructed using the same
materials, mixing, spraying, spreading, rolling and
brooming equipment, and construction procedures,
proposed for use in the Works. Trial sections for slurry
seals shall be along existing bituminous pavements in the
vicinity of the Site.
3
the adequacy of the Contractor's equipment, the most
suitable application rates for cutback bitumen, emulsified
bitumen and the various gradations of aggregate, and the
most suitable consistency of slurry seal to fill cracks and
leave a residual coating of 3 mm over the entire
bituminous wearing surface.
4
The Contractor shall not proceed with any seal coat
applications until the methods and procedures established
in the trials have been approved.
4.6.5
Rates of Application
Application rates for cutback and emulsified bitumen

and for the various cover aggregate gradations, will be
determined by the Engineer from the trial sections and
shall be generally w ithin the ranges given in Table 4,6.5. 1.
Apptox, Rate of Application
Typa of SNI Coat

Coarse aggregate Seal
coat(06STl
Slurry aggregate Seal
coat
Slurry seal (SBSCl
Aggreglte
Binder
fkallcr.m.l
lkalsa.~rul
12.5-20.0
1.00:1.80
10.().15.0
0.90-1.80
Generally 5-8 kgJsq;m.

for the mix
Table 4.6.5-1: Application Rates

2
The Engineer may order additional trial sections and
alter the previously established rate~ of epplicatio n duri ng
progress of the we rk.
4.6.6
4.6.6.1
General
Equipment
All plant and equ'pment used for pugmill milling of

slurry mixes, heating and spraying of cutbaek and
emulsified bitumen, spreading, rolling and brooming of
cover aggregate. and applying and spreading slurry seals,
shall conform with the requirements of the relevant
sections of this Specification and with the Contrl ctor's
approved equipment list.
Appl'cations of bitumen and aggregate and

subsequent rolling shall be completed between sunrise
and sunset and under favorable weather conditions as
determined by the Engineer.
The atmospheric
temperature shall be above 15 degrees C and the weather
shall not be foggy, rainy, dusty or unduly windy.
Generally, where the seal coat is to carry traffic prior
2
to final sweeping, speed signs shall be erected to control
"-...
~
/
Ministry of 1\-nnaport & Communication DGRl T
the speed of traffic, Provision for traffic control shall be in

accordance with the requirements of Section 1. Sub
section 1.8.
3
When bituminous coatings are applied to sections of

which are to be promptly opened to traffic, and
the ambient temperature is contributing to slow curing
anr;l excessive pickup, the Contractor shall suspend
operations untll the Engineer approves continuation of
sealing work.
high~ay
4
The surface to be treated shall be dry or slightly
damp and the moisture content of aggregates at the lime
of application to the coated surface shall not exceed 3% by
weight.
5
Unless otherwise directed, the minimum time
interval between successive seal coats, in DBSD
applications, shall be 5 days.
4.6.6.2
Surface Preparation
Granular surfaces shaD be primed in accordance with

the requirements of Sub-section 4.2 prior to application of
the surface treatment. If there are delays in scheduling the
seal coating, which results in deterioration of the surface,
the Engineer may order appropriate repairs or corrective
t reatment prior to seal coating.
2
When coatings are applled to existing pavement
surfaces, all pavement repairs shown on the Drawings
shall first be completed. Where applicable, the positions
of traffic markings shall be surveyed and recorded to
enable their accurate replacement after the seal coatings
have been applied.
3
Immediately before applying any bituminous
material, all dirt, dust anr;l other objectionable material
shall be removed from the surface and cracks shall be
repaired or sealed as directed. If required, the surface
shall be slightly dampened with a light application of
water immediately prior to application of bitumen.
4
Surfaces to be slurry seeled shall be lightly sprayed,
immediately prior to spreading the slurry, with a slow
setting 3~1 water/emulsion mixture applied at the rate of
0.4.0.8 kg./sq.m.
4.6.6.3
Heating of Bitumen
The temperature of cutbaclc bitumen and of

emulsified bitumen at the time of application shall be as
specified in Sub-section 4 1.
4.6.6.4
Spreading Slurry Seal
Spreading of s~urry seal shall be by means of an

approved type spreader bol! which shall be capable of
spreading at least one traffic lane width. It shall have
Hexib!e rubber or similar strips fastened on each side to
prevent loss of slurry and shall have baffles incorporated
in the box to ensure uniform application. A rear, flel!ible.
adjustable strike-off blade shall be fitted to the box.
2
Areas Inaccessible to the slurry spreader box shaD be
s'urry sealed using hand or other approved methods.
4-2& .
3
The slurry seal coat shall be uniform end
homogeneous after spreading and shall not show signs of
separation of the emulsion and aggregate after setting.
4.6.6.5
Spraying of Bitumen
The bitumen cutback or emulsifier;! bitumen for fog

and seal coats shall be apprted by means of a pres sure
distributor uniformly and continuously over the section to
be treated. The rate of application shall be as designated
by the Engineer.
2
A strip of building paper or heavy polyethylene
sheeting, at least one m in width, and with a length equal
to that of the spray bar of the distributor plus 300 mm,
shall be used at the beginning of each application. If the
cut-off is not positive, the paper shall be used at the end of
each spread. The paper shall be removed and disposed of
after use. The distributor shall be moving forward at
proper application speed at the t ime the spray bar is
opened. Any skipped areas or deficiencies shall be
corrected Immediately as directed.
3
The length of spray run shan not exceed that which
cen be covered by the aggregate spreading equipment.
4
The application width of bitumen shall be not more
than 150 mm wider than the widt h covered by the
aggregate spraader,
Under no ci rcumstances shall
operations proceed in such a manner that the bitumen w ill
be allowed to chill, set up, dry, or otherwise impair
retention of the cover aggregate.
5
The Contractor shall keep a complete record of
bitumen used, based on distributor tank measurements
and on areas to which t he bitumen has been applied.
These records shall be submitted to the Engineer as
verification of the accuracy of the tachometer as well as
verification of application rates designated by the
Engineer.
6
Distribution of bitumen sha ll be so regulated and
sufficient material left in the distributor at the end of each
application, that there will be a uniform di stribution across
the spray bar. In no case shall the distributor be allowed
to expel air with the bitumen, thereby causing uneven
coverage.
7
The angle of the spray nozzles and the he!ght of the
spray bar shall be adjusted and regularly checked to
ensure uniform distributi on. The height of the spray bar
above the pavement surface should remai n constant
throughout the spraying process. Distribution shall cease
immediately upon any clogging or parti al blocking of any
nozzle and corrective measures shall be taken before
application is resumed.
4.6.6.6
Application of Aggregate
If directed, aggregates shall be washed prior to use i n

order to elfmlnate or reduce any du st coating or salts
before delivery to the spreader.
Operation of the aggregate spreader at speeds which
2
ceuse the particles to roll over after striking the bitumen
covered surface will not be permitted.
S..tton,.to of Oman. Stndd Sj>eco!ICatoono lor Ro.d & Bridge Construdior
Immediately upon application of bitumen, aggregate

of the required gradation shall be spread at the rate
designated by the Engineer.
Spreading shall be
accomplished in such a manner that the tires of the
hauling units or aggregate spreader do not come in
contact with the uncovered bitumen surface.
4
Where adjacent spreads are to be made, the first
aggregate spread shall not extend closer than 150 mm to
the edge of bitumen application. The adjacent spread of
bitumen shall overlap this 150 mm and complete
aggregate coverage shall be achieved on the second
spread promptly upon completion of the first spread to
ensure a smooth riding surface.
5
Immediately after aggregate has been spread,
deficient areas shall be covered by additional aggregate.
Humps, ridges or uneven distributions of aggregate shall
be removed and corrected to ensure that there are no
permanent ridges, bumps, or depressions in the
completed surface. Additional aggregate shall be spread
in whatever quantities necessary to prevent pick-up by
rollers or traffic, after which the surface shall be ro lied as
directed.
6
Care shall be taken to prevent aggregate from
entering ditches or Inlets of any type. The Contractor shall
be responsible for removing any such aggregate materials
or other accumulated debris arising out of his operations.
4.6.6.7
Rolling and Broaming
Aggregate shall nat be spread mare than 150 m

ahead of initial rolling operations.
2
Rollers shell not stop, start or turn on the surface
being rolled. Any damage to the surface arising out of
non-compliance with these requirements shall be made
good as directed, et the Contractor's expense.
Initial breakdown rolling shall proceed behind the

spreader (after any adjustments by hand methods to
One complete
correct for uneven distribution, etcl.
coverage shall be achieved using 2-axle self-propelled
steel-wheeled rollers of 6-8 tons weight and operating eta
maximum speed of 5 km/h.
Initial rolling shall be
completed within 30 minutes of spreading aggregate.
4
The Engineer may order the alternative use of
pneumatic-tired rollers for initial rolling if adequate
embedment of the aggregate is liable to result in
excessive crushing when steel-wheeled rollers are used.
5
Immediately following completion of the initial
rolling, the surface shall be rolled using self-propelled
pneumatic-tired rollers operated at a maximum speed of B
km/h, until at least 3 complete coverages have been
achieved.
If necessary during rolling operations, additional
6
screenings shell be lightly spread by hand methods and
re-rolled, to make good any small areas visibly deficient in
cover material.
7
Light drag braoming of the surface shall be carried
out 24 hours after completion of rolling and in such a
manner that embedded aggregate particles will not be
dislodged.
This brooming shall result in uniform
distribution of loose screenings over the surface which
shall then be re-rolled using pneumatic-tired rollers unlil'
at least 2 complete coverages have been achieved.
8
Light drag broomi ng and re-rolllng shall be repeated
24 hours after the initial broom ing, if sa directed.
9
Excess screenings shall be salvaged and stockpiled
or disposed of as directed.
4.6.6.8
Maintenance and Protection of Sealed Surfaces
BSSC shall be protected from traffic until such time

as the coatings have cured sufficiently and wi II not be
damaged by, adhere to or be picked up by, the tires of
vehicles.
2
Each coat of SBSD and OBSO shall be maintained
and protected from traffic for at least 3 days after
completion of rolling.
3
At the end of the 3day maintenance period for each
seal coat, or earlier if directed, the surface shall be finally
swept, using a rotary broom, to remove loose screenings.
Surplus screenings shall be stockpiled or disposed of as
directed.
4.6.7
Tolerances and Records
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the

accurate calibration of pressure distributors and for the
correct rates of application of bitumen as designated by
the Engineer.
Readings shall be taken of bitumen tanker contents
2
and temperature immediately prior to, and immediately
upon completion of each spraying run and the actual
application rate in kg./sq.m. shall be calculated. Complete
records shall be maintained of all such measurements and
the specific locations, width and lengths of the respective
runs.
3
The tolerances on temperature-adjusted application
rates of cutback bitumen shall be plus or minus 5% of the
designated rate.
4
Applications of cutback bitumen varying by more
than 5% but less than 10%, after temperature adjustment,
below the specified rate of application shall, if accepted,
be subject to a 10% reduction in quantity or area
measurements as appropriate.
5
Applications of cutback bitumen varying by more
than 10%, after temperature adjustment, above or below
the specified rata of application shall be rejected and the
unsatisfactory material replaced or made good as directed,
6
The Contractor shall maintain, on a daily basis,
complete records of the volumes and tonnage of each
type of aggregate delivered to the Site and used in each
section of the Works for seal coat applications.
7
All records and calculations of bitumen applications,
and aggregate delivery and use, shall be submitted to the
Engineer at the end of each day when seal coat
applications have been carried out. No measurements will
~
~
Mrniltry of Tronport & Communlcotrona OGRl T
/'-..~<:Bituminous Pavement
be made of bitumen applications which are not supported

by adequate, verifiable records.
4.6.8
Single bituminous surface treatment, double

bituminous surface treatment and bituminous slurry seal
coat shall each be measured In square meters of net area
covered as shown on lhe Drawings or directed by the
Engineer. Rates are deemed to include for all related work.
including, without limitation, trial sections. tests and
reports and wastage of materials.
4.6.9
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work.

materials, transporting and p1acing, labor, equipment,
of the work.
4.6.10
I.
li.
ill.
4.7

Single bituminous surface treatment.
Double bituminous surface treatment.
Bituminous slurry seal coat.
Bituminous Leveling Course and

Patching Work
4.7.1
Description
Tttis Sub-section describes requirements for

spreading and compacting bituminous leveling course on
an existing pavement surface. as shown on the Drawings
or d irected.
2
Patching works shall be limited to localized deficient
areas as jointly determined by the Engineer and the
Contractor. These areas are usually not exceeding 3m in
length and or:.e lane width and the dista11ce between two
individual patches is normally not less than 5m.
4.7.2
Materials
All materials shall conform to the requirements of

Sub-section 4.1.
4.7.3
The job mix formula shan be established by the

requirements of Subsectlon 4.3.
2
The job mix for bituminous lev~ing shall conform to
the requirements for binder course as provided in Subsection 4. 5.
428
4.7.4
Equipment

compacting bituminous leveling course materials shall
conform to the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.3.
4.7.5

of Sub-secti on 4.3.
4.7.6
Mixing Procedures

and enti-stripping agent, if any) and agg regales (including
mineral fiRer if required) shall be In accordance with the
relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.3.
4.7.7
Surface Preparation
Damaged pavement surfaces shall, where directed,

be repaired by patching prior to receiving the bituminous
leveling course. The extent of patching shall be as shown
on the Drawings or as directed.
2
Areas of existing pavement to be patched shall be cut
out to neat l ines to a depth ordered by the Engineer,
thoroughly cleaned, and the exposed edges of pavement
painted or sprayed with a thin coat of rapid curing cutback
bitumen grade RC70 or RC250 In accordance with the
relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.2. The cut out
pavement shall be patched with bitum inous material as
shown oro the Drawings or as d irected and conforming
w ith the relevant requirements of Subsection 4.1.
3
Patching shall be carried out in accordance with the
relevant requirements of Su bsection 4.3.
4
Patching shall be carried out in layers not exceeding
80 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly
compacted by means of approved pneumatic tampers
prior to placing the succeeding layer. Each layer shall be
protected from damage and d dirt or foreign material
shall be removed before placing subsequent layers. The
final layer shall be rolled w ith a heavy roller. Each layer
shall be approved prior to placement of subsequent layers.
5
AU cut-out pavement material and surplus patching
material shall be removed from the site and disposed of
by the Contractor prior to placing the leveling courses.
6
In areas where leveling courses are required, as
shown on the Drawings or directed, the Contractor shall
take cross sections of the existing pavement after
completing any patching. The cross sections shall be
taken at intervals of 12.5 meters or as directed. When the
survey is approved, the Engineer will determine and
Inform the Contractor of the locations. grades and
thicknesses of leveling courses to obtain the desired
surface.
7
Prior to placing the leveling courses, the existing
pavement surface shan be prepared in accordance with
the relevant requirements of Subsection 4.3, including the
use of pri me and tack coats as appropriate.
4.7.8
Delivery, spreading and finishing of leveling courses,

including compaction, shall conform to the relevant
2
In areas where a specific grade and super-elevation
are to be achieved by the leveling courses, setting out and
level control shall be based on a reference line installed in
accordance with the relevant requirements of Sub-section
4.3. In areas of minor leveling such as fil ~ng of pits or
small isolated areas, a mobile reference line or alternative
control system may be approved.
4.7.9
Sampling and testing of leveling courses shall

conform to the re"event requirements of Sub-section 4.3
and Table 4 3 9.1.
2
Where sampling and testing are not feasible due to
thickness or other constraints, the Engineer will determine
specification compliance based on an approved rolling
pattern or other basis.
4.7.1 0
Surface Tolerances
Surface tolerances for leveling courses shall conform

to the relevant requirements for binder courses in Sub
section 4. 5.
4.7.11
The Engineer may use thickness measurements,

spread rates, cross section or other methods to verify
quantities placed. Thickness measurements shall be in
accordance with the relevant requirements of Sub-section
4 3.
4.7.12
Bituminous leveling courses shall be measured by

the cu.m. of mix furnished, spread, compacted, completed
and accepted. Measurements shall be based on the areas
and thicknesses shown on the Drawings or as directed.
2
Bituminous patching work shall be measured by the
cu.m. of mix furnished, spread, compacted, completed
and accepted. Measurements shall be based on the areas
and thicknesses shown on the Drawings or as directed. No
measurements will be made of unauthorized areas or
extra thickness.
3
The rates for bituminous leveling course and for
patching work shall be deemed to include for all incidental
costs as stated in Sub-section 4.3, Clause 4.3.12.
4.7.13
Basis of Payment

which rate shall be full compensaton for supplying
materials, transporting and placing, for Ia bor, equipment,

olthework.
4.7.14
i.
it.

Bituminous Leveling Course.
Bituminous Patching Work.
4.8
Bituminous Cold Mix Courses
4.8.1
Description

furnishing materials, mixing manually or at a central
mixing plant, or in a travel mix plant and spreading and
compacting bituminous cold mix courses comprising
unheated mineral aggregate or cut-back asphalt on a
prepared surface, as shown on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer.
4.8.2
Materials

to
the
relevant
2
The type and grade of bitumen for the paving
mixture shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed.
The bitumen shall conform to the relevant requirements of
AASHTO M 81,M 82, M 140 or M 208.
4.8.3

2
The job mix shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 4.4 or Sub-section 4.5, as
appropriate.
4.8.4
Equipment

compacting b'tuminous cold mix courses shall conform to
the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.3. In the
continuous mixing plant, the devices feeding bauminous
material, aggregate and water shall be interlocked to
maintain automatically the correct proportions. In a travel
mix plant, the equipment used may be either a hopper
type, or a rotary type mixer. Both types of equipment
shall be capable of thoroughly mixing the bituminous
material and aggregate, uniformly dispersing the
bituminous mater'al, and adequately coating the
aggregate particles to produce a uniform mix.
4.8.5
Trial Sections shall be constructed as and where

of Sub-section 4.3.
~
~
Mtnlatry of TrDneport & Communlcatlons
DGRLT
./'~<Bituminous Pavement
4.8.6
Mixing Procedures
4.8.12
Handling and mixing of bitumen and aggregate shall

be in accordance wlth the relevant requirements of Subsection 4.3, with the following exceptions:
Bituminous cold mix courses shall be measured by

the cubic meter of mix furnished. spread, compacted,
completed and accepted. Measurements shall be based
on the areas and thicknesses as shown an the Drawings.
Aggregates shall not be heated but shaH be fed

cold to the plant. The t emperature of the
bitumen upon entering the pugmill shall be
adequate to ensure uniform application to the
cold aggregate The bitumen temperature shall
be designated by the Engineer and shall
generally be in accordance with the relevant
Mixing time shall be the shortest time necessary
to remove excess volatiles or water and to
produce a satisfactory mixture.
2
Deficiencies in thickness of bituminous cold m ix
wearing course shall, unless an overlay is constructed at
the Contractor's expense, result in a proportion only of the
wearing course volume being measured for payment.
Proportions shall be determined in aceordance with the
thickness deficiencies and volume proportions stated Subsection 4.3, Table 4.3.11.1.
l.
li.
4.8.7
Surface Preparation
Prep1r1tion of the surface upon which bitumi J'Ous

cold mix courses are to be laid, and the use of prime and
tack coats shaU be appropriate to the type and condition of
such surfaces and shall conform to the relevant
4.8.8
4.8.13
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above. w ill be pa!d for at the
which rate shall be fu l compensation for supplying
of the wortt.
4.8.14
i.

Bituminous cold mix course.
DeUvery, spreacllng and finishing of bituminous cold

mix courses shal1conform to the relevant requirements of
Sub-section 4.3.
4.9
Pavement Repairs and

Reinstatement
Requirements for rolling and co mpaction shall

2
comply with the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4 4
or Sub.section 4.5, as appropriate.
4.9.1
Description
4.8.9

requirements of Sub-section 4 3 and Table 4.3.9.1.
4.8.10
Surface Tolerances
l
Surface Tolerances shall conform to the relevant
2
Finished elevations and straight edge tolerances sheD
conform to the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.4
or Sub-section 4.5, as appropriate.
4.8.11
Procedures for determin' ng the average compacted

t hickness of bituminous cold mix courses shall conform to
the re~evant requirements of Sub-section 4.3.
2
Cores for thickness measurements of bjtuminol.ls
cold mix courses shall be used to determine if changes are
necessary In the thlc~ness of succeeding layers In
accordance with the relevant 1equirements of Sub-section
4.4 or Sub-section 4.5, as appropriate.
This Subsection describes requirements for surface

milli ng, removing defective bituminous pavement,
preparing surfaces to receive repairs. furni shing materials,
placing and finishing new pavement, as shown on the
Drawings or directed.
4.9.2
Materials
Subgrade materials shall conform to the relevant

requiremants of Sub-secti on 2.6.
2
Aggregate sub-base and base course materials shall
3
Bituminous pavement materials shall conform to the
relevant requirements of Su b.section 4.1.
4.9.3
Equipment
1 All plant and equipment shall conform to the

requirements of the relevant Secti ons of this Specification.
4.9.4
Preparation of Pavement
Cracks In bitumi nous pavement which, in the opl nion

of the Engineer, do not require reconstruction shall be
prepared by wire brushing and blowing out with
compressed air.
2
Prior to the application of bituminous overlays, the
existing pavement shall be planed or m illed out by
430
Sulton.,to ol Ornon, Sto
Jrd Spec.f00311ons fo< Roa<l & Bndge Conllr~
approved equipment to the depth shown on the Drawings

to remove the asphalt surface that contains hardened
asphalt, contaminated material, fuel spots, rubber
deposits, taitance and any undesirable material that
prevents proper bonding and adhesion with the new
asphalt overlay.
3
Defective bituminous pavement which, in the opinion
of the Engineer, requires reconstruction shall be cut beck
to good material using pneumatic cutting tools. The cut
area shall be square or rectangular and in tine with the
direction of traffic. The depth of cut shall be determined
by the Engineer and may include bituminous layers. base
and sub-base layers and subgrade layers (in the case of
failed pavement, excavation shalt include a minimum of
300 mm of subgrade material]. All excavated materials
shalt be removed and disposed of off-site. When the
bottom of the excavation consists of earth or granular
material it shall be thoroughly compacted using
mechanical compactors to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Exposed bituminous surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned
and wire brushed prior to receiving repair materials.
Utility trench reinstatements in bituminous pavement
4
shall be prepared in the same way as defective bituminous
pavement. Excavation depth shall be a minimum of 300
mm from the top of subgrade layer.
4.9.5
Placing and Finishing Repair

Materials
Cracks of 3 mm to 7mm width or wider shall be filled

with clean, coarse sand then saturated with 1:1 diluted
emulsified bitumBn, or as directed by the Engineer. Cracks
of tess than 3 mm shall be fitted with emulsified bitumen,
or as directed. Cracks she II be filled to the road surface.
Any excess bitumen shall be removed with a squeegee
and the bitumen surface shall be sprinkled Ii be rat ly with
coarse sand.
2
Excavations below subgrede level shall be filled to a
level specified by the Engineer with subgrade material in
layers not exceeding 150 mm and compacted using
mechanical compactors to conform to the requirements of
Sub-section 2.6 and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3
Subbase and/or base course, If required, shall be
placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm and compacted
using mechanical compactors. They shall conform with
the relevant requirements of Sub-section 3. 2 or Subsection 3.3, as appropriate, and shall be to the grading
shown on the Drawings or specified by the Engineer.
be compacted by steel wheeled roller, first compacting the

150 mm strips adjacent to the traffic edges, then rolling in
the direction of traffic.
6
New utility trenches shall be backfilled to the details
shown on the Drawings, or ordered, including any
surrounds,
haunchlng
or
protective
materials.
Construction of subgrade and pavement shall be as for
pavement repairs.
7
No excavated areas shall remain open overnight
without adequate safety and protection measures subject
to the approval of authorities.
4.9.6
Testing of repair materials shall conform to the

relevant requirements of Sub-section 3.3 and Table 4.3.9.1.
Sampling shall be as ordered by the Engineer.
4.9.7
Surface Tolerances
Levels shall be checked by straight edge in relation to

the adjacent existing pavement
2
Surface tolerances for bituminous layers shall
conform to the relevant requirements of Sub-section 4.4
and Sub-section 4.5 as appropriate.
Any deficiency in the wearing course surface shall be
3
corrected by cutting out and replacing.
4.9.8
Sealing of cracks shall be measured by lin.m. of

cracks sealed and approved by the Engineer.
2
Milling shall be measured by the sq.m. of the area
milled to the specified depth, including equipment,
application, removal and disposal of the milled material
off the site.
3
Pavement repairs shall be measured by the sq.m. of
repair, prepared, filled, compacted, completed and
accepted. Measurement shall be of the areas shown on
the Drawings or ordered.
4
Trench reinstatements shall be measured by the
sq.m. of reinstatement prepared, filled, compacted,
completed and accepted. Measurement shall be of the
areas shown on the Drawings or ordered. New utility
trench construction will not be measured under this item.
5
No separate measurement will be made for
excavation, prime or tack coats, pavement materiels,
subgrede, subbase, or base courses.
4
Prior to rece1vmg bituminous material, the
excavations shall be thoroughly cleaned. Subgrade, subbase or base course material shall be primed with a light
coating of MC cutback bituman and existing bituminous
surfaces shall be lightly painted with emulsified bitumen,
all in accordance with the requirements of Sub-section 4.2
All other incidental items shall not be measured for

6
direct payment, as prescribed in Sub-section 4.3 - but
shall be considered as subsidiary work, the costs of which
will be deemed to be included in the rates and prices
stated in the Bill of Quantities.
5
The excavation shall be filled with bituminous
pavement materials placed in layers not exceeding 70 mm
and compacted using vibratory compactors.
Unless
ordered to the contrary by the Engineer, the top layer shall
4.9.9
Basis of Payment

unit rates for the various items In the Bill of Quantities ,
""'-........./
/'...,/
Mlnltrv of Tronapott II<
Communl~atlono
DGRL T

of the work.
4.9.10
L
ii.
iii,
iv.
v.

Surface milling.
Crack sealing.
Pavement repairs !overlay and surface
preparation I.
Pavement repairs !complete reconstruction).
Trench reinstatement.
4.10
Bituminous Pavement Widening
4.1 0.1
Description

w<dening existing pavements, including excavation
adjacent to existing bituminous pavements al\d placing 1
mixture of aggregates and bituminous binder in
completed layers.
4.10.2
Materials
Materials for the construction of p1vement widening

shall conform to the requirements of Sub-sections 4.1, 4.2
and 4.3 as appropriate.
4.10.3
4.10.3.1
Construction
The edge of the existing road pavement shall be

excavated to the extent and depth shown on the Drawings,
Existing cu rbs, gullies and drain pipes shall be re moved as
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. The
bottom of the excavation shall be compacted with suitable
rollers or power rammers to the density specified in Subsections 2.5 and 2.6. Adequate provisions shall be made
for drainage of the trench to prevent damage to the
existing road subgra de.
2
The excavation shall be cleaned of loose material and
the edge of the existing pavement shall be cleaned. The
excavated base shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
placement of bituminous material. If unsuitable or
unstable soil is exposed on the excavation bottom it shall
be replaced with suitable material and compacted to the
depth instructed.
3
Prior to placing bituminous ma terial, the edge of the
existing asphalt roa d layers shall be painted or sprayed
with a thin coat of cut-back bitumen RC70 or bitumen
e mulsion SS-1.
4
Bituminous material shall be placed in the prepared
excav!lon ln layers not e xce eding 80mm thick. Machine
laying shall be used except for confined are as where the
use of a machine would be impracticable. Completion
shall be by roller as specified in Sub-sections 4 3, 4.4 or
4.5.
4-32
5
Quality control tests fo r density, thickness and mix
properties shall be performed as instructed by the
Engineer.
6
Any work needed to road shoulders. earthworks, side
slopes, road drainage and services shall be carried out as
shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
relevant clauses of Sections 2, 8 and 18.
4.10.3.2
Traffic Control
Traffic control arrangements shall be implemented in

accordance with Section 1, Sub-section 1.8.
2
Widening shall be earried out only on one side of the
pavement at a time. The work shall be programmed to
permit continuity of excavation. placing widening material,
rolling and finishing with minimum time of disruption to
traffic flow.
3
Reflector barricades shall be placed along open
trenches. Lighting shall be placed at each barricade at
night Adequate provision shall be made to enable traffic to
cross at Intersecting roads and at commercial, industrial
and private entrances.
4.10.4
The approved work sha ll be measured in square

meters of new asphalt surface. Excavatlor~ and removal of
curb and road drainage elements will not be measured
separa te ly but will be considered subsidiary work, the cost
of which is deemed to be included in the ra tes for
pavement widening.
Relocation of services will be measured se parately
under the relevant items of Subsection 18.2.
4.10.5
Basis of Payment
The emount of completed and accepted work,

unit rate for Pavement Widening In the BID of Quantities,
which rate sha ll be full compensation for excavation,
trimming, compacting of the excavation, shoulders and
side slopes, mi ~ting, placing and compacting bituminous
mate rial and for supplying materials, labor, equipment,
tools a nd othe r items ne cessary for the proper completion
of the work.
4. 10.6
i.

Pave ment widening.
4.1 1
Recycled Bituminous Mixes
4.11.1
Description
This Subsectlon describes requirements for

recycling existing pavement material. Including removal,
crushing and stockpiling existing bituminous pavement,
mixing with new eggregate, bitume n (and, if specified, an
approved modifying agentl at a central hot m lxil'lg plant.
and spreading and compacting recycled bituminous base
Sultnnnto of 01T1an. Sra'ld.ud S~f~tions fM Ro.ld & Bridger ConsUuctiot
course on a prepared surface, as shown on the Drawings

or directed.
4.11.2
Materials
Recycled material shall consist of existing

bituminous pavement, processed such that 100% will pass
a 38 mm (1.5 inch) sieve.
If the Engineer determines that recycled bituminous
2
material is causing degradation of the aggregate, he shall
revise the jobmix as required.
3
New materials shall conform
requirements of Subsection 4.1.
to
the
relevant
4
Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, bitumen
for recycled bituminous base course shall be graded to
suit the project climatic condition and type of work. If not
specified, or shown on the Drawings, grade 60-70
penetration conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M
20 shall be used.
5
Modifying agent used to soften the old bitumen shall
be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions end approved by the Engineer.
6
Existing pavement shall be removed in such a
manner as to prevent unnecessary intermixing with the
underlying base, sub-base or subgrade material.
7
The stockpile height shall not be greater than 3
meters. Construction equipment will not be permitted on
the stockpiles.
4.11.3
required) shall be In accordance with the relevant

2
Crushing of existing pavement materials for recycling
may be accomplished by portable or stationary crushers
or may be the direct result of the pavement removal
method such as cold milling.
3
Crushed pavement material shall be separated into a
minimum of two sizes prior to heating and mixing. The
fine size shall have a minimum of 80% passing a 4.75mm
(No.4) sieve. The coarse size shall have a minimum of
60% retained on a 4.75mm (No.4) sieve.
4
Heated and dried new aggregate shall be combined
in the appropriate proportions end gradations with the
recycled bituminous material and mixed at such
temperature and for such time necessary to achieve a
thorough coating of the new aggregate. New bitumen
and/or modifier shall then be incorporated into the
mixture and mixed to produce a homogenous mixture
with satisfactory coating of all aggregate.
5
If both bitumen and modifier are used they shall be
introduced into the mixing area through separate
metering devices.
6
Preheating of the crushed recycled bituminous
material immediately before introduction to the mixer may
be permitted subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Preheating methods shall not result in loss of bitumen
from the recycled material.
4.11.7
Surface Preparation

requirements of Sub-section 4.3 ..
Preparation of the surface upon which the recycled

bituminous base course is to be laid shall be appropriate
to the type and condition of such surface and shall
2
The properties of the new modified mix shall meet all
the requirements of Sub-sections 4.1, 4.3 and 4.4, as
appropriate.
4.11.8
4.11.4
The delivery, spreading and finishing of recycled

bituminous base course shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 4.4
Equipment
Plant and equipment for recycled bituminous base

course shall conform to the relevant requirements of Subsection 4.4, subject to any modifications by the Engineer.
2
compacting recycled bituminous base course materials
shall conform to the relevant requirements of Subsection
4.3.
4.11.5

of Sub-section 4.3.
4.11.6
Mixing Procedures

and anti-stripping agent, if any] and aggregate (including
recycled materiel, new aggregate end mineral filler if
4.11.9
Sampling and testing of recycled bituminous base

course shall conform to the relevant requirements of
Section 4.3, and Table 4.3.9. 1.
4.11.10 Surface Tolerances

Surface tolerances shell conform to the relevant
4.11.11

thickness of recycled bituminous base course shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Sub-section 4.4.
~~
Mlolauy of Trooeport & Communications
OGR~T
.../".~<:Bituminous Pavement
4.11.12 Method of Measurement

Recycled bituminous base course shall be measured
by the cubic meter of mix furnished. spread. compacted.
completed and accepted. Measurement shall be based on
the areas and thickness shown on the Drawings or as
directed.
2
Removal and crushing of existing pavement
materials for l ncorporation in recycled bituminous base
course shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall
be considered as subsidiary work, the costs of which w ill
be deemed to be included in the rates for recycled
bituminous base course stated in the Bill of Quantities,
Bituminous prime and tack coats shall be measured
3
as prescribed In Sub-section 4.2 "Bituminous Prime and
Tack Coats".
4
All other incidental items shall not be measured for
dlrect payment, but shall be considered as subsidiary work,
the costs of which w ill be deemed to be included in the
rates and prices stated in the Bill of Qupntities.
4.11.13 Basis of Payment

lh& amount of completed and accepted work,
unit fates for the various items in the Bill of Quantities ,
which rate shafl be full compei\Sation for supplying
materials, transporting and placing, for labor, equipment,
of the work.
4.11.14 Items in the Bill of Quantities

t
Recycled bituminous base course
4.12
Surface Rideability Measurement
4.12.1
Description
This Sub-section summarizes testing procedures and

road surface rideability specifications for asphalt and
concrete surfaced pavements. The specifications are
based on the International Roughness Index IIRU values
(average value from three runs and in units of mlkm)
measured using a high-speed profiler tugged by a utility
vehicle. A minimum lead-in distance of 100 m and a
segment lengtta of 150 m are suggested.
4.12.2
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
4-34
Reference Documents for Profiler

Rideability Testing
ASTM E 867 Terminology Relating to Vehicle
Pavement Systems.
ASTM E 950 Test Method for Measuring
Pavement Roughness Using a Profiler.
AASHTO Designation PP 50-02: Standard
Equipmant Specification for an Inertial Profiler.
AASHTO Designation PP 51.02: Standard
Pr-=tice for Certification of Inertial Profiling
System.
v.
vi.
4.12.3
AASHTO Designation PP 52-02: Standard

Practice for Operating Inertial Profilers and
Evaluating Pavement Profiles.
AASHTO Designation PP 5302: Standard
Practice for a Pavement Ride Quality
Specification when Measured Using Inertial
Profiling System.
Terminology
The current rideability specifications are based on

International Roughness Index (IRI). As an i nternationally
accepted scare for ride quality, IRI is a standardized
measure of the response of a standard vehid e to
paveme11t profile. IRI i s an Index computed from a single
longitudi nal profile using a quartercar model at a
simulated travel speed of (BO kmlhl. Lane IRI Is the
average of the left and right wheel path IRI val ues.
4.12.4
Testing Equipment
The rideability testing shall be conducted using a

high-speed profiler {HSP). The HSP should conform to the
requi rements of Class I equipment as defined in ASTM E
950 and to the requirements specifted in AASHTO
Designation PP 50.02 and PP 5102.
2
Prior to testing, calibration and verification
procedures should be in accordance with the
recommendations provided by the profiler monufacturer.
The equipment should be operated in accordance with the
rtcommendations provided by the manufacturer and
AASHTO PP 52.02.
4.12.5
Testing Procedure
Continuous and rigorous SCi'Utiny of profiler output is

requi red. A constant testing speed shall be mai ntained
through the lead-in distance (100 m minimum) and the
test section. Two driving speeds of 65 to 95 kmlh are
required.
2
The profiles measured for each run should be used to
compute the IRI value for each wheel path of each 150m
subsection within the test section. After three ru ns, the
test data URI val ues) should be reviewed by calculating the
average, standard deviation, and coefficient of variance
(COVJ for each subsection wheel path. If a value of
standard deviation Is greater than 0.016mlkm or COV is
great erthan 5%, then the test shall be repeated. Additional
testing should be done until standard devial ion is l ess
than 0.0161Mlm or COV is less than 5% (with obvious
outliers excluded),
3
After five runs, if a value of standard deviation is
larger than 0.016 mlkm or COV Is greater than 5%,
compare the profiles from the five runs and anempt to
identify possible equipment or operational problems.
Recallbrate if necessary. Record all data.
Sultonnto of Ornon. Sr.t-ad.ttd Spe.esfa 0111 '01 Ro.1d t.. Bricfgct eon.~ruc:liot
4.12.6
Submittals
4.12.9
Data for each test shall be stored on media such as

COs.
2
Hard copy reports shall be provided for each test
section. The following information be reported and stored:
l.
Date and time of day.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
vlil.
ix.
4.12.7
Operator(sl and equipment used.

Weather conditions: temperature, cloud cover,
and wind.
Surface description: type of pavement and
condition.
Location and description of section: Job 10,
lane, beginning and ending stationing (or other
location information I. and direction.
Total section length.
Data filter settings: Highpass flter setting ..
100m.
IRI value of each wheel path and the average of
the two wheel paths for each 150 m subsection.
Raw data.
Required Rideability
The IRI value representing the rideability of each

road subsection shari not exceed 1.2 mlkm.
2
The schedule provided in Table 4.12.7.1 shall be used
for payment adjustments to the r.na' quantities of the top
layer of the b'tuminous wearing course paid under Clause
4.5.14 or the final quantities of concrete pavement paid
under Clause 5.7.6. Price adjustments are based on the
average IRI value of the two wheel paths (lane I AI) for each
150m subsection.
RniiRough IRt(!Mm)
s 1.2
Price AdJulllment
100%
1.2 - 1.4
98%
1.4 - 1.6
96%
1.6- 1.9
92%
1.9-2.4
85%
2.4 and above
Mill, remove and replace the top

wearing course layer
Plane concrete surface
Table 4.12.7.1: Wearing Course Price Adjustment for

Rldeabllity
4.12.8
The IRI test shall be measured in linear meters for the

total length of pavement tested in each pavement lane
(covering two wheel paths per lane).The rates shall be
deemed to include for all costs including testing
equipment, calibration, interpretation of data and
reporting of results.
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above, will be pa ld for at the
which rate shall be full compensation for labor, equipment,
tools, materials, transportation and other items necessary
for the proper completion of the work.

i.
International Roughness Index (IRII

for asphalt pavement (length)
ii.
International Roughness Index (IRI)

for concrete pavement (length)
~ate of Oman, St.ndllfd Sped'=-- '"' Rolld &Bridge C.ns~rudion 2010
Ref.
Title
6.1
Concrete Materials and Mixes
6-1
6.1.1
Description
Dellnillons
5-1
5-1
5.1.1.1
5.1.1.2
5,1.1 3
5.1 .1.4
5.1..2
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1 .2.3
5.1 .2.4
References
Submittals
Quality Assurance
Materials
Portland Cement
Silica Fume
Supplementary Cementing
Material (SCM)
5.12.5
5.1.2.5
Blended Hydraulic Cement

Aggregates
Water
5.1 .2.7
Adm.xtures
5.1.2.8
5.1.3
5.1.3.1
5.1.3.2
!?age No.
Fiber Remforcement
Concrete Mixes
Design Mixes
Testing Agency
5.1.3.3
Reports
5.1.3.4
5.1.3.5
Concrete ClassM
Threshold Values for Supplementary
Cementing Materials (SCM )
5.1.3.6
Limit VeluM for Supplementary

Cementing Materials (SCM I
5.1.3.7
5.1.3.8
5.1.3.9
Waterll:emantitiou' Materials Ratio

Slump Limits
51
52
5-2
5-3
5-3
53
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
55
5-5
6-6
56
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
6-7
5.1.3.10
5.1.3.1 1
Total Salt Content

Initial Setting llme
Test Mixes- Structural Grade
58
Concrete
5-8
5.1 .3i12
Test Mixes- Blinding and Pla1n
5.1.3:13
5.1.3.14
Concrete
Adjustments to Concreta M xes
Absorption Test
5.1 .3.15
5.1.3.16
5.1.3.17
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
Permeability Tests
Synthetic Fiber
Admixtures
Construction Requlrarnents
Concrete Mixing
Ref.
L1.4.2
5)1.4.3
5.1.4.4
5.1.4.5
5.1.4.6
5.1.5
5.1.5.1
5.1.5.2
6.1.6
5-9
5-9
6-9
5-9
Quality Control - Testing on Hardened

Concrete
Measured Items
6.2
Reinforcing Steel
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.13
5.2. 1.4
6.2.2
5.2.2. 1
5.2.2.'2
5.2.2.3
5.2.3
Description
References
Submittals
Qual.ty Assurance
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Materials
Steel Reinforcement
Reinforcement Accessories
Fabricating .Reinforcement
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
6.2.3.3
General
Shippng. Storage and Cleaning
Placing
5.2.3.4
Concrete Cover
5.2.4
6.2.6
5.2.6
6.3
5-8
5'8
59
Ready-Mixed Concrete
5-9
Quality Control and Testmg - General 5-10
Quality Control - Testing
on F.resh ConCTete
5 10
6.1.7
5.2.1
6.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3. 1.2
Method of Meuurement
Basis of Payment
Item. In the 8111 of Quantltlea
Reinforced Concrete
Structures
Deac:riptlon
5.3.1.3
Definitions
References
Submittals
5.3.1.4
Quality Assurance
5.3.2
Page No.
Job-Site Mix ng
Items Not Measured

Basl8 of Payment
58
5-8
Title
Mlltarlels
5 1 1
5-12
5 12
5 12
6-12
5-13
6-13
5-13
513
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
515
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
5-18
5-16
5-16
5-16
5 17
5-17
Ref.
Title
Page No.
5.3.2.1
fiorm Materiels
6.3.2.2
Wetemops
5.3.2.3
Concrete Curing Covw Sheets
6.3.2.4
Curing Compounds
5.3.2.5
Concrete Accessori
l.3.2.8
Repair Materials
5.3.3
Conatructlon Requlrementa
5.3.3.1
Formwotk
5.3.3.2
Falsework
5.3.3.3
Embedded Items
5.3.3.4
Rem&Wing and Reusing fiorm1
5.3.3.5
Vapor Rmrdefs
5.3.3.8
Construction Joints
5.3.3.7
Contrec:tlon end Elcpenslon JOints
5.3.3.8
Watemops
5.3.3.9
Concrete Placement
5.3.3.10
HotWeather Concreting
5.3.3.11
Finishing Plastic ConcrltUI
5.3.3.12
Curing Concrete
5.3.3.13
Formed Finishes
5.3.3.14
Tolerances
5.3.4
Method of M...urement. Basis
of Pll'fment and Bill of Ouantltlea
6.4
Prestressed Concrete
Structures
5.4.1
5.4.1.1
5.4.1.2
6.4.1.3
5.4.1.4
6.4.2
5.4.2.1
5.4.2.2
Deacripefon
5.4.2.3
5.4.2.4
5.4.2.5
6.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.3.2
Scope
Definitions
Referenc:a
Submittals
Material.
Concrete
Reinforcing Steel
Prestressing Steel
Pos...,Tensloning Anchorages
and Couplers
Epoxy-Bonding Agents for Precast
Segmental Construc:tion
Conatructfon Requirements
Placement of Ducts
Placement of Prestressing Steel
Ref.
5-17
5-18
518
519
5-19
519
5-19
5-19
620
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-24
525
!525
6-26
5-26
6.51
5.5.1 1
6.5.1.2
6.5.2
6.5.3
5.6.3.1
6-27
5.!5.3.2
6-27
6-27
5-27
5-27
5-27
528
6-28
5-28
529
529
5-29
Page No.
5.4.3.3
5.4.3.4
5.4.3.5
5.4.3.15
5.4.3.7
6.4.3.8
PIIICIIment af Anchorages
Identification end Testing
Pratectlort pf Prestressing Steel
Ducts
Grout
Tensioning
Pretension Cormruction
5.~.3-9
5.4.3.10
PostTen1ion Construction
5 4.3.1 1
Grouting
6.4.4
Method o f M...urement
6.4.6
Balls of Payment
5.4.8
lteme ln the Bill of au.ntltles
6.6
5.5.3.3
5.!5.3.4
6.5.4
6.6
Description
Scope
References
Materials
Conltrvc:tlon Requinimenta
Silenced CantileVer Construction
with In-Situ Concrete
Glued Precast Segmental
Constru1on
Precast Beam end slab Construction
lnSitu Construction
Method of Meaurement, Buil af
Payment Mid ltema In the Bills
af Ouantldea
!5.8.3.1
5.11.3.2
6.8.3.3
5.8.3.4
6--40
6-40
5-40
5-40
5-40
6--40
6-41
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-43
Vehicular and Pedestrian

Underpasses and Animal
Crossings
6.8.1
5.8.1.1
6.8.1.2
6.8.2
5-31
5-31
5-32
6-32
6-33
5-34
5-35
6-36
5-37
6-39
Concrete Bridges and Erection
Proceaures
6.8.3
6-29
5-29
5-29
530
Title
6-44
Delcriptlon
5-44
5-44
5-44
References
Mlterfala
Construction Requlrementa
lhccavation
Structure! Concrete
Concrete Piles
Waterproofing
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
6-45
6-46
Ref.
Title
5.8.3.5
5.8.3.11
5.8.3.7
&.U
&.11.5
&.11.11
Concrete Pavement COIWtruction

Bituminous Plv..,.nt Conltruction
Electrical Workl
Method of MUIUrement
Baals of PIIYihent
Jt.ma ln the Bin of Oulndtiea
5.7
Cement Concrete Pavement
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.2.1
5.7.2.2
6.7.2.3
5.7.2.4
5.7.2.5
5.7.2.11
5.7.2.7
5.7.2.1
5.7.2.9
6.7.3
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.2
5.7;3.3
5:7.3.4
5.7.3.5
5.7.3.8
Delcriptlon
Materlela
Forms
Steel Reinfotcernent
Concrete Matariall
AdmiJCtu1'81
Curing Materials
Related Materials
Conc:reMixes
Concrete Mbcinv
Umltations of Mixing:
Conltruc:tlon Requirements
Prepal'don
Edge Forma end Screed Construction
Stall Reinforcement
Placement of ft_einforcement
5.7.3.7
5.7.3.8
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.10
5.7.3.11
5.7.3.12
5.7.3.13
5.7.3.14
5.7.3.15
5.7.3.11
5.7.3.17
6.7.3.11
5.7.3.19
Page No.
Joints
Conditioning of UnderlyingCourse.
Slip-Form Consuuetton
Conditioning of Underlying Courte,
Side-Form Conacruction
Handling. MeaiUrfng. end BitChing
Material
Concrlbl Protection and Curing
Concrete Pl_,..ent
Concrete Finishing
Final Strib-Off, ConaoiKIMion
and Flnlslling
Surt.ce Textunt
Slcid Reli. .nl Surfaces
Surface Tilt
Removing Forms
SealingJoWC.
Opening 10 Traffic
PIVtment Toler1nce
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-46
6-45
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-411
5-411
5-411
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-48
5-411
54
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-411
Raf.
5-52
5-53
5-53
6-56
5-65
5-58
5-51
5-158
5-57
s;s7
6-57
6-67
PlgeNo.
5.7.3.20
Pav.ment Mertcing
5.7.3.21
Field Quality Control
5.7.3.22
R. .i,. lnd Pratecdon
5.7.3.23
Detennirwtion of Co~ Thiclcnaa
&.7.4
Mlllhocl of Meaunlment
Baia of Payment
5.7.5
6.7.11
ltema lrl the Bl l of Quentltfee
6.8
5.8.1
6.1.2
5.8.2.1
15.8.2.2
5.8.2.3
6.8.2.4
s.u
5.8.3.1
5.8.3.2
6.8.3.3
5.8.14
5.8.3.5
5.1.4
5-!7
5-57
5-58
15-59
5-59
5-59
5-59
Joint Sealers for Concrete

Pavement
5-59
Detcrfptlon
Materials
Mahtriala, Genenll
Elastomeric Hot-Poured Joint Sellanta
Joint Sealant Baclcing
MilceiiMWOUs Materiala
Examination
Preparation
lnabllladon of Joinr Sealert
Cleaning
~n
~hod of Meaurement. Baals

of Payment and am of Quantltlel
5-59
5-59
5-69
5-eO
HO
HO
5-eD
s.ao
s.ao
6-80
6-61
6-61
5-81
6.9
Reinforced Concrete Box Culverta

and Headwalls, Wlngwalls,
Cut-off Walls and Aprons
5-81
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.8A
&.8.6
5.U
Deecrfpllon
Maleriala
Conltructlon Requirements
Medlod of M._.ment
5-52
6-52
l'itle
6.10
IHS1
5-81
5-81
laliaofP~
5-82
5-e2
ltema In Bill of Ouantidle
5-62
Waterproofing for Structures
5.10.1
o.aipllon
Scope
5.10.1.1
5.10.1.2
uu
MaliNIa
5.10.2.1
Asphalt
6.10.2.2
Bitumen
6.10.2.3
Wmerproofing Fabric
...,.,__
5-82
6-12
5-112
6-62
U2
5-82
5-82
6-62
Ref.
5.10.2.4
5.10.2.6
5.10.2.6
5.10.2.7
5.10.2.8
5.10.3
5.10.3. 1
5.10.3 2
5.10.3.3
5.10.3.4
Title
Page No.
Self-Adhesive Polyethylene Sheet

Tar for Absorptive Treatment
Tar Seal Coat
PropriatiiY Waterproofing Systems
&poxv Coating System
Conltnlctlon Requlremantll
Surfaca Preparation
Inspection, DellvtiY and Storage
Asphalt and Bitumen Watllfjll'oofing
Fabric
Proprlet8fY Waterproofing
Membranes
5-Q
5-63
6.12.1
DeKrlptlon
6-83
6.12.2
Loed Application
563
5-63
Composition of Applied Load

Testing by Static load
5.12.2.3
Testing by Moving lo.ld
5 .12.3
VIsual Inspection
6.12.4
Measurement.
6.12.6
Method of Meeaurement
5.12.6
Ball of Payment
6.12.7
Item a In the Bill of Ouantiti111
5~
5-64
5-64
5-64
5-64
565
6-eli
5-65
5-65
6.11.1
DHcriptlon
Scope
Submittals
Performance Requirements
Duality Assurance
Testing
5-60
Material
General
P,rfmer
Topcoat
Specifications
Construction Requirement.
General
Inspection of Concrete
Surface Preparation
Approval Prior to Coating Application
Application
S-ee
5.111.3
5. 11.1.4
5.11.1.5
6.11.2
5.11.2.1
5.11.2.2
5.11.2.3
5.11 .2.4
5.11.3
5.11 .3.1
5.11 .3.2
6.11.3.3
5.11.3.4
5.11.3.5
Mettiod of Me. .urement. Baal

of P-vment and Bill of Cuanthi111
5.12
Proteatlve Coating for Concrete 6-65
5.11 .1.2
6.11.4
563
5-63
5.11
5.11.1.1
Title
5-62
5. 10.3.5
Demege Patching of Waterproofing

Fabrics
5.10 3.11
O.mpproofing
5.10.3:7
Protection of Waterproofing and
O.mpproofing
5.10.3.8
Testing
5 .10.4
5.10.5
Balla of Pwyment
5.10,6
Item In the Bill of Qquantitltl
Ref.
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-66
fi.66
5-66
5-66
5-66
1-M
5-66
566
567
6-67
567
6.12.2.1
6.12.2.2
Bridge Load Testing
Page No.
6-67
667
6-67
6-67
5-&7
6-68
5-68
6-88
!HIS
6-68
6-88
6-88
Sultanate of Oman. Standrd Spo::Wc:attons lor !lead &
Bnd~o Conatruetior
21'11
Concrete and Concrete Structures
5.1
Concrete Materials and Mixes
ASTM C 114
Standard Test Methods for Chemical

Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
5.1 .1
Description
ASTM C 117
5.1.1.1
Definitions
Standard Test Method for Materials

Finer Than 75 Micrometer (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing
ASTM C 127
Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density {Specific Gravity] and
Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C 128
Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and
Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C 131
Standard Test Method for Resistance to

Degradation of SmaiiSize Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in
the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C 142
Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps

and Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTMC 143
Standard Test Method for Slump of

Hydraulic Cement Concrete
Concrete shall consist of a mixture of cementitious

materials, aggregates. water and additives.
2
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in
combination with one or more of blended hydraulic
cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag and silica fume.
6.1.1.2
References
AASHTO T26
Standard Method of Test for Quality of

Water to be used in Concrete
American Association of State

Transportation Officials (AASHTOJ:
2
Highways
and
American Concrete Institute (ACI]:
ACI 117
Specifications for Standard Tolerances

for
Concrete
Construction
and
Materials
ASTM C 150
ACI301
Specifications for Structural Concrete

for Buildings
Standard
Cement
ASTMC 172
ACI304
Guide
for
Measuring,
Mixing,
Transporting, and Placing Concrete
Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly

Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 186
Standard Test Method for Heat of

Hydration of Hydraulic Cement
Standard Test Method for Time of
Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat
Needle
American National Standards Institute {ANSII:
Specification
for Portland
ANSI 09001
Quality Systems - Model for Quality

Assurance in Design, Development,
Production, Installation, and Servicing
ASTM C 191
ANSI 09002
Quality Systems - Model for Quality

Assurance in Production, Installation,
and Servicing
ASTM C192/C192M
Standard Practice for Making
and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Laboratory {AASHTO T126)
ASTM C 2l9
Standard Specification for Steel Fibers

for FiberReinforced Concrete
Standard Terminology
Hydraulic Cement
ASTMC 227
ASTM C31/C31M Standard Practice for Making and

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field {AASHTO T23]
Standard Test Method for Potential

Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTMC289

Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical
Method)
ASTM C295
Standard Guide
Examination
of
Concrete
ASTM C 311
Standard Test Methods for Sampling

and Testing Fly Ash or Natural
Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral
Admixture
in
PortlandCement
Concrete
ASTM C494
Standard Specifications for Chemical

Ad mixtures for Concrete
ASTMC 586

Alkali Reactivity of Carbonate Rocks for
Concrete Aggregates (Rock Cylinder
Method)
American Society for Testing and Materials {ASTMJ:
ASTM A 820
ASTMC33
Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates
ASTM C39/C39M Standard Test Method for Compressive

Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens {AASHTO T22J
ASTM C40
Standard Test Method for Organic

Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete
ASTM C42
Standard Test Method for Obtaining

and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete
ASTM C B8
Standard Test Method for Soundness of

Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate
or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C94
Standard Specifications
Mixed Concrete
for
Ready-
Relating
to
for Petrographic
Aggregates
for
51
~~
Minltrv of
Trnn:~'t ~ Cornmunicatlona
OOR.ll
~~<::concrete and Concrete Structures
ASTM C595
ASTMC618
ASTMC989
ASTM C 1064
ASTM C 1077
Standard Specifications for Blended

Hydraulic Cements
BSEN 12350
Testing Fresh Concrete
BSEN 12390
Testing Hardened Concrete
Standard Specifications for Coal Fly

Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Concrete
BSEN 12620
Specificatlon for Aggregates
BS EN 197
Cement SpecificaUon
Standard Specificatlon for Ground

Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use
in Concrete and Mortars
Standard Test Method for Temperature
of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement
Concrete
Part 1: Composition and specification

Part 2: Conformity evaluation
6
Commercial Standards (CS):
Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau Concrete Plant

Standards
National ReadyMixed Concrete Association (NRMCAJ
Check List
Standard Practice for l,.aboratories

Testing
Concrete
and
Concrete
Aggregates for Use in Construction and
Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C 1105
Standard Test Method for Length

Change of Concrete Due to AlkaliCarbonate Rock Reaction
CAN/CSA A23.5-M86 Supplementary Cementing

Materials
ASTMC 1116
Standard
Specification for FiberReinforced Concrete and Shotcrete
ASTM C 1202
Test Method for Electrical I ndicatlon of

Concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride lon
Penetration (AASHTO T 277)
ASTMD512
Standard Test Methods for Chloride Jon

in Water
2
Design MiKes: For each concrete m ix.
Include
alternative mb( designs when characteristics of materials.
project conditions. w eather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
ASTM D 516
Standard Test Method for Sulfate I on In

Water
ASTM E329
Standard Specification for Agencies

Engaged in the Testii"Q andlor
Inspection of Materials used in
Construction
ASTM E548
Standard Guide for General Criteria

Used
for
Evaluating
Laboratory
Competence
British Standards:
BS 812
Testing Aggregates
BS 1881
Methods of Testing Concrete
Submittals
Product Data: For proprietary materials and items.
3
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in
Paragraph 5.1.1.4 "Quelity Assurance to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses.
names and addresses of engineers end owners. and any
other information required by t he Engineer.
4
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing
egency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the foDowing w ith requirements indicated,
based on comprehensive testing of current materials:
5
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers 1nd
Contractor certifying that each of the following it ems
complies w ith specified requirements:
i.
BS4027
Specification
for
Portland Cement
BS 5328
Methods for Specifying Concrete

Including Ready-Mixed Concrete
BS EN 932
Tests of Aggregates
Properties
BS EN 933
Tests of Aggregates for Geometric

Properties
BS EN 1097
Tests of Aggregates for Mechanical

Properties
BS EN 1367
Tests of Aggregates for Thermal and

Weathering Properties
BS EN 1744
Tests of Aggregates
Properties
5-2
Test for Flat and Eloi"{Jated Particles
National Standard of Canada:
5.1 .1.3
Cementitious materials and aggregates.

Flber reinforcement.
iii. Admixtures: Material certificates in lieu of
material laboratory test reports when permitted
by the Engineer. M eterlal certificates shall be
signed by the manufacturer 1nd the Contractor.
certifying that each material item complies w ith
Provide certification
from admixture manufacturers that chloride
content complies with specified requirements.
i~
BS 1199 aNI 1200 Specification for Building Sands from

Natural Sources
Sulfate-Resisting
for
Corps of Engineers (CE):
CE CRD.C119
General
for Chemical
Minutes of pre-Installation conference.
5.1.1 .4
Quality Assurance
Quality System: Comply with ISO 9001/9002 Quality

System and ISO 14001 Environmental Management
Systems as a m lnlmum. Incorporate all the standard
procedures supplied by the E" gineer and the Employer.
Sultanate of Oman,
Sl~tllllld S~clricabom
lor 1\oad & Blldge Conilrue1Kll'
2
Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest version
of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice Parts 1, 2, 3, 4 & 5, and
CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" except where more
stringent requirements ere shown or spei:ified.
Concrete Quality Control Engineer: Appoint a fulltime Concrete Quality Control Engineer (CQCEJ to ensure
that concrete is properly produced, placed, cured and
protected. The CQCE shall be equivalent to a Member of
the Institute of Concrete Technology (MICTJ or as
approved by the Engineer end shall be responsible for the
maintenance and submission of all specified rei:ords. The
CQCE shall not report to the site construction
management but to the Contractor's management and to
the Engineer. The CQCE shall set standards of quality and
insist that these standards be followed, prepare a Quality
Control Program for the Inspection and testing of concrete
and the maintenance of all reports end rei:ords to meet the
specified requirements and requirements of the Engineer.
Depending on the quantity of concrete works in specific
project, the Special Specifications may waive this
requirement.
4
The Contractor shall operate a Quality Assurance
System in accordance with ANSI 09002. The Quality
Assurance Manager shall be responsible for the
preparation of a Quality Plan for approval of the
operations specified In this Section. The Quality Plan shall
include, among other things, the list end schedule of the
Quality Control audits that the Quality Assurance Manager
shall make.
5
Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm
experienced In manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94/C94M requirements
for production facilities and equipment.
6
Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to
the Engineer to perform material evaluation tests and
qualified according to ASTM C 10n and ASTM E 329 to
conduct the testing Indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548 and to design concrete mixes.
i.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be

qualified as ACI concrete field testing technician,
Grade 1 according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent
certification program approved by the Engineer.
7
Materials and installed work may require testing and
retesting at any time during progress of work, if instructed
by the Engineer. Tests, including retesting of rejected
materials for installed work, shall be done at the
B
Sourca Limitations: Obtain each type or class of
cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source,
and each admixture from the same manufacturer.
9
Pre-installation Confarence: Conduct conference at
Pro]ei:t site to comply with requirements as follows:
At least35 days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct

a meeting to review detailed requirements for preparing
concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for
satisfactory concrete operations. Review requirements for
submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of

materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule
and procedures for materials Inspection, testing, and
certifications.
Require representatives of each entity
directly concerned with cast-In-place concrete to attend
conference, including, but not limited to, the following:
Contractor's superintendent.
Agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
Agency responsible for field quality control.
Ready-mix concrete producer.
Concrete subcontractor.
Primary admixture manufacturers
5.1.2
Materials
5.1.2.1
Portland Cement
Portland Cement: Cement shall be low alkali with

chemical composition in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM
C 150 orBS EN 197: Part 1. The magnesia content shall be
limited to 4 percent by weight of cement, as tested in
accordance with ASTM C 114. Use one brand of cement
throughout Project unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
Manufacturer's test certification shell be
supplied for each delivery of cement and shall confirm
that the cement complies with the above requirements
and shall be submitted by the Contractor not later than the
day of delivery of the cement. The Engineer shall have the
right to call for tests, the cost of which is to be borne by
the Contractor, on each delivery of cement to confirm that
the cement meets the following requirements.
i.
ii.
iii.
Ordinary Portland cement (OPCI conforms to

ASTM C 150, Type I orBS EN 197. The heat of
hydration shall not exceed 325 kjil<g when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 186. C3A content
shall be a minimum of 5 percent and a maKimum
of 13 percent.
Sulfate-resisting Portland cement conforms to
ASTM C 150, Type V or BS 4027; C3A content
shall not be more than 3.5 percent.
Moderate Sulfate: conforms to ASTM C 150 type
II orBS EN 197. C3A content shall be a minimum
of 3.5 percent and a maximum of B percent.
2
Sampling shall be carried out in accordance with BS
EN 196: Part 7.
3
Test cement for fineness by air permeability
apparatus in accordance with ASTM C 204 to meet the
requirements of ASTM C 150.
4
Test cement for soundness. Autoclave expansion in
accordance with ASTM C 151.
5.1.2.2
Silica Fume
Silica fume (SF), also referred to as microsilica, used

as a cement replacement shall be in accordance with
Type U, specified in Canadian National Standard
CAN/CSA-A23.5 - M86. The silica fume shall be
obtained from an approved supplier.
~~
MinltrvofTrl>naportllo Communication
OCRLT
~~<:concrete and Concrete Structures
2
The approved supplier shall provide documentation
to establish the following:
l.
i i.
lili.
iv.
That the silica fume complies with Type U of

CAN/CSAA23.5 MB6.
The silica fume results from the production of
silicon or ferro-silicon alloys containing at least
85 percent silicon diollide. That source of supply
shill remain the same for the construction
period of the projEH:t.
That the supply shall be adequate to meet the
anticipated peak requirement.
Chemical analyses to give the percentages of the
following materials:
Si02
CaO
Fe203
Al203
Na20
K20
MgO
S03
v. Loss on ignition.
vi. Percentage of particles greater than 44 ~o~m .
vii. Specific surface area and method of test,
together with corresponding particle size.
3
Delivery of silica fume to the concrete batching plant
shall be in dry powder form, with a bulk density between
200 and 650 kg/cu m.
4
Manufacturer's test certification shall be supplied for
each delivery of silica fume and shall confirm that the
silica fume complies with the above requirements and
shall be submined by the Contractor no later than the day
of del Ivery of the silica fume.
5
The Engineer shall have the right to call for tests, the
cost of which are to be borne by the Contractor, on each
delivery of silica fume, if necessary to establish or confirm
that the silica fume meets the above requirements.
6.1.2.3
Supp' ementary Cementing Material (SCM I
Supplementary cementing materials. if permitted by

the Engineer, shall be selected from subparagraphs below.
Blending of fly ash or slag with Portland cement shall be
done at mixing plant.
L
ii..
5.1.2.4
Pulverized Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class Cor F.

Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C
989, Grade 100 or 120.
Blended Hydraulic Cement
61ended Hydraulic Cement: conforming to ASTM C

595 shall be used solely for grouts if specified or approved
by the Engineer. It shall not to be used for making
structural concrete.
5.1.2.5
Aggregates
Aggregates shall be normal-weight and shall be from

approved sources and shell conform to the requirements
of ASTM C 33 and BS EN 12620. Petrographic analyses
shall be made in accord11nce with ASTM C 295.
Aggregates for exposed concret e shall be from a single
S-4
source and shall not cont11in substances that cause

spelling.
Only aggregates not susceptible to alkali
aggregate reaction shall be used. The Contractor shall
supply samples of the materials for approval by the
Engineer and each aggregate sourca shall be subject to
monitoring by the Engineer. Grading of aggregate shall be
to the compliance of BS EN 12620.
2
Coarse aggregate for structural concrete shall be
20mm nominal size, free from material passing a 5mm
sieve, and shall consist of crushed stone, selected, recrushed, finish screened and washed w fth water meeting
the requirements of Paragraph 5.1.2.6 as necessary, and
shall comply with the following:
r-..
Fr.q, of
Teet DeicriptJon
Standard
Umlt
Initial
Los Angeles
Abrasion Loss
(Grading A or Bl
ASTM
c 131
25%
maximum
Initial
Ratio of Los
Angeles Abrasfon
Loss at 100 &500
Revolutions
(1001500
Revolutions Value)
1 per day
(mini
A~M
0. 25%
c 131
NoteS
maxlmum
Clay Lumps and

Friable Particles
ASTM
c 142
1.0%
maximum
1 per dey
Material Finer than

75 Microns
ASTM
c 117
1.0%
maximum
1 per7
days
Water Abaorption
ASTM
c 127
2.0%
maximum
1 per3
days
Chlorides as Cl
BS 812
0.03%
max
1 per3
days
Sulfates u SO,
BS 812
1 Pill' 30
days
Magnesium
Sulfate Soundness
Loss (5 cycles)
ASTM
C88
12%
maximum
Flakiness Index
BS 812
25%
maximum
Elongation Index
BS 812
25%
maximum
Reactive Silica
ASTM
c 227
"h
1 per3
days
"
1 per3
days
Each
productio~
sample
0.3%mlllC
Par
Appendix
X1.3.7 of
ASTM C
33
ASTM
1 per7
days
Specific Gravity
1 per2
days
Molstura Content
BSEN
1097-5
Each
production
sample
Shell Content
BS812
C1~
Minimum
2.6
3%
maximum
Table 5.1.2.1: Coarse Aggregate Specifications and TestIng
Additionally, the limits specified in Paragraph 5.1.3.9 for

total salt content shall not be exceeded
tons of fine aggregate and every BO tons

of coarse aggregate.
3
Fine aggregate, shall pass a 5mm sieve and shall
consist of crushed gravel, crushed stone or natura I sand
with rounded or surrounded particles. washed as
necessary, and shall comply with the following:
Chemical analyses shall be carried out on

every 100 tons of aggregate.
Tnt Description
Standard
Umlt
Clay Lumps and

Friable Particles
ASTM C 142
Ul% maximum
Material Finer
than 75 Microns
ASTM C 117
maximum 3% for
natural sand and 5%
for crushed sand
with n~ plastic fines
Water
Absorption
ASTM C 128
1.0% maximum
Chlorides 11s Cl
BS 812
0.06% maximum
Sulfates as 50s
BS 812
0.30% maximum
Organic
lmJ)urities
ASTM C 40
Ughterthan
Standard
Sand Equivalent
AASHTOT176
75%minimum
BS 812
15% maximum
- Fiv8 Cycles of
Soundness in
Magnesium
Sulfate
Table 5.1.2.2: Fine Aggregate Specifications and Testing

Additionally, the limits specified in Paragraph 5.1.3.9 for
total salt content shall not be exceeded
4
Certification: Obtain from each proposed source of
supply test certification to confirm that the aggregates
comply with tha above requirements. The following
information shall be provided:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
X.
xi.
xii.
XIII .
xiv.
xv.
5
Quarry location.
Aggregate type.
Petrographic analysis report.
Grading curve.
Shape and surface teX1ure.
Flakiness index.
10 percent fines value.
Impact test.
Shell content.
Chloride and sulfate content.
Relative density.
Water absorption value and moisture content.
Silt, clay, and dust content.
Results of reactive silica tests.
Organic impurities (fine aggregate only).
Testing:
i.
When a source of supply for each aggregate type

has been established, samples of materials
delivered to the Site she II be taken for testing in
accordance with BS 812 as follows:
Tests for clay, silt and dust, and sieve
enalysis shall be carried out for every 40
ii.
The Engineer shall have the right to call for

additional samples at any time for testing of
aggregates delivered to the Site or of aggregates
at the source of supply in order to confirm that
the a gg regales meet the above requirements.
6
Transportation: During transportation to the Site. all
aggregates shall be protected from wind-borne
contaminants. If these contaminants are present at time
of delivery, the aggregates shall be washed with water
meeting the requirement of Paragraph 5.1.2.6. Transport
vehicles shall be cleaned to remove possible
contamination due to previous use.
7
Storage: Aggregates shall be stored (under shadef on
hard concrete floors or other approved surface having
sufficient slope to ensure adequate drainage of aggregate
before being used for concrete. Each size and type shall be
stored in separate heaps without intermixing. Storage
shall prevent contamination of the aggregates by foreign
material including windblown dust. Fine and coarse
aggregates shall be separated by permanent substantial
partitions. Methods of storing, shading and cooling
aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer.
B
Plums used in cyclopean concrete shall consist of
non-reactive broken stone spells or boulders ranging in
size from 200mm to 300mm. They shall be free from sharp
or angular edges and shell not form more than 30 percent
of the total volume of concrete. They shall be evenly
graded and shall be soaked in water prior to incorporation
in the mix. Plums shall be evenly distributed in the
concrete mix with a minimum cover of 100mm.
5.1.2.6
Water
Water used for mtxmg concrete, ice production,

washing and cooling aggregates, and curing concrete
shall be free from impurities, oil, acid, salts, alkali, organic
matter, and other potentially deleterious substances when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T26, ASTM D 512 and
ASTM D 516.
Additionally, the limits specified in
Paragraph 5.1.3.9 for the total salt content of the concrete
shall not be exceeded.
2
Once a source of satisfactory supply has been
established, further tests shall be made daily with a
portable electrical conductivity probe calibrated against
the satisfactory supply. If the conductivity exceeds that of
the satisfactory supply, then further chemical tests shall be
performed.
5.1.2.7
Admixtures
Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used.

2
No admixture shall be used in the concrete without
the Engineer's written approval and under no
circumstances shall admiX1ures containing chlorides or
~~
MCnlatry ot Trnnport & Communications. DQRLT
_../'....~<Concrete and Concrete Structures
other corrosive agents be allowed.

Admixture
compatibility with the type of cement used shall be proven,
3
The Contractor shall perform a trial batch and casting
to substantiate the manufacturer's claims of workability,
retardation as specified in Clause 5.1 .3 Admixtures shall
comp:y with the following standards: ASTM C494/C494 M,
BS EN 934 and BS EN 480. Also, admixture sh41ll comply
with BS EN 12878 for pigments of cement.
4
Air-Entraining Admixture: No air entraining agent
shall be used.
Fiber: Type 1, cold-drawn wire, or Type 2, cut

sheet.
Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofi lament

polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in
concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type Ill. Project to
specify length.
2
5.1.3
Concrete Mixes
5.1.3.1
Design Mixes
Admixtures shaU be incorporated into the mix design

strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written
Instructions.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of

concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field
test data bases, according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
High-Range
Water-Reducing
ISuperplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type G.
5.1.3.2
Admixture
1.
1f necessary, and only with the Engineer's

approval, a naphthelene sulphonate retarding
superpfasticizer shall be used to increase
workability of the concrete and retard the initial
set.
11. Products: Superplaticizer shall produce fluid,
easily flowing concrete with a s lump Vi11Ue at
least 200 mm, but fre e from segregation, and
having the same water/cement ratio as that of a
no slump concrete with admixture. The product
shall result in concrete that remains workable for
a minimum of 3 hours at +20 deg.C and for a
minimum of 1.5 hours at +40 cleg. C.
iii. Obtain from the retarding superplasticizer
supplier, details of the material for review by the
Engineer and confirmation that It is in
accordance
with
Confirmation shall be obtained that the retarding
superplasticizer is compatible with any pozzolan
that is used.
7
Water-Reducing Admixture (Plasticizer): ASTM C 494,
Type A.
Testing Agency
Use a qualified independent testing agency

acceptable to the Engineer for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.
2
Do not use the same testing agency for field quality
control.
5.1.3.3
Reports
Submit written reports to the Engineer of each

proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days
prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production
until proposl!d mix designs have been reviewed and
approved by the Enginee r.
5.1.3.4
Concrete Classes
Mlnlinum
Cement
Maximum
com preliM
cont.at
(kQiml)
CementltJoua
Wllhlf'-
days (MP.a)
Mirifmum
M1terfllla
!;YI!_nder I a,!~
/ MIXImum
RMfo
ltrength It 28
o.7_Q
15
15 / 18.5
~_50 !350
25
25 / 31
300/400
30
30/37.5
350/450
9
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C
494, TypeD.
35
35/43.5
425/ 475
40
40/50
425/sOo
10 Corrosion-lnhlbiting
Admixture:
Commercially
formulated, mixed cathodic end anodic Inhibitor based on
amines end a lcohol; capable of forming a protective
barrier and absorbed Ol"' the reinforcement surface of
concrete for protecting steel bars and minimizing chloride
reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
45
45 / 56
450/500
0.42
50
50 / 62.5
450/500
0.40
60
60/75
450/500
0.38
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM

c 494, Type e.
11 Glare-Reducing Age11t: For landscape concrete

paving, provide material for reducing glare. Comply with
ASTM D209.
5.1.2.8
Fiber Reinforcement
Carbon-Steel Fiber: ASTM A 820, deformed.

minimum 60 mm long, and of diameter or effective
diameter indicated.
S-6 .
0.52
0.50
0.48
-
0~45
Table 5.1.3.1: Concrete Classes

6.1.3.5
Threshold Values for Supplementary

Cementing Materials {SCM I
Add SCM to the mix as necessary to achieve the

strength and durability requirements of the concrete
classes with due account of the maximum watercementitious materials ratios specified in Table 5.1..3.1 and
Paragraph 5,1.3.7.
2
All the supplementary cementing materials {SCMI
have threshold values of addition below which significant
Sultonot" of Oman. Strtld1rd Spotdr..:a~ons lOt R0;1" & Br>Ciae Con.true1ia 2:'
durability or strength parameters do not develop. Nominal

threshold addition val ues era ind;ceted in Table 5.1.3.2 for:
f.
Silica fume
Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFSJ
Pulverized fly ash (PFA]
ii.
iii.
SCM
Nominal thresho;d value
01
Sijlcafume
02
GGBFS
03
PFA
~on
(cement+ silica fume]
50% on [cement + GGBFSJ
6.1.3.7
3
The actual amount will depend on the quality of the
supplementary cementing material and mix design
parameters.
Limit Values for Supplementary Cementing
i.
if.
iii.
iv.
Materials (SCM]
The upper limiting addition percentage values for
each supplementary cementing material shall be as Table
5.1.3 3.
Mu:.
SMA
SiliCa
fume ~
01
"
10
02
GGBFS
55
03
PFA
30
04
GGBFS
70
05
PFA
--1--45- -
Applicable condition
For aU exposures
For permanent dry [RH ~ 50%1
or
damp
[RH
:t
85%)
conditions
For
underground
damp
-~sures IRH it 85%]_
For
concrete
buried
in
permanently wBt conditions
Table 5.1.3.3: Llmit Addition Values for SCM

RH is the relative humidity.
2
When mixtures of supplementary cementing
materials are designed Into the same mix, calculations
based on proportionate replacement based on the limiting
values shown in Table 5.1.3.3 shall be derived by the use
of Equations 1 and 2.
The following equations shall be used for calculating the
I imiting partia I proportions of each mineraI additive in the
mix design:
Where
is the % of GGBFS incorporated and
is the% of PFA incorporated
;r
;:
-+-+-=1
10 H
aD
5.1.3.8
IEquation 1)
For wet or dry situations (Table 5.1.3.3: conditions 01, 04

and 05]
Slump Limits
The slump of concrete mixes shall be such that the

concrete can be transported, placed into the forms, and
compacted without segregation in accordance with SubSection 5.3. If no su perplasticizer is required, the slump at
time of placement shall be 5075 mm as measured in
accordance with ASTM C 143. The concrete shall be
sufficiently workable to enable placement in its position
with minimum difficulty.
5.1.3.9
Total Salt Content
Chlorides: The total chloride content (sum of both

acid soluble and water soluble chlorides] of the concrete
from all sources, expressed as chloride ion. sha II not
exceed the following percentages by weight of dry cement,
inclusive of pozzolan, when tested in accordance with BS
1881:
iii.
For normal concrete (Table 5.1.3.3: conditions 01,02 and

03]
0.45 for concrete required to have low water

permeability.
0 40 for corrosion protection
of steel
reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides
from salt, saltwater, brackish water, seawater, or
spray from these sources.
0.45 for concrete subject to moderate sulfate
exposure.
0.42 for concrete subject to severe or very severe
sulfate exposure.
2
The water-cementitious materials ratio shall be
continuously checked at the mixer with due allowance
made for water contained in the aggregates. Under no
circumstance shall water be added between the mixer and
the place of concrete placement. The Engineer may
require that the water-cementitious materials ratio be
checked during tests performed on fresh concrete samples
taken at the time of placement as specified in Paragraph
5.1.4.4.
i.
ii.
is the% of Silica fume Incorporated
Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio
The maximum water-cementitious materials ratio

shall be the lower of the values listed in Table 5.1.3.1 for
the concrete classes and the following values for the
exposure:
25% on (cement + PFAI
Table 5.1.3.2Threshold Addition Values for SCM
6.1.3.6
(Equation 2)
iv.
v.
Unreinforced concrete
0.60%
Concrete
made
with
sulfate
resisting
cement
0.15%
Concrete containing embedded metal (reinforced
concrete] made with ordinary Portland
cement
0.30%
Prestressed concrete
0.06%
Heat cured concrete containing embedded metal
{reinforced concrete]
0.10%
2
Sulfates: The total sulfate content of the concrete
from all sources, expressed es S03, when tested in
accordance with BS 1881, shall not exceed the lesser of 0.4
57 .
~~
Mtnitrv of Trnnsport & Communications. DGRl T
percent by weight of aggregates or 3 percent by weight of

dry cement, inclusive of pozzolan.
5.1.3.10
Initial Setting Time
The initial setting time shall be not less than 90

minutes after the production concrete is discharged into
the form. With a maximum time between mixing and
placing concrete of 90 minutes, the total time between
mixing and initial set shall be a minimum of 2 hours.
Maximum setting time shall be 6 hours.
2
When trial mixes are made to determine the
workability of the concrete, the initial setting time of the
cement paste shall be determined using the method
defined in ASTM C 191 at the maximum allowable
temperature and with same proportions of pozzolan and
retarding superplasticizer as specified in this Specification.
5. 1.3.11
Test Mixes - Structural Grade Concrete
When the proposed workability, proportions of

aggregates and suparplasticizer, and strength for each
grade of concrete have been established. test concrete
shall be produced for approval by the Engineer. The
following shall be performed for each grade of concrete:
i.
ii.
Six separate test mixes shall be made and cured

in accordance with ASTM C 192 and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39.
The 36 cylinders for each grade of concrete shall
be tested for coml)l'essive strength at 28 days
and the mean strength and standard deviation
established for each grade. The test mixes shall
be accepted provided that:
The mix proportions and workability are
in accordance with this Speclf~ea tion.
The standard deviation for each grade is
3.5 MPa or less.
The mean strength for structural CQncrete
exceeds the specified design strength by
6MPa.
5.1.3.12
Test Mixes - Blinding and Plein Concrete
Concrete for blinding, plain concrete or cyclopean

concrete shall be a designed mix with design strength of
15 MPa.
The trial mix proportions shall be at the
d:scretion of the Contractor, Once they have been chosen,
three separate test mlxes shall be made with those
proportions and three test cylinders shall be made from
each mix for testing at 28 days. The trial mix proportions
end water/cement ratio shall be approved if the average
strength of the l'line cylinders is not less than 14 MPa.
2
No production test sh11ll be made for this grade of
concrete but the Engineer will mol\itor the mix
proportions and water/cement ratio.
5.1.3.13
Adjustments to Concrete Mixes
Mix design adjustments may be required by the

Engineer when characteristics of materials, job conditions,
weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.
5.8
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength

results shall be submitted to and approved by the
Engineer before using In the work.
5.1.3.14
Absorption Test
Hardened concrete from the trial mixes for structural

grades shall be tested for absorption to establish the
concrete's abilfty to resist the ingress of aggressive salts,
No absorption tests shall be required for blinding, plain
concrete or cyclopean concrete. Absorption tests shall be
in accordance with modified BS 1881: Part 122 as follows:
I.
After trial mixes have been accepted, three 150

mm cylinders shall be cast from each grade of
concrete and immersed in water at 20 deg. C for
7 days.
ii. At the end of the curing period, 75 mm diameter
core specimens shall be cut along the
longitudinal axis of each cylinder to a depth of
75mm.
iii. The specimens shall be dried in an oven at 105
deg. C for 72 hours.
iv. The specimens shah be cooled in a dry airtight
vessel for 24 hours, weighed, and then
immediately Immersed in a tank containing
water at 20 deg. C with the longitudinal axis of
the cores horizontal, and with 25 mm depth of
water over the specimens.
v. The specimens shall be immersed for 24 hours,
then removed, shaken, surface dried, and
reweighed.
The water absorption shall be
calculated as the increase In mass resulting from
immersion, expressed as a percentage of the dry
mass.
vi. If the cores lengths differ from 75 mm, a
correction feetor {graph given In BS 1881 I shall
be applied.
vii. The mean of the corrected absoi'JJtion figure for
each concrete grade shall be calculated and the
absorption of the concrete m ixes shall be
acceptable if the mean absorption is less than 2
percent at 30 minutes. The mean absorption
figure and the lowest absoi'JJtlon figure shall be
recorded for each grade and used for
comparison purposes with absorption tests
carried out on cores cut from in-situ concrete, as
scheduled in Paragraph 5.1.4.6.
6.1.3.15
Permeability Tests
Depth of penetration tests shall be carried out to

establish the water permeability of concrete on prototype
samp'es of different components of the structure before
the mix design or manufacturing method are approved.
The prototype samples shall be short sections of not less
than 1.0m x 1.0m x full thickness. The samples shall be
fully reinforced and cast In similar environment as the
actual structure.
The tests shall be carried out in
accordance with DIN 1048 at ege 28 days and the
maximum value of penetration shan !'lOt exceed the
following limits:
SUltonate af Omn. 51andortl Speaf.ouons lor Ro.>d t. Blllloe Cons1rUGiicr 20
In-situ construction:
Less than 25 mm.
Precast units:
Less than 20 mm.
2
Chloride permeability of the concrete shall be
determined using cores taken from the prototype samples,
in accordance with AASHTO T277 'Rapid Determination of
the Chloride Permeability of Concrete'. The following
limits shall not be exceeded:
In-situ construction:
1500 coulombs.
Precast units:
1000 coulombs.
3
The concrete will be deemed to comply with the
permeability requirements of this specification if all test
results comply with the limits indicated in Points 1 and 2.
If any of the DIN 1048 and the rap d chloride

permeability test resu Its of unprotected surfaces of a
sample fail to meet the above requirements, then all the
concrete work represented by such samp,e shall be
deemed not to comply with the permeability requirements.
5
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete that
has failed to meet the permeability requirements of this
Specification is likely to cause durability problems, three
cores shall be cut from the area represented by fa'lad
samples for additional DIN 1048 and rapid chloride
permeability testing. The location of the cores shall be
decided by the Engineer.
6.1.3.16
Synthetic Fiber
Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer"s

recommended rate, but not less than 0.60 kg/cu. m.
5.1.3.17
Admixtures
Use admil<tUres according to the manufacturer's

written instructions and in the proportions recommended.
2
Use water-reducing admixture or high-range waterreducl ng admixture ~su perplasticizer) in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
3
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when
required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other
adverse placement conditions.
4
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete,
concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
5
Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes
where indicated.
All admixtures shall be used as required and
6
approved by the Engineer for placement and workability
of concrete, and shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
The equipment used for
dispensing and the method of incorporating the admixture
into the concrete shall be subject to approve I. The
dispensing unit shall be translucent so that the operator
can see the discharge of the admixture.
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
Concrete Mixing
Concrete production shall be in accordance with ACI

304. A checklist for concrete production shell be produced,
such as that used by the NRMCA or approved equal.
2
Batching of materials shall be by weight.
All
weighing
equipment
shall
be
calibrated
and
documentation shall be provided to establish that the
accuracy is continuously maintained in accordance with
the requirements of ACI 304. Batching scale accuracy
shall be in accordance with the Concrete Plant Standards
of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau, or approved
equal.
3
Furnish
equipment
and
establish
accurate
procedures for determining the quantities of free moisture
in the aggregates. Moisture determinations shall be made
daily and whenever there is an apparent change in the
mosture content The moisture content shall be recorded
and shall be taken into account in adjusting the weight of
aggregate and the quantity of water incorporated in the
mix.
5.1.4.2
Job-Site Mixing
All concrete mixed on Site shall be in a batch mixer

of approved size and design complying with ACI 304 and
producing a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM
C 94 uniformity test The contents of the drum shall be
completely discharged before recharging. After all the
materials ere in the mixer. mixing shall continue until the
whole of the materials are uniformly distributed and the
mass is of uniform color and consistency. In the case of
concrete that contains silica fume with a density between
400650 kg/cu.m, the mixing time shall be 50 percent
greater than the requirement for concrete without si I ica
fume.
2
Whenever mixing is to be suspended for half an hour
or longer, the drum of the mixer shall be thoroughly
washed out with clean water.
Provide a competent
operator who shall be in continuous control of the mixer.
No retempering of concrete, which has partially hardened.
by the addition of cement. aggregate, or water sha II be
allowed.
3
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and
used in the work, indicating Project identification name
end number, date, mix type, mix time. quantity, and
amount of water introduced as well as the load printout,
delivery printout, temperature readout and measured
slump.
5.1.4.3
Ready-Mixed Concrete
Ready-mixed concrete shall comply with the

requirements of ASTM C 94 orBS EN 206 end as follows:
i.
Concrete shall be centrally mixed off site and

transported in an agitator truck. Truck mixing
shall not be permitted.
~~
Minl&try ofTrll11aport & Con1munieotion. DGRLT
~~<::concrete and
ii.
iii.
iv.
Concrete Struc tures
The plant and trucks shall be certified as meeting

the requirements of the NRMCA Check List, or
approved equaL
Details and I nformation regarding the supplier
proposed by the contrector shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.
The approved supplier of ready mixed concrete
shall not subsequently be cha~~ged without
further approval of the Engineer.
1.
Samples for production concrete cylinders

(or cubes i f approved by the Engineer) shall
be taken at the point of placement at the
average rate of one per 100 cu. m of concrete
placed or one for eech major plecement, with
a minimum of one sample taken every day
that the mix is used. A sample shell consist
of eight 150 mm cylinders molded and stored
for laboratory-cured test specimens except
when field-cured test specimens are required.
Three cylinders are for testing at 7 days after
casting, three for testing at 28 days after
casting. end two reserved for later testing If
required.
2
When air temperature is between 30 deg. C and 32
deg. C, delivery time from the time that water is added to
the mix until it is placed in its final position in the form
shall not exceed 90 minutes, When air temperature is
above 32 deg. C, delivery time shall not exceed 45 minutes.
Further time extension may be given if approved by the
Engineer.
3
Before discharging concrete at the point of delivery,
provide the Engineer w ith a delivery ticket for each batch
of concrete containing the following information as a
minimum:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x,
xlxii.
xlii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
5.1.4.4
Name or number of offsite concrete depot.

Serial number for ticket.
Date.
Time of dispatch.
Truck number.
Name of supplier.
Grade or mix description of concrete.
Type of cementitious materials.
Cementitious materials content and constitution.
Wat er/cementitious mater"'ls ratio.
Nominal maximum size of aggregate.
Source of aggregate, maximum size, weight of
fine and coarse aggregate.
Type or name of admixture, if included.
Percentage variation between design and actual
values for all ingredients.
Quantity of concrete in cubic meters.
Certifying that chlorides and sulfate contents are
within specified ~mits and stating their values.
Quality Control and Testing - General
Testing Laboratory:
i.
ii.
Employ an independent testing agency to

perform tests and to submit test reports.
Be responsible for taking, identifying and
delivering to the test laboratory all test samples
called for in this Specification. The testing
laboratory shall be responsible for the testing.
Collect 111 test results and deliver them to the
Engineer in the format and detail as specified.
2
Testing Laboratory Qualifications: The testing
laboratory shall be approved by the Engineer and shall
have a Quality System in accordance with ANSI 09001.
5.1.4.5
Qud ty Control - Testing on Fresh Co ncrete
Compressive Strength Test for Structural Concrete:
Sampling, curing and testing shall be performed

using the relevant procedures in ASTM C 31,
ASTM C 39, and ASTM C 172 orBS EN 12350.
If frequency of testing provi des fewer than 5

strength tests for a given class of concrete,
conduct testing from at least 5 randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer
t han 5 are used.
When total quantity of a given class of
concrete is less than 100 cu. m, the Engineer
may waive strength testing if adequate
evi dence of satisfactory strength is provided
but not less than one sample per dey.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is I ess
than 85 percent of compan"on laboratorycured cylinders, re-evaluate current on-site
operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing the in-place
concrete.
ii.
Records shall be kept of the mix details and

position in the works of all batches of concrete
and of Ill samples taken for cy" nders and other
specimens and of their test results. A copy shall
be supplied to the Engi neer within 24 hours after
recording/testi ng. Records shall contain, but not
be lim ited to, the f ollowing information:
Date, tlme,location, and volume of pour.
Ambient t emperature and humidity.
Concrete temperature (at time of placement).
Cementitious
constitution.
materials
and
Types of manufacturers of cementitious

materials.
Concrete type and class.
Aggregate type and source.
Admixture details.
Water/cementitious materials ratio.
Identification of test cylinder.
Name of concrete testing servce.
Date and time of sampling.
Method of compaction.
510
content
Sultonata of Oman. Shmdrrl Spet;lica~O<!S lot Ro.od & Bnd111t Cc
Date of testing and results of test.

Age of samp e in days, weight in grams,
density in kg/cu. m.
Crushing load in Newtons and crush; ng
strength in MPa.
Signatures of person preparing cylinder and
of person crushing cylinder.
Results of testing.
iii.
iv.
v.
For the 28 day tests, the concrete will be deemed

to comply with the specified design strength if
the average strength determined from all sets of
3 consecutive tests is at least equal to the
specified design strength and no individual
strength test falls below the spec' fied design
strength by more than 3.5 MPe. Any concrete
not complying with the specified des' gn strength
shall be at risk for removal and replacement at
The 28-day cylinder crushing results shall be
grouped consecutively in groups of 40 and each
group shall have a standard devi a!ion less than
3.5 MPa. If the standard deviation is greater than
or equal to 3.5 MPa, then concrete production
shall be Investigated by the Engineer and further
tests on trial mb(es may be required.
Tests shall be carried out at 7 days to establish a
relationship between the 7 day and 28 day
strengths. This relationship shall be used to
interpret future test results in order to predict the
corresponding 28 day strength. The Engineer
shall be advised without delay if any 7 day test
result indicates that the corresponding 28 day
strength is li kaly to fai I to meet the specified
strength so that any necessary action can be
taken to minimize the effect of such possible
failure.
Compressive Strength Test for Blinding or Plain

2
Concrete: No production tests on blinding or plain
concrete ere required.
The Engineer may require
compressive strength tests if it is believed that the
characteristic strength Is below 15 MPa. Characteristic
strength is defined as the minimum value of cube strength
achieved by 95 percent of all possible test results. If the
tests confirm that the characteristic strength is less than 15
MPa, then the Engineer will require revisions to the mix
design to ensure that the concrete meets the specified
requirements.
3
Measurement of Concrete Temperature: Temperature
measurements shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1064.
Concrete temperature shall be measured 50 mm below
the surface prior to and at the point of placement and
recorded on the pour card for each pour. One reading
shall be taken each hour when air temperature is 4 deg.C
and below and when air temperature is 27 deg.C end
above, and one reeding for each set of compressivestrength specimens.
Concreting shell stop If the
temperature of the concrete does not meet the
requirements of Paragraph 5.3.3.10
4
Cementitious Materiels Content and Water/
Cementitious Materials Ratio: Samples of freshly mixed
concrete shall be chosen by the Engineer at least once per
month from each structural grade and determination
made of cement content end water/cement ratio In
accordance with BS 1881. If the cement content is less
then 90 percent of the requirement in Paragraph 5.1.3.4 or
the water/cement ratio is greater then 110 percent of the
requirement in Paragraphs 5.1.3.4 and 5.1.3.7 the
Contractor and the Engineer shell i nvestigete to establish
the ce use and the Engineer may reject the cast concrete
for the pour from which the samples were taken. The
Engineer may request an analysis or fresh concrete from
any pour. No analysis of freshly mixed concrete Is
required for blind'ng or plain concrete.
Salt Content: The total concentration of sulfates and
5
chlorides in fresh concrete shall be measured at least o nee
a week for all structural grades of concrete. Tests shall be
in accordance with BS 1881. Concentrations of each ion
shall not exceed the limits specified in Paragraph 5.1 .3.9. If
these limits are exceeded, the concrete pour from which
the samples were taken shall be rejected and further tests
performed on the cast concrete in accordance with
paragraph 5.1 .4. 6 to determine the total extent of the
problem.
6
Slump; Slump tests shalt be performed in accordance
with ASTM C 143. A minimum of one test shall be done at
the point of discharge for each dey's pour for each type of
concrete.
Additional tests shell be performed when
concrete consistency appears to have changed.
5.1.4.6
Quality Control- Testing on Hardened

Concrete
General: The Engineer may instruct samples to be

taken and tests carried out on any hardened structural
grade concrete as specified below if he suspects that the
concrete does not meet the specified requirements. If the
tests confirm that the concrete does not meet the
requirements of this Specl fication, then the Engineer may
require the concrete to be removed at the Contractor's
expense. If the tests confirm that the concrete meets the
requirements of this Specification, then the cost of taking
the sampies shall not be a!the Contractor's expense.
2
Compressive Strength Tests: The Engineer may
instruct cores to be drilled from a particular pour. 100 mm
diameter cores shall be drilled as requested, in accordance
with ASTM C 42, and sent for crushing. If the cores from
that pour have an average compressive strength less than
85 percent of the characteristic strength or if any
lndividua I core has a compressive strength less than 75
percent of the characteristic strength, it shall be evidence
that the concrete from which it was taken is not in
accordance with the specified requirements.
3
Concrete Cover: The Engineer may check the
concrete cover over the reinforcement with a cover meter.
Any indication that the cover is generally I ess than the
requirements specified in Paragraph 5.2.3.4 shall be
checked by limited surface concrete removal. If it is
5-11
~
./'../
Minitrv ot
Trt~nAport.,. ~n~unic:atlons
OGRll
confirmed that the actual cover is generally less than

specified, then the concrete shall be removed at the
Contractor' s expense. In the case of localized lack of cover
and where appearance is not important, a repair shall be
effected by removal of the inadequate cover and cutting
back of concrete for 50 mm behind the reinforcement.
Resurfacing of the concrete with the specified cover shall
be carried out as a repair by a specialist subcontractor.
4 Absorption: A sample of three 75 mm diameter cores,
75 mm long, shall be taken from hardened concrete if
directed by the Engineer and tested in accordance with
Paragraph 5.1.3. 14. Should the absorption of any core
exceed by more than 1 percent the highest approved test
result. the concrete from which it was cut shall be
No absorption test shall be required for
removed,
blinding or plain concrete.
5
Salt Content: Engineer may request samples to be
taken from two 20 mm diameter drillings into the concrete
surface, spaced 75 mm ap;~rt. Each drilling shall proceed
in 25 mm increments for a total depth of 100 mm and the
dust from the 4 samples in each hole shall be sent for
sulfate and chloride content analysis in accordance with
BS 1881. Should the tests show that the limits specified in
Paragraph 5. 1.3.9 are exceeded. the concrete shall be
removed.
5
Concrete of the same class requiring the same
felsework but with a different class of surface finish !Ire
each measured separately.
6
Voids. openings or gaps 0.05 cubic meters or more
shall be deducted from the volume of concrete In which
they occur.
7
All service ducts, irrespective of diameter, shall be
measured and deducted from the volume of concrete in
which they are Jocated.
5.1.5.2
Items Not Measured
Volume of reinforcing bars is not deducted from the

measured vOlume of concrete.
2
Volume of prestressing ducts, anchors, cones,
couplers and grouting tubes i s not deducted from the
measured volume of concrete.
Volume of embedded metals, bolts, nuts, anchorages,
3
hooks etc.. is not deducted from the measured volume of
concrete.
Holes introduced. with the consent of the Engineer.
4
by the Contractor for the convenience of transportation,
erection or construction shall not be deducted from the
measured volume of concrete irrespective of the size of
the holes and whether or not the holes are made good.
6
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope,
or other nondestructive devlce may be used but shall not
be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection of
c~t concrete.
Additional concrete placed, w ith the consent of the

5
Engineer. by the Contractor solely for the purpose of
facilitating his work shall not be measured for payment.
Additional Tests: The testing agency shall make

7
additional tests of in-place concrete, as directed by the
Engineer, when test results Indicate that specified concrete
strengths or other characteristics have not been attained
in the structure. Testing agency may conduct tests to
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed_
5.1.6
5.1.5
5.1-5-1
Measured Item ~
Basis of Payment

measu red as provided above. will be paid for at the unit
rate for tha types and classes of concrete In the Bill of
Quantities. which rate sl!all be full compensation for:
Cement and other cementitlous materials,
aggregates, water and admixtures Including
thei r
testing,
storage,
handling
and
transportation.
Washing of aggregates, if r equired.
Ice, if required, added in the mix water.
Concrete is measured by the cubic meter for each

type and class, based on dimensions shown Ol'\ the
Drawings or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Plant, machinery and equipment required for

the production of concrete.
2
Concrete works shall include mass. reinforced and
prestressed concrete of both in-situ and precast
construction of a general nature, but shall not include
specific components of highway structures, such as
concrete pavement, concrete piles, concrete parapets and
safety barriers. precast concrete curbs and tiles etc., which
are sel)arately prescribed for measurement and payment
In other Sections.
Transportation and delivery of concrete to work

areas.
Different classes of concrete are measured separately.
4
Concrete formed by different types of form a ndlor
falsework are each measured separately.
512
Design of mixes, taking samples and testing.
Placing, compacti ng, vibrating and finishing of

concrete.
All formwork irrespective of the material used
and the quality of surface finish specified.
AI falsework
formwork.
supporting
and
stabiliZing
Curing of concrete.
Tooling, if requi red, to achieve the specified
surface finish.
,_,_or_Rcwt
__&_ B_rid..;.c_e_Co_nc
_ lr_
uc_llor
_ _-...,
S<Jitnnnte of Omen, Slat1

______
Corrective measures and the means of carrying

them out required in the event of the concrete
being not in accordance with the Drawings
and/or specification.
Handling, transportation and
precast concrete members.
erection
British Standards (BS):

Specification for Carbon Steel Bars for
the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS4483
Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of

Concrete
of
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):
Grout and/or epoxy used in precast

construction including material and equipment
for temporary prestress, if required.
Material, plant and equipment associated with
particular methods of construction.
Joint fillers. joint sealants, weep holes, water
stops, dowel bars and other accessories as
shown on the Drawings including material,
plant handling, transportation testing, storage,
workmanship and associated ancillaries.
Protective coating.
5.1.7
BS 4449
CRSI
5.2.1.2
Manual of Standard Practice

Submittals
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of

fabrication, bending, end placement, prepared according
to ACI 315, 'Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement.' Include material, grade, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and
supports of concrete reinforcement.
Include special
reinforcement required for openings through concrete
structures.
All labor, materials and equipment.
2
Welding Certificates: Copies
welding procedures and personnel.
3
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers and
Contractor certifying that the following items comply with
specified requirements:
Concrete (class) in (type of structu re),

(location) and (finish)
5.2
Reinforcing Steel
5.2.1
Description
5.2.1.1
References
cu.m.
i.
of certificates
for
Steel
reinforcement
end
reinforcement
accessories: a copy of the manufacturer's test
certificate for ultimate strength, elongation and
cold bending, together with the chemical
analysis of the steel shall be submitted to the
Engineer for each consignment of reinforcing
steel delivered to the Site.
American Concrete Institute (ACI):

ACI315
ACI 318
2
Practice
for
Detailing
Standard
Reinforced Concrete Structures
Building
Code
Requirements
Reinforced Concrete
for
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM A 82
Standard Specification for Steel Wire

Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 185
Standard Specification for Steel Welded

Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTMA496
Standard Specification for Steel Wire,

Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTMA497
Standard Specification for Steel Welded

Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTMA615M
Standard Specification for Deformed

and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 706M
Standard Specification for low-Alloy

Steel Deformed and Plain Bars
ASTM A 780
Practice for Repair of Damaged and

Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Coatings.
5.2.1.3
Quality Assurance
Welding: Comply with AWS D1 .4, 'Structural Welding

Code-Reinforcing Steel' for procedures and qualification
of personnel for welding operations.
5.2.1.4
Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to

prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings
on steel reinforcement.
5.2.2
Materials
5.2.2.1
Steel Reinforcement
1
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa)
specified yield strength, or BS 4449 grade 460 Type 2
deformed, uncoated.
One test per 5000 m length
delivered to site.
2
Higher strength reinforcement bars may be used
subject to approval of the Engineer.
3
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706M,
deformed.
4
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, galvanized.
6
Deformed Steel Wire: ASTM A 496 and Steel welded
wire reinforcement to ASTM A 497.
!5-13
~~
Ministry or Tronaport & Catnmunicruloos
OGRLT
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire

fabric.
All reinforcement shall be new material on delivery

8
to the Site and at time of installation, material shall be free
from loose rust and loose mill scale, deleterious amounts
of salts and coatings that reduce or destroy bond. Tight
rust and mill scale or surface Irregularities are acceptable
if the weight and dimensions, including height of
deformations and tensile properties, of a test specimen
that has been wire-brushed by hand, are not less than
those required by the applicable standards.
9
Galvanized steel
she ~
not be used
10 Reinforcement shall be accurately bent, cut or

formed to the dimensions and conf~guration shown on
Drawings and within the tolerances specified in ACI 315.
Reinforcement shall be bent cold using approved bending
equipment in accordance with ACI 318. Bars may be
preheated only If prior approval is given by the Engineer.
Reinforcement shell not be rebent or straightened without
prior approval.
i.
ti.
5.2.2.2
Reinforcement having a reduced section, kinks,

visible transverse cracks at bends, or otherwise
damaged in any way shall not be used.
Reinforcement shall not be welded unless
specifically shown on Drawings or permitted as
an exception and then only after approval of the
welding method appropriate to the grade of steel
and the type of welding rod to be used.
Reinforcement Accessories
Provide and fix bar supports: bolsters, chairs, spacers,

and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded w ire fabric in place. Provide
bar supports according to CRSI's 'Manual of Standard
Practice' from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or
fiberreinforced concrete of gretter compressive strength
than concrete, and as follows:
I.
ii.
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where

legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Cl ass 2
stainless-steel bar supports.
Other reinforcement supports shall consist of
concrete spacer blocks made of the same
materials, to the same specified requirements
and with the same inherent properties as the
parent material with the exception that the
maximum aggregate size shall be appropriate for
the thickness of cover to the reinforcement,
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615M,

Grade 60 (420 MPa). Cut bars true to length w ith ends
square and free of burrs.
2
3
Mechanical splices (couplers) of deformed high yield
steel bars are to consist of two seamless steel sleeves and
interconnecting high tensile steel stud w ith plastic
protection caps for threaded section of sleeve and shall
be tested to exceed 135% of the specified yield strength of
grade 60 bar (or higher if higher strength bars are used).
5-14
5.2.2.3
Fabricating Reinforcement
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's

'Manuel of Standard Practice'.
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
General
Accurately
position,
support,
and
secure
reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
2
Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to AWS
01 .4, where indicated.
3
Set wl re ties with ends directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
4
Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable
lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap
edges end ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh
spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire
5
Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier
and waterproofing membtanes during reinforcement
placement and concreting operations. Repair damages
before placing concrete.
6.2.3.2
Shipping, Storage and Cleaning
Reinforcement shall be handled and shipped in a

manner to avoid bending or other damage to the bars.
Bars shall be bundled, separated in sizes and clearly
marked by diameter size preferably for one placement, In
accordance with the placement schedule and as follows:
1.
Bars for separate structures shall not be bund led

together.
Bars for small structures may be
bundled together but each bar or group of bars
that have the same piece mark shall be tagged
and coded.
ii. Metal tags or approved equal shall be provided
and labeled with legible markings.
Iii. All bundles shall be tagged at each end. Tags
shall show piece maries corresponding to the
mark numbers on the placement drawings and
on the bar list.
iv. Bars shall be bundled in the largest size practical
for handling and shipping.
2
Reinforcement shall be stored 1m above ground on
platforms, skids or other approved supports and suitably
spaced. Contact with the soil shall be avoided. Proper
drainage and protection from the elements shall be
provided to minimize corrosion.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,
3
earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
SultanAte of Oman, Stondord Spear-om fiX Rood I' Bridg Conotructoon 2010
5.2.3.3
Placing
Comply with CASI's 'Manual of Standard Practice' for

placing reinforcement.
2
Accurately
position,
suppon,
and
secure
reinforcement against displacement. locate and support
reinforcement on concrete blocks of a size to give the
correct cover to the reinforcement
3
Where cathodic protection is utilized, reinforcement
shall be isolated from the electrical grounding system.
4
Chairs made of reinforcement shall be used to
support the top mats of slab reinforcement and shall be so
dimensioned as to be stable during concreting operations.
The chairs shall themselves be supported on concrete
blocks as specified in Clause 5.2.2.2.
5
Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverage
as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and
securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position during concrete placement operations. Ties at
intersections shall be made with 1.5 mm diameter
annealed wire with wire ends directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
All lap splices shall be in accordance with ACI 31 B
6
class B tension lap splice unless otherwise shown on
Drawings. All reinforcement bars shall be cut bent and
fixed in accordance with ACI 318 unless otherwise shown
on Drawings.
7
Welded wire fabric shall be lapped 1.5 mesh

~opening size! plus the extension on the wires unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
5.2.3.4
Concrete Cover
Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as indicated

on Drawings but shall not be less than the following:
I.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
Concrete exposed to salt water and

splash zone
100 mm
Concrete of all su bstructura elements cast
against eanh
100 mm
Concrete of all substructure elements exposed to
75 mm
weather
Apron slabs
60 mm
Superstructure cast-in-situ concrete exposed to
weather
60 mm
Interior faces of superstructure cast-in-place
40 mm
concrete except slabs
Cast-in-situ slabs
30 mm
Precast superstructure elements, exposed
surfaces
40mm
Precast
superstructure
elements,
interior
faces
30mm
Precast parapets, concrete barriers, curbs,
etc.
30mm
2
Cover to reinforcement shall be checked before any
concrete is cast. The bending of reinforcement at a cold
joint is not permitted. Concrete cover shall be checked
with a cover meter as soon as formwork is removed.
5.2.4
Bar and mesh reinforcement is measured by the

theoretical quantity in metric tonnes complete in place as
shown on the Drawings or placed as ordered by the
Engineer. No allowance is made for clips, wire or other
fastening devices, reinforcement chairs to separate slab
steel or similar reinforcement or to retain wall steel or
similar. The rates in the Bill of Quantities shall be deemed
to cover for the above.
2
Measurement of splices or laps in reinforcement
not shown on the Drawings will not be made.
3
Calculated weights for high tensile and mild steel
reinforced bars shall be based upon the following Table:
JE
E
i5
5
..
1,
0.154
0.222
6
7
h!
f.~
}j 1~
J
c
18
20
fj
2.000
2:470
38
7. 130
7.990
34
0.302
0.395 .. .
22
2.980
38
8.900
24
3.550
40
9.870
10
0.617
26
4.170
12
14
o:eaa
28
30
4.830
45
50
15.400
16
'i21o
1.580
32
I
I
5.550
'
12.500
--'
6.310
Table 5.2.4.1 Aelnforc:lng Bars Weights

4
No separate measurement is made for bars of
different diameters. The unit rates in the Bill of Quantities
shall be deemed to cover for all diameters.
5
Fabric mesh reinforcement is measured separately
by weight based on the theoretical quantity of metric
tonnes complete in place as shown on the Drawings or
placed as ordered by the Engineer.
No separate
measurement is made for different mesh sizes or different
wire diameters. For standard fabric, the weight will be
based on the mass In kglsq.m. listed in Table A.1 of BS
4483.
6
The quantity of steel reinforcing bars and fabric mesh
reinforcement shall be calculated to the nearest three
decimal places.
5.2.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted material.

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the unit
rate for reinforcing steel ~bar and mesh!. in the Bill of
supplying, fabricating, transporting, delivering, erecting
and fixing, materials, labor, equipment, tools and other
items necessary for the proper completion of the work as
specified in Sub-Section 5.2.
5-15 .
~~
MinEtry of Trnn5)0rt & Cornrnunieutian. OGRlT
_/""...~<::concrete and Concrete Structures
5.2.6

Mild st eel bar reinforcement of any
diameter
t.
l1
High tensile steel bar reinforcement

of eny diameter
t.
i1i
Fabric wire mesh reinforcement of

any size
t.
ASTM C 171
Standard Specification
for Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete lAASHTO
M 1711
ASTM C219
Standard Terminology
Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C309
Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete IAASHTO M 1481
Relating
to
5.3
ASTM C881
Standard Specification for Epoxy. Resin

Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
5.3.1
Description
ASTM C920
Standard Specification for Elastomerk:

Joint Sealants
5.3.1.1
Definitions
ASTM C 1315
Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming compounds having Special

Properties for Curing and Sealing
Concrete
ASTM C 10S9
Specification for Latex Agents for

Bonding Fresh To Hardened Concrete
ASTM 0448
Classification for Sizes of Agg regales

for Road and Bridge Construction
ASTM 0 1751
Standard Specification for Preformed

Ex pension Joint Fifler for Concrete
Paving and Structure! Construction
IAASHTO M2131
ASTM 01752
Specification for Preformed sponge

Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers
for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction IAASHTO M153).
ASTM 0994
Specification for Preformed Expansion

Joint Filler for Concrete (AASHTO M331.
ASTM 04397
Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting

for
Construction.
Industrial, and
Agricultural Applications
ASTM E 154
Test Methods for Water Vapor

Retarders used in Contact with Earth
under Concrete Slabs, on Walls or as
Ground Cover.
ASTM E 1745
Specification for Plastic Water Vapor

Retarders used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
Forms and Formwork: Temporary works used to give

the required shape and support to poured concrete,
constructed mainly of sheet material, such as wood.
plywood. metal sheet or plastic sheet, in direct contact
with the concrete, and joists or stringers to support the
sheeting. For bridges it is recommended to use only metal
sheets.
2
Falsework: Temporary structure used to support e
permanent concrete structure while it is not selfsupporting.
3
Scaffold: Temporary structure to provide access. to
work under construction.
4
Tower. Composite structure to provide access to high
work under construction and to carry vertical loading.
5
Camber: Upward curvature of the formwork.
designed to compensat e for subsequent deflection under
load.
5.3.1.2
References

Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
AASHTO M182
2
Highway
and
Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth

Made from Jute or Kenaf
American Concrete Institute (ACII:
ACI11 7
Specifications for Standard Tolerances

for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 304
Guide
for
Measuring,
Mixing,
Transporting. and Placing Concrete
ACI305
Hot Weather Concreting
ACI309
Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
ACI347
Formwork for Concrete
ACI504R
Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete

Structures
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C 33
Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 109/C109M
Test Method for Compressive
Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-ln. or 50 mm Cube Specimens
ASTMC 150
$16
Cement
for
Portland
Corps of Engineers ICE):
CE CRDC300
Curing Compound
CE CRD-C513
Rubber Waterstops
CE CAD-C572
PVC Waterstops
6.3.1.3
Submittals
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepare shop drawings

for formwork incfcati ng fabrication and erection of forms
fQT specified finish concrete surface. Show form
const ruction Including jointing, especial form joints or
reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement
1.
Design of formwork includes design of

falsework, scaffol d and towers as defined in
Paragr aph 5.3.1,1.
Concrete and Conc rete Structures
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Prepare formwork drawings by or under the

supervision of a qualified professional engineer
detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of
formwork.
Design and engineering of formwork for
structural stability and efficiency are the
Contractor's responsibility.
Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of
stripping formwork, removing supports and reshoring.
If the ContriiC!or intends to use readymade
proprietary formwork and falsework, he shall
submit all relevant data, including independent
test certiftcates, to enable the Engineer to
determine if the proposals are acceptable.
Engineer's review of formwork design is limited
to architectural aspects only and shall not be
construed as approval of structural or other
matters, all of which are the Contractor's sole
responsibility

Contractor certifying that each of the following items
complies with specified requirements:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Waterstops.
Curing materials.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Vapor retarders.
Epoxy joint filler.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
Samples: Samples of materials as requested by the

Engineer, with names, sources, and descriptions,
including, but not limited to, the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
Color finishes.
Reglets.
Waterstops, reinjectable hosing, water swelling
gaskets.
iv. Vapor retarder/barrier.
v. Form liners.
vi. Joint fillers.
vii. Sealants.
5.3.1.4
Quality Assurance
Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest edition

of
i.
ii.
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Construction
Specifications.
ACI Manual of Concrete Practice Parts 1, 2, 3, 4 &
5.
Iii.
CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice except

where more stringent requirements are shown
or specified.
2
Concrete Quality Control Engineer: Appoint a full
time Concrete Quality Control Engineer (CQCEI as
specified In Paragraph 5.1. 1.4
i.
Without prejudice to the Engineer's rights to

inspect, approve or reject or suspend any work,
the CQCE shall be authorized to:
Postpone concreting operations until
outstanding requirements are corrected.
Reject materials or workmanship that do
not conform to this Specification.
Prevent the use of equipment that could
cause improper construction relative to
this Specification.
Stop any work that is not being done in
accordance with specified requirements.
Report within 24 hours and provide
records to and as required by the
Engineer upon discovery of non
compliance.
3
Implement a Quality Assurance System as specified
in Paragraph 5.1.1.4.
4
Mockups: Before casting concrete that Is exposed to
view in the completed structure, cast a mockup for each
exposed element to demonstrate typical joints, surface
finish, texture, color, tolerances, quality of materials and
standard of workmanship in the completed work. Where
specified or directed by the Engineer, the mock up shall be
a trial construction representative of the actual structure
(pier, cross-head. part of deck) in dimensions and all
details including reinforcement, using the Contractor's
proposed construction technique, concrete mix, formwork,
cutting and placing of reinforcement, etc.
i.
Build mockups in the location and of the size

indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the
Engineer.
ii. Notify the Engineer seven days in advance of
dales and times when mockups will be
constructed.
iii. In the presence of the Engineer, damage parts of
ex posed surfaces as selected by the Engineer.
and demonstrate materials and techniques
proposed for repairs to match adjacent
undamaged surfaces.
iv. Obtain the Engineer's approval of mockups
before starting cast-in-place concrete elements
exposed to view.
v. If the Engineer determines that any mockup does
not meet requirements, demolish and remove
from the site and cast another until the mockup
is approved.
vi. Maintain mockups during construction in an
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging
the completed work.
vii. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
5.3.2
Materials
5.3.2.1
Form Materials
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal,

metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel
5-17
~
/",./
Miniatrv of TrnnapOrt & Comm.,nlcntlona . DGRL T
type materials to provide continuous, straight. smooth,

exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to
minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system
shown on Drawings.
I.
ii.
Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S.

Product Standard PS-1 "AC or B-B High Density
Overlald Concrete Form; Class I.
Use plywood complying with U.S. Product
Standard PS1 'BB (Concrete Form) Plywood,'
Class I, Exterior Grade or bener, mill-oiled and
edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible
inspection trademark.
5.3.2.2
Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell-type waterstops

at construction joints and other joints In accordance with
AASHTO LRfO Bridge Construction Specifications Article
8.9.2.6 or as specified herein. Waterstops shall be sized to
suit joints and shall be of the profiles shown on the
Drawings or as directed or appropriate for t lte particular
application. Fittings for angles junctions etc shall be
factory formed.
i.
2
Forms for U11exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood,
lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for
t<ght fit.
3
forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face
design, size, arrangement, and configuration to match the
Engineer's control sample. Provide solid backing and
form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.
4
Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal,
glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes that
will produce smooth surfaces without joint lndicetlons.
Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet
concrete loads without deformation.
ii.
Re-injectable Hosing: Proprietary re-injectable hosing

complying with the following requirements:
The hose shall consist of a hollow PVC core
with lateral openings covered bV neoprene
valves. The hose shall be laid and injected by
an approved applicator. in 10 to 12 m lengths
with entry port and vent ends terminating in
junction boxes.
Joints shall be hydraulically tested to a
pressure at least 2.0 bar higher than the
expected local conditions. It the hose fails to
hold the pressure for 10 minutes, it shall be
injected with a v inyl ester based flexible resin
as required to seal the joint and then retested.
6
Carton Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated
for moisture-resistance, structurally sufficient to support
weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loeds.
i.
Release agent for steel faced formwork shall

incorporate rust inhibitor.
8
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length,
removable or snapoff metal form t ies designed to prevent
form deflection and to prevent spelling of concrete upon
removal. Provide units that leave no embedded metal
closer than 38 mm to the surface of the exposed concrete.
No permanent metallic part shall have less concrete cover
than the reinforcement. Provide lies that, when removed,
will not leave holes larger than 25 mm In diameter in the
concrete surface. Provlde ties with integral water-barrier
plates for walls indicated to receive damp-proofing or
waterproofing.
9
Void Forms : Biodegradable paper surface, treated for
moisture resistance structural sufficient to support weight
of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
10 Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips of
the size indicated on the Drawings.
5-18
Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRDC 513, for

embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints.
Flexible PVC Waterstops; CE CRDC 572, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints.
2
Self-Expanding
Strip Waterstops:
Proprietary
rectangular or trapezoidal strip, sodium bentonite or other
hydrophylic material for adhesive bonding to concrete.
5
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plestic or
formed steel, stiffened to support weight of placed
concrete without deformation.
7
Form Release Agent: Proprietary form release agent
with a maximum of 350 gJI. volatile organic compounds
(VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
Waterstops
5.3.2.3
Concrete Curing Cover Sheets
Vapor retarding sheet materials shall be one of the

types specified in paragraphs 2 to 5 below or as d irected
by the Engineer.
2
ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following
materials; or polyethylene sheet 0.25mm thick
i.
il.
Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene

coated sheet; 0.25 mm thick.
Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced,
laminated, high-density polyethylene slteet; 0.18
mmthick.
3
Vapor retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B, five-pry,
nylon
or
polyester-cord-reinforced,
high-density
polyethylene sheet; 0.25 mm thick.
4
Vapor retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, three-ply,
nylon
or
polyester-cord-reinforced,
high-density
polyethylene sheet: laminated to a nonwoven geotextile
fabric, 0.76 mm t hick.
5
Vapor reterder: 2.8 mm thick, semt-flexib'e, seven .ply
sheet membrane consisting of reinforced core end carrier
sheet
with
fortified
asphalt
layers,
protective
weathercoating, and removable plastic releese l iner.
Sultunate of Oman. Slandllll
Ill< Bridlle Conotruo'lioo
------------~~------
Furnish manufacturer's accessories including bonding

asphalt, pointing mastics, and self-adhering joint tape.
i.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 154.
li.
Tensile Strength: 24.5 kN/m; ASTM E 154.
iii.
Puncture Resistance: 400 N; ASTM E 154.
6
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or
kenaf weighing approximately 0.29 kg/sq.m and
complying with AASHTO M182. Class 2.
Moisture Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171. polyethy~ene
7
sheet, polyethylene coated burlap or Kraft paper.
5.3.2.4
Curing Compounds
7
Reglets: Fabricated from not less than 0.55 mm thick
galvanized steel sheet. Temper arily fill or cover face
opening of regie! to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
8
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,
not less than 0.85 mm thick, with bent tab anchors.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris.
5.3.2.6
Repair Materials
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymermodified, self-leveling product that can be applied in

thicknesses from 3 m m and that can be feathered at edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
Curing compounds shall be one of the types

specified in paragraphs 2 to 6 below, or as directed by the
Engineer
i.
Cement Binder. ASTM C 150, Portland cement

or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
2
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular
film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete
ii.
Primer. Product of underlayment manufacturer

recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
Clear, solvent-borne, membrane-forming

3
compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
curing
iii.
4
Clear, waterborne,
membrane-forming
compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
curing
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6

mm or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
iv.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 30 MPa at

28 days when tested according to ASTM C
109M.
5
Clear, solvent-borne, membrane-forming curing and
sealing compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A .
Clear. waterborne. membrane-forming curing and

sealing compound; ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A .
5.3.2.5
Concrete Accessories
2
Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based,
polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 6 mm.
i.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement

or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219.
ii.
3
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated
cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding
cork.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer

recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
iii.
4
Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100
percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80
per ASTM 0 2240.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6

mm or coarse sand as recommended by
topping manufacturer.
iv.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 40 MPa at

28 days when tested according to ASTM C
109M.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated

cellulosic fiber.
2
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self
expanding cork.
5
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two

component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
i.
Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly

mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
ii.
Types I and II, non-load bearing. for bonding

hardened or freshly mixed concrete t o
hardened concrete.
iii.
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding

hardened or freshly m ixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
5.3.3
Construction Requirement&
5.3.3.1
Formwork
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork,

according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static,
and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be
applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.
Design of formwork shall be the sola responsibility of the
Contractor.
2
Construct formwork so that concrete members and
structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI117.
3
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by
ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
i.
Class A, 4 mm.
5 19
"-..//"'..,/
Minlatrv ot Trnnaport & Communlcotlon
DGIIlT
il
Class B, 6 mm.
Iii.
Class C, 10 mm.
iv.
Class 0 , 25 mm.
4
Construct forms rigid and t ight enough to prevent
loss of concrete mortar.
5
Fabricate forms for easy removal w ithout hammering
ot prising against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or
wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for Inclined surfaces
steeper than 1.5 horlzonta I to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts
for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for
easy removal.
i.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing

mat erial .
6
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed
strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes
in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to
support screed strips; use strike-off templates or
compacting-type screeds.
load. Falsework shall not be supported on any part of the

structure, except the footings, without the written
permission of the Engineer. The number and spacing of
falsework columns, the adequacy of sills, caps and
stringers and the amount of bracing in the falsework
framing shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
2
Timber for falseworll shall be sound, in good
condition and free from defects that might impair Its
strength. If the vertical members are of insufficient length
to cap at the desired elevation for the horizontal members,
they shall preferably be capped and frames constructed to
the proper elevation. Ends of the vertical members shall
be cut square for full bearing to preclude the use of
wedges. If vertical splices are necessary, the abutting
members shall be of the same approKimate size, the ends
shall be cut square for full bearing, and the splices shall be
scabbed in a manner approved by the Engineer.
3
The Contractor shall compute falsework settlement
and deflection for bridges so that when the final
settlement Is complete, the structure will conform to the
required camber, section and grade es shown on the
Drawings.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and

7
inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
Inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to
forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete
mortar.
Locate temporary openings in forms at
inconspicuous locations.
4
The Contractor shall provide means for accurately
measuring settlement In falsework during placement of
concrete, and shall provide a competent observer to
observe and correct the settlement.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of concrete

receiving applied waterproofing membranes.
9
Unless otherwise indicated, provide 20x20 mm
chamfer on all exposed corners and edges of concrete.
10 Form openings, chases, offsets, recesses, keyways,

grooves, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the
work.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placi ng concrete.
11
12 Retighten forms end bracing before placing concrete,

to p revent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
13 Coat contact surfaces of forms with specified form

release agent approved by the Engineer, according to the
manufacturer's written instructions, before placing
reinforcement Petrol oil m ay be used.
Where it is required to use Internal ties and spacers,
their type, spacing and use shall be to the approval of the
Engineer. In no circumstances shall these ties protrude out
of the finished concrete, all ties must be cut back into the
structural concrete and the surface made good to satisfy
the requirements of the minimum spacing and cover.
14
6.3.3.2
Falsework
Falsework and centering shall be designed to provide

the necessary rigidity to support all vertical and horizontal
loads placed upon it without settlement or deformation in
excess of the permissible tolerance for the structure given
in the Specifications.
Falsework columns shall be
supported on hardwood, concrete pads or metal bases If
the underlying ground Is liable to sink under the column
520
Screw jacks, if used, shall be designed for use wit h a

slenderness ratio not exceeding 60. The slenderness ratio
shall be taken as the ratio of t he clear distance between
effective bracing in both horizontal directions to the
diameter of the screw jack measured at the root of the
thread.
The manufacturers' certificate showing the
ultimate load capacity of the screw jack shall be submitted
with the design calculations for the felsework. If directed
by the Engineer, the Contract or shall furnish a test
certifiCate carried out at an approved independent
I aboratory.
6
Props and towers supporting forms or partially
completed structures shall be interconnected in plan
orthogonally at levels to be determined in the design.
They shall also be interconnected by diagonal bracings in
orthogonal vertical planes.
7
If the concrete is required to be post-tensioned in the
field, the fatsework shall be designed to support any
increased or readjusted loads caused by the prestressing
forces.
5.3.3.3
Embedded Items
Place and secure anchorage devices and other

embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Follow
tern plates, diagrams, instructions, and directions
furnished with items to be embedded.
5.3.3.4
Removing and Reusing Forms
General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls,

columns, and similar parts of the work, that does not
SUltanate of Oman. Srllnlt

_ _rd
_ _ _ _ _ _llaad
__&_ e_ rid
_- .;;.
g~
_
C<J
_
not
_
ruc
_
bQr
_ _....._
support weight of concrete may be removed after

cumulatively curing at not less than 10 deg.C for 24 hours
after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to
not be damaged by form-removal operations and
provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
2
The Engineer shall be notified when the Contractor
intends to remove any formwork at least 6 hours in
advance
i.
ii.
iii.
Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs,

and other structural elements that su ppons
weight of concrete in place until concrete has
achieved: At least 70 percent of 28-day design
compressive strength but not less than 7 days
after casting.
Determine compressive strength of in-place
concrete by testing representative field- or
laboratory-cured test specimens according to
ACI301.
Remove forms only if shores have been
arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
3
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in
the work.
Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherw'se
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form release agent.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and
laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure
joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for
exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by the
Engineer.
5.3.3.5
Vapor Retarders
Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor

retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturer's written instructions. Cover with fine
graded granular material or fill as specified in paragraphs
2 or3 below.
2
Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder
with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact
with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus
0 mm or minus 20 mm.
3
Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill,
moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to
elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or minus 20 mm.
i.
Place and compact a 15 mm thick layer of finegraded granular material over granular fill.
4
Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with
longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
Lap joints 150 mm and seal with manufacturer's
recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape. Cover
vapor retarder/barrier with sand cushion and compact to
depth indicated.
5.3.3.6
Construction Joints
Follow the requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge

Sub-Section
8.8
as
Construction
Specifications
complemented herein.
2
Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular
to surface plane of concrete.
3
Construction joints shall be made only where
specified in the contract documents, or shown in the
pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
4 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
horizontal joints may be made without keys, and vertical
joints shall be constructed with shear keys in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications
Article 8. 8.2.
5
All construction joints shall be cleaned of surface
laitance, curing compound, and other foreign materials
before fresh concrete is placed against the surface of the
joint. Abrasive blast or other approved methods shall be
used to clean horizontal construction joints to the extent
that clean aggregate is exposed. All construction joints
shall be flushed with water and allowed to dry to a surface
dry condition immediately prior to placing concrete.
6
Bonding and doweling to existing structures shall be
as specified In AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 8.8.3.
7
The use of expanded metal or other perforated
material is prohibited in construction joints.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main
8
reinforcement.
Continue
reinforcement
across
construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
9
Where needed. unscheduled, construction joints shall
be placed as directed by the Engineer and, if directed,
additional reinforcement steel dowels shall be placed
across the joint. Such additional steel shall be furnished
and placed at t he Contractor's expense.
10 Space vertical joints in walls as indicated, or as
11 Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh
concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened
concrete surfaces.
12 Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where
fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
13 Waterstops/Re-injectable Hoses: Provide waterstops
or re-injectable hoses in construction joints as indicated.
Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each
joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during
progress of work.
5.3.3.7
Contraction and Expansion Joints
Follow the requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge

Construction
Specifications
Sub-section
8.9
as
complemented herein.
5-21
~
~ M~nJtrv or Trnnapan &
Cotnmunicat.one
~ OGRlT
~~::Concrete and Concrete Struc tures
2
Expansion and contraction joints shall be constructed
at the locations and in accordance with the details
specified In the contract documents. Such joints include
open joints, filled joints, joints sealed with sealants or
waterstops, and joints with combinations of these features.
3
Contraction Joints in Stabs-on-Grade: Form
weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete
i nto areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as
follows:
i.
Grooved Joints: Form conttaction joints after

initial floating by grooving lind finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 3 mm. Repeat
grooving of contraction joints after applying
surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks
on concrete surfaces.
li Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with
power saws equipped wlth shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3
mm wide joints into concrete when cutt!ng
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in slabs-on-grade: After removing

4
formwork, Install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundat ion
walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
i,
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of

joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
ii.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less

than 12 mm or more than 25 mm below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants,
are indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as
practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
iii.
Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or

5
dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where
Indicated.
i.
Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat

one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint
6
Pourable sealants for placement along top edges of
contraction or filled expansion joints shall be one of the
following:
i.
Hot-poured sealants shall conform to ASTM 0

3406 (AASHTO M 282), except when the
sealant will be in contact with asphaltic

material, it shall conform to AASHTO M 301 .
ii.
5-22
Cold-poured sealant shall be silicone type, as

specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 8.9.2.4. The sealant shall
be a one-part, low-modulus silicone rubber
type w ith an ultimate elongation of 1200
percent.
iii.
6.3.3.8
Polyethylene foam strip, for use when shown

in the contract documents, shall be of
commercial quality with a continuous,
impervious, glazed top surface, suitable for
retaining the liquid sealant at the proper
elevation in the joint while hardening.
Waterstops
Install waterstops in accordance with AASHTO LRFD

Bridge Construction Specifications Sub-section 8.9.3.4.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as
2
indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in
longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of work.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in
3
construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, bonding
or mechanically fastening and firm ly pressing into place.
klstaU in longest lengths practicable.
5.3.3.9
Concrete Placement
1
General: Comply with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Sub-sections 8,6 and 8 ,7 as
complemented herein for protection from environmental
conditions during placing and curing and for handling and
placement of concrete.
2
Concrete shall be handled, placed, and consolidated
by methods that will not cause segregation of the mix and
will result in a dense homogeneous concrete that is free of
voids and rock pockets. The methods used shall not cause
displacement of reinforcing steel or other materials to be
embedded In the concrete. Concrete shall be placed and
consolidated prior to initial set and in no case more than
1.5 hours after the water was added to the mix. Concrete
shall not be re-tempered.
3
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and
complete formwork installation. reinforcing steel, and
items to be embedded or cast in. Notil'y other trades to
permit installation of their work. Concrete shall not be
placed until the condition of the reinforcement, other
embedded items, and the formwork has been inspected
and approved by the Engineer. All mortar from previous
placements. debris, and foreign materia l shall be removed
from the forms and steel prior to commencing placement.
The forms and subgrade shall be thoroughly moistened
with water immediately before concrete is placed against
them. Temporary form spreader devices may be left in
place until concrete placement precludes their need, after
which tney shall be removed.
4
Transportation: Concrete, after be'ng discharged
from the mixer, shall be transported as rapidly as possible
to its final position in the Work by agitator trucks, which
shall prevent adulteration. segregation, loss of workability
or contamination of the ingredients. The containers that
convey the concrete shall be kept clean and free from
hardened or partially hardened concrete.
Sulcunale of Oman, Stoncl&n:l 51"!~ roe>~ om for R~ & ~ridi;~ C4nJtruc:cia
Concrete for T-beam or deck girder spans

whose depth is less than 1200 mm may be
placed in one continuous operation or may be
placed in two separate operations; first, to the
top of the girder stems, end second, to
completion. For T-beam or deck girder spans
whose depth is 1200 mm or more, and unless
the falsework is non-yielding, such concrete
shall be placed in two operations, and at least
five days shall elapse after placement of stems
before the top deck slab is placed.
ii.
6
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at
Project site, or during placement, unless approved by the
Engineer.
Concrete for box girders may be placed in two

or three separate operations consisting of
bottom slab, girder stems, and top slab. In
either case, the bottom slab shall be placed
first end, unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer. the top slab shall not be placed until
the girder stems have been in place for at least
five days.
7
Placement of concrete for each section of the
structure shall be done continuously without interruption
between planned construction or expansion joints. The
delivery rate, placing sequence, and methods shall be
such that fresh concrete is always placed and consolidated
against previously placed concrete before initial set has
occurred in the previously placed concrete.
12 Placement of Box Culverts: In general, the base slab

or footings of box culverts shall be placed and allowed to
set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. For
culverts whose wall height is 1500 mm or less, the
sidewalls and top slab may be placed in one continuous
operation. For higher culvert walls, the requirements for
vert" cal members shall apply.
8
During and after placement of concrete. care shall be
taken not to damage the concrete or break the bond with
reinforcing steel. Workers shall not walk in fresh concrete
Platforms for workers and equipment shall not be
supported directly on any reinforcing steel. Once the
concrete is set, forces shall not be applied to the forms or
to reinforcing bars which project from the concrete until
the concrete is of sufficient strength to resist damage.
13 Placement of Precast Elements: The sequence of

placement for concrete in precast elements shall be such
that sound, well-consolidated concrete that is free of
settlement or shrinkage cracks is produced throughout the
member.
I.
The addition of water at the point of discharge

is prohibited and trucks shall have the water
tank completely disconnected from the drum.
ii.
The use of chutes, spouts, skips and pumps

shall be permitted if approval is obtained.
Under no circumstances shall any aluminum
pipe or other conveying equipment containing
aluminum be allowed to contact fresh concrete
when it is conveyed to its point of placement.
iii.
Method of pouring and pouring sequence shall

be submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer's approval.
Concrete exposed to sa It or brackish water shall

5
follow the requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Sub-section B. 6.6.
9
Sequence of Placement: Whenever a concrete
placement plan or schedule is specified or approved, the
sequence of placement shall conform to the plan.
14 Placing Methods: Concrete shall be placed as nearly

as possible in its final position, and the use of vibrators for
extensive shifting of the weight lmass) of fresh concret e
10 Placement of Vertical Members: Concrete for

columns, substructure and cuI vert wa II s, and other similar
vertical members shall be placed and allowed to set and
settle for a period of time before concrete for integral
horizontal members, such as caps, slabs, or footings, is
placed. Such period shall be adequate to allow completion
of settlement due to loss of bleed water end shell be not
less than 12 h for vertical members over 4500 mm in
height and not less than 30 min for members over 1500
mm but not over 4500 mm in height. When friction collars
or fa lsework brackets are mounted on such vertica I
members and unless otherwise approved, the vertical
member shall have been in place at least seven days and
shall have attained its specified strength before loads from
horizontal members are applied
11 Placement of Superstructure: Unless otherwise
permitted, no concrete shall be placed in the
superstructure until substructure forms have been
stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the
supporting substructure concrete.
15
i.
Concrete shall be placed in ho rizonta I layers of

a thickness not exceeding the capacity of the
vibrator to consolidate the concrete and merge
it with the previous I ift. In no case shall the
depth of a lift exceed 600 mm. The rate of
concrete placement shall not exceed that
assumed for the design of the forms as
corrected for the actual temperature of the
concrete being placed.
ii.
When placing operations would involve

dropping the concrete more than 1500 mm, the
concrete shall be dropped through a tube fitted
with a hopper head or through other approved
devices, as necessary to prevent segregation of
the mix and spattering of mortar on steel and
forms above the elevation of the lift being
placed.
Equipment:
i.
AU equipment used to place concrete shall be

of adequate capacity and designed and
operated so es to prevent segregation of the
mix or loss of mortar. Such equipment shall
~23
~~
Minltrv of Trnnapart & Cornmunic.otlona
DGRL1
~~<Concrete and Concrete Structures
ii.
Iii.
16
not cause vibrations that might damage the

freshly placed concrete. No equipment shall
have aluminum parts which come ln contact
with the concrete. Between uses. the marta r
coating inside of placing equipment which sets
or dries out shall be cleaned from the
equipment before use is resumed.
vii.
Chutes shall be lined with smooth watertight

material and, when steep slopes are involved,
shall be equipped with baff:es or reverses.
Vibration shall be supplemented by such

spading as is necessary to ensure smooth
surfaces and dense concrete along form
surfaces and in corners and locations
impossible to reach with the vibrators.
viii.
When approved by the Engineer, concrete for

small noncritical elements may be consolidated
by the use of suitable rods and spades.
Concrete pumps shall be operated such that a

continuous stream of concrete without air
pockets is produced. When pumping is
completed, the concrete remaining in the
pipeline, if it is to be used, shall be ejected in
such a manner that mere will be no
contamination of the concrete or separation of
the ingredients.
degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic

under vibration. Vibrators shall not be used to
transport concrete in the forms.
17
Underwater Concreting:
j,
Only concrete used in cofferdams to seal out

water may be placed under water, unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents
or specifically approved by the Engineer.
ii.
If other than concrete class 50 or 60 is to be

placed under water, the m inimum cement
content of the mix shan be increased by ten
percent to compensate for loss due to wash.
iii.
A tremie shall consist of a watertight tube

having a diameter of not less than 250 mm and
fitted with a hopper at the top. The tremies
shall be supported so as to permit free
movement of the discharge end over the entire
top surface of the work end so as to permit
rapid lowering when necessary to retard or
stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end
shall be sealed closed at the start of work so as
to prevent water from entering the tube before
the tube is filled with concrete.
Consolidation:
l.
All concrete, except concrete placed under

water and concrete otherwise exempt, shall be
consolidated
by
mechanical
vibration
Immediately after placement.
li.
Except as noted herein, vibration shall be

internal. External form vibrators may be used
for thin sections when the forms have been
designed for external vibration.
t ii.
Vibrators shall be of approved type and design

and of a size appropriate fer the work. They
shall be capable of transmitti ng vibration to the
concrete at frequencies of not less than 75 Hz.
~v.
The Contractor shall provide a sufficient

number of vibrators to properly compact each
batch of concrete immediately after it is placed
in the forms. The Contractor shall also have at
least one spare vibrator immediately available
in case of breakdown.
lv.
After placement has started, the tremie shall be

kept full of concrete to the bottom of the
hopper. If water enters the tube after
pi acement is started, the tremie shall be
withdrawn. the discharge end resealed. and the
pi acement restarted.
v.
Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to

thoroughly work the concrete around the
reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into
the corners and angles of the forms. Vibration
shall be applied at the point of deposit and In
the area of freshly deposited concrete. The
vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn out
of the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of
sufficient duration and intensity to thoroughly
consolidate the concrete but shall not be
continued so as to cause segregation. Vibration
shall not be continued at any one point to the
extent that localized areas of grout are formed.
Application of vibrators shall be at points
uniformly spaced and not farther apart than 1.5
times the radius over which the vibration Is
visibly effective.
v.
When a batch is dumped into the hopper. the

flow of concrete shall be induced by slightly
raising the discharge end, always keeping it in
the deposited concrete. The flow shall be
continuous until the work is completed. When
cofferdam struts prevent lateral movement of
trem:es, one tremie shall be used in each bay.
vi.
Concrete pumps used to place concrete under

water shall include a device at the end of the
discharge tube to seal out water while the tube
is first being filled with concrete. Once the flow
of concrete is started, the end of the discharge
tube shall be kept full of concrete and below
the surface of the deposited concrete until
placement is completed.
6.3.3.10
Vibration shall not be applied either directly to,

or through the reinforcement, or to sections or
layers of concrete which have hardened to the
When hot weather conditions exist that would impair

quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying
with ACI 305 and as specified.
vi.
s.:u
Hot-Weather Concreting
Sultonete of Orner
2
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete
temperature at time of placement to below 25 deg C.
Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used
to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Hand-finishing methods may be used if

approved by the Engineer for short bridges 15
m or less in length or for irregu Ia r areas where
the use of a machine would be impractical.
3
Concrete temperature shall not exceed 32 degree C
and the temperature differential shall not exceed 25
degree C.
4
No concreting operation shall be carried out at
ambient temperature of 40 deg. Cor more.
5
For bridge decks that are located over or adjacent to
salt water the maximum temperature of the concrete at
time of placement shall be 27 deg. C.
6
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it
becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed
the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
7
Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just
before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform
without puddles or dry areas.
B
Use water-reducing retarding admixture when
required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other
adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Engineer.
Shade mixing plant and trucks, aggregates, water
9
tank, and cement silo.
10 Paint the mixing plant, trucks, water tank, and
cement silo with white or reflective paint
11
Insulate the water tank and supply piping.
12 Protect concrete during pouring, and formwork, from

direct sunlight by use of shades and keep shades in
position for 7 days from time of pouring, .
13 Concrete placing shall be completed as quickly as
possible to reduce transit time.
14 Curing of exposed concreta shall be immediately
carried out.
6.3.3.11
Finishing Plastic Concrete
General: Unless otherwise specified in the contract

documents. after concrete has been consoli datad and
prior to the application of cure, all surfaces of concrete
that are not placed against forms shall be struck-off to the
planned elevation or slope and the surface finished by
floating with a wooden float sufficiently to seal the surface.
While the concrete is still in a workable state, all
construction and expansion joints shall be carefully tooled
with an edger. Joint filler shall be left exposed.
2
Roadway Surface Finish: All bridge decks. approach
slabs, and other concrete surfaces for use by traffic shall
be finished to a smooth skid-resistant surface in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Sub-section 8.10.2 for the following
sequence of operations:
i.
Striking-off and floating, Article 8.10.2.1. Bridge

decks or top slabs of structures serving as
finished pavements shell be finished using
approved power-driven finishing machines.
ii.
Straightedging. Sub-section 8.1 0.2.2.
i'i.
Texturing, Sub-section 8.10 2.3
iv.
Surface testing and correction, Sub-section

8.10.2.4.
Pedestrian Walkway Surface Finish: comply with

3
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Sub
section 8 10.3.
4
Troweled and Brushed Finish: comply with AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Sub-section
8.104.
5
Surface under Bearings: comply with AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Construction Specifications Sub-section 8.10.5.
6.3.3.12
Curing Concrete
All newly placed concrete shall be cured so as to

prevent loss of water by use of one or more of the
methods specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Sub-section 8.11. Unless otherwise
specified in the contract documents, curing shall
commence immediately after the free water has left the
surface and finishing operations are completed. If the
surface of the concrete begins to dry before the selected
curing method can be applied, the surface of the concrete
shall be kept moist by a fog spray applied so as not to
damage the surface.
2
Curing shall continue uninterrupted for seven days
except for when pouolans in excess of ten percent, by
weight (massl, of the Portland cement are used in the mix.
When such pouolans are used, the curing period shall be
ten days.
3
For other than top slabs of structures serving as
finished pavements, the above curing periods may be
reduced and curing terminated when test cylinders cured
under the same conditions as the structure Indicate that
concrete strengths of at least 70 percent of that specified
have been reached but not In any case less than 3 days.
4
When directed by the Engineer during periods of hot
weather, water shall be applied to concrete surfaces being
cured by the liquid membrane method or by the forms-inplace method. until the Engineer determines that a cooling
affect is no longer required. Such application of water will
be paid for as extra work.
5
Methods:
i.
Forms-in Place Method: Formed surfaces of

concrete may be cured by retaining the forms
in place for the required time without
loosening.
ii.
Water Method: Concrete surface shall be kept

continuously wet by ponding, spraying, or
covering with absorptive materials that are
kept continuously and thoroughly wet.
5-25
~
~
Minitrv of TrnnapOtt &
Ccunrnuntcnt~on. OGRlT
~
~<::concrete and Concrete Structures
iii.
iv.
v.
Liquid Membrane Curing Compound Method:

The liquid membrane method shall not be
used on surfaces where a rubbed finish is
required or on surfaces of construction joints
unless it is removed by sand blasting prior to
placement of concrete against the joint. Type 2,
white pigmented, liquid membranes may be
used only on the surfaces of bridge decks. on
surfaces that will not be exposed to view in the
completed work, or on surfaces where their
use has been approved by the Engineer.
Details of the application are set in AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specific;~tions Sub
section 8.11 .3.3.
Formed Finishes
2
Class F2. Formwor1c: shall be lined with a material
approved by the Englneer to provide a smooth finish of
uniform appearance. This material shall leave no stain on
the concrete and shall be so joined and fixed to its backing
so that it imparts no blemishes. It sh11ll be of the same
type and obtained from only one source for any one
structure.
The Contractor shall make good any
imperfections in the finish as directed by the Engineer.
Internal t ies and embedded metal parts will not be
permitted unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Class F3. I rregularities in the finish shall be no
greater than those resulting from the use of wrought thick
square edged boards arranged in a uniform pattern. The
finish is intended to be left as struck. Imperfections such
$2.6
5
Permanently exposed concrete surfaces to classes F1,
F2 and F3 finish shall be protected from rust marks and
stains of aU kinds. Internal ties and embedded metal parts
5.3.3.14
Tolerances
In-Situ Construction
i.
Length: The horizontal and vertical dimensions

of in-situ concrete members, but not crosssections. shall be within the following
tolerances:
Lenathlmml
Tolerancalmml
Up to 3000
:1:3
3001-4500
:1:6
Vertical lirtes out of plane :1: 5 + (1 for every 3000 out

of true line)
il.
Steam or RadiantHeat Curing Method: This

method may be used only for precast concrete
members manufactured in established plants.
Details of the application are set in AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Subsectlon 8.11.3.5.
Class F1 . This class of surface finish denotes a

special finish required from aesthetic considerations as
stated in the Special Specification.
4
Class F4. No special requirements. To be used ln the
earth-face or below ground structures if no waterproofing
membrane will be applied.
Waterproof Cover Method: This method shall

consi st of covering the surface with a
waterproof sheet material so as to prevent
moisture loss from the concrete. This method
may be used only when the covering can be
to
prevent
secured
adequately
moisture loss. Details of the application are set
in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Sub-section 8. 11 ,3.4.
6
Bri dge Decks; The top surfaces of bridge decks shall
be cured by a combination of the liquid membrane curing
compound method and the water method. The liquid
membrane shall be Type 2, white pigmented, and shall be
applied from finishing bridges progressively and
immediately after finishing operations are complete on
each portion of the deck. The water cure shall be applied
not later than 4 h alter completion of deck finishing or, for
portions of the decks on which finishing is completed.
5.3.3.13
as fins and surface discoloration shall, however, be made

good as and when required by the Engineer,
Cross-Section: Slab and wall thicknesses and

the cross sectional dimensions of beams,
columns, piers etc.. shall be within the
following tolerances:
Member Dimensions lmml
:1:6
501 -750
:1: 10
Additional for every subsequent

100mm
2
Tolerance lmml
Up to 500
1mm
Precast Construction
i.
Length: The horizontal and vertical dimensions

of members. but not cross-sections, shall be
within the following tolerances:
Langth (mml
Toleranca(mml
Up to 3000
3000 and over
:1:5
ii,
Cross-Section: Slab and wall thicknesses and

the cross-sectional dimensions of beams,
columns. piers etc., shall be within the
Member Dlmenalons lmm)
Tolerance lmml
Up to 500
:1:6
501-750
:1:9
Additional for every subsequent

250mm
3mm
3
Squareness: For insitu and precast construction the
tolerance between the short side and tl\e long side shall
be within the following limits:
Member Size (mm)
Tolerance (mm)
Up to 3000
:1:3
3000 end over
:1:6
4
Straightness: For in-situ and precast construction the
straightness or bow, defined as deviation from the
intended line, shall be within the following tolerances:
Member Length lmm)
Tolerances lmm)
Up~~oo
~3
3000 and over
~6
5
Alignment: The alignment of members shall be
within the following tolerances:
Columns and piers.
t :400 of column or pier

length.
Others.
1:600 of length
6
Flatness: The flatness of a surface, measured with a
straight edge of 1.5 meter, shall be not greater than 6 mm
at any point.
7
Twist: Twist, measured as the deviations of any
corner from the plane containing the other three corners,
shall be within the following limits:
Member Length lmm)
Toletancelmm)
Up to 6000
Above6000
12
5.3.4
Method of Measurement, Basis of

Payment and Bill of Quantities
No separate items are measured or included in the

Sill of Quantities for any part of Sub-section 5.3 and no
separate payment wilt be made therefore. The costs are
deemed to be covered in the rates and prices In the Sill of
Quantities for Sub-sections 5.1 and 5.2.
5.4
Prestressed Concrete Structures
5.4.1
Description
5.4.1.1
Scope
This Sub-section specifies the requirements for

prestressing precast or cast-in-situ concrete by furnishing,
placing, and tensioning of prestressing steel. It includes
prestressing by either the pre-tensioning or post
tensioning methods or by a combination of these methods.
2
This work includes furnishing and installation of any
appurtenant items necessary for the particular
prestressing system to be used, including but not limited
to ducts, anchorage assemblies. and grout used for
pressure grouting ducts.
5.4.1.2
3
Pretensioning: The process when the prestressing
steel is tensioned against independent anchorages before
the concrete is placed round it. The prestressing strand or
tendons are stressed prior to casting the concrete. After
the concrete has attained the required strength, the
prestressing force is released from the external
anchorages and transferred, by bond, Into the concrete.
4
Combined Method: Part of the reinforcement is
pretensioned and part post-tensioned.
5
Cable end Tendon: Cable and tendon both refer to a
bundle of prestressing steel of the same type and size
bundled together to be contained within a duct and
stressed, individually or collectively, from the same
anchorage.
6
Prestressing System: A proprietary system of
applying prestress and includes anchorages, couplers and
jacks but does not necessarily include prestressing steel
and cable ducts.
5.4.1.3
References

2
PostTensioning: The process when the prestressing
steel is tensioned after the concrete has hardened. The
tendons are installed in voids or ducts within the concrete
and are stressed and anchored against the concrete after
the development of the required concrete strength. As a
final operation under this method, the voids or ducts are
pressure-grouted.
and
AASHTO 2008
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction

Specifications, 2nd Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHT02008
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
specifications, 3rd Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHTO 1999
Guide Specifications for Design and

Construction of Segmental Concrete
Bridges, 2nd Edition.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTMI:
ASTM A 416/A 416 M

Specification for Steel Strand,
Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed
Concrete [AASHTO M 203).
ASTM A 421/A 421 M
Specification for Uncoated
Stress-Relieved
Steel
wi re
for
Prestressed Concrete (AASHTO M 204).
ASTM A 7221 A 722 M
Specification for Uncoated
High-Strength
Steel
Bars
for
Prestressing Concrete IAASHTO M 275).
ASTM C939
Test Method for Flow of Grout for

Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete [Flow
Cone Method).
ASTM C940
Test Method for Expansion and

Bleeding of Freshly Mixed Grouts for
Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the
Laboratory.
ASTM C1202
Test Method for Electrical Indication of

concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride ion
Penetration (AASHTO T 2n1
Definitions
Prestressing Steel: Steel wire, strand or bars used for

prestressing of concrete.
Highway
British Standards:
BS4447
Specification for the Performance of

Prestressing Anchorages for PostTensioned Construction
S-27
~~
M:.nJatrv of Trnnaport & Communica1Jona DGRLT
BS EN 5896
5.4.1.4
Specification for High Tensile Steel

Wire and Strand for the Prestressing of
Concrete.
Enginaer and correcti on by the Contractor of

the drawings without delaying the work.
iv.
Shop drawings for posttensioning and other

embedments, such as expansion joints,
bearings, and anchor bolts submitted by
suppliers shall be reviewed and approved by
the Engineer for conformance with the design
concept and compliance with the design
drawings and Specifications.
v.
Where contract-document information on post

tensioning systems is modified by the
Contractor, or where contract drawings do not
provide detailed dimensional information on
the post. tens'oning system, it is the
Contractors responsibility to coordinate the
placement of the post-tensioning system with
other embedments, and to correct any
Interferences created by the Contractor
suppl ied prestressing system or other
substitutions. The post-tensioning layout shall
govern the I ayout of the secondary
nonprestressed
reinforcement.
Where
necessary,
location
of
nonpre-stressed
reinforcement should be adj usted to clear
tendons, subject to the approval of the
Engi neer.
Submittals
Design:
i.
i~
Where the design for the prestressing work is

not fully detailed in the contract documents,
the Contractor shall determine the details or
type of prestressing system for use and select
materials and details conforming to this
Specification as needed to satisfy the
prestressing requirements specified. The
system selected shall provide the magnitude
and distribution of prestressi ng force and
ultimate strength required by the contract
documents without exceeding allowable
temporary stresses.
Unless otherwise shown in the contrtct
documents, all design procedures, coefficients
and allowable stresses, friction, and prestress
losses. as well as tendon spacing and
clearances, shall be In accordance with either
or both the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.
Working Drawings and Shop Drawings

i.
Where the contract documents do not include

complete details for a prestressing system and
its method of installation, or where comp!ete
details are provided in the contract documents
and the Contractor wishes t o propose any
change, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit to the Engineer working drawings of
the prestressing system proposed for use.
Fabrication or installation of prestressing
material shall not begin until the Engineer has
approved the drawings.
ii.
The working drawings of the prestressing

system shall show complete details and
substantiating calculations of the method,
materials, and equipment the Contractor
proposes to use in the prestressing operations,
including any additions or rearrangement of
reinforcing steel and any revision in concrete
dimensions from t hat specified in the contract
documents. Such details shall outline the
method and sequence of stressing and shall
include complete specifications and details of
the prestressing steel and anchoring devices,
working stresses, anchoring stresses, tendon
elongations, type of ducts, and all other data
pertaining to the prestressing operation,
including the proposed arrangement of the
prestressing steel in the members.
ilL
S28
Working drawings shall be submitted

sufficient ly in advance of the start of the
affected work to allow time for review by the
lntegi'Bted Drawings: Where required by the contract

3
documents, i n addition to all required working drawings,
the Contractor shall prepare composite pl aci ng drawings
to scele and in sufficient detail to show the relative
positions of all items that are to be embedded i n t he
concrete, and their embedment depth, for the portions of
the structure that ere to be prestressed. Such embedded
items shall i nclude the prestressing ducts, vents,
anchorage reinforcement and hardware, reinforcing steel,
anchor bolts, earthquake restrainers, deck joint seal
assembli es, drainage systems, utility conduits, and other
such items. Such drawings shall be i n sufficient detail to
confirm that there will be no conflict between the planned
positions of any embedded items and that concrete cover
will be adequate.
4
contractor certifying that each of the following items
complies with specified requirements:
i.
Prestressing steel
ii.
Prestressing system.
iii.
Records for the anchorage device accepts nee

test as specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Coostruction Specificati ons Article 10.3.2 3.12.
5.4.2
Materials
6.4.2.1
Concrete
Concrete for prestressed const ruction shall be

produced and supplied in accordance with the relevant
requi rements of Section 5.1 ~cQI\crete Materials and
M ixes.
Sultr>nntll of Oman Slandar1 5!'1'Cifoations 101' ~ & Bridge Con,tructia
5.4.2.2
Reinforcing Steel
Non-prestressed reinforcing steel shall be supplied,

cut, bent and fixed in accordance with the relevant
requirements of Section 5.2 "Reinforcing Steel".
5.4.2.3
Prestressing Steel
Steel Wire: Steel wire shall comply with ASTM A

421/A 421 M (AASHTO M 2041. or with BS 5896.
2
Stress-Relieved SevenWire Strand: StressRelieved
Seven-Wire Strand shall comply with ASTM A 416/A416 M
low relaxation [AASHTO M 203) or with BS 5896 low
rela)(ation.
3
High Tensile Steel Bar; High tensile steel bars for
prestressed concrete shell comply with ASTM A 722/A 722
M (AASHTO M 275) or with BS 4486.
5.4,2,4
Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers
Posttensioning anchorages and couplers shall be In

accordance with the requirements of AASHTO LRFO
Bridge Construction Specifications Article 10.3.2.
2
Prestressing components, such as cable ducts,
a nchoreges and couplers, shall be of approved types
suitable for types of cables and bars used.
3
All anchorages and couplers shall develop at least 96
percent of the actual ultimate strength of the prestressing
steel, when tested in an unbonded state, without
exceeding anticipated set
4
The coupling of tendons sha~ l not reduce the
elongation at rupture below the requirements of the
tendon itself. Couplers and/or coupler components shell
be enclosed in housings long enough to permit the
necessary movements. Couplers for tendons shall be used
only at locations specifically indicated in the contract
documents and/or approved by the Engineer. Couplers
shall not be used at points of sharp tendon curvature
5
If the Engineer Is not satisfied with the testing
certificates submitted for the prestressing system, he may
request post-tensioning anchorages and couplers to be
tested in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Article 10.3.2 at no extra cost.
5.4.2.5
EpoqBonding Agents for Precast Segmental

Construction
Epoq bonding agents for match cast joints shall be

thermosetting 100 percent solid compositions that do not
contain solvent or any nonreactive organic ingredient
except for pigments required for coloring. Epoxy bonding
agents shall be of two components, a resin and a hardener.
The two components shall be distinctly pigmented, so that
mixing produces a third color similar to the concrete in the
segments to be joined, and shall be packaged in preportioned, labeled, ready-to-use containers.
2
Epoxy bonding agents shall be insensitive to damp
conditions during application and, after curing, shall
exhibit high bonding strength to cured concrete, good
water resistivity, low creep characteristics, and tensile
strength greater than the concrete. In addition, the epoxy

bonding agents shall function as a lubricant during the
joining of the match cast segments, as a filler to accurately
match the surface of the segments being joined, and as a
durable, watertight bond at the joint.
3
The physical, chemical and mechanical properties of
epoxy bonding agents shall satisfy the recommendations
of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications or the
Federation lnternationale de Ia Precontrai nte (FI PI
"Proposals for a standard for acceptance tests and
verifications of epoxy bonding agents for segmental
construction".
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
Placement of Ducts
Ducts shall be rigidly supported at the proper

locations In the forms by ties to reinforcing steel which are
adequate to prevent displacement during concrete
placement Supplementary support bars shall be used
where needed to maintain proper alignment of the duct.
Holddown ties to the forms shall be used when the
buoyancy of the ducts in the fluid concrete would lift the
reinforcing steel.
2
Polyethylene duct and metal duct for longitudinal or
transverse post-tensioning in the flanges shall be
supported at Intervals not to exceed 600 mm. Polyethylene
duct in webs for longitudinal post-tensioning shall be tied
to stirrups at intervals not to exceed 600 mm, and metal
duct for longitudinal posttensioning in webs shall be tied
to stirrups at intervals not to exceed 1200 mm.
3
Joints between sections of duct shall be coupled with
positive connections which do not result in engle changes
at the joints and will prevent the intrusion of cement paste.
Joints in adjacent ducts shell be staggered by at least 300
mm.
4
After placing of ducts, and reinforcement and
forming is complete, an inspection shall be made to locate
possible duct damage. All unintentional holes or openings
in the duct shall be repaired prior to concrete placing.
5
Grout openings and vents shall be securely anchored
to the duct and to either the forms or to reinforcing steel
to prevent displacement during concrete-placing
operations.
6
After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall
at all times be sealed as necessary to prevent the entry of
water or debris.
7
Where members are made up of precast units
stressed together, the ducts in the joints between the units
shall be in perfect alignment and joined securely so as to
allow unimpeded cable threading and pulling and prevent
the ingress of the epoxy mortar used for gluing the several
units together before stressing. Details of such joints shall
first be approved by the Engineer. The tolerance in the
location of the sheath shall be plus or minus 3 mm.
8
Additionally the following shall apply:
~
~
MCniatrv of TrAnspOrt & Communication
~ OGRLT
i.
Entrance and exit angles of tendon paths at

anchorages and/or at faces of concrete shall be
within 3 degrees of desired angle measured
in any direction and any deviations in the
alignment are accomplished with smooth
transitions without any kinks.
ii.
Angle changes at duct joints shall not be

greater than 3 degrees in any direction and
must be accomplished with smooth transitions
without any kinks.
iii.
Locate anchorages within 3 mm of desired

position laterally and 25 mm along the tendon
except that minimum cover requirements shall
be maintained.
iv.
Position anchorage confinement reinforcement

in the form of spirals, multip:e Ushaped bars
or links to be properly centered around the
duct and to start within 12 mm of the back of
the main anchor plate.
v.
If conflicts exist between the reinforcement and

post-tensioning duct, position the post
tensioning duct and adjust the reinforcement
locally with the Engineer's approval.
pressurize t he tendon t o 345 kPa and lock.off the outside

air source. Record pressure loss for 1 mi nute. A pressure
loss of 170 kPa is acceptable for tendons having a length
of equal to or less than 45 m and a pressure loss of 100
kPa Is acceptable for tendons longer than 45 m. If the
pressure loss exceeds the allowable, repai r the leaking
connections using methods approved by the Engineer and
re--test.
13 The ends of all ducts shall be sealed and protected until
tile tendon is threaded through and t he stressing
operations are commenced. Where tendons i n sheaths or
sheath on its own are left exposed to atmosphere, rust
inhi bitors shaU be used as per the maker' s specification to
prevent rusting and corrosion of t he Inside of sheaths.
They shal be flushed with clean water before the tendons
are grouted. The Contractor is responsible for carrying
out these measures at his own expense
6.4.3.2
1
9
Ducts shall be kept free of any maner detrimental to
the bond between the sheath and the grout and. except for
material sealing a sheath joint, between the sheath and
the concrete
10 All ducts for continuous structures shall be supplied
with outlets at the high and low points of the duct profile,
except where the profile changes are small, as ln
continuous slabs, and at additional locations as specified
in lhe contract documents. Low-point outlets shall remain
open until grouting is started.
11 Upon completion of concrete placement, the
Contractor shall prove that the post-t ensioning ducts are
free and clear of any obstructions or damage and are able
to accept the intended post-tensioning tendons by passing
a torpedo through the ducts. The torpedo shall have the
same cross-sectional shape as the duct. and 6 mm smaller
a1J around than the clear nominal inside dimensions of the
duct. No deductions shall be made to the torpedo section
dimensions for tolerances aDowed in the manufacture or
fixing of the ducts. For straight ducts. a torpedo at least
600 mm long shall be used. For curved ducts, the length
shall be determined so that when both ends touch the
outermost wall of the duct. the torpedo is 6 mm clear of
the innermost wall. If tile torpedo will not travel
completely through the duct, the Engineer shal I reject the
member, unless a workable repair can be made to clear
the duct. to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Upon
completion of the repairs, the torpedo shall pass through
the duct easily, by hand, without resorting to excessive
effort or mechanical assistance.
12 Before stressing and grouting internal or external
tendons, l nstal.l all grout caps. inlets and outlets and test
the tendon with compressed air to determine if duct
connections require repair. In the presence of the Engineer,
530
Placement of Prestressing Steel
General:
L
All wlres or strands stressed at the same time

shall be taken from the same parcel. Each
cable shell be tagged with its number and the
coil number of the steel used.
ii.
Tendons shah not be welded within the length

to bo tensi oned and, unless other methods of
cuning are approved by the Engineer, tendons
shall be sawn or cropped using an abrasive
disc: cutter.
iii.
Tendons sha~ be built into the work strictly in

accordance with the system which is being
employed.
lv.
Tendons shall not be kinked or twisted and

Individual wi res or strands shall be readily
identifiable at each of the members No strand
which has become unravelled shall be used in
the work.
Placement for Pretensioning:

I.
Prestressing steel shall be accurate:y installed

in the forms and held In place by the stressing
jack or temporary anchors and, when tendons
are to be draped, by hold down devices. The
hold-down devices used at aMpoints of change
In slope of tendon trajectory shall be of an
approved low-friction type,
ii.
Prestressing steel shall not be removed from

its protective packaging until i mmediately prior
to installation In the forms and placement of
conc:rete. Openings i n the packagi ng shall be
resealed as necessary to protect the unused
steel. While exposed. the steel shall be
protected as needed to prevent corrosion.
Placement for Post Tensioning:

l.
All prestressing steel preassembled in ducts

and installed prior to the placement of concrete
shall be accurately placed and held in position
during concrete placement
Sultanate of Oman. Stond

_ __
d _sP<
...__ _ _"'
_ R_aod
_ &
_B
_ n_d;o
..;;..._
e o_rs
_ t_ructJCI
_ _ _'"'"
When the prestressing steel is installed after

the concrete has been placed, the Contractor
shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Engineer that the ducts are free of water and
debris immediately prior to installation of the
steel. The total number of strands in an
individual tendon may be pulled into the duct
as a unit, or the individual strand may be
pulled or pushed through the duct.
iv.
When steam curing is used, unless anchorage

systems mandate its Installation, steel for post
tensioning shall not be installed until the steam
curing is completed.
v.
Such tendons shall be protected against

corrosion by means of a corrosion inhibitor
placed in the ducts or on the steel, or shall be
stressed and grouted within seven days after
steam curing.
i~ .
Anchorage devices or blockout templates for

anchorages shall be set and held so that their
axis coincides with the axis of the tendon and
anchor plates are normal in all directions to the
tendon.
vi.
iv.
The prestressing steel shall be distributed so

that the force in each girder stem is equal or as
required by the contract documents, e)(cept as
provided herein .
Whenever electric welding is performed on or

near members containing prestressing steel,
the welding ground shall be attached directly
to the steel being welded. All prestressing steel
and hardware shall be protected from weld
spatter or other damage.
ii.
v.
For box girders with more than two girder

stems, at the Contractor's option, the
prestressing force may vary up to five percent
from the theoretical required force per girder
stem provided the required total force in the
superstructure is obtai ned and the force is
distributed symmetrically about the centerline
of the typ:cal section.
Protection of Steel after Installation:

i.
fi.
Prestressing steel used In post tensioned

concrete members that is not grouted within
the time limit specified below, shall be
continuously protected against rust or other
corrosion by means of a corrosion inhibitor
placed in the ducts or directly applied to the
steel. The prestressing steel shall be so
protected until grouted or encased in concrete.
Prestressing steel installed and tensioned in
members after placing and curing of the
concrete and grouted within the time limit
specified below will not require the use of a
corrosion inhibitor described herein and rust
which may form during the interval between
tendon installation and grouting will not be
cause for rejection of the steel.
The permissible interval between tendon
installation and grouting without use of a
corrosion inhibitor for various exposure
conditions shall be taken as follows:
Very Damp Atmosphere or over saltwater
(Humidity> 70 percent)
7 days
Moderate Atmosphere (Humidity from 40
percent to 70 percent)
15 days
Very Dry Atmosphere (Humidity < 40
percent)
20 days
iii.
After tendons are placed in ducts, the openings

at the ends of the ducts shall be sealed to
prevent entry of moisture.
5.4.3.3
Placement of Anchorages
The Contractor is responsible for the proper

placement of all materials according to the design
documents of the Engi near and the requirements
stipulated by the anchorage device supplier. The
Contractor shall exercise all due care and attention in the
placement of anchorage hardware, reinforcement,
concrete and consolidation of concrete in anchorage zones.
2
Modifications to the local zone details verified under
provisions of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
Article 5.10.9.7.3 and AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 10.3.2.3, 'Special Anchorage Device
Acceptance Test', shall be approved by both the Engineer
and the anchorage device supplier.
5.4.3.4
Identification and Testing
All wire, strand, or bars to be shipped to the site shall

be assigned a (ot number and tagged for identification
purposes. Anchorage assemblies to be shipped shall be
likewise identified.
2
Before approval, at least two samples of the
prestressing steel shall be tested at the Contractor's
expense, at an approved independent laboratory for
chemical composition. mechanical strength, relaxation
and physical characteristics.
3
Subsequently, each lot of wire or bars and each reel
of strand reinforcement shall be accompanied by a
manufacturer's certificate of compliance, a mill certificate,
and a test report. The mill certificate and test report shall
include:
i.
Chemical composition (not required for strand),
ii.
Cross-sectional area,
iii.
Yield and ultimate strengths,
iv.
Elongation at rupture,
v.
Modulus of elasticity, and
vi.
Stress strain curve for the actual prestressing

steel intended for use.
All values certified shall be based on test values and

nominal sectional areas of the material being certified
!5-31
~
~
Minlt<V or Trnnopart &
../".~<:concrete and
Cornm~nic.,tiooe
OGRL T
Concrete Structures
4
The Contractor shall furnish to the Englneer for
verification testing samples sele<:ted at random from each
lot as follows. The actual strength of the prestressing steel
shall not be less than specified by the applicable ASTM
Standard stated in Paragraph 5.4.2.3.
i.
Pretensioning Tendons: one sample at least

1500 mm long shall be furnished il'l accordance
with the requirements of Sub-Sectiol'l 9.1 of
ASTM A416/A 416M.
i~
PostTensloning Tendons: for 20 tonnes, or

portion thereof, lot of material used in the
work;
For wires not requiring heading: sufficient
length to make up one parallel-lay cable 1500
mm long consisting of the same number of
wires as the cable to be furnished.
type peckaglng material, or when permitted by the

Engineer. may be applied directly to the steel. Packaging
or forms damaged from any cause shall be immediately
replaced or restored to original condition.
3
The shipping package or form sl!all be clearly marked
with a statement that the package contains high-strength
prestressing steel, and the type of corrosion lnh ibitor used,
including the date packaged.
All anchorages, end fittings, couplers, and exposed
4
tendons, which will not be encased in concrete or grout in
the completed work, shall be permanently protected
against corrosion.
5
For strand to be furnished with linings: 1500

mm between near ends of fittings.
Corrosion Inhibitor:
I.
The corrosion inhibitor shall have no

deleterious effe<:t on the steel or concrete or
bond strength of steel to concrete or grout.
ii.
Corrosion inhibitor shall consist of a vapor

phase inhib;tor (VPI) powder conforming to the
provisions of Federal Specification MILP
3420F87 or as otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
iii.
When approved, water soluble oil may be used

on tendons as a corrosion inhibitor.
For bars to be furnished with threoded ends

and nuts: 1500 mm between threads at ends.
Anchorages:
I.
li.
Before approval, at least two anchoreges shell

be test ed at the Col'ltractor's expense, at an
approved laboratory to BS 4447. Subsequently,
the Engineer may require additional samples,
selected at random from materials on site, to
be similarly tested.
For each anchorage type used in the Works, t he
characteristic value of anchorage efficiency,
determined in accordance with BS 4447, shall
be not less than 90%.
6
For prestressing systems previously tested and
approved on projects having the same tendon
configurstion. the Engineer may waive t he anchorage
testing.
6.4.3.6
Ducts formed by sheath left in place shall be a type

t hat w ill not permit the intrusion of cement paste. They
shall transfer bond stresses as required and shall retain
shape under the weight (mass) of the concrete and shall
have sufficient st rength to maintain their correct
alignment without visible wobble during placement of
concrete.
2
7
Epoxy Bonding Agel'lls: Epoxy bonding agents shall
be tested for and satisfy t he requirements of all the tests
listed i n the recommendations of FIP "Proposal for a
standard for acceptance tests and verification of epoxy
bonding agents for segmental construction".
5.4.3.5
ti-32
Metal Ducts:
i.
Sheathing for ducts shall be metal. except as

provided herein. Such ducts shall be
galvanized ferrous met al and shall be
fabricated with either welded or interlocked
seams. Galvanizing of welded seams wiD not
be required.
ii.
Rigid ducts shall hava smooth inner walls and

shall be capable of being curved to t he proper
configuration without crimping or flattening.
iii.
Semi-rigid ducts shall be corrugated and, when

tendons ara to be inserted after the concrete
has been placed, their m inimum wall thickness
shall be as follows: 0.45 mm for ducts less than
or equal to 65 mm diameter 0.60 mm for ducts
greater than 65 mm diameter.
iv.
When bar tendons 11re preassembled with such

ducts, t he duct thickness shaU not be less than
0.25mm.
Protection of Prestressing Steel
All prestressing steel shall be protected agai nst

physical damage and rust or other results of corrosion at
all t imes from manufacture to grouting. Presuessing steel
shall also be free of deleterious material such as grease,
oil, wax or paint. Prestressing steel that has sustained
physical damage at any time shall be rejected. The
development of pitting or other results of corrosion, ot her
than rust stain, shall be cause for reje<:tion.
2
Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or
shipping forms for the protection of the strand against
physical damage and corrosion during shipping and
st orage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other
results of coll'osion shall be placed in the package or form,
or shalt be incorporated In a corrosion inhibitor carrier-
Duct s
Plastic Ducts:
I.
For locations In saltwater environment, plast ic

duct mat erial shall be considered and is
recommended.
Sultonnt.. of Ornan, Standord Spoclfauons for RG.Jd & Bridge Conau~
ii.
Corrugated plastic duct to be completely

embedded In concrete shall be constructed
from either polyethylene or polypropylene. The
minimum acceptable radius of curvature shall
be established by the duct supplier according
to standard test methods. The duct shall have a
thickness as below:
Duct Shape
Flat
Duct Diameter
Duct Thickness
in millimeters
in millimeters
any size
2.0
Round
23
2.0
Round
60
2.0
Round
75
2.5
Round
85
2.5
Round
100
3.0
Round
115
3.5
Round
130
4.0
Round
145
4.0
iii.
Ducts shall have a white coating on the outside

or shall be of white material with ultraviolet
stabilizers added.
iv.
Polyethylene duct shall be fabricated from

resins maeting or exceeding the requirements
of ASTM D 3350 with a cell classification of
345464A.
v.
Polypropylene duct shall be fabricated from

resins meeting or exceeding the requirements
of ASTM D 4101 with a cell classification range
of PP0340B14541to PP0340B67884.
vi.
Use resin containing antioxidant(s) with a

minimum Oxidation Induction Time (OITJ
according to ASTM D 3895 of not less than 20
minutes. The OIT test shall be performed on
samples taken from the finished product.
vii.
Rigid smooth black polyethylene ducts for use

where the tendon Is not embedded in concrete
shall be rigid pipe manufactured from 100
percent virgin polyethylene resin meeting the
requirements of ASTM D 3350 with a minimum
cell class of 344464C. A resin containing
antioxidant(s) with a minimum oxidation
induction time (OIT) according to ASTM D 3895
of not less than 40 min shall be used. The DIT
test shall be performed on samples taken from
the finished product. The duct shall be
manufactured with a dimensional ratio (DRI of
17.0 as established by either ASTM D 3350 or
ASTM F 714 as appropriate for the
manufacturing process used.
4
Duct Area: The provisions of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications, Article 5.4.6.2, 'Size of Ducts,' shall
apply.
5
Duct Fittings:
i.
Coupling and transition linings for ducts

formed by sheathing shall be of either ferrous
or
metal
polyolefin
(polyethylene
polypropylene), and shall be air and watertight
and of sufficient strength to prevent distortion
or displacement of the ducts during concrete
placement and/or tendon grouting.
ii.
All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be

provided with pipes or other suitable
connections at each end of the duct for the
injection of grout after prestressing. As
specified in Article 5.4.3.l(10), ducts shall also
be provided with ports for venting or grouting
at high points and for draining at intermediate
low points.
iii.
Vent and drain pipes shall be at least 20 mm

diameter for strand and at least 12 mm
diameter for singleba r tendons and three or
four strand flat duct tendons. Connection to
ducts shall be made with metallic or plastic
structural fasteners. The vents and drains shall
be mortar tight, taped as necessary, and
constructed with either mechanical or shrink
wrap connections. Vents and drains shall
provide means for injection of grout through
the vents and for sealing to prevent leakage of
grout.
5.4.3.7
Grout
Grout shall be in accordance with the requirements

of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Subsection 10.9.
2
Grouts may be either a unique design for tha project
or supplied in a prebagged form by a grout manufacturer.
Unless otherwise directed or agreed as a result of
3
grouting trials, uniquely designed grouts shall consist only
of ordinary Portland cement and water. The watercement
ratio shall be as low as possible consistant with necessary
workability and under no circumstances be higher than
0.45 and not be subject to bleeding in excess of 2 percent
after 3 hours, or 4 percent maximum. When measured at
18 degrees C in a covered glass cylinder approximately
100 mm water shall be reabsorbed after 24 hours.
4
Grout shall be mixed for a minimum of two minutes
and until a uniform consistency is obtained.
The
pumpability of the grout may be determined in
accordance with the US Corps of Engineers Method CAD
C79 in which case the efflux time of the grout sample
Immediately after mixing shall not be less than 11 seconds.
5
Admixture containing chlorides or nitrates sha II not
be used. Other admixtures may be used only with the
written permission of the Engineer and shall be applied
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's Instruction.
6
The design for grout mix shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C 49 for longitudinal change. Each
design mix and each batch mix shall be tested for vertical
dimensional change.
Daily field testing of tha grout for the following
7
properties shall be required:
5-33
~~
M nlatrv
or Trnnaport S.
Communieationa DGRtT
i.
Fluidity to ASTM C 939 or the modified test

described
in
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
construction Specification Table 10.9.32,
H.
Bleed at 3 h to ASTM C 940 es modified in

AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
construction
Specification Table 10.9.3-2.
iii.
Permeability to ASTM C1202 (AASHTO T 277).
8
Manufacturers of pre-bagged post-tensioning grout
shal l submit for approval certified test reports from an
audited and Independent Cement Concrete Research
Laboratory (CCRLI which shows the material meets all the
requirements specified herein.
m.
Documentary proof shall be provided

confirming that all jacks have been fully
overhauled and checked by an agent approved
by the manufacturer of the equipment. Each
jack shan be accompanied by a test certificate
indicating that it has been tested and calibrated
by the manufacturer or by an approved testing
laboratory up to a load equal to the full
capacity of the jack wit hin a period of six
months prior to t he commencement of
prestressing.
iv.
The jacking system shil'll provide an

independent means by which the tendon
elongation can be measured The pressure
gage shall have an accu rate reading dial at
l east 150 mm in diameter or a digital display,
and each jack and its gage shall be calibrated
as a unit with the cyli nder eKtension in the
approxi mate position that it will be at final
jacking force, and shall be accompanied by a
certified calibration chart or curve.
v.
AU gages, load cells, dynamometers and other

devices used for measuring the stressing force
shaU have an accuracy of within plus or minus
1.5 percent. Pressure gages shall have a
capacity and calibrated cell such that the
work' ng pressure required to stress the
tendons to the fully stated l oad lies within the
central half of the range of the gage.
vl.
Each gage shall have a cali bration certificate

Issued by an approved test laboratory. All
pressure gages shall be so constructed that
they may be calibrated. either directly by an
approved
testing
laboratory,
or
by
compressing with a meter gage which has
itself been calibrated by an approved testing
laboratory.
vii.
All pressure gages shaD be re-calibrated before

use and at int ervals of 14 days during the
prestressing operation.
The Engineer w ill
order re-calibration of any pressure gage at any
time should he have reason to suspect damage
to or faulty operation of the gage.
vlil
The accuracy of ell prestressing and load

measuring equipment shan be checked
whenever requi red by the Engineer.
The
Contractor shall provide a rig suitable in the
opinion of the Engineer, for all checking and
calibration of any jacking system consisting of
j ecks end associated load devices, pressure
gages and dynamometers.
9
Preapproved pre-bagged grout shall be milCed in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
10 Grouts shall achieve a non-bleeding characteristic.

Grout shall not contain aluminum powder or gas
generating system that produces hydrogen, carbon
diolCide, or olCygen. Cementitious grout shall meet or
elCceed the specified physical properties stated herein as
determined by the following standard and modified ASTM
test methods.
11 Grout Classes shall be taken as specified in AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction SpecifiCations Table 10.9.3-1
and Grout Properties shall be as specified in AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Table 10.9 .32.
5.4.3.8
Tensioning
Tensioning may be accomplished by pre-tensioning,

post-tensloning, or the combined method; as specified In
the contract documents, or on the approved working
drawings, or approved In writing by the Engineer.
2
During stressing of strand, individual wire failures
may be accepted by the Engineer, provided not more than
one wire in any strand is broken and the area of broken
wires does not exceed two percent of the total area of the
prestressing steel in the member.
Concrete Strength: Prestressing forces shall not be
3
applied or transferred to the concrete until the concrete
has attained the strength specified for Init ial stressing. In
addition, cast-In-place concrete for other than segmentally
constructed bridges shall not be post-tensioned until at
least ten days after the last concrete has been placed in
the member to be post-tensioned.
4
Prestressing Equipment:
i.
Hydraulic iacks used to stress tendons shall be

capable of providing nd sustaining the
necessary forces and sh.tl be equipped with
either a pressure gage or a load cell for
determining the jacking stress.
il
All jacks used for prestressing shall be of the

type applicable to the system adopted. The
accuracy of the load metering equipment shall
be checked to the satisfaetlon of the Engineer
at the start of the work each day it has to be
used and whenever the equipment is moved to
a different job.
53-4
5
Sequence of Stressing: When the sequence of
stressing lndlvldual tendons is not ot herwise specified in
the contract documents or on the approved working
drawings, the stressing of post-tensioning tendons and
the release of pretensioned tendons shall be done in a
sequence that produces 1 minimum of eccentric force in
the member.
S<Jitanete of Omen. Srandard Spetifoelllom for Road &. Bridge Ct>nWuc!Ja 20
Measurement of Stress:
i.
it
iil
6.4.3.9
A record of gege pressures and tendon

elongations for each tendon shall be provided
by the Contractor for review and approve I by
the Engineer. Elongations shall be measured to
an accuracy of 1.5 mm. Stressing tails of post
tensioned tendons shall not be cut off until the
stressing records have been approved.
the length of the casting bed and the size and number of
tendons In the group to be tensioned.
5
The stress In tendons during tensioning shall

be determined by the gage or load-cell
readings and shall be verified with the
measured
elongations.
Calculations
of
anticipated elongations shall utilize the
modulus of elasticity, based on nominal area,
as furnished by the Manufacturer for the lot of
steel being tens'oned, or as determined by a
bench test of strands used in the wort<.
All tendons shall be tensioned to a preliminary
force as necessary to e;iminate any take-up in
the tensioning system before elongation
readings are started. This prelimrnary force
shall be between 5 and 25 percent of the final
jacking force. The initial force shall be
measured by a dynamometer or by other
approved method, so that its amount can be
used as a check against elongation as
computed and as measured. Each strand shall
be marked prior to final stressing to permit
measurement of elongat'on and to ensure that
all anchor wedges set properly.
Pretension Construction
1
The strand stress prior to seating (jacking stress)
shall not exceed 60 percent of the minimum ultimate
tensile strength of the prestressing steel. This allowable
stress, which slightly exceeds the values allowed in
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 5.9.3,
may be permitted to offset seating I asses and to
accommodate compensation for temperature differences
specified below.
2
In pretensioned members where tendons are
specified as debonded from the concrete, they shall be
covered with sleeves of PVC or other material approved by
the Engineer. The ends of the sleeves shall be taped to
the tendon to prevent the ingress of grout.
3
Stressing shall be accomplished by either single
strand stressing or multiple-strand stressing. The amount
of stress to be given to each strand shall be as shown in
the contract documents or on the approved working
drawings.
All strands to be stressed in a group (multiple-strand
4
stressing! shall be brought to a uniform initial tension
prior to being given their full pretensioning. The amount
of the Initial tensioning force shall be within the range
specified in Article 5.4.3.8 (61 Measurement of Stress, and
shall be the minimum required to eliminate all sleek and to
equalize the stresses in the tendons as determined by the
Engineer. The amount of this force will be Influenced by
Draped Pretensioned Tendons:

i.
Draped pretensioned tendons shall either be

tensioned partially by jacking at the end of the
bed and partially by uplifting or depressing
tendons, or they shall be tensioned entirely by
jacking, with the tendons being held in thai r
draped positions by means of rollers, pins, or
other approved methods during the jacking
operation.
ii.
Approved low-friction devices shall be used at

all points of change in slope of tendon
trajectory
when
tensioning
dra pad
pretensioned strands, regardless of the
tensioning method used.
iii.
If the load for a draped strand, as determined

by elongation measurements, is more than five
percent less than that indicated by the jack
gages, the strand shall be tensioned from both
ends of the bed, and the load as computed
from the sum of elongation et both ends shall
agree within five percent of that indicated by
the jack gages.
6
When ordered by the Engineer, prestressing steel
strands in pretensioned members, if tensioned
ind'vidually, shall be checked by the Contractor for loss of
prestress not more than 3 hours prior to placing concrete
for the members. The method and equipment for checking
the loss of prestress shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer. All strands that show a loss of prestress In
excess of three percent shall be retensioned to the original
computed jacking stress.
7
Stress on all strands shall be maintained between
anchorages until the concrete has reached the
compressive strength required at time of transfer of stress
to concrete.
When prestressing steel in pretensioned members is

tensioned at a temperature more than 14 deg. C lower
than the estimated temperature of the concrete and the
prestressing steel at the time of initial set of the concrete,
the calculated elongation of the prestressing steel shall be
increased to compensate for the loss in stress due to the
change in temperature, but In no case shall the jacking
stress exceed 60 percent of the specified minimum
ulti mete tensile strength of the prestressing steel.
9
Members shall be free to accommodate the
horizontal end vertical movements due to the application
of prestress. Side and flange forms that restrain deHection
shall be removed before release of pra-tensfo ning
reinforcement.
10 When the concrete has attained the specified
strength, the load shall be transferred gradually without
severance of the tendons
11 Except when otherwise shown in the contract
documents, all pretensioned prestressing strands shall be
cut off flush with the end of the member, and the exposed
~~
Minlatry of Trnnaport & Cammunlcutiona
OGRt. T
ends of the strand and a 25 mm strip of adjoining concrete

shall be cleaned and painted. Cleaning shall be by wire
brushing or abrasive blast cleaning to remove all dirt and
residue that is not firmly bonded to the metal or concrete
surfaces. The surfaces shall be coated with one thick coat
of zinc-rich paint conforming to the requirements of U S.
Military Specification MILP-24441120. The paint shall be
thoroughly mixed at the time of application, and shall be
worked Into any voids in the strands.
12 All members shall be indelibly marked to show the
specified member mark, the production line on which they
were manufactured, the date on which the concrete was
cast, the load applied and, if they are of symmetrical
section, the face which will be uppermost when the
member is in its correct position in the work. The
markings shall be so located that they are not exposed to
view when the member is in its permanent position.
5.4.3. 10
2
I mmediately before tensioning, t he Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all
t endons are free to move between jacking points and that
members are free to accommodate the horizontal and
vertical movements due to the application of prestress.
3
Unless otherwise specified, concrete shall not be
stressed until it has reached the age at which at least 2 test
specimens taken from It attain the specified transfer
strength, The test specimens shall be cured in similar
conditions to t he concrete to which they relate. The
Contractor shall cast sufficient specimens to demonstrat e
that the required strength of the concrete at transfer has
been reached.
4
Where members consist of jointed elements the
strength at transfer of the jointing material shall be at least
equivalent to the specified transfer strengt h of the
member.
Tension Procedures:
i.
The Contractor shall establish the datum point

for measuring extension and jack pressure to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
ii.
The Contractor shall add to the specified forces

an allowance where necessary f or anchorage
friction, wedge pull-in, jack losses and friction
due to duct alignment and curvature. The total
forces and calculated extensions shall be
agreed with the Engineer before stressing is
commenced.
iii.
536
The tendons shall be stressed at a gradual and

steady rate until they attain the force and
axtension specified.
v.
If the measured extension differs by more than

5 percent from the estimated extension,
corrective action shall be taken as directed by
the Engineer.
vi.
The force in the tendons shall be obtained from

reading on a load cell or pressure gage, and
the extension of the tendons measured. Due
allowance must be made for taking up slack in
the tendons.
viL
Stressing shall be from both ends unless

otherwise specified or agreed by the Enginear.
viii.
Where stressing from one and only, the pulfln

at the end remote from the jack shall be
accurately measured and the appropriate
allowance made In the measured extension at
the jacking end.
lx,
When the specified force, including any

overload of short duration, has been applied, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, the tendons
shall be anchored . The jack pressures shall
then be released In such a w -v as to avoid
shock to the anchorage of tendons.
x.
If the puU-1n of the tendons at completion of

anchoring is greater than that stipulated by the
Engineer. tensioning shall be carried out afre sh.
xi.
If it is necessary to cut the tendons to enable

the ducts to ba grouted, this shall be delayed
as long as practicable up to the time of
grouting. In all other cases, unless agreed
otherwise by the Engineer, the tendons shail
not be cropped less than 3 days after grouting,
Post Tension Construction
l he standard stress prior to seating (jacking stress)

and the stress in the prestressing steel immediately after
seating shall not exceed the va!ues allowed in AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Sub-section 5 9.3.
iv.
Immediately after anchoring, the stresses in the

tendons shall not exceed 75 percent of their
ultimate tensile strength or as defined in the
contract documents.
During stressing the
value shall not exceed 80 percent.
Records: A record of the following post-tensioni ng

operati ons shall be kept for each t endo n installed:
I.
Project name, number,
ll.
Contractor and/or subcontractor,
iii.
Tendon location, size and type,
iv.
Date tendon was first installed In ducts,
v.
Coil/reel number for strands or wires and heat

number for bars and wire,
vi.
Assumed and actual cross-sect ion aI area,
vii.
Assumed and actual modulus of alasticlty,
viii .
Date stressed.
he.
Jack and gage numbers par and oflendon,
X.
Required jacki ng force,
xl.
Gage pressures.
xii.
Elongations (anticipated and actuall,
xiii.
Anchor sets (anticipated and actual ),
xiv.
Stressing sequence (i.e., tendons before and

aftar this tendon),
XV,
Stressing
mode
ends/simultaneous),
(one
endi\wo
Sultunote of Oman. Stondanl Specific:Jliam lot llo.>d &
Brlcl~e Comlluc:.ar
xvi.
Witnesses to stressing operation (Contractor

and Inspector!.
viii.
xvii. Date grouted, days from stressing to grouting,

grouting pressure applied, and injection end,
xviii. Record any other relevant Information
Including pour back and bitumastic installation
dates.
Direction of grouting;
x.
Sequence of use of the inlets and outlet pipes;
xi.
Procedures for handling blockages; and
xii.
Procedures for possible post grouting repair.
Before grouting operations begin, a joint meeting of

the Contractor, grouting crew end the Engineer shall
be conducted. At the meeting, the grouting operation
plan, required testing, corrective procedures, and any
other relevant issues shall ba discussed.
The Engineer shall be provided with a complete copy of

stressing operations, and the jack calibration forms within
24 hours of each tensioning operation.
7
Protection of Tendons: Within 4 hours after stressing
and prior to grouting, tendons shall be protected against
corrosion or harmful effects of debris by temporarily
plugging or sealing all openings and vents; cleaning rust
and other debris from all metal surfaces which will be
covered by the grout cap; and placing the grout cap,
including a seal, over the wedge plate until the tendon Is
grouted.
Mixing and pumping procedures;
ix.
Preparation of Ducts:
i.
Each duct shall be air pressure tested prior to

the installation of the prestressing steel into the
ducts. If leaks are indicated during the test, the
duct shall be repaired to eliminate the leakage
or minimize the consequences of the leakage.
ii.
All ducts shell be clean and free of deleterious

materials that would impair bonding or
interfere with grouting procedures.
Grout should be injected from low points pumping

toward the high-point vent. For segmental, span-by-span
construction, grout shall be injected through e grout inlet
at midspan.
iii.
Ducts with concrete wells {cored ductsl shall be

flushed to ensure that the concrete is
thoroughly wetted. Metal ducts shall be flushed
if necessary to remove deleterious material.
2
Ducts shall be grouted as soon as practicable after
the tendons have been stressed and the Engineer's
permission to commence has been obtained. The ducts
shall be completely filled with grout. Grout shall ba
inJected in one continuous operation and allowed to flow
from the vents until the consistency is equivalent to that
being injected or more than 11 seconds.
iv.
Water used for flushing ducts may contain

slack lime (calcium hydroxidel or quicklime
(calcium oxidel in the amount of 0.012 kgn.
v.
After flushing, ell water shell be blown out of

the duct with oil free compressed air.
6.4.3.11
Grouting
3
Grout shall not be above 32 deg. C during mixing or
pumping. If necessary, cool the mixing water.
4
A grouting operation plan shall be submitted for
approval at least 45 days in advance of any scheduled
grouting operations. Written approval of the grouting
operation plan by the Engineer shall be required before
any grouting of the permanent tendons in the structure
takes place. At a minimum, the following items shall be
provided in the grouting operation plan:
i.
ii.
iii.
Provide names, and proof of training and

experience records for the grouting crew and
the crew supervisor in conformance with this
Specification;
Type, quantity, and brand of materials used In
grouting including ell required certifications;
Type of equipment furnished, including

capacity in relation to demand and working
condition, as well as back-up equipment and
spare parts;
iv.
General grouting procedure;
v.
Duct pressure test and repair procedures;
vi.
Method to be used to control the rate of flow

within ducts;
vii.
Theoretical grout volume calculations;
Equipment:
i.
The grouting equipment shall include a highspeed shear mixer capable of continuous
mechanical mixing which will produce a grout
free of lumps and undispersed cement, a grout
pump, and stand-by flushing equipment with
water supply. The equipment shall be able to
pump the mixed grout in 11 manner which will
comply with all requirements.
ii.
The equipment shall be as per ASTM LRFD

Bridge Construction Specification Article
10.11.3.
Mixing of Grout:
i.
Water shall be added to the mixer first.

followed by cement grout.
ii.
Grout shall be mixed in eccordence with the

manuf11cturer's instructions using a colloidal
mixer to obtain homogeneous mixture. A
fluidity test shall be performed on the mixed
grout prior to beginning the injection process.
Target flow rates as a function of mixer type
used and ambient temperatures shell be
obtained from the grout manufacturer. The
537
~../"..../
Monlstry cl Tronapgrt llo Communleotlon. DGRLT
grouting process shall not be started until the

~)toper grout properties have been obtained.
HI.
iv.
Mixing shall be of such duration as to obtain a

uniform, thoroughly blended grout, without
excessive temperature Increase or loss of
expansive properties of the admixture. The
grout shall be continuously agitated until It is
pumped.
Water shall not be added to Increase grout
flowability which has been decreased by
delayed use of the grout.
Injection of Grout:
All grout vents shall be opened before grouting
starts. Injection and ejection vents with
positive shut-offs shall be provided. Grout shall
be a llowed to flow from the first injection vent
until any residual flushing water or entrapped
air has been removed prior to closing that vent.
Remaining vents shall be closed In sequence in
the same manner. A continuous flow of grout
at a rate between 10 000 mm and 15 000 mm
of duct pe r minute shall be maintained.
i.
i:i.
Iii
iv.
~8
The pumping pressure at the injection vent

should not exceed 1,0 MPa. Normal operations
shaP be performed at approxim1tely 0.5 MPa.
If the actual grouting pressure exceeds the
maximum allowed, the injection vent shall be
closed and the grout shall be injected at the
next vent that has been, or is ready to be
closed, as long as a one-way flow is
maintained. Grout shall not be injected into a
succeeding vent from which grout has not yet
flowed.
Grout shall be pumped through the duct and
continuously wasted at the ejection vent until
no visible slugs of water or ait are ejected. A
fluidity test shall be performed on each tendon
in accordance with paragraph 5 4.3.7 {7)
measuring the grout fluidity from the discharge
outlet. The measured grout e fflux time shall
not be faster than the efflux time measure d a t
the inlet or the minimum efflux time
established in Table 5.4.3. 1. If the grout efflux
time is not acceptable, additional grout shall be
discharged from the discharge outlet. Grout
efflux time shall be tested. This cycle shall be
continued until acceptable grout fluidity is
achleved. To ensure that the te ndon remains
filled with grout, the ejection and injection
vents shall be closed in sequence, respectively,
under pressure when the tendon duct is
completely r..rled with grout. The positive shutoffs at the injection and ejection vents shall not
be removed or vents opened until the grout
has set.
The maximum allowable ambient temperature
to start grouting is 32 degrees C.
TNt Value
Max. 0.08%by
weight of
camentitlous
material
Max. Size :s No.
50 Sieve
P.roperty
Total Chlo ride

Ions
Fine Aggregate
Clfuti&zedl
Volume
Changeat28
davs
0.0% to+0.2% at
24 h and 28 days
:s2.0% for up to 3
h
Expansion
Compressive
Strength
28 day (average
of3cubes)
Initial Set of
Grout
Flullity Test**
Efflux Time
from Flow
Cone
al lmmediaUI!y
after Mixing
b) 30 min after
Mixing with
Remixing
fo r 30 s
Bleeding at 3 h
Permeability at
28 days
Table 5.4.3.1
26ks1
Min.3h
Max. 12 h
TNt Method
ASTM
C1152/C1152M
ASTMC33
ASTM C 1090*
ASTM C940
ASTM C942
ASTM C !l53
I
Min 11 s
Max. 30sor
Mln, 9 s
Max. 20s
Max. 30 s or
Max. 30s
ASTM C939
ASTMC
939***
ASTM C939
ASTMC
939***
Max. D. D%
940****
ASTMC
Max. 2500
AASHTOT277
(ASTM C 1202)
coUlombs at 30
volts for 6 h
Grout Propenies for
Volume Change at 28 Days
Table5.4.3-1 Notes
Modify ASTM C 1090 to include verification at both
24 h and 28 days.
**Adjustments to flow rates will be achieved by strict
compliance
With
the
manufacturer's
recommendations.
***Grout fluidity shall meet either the standard ASTM
C 939 flow cone test or the modified test described
harein. Modify the ASTM C 939 test by filling the cone
to the top instead of to the standard level. The efflux
time is the time to fill a 1.0 liter container placed
directly unde r the flow cone.
****Modify ASTM C 940 to conform with the wick
induced bleed test described below:
a)
b)
c)
Condition dry ingredients, mixing water,

prestressing strand and test apparatus overnight
at 21 to 25 deg. C
Insert 800 miltilite rs of mixed conditioned grout
with conditioned water into the 1000 milliliters
graduated cylinder, Mark the level of the top of
the grout.
Wrap the strand with 50 mm wide duct or
electrical tape at each end prior to cutting to
avoid splaying of the wires when it is cut.
SultanRtu of Omftn, Standard Spoaf.a!ians f~r Ro.sd t. Bndgo Conwuc:tio 201
d)
e)
f)
Degrease (with acetone or hexane solvent) and

wire brush to remove any surface rust on the
strand before temperature conditioning. Insert
completely a 500 mm length of conditioned,
cleaned, ASTM A 416/A 416M seven wire strand
12.7 mm diameter into the 1000 milliliter
graduated cylinder. Center and fasten the strand
so it remains essentially parallel to the vertical
axis of the cylinder (possibly using a centralizer).
Mark the level of the top of the grout.
Store the mixed grout et the temperature range
listed above in [a).
Measure the level of the bleed water every 15 min
for the first hour and hourly afterward for 2 h.
Calculate the bleed water, if any, at the end of the
3 h test period end the resulting expansion per
the procedures outlined in ASTM C 940, with the
quantity of bleed water expressed as a percent of
the initial grout volume. Note if the bleed water
remains above or below the top of the grout.
9
Vertical Grouting: In lieu of a positive shut-off,
vertical or near vertical tendon ducts for grouting shall
terminate in reservoirs at the upper-most point. The
reservoir shall have sufficient capacity to store excess
grout bleed water. Visible grout level shall be maintained
in the reservoirs. The reservoirs shall be maintained until
the grout has set. Grout shall be injected at a rate of 5000
mm of duct per minute.
be used to construct all pour-backs located at

anchorages of expansion joints or other areas
exposed to the elements.
ii.
Alllaitance, grease, curing compounds, surface

treatments, coatings, and oils shall be removed
by grit blasting or water blasting using a
minimum 70.0 MPa nozzle pressure. The
surface shall be flushed with water and blown
dry. Surfaces shall be clean, sound, and
without any standing water. In case of dispute,
ACI 503 shell be followed for substrate testing
and a minimum of 1.2 MPa tension [pull-off
value) be developed.
iii.
Epoxy shall be mixed and applied as

manufacturer's current standard technical
guidelines. All pour-becks shall be in leak proof
forms creating neat lines. The pumping of
epoxy grout shall be permitted for proper
installation. Forms shall be constructed to
maintain a liquid head to insure intimate
contact with the concrete surface. Vents shall
be used as needed to provide for the escape of
air to insure complete filling of the forms.
iv.
The exposed surfaces of pour-backs or grout

caps, except on transverse tendons, shall be
coated with an elastomeric coating system
having a thlckness of 760 to 1140 ~m. Concrete,
grout caps or other substrates shall be
structurally sound, clean, and dry. Concrete
shall be a minimum of 28 days old. Laitance,
grease, curing compounds, surface treatments,
coatings, and oils shall be removed by grit
blasting or water blasting using a minimum
70.0 MPa nozzle pressure to establish the
anchor pattern. Surfaces shall be blown with
compressed air to remove the dust or water.
v.
A 600 x 1200-mm concrete test block shall be

constructed with a similar surface texture to
the surfaces to be coated and a vertical face
shall be coated with the elastomeric coating
system chosen. The number of coats required
to achieve a coating thickness between 760 to
1140 11m without runs and drips shall be
determined. The elastomeric coating shall be
mixed and applied as per Manufacturer's
current standard tech niceI specifications. Spray
or roller application may be permitted; spray
application is preferred. Coatings shall be
applied using appro11ed and experienced
personnel with a minimum of 3 years
experience applying similar polyurethane
systems. Credentials of these persons shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review and
consideration for approval.
10 Post-Grouting Inspection: Vacuum grouting shall be

used to fill any voids that expose strands discovered in the
grouting process. Where possible, aII anchorages and
high-point vents shall be drilled and probed 48 hours after
grouting, until the Engineer is assured that no bleed water
or subsidence (settlement) voids exist. After the Engineer
is assured that voids do not exist, only one or two
anchorages per span shall be drilled and probed to ensure
quality grouting. Any voids discovered should be filled
immediately with the approved grout.
11
Finishing:
i.
Valves, caps and vent pipes shall not be

removed or opened until the grout has set.
ii.
The ends of vents shall be removed at least 25

mm below the concrete surface after the grout
has set.
iii.
The void shall be filled with epoxy grout. All

miscellaneous material used for sealing grout
caps shall be removed before carrying out
further work to protect end anchorages.
12 Protection of End Anchorages: Permanent grout caps

constructed from either stainless steel or polymer shall be
specified. The following requirements apply:
i.
Within seven days upon completion of the

grouting, the anchorage of post-tensioning
bars and tendons shall be protected as
indicated in the contract documents. The
application of the elastomeric coating may be
delayed up to 90 days after grouting. PI astic or
stainless steel threaded caps shall be used to
plug all grout inlets/outlets. A sand-filled epoxy
grout suitable for machinery base plate shall
5.4.4
Concrete shall be measured under the provisions of

Section 5.1.
~~
Miniatrv or Trnnaport & Communicatron. DGRll
_/"'..~<:concrete and Concrete Structures
2
Non-prestressed ~elnforcing steel shall be measured
under the provisions of Section 5.2 .
3
Prestressing steel shall be measured by the weight in
metric tonnes for each size and quality of wire, strands or
bar furnished, installed. completed and accepted. The
weight shall be calculated based on the nominal mass of
each diameter wire, str4nd or bar as stated in the
standards listed in Paragraph 5.4 21.3.
6
Items not measured: Measurement of prestressed
concrete is restricted to the items stated in items 1, 2 and 3
above. No separate measurement i5 made for any other
component or work.
i.
Cable ducts, (fuel couplers. grout tubes and

steel chairs for the correct duct/tendon location
are not measured for payment.
II.
Anchor blocks for use in pre-tension work are

not measured for payment.
iii.
Prestressing steel used in connection with

temporary works is not measured for payment
even if such steel is left permanently in the
member.
Plant, equipment and labor for all stressing and

grouting operations, including making good all
anchorage pockets as shown on the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.
v.
All testing required in the Specifications.
5.4.6
4
In post-tensioning work, the prestressing steel shalf
be measured In t based on the actual length between the
outermost surfaces of the anchorages except where
couplers are used in which case, the prestressing steel
shall be assumed to be continuous, without any flares,
through the coupler.
5
In pre-tension work, the prestressing steel shall be
measured in t based on the actut l length between the
outermost faces of the member.
iv.

Prestressing wires
(state size and type)
t.
ii
Prestressing strands
[state size and type)
l.
iii
Prestressing bars
[state sit e and type)
l.
5.5
Concrete Bridges and Erection

Procedures
5.5.1
Description
5.5.1.1
Scope
This Sub-sectio11 describes requ frements for erection

of concrete bridge structures and decks In conformity with
the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawi ngs
and In accordance with the Specifications. These
requirements are additional to the requirements for
co ncrete work generally as specified i n the preceding Sub
sections of this Section
5.5.1.2
References
American Associat ion of State

Transponat ion Officials (AASHTO):
Highway
and
iv.
Epoxy bonding agent used in precast

segmernal construction shall not be measured
for payment.
AASHTO 2008
v.
Shear keys and location dowels used in precast

segmental construction shall not be measUted
for payment.

Specifications, 2nd Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHT02008
Prestressing steel and anchorages used for

applying temporary prestress to glued
segments shall not be measured for payment.
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
specifications, 3rd Edit ion, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHTO 1999
Guide Specifications for Design and

Construction of Segmental Concrete
Bridges, 2nd Edition.
vi.
vii.
5.4.5
Anchorages and couplers

measured for payment,
shall
not
be
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work

measured as provided for above shall be paid at the tales
in the Bill of Quantities. These rates shall be fua
compensation for the provision of materials, equipment,
labor. tools, t esting and other items necessary for proper
completion ofthe Work. The rates shall include:
i.
Items not measured as described In Item 5.4.4
Federation lnternationale de Ia Pnicontralnte (FIPI
FIP
5.5.2
Proposal for a Standard for Acceptance

Tests and Verification of Epoxy Agents
for Segmental Construction.
Materials
1
Materials shall conform to the relevant requirements
of the followi ng Sub-sections of the Specification:
Concrete
Sub-section 5.1
Concrete
Materials and
Mixes
Reinfor ci ng Steel
Sub-section 5.2
Reinforcing
Steel
(6).
ii.
Cement, water and additive used In making the

grout.
iii.
All prestressing equipment and its calibration.
5-410
S..lt.,mue
or Oman. Sr.nclrd Spe<Htatians lor Road&. Bndge CoosrtUCiia

- Pre-stressing
Subsection 5.4
Pre-stressed
Concrete
Structures
5.5.3
5.5.3.1
Balanced Cantilever Construction with lnSitu

Concrete
each stage of construction at the check points

listed below, or an alternative of his choice and
subm't the same for the Engineer's approvaL
The check points are:
One of the lowest corners at the top surface
of any temporary bearing pad which is to
be used as datum during construction.
All four corners of the top slabs of the pier
units to establish grade and top levels.
Genera!;
This work consists of Installing temporary
bearings, casting concrete u n' ts insitu end
setting the superstructure on permanent
bearings.
The Contractor shall submit
complete details and descripfons of aU
methods, arrangements and equipment which
he intends to adopt, for approval before
construct on work is started.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Two points on the longitudinal center line

of each pier unit, one on each end to
establish alignment.
One point on the longitudinal center line,
and at least on one corner of each unit
along every joint between cast-in-place
units
to
establish
elevations
and
alignments at every stage of construction.
The construction method statement shall

i nclude casting of units, method of the tiedown of superstructure during cantilever
construction, method of apprcation of all
temporary forces to be used for adjusti ng
horizontal and vertical alignment and to place
the structure on permanent bearings, detalls of
work plans and safety measures. It shall also
include control methods to ensure the accuracy
of alignments of the constructed superstructure.
Work equipment includes all machinery,
devices, labor and material which are to be
used for construction but which will not
become a permanent part of the completed
superstructure. Construction equipment and
other loads shall not be placed upon any part
of the su perstructura at any stage of
construction other than that which specifically
meets the requirements of total working load
per unit, or has the approval of the Engineer.
This Includes the post-tensioning, jointing,
jacking, grouting equipment, any other
equipment
whatsoever,
workmen
and
materials of any kind.
Unbalanced Load: During construction the
cantilever may be unbalanced by only one unit
et any time and be consistent with the holdingdown method adopted. In addition to the
unbalanced load due to one unit, 0.5 kN/m2
load is permissible anywhere on the cantilever.
This load includes workmen, miscellaneous
equipment and stored materials.
The
Contractor shall take care to ensure that this
allowable load is not exceeded.
i l.
The alignment and elevations of the cantilever

shall be checked by the Contractor and the
Engineer independently within 1 hour of
sunrise on each dey that the units ere to be
cast. The measurements made by the Engineer
and the Contractor shall agree to within 5 mm.
n.
The temporary bearing pads at the piers shall

be carefully placed. The top surface of these
pads must have the correct elevations,
alignments and slopes as required by the
working drawings and as established by the
procedure described above. Shims may be
used underneath the pads to accomplish
accuracy.
The Contractor shall check
elevations and alignment of the structure at
every stage of construction and shall mal ntain
a record of all these checks and of all
adjustments end corrections made.
Casting Procedures:
i.
Casting of the units shall not begin until

approval of the shop drawings, calculations
and the post-tensioning system has been given.
ii.
Sequence. The units shall be match cast

beginning with each pier unit. After the pier
unit is cast all units on either side of the pier
unit may be cast in order so long as match
casting is maintained.
iii.
Care shall be taken in the set-up of each unit.

All materials to be encased within the concrete
of the segment shall be properly positioned
and supported. Before any concrete is placed,
the set up will be inspected and checked by the
Engineer. All ducts shall be located within
3mm of the location given on approved
drawings. The top surface of the units shall be
free of depressions or high spots.
iv.
Forms shall not be removed until the concrete

has achieved the specified compressive
strength has been proved by test cylinders
made and cured in the same manner as the
Construction Schedule:
i.
The Contractor shall submit a construction

schedule showing the order of every phase and
stage of erection and construction of the
superstructure. The Contractor shall prepare a
table of elevations and alignments required at
5-41
~~
Minttrv of Trtuupart &. Communic-ation OGRLT
unit. Care shall be taken in removing the forms

to prevent spelling and chipping of the
concrete.
iv.
Each batch of resin mixed shall be tested for

setting by compression and shear tests as
described below. No permanent prestress
shall be applied to a joint until the epoxy has
achieved the required strength. Should this
test show that the resin is not setting the joint
shall be broken and the resin removed. Set
resin shall be removed by grit blasting. Further
tests may be requested by the Engineer at
various times to ensure that the material as
mllCed is complying w ith the Specification.
v.
All the instructions of the manufacturer and/or

the formulator shall be submitted to the
Engineer for agreement
Such agreed
instructions shall be adhered to in all respects.
vi.
The supplier shall carry out a program of

testing as described in FIP "Proposal for a
standard for acceptance test s and verification
of epoxy bonding agents for segmental
construction", after consultation w ith the
Engineer on the range of temperatures and
work cycles that are to be considered in the
tests. The Engineer may require the tests to be
witnessed either in person or by an approved
Independent authority.
Tolerances:
i.
Formwork for box girder segments must satisfy

the following tolerances:
Web thickness, +10 mm or -5 mm.
Thickness of bottom slab +5 mm, but 0
reduction in depth.
Thickness of top slab +5 mm, but 0
reduction In depth.
Overall width of unit, :t5 mm.
Overall depth of unit, :t5 mm.
Length of match cast unit, :t10 mm, but not
cumulative and a maximum of 50 mm per
spa n.
Diaphragm dimensions, + 10 mm or 5 mm.
Grede at top and bottom flanges, :t3.
ii.
5.5.3.2
After erection, final post-tensfonlng, final

corrections and adjustments are completed
and the structure has baen ptaced on its
permanent bearings, the superstructure shall
conform to the grade and alignment shown on
the Drawings with due consideration for creep
and superimposed load and dead load
deftections within a tolerance of :t 5 mm
horizontally end :t 10 mm vertically.
Glued Precast Segmental Construction
Where bridge decks are precast in segments and

assembled in position for glueing and stressing, the
Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that his proposed
construction method will achieve the required standard of
workmanship and finish. The Contractor shall submit
details for approval of aU his forms, falsework, preeastlng
factory and his method of lifting, transporting, assembling,
supporting, threading cables, glueing and stressing the
precast units before commencement of any work.
2
EpoKY Adhesive:
i.
The epoKY resin adhesive shall be supplied by

an approved manufacturer.
il.
It shall be made up and packaged by approved

formulators and to specifications agreed by the
Engineer.
Iii.
The material shall be supp1ied in accurately

measured packs with the pack containing the
hardener clearly distinguished by both size and
labelling. The pack containing the resin shall
be large enough to permit the addition o f the
hardener.
Resin and hardener shall be
pigmented with dissimilar colours to indicate
when even mixing has been completely
attained and to produce an even gray colour to
match the concrete.
S-42
3
Surface Preparation: The interface of the units shall
be lightly grit blasted before erection to remove laitance.
Before applying the epoxy the interfaces must be clean
and free from laitance or any bond breaking material. Any
oil or grease which may be harmful shall be removed.
The surface shall have no free moisture.
4
Application of Epoxy: Application shall begin
Immediately after a batch has been mixed. Application
shall be to both interfaces to a total nominal thickness of 2
mm with a spatula or by hand. No epoxy may be applied
w ithin 25mm of any duct
5
Preliminary Prestress: Immediately after the
interfaces are coated with epoxy, the unit shall be brought
Into posit ion and the preliminary prestress applied. This
preliminary prestress is to be just sufficient to start
squeezing epoKY resin out of the joint. The amount of
prestress required will depend on the formulation of resin
chosen by the Contractor.
If th:s operation is not
completed within the life time of the first batch of epoxy ta
be applied, the units shall be moved apart. All the epoxy
on both Interfaces shall be removed with spatulas and an
approved solvent. No epoxy may be applied to the joint
until 24 hours after a solvent has been used. The life t ime
shell be reckoned from the end of the pot life unless the
manufacturer's Instructions direct otherwise. A ll excess
epoxy shall be cleaned off from the outer faces of the
webs and the soffit in such a way as not to smea r the
concrete face.
6
Records of Joining: The Contractor shall keep a
record of each joint with the following details:
i.
Joint Number
ii.
Date and Time of jointing
iii.
Batch number of resin and hardener
iv.
Weather
conditions
(temperature
humidity) continuously recorded
v.
Resu Its oftests.
containing the other 3 corners)

and
7
Tolerances; These shall be similar to
prescribed for balanced cantilever construction.
6.6.3.3
those
Cover to reinforcement
Precast Beam and slab Construction
Manufacture of Prestressed Beams:
i.
The details of method of manufacture shall be

approved by the Engineer before work is
started. No changes shall subsequently be
made without tha consent of the Engineer.
ii.
The Contractor shall Inform the Eng:neer in

advance of the date of commencement of
manufacture and the dates when tensioning of
tendons, casting of members and transfer of
stress will be undertaken for the first time for
each type of beam.
iii.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engi neer,

not more than 7 days after the transfer of
stress, a certificate showing the force and
strain in the tendons lmmed"ately after they
were anchored, the strength and age of the test
cylinders cast in accordance with this
Specification, and the minimum age in hours
of the concrete at the time stress was applied
to the members. Copies of all 28 day cylinder
test results relating to the work shall be kept so
that the identity of those who stressed the
tendons, cast the concrete and transferred the
stress, on any member or line of members, can
be traced.
iv.
Storage and Handling of Prestressed Members;

Members shall be firmly supported at such bearing
positions as will ensure that the stresses induced in them
are always less than the permissible design stresses.
Mem bars shall be lifted or supported only at the points
specified and shall be handled and placed without impact.
6mm
+5 orO mm
Prestressing tendons
3 mm in any direction
Dowel holes
Composite Slab Construction:

I.
Where i nsitu concrete deck is cast to act

compositely with precast beams, the beams
shall be installed to correct line and level,
starting from the outermost beam and working
inwards progressively. When the beams are
Iaid side by side just before erection the
difference in soffit level between adjacent
beams shall nowhere exceed 6 mm. Where
permanent soffit shutters are used, they shall
be to the approval of the Engineer and they
shall be fixed securely so that there is no
movement or grout loss during deck
concreting.
li.
The in-situ concrete deck over any one span

shall be poured in one continuous operatfon
and shall be placed in such a sequence that the
advancing edge of the freshly deposited
concrete over the full width of deck or between
longitudina1
construction
joints
is
approximately parallel to the deck supports.
Lateral displacement of beams shall be
prevented during the piecing of in-situ concrete.
iii.
The width of the in-situ deck shall be within

+25 mm of that specified. On curved bridge
deck, the in-situ deck may be in a series of
straights such that the width Is within +25 mm
of that specified.
Where the EngIneer requires tests to be carried

out on beams, the beams to which these tests
related, shall not be dispatched to Site until the
tests have been satisfactorily completed.
6mm
Flatness (the maximum deviation

from a 1.5 meter straight-edge
placed In any position on
nominally plane surface)
5.5.3.4
In-Situ Construction
Where bridge decks are constructed in-situ, the

details of all forms and falsework shall first be approved
by the Engineer. Dimensional variations shall not exceed
the following tolerances:
Length
12 mm
Tolerance in Precast Members;
Width
:t 10 mm
i.
Thickness
6 mm
Levels
+ 10 mm or -0 mm
Dimensional variations shall not exceed the

tolerances given below:
Length
12 mm
Width and depth
:1:.
Bow in the vertical plane
6 mm
+15 mm or-O mm
Bow in the horizontal plane

Difference between longest and
shortest dimensions (check for
squareness of beam) in any plane
Twist (measured by the deviation
of any corner from the pia ne
12 mm
6.5.4
6mm
Void Location
Cover to reinforcement
+ 5 mm or -0 mm
Prestressing tendons

Payment and Items In the Bills of
Quantities
Concrete bridge construction is measured and

identified in the Bill of Quantities in accordance with
5-43
~~
Mioltrv al Trnnopon & Cornmunlcatlona DGRLT
/"--.~<:concrete and Concrete Struct ures
Clause 5.1.7. Measurementand basis of payment will be in

accordance with the stipulations for the correspondIng
items In Sub-sections 5.1, 5.2 and 5.4. No ditect payment
wll be made for the stipulations of this Sub-section 5.5.
which work is considered to be subsidiary to the
requi rements of Sub-sections 5.1, 5.2 and 5.4. The rates
and prices for the relevant items of Sub-sections 5.1, 5.2
and 54 shall be deemed to include for aD the sti pulations
of this Sub-section 5. 5.
5.6
Vehicular and Pedestrian

Underpasses and Animal
Crossings
5.6.1
Description
5.6.1.1
Scope

concrete underpasses and animal crossings. These
requirements are additional to the requirements for
concrete generally, as described in the preceding Subsections of this Section.
5.6.1 .2
References
The relevant stipulations of the following Sections or

Sub-sections of this Specification shall apply to this Subsection.
Section 2
Earthworks
Section 5
Section 6
Structural Steel and Other Metalwork
Section 8
Drainage
Section 10
Piling
Section 12
Sidewalks, Paved Areas end Curbs
Section 15
Road Lighting and Electrical

Installations
5.6.2
Materials
Materials shall conform to the relevant requirement!>

of the following Sections and Sub-sections of the
Specification:
Piles
Section 10
Concrete
Sub-section 5.1
Reinforcing Steel
Sub-section 5.2
Structural Steel and Other Metal
Section 6
Backfilling
Subsection 2.7
Road Pavement
Sections3,4
Concrete Pavement
Sub-section 5. 7
Waterproofing
Sub-section 5.10
Pipe culverts
Sub-section 8.1
Drainage
SectionS
Sidewalks, Paved Areas
Section 12
Electrical Installations
Section 15
6 -44
2
Rnishes to floors and walls, including tiles, plaster
paint and special finishes shall be as described in the
Special Specification.
5.6.3
5.6.3.1
Excavation
The Contractor shall provide the Engi neer with

detailed written proposals of construction methods of
temporary and permenent works for the underpass
excavation. Details of ground water lOwering, excavation
support and support of adjacent existing structures shell
be accompanied by relevant shop drawings and
calculations.
The work shall not proceed until the
Engineer has given approval to these construction
proposals together with the relevant construction program
for these works. Such approval, when given, shall not
relieve the Contrador of his responsibility for the
correctness, safety and adequacy of such proposal.
2
Excavation and earthwork shall comply with the
requirements of Section 2.
3
The Contractor shall comply with arrangements to
maintain the How of pedestrian and vehicular traffic as
stated in Section 1 of the Specification and as detailed on
the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The
Contractor's attention is specifically drawn to his
responsibilities regarding the safety of such traffic near to
open excavations for the works and the operation of heavy
plant and equipment and the provision and maintenance
of adequate fences and barriers.
4
The Contractor shall protect and support existing
statutory services during the excavation works as stated in
Section 1 and Section 18 of the Specification and co.
operate with all statutory services to ensure efficiency of
diversion of such services where necessary. In the event
that services are uncovered during excavation that have
not been previously located on Drawings. the Engineer's
attention shall be drawn to the matter without delay.
5
Particular care shall be taken by the Contractor to
minimize noise, dust and vib<'at!on caused by excavation
operations especially where such nuisances prove
hazardous to e)(isting structures.
6
Where ground water lowering operations prove
necessary the phasing of pumping operations and their
termination on completion of the underpass structure
shall be approved by the Engineer.
7
Where the Drawings show the use of piles or
diaphragm walls to support the underpass structure or
retain the subsoil the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for hl s approval a detailed method statement
and work program for this work together with the names
of any specialist firms he i ntends to use for this work.
Sultanllte of Oman. Standartl Spadficatians for Ro.>d !o B11do;;o Com:ruclicn 201Q
5.6.3.2
Structural Concrete
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with

detailed written proposals for the formwork design of all
major parts of the underpass structure together with
proposals for transporting, placing and curing concrete
and sizes of pours. The works shall not proceed until the
Engineer has given approval to these proposals; such
approval when given shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the efficacy of such proposals.
2
The structu rat concrete work shall generally com ply
with the relevant requirements of the following sections:
Section 5.1
Concrete Materiels and Mixes
Section 5.2
Reinforcing Steel
Section 5.3
Section 5.4
Prestressed Concrete Structures
5.6.3.3
Concrete Piles
The reinforced concrete construction of piling works

shown as the Drawings to support the underpass structure
or retain the subsoil shall comply with the relevant
5.6.3.4
Waterproofing
The waterproofing of the underpass structure shall

be generally carried out in compliance with Section 5.1 0
"Waterproofing for Structures".
2
Where membrane materials are specified on the
Drawings for special use, such as P.V.C. membranes, the
manufacturer's instructions for storage, handling and
installation of such membranes shall be strictly complied
with.
Where special details of junctions of such
membranes with walls and piles are necessary, drawings
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
work commences.
3
Tucks and seals for waterproofing shall be provided
at points of discontinuity such as edges, expansion joints
and rainwater drains. Sharp internal and external edges
shall be chamfered with minimum 40mm x 40mm fillets.
The waterproofing membrane shall be protected from
damage during the execution ofthe work.
4
Where the Drawings show the use of waterstops in
concrete walls and slabs at construction joints and
expansion joints the Contractor shall supply samples of
waterstop material for approval and provide details of
weterstop assembly for approval.
5.6.3.6
Bituminous Pavement Construction
Bituminous pavement construction shall be in

accordance with all relevant requirements of Section 4
"Bituminous Pavement.
2
Orainage works shell be constructed In accordance
with all relevant requirements of SubSection 8.4
"Drainage of Structures.
5.6.3.7
Electrical Works
The Installation of lighting and electrical works for

shall be in accordance with details shown on the Drawings
and the general requirements of Section 15 "Electrical
Installations.
5.6.4
Excavation,
backfilling,
pi Iing,
concrete,
reinforcement, road pavement, sidewalks and paved areas.
drainage, ducts, waterproofing of concrete and electrica I
work shall be measured in accordance with the relevant
Sections ofthis Specification.
2
Floor and wall finishes shall be measured in
accorda nee with the Special Specification for the
particular work.
5.6.5
Basis of Payment

unit rat as for the various items in the Bill of Quantities,
materiels, transporting and placing, labor, equipment,
of the work.
5.6.6
All work In underpasses and animal crossings is

separately identified In the Bill of Quantities and the
relevant items, as stated in the respective Sections of the
Specification are included.
5.7
Cement Concrete Pavement
5.7.1
Description
5
The standard of acceptance of waterproofing shall be
that there shall be no damp patches or visible leaks on the
inside face of walls, roof or floor of the underpass
structure.

cement concrete pavement, with or without reinforcement,
on a prepared base all as and where shown on the
Drawings. These requirements are additional to the
requirements for concrete generally contained In the
preceding Subsections of this Section
5.6.3.5
6.7.2
Concrete Pavement Construction
Concrete pavement construction shall be in

accordance with all relevant requirements of Section 5.7
"Concrete Pavementw.
Materials
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alona or in

combination with one or more of blended hydraulic
cament, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other
pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica
fume.
5-45
~
~
Minlatry af Trnnaport &: Cotnmuntcationa. DGRLT
/'-.
~<:concrete and Concrete Structures
2
Base Course:
Cement treated base course or
aggregate base course placed beneath the concrete
pavement.
5.7.2.1
Forms
Form Materials:
Plywood, metal, metal-framed
pl ywood, or other approved panel-type materials to
provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed
surfaces. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a
radius 30 m or less.
2
Form-Release Agent:
Commercially formulated
for m-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces.
5.7.2.2
Steel Reinforcement
Reinforcement Bars:
deformed.
ASTM A 615, Grade 60,
Plain Steel WiTe: ASTM A 82, cold-drawn steel.
Welded Deformed Steel Wire fabric: ASTM A497.
4
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615,
Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and
free of burrs.
5
Dowel Bars: High tensile plain steel bars conform' ng
to BS 4449, ASTM A615, ASTM A616, or ASTM A617, and
shall be free from burring or other deformation restricting
slippage in the concrete,
Before delivery to the
construction site, a minimum of two-thirds of the length of
each dowel bar shaU be painted with one coat of zinc
chromate, If plastic or epoxy-coated steel dowels are used,
no zinc-chromate coating is required, except when
specified for a panicular si tuation on the contract p!a ns.
Coated dowels shall conform to the requirements given in
AASHTO M254.
6
Tle Bars: ASTM A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
Sleeves: Metal, of an approved design to cover 50

7
mm to 75 mm of the dowel, with a closed end and wi th a
suitable stop to hold the end of the bar at least 25 mm
from the closed end of the sleeve. Sleeves shall be of
such design that they will not collapse during construction.
8
Hook Bolts: ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6,
internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint
assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in
position during concreting operations, and to permit
removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
throughout the work, unless otherwise accepted by

Engineer.
2
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. In particular
cases, where the design requires the use of Sulfate
Resistant Cement (SRCI, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer's approval an SAC material complying w ith the
requirements of ASTM C 150, Type II.
3
Aggregate: ASTM C33 or BS EN 12620, shall consist
of crushed stone, crushed or uncrushed gravel, or natural
sand. The aggregate shall be composed of sound, tough,
durable particles and shall meet the raqu irements for
deleterious substances g iven in ASTM C33 or BS EN 12620.
The aggregate in any size group shall not contain more
than 8 percent by weight of flat or elongated pieces when
tested in accordance with ASTM 04791. A flat or
elongated particle is one having a ratio between the
maximum and the minimum dimensions of a
circumscribing rectangular prism exceeding 5 to 1.
Uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse
aggregate as follows:
4
Fine Aggregate: Conform to the requirements of
ASTM C33 (Table 5.7.2.11 orBS EN 12620.
Pe"*ltage bv Weight
Puali\gSiwea
SIIIYII DMign.don
(squl!re openings}
318 in (9.5 mml
100
No. 4 {4.75 mml
95-100
~o. 8
(2.36 mml
80-100
No. 16 {1.18 mml
50- 85
ao
No. 30 (600 micro-ml
25-
No. 50 (300 mlcroml
10 30
No. t OO {150 micro-ml
2- 10
No. 200 (75 mlcroml
0-3
Table 5.7 2 1 Gradation for Fine Aggregate ASTM C33

1
Coarse Aggregate: Conform to the requirements of
ASTM C33 (Tible 5.7.2.21 orBS EN 12620.
PIII'CIIfttage bv wefght
PIIAing Slevw
Sltwe DeelQnlltlon
(squire openings}
in(mm)
1 {25)
I
.
I
314 {191
t /2 {12.51
318 (9.5)
19 mm- 2.36 mm
c:
l
c:
!
100
90-100 - -
' 20-55 .
9
Bar Suppons: Bolsters. chairs. spacers. and other
devices
for spacing.
supponing,
and
fastening
reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in
place. Use wire bar type suppons complying to CRSI' s
"Manual of Standard Practice .
Table 5. 7.2.2: Gradation for Coa rse Aggregate ASTM C33
10 Epoxy Repair Coating; l iquid two-part epoxy repair

coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.
The percentage of wear shall be no more than 30% when

tested in accordance with ASTM C131.
5.7.2.3
6
Water. Water used in mixing or curing shall be as
clean and free of o il. salt, acid, a lkali, sugar, vegetable, or
other substances injurious to the finished product as
possible. Water will be tested in accordance with the
Concrete Materials
General:
Use the same brand and type of
cementl tious material from the same manufacturer
S-4a
No. 4 {~.75)
No. 8 (2.361
r"'-'
0- 10
0 -5
__JI
I
Sult11nat of Oman. Sral\llatd Spoc:ificatioru lOt Rood & Bndo Conslluclion 2010
requirements of AASHTOT26, ASTM C94. Water known to

be of potable quality may be used without testing.
celtulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752 for cork or self-expanding

cork.
5.7.2.4
2
Joint filler shall be furnished in a single piece for the
full depth and width required for the joint, unless
otherwise specified by Engineer. When the use of more
than one piece is authorized for a joint, the abutting ends
shalt be fastened securely end held accurately to shape by
stapling or other positive fastening means satisfactory to
Engineer.
Admixtures
General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to

contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride
ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other
admixtures.
2
Approval Process: The use of any material added to
the concrete mix shall ba approved by Engineer. Submit
certificates indicating that the material to be furnished
meets all of the requirements indicated below. In addition,
the Engineer may require the submittal of complete test
data from an approved laboratory showing that the
material to be furnished meets all of the requirements of
the cited specifications. Subsequent tests will be made of
samples taken by Engineer from the supply of the material
being furnished or proposed for use on the work to
determine whether the admixture is uniform in quality
with that approved.
3
Chemical Admixtures: Water reducing, set-retarding,
and set-accelerating admixtures shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C494.
Joint sealer shall: meet the requirements of Sub3

section 5.8 of the Spacification and shall be of the type{s)
specified on drawings.
4
Dowels: Galvanized steel, to the dimensions shown
on drawings.
5
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic ernul sion or styrene butadiene.
5.7.2.7
Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI

211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normalweight concrete determined by either laboratory trial
mixes or field experience.
li,
High-Range,
Water-Reducing
ASTM C 494, Type F.
Admhcture:
2
Use a qualified independent testing agency for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial
batch method. Do not use Employer's field quality-control
testing agency as the independent testing agency.
iii.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture:

ASTM C 494, Type E.
3
Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the
following properties using test specimens prepared in
accordance with ASTM C31 and tested with ASTM C78:
iv.
Water-Reducing and
ASTM C 494, Type D.
i.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,

Type A.
5.7.2.5
Retarding
Admixture:
Curing Materials
i.
Flexural Strength {28 Days): 4.6 MPa
ii.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 35 MPA.
iii.
The minimum cementitious material content

shall be 300 kg. per cubic meter. The ratio of
water to cementitious material, including free
surface moisture on the aggregates but not
including moisture absorbed by the aggregates
shall not be more than 0.50 by weight.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap

cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately,
305 gfsq.m. dry.
2
Moisture-Retaining
Cover:
ASTM C 171,
polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
3
Concrete Mixes
Water: Potable.
Slump Limit:
i.
The mix determined shell be workable concrete

having a slump for side-form concrete between
25 mm and 50 mm as determined by ASTM
C143.
ii.
Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High

Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Not more
than 200 mm after adding admixture to plantor site-verified, 50- to 75-mm slump.
iii.
Absorption and permeability tests on hardened

concrete shall be carried out in accordance
with ASTM C642.
4
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular
film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
5
Clear
Solvent-Borne
Liquid-Membrane-Forming
Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type l, Class B.
6
Clear Waterborne
Membrane-Forming
Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
Curing
7 White
Waterborne
Membrane-Forming
Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
Curing
6.7.2.6
Related Materials
Pre-molded joint filter shalt conform to the

requirements of ASTM 01751 and shall be punched to
admit the dowels where called for on the plans.
Expansion and isolation joint-filler strips shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D 1751 for asphalt-saturated
5
Chemical Admixtures:
Water-reducing and setcontrolling admixtures shall be added to t he mix in the
manner recommended by the manufactu rer and in the
amount necessary to comply with the specification
requirements. Tests shall be conducted on trial mixes,
during the mix design, in accordance with ASTM C494.
~~
M nletrv of Trtmaport & CommunlcGtlon DGRl T
6
Slip-form Construction: A high degree of uniformity
In the plastic concrete is required. Some edge stump of
the wet concrete behind the side form on the paving
machi ne will occur, even with low slump concrete. This
may continue. though very slowly, until Initial set has
taken place.
5.7.2.8
Concrete Mixing
Ready-Mixed Concrete; Comply with requirements

and with ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116. Discharge of the
concrete shall be completed within a maximum of 1'h
hours, or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions,
whichever comes first. Mixing time shall be measured
from the time all materials, except water, are emptied into
the drum. However, when air temperature is between 30
deg. C and 32 deg. C, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1'h hours to 75 minutes; and when air temperature is
above 32 deg. C, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
i.
The minimum required revolutions of the

mixing speed for transit mixed concrete may
be reduced to not less than that recommended
by the miMer manufacturer.
ii.
The number of revolutions recommended by

the mixer manufacturer shall be indicated on
the manufacturer's serial plate attached to the
mixer.
I~
Concrete may be mixed at the work site

location In a central mix plant approved by the
Engineer and shall be transported in truck
millers. The mixer shall be of an approved
type and capacity.
Furnish test data occeptable to Engineer
verifyi ng that the model of the mixer will
produce uniform concrete conforming to the
provislons of ASTM C 94 at the reduced
number of revolutioi'IS shown on the serial
plate.
When mixed at the work site or in a central mixing

plant, the mixing time shall not be less than 50 seconds
nor more than 90 seconds. Mixing time ends when the
discharge chute opens. Transfer time ln multiple drum
mixers is included in mixing time. The contents of an
indivi dual mixer drum shall be removed before a
succeeding batch Is emptied therein.
Mixer:
i.
il
5-46
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed

recommended by the manufacturer as stated
nameplate on the mixer. Any concrete m'ixed
less than the specified t ime shall be discarded
at Contractor's own expense.
The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall
not exceed the mixer's nominal capacity, as
shown on the manufacturer's standard rating
plate on the mixer.
An overload up to 10 percent above the mixer's

nominal capacity may be permitted provided
concrete test data for segregation and uniform
consistency are satisfactory, and provided no
spillage of concrete takes place.
Batch: Constituents shall be charged into the drum so

that a portion of the mixing water enters in advance of the
cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be
uniform, and all water shall be in the drum by the end of
the first 15 seconds ofthe mixing period, The throat of the
drum shall be kept free of such accumulations as may
restrict the free flow of materials into the drum.
Mixed Concrete:
i.
Central mixing plant concrete shaD be

transported in truck mixers, truck agitators, or
non- agitating trucks. Non-agitating trucks are
allowed to be used only when the location of
the miMing plant is very close to the site and to
the approval of the Engineer.
ii.
The time elapsi ng from the t ime water is added

to the mix until the concrete is deposited in
place at the work site shall not exceed 30
minutes when the concrete is hauled in non
agitatii'\Q trucks. nor 45 minutes when the
concrete is hauted in truck mixers or truck
agitators. All these operations must be
performed w ithin 45 minutes after the initial
mixing operations and the water-cement ratio
must not be exceeded.
iii.
Admixtures for increasing the workability or for

accelerating the set wilt be permitted only
when specified for In the contract.
Concrete:
i.
iii.
5.7.2.9
Limitations of Mixing:
No concrete shall be mixed, placed. or finished when

the natural light is insufficient, untess an adequate and
approved artificial lighting system is operat ed.
2
During periods of hot weather when the maximum
dBUy air temperature exceeds 30 deg. C, the following
precautions shall be taken: the forms and/or the
underlying material shall be sprinkled with water
immediately before placing the concrete. The concrete
shall be placed at the coolest temperature practicable, and
in no case shall the temperature of the co ncrete when
placed exceed 32 deg, C. The aggregates and/or mixing
water shall be cooled as necessary to maintain the
concrete temperature at or not more than the specified
max. Refer to ACt 305 Rn for Hot Weather Concreting.
5.7.3
5.7.3.1
Preparation
Proceed with
pavement
layers only
after
nonconforming conditions have been corrected and
subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
2
Remove loose material from compacted sub-base
surface immediately before pl1cing concrete.
Sultanate of Oman Slano!ord Spodloticm lor l!.>.od & Brodge Conttructior
5.7.3.2
Edge Forms and Screed Construction
matter that may adversely affect or reduce

bond. Reinforcing steel with rust, mill scale, or
a combination of both will be considered
satisfactory,
provided
thB
mm1mum
dimensions, weight, and tensile properties of a
h11nd wire-brushed test specimen are not less
than the applicable ASTM specification
requirements.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and

intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines,
grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous
progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at
least 24 hours after concrete placement.
2
Forms shall be securely set so that they can
withstand impacts and vibration of consolidating and
finishing equipment without visible spring or settlement.
Extend flange braces on the base outward for not less
than two thirds of the height of the form. Remove bent,
twisted or broken forms, and forms with damaged top
surfaces. Use repaired forms only with inspection and
approval. Built-up forms will not be allowed, unless
specifically approved. The top faces of forms are not to
vary from a true plane by more than 3 mm In 3m. The
upstanding leg shall be perpendicular to the base and Is
not to vary horizontally from true alignment by more than
6 mm at any point. The ends of abutting sections lock
together tightly for secure setting. Local defects, such as
kinks in steel forms, will not be allowed.
3
Setting: Forms shall be set ahead of concrete
placement and staked into place with at least three pins
for each 3 m section. A pin shall be placed at each side of
every joint. Form sections shall be tightly locked and free
from movement in any direction. Excessive settlement or
springing from operation of the finishing machine will not
be allowed. Forms shan be cleaned and oiled before
concrete placement. The alignment and grade elevations
of the forms shall be checked, and corrections made
immediately before placing concrete. Reset and recheck
forms when they have been disturbed, or when the grade
has become unstable.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form
4
release agent as required, to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
5
Removal: Do not remove forms until the concrete
has set for at least 12 hours, unless otherwise approved or
where auxiliary forms are used temporarily in widened
areas. Remove forms carefully to avoid damaging the
pavement, and after removal, the side of the slab shall be
cured by the method specified In the current specification.
5.7.3.3
iii.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar

supports to hold reinforcement In position
during concrete placement operations. Set wire
ties so ends are directed into concrete, not
tow11rd exposed concrete surfaces.
iv.
Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as

practicable. Lap adjoining piBces at least one
full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end
laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous
laps in either direction.
5.7.3.5
At the time concrete is placed the reinforcing

bars shall be free of mud, oil or other organic
Joints
General:
Form construction, expansion, and
contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct
transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless
otherwise indicated. When joining existing pavement,
place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side
2
and end terminations of pavement and at locations where
pavement operations are stoppl!d for more than one half
hour, unless pavement terminates at Isolation joints.
3
Expansion Joints:
Form expansion joints of
preformed joint-filler strips abutting concretl! curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed
objects, and where indicated.
i.
Locate expansion joints at intervals indicated

on drawings.
ii.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
iii.
Terminate joint filler not less than 12 mm or

more than 25 mm below finished surface if
joint sealant is required.
iv.
Place top of joint filler flush with finished

concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
v.
Furnish joint fillers in onepiece lengths.

Where more than one length is required, lace
or clip joint-filler sections together.
vi.
Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete

placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove prot ective
Placement of Reinforcement
Reinforced Concrete Pavement: Comply with

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended
practice for 'Placing Reinforcing Bars'. for details and
methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as
herein specified:
I.
Accurately position, support, and secure

reinforcement
against
displacement
by
formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing
bars by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers.
and hangers, as required.
Steel Reinforcement
General: Comply with CRSI's 'Manual of Standard

Practice' for fabricating reinforcement and with
recommendations In CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for
placing and supporting reinforcement.
5.7.3.4
ii.
~~
Mtnltrv of Trnnaport & Communications
OGRLT
cap after concrete has been placed on both

sides of joint.
4
Longitudinal and Transverse Joints: Construct as
indjcated on the Drawings and in accordance with the
following requirements:
I.
All joints shall be constructed true to line with

their faces perpendicular to the surface of the
pavement.
Iii.
Joints shall not vary more than 12mm from a

true I ine or from their designated position.
iii.
The vertical surface of the pavement adjacent

to all expansion joints shall be finished to a
true plane and edged to a radius of 6mm or as
shown on the plans,
iv.
v.
vi.
7
Dowel Bars: Dowel bars or other load-transfer units
of an approved type shall be placed across transverse or
other joints in the manner as specified on the Drawings.
The surface across the joints shall be tested

with a 3m straightedge as the joints are
finished and any irregularities in excess of
6mm shall be corrected before the concrete has
hardened.
Transverse joints shall be at right angles to the
centerline of the pavement and shall extend the
full width of the slab.
The transverse joints in succeeding lanes shall
be placed In line with similar joints in the first
lane. All joints shall be so prepared, finished,
or cut to provide a g roove of the width and
depth shown on the plans.
i.
They shall be of the dimensions and spacing as

shown and held rigidly in the middle of the
slab depth in the proper horizontal and vertical
alignment by an approved assembly device left
permanently in place.
ii.
The dowel or load-transfer and joint devices

shall be rigid enough to permit complete
assembly as a unit ready to be lifted and placed
into position.
iii.
A metal. or other type dowel expansion cap or

sleeve shall be furnished for each dowel bar
used with expansion joints.
iv.
These caps shall be substantial enough to

prevent collapse and shall be placed on the
ends of the dowels as shown on the Drawings.
v.
The caps or sleeves shall fit the dowel bar

tightly and the closed end shall be watertight.
8
Fix dowel bars and support assembl[es at joints
where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of
dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of
joint.
9
Joints Installation:
i.
The top of an essembled jofnt device shall be

set at tlte proper distance below the pavement
surface and the elevation shall be checked.
Such devices shall be set to the required
position and line and shall be securely held in
place by stakes or other means during the
pouring and finishing of the concrete. The premolded joint material shall be placed and held
in a vertical position; if constructed in sections,
there shall be no offsets between adjacent
units. Dowel bars shall be checked for ex act
position and alignment as soon as the joint
device is staked in place, and the device shall
be tested to determine whether it is firmly
supported.
The
maximum
permissibla
tolerance on dowel bar alignment in each plane,
horizontal and vertical, shall not exceed 2
percent or 6mm per 300 mm of a dowel bar.
The most effective way to obtain proper
alignment is with well -fabricated dowel baskets
and dowel assemblies.
il.
When joints in concrete pavements are sawed,

the joints shall be cut as shown on the
Drawings. The circular cutter shall be capable
of cutting a groove in a straight fine and shall
produce a slot et least 3mm w ide end to the
depth shown on the plans. When shown on the
plans or required by the specifiCations, the top
portion of the slot groove shall be widened by
means of a second shallower cut or by suitable
and approved beveling to provide adequate
space for joint sealers. Sawing of the joints
Slip-Form Construction: Transverse joints with

5
dowels shall be carefully placed to ensure the dowels are
accurately placed and not disturbed during concrete
placement.
i.
Transverse dowels wlll require use of an

apparatus to firmly hold the dowels
perpendicular to the joint and parallel to the
slab surface.
ii.
During the concrete placement operation, it is

advisable to placa plastic concrete directly on
the dowel assembly immediately prior to
passage of the paver to help maintaining dowel
alignment.
6
Tie Bars: Deformed bars shall be fixed in longitudinal
joints as shown on the Drawings.
i.
Tie bars shall be placed at right angles to the

centerline of the concrete slab and shall be
spaced at intervals shown on Drawings.
i~
Tie bars sltall be held in position parallel to tile

pavement surface and midway between the
surfaces of the slab.
iii.
When tie bars extend into an unpaved lane.

they may be bent at right angles against the
form at longitudinal construction joints. unless
threaded bolt or oth~ assembled tie bars are
specified.
iv.
Tie bars shall not be painted, greased, or

enclosed in sleeves.
s.s.o
SultaniOID of Oman, Sral'l<hll Spc:!iations for Ro..d Eo Bridg Contlruc1ion 2!1 D
shall commence as soon as the concrete has

hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without
chipping, sparling, or tearing. Sawing shall be
carried on both during the day and night as
required. The joints shall be sawed at the
required spacing consecutively in sequence of
the concrete placement, unless otherwise
approved by Engineer.
material is used, the installation and edge

finish shall be according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
The sawed groove shall be
straight and of uniform width and depth. In
either case, the groove shall be clean cut so
that spelling will be avoided at intersections
with transverse joints.
Tie bars shall be
installed across these joints where indicated on
the plans.
10 Contraction
Joints:
Form
weakened-plane
contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to
at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
11
i.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints aher

initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint with groover tool to the radius
shown on drawings.
Repeat grooving of
contraction joints aher applying surface
finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete
surfaces.
ii.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with

power saws equipped with shatterproof
Cut
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.
joints into concrete to the width shown on
drawings, when cutting action will not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and
before developing random contraction cracks.
l ongitudinal Joints:
l.
ll.
Construction type: longitudinal construction

joints necessary for lane construction shall be
formed against suitable side forms as indicated
in the plans. Wooden forms may be used
under specia l conditions, when approved by
Engineer. Where butt-type joints with dowels
are designated, the dowels for this type shall
be painted and greased. The edges of the joint
shall be finished with a grooving tool or edging
tool, and a space or slot shall be formed along
the joint of the dimensions, as Indicated, to
receive the joint sealing material. Longitudinal
construction joints shall be sawed to provide a
groove at the top conforming to the details and
dimensions Indicated on the plans. Provisions
shall be made for the installation of tie bars as
noted on the plans.
Contraction or weakened
plane type:
longitudinal grooveformed or sawed joints in
the top of the slab shall be formed where
indicated on the Drawings. The groove shall
be formed In the plastic concrete with suitable
tools or material to obtain the width and depth
specified, or it shall be sawed with approved
equipment in the hardened concrete to the
dimensions required. When the groove is
formed in plastic concrete, it shall be true to
line with not more than Smm variation in 3m; it
shall be uniform in width and depth; and the
sides of the groove shall be finished even and
smooth with an edging tool. If an insert
iii.
12
Expansion type: longitudinal joints shall be

informed as indicated on the Drawings. The
pre-molded filler, of the thickness shown shall
extend for the full depth and width of the slab
at the joint, except for space for sealant at the
top of tha slab. The filler shall be securely
staked or fastened into position perpendicular
to the proposed finished surface. A metal cap
shall be provided to protect the top edge of the
filler and to permit the concrete to be placed
and finished. Aher the concrete has been
placed and struck off, the cap shall be carefully
withdrawn leaving the space over the premolded filler. The edge of the joint shall be
finished and tooled while the concrete is still
plastic.
Transverse Joints:
i.
Expansion Type:
Transverse expansion joints shall be
installed at the locations and spacing as
shown on the plans. The joints shall be
installed at right angles to the centerline
and perpendicular to the surface of the
pavement. The joints shall be formed and
finished to ensure completa separation of
the slabs. Joint filler shall be of a premolded type as specified and shown on the
Drawings and shall el(!end the full width of
the pavement strip.
All concrete shall be cleaned from the top
of the joint material. Before the pavement
is opened to traffic, it shall be swept clean
and filled with approved joint sealing
material.
All devices used for the fixing expansion
joints shall be approved by the Engineer.
They shall be easily removable without
disturbing the concrete and held in proper
transverse
and
vertical
alignment.
Immediately aher forms are removed, any
concreta bridging the joint space at the
ends shall be removed for the full width
and depth of the joint.
When specified, expansion joints shall be
equipped with dowels of the dimensions
and at the spacing and location indicated
on the Drawings. The dowels shall be
firmly supported in pi ace and accurately
alig ned parallel to the subgrada and the
5-51
~~
Ministry or Trnnapart &: Communka\iona. OGRlT
..../'-..~<Concrete and Concrete Structures
centerline of the pavement by m eans of a

dowel assembly, which will remain i n the
pavement and will ensure that t he dowels
are not displaced during construction.
ii
Transverse contraction joints, weekened-plane

joints, or both, shall be formed at the locations
and spacing as shown on the Drawings by
forming a groove or cleft in the top of the slab
while the concrete Is still plastic or by sawing a
groove into the concrete surface after the
concrete has hardened in the same manner as
specified.
Dowel bar assemblies shall be
installed as shown on the Drawings.
Ill.
Transverse construction joints shall be f ormed

at the end of each day' s placing operations and
at any other points within a paving lane when
concrete placement is interrupted for more
than 30 minutes or it appears that the concrete
will obtain its initial set before fresh concrete Is
placed. Construction joints planned in advance
shall be located at a contraction or expansion
joint where possible but they shalt not be
located within 2500 mm of a regular spaced
transverse joint. If the pouring of the concrete
is stopped, causing a joint to fall within this
limit, it shall not be formed, and t he fresh
placed concrete shall be removed back to the
2500 mm limit.
13
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and

joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool
to the radius shown on drawings. Repeat tooling of edges
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate t ool marks on
concrete surfaces.
5.7.3.6
Conditioning of Underlying Course, SlipForm

Construction
The base course on which the pavement will be

placed shall extend approximately 900 mm beyond the
paving machine track, or wider if required, to support the
paver without any noticeable deformation.
2
If damage occurs to the base course, It shari be relaid
for the full depth or the damaged areas filled with concrete
integral with the pavement. If traffic is allowed to use the
prepared grade, the grade shall be checked and corrected
immediately before the placement of concrete.
3
The prepared grade shall be well moistened with
water, without saturating, immediately ahead of concrete
placement to prevent rapid loss of moisture from concrete.
5.7.3.7
Conditioning of Underlying Course. Side-Form

Construction
The prepared grade shall be well moistened with

water, without saturating, immediately ahead of concrete
placement to prevent rapid loss of moisture from the
co ncrete.
2
If damage occurs to the base course, it shall be relaid
for the full depth, or the damaged areas filled with
concrete Integral with the pavement.
3
A multiple-pin template weighing not less than 454
kg. per 6 m or other approved template shall be provided
and operated on the forms immediately in advance of the
placing of the concrete. The template shall be propelled
only by hand and not attached to a tractor or other power
unit. Templates shall be adjustable so that they may be
set and maintained at the correct contour of the
underlying course. The adjustment and operation of the
template shall be such as to provide an accurate re-test o f
the grade before placing the concrete thereon. All excess
material shall be removed. Low areas may be filled w ith
concrete integral w ith the pavement.
5.7.3.8
Handling, Measu ring. and Batching Material
Batch plant site: layout, equipment. and provisions

for transporting material shall assure a continuous supply
of material to the work.
2
Stockpiles: Bui ld up stockpiles in layers of not more
than 900 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be completely
in place before beginning the next layer and shall not be
allowed to "cone down over the next lower layer.
Aggregates from different sources and of different grading
shall not be stockpiled together. Improperly placed
stockpiles w ill not be accepted by Engineer.
3
Aggregates: Handle from stockpiles or other sources
to the belching plant in such manner to secure the
specified grading of the material. Aggregates that have
become segregated or mixed with earth or foreign
material shalf not be used. All aggregates produced or
handled by hydraulic methods. and washed aggregates.
shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least 12 hours
before being batched.
4
Cement: Store in weather tight struct ures w ith raised
floors or in suitable silos. Different consignments of
bagged cement shall be used separately and in the order
of delivery. Cement manufactured more than twelve
months prior to proposed use on site shall not be used. If
cement becomes partially set or contains lumps of caked
cement. It shall be rejected. Cement salvaged from
discarded or used bags shall not be used.
Aggregate: Fine and coarse aggregate shall be

separately weighed into hoppers in the respective
11mounts approved by Engineer in the job mix. Cement
shall be measured by weight Separate scales and hopper.
with a device to positively indicate the complete discharge
of the batch of cement into the batch box or container.
shall be used for weighing the cement.
6
When required by the contract or when permitted,
batehing plants shall be equipped to proportion
aggregat es and bulk cement, by weight, automatically
using interlocked proportioning devices of an approved
type.
7
Water shall be measured either by volume or by
weight accurately measured to within plus or minus 1
6-52
Sultnn11ta of Oman. Siond.rd $peal0callonslor ~e. Br'doe ConurLIC!icn 2010
percent of required amounts. Unless the water is to be

weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall include an
auxiliary tank from which the measuring tank shall be
filled. The measuring tank shall be equipped with an
outside tap and valve to provide for checking the setting,
unless other means are provided for readily and
accurately determining the amount of water in the tank.
The volume of the auxiliary tank shall be at least equal to
that of the measuring tank
8
Methods and equipment for adding air-entraining
agent or other admixtures to the batch, when required,
shall be approved by Engineer. All admixtures shall be
measured into the mixer with an accuracy of plus or
minus 3 percent.
Concrete Protection and Curing
General; Protect concrete against loss of moisture
and rapid tern perature changes for at least seven days
from beginning of the curing operation. Unhardened
concrete shall be protected from rain and flowing water.
All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection
of the concrete shall be on hand, ready to use bafore
concrete placement begins.
A standby water truck
capable of dispensing a fine spray of water shall be
continuously available during paving operations to keep
the concrete moist until the curing compound has been
applied. Provide protection as necessary to prevent
cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes
during the curing period.
2
Membrane Curing: Apply a uniform coating of white
pigmented-type membrane curing compound to the entire
exposed surface of the concrete by means of an approved
automatic spraying machine as soon as free water has
disappeared from the finished surface. Coat formed
surfaces immediately after the forms are removed and in
no case longer than one hour after removal of forms. Do
not allow concrete to dry before application of the
membrane. If any drying has occurred, moisten the
surface of the concrete with a fine spray of water and
apply curing compound as soon as the free water
disappears. The spraying machine shall ba self-propelled
and shall ride on the side forms, or previously constructed
pavement straddling the newly paved lene. The machine
shall have one or more spraying nozzles that can be
controlled and operated to completely and uniformly
cover the pavement surface with the required amount of
curing compound.
The curing compound shall be
thoroughly and continuously mechanically agitated in the
drum used for the spraying operation throughout the full
depth of the drum during application. Air agitation may
be used only to supplement mechanical agitation. Provide
sufficient spraying pressure to produce a fine spray to
cover the surface thoroughly and completely with a
uniform film.
Maintain spray equipment in good
mechanical condition, and provide adequate wind guard
to the spray nozzle. Apply curing compound with an
overlapping coverage that will give a two-coat application
at a coverage rate of not more than 0.1 Uter perfsq.m. for
each coat or as recommended by the manufacturer. The
application of curing compound by hand-operated

pressure sprayers will be permitted only on small widths
or shapes of slabs as approved, and on concrete surfaces
exposed by removal of forms. When application is made
by hand-operated sprayer, apply the second coat in a
direction approximately at right angles to the direction of
the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,
continuous, cohesive film that will not check, crack or peel,
and is free of pinholes and other discontinuities. Apply an
additional coat, if pinholes, abrasions or other
discontinuities exist, to the affected areas within 30
minutes. Re-spray concrete surfaces that are subjected to
heavy rainfall or abrasive wind-blown sand within three
hours after the curing compound has been applied. Respray areas where the curing membrane is damaged by
subsequent construction operations within the curing
period.
i.
Precautions shall be taken to ensure that

concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, but
that no curing compound enters the joints.
Tightly seal top of joint opening and joint
groove at exposed edges before concrete
adjacent to the joint is re-sprayed. Seal joint
groove by using method that will prevent loss
of moisture from the joint during the specified
curing period.
ii.
Provide approved standby facilities for curing

concrete pavement at an accessible location at
the jobsite for use in the event of failure of the
spraying equipment, or other conditions that
might prevent correct application of curing
compound at the proper time.
iii.
Protect concrete surfaces to which curing

compounds have been applied from pedestrian
and vehicular traffic and from any other
possible damage to the continuity of the
membrane, during the curing period except as
required for joint-sawing operations and
surface testing.
3
Protection: Protect pavement and its appurtenances
from damage caused by traffic. The Engineer w m decide
when the pavement may be cleaned and opened to traffic,
but not earlier than 14 days after concrete placing. Protect
freshly placed concrete from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperatures Comply with the
recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protect:on
and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curl ng.
5.7.3.10
Concrete Placement
Inspection; Before placing concrete, inspect and

complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and
items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to
permit installation oftheir work.
2
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened
condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place
concrete around manholes or other structures u ntir they
are at the required finish elevation and alignment.
"-../
~
Minltry of TrDnport & Cornmunicat lon8. OGRlT
/""-.
~<:\concrete and Concrete Structures
3
Comply
with
requirements
and
with
recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
joint assemblies by means of vibrators inserted

in the concrete.
Vibrators shall not be
permitted to come in contact with a joint
assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case
shall the vibrator be operated longer than 15
seconds in any one location, nor shall the
vibrators be used to move the concrete.
4
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Site,
or during placement.
5
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous
operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag
concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete Into
place.
6
Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate
concrete according to recommendations in ACI 3091'1.
Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to
transverse Joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator
away from joint assemblies, rei nforcement, or side forms.
Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and
consolidation.
Consolidate with care to prevent
dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
10
iv.
Concrete shall be deposited as near to

expansion and contraction joints as posslble
without disturbing them but shall not be
dumped from t he discharge I:UJcket or hopper
onto 1 joint assembly unless t he hopper is well
centered on the jolnt assembly.
v.
Should any concrete materials fall on or be

worked into the surface of a completed slab.
they shall be removed immediately by
approved methods.
Slip.form Method:
I.
The concrete shall be pieced with an approved

crl wler-mounted, sli pform paver designed to
spread, consolidate, and shape the freshly
placed concrete in one complete pass of the
machine so that a mi nimum of hand finishing
will be necessary to provide a dense and
homogeneous pavement in conformance with
requirements of the plans and specifications.
The concrete should be placed directly on top
of the joint assemblies to prevent them from
moving when the paver moves over them. Side
forms and finishing screeds sha II be adjustable
to the extent required to produce the specified
pavement edge and surface tolerance. The side
forms shall be of dimensions. shape. and
strength to support the concrete literally for a
sufficient length of time so that no appreciable
edge slumping will occur. Final finishing shall
be accomplished while the concrete Is still in
the plastic state.
11.
In t he event that slumping or sloughing occurs

behind the paver or if there are any other
structural or surface defects, which, in the
opinion of the Engi neer, cannot be corrected
withi n permissible tolerances, the Engineer
may halt paving opef!ltions until proper
adjustment of the equipment or procedures
have been made. In the event that satisfactory
pavement procedures are not achieved after
more than 600 m of single lane paving, the
balance of the work shall be completed with
the use of standard metal forms and the
formed method of placing end curing.
7
Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be
struck off to conform to thll cross section shown on the
Drawings and to level such that when the concrete is
properly consoUdated and finished. the surface of the
pavement shall be at the level shown on the Drawings.
8
Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and
strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or
derbies to form an open textured and uniform surface
p~ane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on
the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces
before beginning finishing opllrations or spreading dry
shake surface treatments.
9
Side Form Method:
i.
ii.
iii.
H~
The concrete shall be deposited on the

moistened grade to require as little re-handling
as possible. Unless truck mixers. truck agitators,
or non agitating hauling equipment are
equipped with means for discharge of concrete
without segregation of the materials, the
concrete shall be unloaded into an Bpproved
spreading device and mechan1:ally spread on
the grade to prevent segregation of the
materials. Piaclng shall be continuous between
transverse joints without the use of
intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand
spreading shall be done with shovels not
rakes. Workmen sl11ll not be allowed to walk in
the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes
coated with earth or foreign substances.
When concrete is to be placed adjoining a
previously constructed lane of pavement and
when mechBnical equipment will be operated
upon the existing lane of pavement, the
concrete shall be at teast 7 days old and at a
flexural strength approved by Engi neer.
Concrete shall be thorolighly consolidated
against and along the faces of all forms and
along the full length and on both sides of an
11
Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine

placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix
design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed
requl rements. Produce pavement to required thickness.
lines, gr1des, finish, and jointing as required for formed
pavement Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of
SultanDte of Oman. Sr _ _ _ _ _..,.,.

_
_ r_
O<_IIaad
__&
_
B_
nc~g
_
e_
Co
_nrtr
__
uc:
_ua
_ _-...
sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine

during operations.
12 When adjoining pavement lanes are placed In
separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete
until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 2Bday
compressive strength.
13 Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to
recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot
weather conditions exist:
i.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain

concrete temperature at time of placement
below 32 deg. C. Chilled mixing weter or
chopped ice mey be used to control
tempereture, provided weter equivelent of ice
Is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
ii.
Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked

burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding In concrete.
11:.
Fog spray forms, reinforcement steel, and I or

stabilized base just before piecing concrete.
Keep aggregate base moisture uniform without
standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
iv.
v.
6.7.3.11
5.7.3.12
2
Strike-Off of Concrete: Following the placing of the
concrete, it shalt be struck off to conform to the cross
section shown on the plans and to an elevation such that
when the concrete is properly consolidated and finished,
the surface of the pavement shall be at the elevation
shown on the plans.
3
Concreting shall not be permitted when the

rate of evaporation exceed 1.0 kg lsq m./h. (ACI
305R "Hot Weather Concreting"). The rate of
evaporation can be estimated from Fig. 2.1 .5 of
ACI 305R with the prevailing temperature,
relative humidity, and wind speed. The
evaporation rate can also be determined more
accurately by evaporating water from a cake
pan having an area of approximately 1 ft2
(0.093 sq.m.). The pan is filled with water and
the mass determined every 15 to 20 min to
determine .the evaporation rate, which is equal
to the loss of water mass from the pan. A
balance of at least 2500 g capacity is
satisfactory.
Finishing at Joints:
i.
Concrete adjacent to joints shall be compacted

or firmly placed without voids or segregation
against the joint material; it shall be firmly
placed without voids or segregation under and
eround ell load-transfer devices, joint assembly
units, and other features designed to extend
into the pavement.
ii.
Concrete adjacent to joints shall be

mechanically vibrated. After the concrete has
been placed and vibrated adjiiCent to the joints.
the finishing miiChine shall be operated in a
manner to avoid damage or misalignment of
joints.
iii.
If uninterrupted operations of the finishing

machine, to, over, and beyond the joints, cause
segregation of concrete, damage to, or
misalignment of the joints, the finishing
machine shall be stopped when the screed Is
approKimately 200mm from the joint.
iv.
Segregated concrete shall be removed from

the front of and off the joint, the screed shall be
lifted and set directly on top of the joint, and
the forward motion of the finishing machine
shalf be resumed. Thereafter, the finishing
machine mey be run over the joint without
lifting the screed, provided there is no
segregated concrete immediately between the
joint and the screed or on top of the joint.
No concreting shall take place when the

ambient temperature exceeds 40 deg. C.
Concrete Finishing
General:
Wetting of concrete surfaces during
screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is
prohibited.
2
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation
when bteed-weter sheen has disappeared and the
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by
hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units.
Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and
fill low spots. Refloat surface Immediately to uniform
granular texture.
Final Strike-Off, Consolidation and Fi nlshing
Sequence: The sequence of operations shall be the

strike-off and consolidation, floating and removal of
laitance, straight edging, and final surface finish. The
addition of superficial water to the surface of the concrete
to assist in finishing operations generally will not be
permitted. If the application of water to the surface is
permitted, it shall be applied as a fog spray by means of
approved spray equipment.
Machine Finishing:
i.
The concrete shall be spread as soon as it is

placed, and it shall be struck off and screeded
by an approved finishing machine.
The
machine shall go over each area as many times
and at such intervals as necessary to give the
proper consolidation and to leave 11 surface of
uniform texture.
ii.
Excessive operation over 11 given 11rea shall be

avoided. When side forms 11re used, the tops
of the forms shall be kept clean by an effective
device attached to the machine, and the travel
555
~
~
Miniatrv gfTrnnaport & Communieotion DGALT
.../"'-.
~<:\concrete and Concrete Structures
of the machine on the forms shall be

maintained true without lift, wobbling, or other
variation tending to affect the precision finish.
During the first pass of the finishing machine, a
uniform ridge of concrete shall be maintained
ahead of the front screed for its entire length.
iii.
When In operation, the screed shall be moved

forward with a combined longitudinal and
transverse shearing motion, always moving in
the direction in which the work is progressing,
and so manipulated that neither end is raised
from the side forms during the striking-off
process, If necessary, this shall be repeated
until the surface is of uniform texture, true to
grade and cross section, and free from porous
areas.
5
Hand Finishing: Hand finishing methods will not be
permitted, except under the following conditions:
i.
il.
v.
The use of longhandled wood floats shall be

confined to a minimum; they may be used only
In emergencies and in areas not accessible to
fonishlng equipment.
6.7.3.13
Surface Texture
Brush or Broom Finish:
In areas of narrow widths or of irregular

dimensions where operation of the mechanical
equipment is Impractical.
ii.
The equipment shall operate transversely

across the pavement surface, providing
corrugations that are uniform in appearance
and approximately 2 mm In depth.
iii.
The equipment must not tear or unduly

roughen the pavement surface during the
operation. Any imperfections resulting from
the texturi ng operation shall be corrected.
Straight-Edge Testing and Surface Correction:
5-56
Special attention shall be given to assure that

the
surface across joints meers the
requirements for smoothness. Straightedge
testing and surface corrections shall continue
until the entire surface Is found to be free from
observable departures from the strelghtedge
and until the slab conforms to the required
grade and cross section.
A brush or broom finish shall be formed on all

newly constructed concrete pavements when
the water sheen has practicl!ly disappeared.
using mechanical texturing equipment.
6
Floati ng: After the concrete has been struck off and
consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, trued, and
consolidated by means of a longitudinal Ooat, using
approved hand or machine methods.
ii.
iv.
i.
The screed for the surface shall be at least 600 mm longer

than the maxlmum width of the slab to be struck off. It
shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its
shape, and shan be constructed either of metal or of other
suitable material covered with metal. Consolidation shall
be attained by the use of a suitable vibrator.
i.
Any depressions shaM be Immediately filled

with freshly mixed concrete, struck off,
consolidated, and refinished. High areas shall
be cut down and refinished.
In the event of breakdown of the mechanical

equi pment, hand methods may be used to
finish the concrete already deposited on the
grade;
Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck off and

screeded. An approved portable screed shall be used. A
second screed shall be provided for striking off the bottom
layer of concrete when reinforcement is used.
iil.
After the pavement has been struclt off and

consolidated and while the concrete is still
plastic, it shall be tested for trueness with a
4.Bm straightedge.
Furnish and use an
accurate 4.8m straightedge swung from
handles 900 mm longer than oneha:f the width
ofthe slab.
The straightedge shall be held in contiiiCt with
the surface in successive posit ions parallel to
the centerline and the whole area gone over
from one side of the slab to the other, as
necessary. Advancing shall be in successive
stages of not more than one-half the length of
the straightedge. Any excess water and
laiumce shan be removed from the surface of
the pavement.
5.7.3,14
Skid Resistant Surf~es
Wire Combing: A skid resistant surface shall be

provided by wire combing In plastic concrete. The wi re
combing technique shall use steel eombs or tines of
various dimensions to form groove-like texture in the
plastic concrete pavement and shall provide grooves that
are approximately 3 mm by 3 mm spaced 13 mm center
to-center.
5.7.3,15
Surface Test
As soon ts the concrete has hardened suffi ciently,

the pavement surface shall be tested with a 4 8 m
straightedge or other specified device. Areas in a slab
showing high spots of more than 6 mm but not exceeding
12 mm In 4.8 m shall be marked and immediately ground
down with an approved grinding machine to I within the
tOlerance of 6 mm or less. Where the departure from
correct cross section exceeds 12 mm, the pavement shall
be removed and replaced when so directed by Engineer.
2
Any area or saction so removed, shall not be less
than 3 m In length, t~or less than the full width of the lane
involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a
section of pavement, any remaining portion of the slab
adjacent to the joints that Is tess than 3 m in length shall
also be removed and replaced.
Sultnnate ol Oman, Stand

_
__
d .;.
Spo
:.....;;
d.;.
f.c
.;_.;.
~.;;.
on
_ _ _ _.;_
e_ _ _ _;;_
,. _ _-...
6.7.3.16
Removing Forms
Unless otherwise specified, forms shall not be

removed from freshly placed concrete until it has set for at
least 12 hours, except where auxiliary forms ere used
temporarily in widened areas. Forms shall be removed
carefully to avoid damage to the pavement. After the
forms have been removed, the sides of the slab shall be
cured. Major honeycombed areas shall be considered as
defective work and shall be removed and replaced. Any
area or section so removed shall not be less than 3 m In
length nor less than the full width of the lane involved.
When it is necessary to remove and replace a section of
pavement, any remaining portion of the slab adjacent to
the joints that is less than 3 m in length shall also be
removed and replaced.
6.7.3.17
Sealing Joints
The joints in the pavement shall be sealed as shown

on Drawings and as specified in Sub-Section 5.8.
6.7.3.18
Opening to Traffic
The Engineer shall decide when the pavement shall

be opened to traffic. The pavement will not be opened to
traffic until test specimens molded and cured in
accordance with ASTM C31 have attained the specified
flexural strength when tested in accordance with ASTM
C78, unless otherwise ecceptable to Engineer.
6.7.3.19
Pavement Tolerance
Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and es follows:
i.
Level: Plus 6 mm, no minus.
ii.
Thickness: Plus 9 mm, minus 6 mm.
iii.
Surface:
Gap below 3-m long, unleveled
straightedge not to exceed +6 mm.
iv.
Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and

Dowels: +125 mm.
v.
Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels:
vi.
Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line

Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: +113 mm.
vii.
Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line

Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of
dowel +16 mm per 300 mm.
shall submit for the Engineer's approval the appropriate

testing instrument(sl and test methodology for the surface
roughness test.
3
Tolerances. The following tolerances are applicable:

i.
Lateral deviation from established alignment of

the pavement edge shall not exceed plus or
minus 30 mm in any lane.
ii.
Vertical deviation from established grade shall

not exceed plus or minus 12 mm at any point.
iii.
Surface smoothness deviations shall not

exceed 6 mm from a 4.8 m straightedge placed
in any direction, including placement along and
spanning any pavement joint or edge.
5.7.3.20
Allow concrete pavement to harden and gain

2
strength for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement
marking.
3
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material
and dust.
6.7.3.21
viii.
Joint Spacing: +175 mm.

Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 6 mm, no minus.
x.
Joint Width: Plus 3 mm, no minus.
2
Surface Roughness: The International Roughness
Index {IRII for roads shall be complied with on all concrete
finished surfaces. The acceptable range of IRI test results
shall vary between 0 and 1.5 mm/m for highways and
primary roads and between 0 and 3.0 mm/m for secondary,
tertiary and other access roads. Adopt contact type test
instruments for test stretches not exceeding 400 m in
length and non-contact test instruments (optical or sonicl
for stretches exceeding 400 m in length. The Contractor
Slump: Minimum one test at point of discharge for

each day's pour of concrete. Additional tests when
concrete consistency seems to have changed.
2
Concrete Temperature:
Test hourly when air
temperature is 4 deg C and below, and when 27 deg C and
above, and each time a set of flexural test beams are
made.
Flexural Strength:
i.
Flexural test beams shall be made for eech

day's pour exceeding 4 cu m, plus additional
sets for each 40 cu.m. over and above the first
20 cu.m. Each group of test beams shell be
molded from the same batch of concrete and
shall consist of a sufficient number of
specimens to provide two flexural strength
tests at each test age. The specimens shall be
mede in accordance with ASTM C31. At the
start of paving operations and when the
aggregate source, aggregate characteristics, or
mix design is changed, additional groups of
test beams may be required until Engineer is
satisfied that the concrete mhc complies with
the
strength
requirements
of
these
specifications. Test eges shell be 7 days and
28days.
ii.
The flexural strength of the concrete shall meet

the following requirements:
+16 mm.
ix.
Pavement Marking
Do not apply pavement marking paint until layout,

colors and placement have been verified by the Engineer.
The average of any 4 consecutive strength

tests, tested at the end of 28 days, shell be
equal to or greater than the specified
flexural strength;
~
~
Ministry af Trnna.,art &
Con,munlcnt~ona
DGRlT
~
~<Concrete and Concrete Structures
Not more than 20 percent of the beams

tested at the end of 28 days shall have a
flexural strength less than the specified
strength;
No specimen shall have a flexural strength
less than 90% of the specified flexural
strength.
m.
Specimens, which are obviously defective,

shall not be considered In the determination of
the strength. When it appears that the test
specimens will fail to conform to the
requirements for strength, Engineer shall have
the right to order changes In the concrete mix
sufficient to increase the strength to meet the
requirements. When a satisfactory relationship
between 7-days and 28-day strengths has been
established and approved, the 7-day test
results may be used as an indication of the 28
day strengths. However, the 7-day test results
will not replace the results of the 28-day tests If
the 28-day resu Its fall below t he requirements.
4
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent
testing and inspection agency to sample materials,
perform tests, and submit test repons during concrete
placement according to requirements specified in this
Clause.
5
Testing Services:
Testing shall be performed
accordlng to the following requirements:
i,
Sampling Fresh Concrete:

Representative
samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for
s!ump to comply with ASTM C 94.
ii.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of

placement
for
each
flexural
and/or
compressive-strength test, but not tess than
one test for each day's pour of each type of
concrete. Additional tests will be required
when concrete consistency changes.
iii.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one t est

hourly when air temperature is 4 deg C and
below and when 27 deg C and above, and one
test for each set of flexural and/or compressivestrength speclmens.
iv.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C

31M; one set of four standard cylinders for
each
compressive-st rength
test,
unless
otherwise Indicated. Cylinders shall be molded
and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens
unless field-cured test specimens are required.
v.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one

set for each day's pour of each concrete class
exceeding 4 cu.m., but less than 19 cu.m., plus
one set for each additional 3B cu.m. One
specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two
specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
5-58
vi .
When frequency of testing will provide fewer

than five compressive-strength tests for a given
class of concrete, testing shall be conducted
from at I east fove randomly selected batches o r
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
vii.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less

than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated
and corrective procedures shall be provided for
protecting and curing in-place concrete.
v iii.
Strength level of concrete will be considered

satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive compressive-strength test results
equal or exceed specified compressive strength
and no individua I compressive-strength test
result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 3.4 MPa.
6
Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer,
concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours o f
testing.
Reports of compressive-strength tests shall
contain Project identification name and number, date of
concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in
pavement. design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive
breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28day tests.
7
Nondestructive Testing : Impact hammer, sonoscope,
or other nondestructive device m!IY be permitted by
Engineer but will not be used as the sole basis for
approval or rejection.
8
Additional Tests:
Testing agency shall make
additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate
slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer.
Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy
of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or by other methods as directed.
5.7.3.22
Repalts and Protection
Remove alld replace concrete pavement that is

broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet
requirements in the Specification
2
Drill test cores where directed by Engineer when
necessary to determine magnitvde of cracks or defective
t reas. Fill core holes In satisfactory pavement areas with
Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy
11dhesive.
3
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from
pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When
construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as
clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage
of materials as they occur.
4
Maintain concrete pavement free from stains,
discoloration, dirt, and other foreign materiaL Sweep
Sultanate of Omen. Stonc!ord Spoafoe.liom for RQO<I & endge Conoto
concrete pavement not more than two days before date

scheduled for Substantial Comp' etion inspactions.
the joint shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's

expense.
5.7.3.23
5.7.4
Oeterminat'on of Concrete Thickness
1
Thickness of concrete pavement shall be determined
by average caliper measurement of cores taken from
sections of the pavement as stated in Item 2 below,
rounded upwards taken to the nearest mm.
2
Pavement sections shall consist of each 300 lin.m.
length in each paver lane. The last section in each lane
shall be 300 m plus the fractional part of 300 m remaining.
Other areas such as intersections, entrances, ramps, etc
shall be measured as one section each and the thickness
of each shall be determined separately. Small irregular
unit areas may be included as part of another section,
3
One core shall be taken from each section by the
Contractor at approved locations and in the presence of
the Engineer. When the measurement of the core from
any pavement section is not deficient by more than 5 mm
from the specified thickness, the core will be deemed to be
of the specified thickness as shown on the Oraw'ngs.
4
When the measurement of the core from any
pavement section is deficient by more than 5 mm but not
more than 20 mm, 2 additional cores spaced at not less
than 100 mm shall be taken and used together with the
first core to determine the average thickness of such
section.
When the measurement of the core from any

pavement section is less than the specified thickness by
more than 20 mm, the average thickness of such section
shall be determined by taking additional cores at not less
than 5 m intervals parallel to the centerline in each
direction from the affected location until, in each direction,
a core is taken which is not deficient by more than 20 mm.
Exploratory cores for deficient thickness will not be used
in average thickness determinations.
2
Reinforced concrete pavement shell be measured in
cubic meters of the paved area multiplied by the executed
slab thickness (as approved by the Eng'neerl and shall
include the same items detailed in Item 1 of Clause 5 7.4
above plus the reinforcement Steel material furnished,
spliced, jointed and placed all as shown on the
Contractor's shop drawings that are approved by the
Engineer.
3
The rates in the Bill of Quantities shall be deemed to
include furnishing of all associated concrete and joint
component materials, preparation of bases, concrete
mixing, placing, compacting, finishing and curing, as well
as all joint sawing, cutting and cleaning operations,
drilling and installing dowels and deformed tie bars and
other joint accessories, and all tests, all as detailed on
Drawings and in the Specifications.
5.7.5
Deflclency In Thlclcn-u
Detarmlnecljlf_Cores (mml
o:o to 5:o
5.1to 10.0
10:1 to 15.0
15.1to.2o:-o
> 20.0
Proportion of AI'N
Meaured for hyment
100%
90%
75%
so%
Basis of Payment

materials, transporting and placing, for labor, equipment,
of the work.
1
5.7.6
6
Where the average thickness of concrete pavement is
deficient by more than 5 mm but not more than 20 mm
adjustments shall be made In the area measurements as
shown In Table 5.7.3.1.
1
Unreinforced concrete pavement shall be measured
in cubic meters computed as the paved area multiplied by
the executed slab thickness as approved by the Engineer.
i.
Unreinforced Cement Concrete

Pavement
(cu.m.)
ii.
Reinforced Cement Concrete

Pavement
(cu.m.)
5.8
Joint Sealers for Concrete

Pavement
5.8.1
Description
This Sub-section describes joint sealers for concrete

pavement as shown on Drawings.
0%
Table 5.7.3.1: Concrete Thickness Deficiency
5.8.2
Materials
7
When the pavement is more than 20 mm deficient in
thickness, the Contractor shall remove such deficient areas
and replace them with concrete pavement of the specified
quality and thickness, all at his own expense.
6.8.2.1
Materials, General
8
When the limits of a deficient area to be removed
and replaced are within 3 m of an expansion, contraction
or construction joint, the entire concrete pavement up to
1
Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and
other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field expert ence.
~~
Minltrv of Trtmport & Communication OGilLT
5.8.2.2
Elastomeric HotPourecs Joint Sealants
I.
Remove all foreign material from joint

substrates which could interfere w ith adhesion
of joint sealer,including dust; paints, except for
permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved
for
sealant
adhesion
and
compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint
sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water
repellents; water and surface dirt.
ii.
Remove laitance and form release agents from

concrete.
ASTM D 3569 Joint Sealants, Hot-Poured,

Elastomeric, Jet-Fuel-Resistant type, for Portland Cement
Concrete Pavements.
5.8.2.3
Joint Sealant Backing
General: Provide sealant backings of material and

type which are non-staining; are compatible with joint
substrates. sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications ind:cated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
testing.
Plastic Foam Joi nt Fillers: Preformed, compressible,
2
resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below;
nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute
to producing optimum sealant performance.
3
BondBreaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other
plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rig:d, inflexible joint
filler materials or joi nt surfaces at back of joint where such
adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where apptlcabl e.
5.8.2.4
Miscellaneous Materials
Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer

manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined
from
preconstruction joint sealer substrate tests and field tests.
2
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials,
which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent
nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues
or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion
or in-service performance.
Joint Priming;
Prime joint substrates where
2
indicated or where recommended by joint sealer
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealersubstrate tests or prior experience, Apply primer to
comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations.
Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to
prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by
such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove
sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
5.8.3.3
1
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers'
printed installation insttuctions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
2
Hot poured Seelants;
i.
The joint sealant shalf be applied solid,

uniformly from bottom to top and shalf be
filled without formation of entrapped air or
vo[ds. A backing material shall be placed as
shown on the plans and shalf be non-adhesive
to the concrete or the sealant material. The
heating kettle shall be an indirect heating type,
constructed as a double boiler. A positive
temperature control and mechanical agitation
shalf be provided. The sealant shall not be
heated to more than 11c below the safe
heating temperature. The safe heating
temperature can be obtained from the
manufacturer's shipping container. A direct
connecting pressure type extruding device with
noules shaped for insertion into the joint shall
be provided. Any sealant spilled on the surface
of the pavement shall be removed immediately.
i~
Backup materia Is and bond breakers shall be

compatible with the sealant, shalf not adhere to
the sealant, shall be compressible without
extruding the sealant. and shalf recover to
maintain contact with the joint faces when the
joint is open.
3
Maski ng Tape: Provide non-staining, nonabsorbent
type compatib1e with joint sealants and to surfaces
adjacent to joints.
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
Examination
1
Examine joints for compliance with requirements for
joi nt configuration, installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not
proceed with Installation of joint sealers until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
5.8.3.2
Preparation
Clean out joints

Surface Cleanil"'g of Joints:
Immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with
recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the
following requirements:
5..60
Installation of Joint Sealers
Sultonnte of Oman, Stmd1td Speafie~tians lor Rood & Bndge Conotructian 21110
5.8.3.4
5.9.3
Cleaning
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent

to joints as work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint
sealers and of products in which joints occur.
5.8.3.5
5.8.4

No separate measurement is mede for joint sealers

and no items are included in the Bill of Quantities. The
work is considered as subsidiary to the concrete pavement
and its cost is deemed to be included under payment for
concrete pavement items as measured under Clauses 5.7.4,
5.7.5 and 5.7.6.
5.9
Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts

and Headwalls, Wingwalls, CutOff Walls and Aprons
5.9.1
Description
This Sub-section describes the requirements for

construction of reinforced concrete box culverts, in-situ or
precast, and headwalls, wing walls, cut-oft walls and
aprons tor box and pipe culverts, including earthworks,
structural concrete and aII other encilla ry items necessary
for the completion of the structures to the lines, grades
and dimensions as shown on the Drawings. These
requirements are additional to the requirements of
preceding Sections of the Specification.
5.9.2
Materials
Concrete
Sub-section 5.1
concrete Materials and Mixes
Reinforcing Steel
Sub-section 5.2
"Reinforcing Steel"
2
Concrete classes shall be those prescribed on the
relevant Drawings.
Backfill shall be as specified in Section 2 "Earthwork".
Section 2
Earthwork
Sub-section 5.2
Reinforcing Steel
Sub-section 5.3
Reinforced Concrete Structures.
2
Box culverts, headwalls. wing walls, cutoft walls and
aprons shall be to the lines and levels shown on the
Drawings. Unless otherwise shown, culverts shall have a
constant fall of 1:100 along their centerline.
3
Box culverts shall be constructed In sections such
that expansion joints are located at Intervals which shall
be so spaced as to prevent the box culvert from behaving
as a long beam unless such structural action has been
allowed for in the design. Unless shown on the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer, the spacing of expansion
joints shall be no greater than 35 meters.
Unless otherwise indicated, expansion joints shall
4
also be used at the culvert ends where the culvert meets
the wing walls and apron slabs.
5
Where box culverts are located in road embankments,
the embankments shall first be constructed in accordance
with Paragraph 2.5 3.4 "Embankment Construction". The
compacted embankments shall then be excavated in
trenches for the culverts. This requirement may be
dispensed with by a written permission from the Engineer
to so do. Where a culvert Is to be constructed under a
high embankment, this requirement may be relaxed or
dispensed with provided the fill is designed to arch over
the cuI vert or the culvert Is specially designed for an
increased surcharge load from the embankment.
Embankments may be constructed to within 1 m above
the culvert then construction carried out as above.
6
For culverts located below firm ground, the
excavation shall be carried out in trenches in accordance
with Section 2 "Earthwork".
7
Backfilling and compaction shall be carried out in
layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness and
the difference in the levels of backfill on either side of the
culvert shall et no time exceed 500 mm. Start backfilling
after having attained 75 percent of the culvert 28-day
concrete strength.
8
Materials shall conform to the relevant requirements

of the following Sub-sections of the Specification:
Construction work shall comply with the relevant

requirements of the following sections:
Protection
Protect joint sealers during and after curing period

from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other
causes so that they ere without deterioration or damage at
time of Substantial Completion. It, despite such protection,
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated joint sealers Immediately and
reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer
Installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from
original work.
All concreting shall be carried out in dry conditions.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or

9
instructed by the Engineer, the base slab of the box culvert
for its entire length shall first be completed before
proceeding with the walls and roof slab. The construction
joints in the walls shall be located at not less than 100 mm
above the top of the base slab. Unless shown otherwise
on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the walls and
roof slabs shall be concreted in one pour between
expansion joints.
10 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer, the cut-oft wall shall be cast
against earth.
~..A,./
Mini try o' Trnnsport & Communicotlon . DGRl T
11 Contrete placing, forms, finishing, curing and

jointing shaU be done in accordance with Section 5.3
Reinforced Concrete Structures".
5.9.4
The work sha~ be measured according to the

dimensions shown on the Drawings in accordance with
the rules for measurement stated in Sub-section 5.1
' Concrele Materials and Mixes' and Sub-section
5.2 'Reinforcing Steel'.
2
Where the Contractor uses precast units as an
alternative, any extra material and quantity necessary
shall not be measured.
All other work such as excavation for the cut-off walls
3
formwork. construction and expansion joints and the like,
shall be included as subsidiary work whose costs are
deemed to be included in the rates and prices for concrete
and reinforcement.

measured as provided for above, shall be paid for at the
unit rates in the Bill of Quantities, which rates shall be full
compensation for supplying. curing, finishing concrete
and cutting, shaping and fixing reinforcing steel and for
labor, materials, equipment, tools and other items
necessary for the proper completion of the works.
6.9.6
Specification for Bitumen-Saturated

Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing (AASHTO M 117)
ASTM 0449
Specifications for Asphalt Used in

Dampproofing,
and
Waterproofing
(AASHTO M 1151
ASTM 0450
Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Used in

Roofing,
Oampproofing,
and
Waterproofing (AASHTO M 1 18)
ASTM 0490
Specifications for Road Tar (AASHTO M

52)
5.10.2
Materials
6.10.2.1
Asphalt
Waterproofing asphalt shell conform to AASHTO M

11 5 (ASTM D 449); Type I for use below ground, and Type
II for use above ground.
2
Primer for use with asphalt in waterproofing shall
conform to AASHTO M 116 (ASTM 0 41).
Basis of Payment
5.9.5
ASTM D 173
6.10.2.2
Bitumen
W1terproofing bitumen shaH conform to AASHTO M

118lASTM 0 450); Type II unless otherwise specified.
2
Primer for use with coal-tar bitumen In dampproofing
tnd waterproofing shall conform to AASHTO M 121
(ASTM D 43). It shalt be a distillate of coal-gas tar or cokeoven tar.
Items in Bill of Quantities

5.10.2.3
Reinforced concret e box culverts, head walls. wing

walls and cut-off walls are separately identified in the Bill
of Quantities and the relevant items as stated in Subsections 5.1 and 5 2 are Included.
5.10
Waterproofing for Structures
5.1 0.1
Description
6.10.1.1
Scope
Waterproofing Fabric
Waterproofing fabric shall conform to AASHTO M

117 {ASTM 0 173).
5.10.2.4
Self.Adhesive Polyethylene Sheet
,
Flexible,
preformed
waterproof
membrane
comprising strong, hi gh-density polyethylene film w ith
self-adhesive rubber/b itumen compound. and having the
following minimum properties:
Total th ickness
1.5 mm
Weight
1.6 kg/m 2
This Sub-section describes watarproofing membrane,

sand dampproofing courses to external concrete surfaces
in contact with earth and epoxy coating to internal
surfaces of concrete walls, slabs, and beds, all as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Elongation
21 0% long : 160% trans.
Tear resistance
340 N/mm long.; 310

N/mm trans.
6.10.1.2
Puncture resistance
220 N 65 mm
References
American Society for Testing and Materiels
[ASTMI~
ASTM D 41
Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in

Roofing.
Dampproofing,
and
Walerproofing (AASHTO M 1161
ASTM 043
Specification for Coat Tar Primer Used

In
Roofing,
Dt mpproofing,
and
Waterproofing (AASHTO M 1211
s.62
Tensile strength
5.10.2.5
: 42N/mm2
Tar for Absorptive Treatment
Ter fo r absorptive treatment shall be a liquid water

gas tar that conforms to the following requirements;
Speclfic gravity, 25"C
1.030 to 1.100
Specific viscosity at 40"C (Engler),

not more than
3.0
Total di stillat e. percel"'( by

welght, to 3ooc, not more than
50.0
S<Jitonate of OmBn. Standrrd SpedfiGJ~om IO< R~ & Bridge Coratnx:la 20
Bitumen lsoluble in carbon disulfide)

98.0
not less than, percent
Water, not more than, percent
5. 10.2.6
3.0
When necessary the Engineer may require the surface to

be scrubbed with water and a stiff brush, after which the
surface shall be allowed to dry before application of the
primer.
Tar Seal Coat

5.10.3.2
1
Tar seal coat shall conform to AASHTO M 52, Grade
RTCBS lASTM D 490).
5.10.2.7
Proprietary Waterproofing Systems
Proprietary waterproofing systems

shall be
bituminous membranes reinforced with layers of suitable
reinforcement, bituminous coated polythene sheet,
plasticized polyvinyl ch Ioride sheet, other approved
membranes or applications of resinous reinforced
coatings. The type to be used shall be as indicated on the
Drawings and shall be chosen according to its location
and serviceability. The specific system shall be approved
alter site trials, should the Engineer decide these to be
necessary.
5.10.2.8
Epoxy Coating System
An approved epoxy coating system shall be

furnished and applied to the internal concrete surfaces of
culverts and open channels as shown on the Drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. The thickness of the epoxy
coating shall be at least 400 microns in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations
Inspection, Delivery and Storage
All waterproofing materials shall be tested before

shipment. Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, they
shall be tested at the place of manufacture, and, when so
tested, a copy of the test results shall be sent to the
Engineer by the chemist or inspection bureau which has
been designated to make the tests, and each package shall
have affixed to it a label, seal, or other mark of
identification, showing that it has been tested and found
acceptable, and identifying the package with the
laboratory tests.
2
Factory inspection is preferred, but in lieu thereof
and/or addition thereof, the Engineer may order that
representative samples, properly identified, be sent to him
for test prior to shipment of the materials. After delivery
of the materials, representative check samples shall be
taken which shall determine the acceptability of the
materials.
3
All materials shall be delivered to the work in original
containers, plainly marked with the manufacturer's brand
or label.
5.10.3
4
Waterproofing and dampprooling material shall be
stored in a dry, protected place. Rolls of waterproofing
fabric and membranes shall not be stored on end.
5.1 0.3.1
Surface Preparation
5.10.3.3
Waterproofing:
I.
ii.
All concrete surfaces to be waterproofed shall

be reasonably smooth and free from
projections or holes which might cause
puncture of the membrane. The surface shall
be dry, so as to prevent the formation of steam
when the hot asphalt or tar is applied, and,
immediately before the application of the
waterproofing. the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned of dust, projecting tying wire and loose
material.
No waterproofing shall be done in wet weather,
nor when the temperature is below 4 degrees C,
without special authorization from the Engineer.
Should the surface of the concrete become
temporarily damp, it shall be covered with a 50
mm layer of hot sand, which shall be allowed
to remain in place from 1 to 2 hours, or long
enough to produce a warm and surface-dried
condition, after which the sand shall be swept
back, uncovering sufficient surface for
beginning work, and the operation repeated as
the work progresses.
the
2
Dampproofing: The surface to which
dampproofing coating shall be applied shall be cleaned of
all loose and foreign material and dirt and shall be dry.
Asphalt and Bitumen Waterproofing Fabric
Asphalt shall be heated to a temperature between

150 degrees C and 175 degrees C and tar for hot
application shall be heated to a temperature between 93
degrees C and 120 degrees C with frequent stirring to
avoid local overheating. The heating kettles shall be
equipped with thermometers.
In all cases, the waterproofing shall begin at the low
2
point of the surface to be waterproofed, so that water will
run over and not against or along the laps.
3
The first strip of fabric shall be of half-width; the
second shall be full-width, lapped the full-width of the first
sheet; and the third and each succeeding strip shall be full
width and lapped so that there will be two layers of fabric
at all points with laps not less than 50 mm wide. All end
laps shall be at least 300 mm.
4
Beginning at the low point of the surface to be
waterproofed, a coating of primer shall be applied and
allowed to dry before the first coat of asphalt is applied.
The waterproofing shall then be applied as follows.
5
Beginning at the I ow point of the surface to be
waterproofed, a section about 500 mm wide and the full
length of the surface shall be mopped with the hot asphalt
or tar. Immediately following the mopping, the first strip
of fabric, or half-width, shall be rolled and pressed into
place so as to eliminate all air bubbles and obtain close
conformity with the surface. This strip and an adjacent
' - . ,~
/
Monltrv ol Trnnaport & Cammuolcatlon DGRl T
section of the surface of a width equal to slightly more

than half of the width of the fabric being used shall then
be mopped with hot asphalt or tar, and e full w idth of the
fabric shall be rolled Into th:S, completely covering the first
strip, and pressed into place as before. This second st rip
and an adjacent section of the concrete surface shall then
be mopped with hot asphalt or tar and the third strip of
fabric "shingled" on so as to lap the first strip not less than
50 mm. This process shall be continued until the entire
surface is covered, each strip of fabric lapping at least 50
mm over the last strip. The entire surface shall then be
given a final mopping of hot asphalt or tar.
6
The completed waterproofing shall be a firmly
bonded membrane composed of two layers of fabric and
three mappings of asphalt or tar, together w ith a coating
of primer. Under no circumstances shall one layer of
fabric touch another layer et any point or touch the surface,
as there must be at least three complete mopplngs of
asphalt or tar.
In all cases the mopping on concrete shall cover the
7
surface so that no gray spots appear, and on cloth it shalf
be sufficiently heavy to completely conceal the weave. On
horizontal surfaces not less than 49 liters of asphalt or tar
shall be used for each 10 square meter of finished work,
and on vertical surfaces not less than 61 liters shall be
used for each 10 square meter. The work shall be so
regulated that, at the close of a day's work. all cloth that is
laid shall have received the final mopping of asphalt or tar.
Special care shall be takan at all laps to see that they are
thoroughly sealed down.
AI the edges of the membrane and at any points
8
where it is punctured by such appurtenances as drains or
pipes, suitable provisions shall be made to prevent water
from getting between the waterproofing and the
waterproofed surface.
All flashing at curbs and against girders, spandrel
9
walls, etc., shall be done with separate sheets lapping the
main membrane not less than 300 mm. Flashing shall be
closely sealed either with a metal counter-flashing or by
embedding the upper edges of the flashing in a groove
poured full of joint filler.
10 Joints which are essentialty open joints but which are
not designed to provide for expansion shell first be
caulked with oakum end lead wool and then filled w ith hot
joint filler.
5.10.3.4
Proprietary Waterproofing Membranes
Proprietary waterproofing membranes shall be

installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and shall be laid so that no air is trapped
between it end the concrete surface or between successive
layers of sheeting.
2
Unless otherwise specified. joints between sheets
shall be lapped w ith end laps of at least150 mm end side
laps of at least 100 mm. The joints shall be arranged so
that, at no points, are there more than three thicknesses of
sheeting and, as far as possible so that water w ilt drain
away from the exposed edge.
5.10.3.5
Damage Patching of Waterproofing Fabrics
Care shall be taken to prevent Injury to the finished

fabric membrane by workmen or wheelbarrows, or by
throwing any materiel on it. Any damage which may
occur shall be repa"red by patching. Patches sha D extend
at least 300 mm beyond the outermost damaged portion
and the second ply shell extend at least 75 mm beyond the
first.
2
Proprietary waterproofing membranes shaD be
repaired according to the manufacturer's specifications
and es directed bv the Engineer.
5.10.3.6
Dampproofing
Concrete, brick, or other surfaces to be protected by

dampproofing shall be thoroughly d eened before t he
primer Is applied. The surfaces shall then be brush or
spray painted with two or more coats (as ind<cated on t he
Drawl ngsl of tar or as phelt for absorptive treatment.
Below ground not less than two coats shall be applied,
using 0.56 L/square meter of surface. On the wellprimed
surface one application of tar or asphalt seal coat shall be
applied by brush, using 0.45 L/square meter.
2
Care shall be taken to confine all paints to the areas
to be waterproofed and to prevent disfigurement of any
other parts of the structure by dripping or spreading of the
tar or asphalt.
5.10.3.7
Protection of Waterproofing and Dampproofing
11 Expansion joints. both horizontal and vertical, shall

be provided with sheet copper or lead in u or v form in
accordance w ith approved details. After the membrane
has been placed, the joint shall be filled with hot joint filler.
The membrane shall be carried continuously across all
expansion joints.
Waterproofing membranes and dampproofing

courses shall be covered by a protective layer which,
unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawing.s,
shall be a 50 mm coat of mortar composed of one part
Portland cement and two parts send, reinforced midway
between its top and bottom surfaces with wire netting of
150 mm mesh and No. 12 gauge, or an approved
equivalent. The top surface shall be troweled to a smooth,
hard finish and, where required, true to grade.
\2 At the ends of the structure the membrane shall be

carried well down on the abutments and suitable
provision made for all movement.
2
The protection course shall follow the waterproofing
so closely that the letter will not be exposed without
protection for more then 24 hours.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or direct ed
the Engineer, vertical faces waterproofed or
dampproofed shall be protected by a porous concrete
block well of not less than 225 mm thickness. If approved
3
by
5-&t
Sultonate of Oman. Slondord Sporcifoalic ns 101' Rud & Bridge Conolr~~ar 2010
by the Engineer, a proprietary synthetic sheeting may be

used as the protective layer in lieu of the porous concrete
block wall.
5.10.3.8
Testing
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer in writing.

at least one site trial application of the waterproofing
system shall be carried out to determine the suitability of
the surface preparation, method of application and
effectiveness of the protective layer.
The size of
membrane laid shall be not less than 2.0 meters wide and
5.0 meters long.
5.10.4
Piers, columns, frames and exposed surfaces

of abutments and reta'ning walls.
Deck soffit and sides and other exposed
surfaces of deck.
Precast concrete girders and other precast
concrete elements.
Concrete parapets
2
Tar or bituminous painting to surfaces permanently
in contact with backfilled material shall be measured by
the square meter of surface area so painted .
Epoxy coating to internal surfaces of concrete shall

be measured by the square meter of the surface area so
coated.
4
Protection to waterproofing
membrane and
dampproofing course shall not be measured for direct
payment but shall be deemed to be Included in the rates
for waterproofing and dempproofing.
5
Site trials of waterproofing membranes shall not be
measured for direct payment but shell be deemed to be
included in the rates for waterproofing.
6.1 1.1.2
Items in the Bill of Qquantities

Tar or bituminous paint
(State type, number of coats)
sq.m.
ii
Membrane waterproofing
{State type, thickness)
sq.m.
iii
Epoxy coating to internal

surfaces of concrete
(State type, thickness)
sq.m.
5.11
Protective Coating for Concrete
5.11.1
Description
5.11.1.1
Scope
This Subsection describes protective coating on

exposed surfaces of reinforced and prestressed concrete
Submittals
Propr'etary special coating system for the protection

of exposed concrete surfaces shall be pro posed by the
Contractor and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
Submittal shall include the details of the coating type and
coating manufacturer and a list of projects, executed in
environmental conditions similar to those experienced in
the project site, in which the same protective coating
system was successfully used.
2
The Contractor's submittal shall be accompani ed by
the manufacturer' s detailed product specifications
together with application instructions, and guarantee that
the product is suitable for use at the operating
temperatures in the Sultanate.
Trial Panels as specified in Paragraph 5.11.1.4 (1)

shall be provided.
6.11.1.3
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted Work

measured as provided for above will be paid at the unit
rates as specified in the Bill of Quantities, which unit rates
shall be full compensation for furnishing all materiels,
labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other items
necessary for the completion of the Work.
5.10.6
2
The coating system she II be used for the protection
of reinforced concrete structures against carbonation or
chloride induced corrosion. Work includes, but not
necessarily l imited to coating for;
Waterproofing membrane shall be measured by the

square meter of each type, furnished, laid, completed and
accepted.
5.10.5
construction in corrosive or marine environments or other

severe exposure conditions as shown on the Drawings.
Performance Requirements
The coating system shall provide indepth protection

against carbonation and chloride penetration while
permitting water va per transmission from the concrete.
Final color shall be selected by the Engineer.
5.11.1.4
Quality Assurance
Trial Panels:
i.
Prior to applying the system, trial applications

shall be carried out on trial panels made by the
Contractor to the specified finishes. The trial
shall demonstrate the method proposed for
applying the system, coverage, coating
thickness, color and final appeara nee of the
coating. Representatives of the coating
manufacturer shall be present at the trials and
the surface preparation and a pptication of the
coating shall be carried out under their
direction. The Contractor shall, at his own
expense, coat as many panels as required by
the Engineer until a trial panel has been
accepted by the Engineer as satisfactory. The
coated panel, when accepted, will form the
standard against which the corresponding
coating in the works shall be judged. No
~~
Mnltrv of Trnnaport & Comrntr.n\teation
OGRLT
~~<Concrete and Concrete Struc tures
application of the coating in lhe works shall be

undertaken until trials have been completed to
the Engineer's satisfaction.
ii.
Trial panels shall be tested for permeability in

accordance with DIN 1048 and AASHTO T 277
as defined in Paragraph 5.1.3.15 as a check on
the effectiveness of the coating. Acceptance of
the coating shall be based on compliance with
tha following acceptance limits. Based on this
result, the Enginear may reject the work or
require addit iona l coating.
DIN 1048 results for coated surfaces: one
fifth of the limits for the unproteeted
surfaces defined in Paragraph 5.1.3. 15.
AASHTO T 277 test results for coated
surfaces: charge passed should be less
than 500 coulombs.
5.11 .1.5
5.11 .2.3
The topcoat shan be a pure aliphatic acry:lc resin,

decorative, high performance water based, pigmenting
coating. It shall have resistance to water, carbon dioxide
and other air-borne acids and have the ability to allow
passage of water vapor from within the structura. The
topcoat shall have elastomeric and flexural capabilities.
The color shall be selected by the Engineer.
5.11.2.4
- Wet film thickness
650 microns
- Dry film thickness
400 microns
Carbon dioxide diffusion

resistance
Testing
Water vapor transmission
greater than 13
glm1.day
Chloride ion diffusi on
3.63x 1010
cmtsec
Water vapor transmission

Taywood Engineering Laboratories
Reduction i n chloride ion

penetration
Reduct ion in chloride ion penetration

BS 1881: Part 124
Tear resistance
Crack bridgeability
Tear resistance
ASTM D624
Crack bridgeability
BREmethod
2
Where test methods are not specified, the procedure
for establishing compliance with the specification
requirements sheM be agreed w ith the Engineer.
Materials
General
The coating system shall consist of a penetrating,

reactive primer and an acrylic topcoat system to minimize
ingress of acidic gases, chlorides and water.
5.1 1.2.2
Primar
The primer shall be a low viscosity silane-siloxane

acrylic blend dissolved in a penetrating organic carrier.
The primer shall have the capability to penetrate end
produce a chamically bound hydrophobic barrier to
prevent the passage of chloride end su lfate ions. The
primer shall elso be film forming to condition and stabil ize
the substrate prior to the application of the topcoat. The
primer shall be applied In full accordance w ith the
5-86
R value at 3251'
greater than 161
m
Carbon diOlcide diffusion resistance (R

value)
Chloride ion diffusion

5.11 .2.1
Speclflcations
The material employed for the coati ng shall complv

w ith the following requirements:
Testing of the coating shall conform to the following:
5.11.2
Topcoat
minimum94%
at 28 days
7.3 kNimm
1. 5 mm
Adhesion
m inimum 1.0
N/mm'
Reduction In water absorption

(measured agai nst a control
concrete sample)
mi nimum82
%at 28 days
when testad at a
water-cement
ratio 0.5
5.11.3
6.11.3.1
General
The Contractor shall adhere strictly to the

manufacturer' s recommendations regarding the use,
storage, application and sa(ety rules in respect of the
approved materials.
2
During storage, mixing and application, the
Contractor shall comply with the health end safety and
environmental protection recommendations of the
m anufacturer and governing authorities.
6.11.3.2
Inspection of Concrete
The Contractor shaD not proceed with the surface

finish or making good of concrete surfaces until he has
recel1111d the Engineer's permission to do so end he shall
not epply cement slutry or mortar or any other coating to
t he concrete surfaces from which the formwork has been
struck untU the Engineer has inspected and approved the
concreta.
S...lton.,to of Ornan. St..-.l

....;._<l
_ ...:...._
Speci!O:
_ ""
- _ _ _ _ _
B_.d.:.
g_ C
_o;..
no_t_
r ....,..
__ ----....
5.1 1.3.3
Surface Preparation
Before application, all surfaces must be dry and free

from oil, grease, loose particles, decayed matter, moss or
algae growth and general curing compounds.
2
All such contamination end laitance must be
removed by the use of sweep sand blasting, high pressure
jetting or equivalent mechanical means.
3
Before proceeding to apply the protective coatings,
all surfaces which ere not to be coated, but which may be
affected by the application of the coating shall be fully
masked.
4
Blow holes and areas of pining shall be made good
with a one part modified cementitious material and
allowed to cure in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. In particular, the application shall be In
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
with respect to the maximum application thickness.
5.11.3.4
Approval Prior to Coating Application
The Engineer's approval must ba obtained prior to

applying the coating system in the works. Before giving
the approval, the Engineer will need to be satisfied as to
the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
5.11.3.5
All construction work in the immediate vicinity of

the structure to be coated has been completed.
The surface preparation of the structure has
been completed.
The whole of the structure can be coated in a
continuous operation.
Adequate measures have been taken to protect
the property of third parties, including vehicles,
from coating splatters.
The weather conditions accord with the coating
manufacturer's directions for coating application.
Application
The exposed concrete surfaces shall be conditioned

by the application of the penetrating hydrophobic primer.
The primer shall be allowed to dry in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
2
The Contractor shall than apply two coats of the
pigmented topcoat in accordance with the manufacturer's
Instructions. The finished coating shall be pinhole free.
The color and finish shall be agreed with the Engineer.
5.12
Bridge Load Testing
5.12.1
Description
All bridges shall be load tested unless otherwise

agreed by the Engineer.
2
The aim of the testing is not to measure the actual
factor of safety of the bridge but intended to verify the
design and construction of the bridge under normal
loading conditions. Measurements are, accordingly, meant
to give an order of magnitude and fine precision is not
required.
3
The date of conducting the load tasting shall be fixed
by the Engineer and shall be at least 90 days after all
concrete structural elements ere constructed. Load testing
may be carried out before or after opening the bridge for
traffic.
4
If the bridge is open to traffic before being load
tested, the Engineer may impose restrictions on highway
loading over the bridge until testing is satisfactorily
completed, such as banning the passage of heavy traffic
loading of the order of the Oman Special Truck, or any
other measures.
5
Load testing comprises:
i.
ii.
iii.
Application of load as described in Clause 5.12.2.

Detailed visual inspection before, during end
after the testing as described In Clause 5.12.3.
Measurement of deflections and other quantities
as described in Clause 5. 12.4.
6
If the Works include a number of similar bridges
testing may be limited as follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
At least one bridge shall be tested for all the

tests specified in this Sub-Section.
The other bridges may be subject only to testing
by static toads.
The latter test may be further simplified by
reducing the number of tests. It is
recommended, however, to measure the
deflection at, at least, one point per span.
7
Bridges are considered similar when their
superstructures have the same design, same material
specifications and are constructed by the same contractor.
3
The coating shall be applied by spray, roller or brush
to achieve a finish acceptable to the Engineer.
8
If the results of the load testing are unfavorable, and
leave some doubt as to the ability of the bridge to
withstand the loads it is supposed to carry, more elaborate
testing shall be considered, including non-destructive full.
scale testing.
5.11.4
5.12.2
Load Application
5.12.2.1
Composition of Applied Load

No separate measurement is made for protective

coating and no items are included in the Bill of Quantities
for direct payment. The work is considered as subsidiary
work. the cost of which will be deemed to be Included in
the unit rates for the relevant BOQ Items for concrete
described and measured for payment under the provisions
of Section 5.1 "Concrete Materials and Mixes".
The applied load shall consist of a number of loaded

trucks sufficient to satisfy the requirements of this Clause.
2
The loads shall be applied in two types of tests: by
static loads and moving loads.
3
The I oads shall ba restricted to the carrlageways and
no load is applied on the sidewalks.
5-67
~
~
Ministry ofTranaport &: Cornmun;c4ltiona
DGRLT
~
~<::concrete and Concrete Structures
4
The stipulations of this Clause are set as minimum
requirements. In particular cases, when there is doubt
about the quality of the bridge, the Engineer may impose
more severe loads.
5.12.2.2
Testing by Static Load
The loaded trucks shall be positioned on the

carriageways and grouped together in the longitudinal
and transverse directions such that the straining actions
they develop are between 67 and 75 percent of the
maximum straining actions developed by all unfactored
loading cases.
2
The straining actions considered do not include any
load factor magnification.
3
The test starts by loading the bearings before
applying any loads on the spans in order to activate
immediately the bearing deformation, and then the
measured deflections will be significant.
Bridges with simply supported spans shall have the

loads applied independently on every span.
Bridges with continuous spans shall have the loads

applied independently on every span. then on every two
adjacent spans, with no loads on the others, to obtain the
maximum hogging (negative) bending moment over the
support The latter loading shall be repeated for every
intermediate support.
The loads shall be applied gradually, one truck at a
time. After each load increment, there will be a
consolidation period of one hour, or as instructed by the
Engineer, during which no load is applied. Measurements
shall be recorded at the beginning and end of the loading
increment period and of the consolidation period.
Removal of the load shall also be done by equal

decrements with a consolidation period of one hour, or as
instructed by the Engineer. Measurements shall be
recorded at the beginning and end of the loading
decrement period and of the consolidation period.
5.12.2.3
Testi ng by Moving Load
Out of the loaded trucks used for static loading of the

bridge, a number shall be selected equal to the number of
traffic Janes. The selection shall consider those with the
heaviest axle loads. The trucks shall travel in one direction
along the whole length of the bridge at the largest
possible speed with due consideration of safety measures.
2
Measurements shall be recorded during passage of
the moving load.
5.12.3
Visual lnspection
All parts of the structure that can be accessed by

platforms, scaffoldings or other means shall be visually
inspected jointly by the Engineer and the Contractor
before start of testing.
2
During static load testing, visual inspection shall also
be carried out in the consolidation periods at reasonable
at intervals.
6-68 .
3
After the completion of testing, a detailed visual
i nspection shall also be carried out to all accessible parts
of the bridge.
Visual inspections shall be complemented with

photographs.
5.12.4
Measurements
As a minimum the deflections of each span and the

deformation of the bearings shall be measured.
2
Measurement of the deflections will be carried out by
topographic equipment or by deftectometers installed on
scaffoldings independent of the structure as instructed by
the Engineer.
3
If specified or instructed by the Engineer, additional
measurements may be requested such as the strains in
the steel reinforcement and/or concrete surface.
4
Digital recording of measurements by electronic
means is encouraged for important structures, particularly
for strain measurements and moving load testing. It may
be imposed by instruction of the Engineer.
The ambient temperature shall be recorded with

every measurement made.
6
A report shall be prepared by the Contractor
Including the
testing
procedure, measurements,
interpretation and conclusion.
5.12.5
Load testing of the bridge shall be measured by the

number of bridges tested as instructed by the Engineer,
inclusive of all static load cases and moving load testing
and inclusive of the provision and operation of the loaded
trucks, measuring and recording equipment of any type
and their calibration, platforms and scaffoldings for visual
inspection and of accepted testing report.
5.12.6
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above shall be paid at the unit
rates in the Bill of Quantities. These rates shall be full
compensation for the provision of tabor, materials,
equipment. tools and other items necessary for proper
completion of the Work.
5.12.7

Bridge loading test
nr.
Page No.
Ref.
Title
6.1
Description
6--1
8.1 .1
SumtnMV
Deflnltlone
8-1
6.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Submittllll
Quality AAuraneo
8-1
8-1
8.1.5
6.1 .8
Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Coordination
8-2
8-2
6.2
Materials
6--2
8.2.1
Structural-Steel Materials and Steel
Rallina
8.2.2
Bolt8, Connoc:tot'8, and And1oR
8.2.3
8.2.4
Grout
8.2.6
8.2.6
Febricatlon
Shop Connec:tlona
Sourca Quality Control
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
Examination
Praparatlon
8-1
8-2
8-2
&-3
&-3
8-4
8-4
6-4
8-4
6.3.3
Eractfon
8-S
8-5
8.3A
8.3.5
8.3.6
Orthotropk:-Dec:lt Super Sti'Ud\lra

Field Connoc:tlona
8-5
8-8
8-8
6.4
6--6
6.6
Basis of Payments
6--7
6.6
6-7
Sultaru~te of Oman.
id & (
Slandonl s-;f.c
Structural Steel and other Metal Work
Description
6.1
6.1.1
Show backing bars that are to be removed and

supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are
to remain.
iv. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts,
distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical highstrength bolted connections.
v. Identify members and connections of the
seismic-load-resisting system.
vi. Indicate locations end dimensions of protected
zones.
vii. Identify demand critical welds.
Summary
This Section describes:

i.
Structural steel.
ii. Grout.
iii. Steel pipe and tube railings.
6.1 .2
Definitions
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame,

as classified by AISC 303. 'Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges.'
2
Seismic-load-Resisting System (SlRS): Elements of
structural-steel frame shown on the Drawings. designated
as 'SLRS' or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on
Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their
connections.
3
Heavy Sections:
follows:
Rolled and built-up sections as
i.
4
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and
Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide details
according to AWS D1.1i01 .1M, 'Structural Welding Code
Steel' for each welded joint qualified by testing, including
the following:
i.
Power source (constant current or constant
voltage).
ii. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for
demand critical welds.
Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with

flanges thicker than 38 mm.
ii. Welded built-up members with plates thicker
than50mm.
iii. Column base plates thicker than 50 mm.
5
Qualification Data:
Submit details for qualified
Installer. fabricator. professional engineer, and testing
agency.
4
Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of
structural members indicated as 'Protected Zone' on
Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural
elements to protected zones are limited.
7
Paint Compatibility Certificates: Submit certificates
from manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
5
Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of
which would result in significant degradation of the
strength and stiffness of the SeismicLoedResisting
System and which are indicated as 'Demand Crifcal' or
'Seismic Critical' on Drawings.
6.1.3
8
Mill test reports for structural steel, including
chemical and physical properties.
9
Product Test Reports:
following:
I.
ii.
Iii.
Submittals
Product Data: Submit data for each type of product

specified or shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
2
LEED (leadership in Energy and Environmental
Design) :Submit the following as directed by the Engneer
i.
Product
data
for
Credit
MR 4. 1
and
Credit MR 4 2. For products having recycled
content, include documentation indicating
percentages by weight of post-consumer and
pre-consumer recycled content and a statement
indicating costs for each product having recycled
content
3
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as required
by the specification and directed by the Engineer to show
fabrication of structural-steel components
i.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices,
camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
ii. Include embedment drawings.
iii. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols.
distinguishing between shop and field wel ds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld
Welding certificates.
iv.
v.
vi.
10
Submit reports for
the
Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical

properties and chemical analysis.
Direct tension indicators.
Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer
assemblies.
Sheer stud connectors.
Shop primers.
Non-shrink grout.
Source quality-control reports.
6.1.4
Quality Assurance
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who

participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and
is des'gnated an AISC-Certified Plant or approved by the
Engineer.
2
Installer Qualif.cations: A qualified installer who
participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and
is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE or
approved by the Engineer.
3
Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to

Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or SSPCQP 3,
"Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop
Painting Applicators' or approved by the Engineer.
A~ SC's
" J~
MJniatrv of Tronaport AI Cornmunicatlona . OGAL T
/"".~<:structural
Steel and other Metal Work
4
Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures and
personnel
shall
be
qualified
according
to
AWS D1.11D1 .1M, 'Structural Welding Code . Steel",
t. Welders and welding operators performing work
on bottomflenge, demand-critical welds shell
pass the supplemental welder qual!f~eatlon
testing, as required by AWS 01.8 or shall be
approved by the Client Authority. FCAWS and
FCAWG shall be considered separate processes
for welding personnel qualification.
5
Comp-ly with applicable provisions o f the following
specifications end documents:
i. AISC 303.
ii. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
iii. AISC 360.
lv. RCSC's *Speclf.cetlon for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
6
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at
Site.
7
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of rai[ ng or
sjmilar product from single source, from single
manufacturer.
6.1.5
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection
and identification. Keep steel me mbers off ground and
spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and
spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials
from corrosion and deterioration.
i.
Do not store materials on a structure in a manner
that might cause distortion, damage, or overload
to members or supporting structures. Repair or
replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
2
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed
containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
i. Fasteners may be repackaged only with the
Engineer's approva l and under his supervision.
II. Clean and re-lubrlcate bolts and nuts that
become dry or rusty before use.
iii, Comply
with
manufacturers'
writte n
recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting
fasteners after lubrication.
6.1.6
Coordination
1
Coordinate selection of shop primers with lopcoets
to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating
manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop
primers and topcoats a re compatible with one another.
2
Coordinate Installation of anchorage Items to be
embedded in or attached to other construction so as not to
delay the work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal
templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
6.2
Materials
6.2.1
Structural-Steel Materials and Steel

Railings
Recycl ed Content of Steel Products:

Provide
products with an average recycled content so that the
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent
2
W-Shapes
ASTM A 992/A
ASTM A 529/A
A 913M, Grade
shall comply, as appropriate, with

992,
ASTM A 572/A 572M
Grade 5
529M Grade 50, end ASTM A 913/
50.
3
Channels, angles , M shapes and , Sshapes shall
comply, as appropri!1te, with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
ASTM A 572/A 572M Grade 50. ASTM A 529/A 529.\4
Grade 50 and ASTM A 913/A 913M Grade 50.
4
Plate and bar shall comply, as appropriate with
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 572/A 572M Grade 50, end
ASTM A 529/A 529M Grade 50.
5
Corrosionresisting lowalloy structural-steel shapes,
plates, and bars shall comply with ASTM A 588/A 58BM,
Grade 50.
6
Cold-formed hollow structural sections shall comply
with ASTM A 500, Grade B or C. structural tubing.
7
Corrosion-resisting coldformed hollow structural
sections shall comply with ASTM A 847/A 847M.
structural tub! ng.
Stee l Pipe shall comply with ASTM A 531A 53M,
8
Type f or 5. Grade B.
i.
Weight Class: Sta ndard.
ii. Finish: Black except where indicated to be
galvanized.
9
Steel
castings
shall
comply
with
ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementa ry
requirement S 11.
10 Steel
Forgin11s
ASTM A 668/A 66BM.
11 Welding Electrodes
re quire ments.
shall
shllll
comply
comply
with
with
AWS
12 Wovenwire mesh shall be intermediate-crimp,

dia mond or square pattern, 50-mm woven-wire mesh,
made from 3.5mm norrinal diameter wire complying with
ASTM A 510M
6.2.2
Bolts, Connectors, and Anchors
1
High-Strength
Bolts,
Nuts,
and
Washers:
ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325MI, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structura l bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M,
Class 8SI heavy.hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
(ASTM F 436MI, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers;
all with plain finish.
Indicators;
ASTM F 959.
L DirectTension
(ASTM F 959M,
Type B.BI,
Type 325
compressible-washer type with plain finish.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490
(ASTM A 490MI. Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts;
6-2
Sultanat of Oman, Slandanl Sptc.fiationo 'or Road & Bri<l~ Construdion 2010
ASTM A 563, Grade OH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 105)

heavy-hex
carbon-steel
nuts;
and
ASTM F 436
(ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers
with plain finish.
i.
Direct-Tension
Indicators:
ASTM F 959,
Type 490
[ASTM F 959M,
Type 10.9),
compressible-washer type with plain finish.
Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers;
2
ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M,
Class 105) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; end ASTM F 436
(ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
i. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc
coating.
ASTM F 959,
Indicators:
li. Direct-Tension
(ASTM F 959M,
Type 325
Type 8.8),
compressible-washer type with mechanically
deposited zinc coating
3
Tension-Control, High Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer
Assemblies:
ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head
assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined
ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbonsteel washers.
i.
Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating.
4
Shear Connectors:
ASTM A 108, Grades 1015
through 1020, headed-stud type, coldfi nished carbon
steei;AWS D1.1/01.1M, Type B.
5
Unheeded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or
ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable
i. Configuration: Hooked.
ii. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex
carbon steel.
iii. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
iv. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1,
hardened carbon steel.
Hotdip
zinc
coating,
v. Finish:
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
6
Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 361
JASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable! [ASTM A 3541
IASTM A 4491, straight.
i.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex
carbon steel.
ii. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
iii. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1,
hardened carbon steel.
iv. Finish:
Hot-dip
zinc
coating,
7
Threaded
Rods:
ASTM A 36/A 36M
A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345).
i.
ii.
iii.
and
Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex

carbon steel.
Washers:
[ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M),
Type 1, hardened!.
Finish:
Hot-dip
zinc
coating,
8
Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished
carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.
9
Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon
steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.
10 S!eeva Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel
bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.
11 Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of
confi guratCon indicated, that provide vertical transfer of
loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to
plane of expansion joint while resisting movement within
plane of expansion joint.
i.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with work
requirements.
ii. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product.
iii. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and mirror-finished
stainless steel.
iv. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.03.
v. Design Load: Not less than 41 MPa.
vi. Total Movement Capability: 50 mm.
12
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

i.
Provide concealed fasteners for Interconnecting
railing components end for attaching them to
other work, unless otherwise indicated.
ii. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting
railing components and for attaching them to
other work, unless exposed fasteners are
unavoidable or are the standard fastening
method for railings indicated.
Iii. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine
screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
6.2.3
Grout
Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107,

factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with
water to consistency suitable for application and a 30minute working time.
2
Non-metallic,
Shrinkage-Resistant
Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate
grout, noncorrosive and non-staining, mixed with water to
consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
6.2.4
Fabrication
Structural Steal: Fabricate and assemble in shop to

greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges and AISC 360.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Camber
structural-steel
members
where
Indicated.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
Identify high-strength structural steel according
to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until
structural steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field
assembly.
6-3
~~
MlnJtry of Tranpon & Comsnunlc:otlon
DGRl T
_/"'-....~<:structural Stee1 and other Metal Work
v.
Complete structu rat-steel assemblies. including

welding of units, before starting shop-priming
operations.
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and

type of joint specified.
Thermal Cutting:
Perform thermal cutting by
2
machine to greatest extent possible
i.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to
comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/01.1M.
2
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS 01.1101 .1M
and AWS D1.8101 .8M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and
methods used In correcting welding work.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods
i.
tllat will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill
material.
3
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes
perpendicular to metal surfaces.
4
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and
other members transmitting bearing lo1ds.
5
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are
to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning
6
Shear Connectors:
Prepare steel surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use
automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors
according to AWS 01.1/Dl.lM and manufacturer's written
instructions.
7
Holes: Form holes required for securing other work
to structural steel end for other work to pass through steel
framing members.
i.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces, Do not thermally cut bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.
ii. Base plate holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal
cut, or punch holes perpendicular to st eel
surfaces.
Iii. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other
specialty items indicated to receive other work.
Steel pipe and tube railings:

i.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to
weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
i i. Connections: Fabricate railings with either
welded or non-welded connections unless
otherwise indicated.
i ii. Connect members with concealed mechanical
fasteners and fittings.
lv. Form changes i n direction by bends of radius
indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow
fittings of radius indicated.
v. Close exposed ends of railing members w ith
prefabricated end fittings.
vi. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for
connecting railings to concrete or masonry work.
Fabricate anchorage devices capable of
withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting
structure.
9
Galvanization: The minimum average thickness of
coating for all galvanized specimens shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M.
6.2.5
Shop Connections
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts

according to RCSC' s "Specification for Structural Joints
6-4
i.
6.2.6
Joint Type: Slip critical.
Source Quality Control
Testing Agency: The Employer may engage an

independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
i.
Provide testing agency with access to places
where structura l-steel work is being fabricated or
produced to perform tests and inspections.
2
Correct deficiencies in work that test reports and
inspections indicate does not comply with the
Specification or Drawings.
3
Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections w~ l
be tested
and
inspected
according
to
RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or
A 490 Bolts.
4
Welded Connections: In addit ion to visual inspection,
shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected
according to AWS 01.1/Dl .lM and the following
inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
i.
Liquid Penet rant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
ii. Magnetic Particle Inspection:
ASTM E 709;
performed on root pass and on finished w eld.
Cracks or zones of Incomplete fusion or
penetration wilt not be accepted.
iii. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
iv. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
In addition to visua l inspection, shop-welded shear

connectors will be tested and inspected according to
requirements in AWS D1.11D1.1M far stud welding and as
follows:
I.
Bend test s will be performed if visual inspections
reveal either a less-than -con ti nuaus 360-degree
flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
ii. Tests wilt be conducted on additional shear
connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear
connectors already tested, according to
requirementsinAWS 01 .1101.1M.
6.3
6.3.1
Examination
Verify, w ith steel erector present. elevations of

concrete- 1nd masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of
anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for
compliance with requirements.
Sultanat of Oman. Srandanl ~~ono for R....t & 9ridge Coootrua.on 21J 0
i.
Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces,

anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedment, showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations.
2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
6.3.2
6
Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless
approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections
within smoothness limits in AWS 01.1/D1.1M.
7
Do not enlarge unfair holes In members by burning
or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to
admit bolts.
I.
Preparation
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as

recommended by manufacturer of shear
Use automatic end welding of
connectors.
headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written
instructions.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other

supports during erection to keep structural steel secure,
plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction
loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads.
Remove temporary supports when permanent structural
steel, connections, and bracing are In pi ace unless
otherwise indicated.
I.
Do not remove temporary shoring supporting
composite deck construction until cast-in-place
concrete has attained its design compressive
strength.
Protection of Deck Plate after Sandblasting: If

sandblasting to a white metal, or an equivalent method, is
used to prepare the deck plate to receive a wearing
surface, a protective coating shall be applied to the plate
immediately after cleaning.
6.3.3
Erection
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to

elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
2
Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concreteand masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials,
and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.
Clean
bottom surface of plates.
i.
Set plates for structural members on wedges,
shims, or setting nuts as required.
ii. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
iii. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported
members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate
before packing with grout.
iv. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing
surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly
finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow
curing. Comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant
grouts.
3
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and
steel railing within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
4
Align and adjust various members that form part of
complete frame or structure before permanently fastening.
Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other
surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members.
Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
i.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
ii. Make allowances for difference between
temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in
service.
Splice members only where indicated.
6.3.4
OrthotropicDeck Super Structure
Dimensional Tolerance Limits:

i.
Dimensional tolerance limits for orthotropic-deck
bridge members shall be applied to each
completed but unloaded member and shall be as
specified in the AWS Structural Welding Code
except as superseded hereinafter. The devlatfon
from detailed flatness, straightness, or curvature
at any point shall be the perpendicular distance
from that point to a template edge which has the
detailed straightness or curvature and which is in
contact with the element at two other points.
The term element as used herein refers to
individual panels, stiffeners, flanges, or other
pieces. The template edge may have any length
not exceeding the greatest dimension of the
element being examined and, for any panel, not
exceeding 1.5 times the least dimension of the
panel; it may be placed anywhere within the
boundaries of the element. The deviation shall
be measured between adjacent points of contact
of the template edge with the element; the
distance between these adjacent points of
contact shall be used in the formulas to establish
the tolerance limits for the segment being
measured whenever this distance is less than the
applicable dimension of the element specified for
the formula.
ii. The term panel as used in this paragraph means
a clear area of steel plate surface bounded by
stiffeners, webs, flanges, or plate edges and not
further subdivided into such elements. The
provisions of this paragraph apply to all panels
in the bridge; for plates stiffened on one side
only such as orthotropic-deck plates or flanges of
box girders, this includes the total clear width on
the side without stiffeners as well as the panels
between stiffeners on the side with stiffeners.
The maximum deviation from detailed flatness
or curvature of a panel shall not exceed 5 mm.
~
./'-.../
Mln.iatrv of Tfnnpon & Communtcotlon
OGRt T
~
~<Structural Steel and other Meta l Work
The
maximum deviation
from
detailed
straightness or curvature in any direction
perpendicular to its length of a longitudinal
stiffener subject to calculated compressive stress.
Including each orthotropicdeck rib, shall not
exceed U480, where L "' the length of the
stiffener or rib between cross members, webs, or
flanges, in millimeters.
iii. The maximum deviation from
detailed
straightness or curvature in any direction
perpendicular to its length of a transverse web
stiffener or other stiffener not subject to
calculated compressive stress shall not exceed
U240, where L .. the length of the stiffener or rib
between cross members, webs, or flanges, in
millimeters.
6.3.5
Field Connections
HighStrength Bolts:
Install highstrength bolts
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and
type of joint speclfled.
i.
Joint Type: Slip critical.
1
2
Weld Connections: Comply w ith AWS D1 .1/01.1M
and AWS 01.8/01.8M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quafity, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
i.
Comply w ith AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing.
alignment, adequacy of temporary connections,
and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to
field welds.
i~
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge,
and grind steel smooth.
iii . Assemble and we:d built-up sections by methods
that will maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges for mill material.
6.3.6
1
Testing Agency: The Employer may engage a
qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
Bolted Connections: Bolted connections w ill be
2
tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Usi ng ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.
3
Welded Connections: FJeld welds will be visually
inspected according to AWS 0 1.1/01 .1M.
I. In addition to visual inspection, field welds w ill
be tested and inspected according to
AWS 01 .1101.1M and the following inspection
procedures, at testing agency's option:
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection:
ASTM E 709;
performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or
penetration wiH not be accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
6-6
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
In addition to visual Inspection, test and inspect field

welded shear connectors according to requirements in
AWS 01 .1101.1M for stud welding and as follows:
i.
Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal
either a less-than-continuous 360degree flash or
welding repairs to any shear connector.
ii. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if
weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already
tested.
according
to
requirements
in
AWS 01.11D1 .1M.
5
Correct deficiencies In work that test reports and
inspections indicate does not comply with the
Specification or Drawings.
6.4
1
Structural steel is measured by weight in tonnes.
Except for rolled steel sections and plates whose weights
are computed from nominal weight as paragraphs 2 and 3
below, the weight shaH be calculated on the basis that 1.0
cu. meter weighs 7850 kg
2
The weights of rolled shapes shall be computed on
the basis of their nominal weights per meter as shown on
the Drawings, or listed in the handbooks.
The weights of plates shall be computed on the basis

of the nominal weight for their width end thickness as
shown on the Drawings, plus an estimated overrun
computed as one-half the 'Permissible Variation In
Thickness and Weight' as tabulated in Specification,
'General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel P~es,
Shapes, Steel Piling, and Bars for Structural Use',
AASHTO M 160.
4
The welght of castings shall be computed from the
dimensions shown on the approved shop drawings,
deducting for open holes. To this weight shall be added 5
percent allowance for fi llets and overrun. Scale weights
may be substituted for computed weights in the case of
castings or of small complex parts for which accurate
computations of weight would be difficult.
5
The weight o f temporary erection bolts, shop and
field paint, boxes, crates, and other containers used for
shipping, and materials used for supporting members
during transportation and erection, shall not be included
in the rate and is subsidiary to the rate of st ructural steel.
6
In computing pay weight on the basis of computed
net weight the following stipulations in addition to those
In the foregoing paragraphs shall apply:
i. The weight shall be computed on the basis of the
net finished dimensions of the parts as shown on
the approved shop drawing. deducting for copes,
cuts, clips, and all open holes. except bolt holes.
ii. The weight of heads, nuts, single washers, and
threaded stickthrough of all high-tensile
strength shop bolts, both shop and field, shall be
Included on the basis of the following weights:
Sult.,....,l., ol Om11n, Sr.ndotd Spoocilic.t"'"" tor Root! & Bride- Construction :1!110
Diameter of Bolt
mm
12
16
19
22
25
29
32
35
38
'
Weight per 1DO bolts

9.0
14.4
23.8
-
'
36.5
53.0
75.0
96.4
127.3
154.5
Table 6.4-1 Bolt Weights

iii.
The weight of weld metal shall be computed on

the basis of the theoretical volume from
dimensions of the welds.
In compufng pay weight on the basis of computed

7
gross weight, the following stipulations in addition to the
above shall apply.
i.
ll .
Iii.
6.5
Basis of Payments
ka
The weight shall be calculated on the basis of

rectangular dimensions for all plates, and
ordered overall lengths for all structural shapes;
except that (AI when parts can be economically
cut in multip'es from material of larger
dimensions, the computed weight shall be that
of the material from which the parts are cut, and
(B I all material shall be ordered to produce as
little waste as practicable when cut and finished
by modern shop methods.
No deductions from the computed weight of
rolled steel shall be made for the copes, clips,
sheared edges, punchings, borings, milling or
planning; or from the computed weight of
castings to allow for drillings or borings.
The weight of weld metal shall be computed on
the basis of the theoretical volume of the
dimensions of the welds. To this weight shall be
added 50 percent allowance for overrun.
8
In computing pay weight on the basis of scale
weights, the pay quantity of structural steel will be the
shop scale weight of the fabricated members, which shall
be weighed on satisfactory scales in the presence of the
Inspector. tt the shop paint has been applied to the
completed member when weighed, 0.4 percent of the
weight of the member shall be deducted from the scale
weight of the member to compensate for weight of shop
paint. The weight of field bolts shall be based on the
approved shipping list. No payment will be made for any
weight in excess of 1.5 percent above the computed net
weight of the whole item.
9
Stejjl ra~ ings are measured in lin. meters as the
actual length fixed in position according to type and
height, without differentiation for straight, curved, raking
and stepped railings The rates are deemed to include for
all accessories and fixings and finishes.
The prices for fabrication and erection of structural

steel and railings shall include all labor, materials,
equipment, transportation, and shop and field painting
necessary for the proper completion of the work in
accordance with the contract. The prices for fabrication
without erection shall include all labor and materials
necessary for the proper completion of the work.
6.6

Payment will be made under one or more of the
following:
Structural Steel (grade)
ii.
Railings
(Typel (height)
(!.I
(lin m. )
Ref.
Title
7.1
Description
7.1.1
1 1. 1.1
Summary
Description
1.2
Materials
7.2.1
General
7.2. 1.1
7.2.1.2
7.2. 1.3
72.1.4
7 2.1.5
7.2.1.6
7.2. 1.7
References and Warranties

Composition and Mtxing
Page No.
7-1
71
7-l
7-1
7-1
7-1
'1-1
Compatibility
Covering Qualities
7-1
Containers
Delivery
7-l
7.2.2
Storage and Handling

Pigments and Palltn
7.2.3
Paint Oils. Thlnnera and Dryera
7.2.4
7.2.41
Red Lead Paint

Description
Composition
7-1
71
71
7-1
7-2
Bef.
7.2.5.11
7.2.5.12.
7.2.5.13
7 .2.f
7.2.6.1
7.2.6.2
7.2;6.3
7.2.7
7.2.7.1
7.2.7.2
7;2.7.3
7.U
7.2.8.1
7.2.8.2
7.2.9
7-2
Weight per Uiter
72
7-2
72
7.2.91
7.29.2
7.2.9.3
7.2.4;5
7.2.4.6
Coarse Particles
Consistency
Condition in Container
72
72
7-2
7.2.4.7
Skinning
7-2
7.2.4.8
7.2.4.9
Dilution Stability
Brushing Propert:es
72
7.2.4.10
Spraving Properties
?2
7-3
7.2.4 2
7.2.413
7.2.4.4
7.2.4.11
Drying Time
7.2.4.12
Tinting
7.2.5
Basic Lead Slllco-Chromate Primer
7.2.5.1
Description
7.2.5.2
7.2.5.3
7.2.5.4
7.2.5.5
Composition
Weight per Liter
7-2
7-3
7-3
Description
Zinc Oxide Vehicle
Zinc DustZinc Oxide MilCed Primer
Aluminum Paint
Description
Proportions
Mixing
'11nted Aluminum Paint
Description
Proportions
B.alc Lead Sillco-Chromate Maroon
Field Coat
Description
,...
73
7-4
7-4
7-4
7:.&
75
7 5
7-5
7-S
7 5
7 5
7-5
7-S
7-S
7.2.9.4
7.2.9;5
7.2.9.6
7.2.9.7
Cond,tfon in Container
Sk.nmng
75
7.2.9.8
7.2.9.9
7.2.9.10
D~ution Stability
7-5
Brushing Properties
75
Spravtng Properties
Drying Time
7-6
7.2.9.11
7.2.10
7-5
?5
7-li
Basic Lead Sllfco.Chromate Dart Green
Flnlah Coat
Description
7.2. 10.2
Composition
7.2.10.3
7.2.10.4
Weight per Liter
7-6
7-!i
7-5
7-6
7.2.105
7.2. 10.6
Coarse Particles
Consistencv
Color
Skinning
0 1 ution Stability
76
Brushrng.Propenies
7-6
7.2.5.6
Flash Point
7.2.5.7
7.2.5.8
Condition In Conta ner

Skinning
7.2.5.9
Dilution Stablity
7.2.10. 7
7.2.10.8
7 2.10.9
7.2.5.10
Appearance
7-3
7.210.10
73
Zinc DulltZinc Oxide Primer
73
7-3
75
7-5
73
73
73
Brushing Properties
Spraving Properties
DTVingTlme
Weight par Liter

Coarse Particles
Consistency
7.2.10.1
73
73
Page No.
Composition
73
73
Coarse Particles
Consistency
Title
76
7-6
7-5
7-5
76
Ref.
7.2..10.11
7.2..10.12
7.2.tl
7.2.11.1
11tle
Spraying Properties
Drying Time
Zinc Dust Paint
Description
Requirements
7.2.11.2
7,2..12
Gloss Enamel
Description
7.2.12..1
7.2.12.2
Requirements
7,2..13
7.2.14
Portland Cement Paint

Description
7.2 .14.1
7.2.14.2
Composition
7.2.14-3
Colors
POlymer Latex Paint
7.2.16
7.2.15.-1
7.2.15.2
Description
Composition
7.2.15.3
Colors
7.2.18
Polymer Paint
Description
7.2.16.1
7.2.. 16.2
Composition
7.2. 16.3
Colors
7.2.17
Acrylic Emu!.lon Paint
Page No.
Ref.
Title
7-6
7.3.8
7,3.9
Painting Exlltlna Structures

Painting Sttllll Piling and Steel
7-12
Pile
Shells
Painting Steel Pile Enclosures
7-13
7.3.10
and Tubular Steel Piers
7-13
7..fi
11
77
77
7-7
11
7-7
7-7
1-1
1-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-8
H!
7-8
7-8
18
1 8
7-8
7.3
Con~on R~uirements
7-8
7.3.1
7..3.2
Ge11111111
Application
1-8
7-9
'7.3.2.1
7.3.3
7.3.3.1
7.3,3.2
General
Concrete SurfKel
Preparation
Painting
7.13
7-9
7-9
710
7.3.4
Structural Steel .Requiramenta
7-11
7.3.6
Shop Coat IPrime!

Shop Cleaning
S hop Painting
711
Field Coat
7-12
Field Cleanna
Field Painting
Bridge Raflinga and Guardrails
Bridge Railings
7-12
7.3.5.1
7.3.5.2
7.3.8
7.3..6.1
7.3.6.2
7.3.7
7.3.7.1
7.3.'1!l
Guardrail
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-12
7 12
Page No.
7.4
1-13
'/.5
Basis of Payments
'1-13
7.6
7-13
Sultonoto of Omen, S!ondord Spodlica'Jan far Road & B,.dgo C<>Min.cti<lll ~ D
Paint)
7.1
Description
7.1.1
Summary
7.1.1.1
Description
This Section describes painting to steel and concrete

structures end painting to railings and other metalwork.
2
The work described herein includes protective and
decorative painting to new and existing structures and
metalwork to meet the ambient conditions.
3
The paints, primers and ancillary products included
in this Section Include a full range of products. The actual
products to be used for the particular project shall be as
specified in the Special Specification for each project or as
7.2
Materials
7.2.1
General
7.2.1.1
References and Warranties
Where reference is made to specifications and

standards Issued by named organizations, such
specifications and standards are hereby made a part of
this specification to the same extent as if fully set out
herein.
2
The paint manufecturer(sl shall supply evidence that
the proposed products have performed satisfactorily for a
minimum of five (51 years in conditions similar to those of
Oman as to ultraviolet light exposure and Intensive
climatic conditions.
7.2.1.2
Composition and Mixing
Paints shall be factorymixed or in paste form. Mixing

of dry pigment and a vehicle by the Contractor will not be
permitted, except as specifically required by the
specifications. Mixed paints shall be mixed with a paddle
to a smooth and homogenous condition. Pigments and
insoluble ingredients shalt be finely ground to a smooth
uniform consistency Mixed paints or pastes which have
hardened, thickened or otherwise deteriorated during
storage or shipment will not be accepted.
2
Thinners for a particular type of paint must mix
readily with that type of paint.
3
When paint is tinted, the tinting material shall be
thoroughly mixed Into the paint to form an even, uniform
shede.
7.2.1.3
Compatibility
Finish paint for factoryprimed items shall be of a

type compatible with the primer. Primers for unprimed
items shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for
use with the finish paint.
2
Primers, sealers, undercoat and finishing coat paint
shall be compatible in composition and color and, for any
one paint system, shalt be the products of the same
manufacturer.
7.2.1.4
Covering Qualities
All mixed paint shall have satisfactory protective and

covering qualities. Mixed paint shall not run, streak, break
or sag when brushed on a clean one hundred fifty (1501
millimeters by two hundred fifty (2501 millimeter glass
panel placed in a vertical position. The paint shall dry to a
smooth, uniform finish, free from rough ness, grit,
unevanness and other surface imperfections.
7.2.1.5
Containers
Paint containers shall be sufficiently strong and

durable to withstand shipment and normal handling
procedures without damage. Paint containers shall be
equipped with lids which positively prevent the entrance
of air into the container.
7.2.1.6
Delivery
All paint shall be delivered to the site in original

manufacturer's metal containers with labels which give
type, color, quantity, gross and tare, and pal nt ingredient
proportions of every item of the contents.
7.2.1.7
Storage and Handling
All paints and painting products shall be stored and

protected and used in environmental conditions that
ensure that the paint is not affected by extremes of
temperature.
7.2.2
Pigments and Pastes
When specified in mixed paints, the following

pigments and pastes shall comply with the requirements
of the ASTM designations indicated below:
P.lgmenta and Patel
ASTM
Zinc Oxide
079
White Lead; Basic Carbonate
081
White Lead, Basic Sulfate
082
D 83 Red Lead, nlnetysev~m (971 percent
Grade
Iron Oxide, Class II Type A -084
Lempbleillc
0209
Chrome Oxide Green
0263
Titanium Dioxide, Type I
0476
Carbon Black
DS61
Magnesium Silicate Piament
0605
AluminumPigments, Type II Class B
0962
[except coarse particles may be two
121 percent maximuml
Copper Phtalocv~~nlne Blue
0963
Basic Lead SiiiCo'!chromate
D1648
Copper Phthalocvanine Green
03021
Table 7.2.21: Specifications for Pigments end Paste
~
2
Siliceous red iron oxide shall meet the following
requirements:
~~
Mlnlatry of Tronport & CammunicntJon. DGRlT
~~<raint
Total Iron Oxide,

Calculated as Fe203
Coerse particles, on
Number 325 mesh sieve
Calcium Oxide
Moisture and other
volatile material .
Water soluble matter
ii.
EightyfiVe percent 185%1

min.
One percent 11%1
maximum
Five-tenths perc.ent (0.5%1
max.
Two' percent 12%1 max.
One and five-tenths

oDircent (1.5%1 max.
Oil absorption
Sixteen (16%1 percent min.
Siliceous matter
Balance
Organic colors
None Permitted
Table 7.2.22: Requirements of Siliceous Red Iron Oxide
True red lead
..
Paint Oils, Thinners and Dryers
When specified in mixed paints or vehicles the

following paint liquids shall comply With the designetions
lndiceted below:
7.2.4.3
I
1
. . ASTM
" 0 13~ 1
Turoentine, steam distflled
Pine Oil Twe 1
- ~F.SS ! LU.-P.~ ~ I
Raw llnseed oil
0234
Mineral spirits
0235
Mineral spirits, Grade 1 and Grade FSS TT-T-291
2
Boiled linseed oil. TYpe 1
0260
DtYers,liquid paint. Class B
0600
Alkyd resin solutions, Type I, II and FSS TTR-266
111
Table 7.2.31: Specifications for Paint Liquids
7.2.4
Red lead Paint
7.2.4.1
Description
7.2.4.2
Composition
Rapid-dry red lead paint

following composition by weight:
i.
Paint.
she~
conform to the
Pigment
Sixty-six 1661 percent min.
.
Vehicle
nilrtvfour (34) percent max.
. Fifty-siX (56) percent min.
Non.volatlle
meterial in vehicle
Phthaljc anhydride Fifteen (15) percent min..
based on vehicle :
solids
Water
OFive-tenths (0.51 percent max.
Table 7.2.4-1: Composition of Red lead Paint
Coarse Partic les
Coarse particles and sklns retained on a forty -five

thousandths 10.0451 millimeter (No. 3251 sieve shall not
exceed one percent (1 %) by weight based o n pigment.
Consistency
Consistency sha II be not less than seventy-three (731

nor more than e ightysix {861 Krebs Units (K.U.I.
7.2.4.6
Condition in Containe r
The paint shall be thoroughly ground and mixed; it

shall not be settled, caked or thickened to such a degree
that it cannot be redispersed easily with a paddle to a
uniform and homogenous state.
7.2.4.7
Skinning
Skinning shall be entirely absent from a sample that

has been stored forty-eight {481 hours in a dark place in a
three-quarters-filled tightly-closed container.
7.2.4.8
Rapid-dry red lead paint shall consist only of lead

p:gment, iron oxide pigment, magnesium silicate pigment,
raw lcnseed olt, linseed oil modified alkyd resin. thinners
and dryers. The palnt shall not contain more than fourtenths 10.41 percent aluminum stearate to produce loose
suspet~sion of the pigment during storage.
Weight per Liter
Red lead paint shall weigh not less than two (21
ldlograms per liter.
7.2.4.6
ComDOMnt
Sixty-two and Five-tenths (62.5)

oercent min.
Twelve and FIVe-tenths (12.51
percent min.
Ferric oxide siliceous

matter and
remainder
Other oxides of lead
Table 7.2.4-2: Composition of Pigment for Red lead Paint
7.2.4.4
7.2.3
Pigment: The extracted pigment shall conform

to the follow ing by weight:
Dilution Stability
The paint shall remain stable and uniform after

reduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight
(8) parts by volume of paint to one (1) part by volume of
mineral spirits.
7.2.4.9
Brushing Properties
The paint, after thorough mixing, shall have

satisfactory brushing and leveling properties and show no
running or sagging tendencies when brushed on a vertical
steel surface.
7 .2.4.10
Spraying Properties
The paint, when thinned, shall spray satisfactorily,

show no tendency to orange-peel. sag, creep, or run, and
shall show satisfactory spraying properties in all other
respects. The mineral spirits used as a reducer shall
conform to FSS TT-T-281 Grade 1. and shall be tested and
approved prior to use.
Sultanate ol Oman. Stond<d Spoafic..on lot Road & S10dge C<lmtruc:ticn 2!11D
Paint)
7.2.4.11
Drying Time
7.2.5.5
Consistency
The paint shall be touch-dry in not more than four (41

hours and dry-through in not more than sixteen (161 hours
when applied as in FSS Test Method, Standard Number
141, Method 4061.
Consistency shalf be not less than seventy (701 or

more than eighty-three (831 Krebs Units (K.U.).
7.2.4.12
The flash point shall ba not less than thirty degrees

Celsius (30 Cl when tested in accordance with Federal Test
Method. Standard Number 141, Method 4293 using
Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester.
Tinting
When used for the shop (prime) and second coat,

sufficient black synthetic or magnetite iron oxides shall be
added to the second coat paint as a tinting agent for
identification of the coated surfaces.
7.2.5
Basic Lead Silica-Chromate Primer
7.2.5.1
Description
Primer shall be suitable for use as a structural metal,

shop or spot primer. It shall consist only of basic lead
silico-chromate, and red iron oxide eighty-five (851 percent,
linseed-soya oil modified alkyd resin, raw linseed oil,
thinners and dryers. The primer shall not contain more
than seven-tenths (0.71 percent pigment suspended agent.
The alkyd resin shall conform to FSS TT-R-266, Type Ill.
7.2.5.2
Composition
Basic lead silica-chromate primer shall conform to

the following by weight:
i.
Paint:
Pigment
Non-volatile material
in vehicle
Phthalic anhydride
baud on vehicle
solids
Water
(571 percent min.

Fifty-two (521 pen:ent min.
F.ifty-s~r~~en
Fifteen (15) pen:ent min.
Five-tenths (0.51 pen:ent.max.
Table 7.2.5-1: Composition of Beale Lead Slllco-Chromate

Primer Paint
ii.

to the following by weight:
Basic lead Silicochromate

Ferric oxide
Ninety-three
and two-tenths
minimum
Four and eight-tenths (4.81 to
five and eight-tenths (5.8)
pen:ent
Silica-Chromate Primer
Weight per Liter
Basic lead silico-chromate primer shall weigh not

less than one and six-tenths (1.61 kilograms per liter.
7.2.6.4
7.2.5.7
Flash Point

shall not be settled, caked or thickened to such a degree
that it cannot be dispersed easily with a paddle to a
7.2.5.8
Skinning

has been stored forty-eight (48) hours in a dark place in a
7.2.5.9
Dilution Stability

raduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight
(8) parts by volume of paint to one (11 part by volume of
mineral spirits.
7.2.5.1 0
Appearance
After a flow-out panel of the paint on one hundred

(1001 millimeters by three hundred (300) millimeter clean
glass plate has dried in a nearly vertical position at room
temperature, it shall show no straaking or separation.
7.2.6.11
Brushing Properties
The paint, after thorough m1x1ng, shall have

satisfactory brushing and leveling properties and show no
steel surface at a spreading rate of twelve end three-tenths
( 12.31 square meters per liter.
7.2.5. 12
Spraying Properties
(93.2t~ent
Table 7.2.5-2: Composition of Pigment for Basic Lead
7.2.5.3
7.2.5.6
Coarse Particles
Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five

thousandths (0 0451 millimeter (No. 3251 sieve shall not
exceed one ( 11 percent by weight based on pigment.
The paint. when thinned, shall spray satisfactorily,

show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep, or run, and
conform to FSS TT-T-291, Grade 1 and shall be tested and
7.2.5.13
Drying Time
The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform surface, free

from roughness, grit, unevenness, and other surface
imperfections. The paint shall be touch-dry in not more
than four (41 hours and shall dry-through in not more than
sixteen (161 hours when applied as in FSS Test Method,
Standard Number 141, Method4061.
~
~
Mlnlatry <>I Tr10np<>r-t
a. Communlc.otlona
DGRLT
__/"'-...~<:_Paint
7.2.6
Zinc DustZinc Oxide Primer
7.2.6.1
Description
2
Weight per Uter: Zinc dust-zinc oxide mixed primer
shall weigh not less than one and eight-tenths (1 .81
kilograms per Iller.
Type U zinc dustzinc oxidephthalic alkyd resin

primer, conforming to FSS TI P641d Type II, shall be a
ready-to-mix paint for use on galvanized metal surfaces,
with the zinc oxide mill-ground into the entire vehicle in
one (1) container and the dry zinc dust in a separate
container. The zinc dust shall show an analysis of not less
than ninety. four percent {94%) metallic zinc by weight. The
zinc oxide vehicle shall consist of zinc oxide and a vehicle
contai ning long oil, linseed-modified alkyd resin of the air
drying type, petroleum or terpene thinners, dryers and
anti-ski mming agents.
7.2.6.2
Zinc Oxide Vehicle
Composition: Zinc oxide vehicle shall conform to the

following by weight:
Zinc oxide i" the extracted
and Ignited pigment
Non--volatile material in the
vehicle
Phthalicanhydride based on
vehicle solids
Rosin or rosin dMivatives
Ninety.elght {98)
percent min.
Forty-three {431 pen:ent
min.
TWentytt'ireel231
percent min.
- None
Table 7.2.6-1: Composition of Zinc Oxide Vehicle
2
Condition in Container: The zinc OlCide vehicle shall
be thoroughly ground and mixed. It shall not be settled,
caked. or thickened to such a degree that it cannot be
redispersed easily with a paddle to a uniform and
homogenous state. It shall be readily Incorporated with
the zinc dust to form a smooth uniform paint of good
brushing consistency.
7.2.&.3
Zinc Dust-Zinc 0Kide Mixed Primer
Composition.: Zinc dust-zinc oxide mixed primer

shall conform to the following by weight when mixed in
the proportions as submitted In the original containers:
i.
Primer.
rcent
Water
I Three-tenths {0.3) oercenr max.
Table 7.2.&-2: Composition of Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Mixed

Primer
ii.

Metallic zinc
SeventyfourJ741percent mlfl.
Zinc oxide
EiGhteen 118.1 ~rcent min
Metalllc zinc plus zinc Ninety-seven {97) perc ant
oxkfe
min.
None
--Sulfide sulfur
Table 7.2.&-3: Composition of Pigment for Zinc Dust-Zinc
Oxide Mixed Primer
7~
3
Coersa Particles: Coarse particles and skins retained
oo a forty-live thousandths (0.045) millimeter (No. 3251
sieve shall not exceed four (4) percent by weight based on
pigmenl4
Consistency: Consistency shall be not less than sixtyseven (671 nor more than eight-six (86) Krebs Unit (K.U,).
5
Dilution Stability: The mixed primer shall remain
stable and uniform after reduction with mineral spirits in
the proportions of eight {81 parts by volume of paint to
one 111 part by volume of mineral spirits. After standing
twenty-four (24) hours there shall be no curdling or
precipitation on the veh[cle.
Flexibility: After air-drying eighteen I 181 hours,

baking for twenty-four {241 hours at one hundred five
degrees Celsius {105'C) and cool ing to twentythree
degrees Celsius (23"CI, a film of the mixed primer applied
to flat tin panel with a five-hundredths (0.05) millimeter
Bird Film Applicator shall show no cracking after banding
double over a three (31 millimeter mandrel. This test shall
be conducted according to FSS Test Method Number 141,
Method 201 2,
7
Adhesion: After air"'tirying for eighteen {18) hours,
baking for three (31 hours at one hundred twenty-one
degrees Celsius {121"CI. a film of the mixed primer
brushed on a clean new galvanized iron panel, seventy
five (75) millimeters by one hundred fifty ( 150) millimeters,
shall cut loose In the form of a ribbon without flaking or
otherwise loosening from the panel when tested with a
knife blade.
Brushing Properties: The mixed primer, after

thorough mixing, shall have satisfactory brushing and
leveling properties and show no running or sagglng
tendencies when brushed on a vertical surface three
hundred {3001 millimeters by six hundred (6001 mill imetets
of smooth, clean. untreated galvanized iron.
9
Spraying Properties: The mixed primer when thinned
with not more than one (1 ) part by volume of mineral
spirits to eight (81 parts by volume of paint shall spray
satisfactorily, show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep,
or run. and shall show satisfactory spraying properties In
all other respects.
10 Drying Time-: The miKed primer shall be touch-dry in
not less than thirty (301 minutes nor more than four (41
hours and dryhl rd in not more than eighteen ( 18) hours
when applied as in FSS Test Method, Standard Number
141, Method 4061 .
Sultanate of Om on, Stoncbcd Spedf~r"""' for Rood r.. Bodge Conatrucdou ~10
7.2.7
Aluminum Paint
7.2.7.1
Description
Aluminum paint shall be composed of aluminum

paste and aluminum vehicle and shall conform to the
requirements specified in AASHTO M 69, Type 1. The
paste and vehicle shall be delivered to the project
unmixed and in separate containers.
7.2.7.2
Proportions
The mixed paint shall be prepared for use on the

project by combining the aluminum paste and aluminum
vehicle in the proportions of twenty-four hundredths 10.24)
kilogram paste per liter of vehicle.
7.2.7.3
Mixing
Pigment
Fifty-nine and five tenth

159.5I~Jcentmin.
Forty and fiVe tenths {40.5)
percent max.
Fifty two (521 percent min
Vehicle
Non-volatile material in
vehicle
Phthalic anhydride
Fourteen and ni ne tanths

(14.91 percent min
Water
Five tenths Dercent max.
Table7.2.9-1: Composition of Maroon Field Coat Paint
ii.

Basic lead siUco

chromate
Siliceous red iron oXide
Sixtysix and five-tenths (66.5)

percent minimum
Thirtythree 133) percent max.
Table 7.2.9-2: Composition of Plgmrmt for Maroon Aeld
The paste and vehicle shall be thoroughly mixed

before use. The quantity of paint mixed shall not be
greater than will be used within twenty-four 124) hours
after mixing.
7.2.9.3
7.2.8
Tinted Aluminum Paint
Maroon field coat paint shall weigh not less than one
and s~xty-seven hundredths (1.67) kilograms per liter.
7.2.8.1
Description
Tinted aluminum paint shall consist of a mixture

containing aluminum paint that conforms to the
requirements of Clause 7.2.7 and Prussian Blue Paste or
Chrome Green paste, conforming to the requirements
specified in ASTM D 212 or 0261.
7.2.8.2
Proportions
Tinted aluminum paint shall be prepared by mixing

one 111 liter of aluminum paint meeting this specification
with between thirty (30) and forty-five (451 grams of either
Prussian Blue paste or Chrome Green paste in oil or
varnish.
7.2.9
Basic Lead Silico-Chromate Maroon

Reid Coat
7.2.9.1
Description
This paint is intended for use as a field coat over a

properly primed surface. Hiding power shalf be sufficient
to obtain a complete hiding when applied at normal
spreading rates and shall have a good contrast with the
primer coat. This paint shall consist only of basic lead
silicochromate, siliceous red iron oxide, raw linseed oil,
linseed-soya oil modified alkyd resin, thinners, dryers, and
from five tenths (0.5) to seven-tenths (0.71 percent
suspending agent, based on the pigment. to insure soft
settlement of the pigment during storage. The alkyd resin
shall conform to FSS TIR-266, Type Ill and the thinner to
FSS TI-T-291, Grade 2.
7.2.9.2
Compositon
Coat Paint
7.2.9.4
Weight per Liter
Coarse Partie! es
Coarse particles and skins retained on a forty-five

thousandths (0.04501 millimeter (No. 325) sieve shall not
exceed one (1) percent by weight based on pigment.
7.2.9.5
Consistency
Consistency shall be not less than seventy (70) or

more than eighty-two (82) Krebs Units (K.U.).
7.2.9.6

shall not be settled, caked, or thickened to such a degree
7.2.9.7
Skinning

has been stored fortyeight (48) hours in a dark place in a
7.2.9.8
Dilution Stability

reduction with mineral spirits in the proportions of eight
(B) parts by volume of paint to one (1) part by volume of
mineral spirits.
7.2.9.9
Brushing Properties
The paint, after through mixing, shall have

sati sfactory brushing and leveling properties, and show no
running or sagging tendencies, when brushed on a
vertical steel surface.
Maroon field coat paint shall conform to the

following composition by weight:
i.
Paint:
75
~~
Minlltry of Tntr1port 3t Communteotlon
OGRLT
../"'.~<:,Paint
7.2,!MO
Spraying Properties
7.2.10.4
The palllt, when thinned, shall spray satisfactorily,

show no tel'\dency to orange-peel, sag, creep or run, and
respects. The mtner~ spirits used as a reducer shall
conform to FSS TT-T-291 Grade 1, and shall be tested and
7.2.9.11
Drying Time
The paint shall be touch-dry in no more than four (41

hours and diVthrough in not more than twanty.four (24}
hours.
7.2.10
Basic Lead Slllco-Chromate Dark

Green Finish Coat
7.2.1 0.1
Description
Coarse particles and skins retained on a fortyfive

thousandths (0.045) millimeter (No. 3251 sieve shall not
exceed one (11 percent by weight based on pigment
7.2.10.6
7.2.10.2
Composition
Oatt! green finish coat paint shall conf orm to the

following by weight:
~Paint:
Pigment
- .
Vehicle
'No,...volatila ma~ria l ln
vehlcle
Phthalic anhydride
based on vehicle solids
Water
Fortv-one !41) percent min.

Fiftvnine !591 percent max.
Fifty. thnte (53) percent mln.
T
Twenty & five-tenths {20.5]

_l)llrcent max.
Five-tenths !0.5) percent max.
l"able 7.2.10-1: Composition of Dark Green Finish Coat

Paint
ii.
Pigment.: The extracted pigment shall conform

Basic l1111d silrcochromate

Chromium oxide areen
Eighty-six (861 percent min.
Nine !9l PBrcent min.

Table7.2.10-2: Composition of Pigment for Dark Green
Finish Coat Paint
7.2.10.3
Weight per Liter
Dark green finish coat paint shall weigh not less than
one and thlny-three hundredths (1.331 kilograms per liter.
7-6
Consi stency
Consistency shall be not less than seventy-two (72)

nor more than eighty (80) Krebs Units I K. U. ).
7.2.10.6
Color
Dark green finish coat paint color shall be as

approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shalt submit to
the Engineer, for approval, color chips of the paint
proposed for the work.
7.2.10.7
Thls paint is Intended for use as a finish coat over a

properly primed and field-coated surface. Dark green
finish coat paint shall consist only of basic lead silicachromate, chromium oxide green, phthalocyanlne green
and/ or phthalocyanine blue, lampblack, soya oil modified
alkyd resin, raw linseed oil, thinners, dryers and from sixtenths (0.6) to seven-tenths (0. 7) percent suspended agent,
based on the pigment, to insure soft settlement of the
pigment during storage. The alkyd resin solution shall
conform to FSS TT-R-266. Type I, and the thinner shall
conform to FSS TTT-291, Grade 2,
Coarse Particles
Conditi on in Container

shall not be settled, caked, or thickened to such a degree
7.2. 10.8
Skinning

has been stored fony-eight {481 hours in a dark place i n a
7.2.10.9
Dilution Stability

reduction with mineral spirits In the proporti ons of eight
!81 parts by volume of paint to one {1) part by volume of
mineral spirits.
7.2.10.10 Brushing Properties
The paint, after through mixing, shall have
satisfactory brushing and l eveling properties, and show no
steel surface.
7.2.10.11
Spraying Properties
The paint, when thinned, shall spray satisfactorily,

show no tendency to orange-peel, sag, creep or run, and
conform to FSS TI-T291 Grade 1, and shall be tested and
7.2.10,12
Drying Time
The p11!nt shall be touch-dry In not less than twenty

(20) minutes or more than four {41 hours and dry-through
In not more than twenty-four (24) hours.
Sultanate of Oman, Stondord Spedfi'~Dill !Gt Road & BridgQ CaMm'<'lion 21!1D
Paint)
7.2.11
Zinc Dust Paint
7.2.11.1
Description
Zinc dust paint shall be e ready-mixed, high zinc dust

content paint suitable for repairing damaged spelter
coating on galvanized steel.
7 .2.11.2
Requirements
The paint shall comply wth all the requirements of

U.S. Mil;(ary Specification MIL-P-21035 (Ships), Paint, High
Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair, dated August 23,
1957, with the following additions and exceptions~
The paint shall be supplied ready-mixed
Material supplied In two (2) compartment cans
to be mixed on the job will not be accepted
ii.
Pigment content expressed as a weight percent
of total nonvolatile content may be a minimum
of ninety-two (92) instead of the ninety-four
(94) minimum required by the Military
Specification.
iii.
Percent metallic zinc by analysis in the pigment
may be minimum of ninety-four (94) instead of
the ninety-seven and five-tenths (97.5)
mi nimum required by the Military Specification.
Method Standard No. 141, for the material to be analyzed

or tested.
No paint or paint materials shall be used which have

not been approved by the Engineer. Paint or paint
materials for which samples andfor certificates of
guarantee of the same paint or paint materials have
previously been submitted to the Engineer and approved
thereby may be used if the additional shipments are
accompanied by the manufacturer's guarantee that the
product is equal in all respects to the previously approved
materials.
5
The required color. and, if applicable, texture of the
coating shall be as specified on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer and the coating shall be selected
by the Engineer on the basis of trial panels prepared by
the Contractor.
7.2.12
Gloss Enamel
6
The Contractor shall supply manufacturer's samples,
specifications and chemical compositions of paint(s)
meeting the requirements of these specifications and
which correspond to the color and texture specified. A
minimum of five (5) samples per pay item shall be
provided, of which not more than three (3) shall be from
any one manufacturer. The Engineer shall select a
maximum of three (3) coatings per pay item for which trial
panels shall be constructed by the Contractor as specifi ad
herein.
7.2.12.1
Description
7.2.14
Portland Cement Paint
7.2.14.1
Description
Gloss paint shall be a high-grade synthetic-type high

gloss enamel for use on exterior and interior metal. It shall
be highly weather-resistant and characterized by easy
brushing, good co' or end gloss retention, good drying and
flexibility, with freedom from after-tack.
7.2.12.2
Requirements
The paint shall conform to Federal Specification TTE-489, Class A, Air Drying. This enamel may be thinned
with Thinner; Federal Specification TT-T-291 E, Type II,
Grade A (Mineral Spirits).
7.2.13
All materials shall be accompanied by the

manufacturer's certificate of guarantee. The certificate
shall give the quantity of paint in the shipment and shall
identify the paint by order number, project location and
destination. Materials not accompanied by a certificate of
guarantee shall be sampled in the field and samples
submitted to an approved independent laboratory for
testing.
2
The Engineer will approve materials on the basis of
the certificates of guarantee and/or laboratory tests, but
reserves the right to resample and have retested any
materials used during the progress of the work. Should
the paint not conform to the specifications, it shall be
rejected, previous approval notwithstanding.
3
Materiels and paints shall be analyzed or tested by
the methods specified in the ASTM, AASHTO, or FSS Test
Cement paint shall conform to the US Federal

Specification TIP- 0035(1) - Paint, Cementitious, Powder,
White and Colors and Is intended for use on properly
prepared concrete surfaces; this paint shall not be applied
over old paint or other types of surfaces. Portland cement
paint is suitable for use on interior and exterior concrete
surfaces, below and above grade, under normal service
and climatic conditions. Where more stringent
requirements are anticipated, preference shall be given to
solvent based polymer paints, described below under
Clause 7.2. 15.
7.2.14.2
Composition
Portland cement paint shall be a water-based

pigmented cement wash coating, having properties
similar to the concrete surface itself. Portland cement
paint shall be supplied as dry powder to be mixed with
water prior to using. After addition of water, thorough
mixing shall follow to obtain a creamy consistency to
facilitate a uniform appl"cation, and paint shall thereafter
be used within the time limits specified by the
manufacturer.
7.2.14.3
Colors
Portland cement paint colors shall be as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
11
~~
Mlnitry ofTfnnport & Comrnurdcotfon
OORtT
./".~Vaint
7.2.15
Polymer Latex Paint
7.2.16.2
7.2.16.1
Description
Single-component
polymer paints
shall be
pigmented solvent-based solutions of resins, such as
chlorineted rubber, styrene butadiene and vinyl chloride
vinyl acetate copolymers. Such 'rubber-based' paints shall
be of a formulation so as to possess a considerable degree
of flexibility and extensibility whel\ app!!ed to the specified
thickness, in order to maintain a continuous coating over
minor cracks which may exist or develop in the concrete
substrate.
1
Polymer latex paint shall conform to the US Federal
Specifications TT-P..()033 - Paint, Latex Base, Exterior, or
TT-P-960 - Paint Latex Base. for Exterior Surfaces and is
intended for use on properly prepared concrete surfaces,
not less than 3 weeks old, with normal, high or varying
moTsture content, on masonry surfaces, and on other
types of old paints. Application over other types of paint is
subject to the manufacturer's written instructions and
limitations, and to the approval of the Engineer. Polymer
latex paint is suitable for use on interior and exterior
concrete and masonry surfaces, below end above grade,
under normal service and climatic conditions. Where more
stringent requl remants are anticipated, preference shall ba
given to solvent-based polymer palnts, described under
Clause 7.2. 16.
7.2.15.2
Composition
Poymer latex paint shall be a water-based dispersion

1
of pigments and polymeric film-forming materials. Film
formers may be butadiene-styrene, chlorinated rubber,
vinyl acetate or butyrate, or acrylic resins. Exterior grade
shall be used in all cases, with a flat or semi-gloss mildew
resistant finish, es shown on the Drawings or as directed.
7.2.15.3
Colors
Po~ymer latex paint colors shall be as shown on the

Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
7.2.16
Polymer Paint
7.2.16.1
Description
Polymer paint shall conform to the requirements of

the
US
Federal
Specifications TT-P-1411APaint.
Copolymer Resin, Cementilious; TT-P-95CPaint, Rubber for
Swimming Pools and Other Concrete and Masonry
Surfaces; TT-P-97DPaint. Styrene-Butadiene Solvent Type,
White; TT-P-1181A(1 )-Paint, Styrene-Acrylete Solvent
Types, Tints al"d Deep Tones: TT-C-545 D[1) Coating :
Polyester-Epoxy (Two Component), High-Build, Gloss and
Semigloss, White and Ti nts; TT-C-1659A - Coatings :
Epoxy Emulsion, Two-Component Gloss and Semigloss:
TT-C-5358(1) - Coating, Epoxy, Two Component; TT-C5420- Coating, Polyurethane, Oil Free, Moisture Curing; or
MIL-C-22750C Coating, Epoxy-Polyamide. Polymer paint
is intended f or use on properly prepared Interior or
exterior concrete and masonry surfaces, with low or
relatively stable moisture content, below and above grade,
under normal or adverse service conditions and normal,
humid or wet climatic conditions; and on certain types of
old paints, subject to the manufacturer' s written
Instructions/ Hmitations, to the approval of the Engineer.
and as herein specified.
7-6
Composition
2
The paint formulation shall have a potential to resist
soiling and be cleanable w ith commercial detergents.
Thermoplastic formulations and formulations soluble in
organic solvents shall not be approved for use on surfaces
that need to be c!eaned with steam cleaning or strong
detergents and aggressive solve11ts.
3
Two-component polymer paints: One of the
components shall be a pigmented solution of a
compounded polymer, with or without solvent. such as
epoxy. urethane or polyester; the other component shall
contain a reactive chemical, the hardener. After mixing the
two components to the manufacturer's instructions,
application to the substrate and curing, the painted
surface shall be a hard, strong, chemical. and moisturereslstont film with excellent adhesion to the protected,
properly prep1red surface. The finished surface shall be
easy to clean, resistant to fungus and strong detergents,
end inert to heat and steam in order to be used as antigraffiti pe!nt. when required. Two-component epoxy
formulations shall not be used on surfaces that are
exposed to sunlight. In such cases. two-component
exterior grade urethane formulations (alfphatic grades)
shall be approved for use.
7.2.16.3
Colors
Polymer paint colors shall be as shown on the

Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
7.2.17
Acrylic Emulsion Paint
Acrylic emulsion paint shall comply in an respects

with the following Master Painters Institute Detailed
Performance Standards:
i.
MPI N10 for flat paint,
ii.
MPI #11 for semi-gloss, or
iii.
MPI N119 for gloss.
2
The paint may be t inted by using 'universal' or 'all
purpose' concentrates.
7.3
7.3.1
General
Painting of steel and concrete structures and other

metal, concrete and masonry shall include proper cleaning
and preparation of the substrate surfaces; application,
protection, drying, and curing of the paint coatings;
,..:.:....,.,.,
: . . ;.:. 'o; :.';.R::.; ood::..:r:...e::r:::.:..eon.
KIQo ==':'.r.
.;=::~:.a_i_n_t"')
X---~
SultRnato of Ornao, St_ _ _ _
protection of pedestrian, vehicular or other traffic upon or

underneath or nee r the work; end protection of other
completed work against disfigurement by spatters,
splashes and smirches, of paint or of paint material.
7.3.2
Application
7.3.2.1
General
between ten and thirty-two degrees

Celsius (10" 32" C).
Solvent-based paints shall be applied
when the temperatures of the surfaces to
be painted and of the surrounding air are
between seven and thirty-five degrees
Celsius (7"-35" Cl.
Paint shall not be applied In fog, mist,
rain or when the relative humidity
exceeds eighty-five percent (85%).
Painting operations shall not start when
rain is anticipated to strike the painted
surface within twenty-four (241 hours of
application.
The paint shall be applied in accordance with the

following procedures:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Paint may be applied with brushes or by

spraying, except for aluminum paint, which
shari be appl'ed by spraying. All spraying
equipment shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval. If work done by spraying is not
satisfactory to the Engineer. hand brushing wi 1
be required,
Pa'nt shall be applied only when the air
temperature is at or above five degrees Celsius
(S"C.J. It shall not be applied upon damp
surfaces or when the air is misty or otherwise
unsatisfactory for the work.
Paint shall not be applied in the open on metal
or other surfaces that are too hot and which
will cause the paint to blister and produce a
porous paint film. Material painted under cover
shall remain under cover until dry and when
weather conditions permit its exposure in the
open.
When brushes are used, the paint shall be
spread to produce a uniform even coating in
close contact with the substrate, or with
previously applied paint. To secure a
maximum thickness of paint film upon rivet
heads, the edges of plates, angles, or other
rolled shapes, these areas shall be 'striped' in
advance of the general painting, and shortly
afterwards shall be given a second or 'wash'
coat when the general coat is applied. The
paint shall be well-worked into all joints and
open spaces.
Power spraying equipment shall apply the
paint in a fine, even spray, without the addition
of thinner. Paint, when applied with spray
equipment shall be immediately followed by
brushing, when necessary, to secure uniform
coverage and to eliminate wrinkling, blistering
and air holes.
On all surfaces which are inaccessible for paint
brushes, the paint shall be applied with
sheepskin daubers specially const ructed for the
purpose.
Unless otherwise permitted or required by the
manufacturer's printed instructions, the
following shall apply:
Water-based paints shall be app'led
when the temperatures of the surfaces to
be painted and of the surrounding air are
7.3.3
Concrete Surfaces
7.3.3.1
Preparation
1.
Concrete surfaces to receive paint shall be prepared
to ensure complete adhesion of the coating material.
i.
Preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces

shall comply with the requirements of this
Specification.
Due to
the
continuous
development of new products, absolute
adherence to the paint manufacturer's
recommendations and written instructions is
critical for the proper performance of the work.
The Engineer may, at any time, require the
presence of the manufacturer's technical
representative on site, for as long es the
Engineer deems necessary, to ensure proper
execution of the work.
ii.
The concrete and masonry surfaces shall not

be contaminated by chemicals, such es form
release egents or curing compounds that can
prevent good adhesion between the paint
meterie I and the substrate. The surfaces shall
be newly exposed, free of loose. weak and
unsound materials. Iaita nee, efflorescence,
inadequately cured concrete, and condensed
surface moisture ere conditions objectionable
to paint application. The dryness or dampness
of the surface shall be compati ble with the
paint type to be used as per the manufacturer's
Instructions.
iii.
Preparation of repaired concrete surfaces may

include chemical cleaning and mechanical
cleaning. Acid etching shall be employed only
at the recommendation of the paint
manufacturer end upon approval by the
Engineer, and shall be performed by crews
experienced in its use.
Chemical cleaning shall be employed prior to
mechanical cleaning or acid etching when
removal of surface contaminants such as oil,
grease and dirt is required. Solutions of caustic
soda or tri-sodium phosphate may be used. as
well as proprietary detergents specially
formulated for use on concrete. Solvents shall
iv.
7-9
_]
~~
Mrnletry of Tranapor'l: & Comrnunlc:adona
DfiAtr
~~Vaint
v.
vi.
vii.
viii,
lx.
x.
NO
not be used for this purpo$e. The approved

detergent shall be applied with vigorous
scrubbing, followed by flushing with water to
remove all traces of both the detergent and the
contaminant.
Mechanical cleaning may include scarifiCation
and grinding when small areas are involved.
For larger areas, wet sandblasting and,
preferably, high-pressure water jetting shall be
employed. Conventional dry sandblasting shall
not be permitted.
Acid to be used for etching, when approved.
shall be a 10190 maximum dilution ratio of
commercial grade phosphoric acid in water
solution, applied at a rate of one ( 1.0) liter per
square meter of surface to be prepared.
Hydrochloric acid solutions shall not be
permitted for this purpose. For small areas,
plastic sprinkling cans may be used for
dispensing the acid solution. Larger areas shall
be sprayed with low pressure automatic spray
equipment. Upon subsidy of the foaming
action of the acid (3 to 5 minutes) the entire
treated surface shall be thoroughly flushed
with water, while scrubbed with stiff bristle or
w ire brushes to remove the salts formed on the
surface and to dislodge loose particles. The
adequacy of the flushing operation shall be
checked at several points within the cleaned
area by placing litmus or pH paper on the wet
surface to determine whether the acid has been
completely neutralized. Further flushing may
be necessary to ensure an absolutely
neutralized surface.
When forced drying of wet surfaces is
necessary, as approved by the Engineer, heat
may be applied or dry, oil-free air may be
blown over the surface.
Concrete and masonry surfaces to be painted
shall be tested for surface quality prior to
application of paint. Tests shall include
cleanliness, dryness and strength qualities of
the substrate as speclfied below.
Cleanliness of Surface.
Dusty condition: wipe the surface with a
dark cloth; if a white powder is on the
cloth. the surface is unsatisfactory.
Oily condition: Sprinkle water on the
dried suspect surface; if the water
spreads out immediately instead of
standing as droplets, the surface is not
contaminated by oils.
Acid condition: Use pH paper to
determine the acidity at the concrete
surface; a pH value below four (4) is
unacceptable.
Dryness of Surface: Unless otherwise specified
by the paint manufacturer, this test is
applicable only to solvent-based paints. Waterbased paints may be required to be applied on

damp surfaces to promote adhesion; however,
free-standing water on the surface to be
painted shall not be acceptable.
Moisture content is considered excessive on a
tested surface, if moisture collects at the bond
plane between the concrete and the paint
material before the paint has cured. Tape a one
and two tenths by one and two tenths {1.20 x
1.20) meters clear, polyethylene sheet to the
tested surface and determine the time required
for moisture to collect on the underside of the
sheet. Compare the time required for moisture
to collect, (1), with the time required for the
paint to cure, (2), as supplied by the paint
manufacturer. If 11) is greater than (2), the
surface Is adequately dry.
xi.
Strength of Surface. when laitance is present:

Unless otherwise specified by the paint
manufacturer, this test is applicable to waterbased paints and to two-component, solventbased paints.
Where loose powdery material is readily observed

following the scraping of the surface with a putty knife,
excessive laitance is present that could adversely affect
the adhesion of the paint. The paint manufacturer should
be consulted 115 to the intensity of mechanlcal cleaning
required.
7.3.3.2
Painting
Portland cement paint shall be applied to damp

surfaces w 'thout any free surface water, After application,
the paint shall be cured by keeping it moist for fortye'ght
(48) to seventytwo (72) hours. For two-coat applications,
the second coat shall be applied within twenty-four (24)
hours from completion of the first coat. Dry film thickness
shall be not less than three hundred eighty (380) m icrons
per coat. One coat shall be applied, unless otherwise
shown on the plans.
2
Polymer latex paint shall be applied to damp
concrete surfaces, so water wi II not be absorbed from the
paint before it has a chance to properly cure, unless
otherwise specified by the manufacturer. When latex paint
does not properly adhere to chalky surfaces. the prior
application of a low viscosity penetrant primer will be
required. per the manufacturer's instructions. Any
embedded or adjacent steel work shall be coated with a
rust inhibitive primer as specified in this Section, before
application of any water-based paint. Dry film thickness
shall be not less than sixty-fiVe (65) microns per coat. Two
coats shall be applied, excluding sealer or primer, unless
otherwise shown on the plans.
3
Polymer paint shall be applied to dry surfaces, unless
otherwise specifically permitted by the paint manufacturer
in writing. Two-component paints require the mixture of
the two components supplied as a kit, in the correct
proportions as per the manufacturer"s instructions. To
J
ensure a complete chemical reaction between the
hardener and the polymer, power stirrers shall be used for
thorough mixing. The paint shall be used aher expiration
of the required induction period end within the expected
pot-life period of the mixed system, as specified by the
manufacturer. Should thinning or viscosity reduction be
necessary, only thinners recommended by the
manufacturer shall be used. Thinners shall be added only
aher the two components are blended.
Dry film thickness shall be not less than forty (401 microns
per coat. A minimum of two coats shall be applied,
excluding primer, unless otherwise shown on the plans or
recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended
purpose.
4
All finished coatings shall be uniform in color and
texture, free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, etc.,
and shall match the color and texture of the approved
sample panel to the Engineer's satisfaction.
5
Should any coating, in the Engineer's opinion, be
non-uniform in color and/or texture or should there be
runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, etc., in the coating, the
Contractor shall propose remedial works for the
Engineer's approval. Should the Contractor's proposals be
unacceptable, or should the remedial works result in an
unsatisfactory finish. the Engineer shall require the
Contractor to:
Recoat the complete area affected; or
Remove, to the extent possible, the coating
from the affected area and reapply the coating.
The Engineer shall notify the Contractor which option he
requires and, in the case of a re-coating being
unsatisfactory, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to
remove, to the extent possible, the re-coating and the
original coating and reapply a new coating. All re-coating
works and removal and re-application of coatings shall be
6
If the color of the coating departs from that of the
approved trial panel color to a degree which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, is unacceptable, the Contractor
shall stop application and shall demonstrate to the
Engineer's satisfaction that the coating formulation and/or
application method can be suitably adjusted to produce a
color matching that of the trial panel. If considered
necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall produce
additional trial panel(sl at his own expense to demonstrate
that a color match can be obtained.
7
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a satisfactory color
match cannot be obtai ned, the Engineer, at his option,
may require the Contractor to remove, to the extent
possible, the unacceptable coating applied to the
permanent works and/or to apply an alternative coating.
Such an alternative coating will be selected by the
Engineer on the basis of the previously prepared I rial
panels, except that where In the opinion of the Engineer
such trial panels are unacceptable, the Contractor shall
supply additional manufacturer's samples and trial panels
as the Engineer may require until a coating satisfactory to

the Engineer is obtained.
Acrylic emulsion paint for concrete shall be applied
8
in not less than two applications to produce a uniform
appearance. The paint shall be applied only when the
ambient temperature is 10 degree C or above. Painting
shall not be permitted when it can be anticipated that the
ambient temperature will drop below 10 degree C during
the application and drying of the paint.
7.3.4
Structural Steel Requirements
1
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, or in the
Special Specification, all new structural steel shall be
given three (31 coats of paint. The first coat shall be
applied immediately after shop fabrication is complete.
The second and third coats shall be applied after all
erection is complete, except that immediately following
the field riveting or bolting of members. the heads of field
rivets, bolts, and all abrasions of the shop coat due to
handling at the shop, shipment, erection, etc., and all field
erection marks shall be thoroughly covered with one ( 1)
coat of primer as specified for shop coat and permitted to
become thoroughly dry before the first field coat is applied.
2
All metal coated with impure or unauthorized paint
shall be thoroughly cleaned and repainted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Prime coats of paint shall be
at least four hundredths (0.04) millimeter thick when dry
and each intermediate and finish coat of paint shall be at
least three hundredths (0.03) millimeter thick when dry.
No portion of the paint films shall be less than these
specified thicknesses. The film thickness shall be not so
great that either the appearance or service life of the paint
will be detrimentally affected.
7.3.5
Shop Coat (Prime)
7.3.5.1
Shop Cleaning
1
All surfaces of metal to be painted shall be
thoroughly cleaned of rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil or
grease, and all other foreign substances. The removal of
rust, scala and dirt shall generally be done by the use of
metal brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers, sandblasting,
or other effective means. Oil and grease may be removed
by the use of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or wood fiber
brushes shell be used for removing loose dirt. Unless
cleaning is to be done by sandblasting, all weld areas,
before cleaning is done, shall be neutralized with a proper
chemical. after which they shall be thoroughly rinsed with
water. All cleaning shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
7.3.5.2
Shop Painting
Shop pal nti ng shall be done in accordance witt1 the

following procedures:
i.
When all fabrication work is complete and has
been accepted, all surfaces not painted before
assembling shall be given an approved shop
coat of paint. Steel members shall not be
7-11
~~
Mlnitry of Ttonport
a.
CQn1munlcatron
OORl. T
~~<:,Paint
li.
iii.
iv.
v.
vl.
loaded for shipment until thoroughly dry. No

painting shall be done after loading.
Structural steel which ls to be welded shall not
be painted before weldit1g Is complete. If it is to
be welded only in the fabricating shop and
subsequently erected by bolting, it shall receive
one {1 I coat of paint after shop welding is
finished. Steel which is to be field welded shall
be given one {1) coat of boiled linseed oil or
other approved protected coating after shop
welding and shop fabrication are completed.
Surfaces of metal to be in contact whet1
assembled shall not be painted. Surfaces of
field connections gusset plates of trusses and
areas of girders or plates where floor beam or
stringer connections are to come in contact
shall not be painted.
With the exception of pins and pinholes in
bearings, unless otherwise shown in the
Drawings. all surfaces except those described
in Subparagraph iii, whether machine finished
or otherwise, shall be given the regular coat of
shop paint, and those parts inaccessible after
erection shall be given two (2) coats of field
paint. Pins and pinholes shall be coated, as
soon as pra cticable afte r being accepted, with a
hot mixture of white lead and tallow before
removal from the shop.
The composition used for coating machine
finished surfaces shall be mixed in the
following proportions:
One and eight-tenths (1.8) kilograms of
pure tallow
Nine-te nths (0 9) kilogra ms of pure white
lead
Ninety-five hundredths (0.95) liters of
pure linseed oil
Erection marks for field identification of
members shall be painted upon previously
painted surfaces.
7.3.6
Field Coat
7.3.6.1
Field Cleaning
When the erection work is complete, Including a ll

riveting, bolting, welding, straightening of bent metal, etc.,
all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease, or other foreign
matter shall be removed as specified under Paragraph
7.3.5.1, 'Shop Cleaning'.
7.3.8.2
Field Painting
As soon a s the field cleaning is done to !he

satisfaction of the Engineer, the heads of field rivets and
bolts, welded surfaces, and any surface from which the
shop paint has worn off, or has otherwise become
defe ctive, and all shipplng and erection ma rks, shall be
touched up by covering with one (1) coat of the same type
7t 2 .
of paint used in the shop, and allowed to become dry

before the first field coat is applied.
2
When the paint for 'touching up' coat has become
dry, the first and second field coats may be applied In no
case shall a succeeding coat be tpplied until the previous
coat has dried through the full thickness of the paint film.
3
All small cracks and cavities which have not become
sealed by the first coat shall be filled with a paste mixture
of red lead and linseed oil before the second coat is
applied.
4
Contractor shal l, take precautions to prevent dust
and d irt from coming in contact w ith freshly painted
surfaces or wilh surfaces before the peint is applied.
7.3.7
Bridge Railings and Guardrails
7.3.7.1
Bridge Railings
Metal bridge railing shall be painted as specified in

the Special Specification.
2
Aluminum hand rails shall not be painted except for
the portion of posts to be Inserted in concrete which shall
first be painte d with one (1) coat of zinc dust-zinc oxide
primer (Clause 7.2.61 to a point two (2) centimeters above
the concrete line. The aluminum hand rail after erection
shall be wiped with a rag saturated with lacquer thinner to
remove stains.
7.3.7.2
Guardrail
Guardrail posts and beoms shall be painted If

specifie d in the Special Specifications. Under no
circumsta nces shall any paint other than zinc dust-zinc
oxide primer (Clause 7.2.6) be used for the s hop or prime
COlt on galvanized guardrails.
7.3.8
Painting Existing Structures
The painting of existing structures shall be done in

accorda nce with the following procedures:
i.,
Prepara tion shall include the re moval of the
rust. scale, dead paint d irt, grease or other
foreign matter from all parts of existing bridge
structures.
11.
The requirements and methods e for cleaning
and painting shall be the same as specified for
shop and field painling herein.
All metal surfaces not in close contact with
iii.
other metal surfaces or truss m embers,
concrete , stone ma sonry, or other structure
materials shall be considered as exposed to
deterioration by rusting and shall be
thoroughly cleaned and given the number of
coats of designated paint stated In the Special
Specification.
iv.
Unless otherwise slated, the metal shall be
given at least two (2) coats of paint.
v.
When repainting with the same type of paint a~
that on a n existing surface , the surface shall be
thoroughly
washed
with
commercial
Sultanptu of OmD n. St.l!dzfd
~fot.~tnmo f01
detergents, or, where approved, with solvents,

to remove any dirt, chalk and grime
accumulation, along with dead paint.
vi.
vii.
viii.
7.3.9
When repainting with a different type of paint

from that on an existing surface, the Contractor
shall ensure that the paint is compatible with
the existing paint.
Loose paint, curled edges and blistered paint
shall be removed before repainting. Light wet
sandblasting. water-jet blasting, machine
sanding, or paint strippers may be utilized.
Filling of cracks and holes in the concrete shall
be done in the same manner as for new
concrete. If the old paint has become partially
removed, but that remaining is in good
condition, the bare areas shall be painted first,
followed by two coats over all. If the old paint
is blistered or peeling due to efflorescence, the
cause shall be investigated and the Engi near
will instruct corrective measures or, the type of
paint may be changed.
Painting Steel Piling and Steel Pile

Shells
Unless otherwise provided in the Drawings or

Special Specification, steel bearing piles, steel sheet piles.
and steel pile shells need not be painted if they are to be
encased in concrete or other solid waterproof materials
from six hundred (600) millimeters below the water line or
ground I ine to the tops of the piles.
2
When steel bearing piles, and steel pile shells are not
to be encased, or when provided in the plans, they shall
be painted in accordance with the requirements stated
hereinbefore, except that three (3) coats of shop paint
shall be applied from the tops of the piles to an elevation
three (3) meters below the water line or finished ground
line before driving, and then two (2) field coats of paint as
specified for structural steel shall be applied to each steel
bearing pile. or steel pile shell which extends above the
low water line or finished ground line after driving.
7.3.10 Painting Steel Pile Enclosures and

Tubular Steel Piers
The exterior surfaces of steel pile enclosures and
tubular steel piers shall be painted in accordance with the
requirements of Clause 7.3 8. Painting E)(isting Structures.
7.4
No separate measurement is made for painting of

new structures and miscellaneous metalwork, and piling
which work is considered subsidiary to other sections. The
rates stated In the Bill of Quantities for the work of the
relevant section shall be deemed to include for paint'ng.
2
Painting of existing structures shall be measured in
square meters of the actual area painted ..
Rood llo. Elrid~& Con1tJUC110< 201'
3
Trial panels made by the Contractor to determine
suitability of surface preparation methods and of the
finished coating color and/or texture shall not be
measured for payment.
7.5
Basis of Payments
Painting or repainting in whole or in part of existing

structure(s) shall rank for payment of the amount of
completed and accepted work as measured, at the unit
rate(s) bid per square meter as specified in the Bill of
Quantities.
2
Unit rates shall be full compensation for furnishing
all labor, transport, materials, equipment, tools, tackle,
scaffolding and any other equipment, and for performing
all surface preparation and cleaning and all other items
7.6
Payment will be made under one or more of the

following:
ii
Painting of existing concrete structure

(state type)
Painting of existing steel structure
(state type)
iii Painting of existing railing

(state type)
(sq.m.)
(sq.m.)
(lin.m.)
Ref.
Trtle
8.1
Pipe Culverts
8.1.1
Genllf'lll
8.1.1.1
Description
8.1.1.2
8.1.1.3
Submittals
Installation and Checking
&.1.2
8.1.2.1
8.1.2.2
8.1.2.3
8.1.2.4
8.1.2.5
8.1.2.6
8.1.2.7
8.1.28
8.1.2.9
8.1.3
8.1.3.1
8.1.3.2
8.1.3.3
8.1 3.4
8.1 .3.5
8.1.4
Pege No.
M-'erl11t.
Delivery, Storage and H~mdling
.,
~1
8 1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8>1
Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe

Unreinforced Concrete Pipe
811
8-1
Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert

Reinforced Elliptical Culvert
8-1
.,.1
Corrugated Steel Circular Pipe

and Pipe Archllll
Bituminous Coated Corrugated Steel
B-1
Circular Pipe and Ptpe Arches
B-2
Polymer Coated Steel Circular Pipe

and Pipe Arches
8-2
Concrete and Steel

Construction Requirement
Excavation. Bedding and Backfilling
Pipe Laying
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-2
Pr~~east Concf-'e Pipe and Pipe Arches

B-2
Corrugated Metal Pipe and Pipe Arches 812
Cast-in-Situ Concrete Pipe
and Pipe Arches
B-3
8.1.5
Baal of Payment
8.1.6
hems In the Bil of Quantities
B-3
8-3
8-3
8.2
Storm Sewers
8--3
8.2 .1
8.2.1.1
Genllf'lll
Description
installation and Check:ng
8-3
8.2.1.2
8.2.1 .3
1..2-2
8.2.2.1
8.2.2.2
8.2.2.3
Submittals
Materia Ia
Delivery and Storage
Concrete 11nd Steel
Concrete PiP"
8-3
B-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-4
Ref.
Title
Page No.
8.2.2.4
uPVC Pipe
8.2.2.5
8.2.2.6
Polyethylene II"EI GriiVity Pipe

GRP Pipllll
8.2.2.7
Vitrified Clay PiP"
8.2.2.8
Joints for Concrete Beds and Pipe
8.2.2.9
Surrounds
B tumen Emulsion
Pumping Plant
8.2.2.10
8.2.3
8.2.3 1
8.2.3.2
Excavation. Bedding 11nd Backfilling
Pipe Laying
8.2.3.3
Jointing of Pipes
8.2.3.4
8.2.3.5
8.2.3.6
Una and Gradient

Floatation
Pipe Built Into StruCIUres
8.2.3.7
Cleaning and Inspecting of Storm
8.2.3.8
Sewer Pipes
F.ield Testing: Generally
Air Testing of Pipelinllll
8.2.3.9
8.2.3.10
8.2.3.11
8.2.3.12
8.2.3.13
B-4
8-4
a...
8-5
85
85
85
8-5
B-5
85
85
8-6
8-6
B-6
8-6
86
8-6
Hydrostatic Tming of P.rllllsure

Pipetlnllll
Infiltration Test for GrBVity Pipes
Deflection Tests for GRI' Pipes
87
87
8-7
Hydraulic Individual Joint Test for Pipes

Exceeding 1000 mm
8-7
8.2.6
Basil of Payment
8-7
8.2.6
Item In the Bill of Ouantitillll
8-8
8.3
Manholes, Inlets and

Chambers
8.2A
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.3.1
8.3.3.2
8.3.3.3
&-7
8-8
Description
8-8
M-'erlail
COIIIttuctlon Requirementl
8-8
8-9
Manholllll
8-9
Chambers for Grated Inlets, Curb Inlets

and Ditch Inlets and Outlets
Ironwork
89
8-9
Ref.
8.3.3.4
Title
Cleaning
Page No.
8-9
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8-10
8-10
8.4
Drainage of Structures
8-10
8.4.1
Description
8-10
8.4.2
Materials
Gully end Channel Gratings
Bl-10
8.4.2,1
~~~s of Pll'f"**l
and,rames
8.4.2.2
8.4.2.3
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.8
Pipes
Drainege Beckflltl,g
Balis of PIIYment,
Items In the Bill of Quntltln
8-9
810
Bl-10
Bl-10
8-10
B-12
8-12
8-12
Sultanata a r Oman, Stndsrd SPtldlfc~""" lor Rood a. Bndgo ConotrLICtlan 20l0
Drainage)
8.1
Pipe Culverts
8.1.1
General
8.1.1.1
Description
8.1.2.2
1
This Subsection describes requirements for
furnishing all materials, constructing and installing
concrete and steel pipe culverts including excavation,
bedding and backfilling and all work described in this
Section of the Specification and as shown on the
Drawings.
8.1.1.2
Submittals
1
Coordination Drawings: Submit drawings showing
culverts and major system components. Indicate interface
and spatial relationship between culverts, system
components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.
2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of culverts
including plan layout and locations, types, sizes, capacities,
and flow characteristics in accordance with the
requirements of this Specification Sub-section 1.11.
AsBuilt Drawings: At project close-out, submit
3
record drawings of installed culverts, in accordance with
requirements of this Specification, Subsection 1.11.
4
Certificate of Compliance: Submit certificates of
compliance required by the Client Authority and as
8.1 .1.3
1
The work shall be supervised by qualified
representatives of the Contractor and full facilities and
assistance shall be provided by the Contractor to enable
the Engineer to inspect or check the work at any time.
Such inspection or checking shall in no way relieve the
Contractor from any of his obligations.
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for making minor
adjustments to the location of work as necessary to suit
site constraints and road alignment and profile subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
1
Reinforced concrete pipe shall meet the requirements
of Volume 2 of the Highway Design Standards and shall
comply with BS 5911 1, BS EN 1916 Class H, ASTM C7602
Class IV or DIN V 1201 and DIN EN 1916. Cement used in
manufacture shall be ordinary Portland cement to BS EN
1971.
2
Joints shall be gasket type with flexible spigots and
sockets. The shape of the joint shall be designed to
prevent any movement of the gasket during assembly and
to produce full watertightness. Rubber gasket shall be to
ISO 4633 orBS EN 6812.
3
Manufactured pipe shall, if required by the Engineer,
be tested, prior to delivery to site, for structural strength,
crushing strength and absorption. The manufacturer's
specification and certificate shall be submitted for prior
approval before pipes are delivered to the site.
4
Pipes that fail to meet the strength requirements may,
with the approval of the Engineer, be incorporated in the
work provided the following requirements are met.
i.
The strength does not fall below 80% of that
specified.
ii.
The pi pes are clearly marked and stored
separately from pipes which fully comply with
strength requirements.
iii.
The pipes are bedded in Class 15 concrete.
If understrength pipes are installed with pipes fully
5
complying with the strength requirements, the whole run
shall be classified as under-strength for record purposes.
8.1.2.3
Materials
8.1.2.1
1
Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps.
Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate

above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor
when storing inside.
Protect flanges,
3
moisture and dirt.
fittings,
end
specialties
from
4
Manufacturer's recommendations on handling,
repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, cutting and other
works for pipes and fittings era to be strictly followed.
Unreinforced Concrete Pipe
1
Unreinforced concrete pipe shall meet the
requirements of the Highway Design Standards end shall
comply with BS 59111, AASHTO M 86M I M 86, DIN V
1201 and DIN EN 1916 or ASTM Cl4M and with Paragraph
8.1.2.2 items 2 to 5. Class shall be as designated on
drawings. Cement used in manufacture shall be ordinary
Portland cement to BS EN 1971.
8.1.2.4
8.1.2
Precast Reinforced Concrete Pipe
Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert
1
Reinforced concrete arch culvert shall comply with
AASHTO M 206M I M 206 or ASTM C50602. Unless
otherwise specified Class AIV shall be used for spans of
1300mm or less, and Class Alll for larger spans.
8.1.2.5
Reinforced Elliptical Culvert
1
Reinforced concrete elliptical culverts shall be t o
AASHTO M 207M I M 207 or ASTM C507M02. Their Class
shall be as designated on drawings.
8.1.2.6
Corrugated Steel Circular Pipe and Pipe Arches
Corrugated steel culvert pipe shall comply with the

1
requirements of AASHTO M36 and be zinc coated.
2
A certificata of guarantee from an approved pipe
fabricator shall be submitted by the Contractor for each
shipment of pipe delivered to the Site. The Certificate
~
,.A./
Ministry ofTrnnsport S. Communlc;:otlona
DCiRLT
../""'.
~<Drainage
shall show the quantities of material and state that the

listed materials conform to the specified requirements.
barrel of pipe to bear evenly on solid ground for its full

length.
Pipe on granula r bedding: The Contractor shall scoop

7
out locally at sockets/couplings to enable the pipe to rest
uniformly on the barrel and adjust to the exact line and
level. Aher testing. the Contractor shall Jay and compact
further granular material In 150 mm layers or as approved
to levels shown on the Drawings.
The Engineer may test any material for compliance

with the Specification at any time and reject any material
which does not meet the requirements even though it has
received prior approval based on 1 Certificate of
Guarantee.
8.1.2.7
Bituminous Coated Conugated Steel Circular

Pipe and Pipe Arches
Bituminous coated corrugated steel circular pipe and

pipe arches shall comply with AASHTO M 190. and with
Paragraph 8.1.2.6.
8.1.2.8
Polymer Coated Steel Circular Pipe ;md Pipe

Arches
Polymer coated metal pipe and pipe arches shall

comply withAASHTO M 246 and with Paragraph 8.1.2.6.
8.1.2.9
Concrete and Steel
Concrete, reinforcing steel and reinforced concrete

shall conform to the requirements of Sub-sections 5. 1, 5.2
anc;l 5.3 respectively. Structural steel and other met~~lwork
shall conform to Sub-section 6.2.
8.1.3
8.1.3.1
Excavation, Bedding and Backfilling

requirements of Sub-Sections 2.3 and 2.8.
8.1.3.2
Pipe Laying
Pipes shall not be placed until the foundation has

Pipes shall be laid
been approved by the Engineer.
accurately to line and level and shall have a uniform
bearing at each joint and along the entire length of pipe.
Pipe laying shall begin at the downstream end and
progress upstream.
2
Manufactured pipe shall be handled and assembled
in acc ordance, with the manufacturer' s i nstructions. When

pipe laying is not in progress, the Contractor shall close
open ends of pipes with properly fined temporary wooden
plugs or standard caps as directed
3
The Contractor shall usa ropes, w ire sl!ngs, band
slings. spreader beams etc. for lowering pipes as
recommended by manufacturer for each type of pipe and
as approved.
All material shall be carefully examined for damage
4
and tested in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
before laying, to the satisfaction of Engineer.
5
The Contractor shall remove d 'rt and other materials
before lowering the pipe into the trench and verify the
pipe inside is clear from construction debris before
making joints.
Pipe on solid ground: The Contractor shall cut holes
ill the bottom of trench to allow proper jointing and for
82
8.1.3.3
Precast Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches
Pipes shall be laid w ith hub, bell or groove ends

upstream.
2
Where lih holes have been used. they shall be filled
with an approved cement-sand mortar to provide a
watertight section. Mortar shall be finished flush on the
inside of the pipe.
Pipe joints shall be sealed w ith nexible watertight

elastomeric or rubber gaskets, approved bituminous
sealers or plastic sealants. Bituminous or plastic sealants
shall be applied at the time pipe is being laid. Sealants
shall be installed in accordance with the sealant
manufacturer's instructions so that the joint is completely
filled.
4
Multiple pipe culverts, unless otherwise shown on
the Drawi ngs, shall be laid w ith one-half diameter of pipe
or a mini mum of 300mm, whichever i s greater, between
the pipes.
8.1.3.4
Corrugated Met al Pl pe al'\d Plpe Arches
Metal pipe shall be laid with outside laps of

circumferent ial joints pointing upstream and with
longitudinal laps along the sides. If pipe sections are
j ol nted on the Site. the ends shall be butted as closely as
corrugations will permit and shall be joined with a firmly
bolted coupling bend of the same material as the pipe.
Camber shall be built into the pipe structure to
compensate for settlement f rom fill loads.
2
Multiple culverts, unless shown otherwise on the
Drawings. shall be laid with one-half span of pipe or 1
minimum of 300mm whichever is the greater, between
pipes.
3
The Contractor shall examine material to ensure
internal coating or lining and outer coating or sheathing
are undamaged. If damaged, the Contractor shall make
good or dispose or as directed. Damage to bituminous or
epoxy resin coati ngs may be repaired on site by
application of a repair materi al of a brand and type
approved by the Engineer.
Pipes having any localized
bends in excess of 5% of the nominal pipe diameter or
dents in excess of 13mm depth wib be rejected. Pipes
rejected because of these defects may be used If
satisfactorily repaired and approved by the Engi neer.
Sultanata of Oman. Slndrd Specifications lor Road & Bndg C..nsltuc:ttOn 2010
Drainage)
8.1.3.5
Cast-In-Situ Concrete Pipe and Pipe Arches
8.1.6
i.
Cast-in-situ pipes shall be constructed in accordance

with the Drawings, or In a manner proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
ii.
2
When the Contractor elects to construct the pipe in a
trench with no external vertical forms, 40mm of additional
concrete cover to the reinforcement steel shall be
provided.
iii.
iv.
3
Longitudinal construction joints will only be
permitted as shown on the Drawings.
Transverse
construction joints will be permitted provided prior
approval is obtained from the Engineer.
v.
4
Forms for cast-in-situ pipe shall be approved prior to
their use. Inside pipe forms shall be suitably unyielding
during placement of concrete. Interior arch forms may be
removed after 72 hours if approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall take precautions when removing forms to
protect the culvert from damage. Backfilling shall not
commence until tests indicate the concrete has attained
strength of 50% of the requirement for its Class.
vii.
8.1.4
Pipe culverts shall be measured by the linear meter

of culvert laid or constructed as per the contract Drawl ngs.
Culverts of each type, class and size shall be measured
separately. For pipe culverts without headwalls,
measurement shall be taken from end to end along the
centerline of the pipe. For pipes connected to structures,
maasu rement shall be taken between the inside faces of
parapet or wall along the centerline of the pipe.
2
The measured length of corrugated metal pipe shall
include the length of bends (elbows) installed.
3
Headwalls, wing walls, aprons and cut-off walls that
are part of a pipe culvert installation are measured
separately in accordance with Sub-Section 5.9.
4
Trench excavation, bedding and backfilling for
culvert pipe runs is measured separately under Subsection 2.8, Clause 2.8.4
No separate measurement or payment will be made
5
for connection to drainage structures or to existing pipes.
Nor for additional reinforcing steel, cover and protection
to in-situ concrete pipe culverts and pipe arches, all of
which are considered subsidiary work.
8.1.5
Basis of Payment
The quantity of completed and accepted work.

unit rate per linear meter in the Bill of Qu entities for 'the
various types. classes and sizes of pipe and arch culverts,
which rate shall be full compensation for the cost of
supply, transport, handling, installation of pipe, joints,
materials, labor, equipment, tools and other items
necessary for proper completion of the work.
vi.

Unreinfo reed precast concrete
pipe culvert {diameter)
Reinforced precast concrete
pipe culvert (diameter)
Reinforced precast concrete arch
culvert (size)
Reinforced precast concrete
elliptical culvert (size)
Corrugated steel pipe culvert
(diameter) (coating)
Corrugated steel pipe arch
culvert (size) {coating)
Cast in-situ concrete pipe and
pipe arches [size, type)
8.2
Storm Sewers
8.2.1
General
8.2.1.1
Description
(lin.m.)
{lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
(lin.m.)
[lin.m)

constructing pipes for the removal of surface water from
roads, including connections to rainwater inlets and
discharge to suitable outfall. The work shall include
furnishing all materia Is, installing pipes, excavation,
bedding and backfilling.
8.2.1.2
Installation and checking shall

requirements of Paragraph 8.1. 1.3.
comply to the
Collect site information by performing site survey,

2
researching public utility records, and verifying existing
utility locations.
8.2.1.3
Submittals
Coordination Drawings; Submit drawings showing

pipes and major system components. Indicate interface
and spatial relationship between pipes, system
components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.
2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of storm
sewers systems including plan layout and locations, types,
sizes, and capacities of pipes, manholes and stormwater
inlets in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification Sub-section 1. 12.
3
As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit
record drawings showing the installed pipes and related
components with suffcient details to allow for locating the
pipes for future maintenance. The As-Built drawings shall
be in accordance with requirements of the Specification,
Sub-section 1. 12.
4
Certificate of Compliance: Submit certificates of
compliance as required by the Client Authority and as
~~
Mlnltry or Trnnaport & Communlcetlon
OGRlT
..../"-..~<:prainage
8.2.2
Materials
8.2.2.1
Delivery and Storage
Delivery, storage and handling shall comply to the

requirements of Paragraph 8.1.2.1.
2
During storage plastic pipes shah be protected from
sunlight and supported to prevent sagging and bending.
8.2.2.2
Concrete and Steel

shag conform to the requirements of Sub-sections 5.1, 5.2.
and 5.3 respectively. Structural steel and other metalwork
8.2.2.3
Concrete Pipes
Reinforced and unreinforced concrete pipes shall

comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 8.1.2.2 and
B. 1.2.3, respectively.
8.2.2.4
uPVC Pipe
Pipes shall conform to DIN 8061 / 8062 Class 6 kgfcm1

or Class 10 as Indicated on the Drawings or the Bill of
Quantities. Use concrete encasement If cover is less than 1
meter or greater than 5 meters.
2
Finings shall be to DIN 8061 I 8062 fabricated from
pipe.
3
Joints shall be to DIN 8061 I 8062, socket spigot with
rubber sealing rings to BS EN 681-2.
4
Under drain pipes sha!.l be perforated plastic pipe
conforming to DIN 8061 Class 10 kg/em' or equivalent.
Perforations may be circular holes or slots. Different filter
requirements shall apply to each type of perforation.
5
Circular perforations shall be between 5 mm and 10
mm in diameter arranged symmetrically in minimum of
4 rows parallel to the axis of the pipe. A11 rows shall be in
the lower half of the pipe but no row shall be closer than
36 degrees to the invert. Perforations in each row sha11 be
at a maximum distance of 100 mm centre to centte.
6
Stoned perforations shall be between 1.5 mm and 3
mm in width, and between 25 mm and 40 mm in length
measured on the inside of the pipe_ Perforations shall be
in 2 rows parallel to the axis of the pipes on each side of
the Invert. Each row shall be approximately 45 degrees
from the invert. Perforations shalt be spaced between 20
and 30 times the average slot width along each row.
7
Pipes and finings shalt be protected from the direct
rays of the sun at all times by means or reflective cover
sheets.
8.2.2.5
Polyethylene (PEl Gravity Pipe
Polyethylene (PEl pipes and fittings shall conform

with ASTM 03035.01, ASTM FB94. and installation shall be
in accordance to ASTM D2321.00 and manufacturer's
recommendations.
2
Jointing system should be in accordance with ASTM
FB94.
&-4
Materials used sha11 have a standard PE code

designation 2406 and a minimum hydrostatic design basis
of 1250 psi (8.6MPa) for water at 73.4"F (23"C) according to
AWWAC906Table 1,
8.2.2.6
GRP Pipes
Pipes and fittings shall conform to BS EN1796 & BS

EN14364 or American Water Works Association AWWA
C950.
2
Pipe and fittings shall include a corrosion resist9nt
liner, a structural wall and a resin rich exterior surface.
The liner shall have a nominal thickness of 1.0 mm.
The liner surface shall be reinforced with C glass The
remainder of the liner thickness shall be reinforced with an
acid resistant chopped E glass strand or mat.
4
The pipe structural wall shall consist of gLass
reinforcement, and fine silica sand, all impregnated with
resin. The fine silica sand shall be added to the structural
layer to achieve the design thickness for the required
stiffness specified such that the overall hoop flexural
modulus (EI for pipe is not less than 24 GN/m'. Smca sand
and filler content shall not eKceed 50%.
5
Pipes shall be provided with a resin rich outer layer
reinforced with one layer of C glass veil. The exterior layer
shall have a minimum thickness of 0.2 mm. The layer shall
be resin rich and reinforced with one layer of C glass.
6
The resin used for the corrosion resistant liner of the
pipe and fittings sha ll be high grade polyester resin
(isophthalic or bener) type. For the structural wall and
exterior layer of the pipe a high grade isophthalic
polyester resin shall be used. No dark pigments shall be
used in the pipe or finings.
Pipes shall be designed for e life of not less than 50

years. Contractor shall submit calculations lor initial and
long term deflection with truck loads, buckling, vecuum,
pressure class, end strain in accordance with Appendix A
of AWWA C-950 or equivalent. The maximum calculated
long term deflection should not exceed 3%. Copies of the
design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval..
i.
Stiffness: Minimum 5,000 Nlm'. Suitability of
stiffness shall be verified by Contractor for the
various trench and pipe laying conditions and
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Pressure Class; 6 kg/cm 2 m inimum or as shown
on Drawings.
ii.
Longitudinal Strength: Conform to BS EN1796
& BS EN14364 or ASTM 03262teble 7.
iii. Hoop strength shell be according to ASTM
D3517 Table B.
iv.
Strain corrosion resistance tests shall be
carried out as per ASTM 0 3681 or to BS
EN1796 & BS EN14364 strain corrosion value at
50 years to equal or exceed 0.7%.
v.
Markings shall be to BS EN1796 & BS EN14364
Clause 11.
vi.
Joints shall be GRP double socket couplings
with rubber rings to ISO 4633 or 85 EN 6812
~~
MJnltrv of Tr11naport &: Communlcotlon. OGRlT
~~<Drainage
8.2.2.7
The allowable angular deflection shall

conform to the requirements of BS EN1796 &
BS EN14364.
set and boned into the correct level on the trench

formation bottom and will lay the pipe properly centered
and socketed.
Vitrified Clay Pipes
3
The Contractor shall Insert two hardwood folding
wedges (of a width equal to the width of the concrete
block) between the body of the pipe and block, and drive
them together until the pipe is brought to the exact level
required. The Contractor shall leave blocks and wedges
undisturbed while pipes are being jointed and the
concrete bed and haunch or surround are baing placed.
The Contractor shall ensure blocks and wedges are of
sufficient size and strength to prevent senlemant of pipes.
The Contractor shall leave sufficient space to enable joints
to be made, tested and inspected.
Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall be to BS EN 295

and shall be marked accordingly.
2
Unless otherwise indicated, pipes and fittings shall
be Extra Strength and shall comply with absorption tests
made In accordance with BS 65.
3
Pipes shall be supplied with approved flexible and
telescopic rubber ring joints which shall be capable of
withstanding the specified tests pressures applied both
internally and externally.
4
Junctions on clay pipe sewers shall be of similar
material and suitable for use with flexibly jointed pipes.
5
Before any length of pipe is laid, it shall be Inspected
and stood or slung vertically at the side of the trench
and 'rung' with a wooden mallet. Any damaged or cracked
pipe shall be rejected.
6
Where shown on the Drawings, pipes for use in the
construction of drains shall be British Standard Surface
Water pipes glazed or unglazed manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of BS 65, with Type 2
sockets or plain ended supplied with sleeve couplings.
Perforated pipes shall be Type 1 socketed and sleeve

coupled pipes.
8
Field drain pipes shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 295-5 and BS 1196.
8.2.2.8
Joints for Concrete Beds and Pipe Surrounds
Flexible joints in concrete beds and surrounds to

pipes shall be formed with compressible fibrous board, or
similar approved material, 20mm thick.
8.2.2.9
Bitumen Emulsion
Bitumen emulsion shall be to BS 434 and shall

contain not less than 53% of prime bitumen.
8.2.2.10
Pumping Plant
Pumping plant is as specified in Section 17.
8.2.3
8.2.3.1
Excavation, Bedding and Backfilling

8.2.3.2
Pipe Laying
Pipe laying shall comply with the requirements of

Paragraph 8.1.3.2.
2
For pipe on a concrete bed or surround, the
Contractor shall provide rectangu Ia r blocks of concrete
Class 25, made in approved moulds at least 14 days before
use, and approved hardwood folding wedges. The
Contractor shall provide two concrete blocks for each pipe,
8-5
4
The Contractor shall lay pipes on an even formation
true to grade and line, with sockets facing up the gradient
5
Tolerances shall be 6 mm in level and 25 mm in line
between manholes or access points unless otherwise
specified. Where pipe is to be constructed in straight lines
between manholes the length will not be accepted if a
light at each manhole cannot be seen from adjacent
manholes.
8.2.3.3
Jointing of Pipes
Unless otherwise specified, the manufacturer's

instructions shall be followed regarding placement of
bedding and backfilling. cleanliness of joint surfaces,
lubricant used, correct I ocation of components, provision
of correct gaps between end of spigot and back of socket
for flexible jol nts etc.
2
Concrete pipes shall have watertight joints sealed
with approved rubber rings or flexible gaskets. Joints
shall have a gap formed between the end of the spigot
and the base of the bell of not lass than 6mm and not
greater than 20mm. The gap shall then be filled with e
cement mortar composed of 1 part Portland cement and 3
parts fine aggregate, mixed with sufficient water to form a
workable pasta. As each section of pipe is laid, the bell or
hub of the preceding pipe shall be wetted and cleaned end
the bottom portion filled with mortar. After the pipe is
pi aced. the remaining top part of the gap shall be filled.
3
The inside of the joint shall be finished smooth and
wiped clean. The mortar on the outside shall, after its
initial set, be protected from the sun. Plastic joint
compound may be used in lieu of Portland cement mortar,
in which case it shall be prepared in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
4
Synthetic or rubber joint rings shall be stored until
needed in a cool place away from direct sunlight.
5
Properly fined temporary wooden stoppers shall be
used to close the ends of uncompleted pipe lines. The
stoppers shall only be removed when pipes are being laid
and jointed.
6
The Contractor shall not deflect flexible joints beyond
maximum permissible angles given by manufacturer
and/or relevant Standards.
~~
Minlatry ofTrnnaport & CommunicotJan
DGAtl
~~<Drainage
7
The Contractor shall strictly comply with special
instructions issued by rna nufacturers of proprietary jo' nts
when laying and jointing.
8
The Contractor shall joint di ffering pipe and fitting
material with adaptors as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
8.2.3.4
Line and Gradient
In open excavation: The Contractor shalf provide and

maintain sight rails and boning rods properly painted to
ensure correct alignment of pipe runs. Sight rails shall be
positioned either vertically above the lines of pipes or
immediately adjacent thereto. At no time shall there be
less than three sight ralls in position on each length of
pipeline under construction to any one gradient.
2
Where pipes are laid in headings, the Contractor shall
provide and maintain marks to establish line and level of
pipeline. Marks shall be fixed in each work;ng shaft and
two further marks established in each length of heading.
8.2.3.5
Floatation
Prevention: Whenever water is excluded from interior

of pipe, the Contractor shall place sufficient backfill above
pipe to prevent floatat ion.
Contractor shall provide e suitable personnel tro" ey for

this purpose.
3
Pipelines less than 700 mm diameter and larger pipes
which cannot be inspected from the Inside shall have a
mandrel formed from a cylinder, of diameter 25mm
smaller than the pipe diameter and of length not tess than
the internal diameter of the sewer, passed through.
4
On completion the drains and sewer pipes shall be
flushed from end to end w ith water and left clean and free
from obstructions and debris.
8.2.3.8
Field Testing: Genera lly
All test equipment and related items shall be

provided on site before the test. i.e. pressure gauges,
instruments, water etc...
2
The Contractor shall carry out tests In the presence of
the Engineer's Represent ative.
3
Fittings and joints shen be permanently anchored
before testing and all joints sl\alt be exposed for checking.
4
Sections of pipeline under test shall not exceed 500m
in length for any one test.
5
Test plugs at the ends of each section shall be
secured by struts.
2
The Contractor shall remove: any pipe that hes
floated, correct the bedding and relay.
6
The Contrec:tor shall apply pressure by manually
operat ed test pump or, i n the cese of large d ia meter mains,
by power driven test pump, if approved.
8.2.3.6
7
The Contractor shall examine exposed joints and
repair visible teaks.
Pipe Built Into Structures
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean outside

surface of pipes t o be built in immediately before
installation. Remove protective coating to metal pipes,
and roughen clay and concrete pipes as directed. Plastic
pipes shall be painted with appropriate solvent cement
and sprinkled with dry coarse sanel whilst wet. The
Contractor shall cut away sheat hing from sections t o be
bu~tin and after installation restore protection up to
external face of structure with approved bituminous
material.
2
Install two flexible joints or flexible patented joints
adjacent to structures. The Contractor shall place first
joint not more than one pipe diameter from face o f
structure and second not more than the following
distances away from first;
i.
Pipelines not exceeding 450 mm: 2 pipe
diameters.
ii.
Pipelines over 450 mm and not exceeding 1000
mm: 1.2m.
iii.
Pipelines over 1000 mm: 1.8 m.
8.2.3.7
Cleaning and Inspecting of Storm Sewer Pipes
After backfilling and completion of connections to

manholes, etc, but before the trench surfaces ere
permanently reinstated, the interior of the sewers shall be
cleaned out and ready for inspection by the Engineer.
Pipelines of 700 mm or more diameter w ill, w here
2
practicable, be inspected from the insid e and the
&-6
Should a test fai l. t he Contractor shall locate leak and

8
replace or make good defective pipe or replace and make
good faulty joint and retest main,
9
The Contractor shall keep test records in an approved
form end hand original copy to the Engineer Immediately
after completio n of test.
10 The Contractor shall carry out hydrostatic test while
pipeline is partially b eckfilled.
8.2.3.9
A ir Testing of Pipelines
As soon as p racticable after a length of pipe has been

completed it sha ll be subjected to an air test to BS EN
1610. The length shell be p lUgged and sealed and air
pumped into the pipe by approved method (ie. hand
pump) until a pressure 100 mm head of water is indicated
on a Utube connected to the system
2
The Contractor shall allow 5 minutes for stabil1zation
of air temperatu re end adjust pressure to 100 mm. The
section will not be considered satisfactory if the air
pressure fails f rom 100mm to 75mm heed of water In 5
minutes or less.
3
Failure to pass the air test Is not conclusive and if no
leakage can be traced by external application of soapy
water to aU sealing areas then a hydrostatic test shall be
carried out before final rejection.
Sultonnta of Oma11. St.ndml Spocl!icot ons tar Rcx>d & Bridjj Construction 2010
Drainage)
8.2.3.10
Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
The pipeline shall be filled slowly with water from the

lowest point. After filling with water, absorbent pipes shall
be allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before testing to
allow for complete absorption.
2
Entrapped air shall be bled and pressurizing shall
then proceed unti I the specified test pressure is reached in
the lowest part of the pipeline section under test. Further
quantities of entrapped air shall be bled while the pressure
is being raised.
3
Unless otherwise specified, the test pressure shall be
equal to 1.0 m head of water ebove pipe soffit at highest
point and not greater than 6 m head of water at lowest
point of section under test but shall in no case exceed 75%
of the factory hydrostatic test pressure. If maximum head
is exceeded, the Contractor shell test section in stages.
4
The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour by
pumping using a separate test pump. Pumping shall then
be stopped for 2 hours, at the end of which time the line
shall be re-pressurized to the original test pressure and the
volume of water pumped into the line recorded.
5
The pipeline shall be deemed to have failed the test if
visible leaks are detected (regardless of leakage being
within the allowable specified limit) or if the volume of
water pumped to restore original test pressure after the
period when pumping was stopped exceeds 0.05
liter/linear meter/meter diameter/30 minutes.
8.2.3.11
Infiltration Test for Gravity Pipes
The Contractor shall carry out infiltration test after

total backfilling of length under test.
2
All inlets to the section under test shall be plugged
and the residual flow measured by an approved method.
3
The following limits are not to be exceeded:

i.
Pipelines not exceeding 700 mm: 0.02
liters/hour/100 linear meters/mm diameter,
ii.
Pipelines over 700 mm: 0.03 literslhourl100
linear meters/mm diameter.
5
The section shall be deemed to have failed if
allowable infiltration of water is exceeded. The Contractor
shall locate source of excessive infiltration by approved
means i.e. traversing light and mirrors or inflated rubber
plug etc, make good, and repeat tests until successful.
8.2.3.12
Deflection Tests for GRP Pipes
The Contractor shall conduct deflection tests for GRP

pipes (as % of overall pipe diameter) as required by the
Engineer at three stages. Deflection shall be measured at
the spigot end at mid point and at socket end.
i.
Stage 1: at completion of primary backfill
{deflection at this stage should be below 0.5%).
ii.
Stage 2: at final backfill (maximum allowable
deflection 2.5%).
iii.
Stage 3: six months after final backfill
{maximum allowable deflection 4.0%).
2
Pipes not passing the deflection tests at Stage 2 or
Stage 3 will be removed and replaced.
8.2.3.13
Hydraulic Individual
Joint Test for Pipes
Exceeding 1000 mm
The Contractor shall carry out procedures to BS 5886,
Type 2 testing after backfilling, or equivalent. The
Contractor shall pressurize the joint to 2 bars and wait for
10 minutes then re-pressurize to 2 bars and again wait for
5 minutes. No pressure drop should be observed at the
end of the latter period. If a pressure drop is observed, the
Contractor shall remedy the failed joint to the Engineer's
approval
8.2.4
Trench excavation, bedding and backfilling are

measured under Sub-section 2.8, Clause 2.8.4.
2
Pipes shall be measured in linear meters; each type,
class and size is measured separately. Measurement shall
be as a straight line between tha inside wall faces of
manhole, inlet, sump or gully connection. No allowance
will be made for cut ends and waste.
3
No separate measurement will be made for jointing
materials, junctions and pipe fittings, nor for ancillary
work such as breaking Into existing pipelines or chambers,
cleaning, protection and testing of pipelines, or any other
item necessary for the proper completion of the work, but
shall be considered subsidiary work the costs of which
shell be deemed to be included in the rates and prices for
pipes stated in the Bill of Quantities.
8.2.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work.

unit rates listed in the Bill of Quantities, which unit rates
shall be full compensation for install alien, fittl ng,
supplying materials, transport, labor, equipment, forms,
tools and other items necessary for the pro per completion
of the work as specified in Section 1.
2
Excavation, bedding and backfilling shell be paid for
as indicated in Sub-section 2.8, Clause 2.8.5.
3
Rates for pipes shall include for the following:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Staking out, field surveying and preparation of

shop and coordination drawings.
Pipe fittings, specials and couplings.
Transportation to and hauling about the Site,
loading, unloading and lowering materials in
the trench.
Lubricating agent used for assembling the pipe
sections.
Cutting, machining, chamfering, etc. of
standard length pipes.
Assembling the pipes and couplings and
connecting to inlets, manholes and/or
structures as applicable.
Testing as perthe specification.
Ancillary works and materials.
8-7
~
~
Mlni&try of Trnnaport & CommunlcotJon
DCiRl t
~~<prainage
ix.
8.2.6
i.
Flushing, cleaning. painting, lini ng and coating.

Storm sewer (type) (diameter)
llin.m.)
8.3
Manholes, Inlets and Chambers
8.3.1
Description
This Sub-section spec+fies works related to manholes,

grate inlets, chambers, grated channels, curb inlets. ditch
inlets and ditch outlets.
8.3.2
Materials

shall conform to the requirements of Subsectlons 5.1, 5.2
and 5.3 respectively. Structural steel and other metalwork
2
Plain (blinding) and reinforced concrete shall be
Class 15 and 25, respectively. Cement shall be ordinary
Portland cement to BS EN 197.
3
Concrete manholes shall comply with BS EN 1917
and BS 5911 Part 3. Thickness shall be as 1ndicated on the
Drawings.
4
Manholes and chambers covers, gratings and frames
shall comply with BS EN 124 or equivalent. Two sets of
lifting keys shall be supplied with each removable cover.
Covers and frames shall be non-rock, locking. solid lop.
Grades shall be as follows:
i.
For roadways: heavy duty test load 40 tons.
ii.
For sidewalks, carriage drive and cycle tracks:
medium duty test load 25 tons.
lil.
For footpaths and fields: light duty. test load 7
tons.
5
Manhole covers shall be of circular pattern unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings with a clear opening of
not less than 560 mm diameter. Frames shall be provided
with openings for fixing bolts which ensure solid frame
embedmeot i oto the concrete manhole neck. Covers and
frames shall be coated to BS 3416, M inimum thickness 250
m icrons. Manholes covers shall have the words
" Stormwater Drainage" I nserted, unless instructed
otherwise by the Concerned Authority.
6
Grated inlets and channel gratings and frames shall
comply with BS EN 124 or equivaleot. Grated Inlet grating
shall have a clear open area of not less than 600x600 mm
and shall be coated to BS 3416. MinTmum thickness 250
microns. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's
details of the proposed grated inlet grating and frame for
prior approval by the Engineer.
Bricks shall be to BS EN771 1. Net volume of clay
7
masonry units shall be determined according to BS EN
772:3. Water absorption of clay masonry shall be
determined acco rding to BS EN 772:7.
Steel ladders shall be mild steel to BS 421 1,
8
galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461 with 200 grams of zinc per
square meter.
8-8
9
GRP ladders shall be obtained from ao approved
experieoced m anufacturer, fabricated to ao approved
pattern and purpose made to suit the depth of each
installation as shown on the Drawings. The ladders shall
be drilled for wan fixing at both ends and additional
Intermediate fixing connections shell be provided at
centers not greater than 1.5 meters. Rungs shall be at 300
mm centers and at a distance of not less than 150 mm
from the wa D.
I.
The resins. glasses and synthetic fabrics used
In the manufacture of the ladders sha!l be
chosen to produce a chemically resistant
product with a resin-rich surface layer suitable
for use in aggressive atmospheres likery to the
encountered in sewers and sewage pumping
stations.
ii.
Rungs of tubular construction sha ll be no less
than 30 mm outer diameter and stringers shall
be of a rectangular or channel section, no less
than 70 mm x 25 mm in size. The upper face of
non-tubular rungs shall be finished with a non
slip surface such as silica sand. All remaining
surfaces shall be free of sharp edges,
protrusions et c.
iii.
Each rung shall be able to withstand a point
load of 5000 N.
iv.
When supported horizontally over a span of 1
m with the climbing face uppermost and with a
load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span
the ladder shall not deflect more than 15 mm at
the point of applicat ion of the load and shall
show no permanent deflectio n after removal of
the load. Each ladder fiXing shall be capable of
withstanding shear and pull-out loads of 5000
N.
v.
A ll ladders shall comply with BS 5395: Part 3.
All fixings shall be stainless steel.
10 Fixing bolts shall be steel, type suitable for particular
purpose and use and to approva l When used to fix
galvanized material, washers are to be galvanized and
fixing bolts and nuts cut to pre-plating limits and
electroplated with zinc to BS ENISO 2081.
11 Steel castings shall be mild to medium strength
castings and shall conform to AASHTO M103MIM103.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or instructed by
the Engineer, castings shall be grade 6535 fully annealed.
Steel castings shall conform to t he dimensions shown on
the Drawings. Test bars shall be prepared and tested as
specified In AASHTO M103MIM103.
12 Mortar for masonry shall be mixed in the proportions
1:3 (cement~sand) by volume, or 1:4 :4 lcement:lime: sand).
The sand shall be well graded.
13 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
m anufacturers' Ce11ificates of Guarantee for steel, cast
Iron cast steel and wrought iron parts, stating that the
materials supplied meet the applicable AASHTO or ASTM
specification and Standards. The submission of such test
certificates shall not relieve the Contractor of his
Sultonata of OmQh, St.ndonl Spccific.olions !or Road r. Dndgo C..ruti'IIC:lion 2010
Drainage)
obligations to carry out independent tests at an approved

laboratory, as directed by the Engineer, at his own
expense.
8.3.3
iv.
8.3.3.2
AU excavation and backfill shell conform to the

2
Formwork for cast in place concrete chambers, and
the placing. curing, and protection of the concrete shall
conform to the requirements of Subsection 5.3, Clause
5.3.3.
8.3.3.1
Manholes
Precast units shall be cast in steel watertight forms at

least 3 weeks before sections are used. Lowest unit shall
be bedded on in situ concrete base and bed and haunch In
cement mortar. Joints of units shall be Iiberally coated
with approved bituminous material of trowelling grade
prior to fixing. Joints shall be filled solid and neatly
Work shall remain
stroked off surplus compound.
undisturbed for 7 days thereafter. Alternatively joints may
be sealed with approved preformed jointing strip in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The precast
concrete cover slab shall be bedded in cement mortar on
the top unit.
2
Channels In bottom of manhole shall be smooth,
semi-circular and sized equal to diameter of adjacent
sewers. For straight through manholes, channels of half
pipe sections shall be installed. Changes in direction of
flow shall be made with smooth curves as large as
manholes permit. Changes in size and grade of channels
shall be gradual and even.
3
Benching shall be formed with sulfate resisting
concrete Class 250120 to rise vertically from top of
channels to a height not less than soffit of outlet pipe, then
it shall be sloped upwards T in 10 to walls. Floating shall
then be carried out within 3 hours with a coat of sulfate
resisting cement-sand mortar 1:2. Smooth finishing shall
then be accomplished with a steel trowel.
4
Manholes and chambers shall be coated externally
with three layers of asphaltic composition that shall be
applied by brush In accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Minimum thickness shall be 600 microns.
5
Internal faces of manholes and chambers shall be
coated with four coats of coal tar epoxy paint, 70% epoxy
and 30% coal tar. The coating shall be applied by brush in
accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. Minimum
thickness shall be 1000 microns.
6
Adjustment of level shall be accomplished with top
courses of brickwork or concrete rings after completion of
surround] ng I evels. Final levels sha II be even and accurate.
7
The Contractor shall test manholes as follows:

i.
Plug manhole inlets and outlets.
ii.
Fill manhole with water and allow it to stand
for at least 24 hours or such longer period to
iii,
Retop with water.
Allowable leakage over 24 hours shall not to

exceed 1% of total volume of manhole,
otherwise necessary repair and re-testing shall
be carried to achieve the required results.
Chambers for Grated Inlets, Curb Inlets and
Ditch Inlets and Outlets
Construction shall be in situ concrete, precast

concrete or blockwork as indicated on the Drawings.
2
Brick and blockwork shall be laid on a full bed of
mortar. Whole bricks and blocks shall be used except
where closers must be cut.
3
Courses shall be stepped back and not raised above
the general wall level more than 900 mm. Courses shall
be horizontal. Reinforcement in the masonry shall be fully
embedded in the mortar joint.
4
If pointing is required, the joint shall be raked out to a
depth of 12mm after completion of the entire face.
5
Brick and blockwork shall be protected by
impermeable sheeting or damp cloth for 3 days after
completion of laying.
6
The nearest pipe line joint to any chamber or grated
inlet shall be not more than 500mm from the inner wall
face and shall not be restricted by concrete or masonry
from the structure.
8.3.3.3
Ironwork
Frames for covers and gratings shall be solidly

bedded in mortar and fixed firmly using fixing bolts. They
shall be positioned centrally over the opening and level
and square with surrounding finishes. Covers shall be set
in position to prevent twisting.
2
The upper surface of grated inlet gratings shall be flat.
Slots shall not be parallel to traffic flow unless the slots
are less than 150mm long or less than 20mm wide.
8.3.3.4
Cleaning
Manholes,
ditch inlets and
on completion,
the time of final
8.3.4
grated inlets, grated channels, curb inlets,

ditch outlets shall be thoroughly cleaned
and shall be free from dirt end debris at
inspection.
Manholes and inlets shall be measured by the

number of each structure constructed and installed
including the supply and installation of chambers, frames,
grates, covers and ladders as applicable. Grated channels
shall be measured per linear meter.
No separate measurement or payment shall be made
2
for any other concrete works, excavation, shoring,
sheeting or backfilling, or for breaking into existing pipes
or culverts in order to install new manholes, chambers,
inlets and the like. All such work prescribed in this Sub
section shall not be measured for direct payment, but shall
be considered as subsidiary work, the costs of which shalt
89
~
~
MJnltry of Transport & CommunJcDt(on
OGRLT
~
~(prainage
be deemed to be included In the unit rates for manholes

etc stated in the Bill of Quantities.
3
No separate payment shall be made for blinding,
painting, equipment, forms, tools, furnishing and placing
materials, labor, transport, or any other item necessary for
the proper comp!etion of the work. ACI such items
prescribed ill this Sub-section shall not be measured for
direct payment, but shall be considered as subsidoary work,
the costs of which shall be deemed to be included in the
Ullil rates for manholes etc stated in the BiD of Quantities.
8.3.5
Pi.,e Stendlirii
Ductile Iron
BS EN545 [11
BS EN 1452(91 or to DIN 806118062,
Series 4 end 6 -
uPVC
Polyethylena
(PEl
Basis of Payment
ISO 4427, DIN 807418075 or AWWA

C906 Class10
-

unit rates of 'Manholes', 'Grated Inlets', 'Curb Inlets',
' Grated Channels', 'Ditch Inlets' and 'Ditch Outlets' in the
Bil!l of Qualltities, which rates shall be full compensation
for excavation, installation, fining, testing. backfilling,
supplying materials, labor, transport, equipment, forms,
ofthe work.
8.3.6
P.l.,_ Mal!rf!l
PIPe Material
uPVC
kglcm~
Polvathvlane (PEl
<
nr.
ii.
Grated Inlet (type)
nr.
Pipe Standard
DIN 8061 Class 10
V'rtrlfied clay
Manholes (size and type)
---
2
Pipes for filter drains shall be to the standards listed
In Tab!e 8.4.2.2 or equivalent and as specified in Clausa
8.2.2.
i.
Table 8.4.2-1: Oralnaga Pipe Standards for Bridge Deck
ASTM D3035and ASTM

F894
B565
AASHTO M175MIM175
or ASTM C444M
Table 8 4.2.2: Drainage Pipe Standards for Filter Drains
Concrate
iii.
Curb Inlet (type)
nr.
iv,
Ditch i nlet (type)
nr.
8.4.2.3
v.
Ditch outlet (type)
nr.
vi.
Grated Channel (width and depth)
lin.m.
Permeable backfilling to structures shall be crushed

rock or precast porous concrete blocks to BS 60732 lei d in
stretcher bond with dry joints, The m inimum thickness of
backfilling shall be 225mm.
8.4
Drainage of Structures
8.4.1
Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for gully

and channel gratings and frames on bridge decks,
subways and underpasses with the associated pipework. It
includes the supply and placing of permeable drainage
backfilling to structures.
8.4.2
Materi als
8.4.2.1
Gully and Channel Gratings and Frames
Gully and channel gratings and frames shall be

heavy duty and shall conform to the requirements of BS
N 124 or equivalent. Integral hoppers shall be of the
same grade and quality as the gully or channel grate and
frame. Molded uPVC or GRP shall be to the approval of the
Engi neer who may require material and load testing.
8.4.2.2
Pipes
Pipes used in bridge decks shall be to the
standards listed In Table 8.4.2.1 or equivalent
with a minimum internal diameter of 100mm.
810
Drainage Backfilling
2
Granular backfill to structures shall be natural sand
and gravel or with a particle size distribution as given in
Table 8.4.2.3.
AASHTO lievelize
"' paalng lbv maaa)
75.0 mm
100
37.6 mm
85 100
9.5mm
45-100
4.75 mm
25-85
Tabla 8.4.2.3: Granular Backfill to Structure
8.4.3
Drainage pipes cast into the concrete structure shall

be firmly supported to prevent their displacement during
the concreting operation. Pipes located within the cellular
sections of a bridge deck where access after completion of
the deck is lim ited, shall be installed, tested and approved
by the Engineer before the deck tonstruction Is allowed .to
proceed to the stage where access to the pipes wiU not be
possible
~
~
Mlnlttv of Transport llr Communication OGRt. T
/".~<Drainage
2
Pipe joints in bridge decks shall be flexible and
watertight Seals and gaskets shell be appropriate for the
pipe material used.
3
Joints between bridge deck waterproofing and
drai nag a components shall be watertight and the sealants
shall be compatible with the waterproofing system
&-l 1
SultonDto of Oman, Stoncbrd Spcclti""">n !or Roa<l &. nndge
Con;tr<JC~jon
20 IG
Drainage)
4
Granular drainage b!lckfill shall be placed and
compacted in accordance with Sub-section 2.5, Paragraph
2.5.4.2.
15
Drainage pipes and connections in bridge decks shall
be tested for water tightness on completion in accordance
with Clause 8.2.3.
6
AIJ excavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-Sections 2.3 - 'Roadway Excavation'
and 2.7 - 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures,
7
PE pipes instillation shell be in accordance to ASTM
D2321 and manufacturer's recommendations.
8.4.4
Gully gratings and frames shall be measured by

number; each type shall be measured separately
2
Pipework shall be measured in li near meters,
measured as the actual length installed, including nominal
length of bends and fittings; each type and size shall be
measured separately.
3
Permeable backfilling shall be measured in cubic
meters of the volume placed in position.
4
Granular backfill shall be measured in cubic meters
of the volume placed in position.
5
No separate measurement shall be made for blinding,
painting. equipment. forms, tools, furnishing and placing
materials, tabor. or any other item .necessary for the
proper completion of the wo rk. A ll such Items prescribed
in this Sub-section shall be considered as subsidiary work,
the costs of which shall be deemed to be included in the
rates and prices stated in the Bill of Quantities.
8.4.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above, wlll be paid for at the
unit rate for the various items of 'Drain ~tge for Structures'
ln the Bill of Quantities, which rtte shall be full
compensation for supplying, fabricating, connecting and
testing, and for labor, transport, materials, equipment,
tools, and other items necessary for the completion of the
work.
8.4.6
i.
Gully grate and frame (type)
ii.
Drainage pipe in structure

[type) [diameter( (location(
IY.
lin.m.
iii.
Permeable backfilling
cu.m.
iv.
Granular backfill
cu.m .
3-12
Sultanate
of Oman. Standard Spific:lltions for Road II Bridge Construdion 2010
Ref.
'Tit'-
9.1
Riprap
9.1.1
Page No.
Ref.
9-1
9.4.3.3
Description
9-1
9.4.3.4
9.1.2
Materials
9-1
9 .1.3
Construction Requlnunents
9-1
9-2
9.4.3.5
9;4.3.6
9.4.3.7
9.1.4
9.1.5
Method of Mesaurement
Title
Page No.
Pull Out Tests for Anchored Botts

Pull Out Tests for Unten11ioned Bolts
9-6
Rock Anchoring Procedures
97
Tensioning Tendons
97
Grouting for Rock Anchors
9-8
9-2
9.4.3.8
Testing of Rock Anchors
9-8
9-2
9.4.3.9
Application of Sprayed Concrete
97
9.1.6
Basis of Payment
Items In the SHI of Quantities
9.2
Gablons
9-2
and Mortar
98
9.4.3.10
Reinforcement Mesh
99
9.2.1
Description
9-2
9.4.3. 11
Paint
9.2.2
Materials
9-2
9.4.3.12
Wire Natting
9-9
9-9
9.2.3
9-2
9.4.4
9.2.4
9.4.6
Method of Mauurement
BasTa of Payment
9,2.6
BuTs of Payment
9-3
9-3
9.4.6
9.2.8
Items In the BiHof Ouantitlos
9-3
9.6
Rock Grouting
9.3
Slope Netting
9.3.1
Description
9.3.2
9-6
9-10
9-10
9-10
9-10
9.6.1
Description
9-10
9.6.2
Materials
9-10
Materials
9-3
9-3
9.6.3
9-10
9.3.3
9-3
9.6.4
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.5.6
Baals of Payment
9-11
9-12
Basis of Payment
9-3
9-3
9.5.6
hems In the Bill of Cuantitl1111
9-12
9.3.6
Items In the Bill of Quantitlu
9-4
9.6
9.4
Rock Bolts, Anchors

and Sprayed Concrete
Reinforced Concrete Slope

Protection
9-4
9.6.1
Delcriptlon
9-12
9.4.1
Description
9-4
9.8.2
Materials
9.4.2
Materia Ia
9-12
9-4
9.6.21
Concrete
9-12
9-12
9.4.2.1
Cement Grout
9-4
9.6.2.2
Reinforcement
9 12
9.4.2.2
Rock Bolts Generally
9-4
9.6.3
9.4.2.3
Resin-Anchored Rock Bolts
9-4
9.6.4
Consln.lctlon Requirements
9.4.2.4
Mechanically Anchored Rock Bolts
9-4
9.6.5
Basis of Payment
9.4.2.5
9.4.2.6
Drain Holes
9-4
9.6.6
ttema In the Bill of Quantities
Roek Anchors
9.7
Sacked Concrete Revetment
9.4.2.7
Sprayed Concrete and Mortar
9-4
95
9-5
9.7.1
Oeterfptlon
9-5
9.7.2
Materials
9.4!2.8
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
9.4.3.2
Wire Netting
Conltructlon Requirements
General
Rock Bolting Procedures
95
95
9.7. 2.1
Sacks
9.7.2.2
Concrete
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-12
912
9--12
Ref.
ntle
F?age No.
Ref.
9.7.3
9-12
9.7.4
9-13
9.7.6
9.7.6
Bests of Payment
9-13
9-13
9.11.3.3
9-13
9>11.3.4
9.8
Paving Tile Slope ~rotectlon
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
Description
Mstariale
9-13
8-13
9-13
8-13
8-13
9-13
9.8.4
9.8.6
9.8.6
Bella of Payment
9.9
Ditch Unlng
9.9.1
9.9.2
Description
Mlltetiala
9-13
9-13
9.9.3
8-13
9.9.3.1
9.9.3..2
9,9.3.3
General
P.recast Slabs
Stone Ditch Lining and Wash Checks
9-13
9.11.3.2
Title
Page No.
Stabilization with Bituminous
S.16
Materiels
Stabtliution With Vegetative
916
g-16
Treatment
Blankets
9.11.4
9.11.6
Belle of Payment
9-18
8-16
9.11.6
ltema In the Bill of Ouantltfee
8-16
9.12
Mechanically Stablllzed Earth

Retaining Walls
9.12.1
9-16
Delscriptlon
8-16
~rei
~16
9.12.1.2
Standards and Codes
Mllterlala
9.12.2
General
9.12.2.1
8-17
9.12.1.1
9.12.2.2
9.12.2.3
9.12.2.4
Steel Reinforcing and Tie Strips
9-18
9.12.2.6
ReinfOrced (Polymer) Grids
8-18
fiasteners
9-19
9-19
Concrete Face Panels

Uoncrete Footings
9.9.6
9.9.6
Bells of Payment
9-14
9-14
9-14
9.12.2.6
9.12.2.7
Non Metallic F.riction Ties and Fixings
9.10
Filter Laye~ns
9-14
9.12.2.8
Joint mller (For Use with Concrete F.ace
9.10.1
9.10.2
Descrlptlon
9.12.2.9
Mlltetiels
9-14
9-14
9.10.3
9-14
Panels)
Granular Filter
1114
Fabric Membrane
9.10.3.2
9.10.4
Method of M!!5Urement
9-16
9-15
9.10.5
Bests of Payment
9-16
9.10.6
9-16
9.11
Barriers for Sand Dunes
9-16
9.11. 1
OeeenptJon
9-16
Materials
9.11.2
Fencas
9.11.2.1
9.11.2.2
Bituminous Materials
9-16
9-15
9.11 .2.3
9.11.2.4
9.11.2.5
Vegetative Materials
Water
Blanket Covers
9.11.3
9.11.3.1
F.enclng
11-1'7
913
914
9-14
9.9.4
s.1o.:u-
917
915
915
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-15
9-17
9-18
9-19
Joint Filler (For Use Wth Concreta Face

Panels
9.12.3
ConlbUctlon Requirements
9J12.3.1
Wall Excavat!OI'
9YI2.3.2
F.oundatlon heparation
g.19
9-20
9 20
9-20
9.12.3.3
Erection of Concrete F.ace ~a nels
920
9.12.3.4
9.12.3.5
BaciCtiU Placement
920
9-20
Trial Embankment
9.12.4
Monitoring
General
9.12.4.1
$--21
9J12.4.~
Selected Backfill
921
9 -21
!M2.4.3
9;12.4.4
9.12.4.5
Settlements
9l21
l-:lorizontel Displacements
Durability
921
9-21
Testing F.requency
9-21
9.12.4.8
9.12.6
9.12-6
9.12.7
9-22
BeaTa of Payment
9-22
9-22
Ref.
Title
9.13
Coastal Protectlon
Pa No.
922
Dnc:rtption
t-22
9.13.2
Mlterials
t-23
9.13.2.1
Quarried Stone for Armour I.JJyers and
9.13.1
9.13.2.2
Underlayers
Core Material
9.13.2.3
Filter Flbnc - Geotextiln
9 .13.3
9-23
9-23
9-24
t-24
9.13.3.1
General
924
9.13.3.2
9. 13.3.3
Placement of Core Material

Placement of Armour and Underlayer
924
9.13.3.4
Stones
Survaying Technique
9.13.3.5
Storage, Hendfing, end Laying of
t.1:S.4
9.13.4.1
9.13.4.2
9.13.4.3
9.14.4.4
8.13.6
9.13.5.1
9.115.2
9.13.6.3
Geotextiles
Mttflod of Measurement
t-25
9-25
&-25
t-M
Merine Works Generally

9-28
Underlayer, rock armour. quarry run end
bedding layer
9-28
Dredging for embedded toe protection 9-26
Febrlcs end membranes! Geotextilel
&.ale of Payment
..21
1-21
928
Merine Works Generally

Underlayer, rock armour, quarry run and
bedding layer
9-28
Dredging for embedded toe protection 9-26

9-28
9.13.5.4
Febrics and membranes! Geotextilel
9.13.1
hems In the Bill of Quantities
...:ze
Slope Protection and Stabilisation
9.1
Rip rap
9.1.1
Description
ASTM Standard 01751, Specification for Preformed

Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Pavl ng end Structu rei
Construction.
The Sub-section describes requirements for

construction of loose or mortared riprap slope protection
and riprap Cut-off walls or watercourse channel protection.
9.1.2
Materials
Stone for loose and mortared riprap shall consist of

natural stones of broad flat shapes as far as practicable.
All stone shall be hard, sound, durable, and high' y
resistant to weathering and shall be suitable as protection
material for the intended purpose.
2
Samples of the stone material proposed for use shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to its use
in the work.
3
The minimum apparent specific gravity of the stone
material shall be 2 5 and the maximum absorption shall be
6% when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 85. The
stone shall have an abrasion loss not greater than 45%
when tested In accordance with AASHTO T 96.
4
The weight of individual stones for the various
classes of riprap shall be as follows:
% ofTotal
Weight of Stone lkiloar-mal
Wliaht
Smallefthan
Weight
Shown
Claaa
A
50
20
100
20
5
5
1
ct.~ B
Clua C
ClaaD
200
1000
400
100 20
5,000
2,000
95=100
50-100
().50
500
().10
100
Table 9.1.2.1: Classes of riprap stones and rocks
5
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer. stones for loose and mortared
riprap shall conform to Class B gradation. Stones shall
generally weigh between 20 and 70 kg. with at least 60%
weighing more than 45 kg.. Nevertheless, any of the
classes shown in Table 9.1. 2.1 above can be used for loose
riprap, as indicated on the drawings. For mortared riprap,
stones of classes A or B only can be used, as indicated on
the Drawings.
6
Mortar for mortared riprap sha II consist of 1 pert
Portland cement to 3 parts sand by volume. Water added
shall be the least amount which will yield a workable mix.
Send and cement shall conform to the relevant
requirements of Sub-section 5,1. The 28 day compressive
strength of the mortar shall be not less then 15 MPa
measured in accordance with BS 1881, Part 108.
7
Fi Iter material for use under loose or mortared riprap.
as shown on the Drawings shall comply with the
requirements of Sub-section 9.10 Fi Iter Layers".
8
Expansion joint filler shall be rotproof and of the
preformed, non-extruding, resilient type made with a
bituminous fiber and shall conform to the requirements of
9.1.3
The stones shall be wetted and hand-laid with the

flattest face uppermost and parallel to the prepared slope,
starting from the toe and progressing upwards. Stones
shall be arranged in close contact so as to minimize voids,
the largest being placed in the lower courses. Spaces
between large stones shall be filled with smaller stones of
suitable size. The surface of the riprap protection shall be
trimmed and prepared as shown on the Drawings.
2
The mortar bed shall be progressively spread ahead
of stone placing Stones faces in contact with the mortar
shall be clean and free from any defects that will impair
the bond with the mortar. Stones shall be washed to
remove any dirt or dust immediately before applying
mortar. Mortar shall be spaded and rodded between the
stones until the voids are completely filled.
Expansion joints shall be constructed where the

riprap is placed against any structure, or where directed
by the Engineer. A 13 mm thick fiber joint filler (as
specified in Item 8 of Clause 9.1.21 shall be installed in
expansion joints. The fiber joint shall extend from the base
of the grout layer up to 13 mm below the grout surface. A
bond breaker, as approved by the Engineer, shall be
placed along the bottom of the 13 mm deep by 13 mm
wide notch, and the top shall be filled with flexible joint
sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures. as approved by the Engineer.
4
The completed work shall be cured for at least 7 days
by a curing method approved by the Engineer. After the
expiry of this period, the exposed surfaces shall be cleared
of loose marta r and broken stone fragments.
5
Loose riprap stone shall be placed in the same
manner as for mortared riprap. The stones shall be
properly selected and placed so as to minimize voids
which shall be filled with pieces of the largest possible size.
6
After completion end approval of the loose riprap
placement, the surface voids of the riprap in the footing
trench and on the lower portions of the slope shall be
filled with excavated material, compacted to 95% max. dry
density and dressed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
7
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the
thickness of the l oose or mortared riprap layer shall not be
less than 1.5 times the nominal stone size and is
commonly 1.8 2.0 times the nominal stone size.
8
Where shown on the Drawings. a filter layer {as
specifit!d In Subsection 9.10) or an approved construction
fabric shall be laid on the prepared surface to receive
loose riprap. Thickness of filter layer shall be as shown on
the Drawngs or directed by the Engineer. The slope shall
be prepared, trimmed and excavated to the surface
approved by the Engineer and as the cross sections and
levels shown on the Drawings. The filter material shall
91
~~
MlnlatJy of Trftnaport & CommunlGlltlQna
DGFU.T
/"'..~<Slope Protection and Stabilisation
then be laid and compacted to 95% max. dry density, to

the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
9.1.4
Aiprap work shall be measured by the cubic meter of

material placed in position. Measurement shall be based
on the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
2
Filter material shall be measured by square meter of
the thickness placed in position. Measurement shall be
based on the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
3
Filter membrane shall be measured in square meter
of the material placed in position. Measurement shall be
the area shown on the Drawings.
9.1.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above will be paid for at the unit
rates indicated in the Bill of Quantities, which rate shall be
full compensation for selection of materials and removal
of discarded material, slope preparation, excavation.
backfilling, placing, trimming, finishing and protection of
finished work and expansion joints and for materials,
transportation, hauling, labor, equipment, tools, supplies
and other items necessary for the proper completion of
the works.
9.1.6
i,
ii.
ili.
iv.
9.2
Gabions
9.2.1
Description
6
Where shown on the Drawings wire shall be coated
w ith a minimum thickness of 0.55mm of dark green or
black PVC. or any other color to the approval of the
Engineer, which shall be capable of resisting the effects of
Immersion In sea water and exposure to ultra violet light
and abrasion, when tested for a period not less than 3000
hours in accordancewlth ASTM Test G23.
1
Stones for gabion fining shall be hard, sound,
durable and highly resistant to erosion, to the approval of
the Engineer. The specific gravity of the stones shall be
not less than 2.5. The stone size distribution in each
Individual box shall be as given 1n Table 9.2.2.1 .
2
Wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall be
mild steel to ASTM A390 Class 3 or to BS 1052 having an
average tensile strength, before coating of 380 to
500Nfmm2. The core wire diameter shall be 3.00 mm
before galvanizing. Galvanizing shan comply with BS 443.
3
Non.metalllc material for gabion boxes, such as
extruded polypropylene, may be proposed for the
% of
totll-lby no.)
80 125
7% maximum
125-200
w88% m ini mum
200250
5% maximum
Table 9.2.2.1: Stones for Gabions

8
Mastic asphalt constituents shall be sand,
penetration grade bitumen and filler. The mastic shall
have the characterlstlcs given in Tab!e 9.2.2.2.
"' of
tot:: lbV
Constituents
M8terf.l Type
Sand (Smm
nominal size)
Natural sand or
crushed rock
55-72
Bitumen
80-100 Pen
15-18
Filler
Portland
cement or
hvdrated lime
13-16
Materials
Gabion baKes shall be made of e hexagonal woven

mesh of double twisted hot-dip galvanized steel wire. The
nomlnal mesh size shall be 80mm x 100 mm. details of t he
type of mesh proposed for use shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
9-2
5
The edges of gabion panels shall be selvedged to
prevent unraveling of the mesh. Steel wire core used for
selvedges shal have a nominal diameter of not less than
3.5mm. Lacing wire shall have a nomi nal diameter of not
less than 2.2mm for the wire core. Wire for selvedges and
lacing shall otherwise comply with the same specification
for the wire used in the mesh.
{cu.m l
(cu.ml
(sq.ml
{sq.ml
This Sub-secti on describes requirements for gabiotls

consisting of supplying, building and placi ng of stonefilled galvanized steel wire mesh baskets (or other
approved types of heavy duty plastic mesh) as slope o t
watercourse channel protection.
9.2.2
4
Gabion dimensi ons shall be as shown on the
Drawings. A tolerance of :t5,. on width and hei ght, and
:t3% on length shall be allowed. Gabion shall have
diaphragms at 1m centers.
Size ohtonlmm)

Loose stone rlprap {classl.
Mortared stone riprap (class)
Filter mat erial {thickness)
Filter membrane
Engineer's approval. Samples and manufacturer's

certificates shall accompany the proposal.
m-.
Table 9.2.2.2; Characterlstlca of Mastic Asphalt

Constituents
9
Sand-cement grout shall be composed of one part of
Portland cement and four parts of sand measured by
volume. mixed with sufficient water to a consistancv so
that the grout can flow into and completely fill the voids.
9.2.3
1
Gablons shall be placed and built to the lines, levels
and patterns shown on the Drawings, on a prepared
SL>IIo11a1v "' Oman. Sr~ndord Spedf.utiDns lot Road & Bridge Constrooion 20 Ia
horizontal foundation surface for gabion boxes and

mattresses and/or sloping foundation surface for gabion
mattresses. excavated as required, and compacted as
instructed by the Engineer.
2
Gabion cages shall be securely wired together at
corners and edges, and where there is more than one
course of gabi ons, the upper course cages shall be laced
to the lower course. Before filling, the cage shall be in its
permanent pos"fon and laced to adjojning previously
filled cages.
Non-metallic gabion cages of proprietary type shall
3
be constructed according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
4
Stones shall be packed by hand inside the cages as
tight as practicable with the minimum of voids. The wires
shall be fixed inside the compartments and the units
tensioned in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
5
The cages shall be overfilled with stones to allow for
subsequent settlement and the lid laced down with
binding wire to the top of each of the four sides and to the
top of the diaphragm panels.
6
Where shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall
grout gabions w'th hot poured mastic asphalt. The mastic
shall be mixed at a temperature of 16Q..200'C and poured
to fill the voids between the stones for the depth shown.
The actual rete of application shall be as approved by the
Engineer during construction.
7
Where shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall
grout gabions with sand-cement grout. Immediately
before pouring the grout, the stones should be wetted by
sprinkling. The grout shall be poured to fill the vo' ds
between the stones for the depth shown. The actual rate
of application shall be as approved by the Engineer during
construction. The grout shall be allowed to set and harden
before any stormwater is received. The grout shall be kept
moist with water for a period of not less than 72 hours.
9.2.4
Gabions shall be measured by the cubic meter of

installed gabion, based on the dimensions shown on the
Drawings. Rates shall be deemed to include for provision
and installing all materials, protection of finished work and
all preparatory work lncl uding excavation and preparation
of ground.
2
Where grouting Is required, it shall be measured by
the cubic meter of sand-cement or of mastic asphalt
applied.
9.2.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above will be paid at the unit
rate for "Gablon in the Biil of Quantities, wh' ch rate shall
be full compensat;on for slope preparation, protection,
drainage, excavation, backfilling, and for materials, labor,
equipment, tools, supplies and other items necessary for
9.2.6
r.
il.
iii.

Gab' ons (size).
Mastic asphalt grout.
Sandcement grout.
9.3
Slope Netting
9.3.1
Description
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
(cu.m)

supplying and i nstalling steel wire mesh netting as rock
s' ope protection.
9.3.2
Materials
Wire slope netting shall consist of a hexagonal

woven mesh of double twisted hot-dip galvanized steel
wira. The nomnal mesh size shall be BOmm x 100mm.
2
All wires shall be mild steel conforming to BS 1052,
having a minimum nominal diameter of 2.7mm. The wire
shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A
767, Class II (61 Og Zinc/sq.m., 2.0 oz. Zinc psf), after
fabrication and bending.
Spikes for wire slope neui ng attachment shall be as
3
shown on the Drawings and the steel shall comply with
tha relevant requirements of Section 6.
9.3.3
The wire netting shall be securely anchored to the

rock face with the driven steel spikes spaced at an average
of not more than 5m vertically and horizontally around the
perimeter of each section.
2
For rock slope faces in excess of 5m high, the netting
shall be hung from hooked rock bolts installed
untensioned as specified in Sub-section 9.4 at spacing
between Sm and 10m horizontally and vertically.
3
The rock slope face shall be trimmed to the profile
shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
relevant requirements of these specifications. The
proposed new section dimensions and fixing points shall
be submitted for prior approval by the Engineer. Intact
sound rock masses shall be selected for the bolts and
spikes positioning.
9.3.4
The approved wire netting slope protection work

shall be measured by the square meter of the area
installed. Preparation of the rock face and spikes and
fixation accessories shall not be separately measured, but
shall be deemed included in the rate for wire netting slope
protection.
9.3.5
Basis of Payment

rate for "Wire Slope Netting" in the Bill of Quantities
which rates shall be full compensation for slope and
93
~~
Mlnitry of Trnnpcrt & Commun;cotiona DGR T
/""-~<:slope
Protection and Stabllisation
foundation preparation, drilling, fixing and for materia!s,

labor. equipment, tools, supplies and other items
shall be flat m ~d steel plate 150 by 150 by Bmm thick with

free fit holes. Nuts shall conform to BS 490 and washers
shall conform to BS 4320.
9.3.6
3
Rock bolts may consist of tensioned or untensioned
dowel bars anchored by resin or grout or mechanically
anchored.
i.

Wire netting slope protection
(sq.m)
Rock Bolts, Anchors and Sprayed

Concrete
9.4
9.4.1
Description
This Sub-section describes stabilization of cut or

naturel slopes in soil or rock by one or combination of the
following methods: rock bolting, rock anchoring and
grouting, shotcreting or guniting, and wire netting.
9.4.2
Materials
9.4.2.1
Cement Grout
Grout for use in rock bolting and rock anchors, shalt

normally consist of a mixture of cement and water only.
Fine sand aggregate passing No. 16 sieve may be added. if
approved, far grouting of large holes, etc.
2
Admixtures and filler may be used only if approved
by the Engineer and shell be free from chlorides ..
3
Cement, sand and water shell conform to the
requirements of Section 5. Sulfate resjsting end rapid
hardening cements shall be used only if specifred and
approved.
4
The compressive strength ol 150 x 150 mm cubes
made of grout and measured in accordance with BS1881
shell not be less than 17 MPa. at 7 days. Cubes shall be
cured in a moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and
subsequently under water.
5
Grout mixes shall have good fluidity and low
sedimentation or bleeding in the plastic state, good
durability and density with low shrinkage In the hardened
state, In order to bond with the side of boreholes and to
provide protection for bolts and anchors, etc. Mix
proportions shell be as specified for the various
applications of grout, and grouting trials shall be
undertaken as directed by the Engineer.
A"' materials shall be proportioned by weight.
9.4.2.2
Rock Bolts Generally
All bolts, required to provide support for excavated

or natural rock faces, sht ll be deformed high tensile steel
bars conforming to the relevant requirements of Sub
section 5.2 "Reinforcing Steel" or other type in accordance
with Drawings.
2
Rock bolts can be continuously threaded or threaded
to allow extension to be fitted as required. One end of the
bolt shall be threaded for a tensioning locking nut,
sufficient to ensure that a 10 to 50mm thread length
extends beyond the locking nut. The thread on the bolt
shall be ISO metric coarse series to BS 4190. The washer
9-<l
4
Protection of rock bolts against corrosion shaD be as
shown on Drawings.
9.4.2.3
Resin-Anchored Rock Bolts
The point resin anchor shall be formed using a

cartridge system. The remaining length of the bolt shall be
grouted with cement if required by the Engineer. The
grout may be injected after the installation of the bolt and
anchor, or the resin and cement grout may be placed in
the hoi e and the bar pushed through the cement grout
i nto the resin.
2
If the Engineer so directs, rock bolts shall be de
bonded along the length of bar which is not required for
anchorage purposes by means of a suitable plastic sheath
preventing the formation of 11 bond between the grout and
the bar.
3
If untensioned dowel bars are used, all voids shan be
completely filled with grout.
4
If resin-anchored rock bolts are used, the tests
specified in ASTM 04435 shall be carried out. The
Contractor shall ensure that the resin is not adversely
affected by the cement grout.
9.4.2.4
Mechanically Anchored Rock Bolts
These shan be of the expansion shell type end full

details of the type of bolt and anchorage to be used shall
be submitted for approval prior to installation. If approved,
mechanical anchorage bolts shall be used in accorda11ce
with the manufacturer's instructions as approved or
modified by the Engineer who may require mechanically
anchored rock bolts to be cement grouted.
9.4.2.5
Drain Holes
Drain holes shall be drilled Into the rock slope to

relieve water pressure buildup in the rock slope. The drain
holes shall be lined with sloned PVC drain pipe and
plumbing systems shall be Installed to direct water flows
away from the rock slope, as shown on the Drawings or as
9.4.2.6
Rock Anchors
Rock anchors required to provide support for

excavated or natural rock faces, and at tunnel portals, shall
consist of steel tendons in excess of 10 m in length and
shall conform to AASHTO M204: "Uncoated Stress
Relieved Wire for Pre-stressed Concrete".
2
Corrosion protection shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
Sult.,nnta or Omon. Srandard Spec r<c:oliono lor Road & BMge Cons:tuttion 2'J10
9.4.2.7
Sprayed Concrete and Mortar
Sprayed concrete (Shotcrete) shall be a mixture of

water, cement, sand and aggregate, projected onto the
area of placement, without interruption. by means of a
purpose made machine. Sprayed concrete (Shotcrete)
with 28 day cube compressive strength of 25 MPa with an
aggregate smaller than 12 5 mm particle size shall be used.
Sprayed mortar (Gunite) shall be a mixture of water,
2
cement and sand projected onto the area of placement
without interruption, by means of a purpose made
machine Sprayed mortar (Gunite) with 28 day cube
compressive strength of 25 MPa with sand of maximum
particle size 7mm shall be used.
3
Materials, equipment and appl'cation procedures
sha II generally conform to the latest revision of ACI 506.2 "Specifications for Shotcreting" unless otherwise specified
hereunder.
Portland cement. fine aggregate. coarse aggregate
4
and mixing water shall conform to the requirements of
Sub-section 5.1 "Concrete Materials and Mixes". The
mixture of coarse and fine aggregate for applications up to
250 mm In thickness and applications exceed'ng 250 mm
in thickness shall conform to the following grading
requirements:
Percent Paaing By Wefght

Standard Sl1111e Slz:.
Thicknnaup
to250mm
12.5 mm (112in.J
Thlcknea
IIXCIIIIda 250
mm
100
9.5 mm (318 in.)
100
4.75 mm(No.4)
95-100
- 65-82
2.36 mm(No. BI
8095
45-68
1.18 mm (No.16)
4580
3053
0.600 mm (No. 301
30-60
2038
0.300 mm (No. 50)
10.30
7-22
0;150 mm (No. 1001
210
210
0.075 mm (No. 200)
03
B
Prior to proceeding with the shotcreting works, the
Contractor shall prepare three test panels for approval,
using the proposed materials, mix design and equipment.
Each test panel shall be approximately 750mm square,
using plywood or other similar material for the back form
against which the shotcrete is to be sprayed.
The
thickness of sprayed material shall be a minimum of
75mm or the thickness that is to be used in the structure,
whichever is greater.
9
After curing the test panels, cores shall be taken for
compression testing at 7 and 28 days. The cores shall be
at least 75mm in diameter and shall be measured and
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22. In addition to
compression testing, the cores shall be carefully examined
visually for soundness or evidence of non-uniformity in
the cons'stency of the concrete or mortar.
9.4.2.8
Wire Netting
All wires shall be mild steel conforming to BS 1052,

having a minimum nominal diameter of 2.7mm. The
maximum mesh shall be 100mm x BOmm, the wire shall
be hotdip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 767,
Class II (610g zinc/sq.m., 2.0 oz. zinc psfl, after fabrication
and bending.
2
The hexagonal wire mesh netting shall be triple
twisted and suitably woven to produce a flexible uniform
net pattern, free of any damage. Both longitudinal sides
of the netting sheets shell be edged with a wire of
equivalent standard to that of the netting but greater in
diameter. The lacing-wire used for fixing adjacent netting
sheets shall also be of equivalent standard.
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
General
90-100
,,
0.3
Table 9.4 2.1 : Gradation of Sprayed Concrete Combined

Aggregates
5
The Cement content per cu.m. of aggregate shall be
not less than 375 kg..
6
If approved by the Engineer, water-reducing, non
chloride accelerator admixture, complying with ASTM
C494, Type E, and containing not more than 0.1 percent
chloride ions, may be used.
7
Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of
Sub-section 5.2- "Reinforcing Steel".
Before any of the works is commenced, the

Contractor shall submit a detailed method statement to
the Engineer for his approval. The method statement shall
include adequate details concerning the materials, work
procedures, means and methods and frequency of testing
for grouts end anchors; intended by the Contractor, to
carry out the w ork and achieve the specified requirements.
9.4.3.2
Rock Bolting Procedures
After drilling holes of the required diameter end

depth, and after inspection and approval of the holes and
their locations, rock bolts shall be installed and anchored
by one of the approved means as described below,
depending upon the type of rock bolts being installed.
2
Grouting equipment shall be of a type capable of
producing a grout of colloidal consistency by means of
high local turbulence while imparting only a slow motion
to the body of the grout. Tha injection equipment shall be
capable of continuous operation with I ittle variation of
pressure and shall include a system for re-circulating the
grout while actual grouting is not in progress.
' V~
Mlnluy of Tranport &
C:o~=nlcnt;ona
DCiRlT
/".~<Slope Protection and Stabilisation
Compressed air shall only be used if approved.

Equipment shall have a delivery pressure not exceeding 1
MN/sq.m. All baffles to the pump shall be fitted with 1.2
mm sieve strainers. All equipment and piping shall be
thoroughly washed with clean water after every series of
operations and more frequently if directecl. Intervals
between washings shall not exceed 3 hours.
3
Mixing of grout shall proceed by water being added
to the mi xer first, followed by the cement. When these are
thoroughly mb(ed any admixture or sand shall be added.
Mixing shall continue for at least 2 minutes until a uniform
consistency is obtained. The water: cement ratio of the
mix shall not exceed 0.45 by weight. Mixing by hand will
not be permitted.
4
Grout shall be injected continuously and in such
manner as to avoid causing segregation of the grout. The
method of injection shall ensure complete filling of the
boreholes and complete immersion of the bolt in the grout.
The volume of the spaces to be fdled by the injected grout
shall be compared with the quantity of grout injected.
Grout shall be allowed to flow from the free end of the
borehole until its consistency is equivalent to that of the
grout injected. The opening shall then be firmly closed.
Injection tubes shall be sealed off under pressure until the
grout has set
5
Polyester resin gel and cure times shall be suited to
the working temperature and method of installation of the
bolt. The main resin and filler content shall be enclosed i n
an outer sheath or skin and the catalyst shall be enclosed
in a separate container within the main sheath. The resin
and catalyst shall be mixed by rotating the bolt by means
of a power tool for such time and at such speed as w ill
ensure the thorough intermixing of the two constituents.
The viscosity of the resin shall be such that complete
disintegration of the resin sheath is achieved and the
pieces of sheath material do not have a detrimental effect
on the final strength ofthe anchorage.
6
Expansion shells for mechanical anchorage shall be
of an approved type and shall be lnstalled il'l accordance
with the manufacturer's i nstructions as approved or
modi fied by the Engineer. Where such bolts are used in
close proximity to a rock face where blastil'!g Is taking
place, the security of the anchorages shall be checked
after blasting and the bolts re-tightened or replaced, i f
necessary In a new hole.
7
Each hole shall be drilled straight and each bar shall
lie centrally in the hole and not be in contact with the rock.
The diameter shall be 10 mm g reater than tl'le bolt
diameter if grouted with cement. For resin anchored bolts,
the hole siZe shall be determined according to the
anchorage or cartridge size and in accordance with the
manufacturer' s recommendations. Allowance shall be
made for the hole size to be slightly greater than the bit
size. Tolerance on the diameter of hole shall be plus or
minus 2 mm. The hole shall be thoroughly flushed and
cleaned after drilling.
8
The rock surface around each ho1e shall be trimmed
flat in a pia ne normal to the axis of the rock bolt to ensure
9-6
an even bearing surface for the cover plate. Where thi5

procedure is not possible, a conical aligning seating shall
be used. Epo)(V mortar packing between the bearing plate
and rock shall be used where directed.
9
Anchored rock bolts shall be tensioned by either
applying a specified torque to the nut or by using a
hydraulic jack. The Engineer shall instruct the Contractor
as to which method is to be used in particular cases.
10 Where the torque method of tensioning is used, the
requlred tension shall be agreed by the Engineer and tests
shall be carried out to establish the applied torque
required to achieve this load. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the threads on the bar and nut are clean and
free from obstructions.
11 Where tension is to be applied by hydrau!lc jack. the
Engineer may require tests to establish the jack g11-1ge
calibration. In calculating the initial load to be applied,
foss of tension due to the transfer of load to the locking
nut and washer shall be aDowed for.
12 Permanent load measuring instruments shall be
Incorporated In selected rock bolts as directed and the
tension in these bolts shall be monitored. Monitoring
shall be carried out at hourly intervals for the first 4 hours,
then at 4hour intervals up to the first 24 hours, then at
daily intervals up t o 20 days after tensioning or at such
other times as may be directed.
13 Where the Engineer directs that the lengths or part o f
the length of a rock bolt shall be de-bonded from the
surrounding grout, this de-bonding shall be achieved by
means of a plastic sheath closely fitting around the steel
bolt.
14 A ll relevant data shall be recorded and presented in
an approved form. If the Engineer is not satisfied that the
anchorage of the bolt is adequate, the Contractor shall
take approved remedial measures to ensure adequate
anchorage.
9.4.3.3
Pull Out Tests for Anchored Bolts
Before commencement of any work requiring rock

bolts, pull out t rials shall be carried out to measure the
ultimate load carrying capacity of all types of bolts to be
used. Pull out tests shall be carried out according to ASTM
Standard method 04435 orBS equivalent
2
Trials shall be carried out in rock of a similar nature
to that in which the rock bolts will be used. The
deformation of rock bolts and the load shall be continually
monitored until failure. A minimum of 4 tests on each
type of bolt to be used shall be performed. Details of
proposed procedures shall be submitted for approval
before commencement of the trials. The anchorage must
be capable of carrying twice the specified working load.
3
These tests will be used to assess the suitability of
proposed anchorage systems in the particular location
where the bolts are to be used. Where rock conditions
change, such that anchorage characteristics are affected,
further t rials shall be carried out as directed.
Sultnnnt" ol Omon. S:ondord Sped!.c:.tJc"" lot RG.ld & Brldgo C<lna:ra<tion 2'J I 0
4
During construction approximately 5% of all bolt
types shall be tested to twice the specified working load . If
significant failures are obtained in the tests results, the
Contractor shall carry out further tests end shell take
approved remedial measures as directed by the Engineer.
6
Pre-stressing bars as delivered shall be straight. Any
small adjustments for straightness necessary on Site shell
be made by hand under the supervision of the Engineer.
Bars bent in the threaded portion will be rejected. Any
straightening of bars shall be carried out cold.
5
A protective barrier (wire netting) shall be erected
around the testing equipment to protect and safeguard
against any injury to any personnel involved in the testing
works and any other measures as deemed necessary by
the Engineer.
All cutting to length and trimming of ends shall be by

7
high speed abrasive cutting wheel, friction saw or any
other mechanical method approved by the Engineer. In
rock anchor systems, the cutting action shall be not less
than one diameter from the anchor, and the heating effect
on the tendon shall be kept to a minimum.
9.4.3.4
Pull Out Tests for Untensioned Bolts
The efficiency of grouting shall be checked by pulling

out the bolts (according to ASTM 04435) alter such time
as will ensure that the cement grout or mortar remains
bonded to the bolt when the bolt is withdrawn from its
hole. A total of 10% of all untensioned bolts shal be
tested in this way. The grouted boreholes shall then be
cleaned out and bolts free from hardened grout reinstalled
to the EngIneer's satisfaction .
8
The tendon or tendons shall be accurately located
and maintained in position. Spacers are to be used to
keep the tendons in their correct position in the borehole.
2
If, in the Engineer's opinion, en unacceptably high
percentage of the initial 10% selection of bolts is not fully
grouted along their length, tha Engineer will require
further tests to be carried out.
9
The tendon or tendons shall terminate at the back of
the hole in the rock secured in a ribbed steel cylindrical
anchorage block or be grouted Into pi ace over the
'anchorage length' defined for the working load required.
The end of the borehole shall be filled with a polyester
resin or cement mortar. The length of anchorage shall be
sufficient to take the load on the tendons with a safety
factor of 2. The remaining length of tendon, !the free
length) shall be encased In a corrosion-protected grease
packed, plastic debondi ng sheet.
9.4.3.5
9.4.3.6
Rock Anchoring Procedures
Care shall be taken to avoid mechanically damaging,

work hardening or heating tendons while handling. All
tendons shall be stored clear of the ground and protected
from the weather, from any other materials and from
splashes from the cutting operation of an oxy-acetylene
torch, or arc-welding processes in the vicinity. In no
circumstances shall tendons be subjected to any welding
operation, or on-site heat treatment or metallic coating
such as galvanizing.
2
When tendons have been stored on site for a
prolonged period, the Engineer may require tests to show
that the quality of the tendons has not been significantly
impaired by corrosion, stress-corrosion, loss of cross
sectional area or changes in any other mechanical
characteristics.
3
All tendons shall be free from loose mill scale, loose
rust, oil, paint, grease, soap or other lubricants, or other
harmful matter at the time of incorporation in the rock
anchor. Cleaning of tendons shall be carried out either by
wire brushing or by passing through a pressure box
containing carborundum powder. Solvent solut'ons shall
not be used for cleaning without approval.
4
Low relaxation and normal relaxation wire shall be in
sufficiently large diameter coils to ensure that the wire
pays off straight. In cases whera, in tha opinion of the
Engineer, straight asdrawn wire is not essential, wire in
small diameter coils corresponding to the diameter of the
blocks in the drawing machine may be used.
5
Pre-stressing strand, however manufactured, shall be
in sufficiently large diameter coils to ensure that the
strand pays off straight.
Tensioning Tendons
All wires or strands stressed in one operation shall

be taken, where possible, from the same parcel. Each
cable shall be tagged with its number and the coil number
or numbers of the steel used. Cables shall not be kinked
or twisted, and individual wires and strands shall be
readily identifiable at the end of the member. No strand
that becomes unraveled shall be used.
2
A tendon when tensioned contains a considerable
amount of stored energy, which, In the event of any failure
of the tendon, anchorage or jack, may be released
violently. The Contractor she II ensure that adequate
precautions are taken during and after tensioning to
safeguard persons from injury and equipment from
damage which may be caused by the sudden release of
this energy.
3
Hydraulic jacks shall be used for tensioning tendons.
The tensioning apparatus shell meet the following general
requirements:
i.
The means of attachment of the tendon to the
jack shall be safe and secure.
ii.
Where two or more wires or strands are
stressed simultaneously, care shall be taken
that they ere of approximately equal lengths
between anchorage points at the datum of load
and extension measurement. The degree of
variation shall be small compared with the
expected extension.
iii.
Tensioning shalt be such that a controlled total

force is imposed gradually and no dangerous
secondary stresses are induced in the tendons,
anchorage or concrete.
~
/'..../
Mlnllry of TY"nport &
Commmle~~tlon DGRLT
/"-..~<::slope Protection and Stabilisation
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiil.
9.4.3.7
The force in the tendons during tensioning

shall be measured by direct reading load cells
or obtained i ndirectly from gauges fitted in the
hydraulic system to determine the pressure in
t he jacks. Facilities shall be provided for the
measurement of the extension of the tendon
and of any movement of the tendon in the
gripping devlces. The load-measuring device
shall be calibrated to an accuracy within p!us
or minus 2% and checked at frequent intervals
agreed with the Engineer. Elongation of the
tendon shall be measured to an accuracy
within 22% or 2 mm, whichever is more
accurate.
Complete records shall be kept of all tensioning
operations, includlng the measured extensions,
pressuregauge, or load-cell readings and the
amount of pu!l-in at each anchorage.
Anchorage of the tendons at the rock face end
of the borehole shall conform to BS 4447.
The form of anchorage system shall facilitate
the even distri bution of stress in the concrete
bearing pad.
Split wedge and barrel-type anchors shall be of
such material and construction that, under the
loads imposed during the tensioning operation,
the strain in the barrel will not allow such
movement of the wedges to reach the limit of
their travel before causing sufficient lateral
force to grip the tendon, or before the limit of
travel of the wedges causes an excessive force
in the tendon.
If proprietary forms of anchorage are used, the
anchoring procedure shall be in accordance
w ith the manufacturer's Instructions and
recommendations and as approved by the
Engineer.
All bearing surfaces of the anchorages of
whatever form shall be clean prior to the
tensioning operation.
Any allowance for draw-in of the tendon during
anchoring shall be in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions and the actual slip
occurring shall be recorded for each individual
anchorage.
After tendons have been anchored, t he force
exerted by the tensioning apparatus shall be
decreased gradually and steadily so as to avoid
shock to the tendon or the anchorage.
Provision shall be made for the protection of
anchorages against corrosion.
Grouting for Rock Anchors
The space in the borehole around the tendons shall

be grouted with a cement grout such that the void shall be
competely f~led.
2
GroutiJ\g shall be carried out as soon as practicable
after the tendons have been stressed.
9-6
3
Grouting procedures, injection of grout and strength
of grout shall be as specified for rock bolting.
9.4.3.8
Testing of Rock Anchors
Before commencement of any part of the permanent

anchorage works, two trial anchors shall be installed and
tested to ensure that they can carry the specified load with
a safety factor of 2. Anchor pu d tests shall be performed
according to ASTM 04435 Standard method or BS
equivalent
2
Load/elongation curves shall be plotted and
interpreted by the Contractor and presented with all
relevant data in a form approved by the Engineer.
If either of the trial tests shows that the anchor has a
3
safety factor of less than 2, then the anchorage length and
formation shall be modified and two further tests shall be
carried out.
9.4.3.9
Application of Sprayed Concrete and Mortar
Carry out shotcreting in a sequence and according to

a program to be approved by the Engineer
2
Provide good lighting, rigid and sufficiently wide
working platforms in area where shotcreting is taking
place
3
Protect properly surfaces which are not to be coated
and keep them free from sprayed concrete.
4
Clean and wet all surfaces thoroughly with a strong
blast of air and water, immediately prior to the application
of sprayed concrete.
5
Safety: if the exposed rock profile is considered by
the Engineer to be unsafe, then ensure that the personnel
manning the sprayed concrete operation are protected
from tolling rock. In this respect the Contractor is advised
to consider the use of a remote controlled-sprayed
concrete machine.
Control the th icltness end the alignment of the
6
sprayed material by either guide wires, mortar spotting or
plastic studs, to indicate depth. Drill through the concrete
lining to establish the thickness of the lining at points
selected by the Engineer. Build up each layer of sprayed
concrete or mortar by making several passes of the nozzle
over the working area. Project the sprayed concrete or
mortar from the nozzle in a steady uninterrupted flow.
Should the flow become intermittent for any reason, the
nozzle man shall direct it away from the work until it again
becomes constant.
7
Layer thickness is governed mainly by the
requirement that the concrete or mortar should not sag.
Where thick layers are applied it is important that the top
surface be maintained at approximately a 45 degree slope.
The minimum allowable thickness of layer according to
the
American
Shotcrete
Association
ASA
recommendations is 25mm. There is no stated maximum
thickness for shotcrete layer.
Sultanata of OmGn, Stondtd Spodr:c.Uo!\0 lot ~lad & Btl'dge Conouuctlon 2<110
8
Where necessary a layer of sprayed concrete or
mortar may be covered by succeeding layers, but it shall
first be allowed to take its initial set. All laitance, loose
material and rebound must first be removed. Remove any
laitance, which has taken final set by grit blasting. Finally
clean and wet the surface using adequate blast of air and
water. The time between applications of successive layer
shall not exceed 24 hours. A longer break may be
accepted if it can be shown by tests that sufficient bond
can be achieved
9
Under no circumstances shall rebound material be
worked back into the construction.
Keep the work
continually free of rebounded material, by use of a high
pressure air jet or any other necessary means.
10 The distance of the nozzle from the work shall be
between 600mm and 1000mm. It shall be, as a general
rule, aimed perpendicu Jar to the application surface.
Commence application for vertical or near vertical
surfaces, at the bottom.
Embed completely the
reinforcement, at least, in the first layer.
11 Provide suitable screening of the nozzle and the
application surface during windy and draughty conditions.
12 Keep the spraying equipment in good condition by
cleaning frequently. This shall be done at feast once per
shift. The spraying nozzle shall be in such condition that
an even and continuous flow of material is obtained.
Change nozzla cover as soon as excessive wear is found in
the cover. The arrangement for the addition of water at
the nozzle must give a uniform wetting of the material. If
the dry mix process is used, add liquid admixtures, if
approved, with the mixing water at the nozzle. If dry
admixture is used, add it into the dry mix at the latest
possible time. In either case, employ accurately calibrated
and adjustable mechanical means to dispense the
admixture in the correct approved proportions.
13 The capacity of the compressor pi ant end water
supply shall be large enough to ensure a constant and
sufficiently high pressure. The water pressure should be
somewhat higher than the air pressure. Manometers
should be provided to measure the air and water pressure.
14 Damp cure sprayed concrete or mortar for at least 7
days.
Paragraph 9.4.2-71 shall be made on a daily basis and shall

represent each application crew, change in mix design, or
change In procedure. After curing along with and in the
same manner as the structure, the panels shall be cored in
the same manner as described for preliminary testing end
shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22. Should
cores from any of the test panels fail to meet strength
requirements, the materials in the structure itself shall be
cored, taking at least 4 cores for each 100 sq.m.
represented by the failed test panel. If the average
strength of these cores meets strength requirements and
no single core Is less than 75% of design strength, the
materials shall be accepted; otherwise the materials in the
structure shall be cut out and replaced.
19 Cut and replace any work which is not accepted by
the Engineer
9.4.3.1 0
The reinforcing mesh shall be made up from 5mm

diameter steel bars. Weld the bars to form a t50mm
square grid and fix it firmly to the rock by an approved
means such that it is rigidly held during the subsequent
Ties, anchors and
application of sprayed concrete.
supports shall be of a material approved by the Engineer.
2
Avoid spraying through the reinforcement as the
reinforcement can make hollows and arching effect, which
hinder the production of a homogeneous concrete layer.
Fix reinforcement as late as possible. If a number of
reinforcement layers are used then they shall be fixed and
concreted one at a time. When shooting through bars is
unavoidable, hold the nozzle closer than usual and at a
slight angle In order to permit better encasement, and
facilitate the removal of rebound. Clean reinforcement of
any previously deposited rebound material which may
prevent a proper bond.
3
The method of fixing shall be such that sprayed
concrete can be compacted soundly behind the
reinforcement at all points.
4
The minimum cover of mesh reinforcement to the
rock surface Is to be 25mm. The minimum cover to mesh
reinforcement from the required finished surface of the
sprayed concrete is to be 20mm.
15 Make the profile of the finished surface even. Fill any

area of excessive overbreak with sprayed concrete, or
other approved cavity filler, to bring the finished surface
level with the general profile of the surrounding finished
sprayed concrete or mortar.
9.4.3.11
16 Sprayed concrete or mortar surfaces shall not be

trowelled, screeded or disturbed in any way unless
specified otherwise.
9.4.3.12
17 Construction joints shall be tapered to a thin edge

over a width of approximately 300mm, unless specifically
instructed by the Engineer. No square joints are allowed.
Clean and wet the entire joint thoroughly prior to the
placement of adjacent sprayed material.
Reinforcement Mesh
Paint
Wherever shown on the Drawings, sprayed concrete

shall be painted with the indicated material type and color,
to the Engineer's approval.
Wire Netting
Wire netting is to be used to secure loose rock on the

cut slopes it may be used in conjunction with rock bolts
and sprayed concrete. The netting is to be secured to the
rock face In a manner approved by the Engineer.
18 Testing of sprayed concrete: During the work, three

test panels as described for preliminary testing (under
g.g
~~
MJnitrv or Trnnaport & Ccmrnunicatlone. OGRLT
/"'--.~<:stope Protection end Stabilisation
9.4.4
9.5
Rock bolts shall be measured by lin.m. of each

category installed. including borehole drilling. grouting
and de-bonding if required ..
2
Rock anchors shall be measured bv Nn.m. of each
specified capacity installed including borehole drilling,
tensioning. securing and grouting.
3
Drilling boreholes, de-bonding of rock bolts, trial
bolts and trial rock anchors, testing and monitoring of rock
bolts and rock anchors, grouting of rock bolts and rock
anchors, and other ancillary items and work shall not be
measured separately for direct payment, but shall be
consdered as subsidiary work the costs of which wiU be
deemed to be included in the rates for rock bolts end
anchors.
4
Shotcrete (concrete) or gunite (mortar) shall be
measured by the cubic meter, applied, The area and
thickness shall be computed from the Drawings untess
otherwise directed by the Engineer. The rates shall be
deemed to include for all ancillary work, including
preparation of rock surfaces, provision and maintenance
of spraying equipment, finishing and protection of
surfaces and all tests.
5
Reinforcing mesh shall be measured by the sq.m of
net area, installed, based on the Drawings unless
otherwise directed bv the Engineer. Rates are deemed to
include for all fixings and laps at joints in the mesh
6
Painting of the shotcrete (if required) shall be
measured bv the sq.m. of area painted. based on the
Drawings unless otherwise directed bv the Engineer. Rates
shall include for ell primers and preparatory work.
7
Wire netting shall be measured by the sq.m. of net
area , installed, based on the Drawings unless otherwise
directed bv the Engineer, Rates are deemed to include for
all fixings and laps at joints.
9.4.5
Basis of Payment

rates for t he various items stated in the Bill of Quantities
which rates shall be full compensation for slope and
foundation preparation, drilling, fixing and for materials,
labor. equipment, tools. supplies and other items
9.4.6
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
910

Rock Bolts
Rock Anchors
Shotcrete
Gunite
Wire Netting for Shotcrete
Reinforcing Mesh
Painting
(lin.ml
(lin.ml
(cu.ml
(cu.m)
(sq.ml
(sq.m)
(sq.ml
Rock Grouting
9.5.1
Description
This Sub-section describes Installation, drilling and

grouting rock as slope stabilization.
9.5.2
Materials
1
Grout shall consist of a mixture of cement and water.
For grouting of large holes fine sand aggregate passing
1.18mm AASHTO standard sieve may be added if
approved by the Engineer. Chemical admixture and filler
may only be used with prior approval of the Engineer.
2
The compressive strength of the grout measured in
accordance with BS 1881 shaD exceed 15 MPa at 7 days.
3
Grout mixes shell have the mi nimum cement content
consistent with the required workability. The grout shall
not be subject to bleeding in excess of 2% after 3 hours.
nor 4% maximum, when measured at 18'C in a covered
cylinder approximately 100 mm diameter with 11 height of
grout of approximately 100 mm, and the water shall be
reabsorbed bv the grout during the 24 hours after mixing.
9.5.3
Rock grouting is the i njection under pressure of grout

to consolidate areas of fractured rock. Grouting shall
normally proceed from the bottom of the rock slope
upwards.
2
Details of methods to be adopted and materials to be
used, sequence, spacing, diameter and depth of holes to
be adopted shall be submitted to the Engineer for prior
approval before proceeding with any pressure grouting.
Grouting work shall be under the direct control of skilled
and experienced operatives.
3
The rock slope shall be trimmed end prepared as
specified in Section 2, Paragraph 2.3.3.6 before grouting Is
begun.
4
Clean water shall be used as the flushing medium lOT
drilling, with flows not less than 151/mi nute.
5
The Contractor shall ensure that, at ell times,
grouting work Is under the direct control of skilled and
experienced operatives. The Engineer may vary the
methods, materials and grouting pressures i f, in his
opinion, the conditions dictate a change of technique. All
holes to be grouted shall be numbered, as directed and
grouting operations shall take place in the following order:
I.
ii.
iii.
Drilling of holes
Washing of holes
Water testing
lv.
Pressure grouting
6
The hole spacing shall normally be 1.6m to 5.0m with
additional holes as required to intersect individual weaker
areas. Hole depth shell be limited to the range 3-10m and
hole diameter shall be within the range 38-78mm, drilled
with either rotary or rotary-percussive drilling equipment.
Sultonot gf Oman, Stond1rd Speclf.c;.~~Jons lor ~d & BridGe Conouoolon 2010
Water or air flush may be used unless otherwise directed

by the Engineer.
7
Holes shall be jetted using a water flow, under such
pressure as may be directed. The injection of water sha II
be followed by injection of air under pressure, these
operations alternating until air bubbles appear at an
adjacent hole. All other holes shall be capped and water
forced under pressure into the first hole, until unwanted
material from fissures washes out from the uncapped hole.
This process shall continue until no more fine material is
removed, or until directed. The outlet hole shall then be
capped and the other holes opened. The sequence shall
be repeated until connecti ens between all holes have been
established and all fine material removed. After washing,
all holes shall be capped.
8
Holes shall be water tested in stages or as the
Engineer may require. For stage testing, a twin packer
and nozzle pipe system shall be used. Water testing
equipment shall be capable of ensuring steady pressures
and a delivery of water of 100 1/min at the required
pressure. The equipment she II include all necessary tanks,
gauges and water meters. Water shall be pumped at the
proposed grouting pressure into the hole to be tested and
the flow measured for 5 or 10 minutes as directed. The
Contractor shall keep a record of the water flow expressed
in 1/min for each stage tested. Additional testing may be
required as the grouting operation proceeds.
All grout mixes shall be prepared using high speed,
9
high shearing action mixers to ensure uniform consistency.
When storing mixed grout for short periods, prior to
pumping, only purpose made agitator tanks shall be used.
Where clay or bentonite are incorporated in the grout,
separate mixing tanks shall be provided in which the
bentonite-water mix can be prepared and kept agitated
until required.
10 Ram type pressure pumps shall be used for grouting.
Precise control of pump pressure and delivery over the
whole range of pressures and volumes are required.
Valves shall be readily accessible for ease of maintenance.
All hoses and piping should be of small diameter to
ensu re high velocity flow without segregation. Injection
may be carried out by either the single line or circulating
system. Each borehole shall be provided with a short
standpipe threaded at its outer end to accept a manifold
with a pressure gauge, relief valve and valve enabling
delivery from the pump to be cut off from the hole.
Pressure gauges shall also be provided at pumps.
11 Once grouting has commenced, it shall be continued
without interruption until completion. Grouting shall
commence with a mix of 8:1 water: solids ratio. The mix
shall be thickened progressively until pressure begins to
build up. If pressure build up occurs too quickly, the mix
may be thinned again. The final injection shall use a 1.5:1
water: solids mix. If no pressure build up occurs with a
1.5:1 mix, sand may be mixed with the grout, provided
that the sand: cement ratio does not exceed 2:1 by weight.
When the desired pumping pressure is achieved, with
extremely low grout flows, final injection shall take place
with a neat 1:1 water: solids mix
12 Grouting can be considered complete when the

absorption of grout at the required pressure is I ess than 2 I
per min over a period of 10 minutes.
13 Grouting shall proceed with caution until experience
of the ground conditions has been gained. Thereafter, if
conditions allow, Injection shall proceed at high pressure
to achieve maximum flow from the start of injection.
Grout pressure, as measured at the mouth of the hole,
shall correspond to 0.4 bar/ per meter depth of hole for
those areas where the strata to be treated have no
structures in the vicinity. In the vicinity of structures the
pressure shall be 0.25 bar per meter depth. Up Iift gages
shall be installed and continuously monitored as grouting
proceeds.
14 If the required grouting pressure is not attained using
a sand-cement mix, grouting shall be suspended and the
hole washed. After several hours, grouting may proceed
again using the sand-cement mix until the desired
pressure is achieved. Should there be any grout leakage
between two holes occurs, both holes shell be grouted
concurrently or the initial hole grouted whilst the second
hole is capped. When injection is interrupted before it fs
complete, the hole shall be washed using not less than
500 liters of clean water.
15 After grout consumption has reached the limits
previously specified, the Engineer will require additional
holes to be core drilled. The diameter of the retrieved
grouted rock cores shall not be less than 50 mm. Three
representative samples for each 3 m of core shall be taken
and unconfined compression tests shall be carried out on
each core sample. The mean strength of each group of
cores shall not be less than 3 MN/sq.m. If this value is not
reached then additional grouting of the rock shall be
performed until further tests indicate that the strength of
grouted rock cores achieves 3 MN/sq.m. For every 8
treatment holes or at the Engineer's discretion, at least
one hole shall be cored and the cores tested as outlined
above. tn the core drilled hole the Engineer may require a
water test to be carried out.
16 Complete details of drilling, water testing and
grouting operations including pressures, mixes and grout
takes. sha II be recorded on daily progress sheets. A
graphice I record of such results shall be compiled and
copies of all progress sheets and records shall be
submitted promptly for approval.
9.5.4
Rock grouting shall be measured by the volume of

grout used and the linear meter of rock drilling carried out
at the diameter required. Measurement shall be based on
the actual quantities of grout material used and boreholes
drilled. as approved by the Engineer. The rates shall be
deemed to include for water jetting of rock faces and
boreholes, and any other encill ary work.
9-11
~~
Mlnitry ofTranapart & Comrnunk:ntlon. DGRLT
~~<:slope Protection and Stabilisation
9.5.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above w;IJ be paid for at the unit
rate in the Bill of Quantities for 'Rock Grouting'. which rate
shal1 be full compensation for drilling, pumping, testing,
and materi11ls, labor. equipment, tools supplies and other
9.5.6
i.
il.
Drillholes for grouting rock I dial

Rock grout
9.6.1
Description
This Sub-section describes requirements

construction of reinforced concrete slope protection.
for
Materials
Reinforcement
Reinforcement for reinforced concrete slope

protection and elsewhere i f required, shall conform to the
relevant requirements of Sub-section 5.2 "Reinforcing
Steel ".
9.6.3
Reinforced concrete slope protection shall be

constructed at the locations 5hown on the Drawings.
Placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall conform to
all relevant requirements of Section 5. except that onlY
hand finishing methods will be required.
2
After the slopes have been properly trimmed and
prepared according to the Drawings, and before laying
concrete , the Contractor shall furnJ.sh screed rals or other
grade-Indicating devices to control the minimum depth of
concrete and uniformity of the top surface.
Reinforcing steel shall be cut and fi!ced In accordonce
4
with the requirements of Sub-section 5.2.
5
Joi nts shall be laid out or referenced accuratelY.
Construction joints shall be placed at designated
contraction joints where possible. or at expansion joints if
the construction jolnt falls within 5 m f rom 11 free edge or
expansion joint. Joints for poured joint filler may be
formed in place or sawn In the fresh concrete.
6
Surface finish shall be either a uniform floated or
broomed finish, as directed by the Engineer_
9-12
Basis of Payment

rates Indicated In the BiH of Quantities, whi ch rate shall be
full compensation for slope preparation, exc:evation,
backfilling, supply, mixing, testing, laying, finishing,
curing, protection of concrete, provision and fixing of
reinforcement, and for meterials. transportation. hauling,
labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other items
necessary for the proper completion of the works.
9.6.6
l.
Concrete
Concrete for reinforced concrete slope protection

shall be Class 25 as specified in Sub.section 5.1 and
Clause 5.1.3, The slump limits shall comply with the
requirements stipulated in Sub-section 5.7, Paragraph
5.7.2.7.
9.6.2.2
1 Reinforced concrete slope protection shall be measured

by cu.m. Measurement shell be based on the area and
thickness shown on the Drawings.
9.6.5
llin.m)
tcu.m)
Reinforced Concrete Slope

Protection
9.6.2.1
9.6.4
9.6
9.6.2
7
Conctete shall be cured using water curi ng with wet
burfap for 7 days. Curing compound can be used in
urgent conditions only, to the approval of the Engineer.
9.7
9.7.1

Reinforced concrete slope protection lcu.m)
Sacked Concrete Revetment

Description

construction of sacked concrete revetments at
embankment slopes, bridge abutments end similar
locations.
9.7.2
Materials
9.7.2.1
Sacks
Sac:ts for sacked concrete revetments shall be made

from burlap of minimum 200 gm per sq.m. . Sack
dimensi ons shall be approximately 0.6 m by 0.9 m
measured when empty. Relatively cle01n reclaimed sacks
may be used if approved.
9.7.2.2
Concrete
Co~rete for sacked concrete revetments shall be

Class 15 liS specified i n Sub-section 5.1.
9.7.3
The sacks shall be fi ed with concrete loosely

(uncompacted} placed so as to leave room for tying and
sewing, Approximately 0,035 cu.m. of concrete shall be
placed in each sack. The sacks sheh be closed by sewing,
tied with strong twine. Immediately after closing, the
sacks shall be placed and trampled lightly to cause them
SultanDta al 00\on, St:_nd

__d_ S!>
_____
, _Roaci
_ _&
_Btid&o
_..;._eon.
__u_UC1
_ ic:_ --...
to conform to the earth surface and the adjacent sacks

already in place.
After the slopes have been properly prepared and
2
approved. the sacked concrete elements shall be placed.
The sacks shall be laid in accordance with the details
shown on the Drawings. All dirt and debris shall be
removed from the top of the sacks before the next course
is laid. Sacks shall be placed so that the t ied ends will not
be adjacent to one another. Not more than 6 courses of
sacks shall be placed in any tier until initial set in the first
course of any such tier has taken place.
2
Embankment slopes at bridge abutments and
elsewhere as shown on the Drawings shall be trimmed to
proper line and grade. A blinding layer of Class 15
concrete, as specified in Sub section 5.1, shall be placed
over the full area of surface to be paved, to a minimum
depth of 50 mm. Precast tiles shall then be laid to the
lines and levels shown on the Drawings, on a bed<fng of
20 mm thick, 1:3 cement: sand mortar and joints shall be
properly aligned and finished, all as specified in Section 12.
9.8.4
Care shall be taken In placing and shaping the sacks

so that the m'nimum dimensions shown on the Drawings
ere obtained, and the finished sacked concrete revetment
has minimum voids.
Paving tile slope protection shall be measured by

sq.m. of tiles, laid, including all necessary base course,
bedding, blinding and joint filling. Measurement shall be
based on the dimensions shown on the Drawings
9.7.4
9.8.6
Sacked concrete revetment shall be measured by

cu.m. of concrete filled sacks , installed. Measurement
shall be based on the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
9.7.5
Basis of Payment

full compensation for slope preparation, excavation,
backfilling, and for materials, transportation, labor,
equipment, tools, supp ies and other items necessary for
the proper completion of the works.
9.7.6
i.

Sacked concrete revetment
lcu m l
Basis of Payment

full compensation for slope preparation, excavation,
backfilling, and for materials, transportation, labor,
equipment, tools, supplies and other items necessary for
the proper completion of the works.
9.8.6
i.

Paving Tile Slope Protection
9.9
Ditch Uning
9.9.1
Description
(sq.m)
9.8
Paving Tile Slope Protection
This Sub-section describes requirements for stone,

concrete end concrete paving slabs laid as linings to
ditches and water courses.
9.8.1
Description
9.9.2
This Subsection describes requirements for paving

tiles, laid as protection to embankments, bridge
abutments and similar locations.
9.8 .2
Materials
Precast paving fles (slabs) used for slope protection

shall be manufactured as specified in Section 12.
2
Preformed joint filler shall conform to AASHTO M 33:
"Preformed Ex pension Joint filler for Concrete". Hotpoured joint flier shall conform to AASHTO M 282: "Joint
Sealants, Hot Poured, Elestomeric Type, for Portland
Cement Concrete Pavements.
9.8.3
1 Embankment slopes where precast tiles are to be laid

shall first be rolled. Close to any structures, to prevent
possible damage, a hand rammer shall be used; otherwise
use of a mechanical roller shall be permined.
Materials
Paving slabs for channel and ditch lining shall be

O ass 25 concrete fabricated in accordance with the
relevant requirements of Sub-section 5.1 and to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings.
2
Stone for ditch lining and wash checks shall be as
specified for riprap in Sub-section 9 1.
3
Grout for ditch lining and wash checks shall consist
of 1:3 cement:sand mortar, by volume.
4
In situ concrete for ditch lining and wash checks shall
be Class 25, as specified in Section 5.
9.9.3
9.9.3.1
General
Ditch and watercourse channel sides shall be

trimmed to profiles as shown on the Drawings.
9-13
"J
~
MJnlatry of Tr;-nporl & Comrnunlcntlon. OGRLT
~
~<::slope Protection and Stabilisation
9.9.3.2
Precast Slabs
Precast concrete slabs shatJ be laid to the tines and

levels shown on the Drawings, on a bedding of 20mm
thick 1:3 cement:sand mortar. Joints shall be 10mm w ide
and filled with 1:3 cement:sand mortar. Joints shall be
cured by an approved method for at least 4 days.
9.9.3..3
shall have a loss on abrasion value of no more than 40%

measured by AASHTO T 96.
2
Filter m aterial particle size distribution shall be as
given in Table 9.10.2.1.
Ditch lining and wash check stones shall be placed

with ends and sides abutting and the joints between each
row breaking with the joints in the preceding row. The
larger spaces between stones shall be filled with
fragments. The stones shall be rammed and compacted.
9.9.4
The approved ditch lining works shall be measured

by the square meter of lining of paving slabs or wash
checks Installed, Measurement of slabs or wash checks
shall be made perpendicular to the ditch centerline along
the top surface at the upstream edge of each wash check.
Blinding and bedding will not be separately measured, but
shall be deemed Included with the rate for ditch lining.
~~
Stone Ditch Lini ng and Wash Checks
2
After the stone surface has been approved the spaces
between stones shall be completely filled with grout.
brushed or broomed into the spaces. The grout shall be
cured as specified in Sub-section 9.1,
--
50m m
9.9.6
i.
ii.
I iii.

Paving slab protection and ditch
lining (type. thlckness)
(sq.m)
Grouted stone ditch lining
(type, thickness)
(sq.m)
Grouted stone wash checks
(sq.m)
(type, thickness)
1 5 ~ 55
4.75m m
2. ~mm
0 - 10
- --- -~ -- ~-
3
Filter membrane shall be a thermally bonded nonwoven fabric produced from conti nuous filament synthetic
fibers. The hydraulic properties shall allow water passage
of 50 100 I per sq.m.per sec under 1 100mm head. The
pore size distribution shall be 50% not greater than 70 jJm.
4
The mechanical properties of the membrane fabric
(that will have minimum t hickness of 1.0mm) shall be as
given in Table 9.10.2.2.
AllowMil
Value
Teit Mlllhod
Grab
Strength
s2Kg.
ASTMD4632
S11am
Strength
73Kg,
ASTMD4632
Puncture
Strength
36Kg.
ASTMD751
Burst
Strength
2N/m~
ASTMD3766
Trapezoid
Tear
23Kg.
ASTMD4533
Apparent Opening Size
ASTMD4571
1. Soil with 50% or l ess

pa rticles by mass
<D.6mm
passing 75 11m sieve
2. Soli with more than

50% partides by
<0.927mm
welght
passing 75 jJm sieve
I<F-.>K~o~~
ASTMD4491
70%
Strength
ASTM 04355
Description
Ultraviolet Degradation
at 150 hours
914
0 - 25
- !
- - ~ -~- ---- --
9.10.1
Granular fil ter material shall be a mixture of sand and

hard. clean gravel or crushed rock. The coarser material
'
0-5
- - _ '!511~--~
Table 9.10.2.1 . Filter Material Gradation
Filter Layers
Materials
100
9.5mm
9.10
9.10.2
95 ~
50 100
Permeability, K
This Sub-section describes requirements for granular

filter material or filter membrane as an underlayer to loose
riprap or gabions.
"'"
100
19nim
Basis of Payment

rate for 'Ditch Lining' in the Bill of Quantities. which rate
shall be full compensation for slope preparation, laying,
g routing, blinding, bedding, and for materials, labor,
equipment, tools, supplies and other Items necessary for
37,5m m
Property
9.9.5
"' ~ (hy-1 1
MSHTo SJev.
~
Retained
Table 9.10 2.2: Fabric Filter Membrane Properties
9.10.3
9.10.3.1
Granular Filt er
Sand and gravel filter material shall be spread evenly

on a prepared bedding avoiding segregation of particle
sizes. The layer shall be lightly compacted and finished to
Sultanata "I Ornon. Stand.,d St>ec:iUeollollS for Rood r.. Brid9o Consuuctlon 2010
an even surface. Bedding and filter layer shall be of the

thickness shown on the Drawings.
9. 10.3.2
Fabric Membrane
The surface to receive the fabric membrane shall be

smooth and free from sharp projections. The membrane
shall be loosely laid with its long dimension parallel to the
length of the protection work. Adjoining sheets of fabric
membrane shall be overlapped a minimum of 0.5m or
15% of the sheet width, whichever is less. To prevent
slippage of the fabric the areas of overlap shall be secured
as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by
the Engineer.
9.10.4
Granular filter layers shall be measured by the

square meter, of the thickness Installed on the basis of the
area shown on the Drawings.. Rates are deemed to
include for preparation of the ground.
2
Fabric membrane filter that shall be measured by the
square meter of net area laid, based on the dimensions
shown on the Drawings. Rates are deemed to include for
preparation of the ground and overlaps at joints.
9.10.5
I.
ii.

Granu Ia r filter layer (thickness]
Fabric membrane.
9.11
Barriers for Sand Dunes
9.11.1
Description
(sq.ml
(sq.ml

construction of barriers for sand dunes, to protect against
wind erosion and adverse weather conditions, formed of
fences, bituminous blankats and vagetation generally as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2
The Engineer will determine the types and locations
of the protective barriers to be constructed in particular
areas, based on trials and studies of tha prevailing
conditions.
9.11.2
Materials
9.11.2.1
Fences
9.11.2.2
Bituminous Materials
Petroleum resin emulsion shall be 1 part petroleum

resin emulsion diluted with 4 parts of water.
Asphalt emulsion: The proportion of water to dilute
2
an asphalt emulsion shall ba according to the
manufacturer's recommendation for the type of asphalt
emulsion to be used.
3
The technical data sheet of the proposed emulsion
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
9.11.2.3
Vegetative Materials
Slow growing perennial shrubs shall be drought

resistant and adapted to the climate and soil and shall be
as described in Section 16"
2
Longlived trees shall be of species recommended in
"Planting list for proposed highway landscape".
9.11.2.4
Water
Water shall
substances.
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed end accepted work

rate for 'Filter Layers' in the Bill of Quantities, which rate
shall be fu II compensation for ground preparation, placing
and fixing and for materials, labor, equipment, tools
suppi ies and other items necessary for the proper
9.10.6
pi astic sheets bound together and attachad to vertical or

horizontal supports, and presenting up to 50 percent
openings. Samples of the fencing material shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
9.11 .2.5
be clean and free of deleterious
Blanket Covers
Blanlcet covers shall be made of bituminous or

concrete pavements, prefabricated landing mats,
membranes, aggregate, and seashells, as shown on
Drawings.
9.11.3
9.11.3.1
Fencing
The fence bottom shall be installed about 30cm

above ground level
2
The entire windward surface of the dune shall be
stabilized with dust-control materials, such as bituminous
material [refer to Paragraph 9.11.2.21, prior to erecting the
first fence.
3
To maintain the effectiveness of the fencing system,
a second fence shall be installed on the crest of the sand
accumulation.
4
Existing old fences shall not be removed during or
after the addition of new fences.
5
The proper spacing and number of fences required to
protect a specific area shall be determined by trial and
observation.
6
Mock-ups of the proposed fencing system shall be
constructed to the Engineer's satisfaction prior to final
approva I of the fencing system.
Fences shall be made of rolled prefabricated bundles

made of wood slats, slender poles, stalks or perforated
9-15
~~
MJnlctrv ofTrnnaport & CommunJcatlon11
OGRLT
~~<Slope Protecti on and Stabilisation
9.11.3.2
Stabilization with Bituminous Materials
Trial section shall be laid over an area of 25 square

meters, using approved bituminous material, at the
speclfied rate below and to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer,
prior to commence the actual works.
equipment, tools suppli es and other items necessary for

9.11.6
i.
Fences for dune stabilization

(height, type).
(!in.m)
Destroy the dune symmetry by spraying the

bituminous materials at either the center or the ends of
the d une.
ii.
Bituminous stabilization of dunes.
(sq.m)
iii.
Vegetative stabili zation of dunes,
(sq.m)
iv.
Dune stabilization with bl ankets.
(sq.m)
Spray the bitumi nous emulsion at the rate of 2.25

per meter square to obtain the desired stickiness of
the sand.
~ters
9.11.3.3
1
The upwind boundaries of the vegetated area shall
be protected by fences or dikes, to prevent the engulfment
of the vegetation.
2
Selected seed shall be spread as directed and
protected by mulch sprayed with a bituminous material.
3
Seed on slopes shall be anchored by mulch or
matting.
9.11.3.4
Blankets
1.
After placement of blanket covers. a spray
application of bituminous material shall be required to
prevent blanket decomposition and subsequent dust
9.11.4
Fencing shall be measured by the linear meter

Installed.
2
Stabilization with bituminous materials shall be
measured by the square meter of area sprayed.
3
Stabilization with vegetative treatment shall be
measured by the square meter of area, Installed (to the
approved frequency by the Engineerl, watered, completed,
and accept ed. A ll trials ordered by the Engineer prior to
the final vegetative treatment works shall not be paid
separately, but shall be deemed to be included in the rate
for the approved final treatment works.
4
Stabilization with blankets shall be measured by the
square meter of area, installed, using the specified
materials and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings,
or ordered by the Engineer. All trials ordered by the
Engineer prior to the installation of the final blanket works
shall not be paid separately, but shall be deemed to be
included in the rate for the approved final blanket works.
9.11.5
9.12
Mechanically Stabilized Earth

Retaining Walls
9.12.1
Description
9.12.1.1
General
Stabilization with Vegetative Treetment
Basis of Payment

meesured as provided for above will be paid for at t he unit
rate for 'Barriers for Sand Dunes" In the Bill of Quantities,
which rate shall be full ~:ompensatlon for ground
preparation, placing and filling and for materials. labor,
This work shall consist of constructing retaining walls

using a pr oprieta
system of precast concrete panels
restl"llined by tie-backs i nto a compacted earth fill, as
approved by the Engineer, They shall be constructed in
accordance with the manufacturer's drawings and
speci fications and be within the tolerances for lines,
grades and dimensions shown in the Contract Documents
or as established by the Engineer. The wall shall consist of
a type of mechanically stabilized earth wall system
acceptable to the Engineer, and which must be
constructed by a specialized firm having a minimum of
five years of documented successful eMperience In the
design and construction of such wall systems. The
Contractor shall provide a complete set of typical detailed
shop drawings and complete specifications of the
proposed wall system for the approval of the Engineer 90
days prior to ordering materials to co nstruct these walls.
rv
2
The design shall address the cli mate and soil
conditions &Misting in Omen and provide a minimum
design life of seventy.five years. The specification as
presented to the Engineer shall also state any
requirements for the thickness of reinforcing strips and/or
li mitati ons on the backfill used i n the structure to ensure
the design life. The final thickness shan be subject to the
3
The term reinforced soil waP" shall be deemed to
have the same meaning as " mechanically stabilized earth
retaining walls".
T he works shall include the following:

l
ii.
Iii.
iv.
9-16
Reinforced Earth components (panels, high

adherence galvanized steel strips, connection
and joint materials)
Selected backfill
Pre-casting panels
Leveling pads
S"ltQnQt.. of Oman, Sto'Jdrd Spo:illcouon for Rood & Bridga Con;truc:-Jon 2010
v.
vi.
Wall erection
Monitoring
Only materials supplied by accredited sub-contractor

5
or supplier shall be used as Reinforced Earth Components.
6
The Contractor shell submit for prior approval a
detailed Mathod Statement that describes ell means,
method and techniques to be adopted for construction
and Installation of the "mechanically stabilized earth
retaining walls". The Method Statement shall include
details of equipment to be used, method of installation of
each reinforced earth component taking into consideration
the manufacturer's recommendations, backfill materials to
be used backside of wall, testing and reporting, work
program end any other information required by the
Engineer.
9.12.1.2
2
Materia Is and construction of reinforced earth
components shall comply with Section 5 of these
Specifications.
9.1 2.2.2
Concrete shall be Class 30 in accordance with Section

5 of these Specifications, except as specified herein.
All appurtenances and lifting and handling devices
2
shall be set in place to the dimensions end tolerances
shown on the approved shop drawings prior to casting.
i.
ii.
Standards and Codes
The following standards and codes in their latest

edition shall be particularly applied to works covered
by this Specification.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi .
vii.
viii.
A 36M {AASHTO M183)- Structural Steel

A 123M -Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coating on
Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed
and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates Bars and
Strips
A 153M Zinc Coating (Hot Dipl on Iron and
Steel Hardware
A 325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints lnctuding Suitable Nuts and
Plain Hardened Washers
A 101 1M - Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability
A 615- Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and
Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving end Structural Construction
AASHTO T90- Determining the Plastic Limit
and Plasticity Index of Soils
9.12.2
Materials
9.12.2.1
General
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements to

provide the face panels, reinforcing and tie strips,
fasteners, joint filler, end ell necessary attachments as
recommended by the Manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
Concrete Face Panels
IIi.
iv.
v.
vi.
Reinforcing steel shall comply with Sub

Section 5.2 of the Specifications.
Concrete Finish - The concrete surface
pattern and finish for the exposed faces
shall conform to Section 5 of the
Specifications. The rear face of the panel
shall be roughly screeded to eliminate
surface distortions in excess of 6.5 mm. The
color and texture of the finish shall be
approved by the Engineer based on three
trial panels provided by the Contractor prior
to producing the final panels.
Tolerances
All
units
shall
be
w'thin
the
following
manufactured
tolerances:
a- All dimensions within -t-5 mm.
b Angular distortion with regard to the
height of the panel shall not exceed 7
mmin2 m.
Compressive Strength - Acceptance of the
concrete face panels with respect to
compressive strength will be determined in
accordance with Section 5 of the
Specifications, except that a minimum of
one set of test cubes shall be taken from
each lot of 50 panels or part thereof.
Additional
Compressive
Tests:
An
additional 4 specimens shall be field-cured
in the same manner as the concrete feeing
panels.
Compression tests on these
specimens shall be used to determine the
length of curing time required end
ecceptabi lity. Panels will be accepted after
7 days. provided the compressive strength
of field-cured cylinders exceeds 65% of the
required 28-day strength.
Panels with
defects that indicate imperfect molding,
honeycombing, or open texture concrete, or
that do not correspond with the quality of
the approved test panel will be rejected.
Rejection - Units shall be subject to
rejection by the Engineer if not in
conformance with these Specifications or if
any of the following defects are evident by
visual inspection:
a Defects
that
indicate
imperfect
moulding.
9--1 7
~~
M1nltty
ofTr~trtpotl &
Communier.t5on
DGfU.T
_/""...~<:Slope Protection end Stabilisation
b
vii.
vlil.
ix.
x.
9.12.2.3
Defects indicating honeycombed or

open texture concrete.
Marking - The date of manufacture shall be
clearly scribed on the rear face of each
paneL
Handling, Storage and Shipping - All units
shall be handled, stored and shipped in
such manner as to eliminate the danger of
chipping, cracks, fractures and excessive
bending stresses. Panels in storage shall be
supported on firm blocking located
immediately adjacent to tie strips or toggles
to avoid damage to these tie strips and
toggles. Any panels, including fastening
hardware. damaged during handling,
storage, or shipping shall be rejected by the
Engineer.
Joint spacing and details for expansion.
contraction, construction and control joints
i n the coping and the concrete barrier
parapet shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer and as approved by the
Engineer.
Test Panels: The Contractor shall construct
and submit at least 3 test panels. The
materials. including formwork, used in
construction of all test panels shall be as for
those proposed for use in the Works. The
test panel finish shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to production of any panels
for incorporation in the Works. The rear
face of each panel shall have a dense.
rough texture without honeycombed areas.
The approved panels shall remain available
on Site throughout the duration of the
Contract, as a standard for judging the
completed works.
Concrete Footings
The class of concrete shall be as shown on the

approved shop drawings and shall conform to Section 5 of
these Specifications.
9.12.2.4
Steel Reinforcing and Tie Strips
Tie strips shall be shop fabricated of hot rolled steel

conforming to the minimum requirements of ASTM A
1101M, Grade 36 or equivalent. Reinforcing strips shall be
hot rolled steel and shall conform to tha requirements of
ASTM A-36M or equivalent. The tie strips and reinforcing
strips shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to the
requi rements of ASTM A-123M.
The properties of the backfill material to be used
2
shall be one of the main factors in determining the strip
thickness required to meet the specified design life.
3
Prior to galvanizing, the tie strips and reinforcing
strips shall be cut to length and tolerances shown on the
plans and the holes for bolts shall be punched in the
locations shown. All reinforcing and t ie strips shall be
9-18
carefully Inspected to ensure they are true to size and free

from defects that may i mpai r their strength and durability.
4
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a
Certificate of Compliance certifying that these materiels
comply with the applicable Specifications.
5
Physical and Mechanical Properties: Reinforcing
strips and tie stri ps shah have a minimum yield point of
2,400 kg/sq.cm (235 MN/sq.ml; mi nimum tensile strength
of 3,700 - 4.500 kg/sq.cm (363-441 MN/sq.mj; 0.06%
maximum phosphorus; and 0.05% maximum sulfur. The
weight of zinc coating shaD be not less than 500 gm/sq.m.
9.12.2.5
Reinforced (Polymer! Grids
General: Shapes and dimensions of these elements

shall conform to the dimensions and tolerances shown on
the Drawings.
2
Grid reinforcing elements shall be manufactured by
stretching a punched polyethylene sheet in one direction
under controlled conditions to produce a high tensile
strength ori entated structure.
3
Mechenical Properties: The grid shah have a short
term strength of not less than 79 kN/m width, determined
from tensile testing at 20 degrees Celsius under a constant
rate of extension of 50 mm/minute. For each batch of
reinforcing material delivered t o Site. or at such other
times as may be required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall submit a test certificate from an approved
independent testing laboratory confirming that the
required strength characteristics have been met. The
120 year characteristic strength shall be not less thin
29 kNim wi dth.
4
Physical Properties: The w eight of grid shall not be
less than 0,85 kg.ls q.m. It shall be Immune to attack from
ultra-violet light for a minimum period of 3 years and shall
be immune to attack from &II chemicals naturally found i n
soils and to biological attack from micro-organisms. The
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the
manufacturer's warranty to this effect. The m ini mum roll
width shall be 1 m
Met hods of joining reinforci ng
material shalf be approved and in accordance with the
5
Upon manufacture, the reinforcing elements shall be
placed in approved wrapping meterial which shall prevent
ultra-violet light from reaching the reinforcing elements.
The reinforcing elements shall be identified with their date
of manufacture. Upon del ivery to Site the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with copies of the manufacturer's
certificates clearty stating the dates of manufacture of the
reinforcing elements. No reinforcing elements shall be
i ncorporated into the Works if at the time of proposed
I ncorporation the elements are more than three years old.
s.,Jtnnntc of Omnn. St:r'ld>rd Speetflcot:ono fur Ro:td r. BndJIO Cvn;Jruction 2al0
Slope Protection and Stabllisation
9.12.2.6
Sieve Size
Fasteners
Fasteners: Bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads

and conform to AASHTO M 164, Type 2. except as
modified hereunder. Bolts shall be 12 mm in diameter,
30 mm in length with 20 mm of thread length. Fasteners
shall be hot dip galvanized to AASHTO M 232, Class C.
Bolts shall have a minimum yield point of 6,400 kg/sq.cm
(627
MN/sq.m);
mm1mum
tensile
strength
of
8,000 kg/sq.cm (784 MN/sq.m); and minimum elongation
of 12%.
9.12.2.7
iL
Non Metallic Friction Ties and Fixings
The stabilized earth wall structure shall be reinforced

with friction strips of polyethylene coated polyester fiber
strips or similar material approved by the Engineer. The
reinforcing strips shall have the ultimate strength
indicated on the Drawings, and manufacturer's test
certificates shall be provided to verify this.
iii.
iv.
2
Reinforcing strips shall be fixed to the facing panels
using plastic coated steel anchor loops and toggles, unless
otherwise noted on the approved shop drawings and in
accordance with approved samples. The Contractor shall
furnish the Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance
certifying that these materials comply with the applicable
Specifications.
9.12.2.8
Joint Filler (for Use with Concrete Face Panels)
Filler for vertical joints between panels shall be

flexible open cell polyethylene foam strips, unless
otherwise noted on the approved shop drawings.
v.
vi.
2
Filler for horizontal joints between panels shall be
resin bonded cork filler conforming to ASTM D 1752 (Type
II) unless otherwise noted on the approved drawings.
9.12.2.9
Reinforced Earth selected backfill material can be

either natural soil or material of industrial origin. Backfill
shall not contain chalk, unburnt colliery shale, pulverized
full ash. material from swamps, marshes or bogs, organic
or other materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
would result in the structure becoming unfit for its
intended use. Prior to placing the granular fill, the
Contractor shall certify to the Engineer that the material
conform to the requirements as per specifications and
drawings.
2
Selected Filter Material for Dra'nege Layers: Filter
backfill materiel shall conform to the relevant
3
Backfill for Steel Reinforcing Strip System

i.
vii.
Joint Filler (for Use with Concrete Face Panels)
The selected fill shall conform to the

following gradation and shall have a
coefficient of uniformty not less than 2
(Cu=060/D10 :i 21 :
%Passing
250 mm
100
100 mm
75-100
0075 mm
0-15
The Contractor may request that the

acceptance limits be increased for material
not meeting the requirement for % passing
a 0.075 mm sieve provided an analysis is
submitted, showing that the material
passing the 0.075 mm sieve is less than
10%
smaller
than
0.015 mm,
or
alternatively that the material is less than
20% smaller than 0.015 mm and the angle
of internal friction as determined by ASTM
D 2850 Is 25 degrees minimum.
Materials shall have a minimum resistivity
when measured in accordance with
ASTM G 57 of 5,000 ohm-em.
Materials having a resistivity less than the
above but greater then 1,000 ohm-(:m may
be acceptable provided that the pH value of
the material measured in water extracted
from a water-soil mixture is between 5 end
10 when tested in accordance with
ASTM G 51, and that the water extracted
from the water-soil mixture has a chloride
content of less than 200 ppm and a
sulphates content of less than 1,000 ppm
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T
26.
The total sulphide content of the fill shall be
less than 0,3 gmlkg.
Organic
matter
content,
(difference
between total carbon content and mineral
carbon content) shall not be greater then
100 ppm.
If required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall carry out a test for Biochemical
Oxygen Demand (BOD). The BOD value
shall not exceed 0.004 gmlliter.
Backfill for Reinforcing Polymer Grid System

i.
ii.
Frictional Fill: This material shall contain a

maximum of 10% passing the 0.075 mm
(No 2001 sieve.
Gradation Requirements: Backfill material
shall conform to the following gradations:
Sieve Size
%(byweight Passing
125 mm
100
90mm
85-100
9.5 mm
25-100
0.600mm
1065
0.075mm
0-10
919 .
~
/'-,./
Mlnletrv of Tranepcrt & Communication
DGRLT
/"-~<Slope Protection and Stabilisation
9.12.3
9.U.3.1
WaiJ Excavation
1
Structure excavation shell be in accordance with the
requirements of Section 2. Limits and construction stages
shell be as shown on the Drawings.
9.12.3.2
Foundation Preparation
The foundatio11 for the structure shall be gr<tded level

for a width equal to or exceeding the length of reinforcing
material or as shown on the plans. Prior to wall
construction, except where constructed on rock. the
foundation shall be compacted with a smooth wheel
vibratory roller.
2
Any founclatlon sons found to be unsuitable shall be
removed and replaced in accordance with the procedures
in Section 2.
3
When concrete face panels are specified, at each
panel foundation 'level a concrete leveling footing shall be
provided as shown on the plans. The footing shall be
cured a minimum of 24 hours before placement of wall
panels.
9.12.3.3
Erection of Concrete Face Panels
Precast concret e panels shall be aligned vertically

using inserts cast into the top edge of panels. Panels shall
be placed in successive horizontal lifts in the sequence
shown on the approved plans as backfi II placement
proceeds. As fill material is placed behind a panel, the
panels shell be maintained In vertical position by means of
clamps placed at the junction of adjacent panels and
temporary wooden wedges placed in the horizontal or
vertical joint at the junction of the two adjacent panels on
the external side of t he wall. External bracing may also be
required for the initial lift. Vertical tolerances (ptumbnessl
and horizontal alignment tolerances shall not exceed 25
mm when measured along a three meter straight edge.
The maximum allowable offset in any panel joint shall be
25 mm. The overall vertical tolerance of the wan
(plumbness from top to bottoml shall not exceed 25 mm
per three met er of wall height.
9.12.3.4
3
Backfill shall be placed in accordance with Section 2
of these Specifications and compacted in accordance with
the requirements shown below and on the Drawings. The
maximum lift thickness shall not exceed 250 mm (before
compaction! and sha A closely follow panel erection. The
Contractor shall decrease this lift th'ckness If necessary to
obtain the specified density.
Backfill Placement
Backfill placement shall closely follow the erection of

each lift of panels. The filling material will be graded and
compacted before the placement of a new layer. The
gradation of the selected granular backfill should be tested
periodically during construction to assure compliance with
specifications. This gradation testing should be performed.
at least once for every 500 cubic meter of materiel placed
and/or whenever the appearance or behavior of the
material changes noticeably. Material shall be laid with
layers of uniform thickness, taking care to avoid
segregation and water content variations.
At the end of each day's operations, the Contractor

4
shall shape the last level of backfill so as to permit runoff
of rainwater away from the wall face.
5
Backfill outside roadway embankment areas shall be
compacted to at least 90% AASHTO T 180 maximum
density. Backfill within roadway embankment areas shall
be compacted to 95% AASHTO T 180 maximum density
except for backfill in sub-grade zones which shall be
compacted to 100% AASHTO T 180 maximum density.
6
The acceptance criteria for control of compaction
shall be given by first the equivalent Relative Density as
determined by ASTM D-2049. Then by largescale plate
beariog test, which defines the type of the equipment,
energy, lift thickness, etc ... before beginning compaction,
it is necessary to check that the moisture of the backfill
material is the optimum (:1: 1.5%1 value of modified
AASHTO standard.
7
The compaction shall be carried out in such a way as
to obtain a uniform density, rollers shaP move to and from,
always parallel to the wall and assuring that the
overlapping between one run and the next shall not be
less than 10% of the roller width. Backfill com paction shall
be accomplished w ithout disturbance or distortion of
reinforcements end panels. Compaction in a strip one
meter wide adjacent t o the backside of the wall shall be
achieved using an approved manually operated vibrating
compactor.
If a reinforcing polymer grid and connections are
B
used, they shall be handled and installed in accordance
the
manufacturer's
Instructions
illnd
w ith
recommendations, copies of which shall be submitted to
the Engineer before commencement of these Works. The
reinforcing grid shall not contain any cuts, kinks, twists,
blisters or other defects which, in the opinion of the
Engineer, would render it unsuitable for its intended use.
9.12.3.5
If shown on the Drawings, or if required by the

Engineer, a trial embankment shall be constructed prior to
start filling. The Contractor she II perform a full scale trial
compaction test.
2
The allocation of the testing area, the system for the
execution of the embankment and the testing program
shall be fixed by the Engineer considering the following:
i.
2
As shown on the shop drawings. reinforcements
shall be placed normal to the face of the wall.
9-~
Trial Embankment
The equipment shall be the same to be

used during aa the construction.
Sllltanot" of Oman, Slo'ldord Speafo..nion for Rod &. 8nd!lo Conwuctian 21ltD
il.
The trial area shall be leveled and

compacted, at approved locations or at
I ocati ons adjacent to the Site.
3
The Engineer shall approve the materials and
procedures on the basis ofthe trial results.
9.12.4
Monitoring
9.12.4.1
General
The scope of the required monitoring is related to

verifying and certifying the compliance of the work with
the design assumptions and construction procedures. In
the meantime, some monitoring is devoted to guide the
construction phases of the embankment in order to
minimize the effect of settlements. Those aspects will
control the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
9.12.4.2
Selected backfill
Settlements
Horizontal displacements and overall
stability
Material durability
Selected Backfill
Each layer must be subjected to control tests and

meet the requirements before placement of the following
layer.
2
The testing frequency, as specified, must be
considered as a minimum and must be increased
whenever the appearance and/or behavior of the material
noticeably changes,
3
The location of testing and/or sampling will be
determined by the Engineer, Test certificates in proper
forms shall be promptly sent to the Engineer during the
construction,
4
As indicated In the following table, the frequency of
the testing can be reduced after 5000 m 3 However, this
can be done only when the gradation and physical
properties of the material becomes practically constant.
9. 12.4.3
Settlements
Survey of settlements will be done during the

construction, particularly where the embankments lay on
compressive soils intending to settle. Settlements shall be
monitored by means of two different procedures:
i.
ii.
Topographic measurements on the wall

face
Vertical settlements on the foundation
2
Topographic measurements will be performed with
leveling instruments and reference points installed on the
wall face and with benchmarks located in stable areas.
4
Foundation settlements shall be monitored using
steel bars fixed on concrete at a distance of 12 meters
from the wall facing. The vertical steel bar is to be
protected by means of pipes. Measurements shall be
taken from the top of the steel bars.
9.12.4.4
Horizontal Displacements
Possible horizontal displacements will be measured

within the foundation soil and on the wall surface,
Inclinometers shall be placed in similar locations to the
settlements devices. They shall be installed within the
solid bedrock. The measurements shall be frequent and
related to the construction program. Possible horizontal
displacements can easily be checked by a pendulum
(plumb bob).
9.12.4.5
Durability
These investigations are only related to reinforcing

strips and are generally carried out at the time of the
regular detailed inspections of the structure, with a
frequency of approximately 10 to 15 years. It may also be
opportune to make such investigations if the structure has
serious anomalies, the origin of which is likely to be
sought in the mechanical failure of the strips.
2
The investigation method may vary according to
whether the structure is or Is not equipped with durability
test samples. This monitoring and Investigation Is
performed with special techniques and investigation
method. In order to collect reliable and complete
information in long term, it is vital that these operations
be entrusted to a qualified specialist laboratory.
3
At every investigation, a certain number of test
samples are extracted and the backfill sample is taken in
the vicinity of these test samples. Durability test samples
are samples of reinforcing strips of 60 em long, of the
same type as those used in the structure. They are placed
fn the backfill of the Reinforced Earth mass during the
construction and can be extracted for the monitoring of
corrosion phenomena.
As a general rule, durability test samples are located
4
either at the lower part of the structure or, if the latter is at
considerable height, at each change in the section of the
strips.
5
At every investigation, one indicator is extracted
from each zone in which test samples are located. In case
of abnormal corrosion development, complementary
investigations must be made; excavations must be opened
for examining the first beds of reinforcements.
9.12.4.6
Testing Frequency
Testing shall be as follows in Table 9.12.4. 1:
An appropriate quantity of fixed reference points

3
(steel plates] shall be installed on the panels every 7.5
meters elevation within each selected cross-section, For
those measurements, a tolerance of :t. 2 mm is required.
9-21
~
~
MJnlatry af Trnnaport ft. Com!llunicotiona . OGRLT
~~<Slope Protection and Stabllisation
TEST
Within first
5000m3
-- . -
Grain Size
pH
~Salt Content
lnsitu Density
500
5000
500
5000
L - 500
500
~~
Resistivity
500
Plata Bearing
250
Water Content
1000
ii.
iN.
After first
5000m3
5000
5000
6000
Coastal Protection
9.13.1
Description
2
Quarry run shall consist of natural rock fragi'TI$n1$
and complyi ng with the requirements of this section.
3
Armour rock shall be the quarri ed stone placed in the
top or outer layer(s) of the strutture exposed to sea
conditions.
Table 9.12.4.1- Testing Requirements
9.12.5
9.13
Quarried stone shall consist of natural rock imported

to site from approved quarry sites complying with the
requirements of this section.
1000
Mechanically Stabilized Earth Retaini ng Walls.

Including concrete face panels and footi ngs shall be
measured by the sq.m of net area of as shown on the
Drawings.
2
Venical limits of each wall for measurement
purposes shall be between the top of the foundation on
the outer face (low sldel of the stabilized earth wall and
the top of the proposed grade at the backside (high side)
of such walls. Horizontal limits for measurement purposes
shall be from end of wall to abutment or from end to end
of walls.
3
Standard coping. including concrete, reinforcement.
joint filler, Incidentals and erection shall be measured by
linear meter. complete and in place.
4
Concrete barrier parapet (on stabilized earth walls).
including concrete, reinforcement, fasteners. joint filler
and incidenta!s and erection shall be measured by linear
meter of concrete barrier. complete and in place.
4
Undertayer shall be the quarried stone placed undet
the armour rock layer(s)
5
Core means the quarry run material forming the bulk
portion of the slope and erosion protection fill sections
protected by underlayers and/or armour rock.
Filter fabric (geotextile) shall be a membrane placed
6
between the underlayer and the seabed soil or the core
stone that shall allow passage of water while retaining of
seabed soil or core stone in place without clogging.
7
The Contractor shaD submit for the Engineer's
approval a Quality Control Manual for the proposed slope
and erosion protection construction.
8
The Contractor shall submit the following method
statements for the Engineer's approval at feast 45 days
ptior to the commencement of work on site:
i.
II..
iii.
9.12.6
Basis of Payment

rate for 'Mechanically Stabilized earth Retaining Walls' in
the Bill of Quantities, which rate shall be full
compensation for ground preparation, placing and fixing
of reinf orcement. fasteners, joint filler, material testing
and certificates, trial embankment, excavation. backfill,
compaction, waterproofing, integral incidentals (such as
light pole foundalions, sign structure foundations,
drainage structures and appurtenances), erection, and for
mat erials, transportation, hauling, labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and other items necessary for the proper
9.12.7
l..
022

Mechanically Stabilised Earth
Retaining Walls (MSERWJ
Standard Coping on MSERW

(lin.ml
Cone. Barrier Parapet on MSERW (lin.m)
(sq..m)
iv.
Method for preparation of seabed as the bose.

Method for p1acement of core material.
underlayers and rock armour protection.
Method for surveying procedures to establish
lines and levels of the various slope and erosion
protecti on components.
Method of quarry selection and armour stone
production.
9
The Contractor shal submit the following test reports
directly t o Engineer from approved testing services:
i.
ii.
Iii.
iv,
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
grading size of material

aspect ratio of material
apparent oven dry density of quarried stone
Los Angeles abrasion
water absorption
sodium sulphate soundness
unconfined compressive strength
methylene blue absorption
Sultanate or Oman, Stoncbrd Spet:irt=~ion> for Read l Orid110 CGmtl\ICtion 2010
10 The Contractor shall submit detailed design drawings,

plans, longitudinal profiles and cross-sections across the
slope and erosion protection at 50m intervals and at
transition zones between the different design sections.
The drawings shall be based on the up-dated survey
carried out at the slope and erosion protection area.
11 The Contractor shell submit bathymetric charts at the
slope and erosion protection at suitable scales of 1:1000
and 1:500 including ACAD computer file diskettes In the
form of point No., x, y, z.
12
The work shall be performed in accordance with:

i.
ii.
iii.
The requirements of the Authorities

BS 6349, BS 812 and ASTM D 1557.
Recommendations of Construction Industry
Research and Information Association (CIRIAI
Special Publication No.83 (SP 83).
13 The Contractor shall employ and pay for a competent

independent geotechnical testing laboratory with proven
track records to perform testing on rock material to be
placed in the core, underlayers and armour layers of the
structure.
9.13.2
Materials
9.13.2.1
Quarried Stone
Underlayers
for
Armour
Layers
and
The Contractor shall use armour and underlayer

stones consisting of quarried rock, dense. sound, fresh,
strong, free from weathering, mechanical weaknesses or
chemical decomposition. The stones shall not be liable to
decomposition under the action of sea water. They shall
also be free from any visible defects such es joints,
discontinuities, fractures, clay seams or bands and water
soluble material.
2
The contractor shall use rock materials in armour
layers and underlayers conforming to the classes defined
by the engineer
3
The contractor shall use quarry stone containing no
more than 5% of stones with a length to thickness (1/d)
ratio greater than 3, where the length (1 J. is defined as the
greatest distance between two points on the stone and the
thickness,(d), as the minimum distance between two
parallel straight lines through which the stone can just
pass. Carry out the test In accordance with CIRIA SP 83,
Appendix2.
4
The contractor shall use quarry stone for armour and
underlayers for testing having a minimum apparent oven
3
dry density of 2560 kg/m with 90% of the stones having a
density of at least 2600 kgfm31n accordance with CIRIA SP
83.
5
The loss of material using the Los Angeles Abrasion
test in accordance with ASTM C-131 shell not exceed 35%.
7
Sodium sulphate soundness carried out in
accordance with BS 812: Part 121 using the 63-125mm
crushed rock and a 50mm sieve to determine losses shall
be less than 12%.
8
The average point load index Is (50) in the planar
direction of the most pronounced layering, should any
visible anisotropy exist, and for sampling testing and
reporting in accordance with ISRM 1986 recommended
method, shall be not less than 4.0 MPa with the average
minus the standard deviation of the point load index at
least 3.0 MPa; where at least ten valid test results obtained
from pieces originating from ten randomly selected stones
have been used to calculate the average and standard
deviation.
9
Methylene blue absorption tests shall be carried out
in accordance with CIRIA SP 83, Appendix 2, in order to
indicate the presence of deleterious clay minerals, the
results ofthis test shall not exceed 1.0gl100g.
10 The contractor shall carry out for each quarry the
three sets of tests as listed in the relevant Clauses above.
The contractor shall submit the results for the Engineer's
approval of the source of quarried stone for underlayers
and armour layers.
11 The contractor shall carry out at I east three sets of
the tests listed in the above Clauses on each consignment
of quarried stone for under-layers and armour layers
imported to site. A higher frequency of testing may be
required as instructed by the Engineer, if this, in the
opinion of the Engineer, Is deemed necessary.
12 Materials failing to comply with any of the
requirements listed above shall not be used in the Works
and shall be considered not in compliance with thls
specifications.
9.13.2.2
Core Material
The contractor shall use core material consisting of

well graded quarry run complying with the gradation
defined by the engineer.
2
The used fill materiel shall be quarry run material
with percentage of fines (passing sieve 0.075mm) shall not
be more than 20%.
3
The contractor shall use selected quarry run with
material percentage lighter than 1.0 kg (80mm of
equivalent diameter) not exceeding TO% and complying
with the size gradation defined by the engineer.
4
The contractor shall use quarry run
complying with the following requirements:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Apparent oven dry density

Water Absorption
Sodium Sulphate Soundness
Los Angeles Abrasion
material
> 2.3 !1m3

<3.0%
< 12.0%
< 35.0 %
6
The water absorption of quarry stone, carried out in
accordance with BS 812: Part 2 shall be less than 3%.
9-23
~
~
MJniatty ofTrRnport & CommunJeotJona
DGRLT
/"'-.
~~Slope Prot ection and Stabilisation
v.
Methylene blue absorption
< 1,0g/100g
5
The contractor shall carry out for each quarry three
sets of the tests as listed in the above Clauses. The
selection of the quarry source will be based on the results
submitted and subject to Engineer's approval.
6
During construction, the contractor shall take
sufficient sample for every 5000 t of material produced or
production for a working day whichever is greater. Three
sets of the tests as listed in the above Clauses shall be
carried out and submitted to the Engineer. A higher
frequency of testing may be required as i nstructed by the
Engineer, if this, in the opinion of the Engineer, is deemed
necessary.
7
Materials failing to comply with any of the
requirements listed above shall not be used in the Works
and shall be considered not In compliance with this
specification.
9.13.2.3
Filter Fabric Geotextiles
The work shall consist of furnishing and placing a

geotextile. The geotextile is designed to allow passage of
water while retaining seabed soil without clogging. The
suitability of used geotextile should be checked against
these functional requirements before laying taking Into
consideration the seabed soil conditions.
2
Non-woven TERRAM 4000 or equivalent material can
be used with the following properties:
i.
ii,
iii.
Weight : 350 gtm2

Tensile strength : 23 kN/ m 2
085 (diameter of holes in a fabric): a suitable
hole diameter to prevent the wash out of seabed
and core material ant to retain them in place
without clogging.
3
The contractor shall provide evidence of the
resistance to deterioration of the geotextiles from
exposure to ultraviolet light and seawater.
4
The contractor shall carry out sampling of geotextiles
for testing in accordance with Silmpling proc e~res
indicated in ASTM - 04354-99.
5
The contractor shall carry out for geotextiles three
sets of tests to certify the required properties and submit
the results for the approval of the Engineer.
6
The contractor shall carry out at least three sets of
tests to verify the required properties on each
consignment of geotextile imported in the site. A higher
frequency of testing may be required as instructed by the
Engineer, if this, in the opinion of the Engineer is deemed
necessary.
7
Materials fai ling to comply with any ol the
requTrements listed above shall not be used in the works
and shall be considered not in compliance with these
specifications.
924 .
9.13.3
9.13.3.1
General
The contractor shall carry out sounding of the seabed

at the slope and erosion protection site in order to
produce a detailed seabed profi le using echo sounder or
side-scan sonar together with a surface-towed sub-bottom
or similar seismic profiler and a tide gauge and collecting
seabed samples. Obtain approval of the Engineer on the
results of soundings and bathymetry as well as seabed
samples before the works commence, and finally
Incorporate the same In the drawings.
2
Seabed clearances: Remove prior to commencing
fil fmg works, all unsu itable material, wrecks, floating
debris, silt, c!ay, loose sand and loose material over the
whole area of the slope and erosion protection. Dispose of
unsuitable material as directed by the Engineer.
3
The contractor shall remove, In accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer any silt, loose sand or clay
that exists in the top layers of the seabed. Remove any silt,
loose sand and clay layers to the levels and areas as
instructed by Engineer.
4
The contractor shall relocate or redirect, at his own
expense, aU underwater services, installations etc. that
may lie in the area to receive rockfil ling. He shall carry out
all such redirection or relocation in accordance with
requirements ofthe relevant local authorities.
5
The contractor shall ensure that the founding bed for
slope and erosion protection is natural seabed material
when working in the sea, consisting of sand, a mixture of
sand and gravel or rock. No filling on silt, loose sand or
clay layers shall be allowed.
6
The contractor shall make his own arrangements for
the supply and transport of slope and erosion protection
material either by land or sea or both and use appropriate
marine and/or land operated plants for filling.
7
The contractor shall protect all placed materia l from
erosion by the action of sea during construction. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for all loss of material
and displacements that mi!Y arise, and shall make good
such losses and displacements at his own expense.
Furthermore, t he ContractQf" shall be responsible for any
obstruction that may be caused by the deposition of any
material washed out from the filling and remove the same
i n accordance to the instructions of the Engineer.
B
The contractor shall take all the necessary
precautions to protect the environment and any damage
to the environment arise from the Works shall be the
Contractor's responsibility.
9.13.3.2
Placement of Core Material
The contractor shall place materials used to form the

cOI'e to the profiles and levels shown on the Drawings with
a t olerance of zero above the theoretical level.
Sult<>Onta ol Om"" Sl>'ld>rd SI)Odfi=ona for Rood & Brfclgo Comttvc:ronl01 D
2
The contractor sha II take measurement of each
material profile as placed before any subsequent layer of
material is placed to ensure compliance with the specified
tolerances.
All Armour
Depth of Placing
3
The contractor shall carry out placement of core
material underwater in such a manner to minimize
segregation of material and to ensure its proper mixing.
The placement methods are subject to Engineer's
approval.
4
The contractor shall place core material 0.75m above
mean sea level and higher in layers not more than 1.0m in
loose depth and compact as specified.
5
Before compaction, the contractor shall moisten each
layer as necessary. He shall compact each layer with the
minimum number of roller passes as agreed with the
Engineer.
6
The contractor shall carry out compaction by heavy
vibratory compactor not less than 12 t capacity.
9.13.3.3
Below l.ow Water
Individual
level
Measurements
2
The contractor shall not drop or lip into position
quarried stone, but shall place them individually into the
structure in order to achieve an adequate stability and
deformation to maintain lines and levels shown on
Drawings. He shall tightly pack the stones together so as
to achieve as near as possible a target unit weight of stone
placed of 1.6 tim' and do not place them so that thay can
rock or obtain their stability on a pi ane by frictional
resists nee alone prior to placing further stones.
3
The contractor shall fill any void below finished
profile level in excess of mean rock size with an
appropriate stone or stones.
4
The contractor shall place rock materials to the levels,
dimensions and slopes shown on drawings, and the
surface profile measured in accordance with the surveying
procedure outlined in Paragraph 9.13.3.4, to be within the
vertical placing tolerances given in Table 9.13.1.1.
Profile to
Actual Mean
Profile(m}
lml
Dry: aboVe water
level
-I
+0.35 On-50
0.3 On 50
- 0.25 On 50
~
+0.6 On 50
Less than 5m
0.5 On 50
- 0.4 On 50
.J
Morethan5m
--
0.5Dn50
:1:1 .~
~
Where, On50 Is the diameter of a placement with

equivalent volume to the block with median weight.
Table 9.13.3.1: Vertical Placing Tolerances
Placement of Armour and Underlayer Stones
For placing above high low water level, the

contractor shall place the stone to grade and in such a
manner to ensure that the larger rock fragments are
uniformly distributed and the smaller rock fragments fill
the spaces between the larger fragments to achieve a well
keyed, densely packed structure of the specified
dimensions. Hand placing or barring will be required only
to the extent necessary to secure the results specified.
Design
Layers and
5
The tolerance on two consecutive mean actual
Notwithstanding any
profiles shall not be negative.
accumulation of positive tolerances on underlying layers,
the thickness of the layer shall not be less than 80% of the
nominal thickness when calculated using mean actual
profiles
9.13.3.4
Surveying Technique
The contractor shall carry out survey measurements

using a probe with a spherical end of diameter 0.5 (On 501.
For land-based survey this shall be connected to a staff;
for underwater survey it will be a weighted ball on the end
of a sounding chain.
2
The contractor shall carry out measurement profit es
at intervals of 25m along the length of the structure and at
intervals of 3m across the measurement profile.
3
The contractor shall make provisions for diving
inspections for any part of the structure where
achievement of tolerances may otherwise appear in doubt.
9.13.3.5
Storage, Handling, and Laying of Geotextiles:
The contractor shall store end handle geotextile in

accordance with ASTM 04873-02
2
For Geotextil es placement, the contractor shall use
overlaps in accordance with manufacture requirements,
and in no case less than 50 ems.
3
The contractor sha II place beddir>g layer as soon as
possible after placement of the geotextile, according to the
approved method statement of the construction procedure.
4
Where seams are required, the contractor shall make
them in accordance with the manufacture requirements.
All seams shall be subjected to the approval of the
Engineer.
5
The contractor shall remove and replace any
damaged or punctured section before or after laying.
925
lj
~
~
M'nlatry of "Trnnport &
_Co~munlcationa
DGRlT
~~<::Slope Protection and Stabilisation
9.13.4
Underlayer, Rock Armour, Quarry Run and Bedding

Layer shall be measured by the Cu.m of BUND material
and rubble base (Quarry run), rock armour, end bedding
layer, placed to the lines and levels as shown on the
Drawings.
2
Dredging for embedded toe protection shall be
measured by the cu.m of material dredged in sand, clay or
any other material elCcept rock to the lines and levels as
shown on Drawings. Rates inserted by the Contractor shall
be deemed to include for all over cuning in width and
depth and for sweeping the dredged areas.
3
Fabrics and membranes (geotelCtlle) shall be
measured by the sq.m of the area covered to any width or
girth including BlCtra material for lapping and jointing. No
deduction is made for voids not elCceeding 1.00 m2
9.13.5
Basis of Payment
General: In addition to basis of payment of each

particular item, all marine works are also deemed to
include:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
all surveying works and sea bed sounding

clearance of the seabed; removal of unsuitable
material, objects or obstructions,
inspection for and retocatiol'l of any elCistlng
underwater servict!S,
protection from sea action,
losses due to erosion or damage,
losses/damage due to wave conditions which
may occur duri ng the Contract period Including
the Period of Maintenance.
2
measured as underlayer, quarry run, rock armour, and
bedding layer will be paid for at the unit rates indicated In
the Bill of Quantities which rate shall be full compensation
for selection and supply of materials, stonekockfill,
crushing, screening, testl~~g, transportati on. hauling,
stockpiling, relocation, placing, compacting, trimming the
underlying material and slope preparation, removal of
discarded material, elCcavatlon and backfilling. finishing
and protecti on, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other
items necessary for the proper completion of the works.
3
measured as Dredging for Embedded Toe Protection will
be paid for at the unit rates indicated in the Bill of
Quantities which rate shall be full compensation for
supply and installation of all plant and equipment required
to carry out dredging, pumping and transportation of
dredged material to whatever distance required, hauling,
stockpiling. disposal of discarded material to approved
locations, protection, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and
works ..
4
measured as Fabric and Membranes (GeotelCiile) will be
paid for at the unit rates indicated in the Bill of Quantities
which rate shall be full compensation for selection and
926
supply of materials, fabrics and membranes, sampli ng and

testing, ground preparation for laying on horizontal,
sloping, vertical and curved planes, transportation, placing.
protection, labor. equipment, tools. supplies and other
items necessary for the proper completion of the works.
9.13.6
i.
li.
iii.
iv.
v.

Underlayer
Quarry Run
Rock Armour
Dredging
Fabrics and Membranes(type)
(cum)
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
(cu.m)
(sq.m)
Sultanate of Oman, SCaneJ.td Specifoc:ations lllf llolld & Bndge Constructoon 2.010
Ref.
Title
10.1
Piling: General
Page No.
Deac:ription
10.1.1
10.1.2
Materials
Conltruc:tlon Requirement.
10.1.3
10 1 3.1
Genenl
10 1 3.2
Cast In Place Piles
10.1.3.3
Placing Concrete
10.1 3.4
Preliminary Drilled Piles
10 13.5
Precast Concrete Piles
10136
Steel piles
1013.7
Tolerances
10.1.4
101.5
Bnls of Payment
10.18
10.2
Pile Testing
1D.2.1
Oelcriptlon
10.2.2
Submm.la
Execution
10.2.3
Preparation
10.2.3:1
10.2.3.2
StatlcLoad Testing
NonDestructive, !;ow-Strain Integrity
10.2.3.3
Testing
10.2.3.4
Test Records
10.2.4
10.2.5
Basis of Payment
Items In the BtU of Quantities
10.2.6
10-1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.3
1Q.4
11).4
10-4
10.5
10-5
10.5
10.5
10.5
1D-5
1G-5
1o.&
10.S
10-&
106
1016
1~7
10.7
10.7
10.7
SultDnotc of Omon. S~.andrd Spocirrco~ons fot Road & Sridga C<>Mlt~~n ZIJW
10.1
Piling: General
10.1.1 Description
This Section describes requirements for supplying
and installing precast concrete, cast In-situ concrete and
steel piles by boring andfor driving.
10.1.2 Materials
Concrete and steel reinforcement shall be as
specified in the relevant Clauses of Section 5.
2
Concrete mixes, mixing and curing procedures shalt
be as specified in the relevant Clauses of Section 5
Concrete mixes for use In piles shall be capable of
maintaining a slump of 200 mm for 2 hours after
placement Concrete mixes shall be designed to resist
aggressive soils and ground water if encountered in
compliance with the requirements of the Construction
Industry Research and Information Association - CIRIA
'Guide to the Construction of Reinforced Concrete in the
Arabian Peninsula'.
adequate notice of any intention to work outside normal

site hours.
3
The Contractor shall engage en experienced installer
who has specialized in installing drilled or driven piles
similar to those required for the Project.
4
The Contractor shall protect structures, utilities,
sidewalks, pavements and other facilities, on or adjacent
to the Site, from damage caused by settlement, lateral
movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled
or driven pile operations.
5
The Contractor shall carry out the piling work in such
a manner and et such times to minimize noise and
disturbance to the general public. If, during execution of
the work, damage is likely to be caused to utilities or
adjacent structures. the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer proposals for the repair or avoidance of such
damage.
Piles shall be Installed to the tolerances given in
6
Table 10.1.3.1.
Steel pipe casings shall comply with the

3
requirement s of ASTM A 283M, Grade C; or ASTM A 36M
carbo nsteel plate, wit h vertical joints full-penetration
welded according to AWS 01 .1.
6
Slurry shall consist of pulverized sodium bentonite,
pulverized attapulgite, or polymers, mixed with potable
water to form a stable colloidal suspension; complying
with ACI 336.1, and the values indicated for density,
apparent viscosity (in centipoise), gel strength (in N/sq.m.),
sand content, end pH.
Allowable Limit
Poitlon
76mm in any direction at the

pi ~_! head
Verticality
4
Welds for fabricating steel piles and connecting steel
pile lengths shall be as specified in the relevant Clauses of
Section 6.
5
Sand-cement grout shall consist of Portland cement
manufactured according to ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean
natural sand complying with ASTM C 404.
Unless
otherwise indicated, mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1 t2
parts sand, by volume, with sufficient water to permit flow
during placement.
Characterfltlc
--
Rake
{for raked p~ln only)
-"
75 deviation
---1 in--
I
I
1 in 25 deviation
Table 10.1.3-1: Pile Installation Tolerances.
7
The Contractor shall submit daily records to the
Engineer within 24 hours giving the information listed In
Table 10.1.3.2.
On completion of piling, the Contractor shall deliver a

final schedule of installed piles giving the information
required by Table tO. 1.3.2.
10.1.3 Construction Requirements

10.1.3.1
General
The Contractor shall submit for prior approval a

detailed method statement that describes all means,
methods and techniques to be adopted for construction
and installation of the drilled o r driven piles. The method
statement shall include details of equipment to be used,
method of excavation, slurries to be used met hod of
conc:tete placement to ensure removal of slurry from sides
of boring, quality control, t esting and report procedures.
work program, and any other information required by the
Engineer.
2
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer each day of
the work program for the following day and sha ll give
10-1
~~
Mlnlauy of Tr.onaport &:
~~<.Piling
Cc:~nlmunlentlon
OGRLT
Driven ~"recut Concme II. Stool

ffilu
All piiM
Driven Hollow c..t.

In-Place Concrete
Bored CutlnPiace Concrete
P.HM
P.llei
'
1.
2.
Data
Contract
Identification,
Pile Identification.
Pile type.
Working load.
Ground level at
commencement of
c)perations.
Working platform
level,
Pile toe level.
Details of any
obstructions.
Delay!! or other
interruptions to
the saquenca of
work including
times.
Cut-off level.
Head level of
completed pUa.
Ground heave.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1D.
11.
12.
13.
1.
2.
~-
4.
6.
6.
1.
Cross section
dimensions of
driving tuba
(temporary
casing I.
Cross-sectional
dimensions of
completed pile.
Length of
permanent
casing.
Length of
flnlshe<! pile
excluding any
enlarged base.
2.
3.
4.
I
1.
2.
~.
4.
5.
5.
I
7.
I
I
Cross-sectional dimensions.
Total length of praformad.
pile.
Driven langth of preformed
pile.
Sequence of driving In
groups.
Final set
Sections and joints used.
B.
9.
Time of commencement and completion of driving

or ra-drivlng,
Type, weight, drop and mechanical condotion of
hammer used.
Number, type and condition of the packing on tha
pile haad.
Type and condition of the dolly In the helmet
For a single acting hammer, the final drop.
For a double acting hammer, the final frequ~ncy of
blows.
The set!l taken at intervals during the last 3m of
driving, if required.
Details of any interruption In driving.
Datails of re-drM ng.
t.
1.
23.
4.
Diameter of completed
pile.
Diameter of any enlarged
base.
Length of temporary
casing.
Length of permanent
ca~dng .
Length of finished pile

Including any enlarged
base.
6. Type of boring.
7. Time of commencement
of boring.
B. Details of soil strata
penetrated.
9. Det11ils of soils umples
taken and inllltu tnts
carried out.
1 D. Detaiis of any
Interruption in boriflg,
11. Standing ground water
level and water strikes
during boring.
5.
Method of placing concrete.

Concrete mix details:
Grade of concrete
Nominal maximum aggregate size
Cement content
Type and queotity of admixtures
Water/Cement ratio.
Measur~~d !!lumps.
Batch times.
Time of commencement of concrete pour.
Time of completion of concrete pour.
Volume of concrete placed in enlarged base.
Volume of concrete placed In pile shaft
Reinforcement details:
Number, type and size of main reinforcing bars.
Type, size and pitch or spacing of helical binding
or link bars.
17. letlgth of individual reinforcement cages.
18. Total reinforced length of prle
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
l
Table 10.1 .3-2: Piling Records.
Notes:
1. The 24 hour clock shall be used.
2. f or any pile not completed In the working day
the date shall be entered in the records together
with the limes of commencement and
completion.
1().2
3. For driving operations not using a piling hammer,
equivalent information to that required on type.

weight, drop etc of hammer, packing and dolly
shell be provided.
Sultonata cr On>an, S~.>'ld.r~ Spedr.=';cr;; lor llood 8< Sridga Construct en ~10
10.1.3.2
Tnt Method
Cast in Place Piles
andAppwiWi
complying
Temporary casings or linings shall be used when

needed to mal ntain the stability of the pile borehole
during excavation. Casings shall be free from distortion
and projections. and shall be uniform section throughout
their length.
2
steel
with
shall
In case where permanent steel casings is required,

pipe casings of minimum wall thickness indicated
inside clear diameter not less than diameter of pile
be installed as follows:
i.
Install casings as excavation proceeds, to
maintain sidewall stability.
ii.
Fabricate bottom edge of lowest casing section
with a cutting shoe capable of penetrating rock
and achieving a water seal.
iii. Connect casing sections by continuous
penetration welds to form a watertight,
continuous casing.
iv. Remove and replace, or repair, casings that
have been damaged during installation and
that could impair strength or efficiency of
drilled pile.
v.
Fill annular void between casing and shaft wall
with sand-cement grout.
vi. Corrugated casings formed from zinc-coated
steel sheet may be delivered In sections or
panels of convenient length, and field
connected according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3
The drilling fluid shall be maintained at an adequate
viscosity and density. Action shall be taken to prevent the
spillage of bentonite slurry onto the site. Disposal of used
slurry shall be made to a tip approved by the Engineer.
4
When drilled shafts are to be stabilized with slurry,
the slurry shall be maintained a minimum of 1500 mm
above ground-water level and above unstable soli strata to
prevent caving or sloughing of shaft. Excess slurry head is
to be related to performance of on-going dewatering and
to allow for fluctuations in depressed water levels.
i.
ii.
iii.
Each batch of freshly prepared or reconstituted

slurry shall be sampled end tested. Test results
of samples and from excavation sha II reflect
the amount of contamination with saline
ground water.
At least one sample from the base and one
sample from the top of each shaft shall be
tested immediately prior to placing steel and
concrete. The Engineer may subsequently vary
frequency of sampling and testing when a
working pattern has been established.
Tests end Compliance: Values measured at 20
deg C shall be as Table 1o. 1.3.3
wfththe
Amrbn
Samples
Plllraleum
lnatitute IAP.Il
Property
recommended
pr.ctlce for
FWdTntJna
of Wit
Sample a
IUppliedto
t~~CCW~~tlon
from
exc.vltlon
prior to
piRing
conlll'llte
a...dDrtiHng
Flulda- API RP
138-1
1.10g~ml
Less than
1-15 glml
Low
temperature
test fluid loss
Less than
30mil
{0.762mml
Less than
40mll
(1 .D16mm)
Marsh Cone
30to40
seconds
Less than
60seconds
Less than
10 cP
Less than
20 cP
Density
Mud balance
F.luid
loss
{30 min.
test)
Viscosity
Plastic
viscosity
Fann
viscometer
[material
passing sieve
Less than
No. 2001
Shear
strength
110 min.
gel
strenathl
Sand
content
PH
- -
Fann
viscometer
Sand screen
set
Electrical pH
meter range
pH7 to 14
..,
4to25
N/m~
--
Less than
4to25
Nlm'
- Less-than
1%
3%
9,5 to 10.8
9.5 to 11.7
Table 10.1.3-3: Tests and Compliance of Slurry.

iv.
Drilled pile shaft shall be excavated and

completely concreted an same day or the shaft
shall be re-drilled, cleaned, re-circu Iated, desanded, or slurry replaced.
v.
Bottom of each shaft shall be cleaned before

concreting.
5
Pumping of ground water from boreholes will only
be permitted where there is no risk of removal of fines
from the subsoil. Water which cannot be sealed off shall
be maintained in the borehole at a level above the
standing ground water.
On completion of baring, loose soil and debris shall
6
be removed from the base of the pile and the Contractor
shall provide facilities required by the Engineer to facilitate
Inspection of the pile base. The method of descent and the
equipment used shall comply with BS 5573.
7
If reinforcement cages are used they shall be rigid
and installed and maintained in the correct position during
concreting.
10-3
~~
Mjnltry or Transport & Cummunicnt,on
OGRlT
.../"'.~<_Piling
10.1.3.3
Placing Concrete
The concrete shall be placed without Interruption.

Records shall be kept of the workability of the approved
mix. Under water concrete shall be placed only by tremie.
The tremle pipe shall be clean and watenight throughout
and not less than 200 mm internal diameter. Concreting
shall stan only after the tremie reaches the bottom of the
pile shaft and concreting shall then proceed w ith the end
of tremle pl pe kept immersed in the concrete for a
minimum depth of 1 m. Spacer blocks shall be installed as
appropriate to mai ntain the minimum concrete cover to
the reloforcement steel as specified and/or shown on
Drawings.
2
Permanent casing shall be checked for damage. If
necessary the casing shall be withdrawn. repaired, rednven, or other action taken to allow the construction of
the pile..
3
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the
concrete remal ns sufficiently workable. While the casing Is
being extracted a sufficient head of conCfete shall be
maintained within it to avoid necking in the pile. No
concreting shall be done once the c11sing has been lifted
above the top of the concrete. Withdrawal of temporary
casing shall be coordinated with concrete placement
operations to maintain a head of concrete no less than
1500 mm above casing bottom.
4
Casings for driven cast-inplace piles shall be
installed to the approved set or specified depth and In the
sequence approved by the Engineer. Each length shall be
driven continuously. Levels shall be t aken immediately
when the final depth is approved, before concreting has
begun. The casings shall be watenigt\1,
10.1.3,4
Preliminary Drilled Piles
Co nstruct preliminary drilled piles of d;ameter and

depth and at location indicated or if not indicated, as
directed by the Engineer, of same diameter and depth as
permanent drilled piles, located at least 3 diameters clear
of permanent drilled piles, to demonstrate Installer' s
construction
methods,
equipment,
standards
of
workmanship, and tolerances.
i.
Install casing or use bentonite slurry, excavate
bell if applicable, excavate rock socket, all as
required for permanent drilled piles.
ii. Install reinforcement, fill with concrete, remove
temporary casings, if applicable, and terminate
p reliminary drilled pile as instructed by the
Engineer.
iii. If Engineer determines that preliminary drilled
pile does not meet requirements, excavate for
and cast another until preliminary drilled pile is
accepted.
10.1.3.5
Precast Concrete Piles
After a pile has been cast, the date of casting and

reference number shall be permanently inscribed on the
10-4
head of the pile. Each pile shall be marked at intervals of

250mm along the top 3m of its length before being driven.
2
Only the designed lifting and suppon points shall be
used during transpon and piles shall be stored on
adequate suppons located under these lifting points of the
piles. Piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same
length. Paclllng of uniform thickness shall be provided
between piles at the lifting points.
3
During driving, piles shall be adequately supponed
and restrained by means of leaders, trestles, or other
guide arrangements to maintain posit ion and alignment
and to prevent buckling. The Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer regtrdlng the suitability, efficiency and energy of
the driving equipment. Piles shall be driven continuously
until the prescribed set or depth has been reached.
4
The final set of the pile shall be recorded either as the
penetration in millimeters per 10 blows or as the number
of blows reQuired to produce a penetration of 25mm.
5
When a final set is being measured. the following
requirements shall be met
i. The exposed pan of the pile sha ll be in good
condition without damage or distonion.
ii. The dolly and packing, if any, shall be In sound
condition.
iii. The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile
axis and the impact surfaces shall be flat and at
right engles to the pile and hammer axis.
iv. The hammer shall be i n good condition and
operating correctly.
v. The temporary compression of the pile shall be
recorded If required.
6
Piles shall be driven In an approved seque nee to
minimize the detrimental effects of heave end lateral
displacement of the ground. When a pile has risen as a
result of adjacent piles being driven, the contractor sha II
submit to the Engineer proposals for correcting this and
its avoidance in subsequent work.
7
Jf repairs are needed during driving to the head of a
pile, it shall be cut off square at sound concrete, and loose
material remD'v ed by w ire brushing, followed by washing
with w ater. If the pile is to be subjected to funher driving,
the head shall be reple~d by concrete of an approved
class.
B
Piles shall be lengthened, If required. by stripping off
concrete from the reinforcement and lapping, coupling or
welding additional steel in place. Laps shall be at least 40
x bar diameter. Couplers shall be approved by the
Engineer. Steel to be welded shall be free of concrete for
at least 300 mm below the weld. Welded joints shall be
made in accordance with the relevant Clauses of Section 6.
9
Repaired or lengthened piles shall not be driven until
the added concrete has reached the specified
characterist ic strength of the concret e of the pile.
Sultanata ar Oman, SL.>ndocd Spccifoco~ons fOt RO<td Ill Bnc!go C..nsttuccion 201 C
Piling)
10.1.3.6
Steel piles
Piles shall be clearly marked in white paint with their

number end overall length. In addition, each pile shall be
marked at intervals of 250mm along the top of 3m of its
length before being driven.
If steel piles are to be pre-coated, the preparation of
2
surfaces and the application of the coating shall be carried
out by experienced specialist labor.
Surface preparation, priming and protective coats
3
shall conform to the requirements of Section 7 "Paint for
Steelwork".
4
Rolled steel sections shall be within the tolerances
specified in BS 4. For steel piles and proprietary rolled
sections, the deviation from straightness shall not exceed
111 000 of the length of the section.
5
Cylindrical steel piles shall not deviate from
straightness by more than 1/600 for the length up to 1Om
and 1/1000 for lengths greater than 10m. The actual mass
of each section shall be within +5% and -2.5% of the
theoretical mass computed in accordance with Section 6.
6
Sheet piles shall be pitched and supported as a panel
before driving and securely interlocked. Piles shall not
overlap each other and no pile in a panel shall be more
than 1 min advance of another.
length shown in the approved Drawings or as per the

by
the Engineer.
Any
modifications approved
unauthorized extra length cast by the Contractor shall not
be measured for payment.
3
Expendable piles (non-working p~ es) that are
constructed for the purpose of carrying out prelim[ nary
load tests shall be measured in linear meters of actual
Iength, ordered and tested.

measured as provided for above will be paid for at
the unit rates for the various typas of piles in the Bill
of Quantities, which rate shall be full compensation
for supplying and installing piles and for materiels,
labor, equipment, tools, records and other items
10.1.6 Items In the Bill of Quantities

i.
Setting up at each pile location
ii.
Pili ng (type)(length)(size)
~n.m .
iii.
Expendable piles (type)(length)(size)
Un.m.
Sheet piles previously driven shall not be used in the

7
Permanent Works unless approved.
10.2
8
Steel piles shall be driven to a prescribed set or
depth in a sequence approved by the Engineer. Driving
shall be continuous.
10.2.1 Description
9
If approved, piles shall be lengthened by full
penetration butt welding. Lengthening sections shall be of
the same rolling. Longitudinal and spiral seam welding of
cylindrical piles shalt be staggered.
10.1.3.7
Tolerances
Vertical piles shall be constructed to remain within the

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Maximum variation from location: Not more

than 75 mm from design center location.
Out-of-plumb: 1 in 75 deviation or not more than
1.5 percent of pile length, whichever is less.
Concrete cutoff level: Plus 25 mm or minus 75
mm from level indicated.
Bottom area of pile: Not less than 96 percent of
pile area required.
Shaft diameter for drilled pile: Not less than 98
percent or more than 110 percent of shaft
diameter indicated.
10.1 .4 Method of Measurement

Setting up at each pile shall be measured by number.
2
Piles shall be measured in linear meters of actual
length placed in the Permanent Works. The measured
length shall be from the tip to the underside of the
foundation, plus the penetration into the foundation
specified on the Drawings. The payment shall be made for
nr.
Pile Testing
This Sub-section describes requirements for testing

of concrete pilas as follows:
i.
Staticload testing: ASTM Ol143 and ASTM
03689.
ii. Non destructive, sonic or lowstrain integrity
testing: ASTM 05882.
10.2.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit a method statement for
each type of testing specified end provide details of
specific techniques and processes proposed to be adopted
for testing. The method statement shall include details of
equipment and instrumentation, quality control and report
procedures, work program, and any other Information or
special data required by the Engineer.
I.
The method statement shall include details of
loading and arrangement of reaction frame,
reaction piles or anchors. Due consideration
shall be given to the effect of diameters of piles.
socket length, type of bedrock, strain
measurement in steel reinforcement and effect
of dewatering. The structural analysis data shall
ba supervised, signed and sealed by the
qualified professional independent engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2
The Contractor shall submit daily work progress
reports, identifying Individual piles and type of testing
carried out.
l0-5
~~
Minltrv of TtunPQrt & Cunlmunlcntions
OGRLT
~~<riling
3
For non-destructive integrity testing, the Contractor
shall qualify and engage an experienced independent
testing agency, acceptable to the Engineer, who has
specialized in non-destructive testing of driHed piles
similar to that required for the Project.
10.2.3 Execution
10.2.3.1
Preparation
The Contractor shall protect structures, utilities,

sidewalks, pavements, and other focllities from damage
caused by settlement, latera! movement, vibrttlon. and
shaU verify the feasibility of testing the loads
corresponding to each pile diameter, The pile load tests
shDU not be carried out until all shrinkage of the concrete
is complete. The reinforcement in the rock socket shall be
strain-gauged to provide confirmation of the tensile force
reaching the socket.
i.
Oynem1c formulas will not be permitted in place
of toad tests to determine bearing values of the
piles.
ii, Perform and complete testing, and obtain
approval of preliminary plle test before
proceeding with installation of permanent
working piles In the Works.
iii. Select the pile to be tested based on the results
of pile integrity tests and pile construction
records subject to the approval of the Engineer.
iv. The same piles that will be tested in working
compression loading shall be among the
selected piles for the working load test in
tension.
2
Pile Tests: Arrange and perform the following staticload tests on piles as and when directed in the field:
i.
ii.
Axial Tension Static-Load Test: ASTM D 3689.

Axial Compression Static-Load Test: ASTM D
1143.
3
Provide pile reaction frame, equipment and
instrumentation with sufficient reaction capacity to
perform tension tests and compression tests.
On
completion of testing, remove testing structure,
equipment 41nd instrumentation.
i.
Notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of
performing tests.
ii. Provide facilities to enable Engineer to observe
and check testing.
4
Apply test loads by jacking against beams or
equiva!ent reaction system.
i.
Center to center spacing or vertical reaction piles
from a test pile shall be not less than 3 times the
diameter of the test pile or the reaction piles or 2
m whichever is the greater.
5
Test Loads:
Maximum loads to be applied in
maintained load test shall be as follows:
i.
Expendable preliminary piles in tension or
compression toad test: Apply test loads up to 2.5
10-6
ii.
times working toad. The Contractor shall perform

at least two preliminary pile tension load tests
and two preliminary pile compression load tests
to cover the different rock configurations or as
specified on the Drawings or in the Special
Specification.
Working piles in tension or compression load
tests: Apply test loads up to 1,5 times working
load, as specified on the Drawings or in the
Special Specifications.
6
In the event of a pile continuing to displace under
constant load before the maximum test load has been
reached, take readings at 15 minute intervals for a period
of one hour white the load Is being maintained. Unload
the pile in approximately 4 to 6 equal decrements at 15
minute intervals and allow recovaring for 3 hours. Take
one set of displacement readings after each decrement of
load and a further set of readings at the end of the
recovery period.
10.2.3.2
Non-Destructive, Low-Strain Integrity Testing
Non.destructive, integrity testing by sonic logging

shalt be performed on all piles. or as specified on the
Drawings and \special Specification, recorded, interpreted
and reported by an approved experienced independent
testing agency that has specialized In non-destructive
testing of piles similar to that required for the Project.
Submit proposed test result and report formats to the
Engineer for approval before starting integrity testing.
i.
Provide all ava ~able details of the ground
conditions. pile dimensions and construction
method to the testing agency before the
commencement of integrity testing, in order to
facilitate interpretation of test results.
li. Allow a minimum of seven days to elapse after
casting before performing integrity testing on a
pile.
2
Perform tow-strain integrity testing according to
ASTM D5882 by the stress wave method, seismic method
or other method approved by the Engneer, based on the
measurement of the axial sheft point mobility at the pile
head.
i.
Where the method of testing requires the
positioning of sensing equipment on the pi le
head, break down the pile head to expose sound
clean concrete, free from water, taitance, loose,
overs pi It or blinding concrete, and readily
accessible for the purpose of testing.
10.2.3.3
Test Records
General: Maintain accurate test records for each pile,

compiled and attested to by a qualified professional
engineer, and submit to the Engineer at the conclusion of
each pile test. Include the following data:
i.
il.
Iii.
iv.
Project name and number.

Pile number and date of testing.
Pile dimensions.
Type and method of pile testing.
v.
Test results.
Prepare static load test results in the form of

2
tabulated field observations, including the following data:
i.
Time vs. displacement curves.
ii. Time vs. load curves.
iii. Load vs. displacement curves.
iv. Displacement vs. log time for each stage.

i.
ii.
Iii.
Static load testing of expendable piles

(typel {length I (size).
Static load testing of working piles (type)
(length) (size).
nt.
Nondestructlve integrity test (type)
nr.
nr.
The Engineer will review test results and determine if a

pile is acceptab'e, taking into account the acceptable total
and differential displacements of the superstructure, the
foundation geometry, the pile type and the soil conditions,
etc.
10.2.3.4
Static-Load Testing
General: Static-load tests will be used to verify and

confirm design load capacity of piles. Each pile diameter
shall be tested as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
displacement characteristics compared to preliminary test
piles will not be accepted .
2
Non-Destructive Integrity Testing:

i.
II.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
All piles shall be subjected to integrity testing.

Submit preliminary test results to the Engineer
withIn 24 hours of carrying out the tests.
Submit test repons to the Engineer within 10
days of the completion of each phase of testing
Test reports shall contain test results and
conclusions, together with a summary of the
method
of
interpretation
including
all
assumptions,
calibrations,
corrections,
algorithms and derivations used in the analyses.
Where results are presented In a graphical form,
the same scales are to be used consistently
throughout the report and the units on all scales
clearly marked.
If any anomaly in acoustic signal test results
indicates a possible defect In a pile, repor1 such
anomalies to the Engineer immediately.
Demonstrate to the Engineer that the pile is
satisfactory for its intended use or carry out
remedial works to the Engineer's satisfaction.
Grout sonic logging tubes only after piles have
been
demonstrated
to
the
Engineer's
satisfaction, to be satisfactory.

Pile loading tests shall be measured per number.
2
Pile integrity tests shall be measured per number.

The amount of compieted work of "Pile testing will
be paid for at the unit rate in the Bill of Quantities which
rate shall be full compensation for setting up, carrying out,
reponing and for labor, transport, equipment, tools,
materials and other item necessary for the proper
compretion of the work.
10.7
...
Page No.
Ref.
Ref.
Title
11.1
Bearings- General
11.1.1
Description
11 1
11.1.1.1 Definitions
11-1
11.1.1.2 References
11-1
11.1 .1.3 Design and Construction Standards
111
11-2
11.1.1.4 Submittals
11.11.5 Quality Assurance
11 .1.2
Materials
11.1.2.1 Steel
11-1
112
11-2
11.1.2.2 Mater.al Testing
112
11-3
11.1.23 Beddil!g Material
11-3
11.1.3
11.1.3.1 Manufacture
11-3
11.1.3.2 Manufacture Tolerances
113
11-3
11.1.3.3 Testing of Complete Bearings
11-3
11.1.3.4 Packag;ng, Handling and Storage

11.1 3.5 Construction and Installation
11-4
11-4
11.1.4
Method of Mea&Urament
11.1.5
Basis of Payment
11-4
11 5
11.1.6
heme in the Bill of Quantities
11-6
11.2
Elastomeric Bearings
11-6
11.2.1
Deectlptlon
11-6
11.2.2
Materia Ia
11-6
11.2.3
Construction RequlremenU
11-5
Title
11.3.2.7 Polvtetrafluorethylene (PTFEI Sheet

and Strip
11.3.3
11.3.3.1 General
11.3.3.2 Sampl1ng and Testing
11.3.3.3 lnstallati011
11,3.(
11-8
11-8
11.4
Bridge Expansion Joints
Description
11.4-1
11.4.1.1 Scope
11-8
119
11.4.1.5 Oualoty Assurance
11-9
11.4.2
Materials
11.4.2.2 Asphaltle Plug Joints
11-9
11.4.3
11.4.3.1 General
11.4.3.2 Nosi..gs
11.4.3.3 lnsta 1ation
11 9
11 9
11- 10
Method of MaiiBUrement
11-10
11.4.5
Baal of Pavmant
11.4.6
ltama In the Bill of Quantitlea
11-10
11 10
Joint Seals and Fillers
11.3
Pot Bearings
11-6
11.3.1
Deec:ripelon
11-8
11.6.1
11.5.2
11.3.2
Material
11 6
Deleriptlo n
Materials
Construc:tion Requirement.
Method of Me118Urament. Basis
of P..,mant and Bill of Quantities
116
11-9
11.4.4
11.6
11-6
11-9
11 9
11-5
11.3.2.5 Sealant
11.3.2.6 Sealing Rings
11-9
11.4.2.1 General
Item In the Bill of Ouantitle1
11-6
11-8
11-8
11.4.1.3 References
11.4. 1.4 Submittals
11 6
11-6
11-8
114.1.2 Types of J oints
116
11.3.2.4 Elastomeric Rotationai.Eiement
11-B
11-8
Ba51a of Pavment
11-6
11-7
Item In the Bill of Quantltlea
Baals of Pavment
11 6
116
11.3.5
11.2.6
11.2.8
11.3.2.2 Steel
11.3.2.3 Stainless Steel
11-6
11-e
11.3.6
11.2.4
11.3.2.1 General
Page No.
11.5.3
11.5.4
11.6
Bridge Parapets and Railings
11.6.1
11-6.2
Description
Matenals
11.6.2.1 Materials of Construction
11~10
11 10
11-10
11-11
1111
11-11
11-11
11-11
l111
Ref.
11,6.2.2
11.6.2.3
1 1.6.2.4
11, 6.2.5
11.6.3
11.6."
11.6.5
11.6.6
Title
Aluminum Alloy
Structural Steel
Reinforced Concrete
Anchorage System
Constructfon Requirements
S.ala of Payment
Item In the Bill of Ouantitle
Page No.
11-11
11 11
11-11
11-11
11-11
11-11
1M2
11-12
Sultannto of Orna11. 5rafldord Speclfiulions lot Rood &
idgt ComlructiQn 2010
Bridge Accessorie s )
11.1
11.1.1
Bearings- General
Description
This Sub-section describes the requirements for

designing, testing, furnishing and installing replaceable
bridge bearings as shown on the Drawings or in the
Special Specification or as required to complete the work.
11,1.1,1
Definitions
accommodates movement by rolling of one surface with

respect to the other. It consists essentially of one or more
steel rollers between upper and lower plates.
14 Rocker bearing: A bearing that carries vertical load by
direct contact between two metal surfaces and that
accommodates movement by rocking of one surface with
respect to the other. It consists essentially of a curved
surface in contact with a flat or curved surface and
constrained to prevent relative horizontal movement. The
curved surface may be cylindrical or spherical.
Bearing: A structural device that transmits loads

while facilitating translation and/or rotation.
15 Longitudinal: Parallel with the main span direction of

the bridge.
2
Elastomer: A compound containing natural or
chloroprene rubber with properties similar to those of
rubber.
16 Transversa: The horizontal dlrection normal to the

longitudinal axis of the bridge.
3
Elastomeric bearing: A bearing comprising a block of
elastomer that may be reinforced internally with steel
plates.
Plain pad bearing: An unreinforced elastomeric
4
bearing. It provides limited translation and rotation.
5
Strip bearing: A plain pad bearing for which the
length is at least ten times the width.
6
Laminated elastomeric bearing or steelreinforced
elastomeric bearing: A bearing made from alternate
laminates of steel and elastomer bonded together during
vulcanization. Vertical loads are carried by compression of
the elastomer. Movements parallel to the reinforcing
layers and rotations are accommodated by deformation of
the elastomer.
7
Pot bearing: A bearing consisting essentially of a
metal piston supported by a disc of unreinforced
elastomer that Is confined within a metal cylinder.
Rotations are accommodated by deformation of the
elastomer. It may be movable, guided, unguided or fixed.
Movement is accommodated by sliding of polished
stainless steel on PTFE.
B
Disc bearing: A bearing that accommodates rotation
by deformation of a single elastomeric disc molded from a
urethane compound. It may be movable, guided,
unguided or fixed. Movement is accommodated by sliding
of polished stainless steel on PTFE.
9
PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene): Also known as Teflon.
10 Fixed bearing: A bearing that prevents differential

translation of abutting structural elements. It may or may
not provide for differential rotation.
11 Movable bearing: A bearing that facilitates
differential horizontal translation of abutting structural
elements in a longitudinal and/or lateral direction. It may
or may not provide for rotation. Translation may be
constrained to a specified direction by guide bars.
12 Sliding bearing: A bearing that accommodates
movement by translation of one surface relative to
another. Translation may be constrained to a specified
direction by guide bars.
13 Roller bearing: A bearing that carries venice I load by
direct contact between two meta I surfaces and that
17 Translation: Horizontal movement of the bridge in

the longitudinal or transverse direction.
18 Rotation about the longitud!nal axis: Rotation about
an axis parallel to the main span direction of the bridge.
19 Rotation a bout the transverse axis: rotation about an
axis parallel to the transverse axis of the bridge.
11.1.1.2
References
American Association of State Highway and

AASHTO 2008
Specifications, 2"d Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHTO 2008
11.1.1.3
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
Specifications, 3"' Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
Design and Construction Standards
Bearings shall be designed in accordance with the

latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, SubSection 14.7, as complemented or
modified herein.
2
Bearings shall be constructed as specified in the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications, Section 18, as complemented or modified
herein.
3
Alternatively, the bearings may be designed and
constructed in accordance with Eurocoda as described in
the following documents, as complemented or modified
herein.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
BS EN 13371 Structural Bearings Part 1:

General Design Rules.
BS EN 13372 Structural Bearings Part 2: 51 iding
Elements.
Elastomeric Sea rings.
BS EN 13375 Structural Bearings Part 5: Pot
Bearings.
Protection.
Inspection and Maintenance.
111
~~
MJnltry or Transport & CornrnunlcDtlon DGflt.T
/"'-~<:Bridge Accessories
vli, BS EN 1337-11 Structural Bearings - Pan 11:

Transport, Storage and Installation.
quality and performance of bearings and

ancillary items.
Records of an installation trial for each type
of bearing in accordance with the method of
installation which shall take full account of
restrictions that may be Imposed on the
operations by the location of the bearings in
the Works. A photographic record of the
trial shall be made. Subject to the successful
completion of the trial the method of
installation shall not subsequently be varied
unless approved by the Designer.
4
Definitions of bear>ng types and bearing components
shall be In accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, Third Edition, 2004, Section 14 2. Relevant
definitions are reponed in Paragraph 11.1.1.1.
Detailed specifications for elastomeric bearings and

Pot Bearings are given in Sub-Sections 11.2 and 11.3,
these two types being the most common and most
suitable types.
6
Other types of bearings shall follow AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Section 14 for design, and
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications for
construction requirements, as follows:
i.
Disc Bearings
ii. Rocker and Roller Bearings
iii.. Spherical Bearings
11.1.1.4
ii.
Details of protective coatings with data sheets

and painting drawings showing the venue and
timing of the application of shop and site applied
coatings.
iii.
Method statements.
iv.
Evidence that the manufacturer has at least ten

years experience in manufacturing bearings
comparable with those required for the Project.
and that the proposed types of bearings have
been incorporated in structures in similar
environmental conditions.
v.
Design calculations.
vi.
Construction drawings of any additional or

revised reinforcement and modified concrete
deta~s and/or steelwork details required at the
abutting structural elements.
vii. Details of fixings to superstructures and

substructures including tolerance requirements.
viii. Program of manufacture. testing and delivery,
including the name, address and accreditation of
the testing laboratory.
ix.
Samples:
All samples required to perform the tests
specified for the verilicetion of m aterial
112
Certificates for all materials used in the

manufacture of bearings shall be obtained
from the manufacturers or suppliers. These
shall state the type and grade of material,
the relevant standard and the results of all
tests carried out.
Submittals
Working drawings as dafined in AASHTO LRFO

Bridge Construction Specifications Article 18.1.1.
The drawings shall. additionally, show trans:t
restraints and lifting points as necessary.
Certificates (not older than 12 monthsl:

Certificates as specified in the standards in
respect of the specified materials.
Sub-Section 18.3
Sub-Section 18.4
Sub-Section 18.5
The Contractor shall submit the following to be

approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication of the
bearings. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of
any responsibi~ty under the contract documents for the
successful completion of the work.
I.
x.
xi.
Test Reports:
Reports of the specified material tests.
Reports of the specified tests on bearings,
xii. Replacement procedures.

xiii. Inspection end Maintenance Plan.
11.1.1.5
Quality Assurance
Codes and Standards:

Construction Specifications.
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
2
The Contractor shall ensure that direct site
supervision of the first of each type of bearing is provided
by an experienced technical representative of the
manufacturer and thereafter, by competent persons who
have been trained in the proper installation of bearings.
11.1.2
Materials
11.1.2.1
Steel
1
Unless otherwise specified, rolled steel shall conform
to AASHTO M 270MIM 270 (ASTM A 709/A 709M), Grade
36 (Grade 2501, and shall cause no adverse electrolytic or
chemical reaction with other components of the bearing
and sha II be free of all rust and mill scale.
2
Unless otherwise specified, steel laminates shall be
made from rolled mild steel conforming to AASHTO M
270M/M 270 (ASTM A 709/A 709MI, Grade 36 (Grade 250),
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, or equivalent. Laminates shall
have a minimum nominal thickness of (1.6 mm). Hores In
plates for manufacturing purposes shall not be permitted
unless they have been accounted for in the design and are
in accordance with the contract documents.
3
Cast steel shall satisfy the requirements of ASTM
A802/A802M and be free of all blow-holes and impurities
larger than 3.2 mm the inside wall of the pot In pot
bearings and the contact surface of metal rocker or roller
S"'llnnnco <>I Onuon. SW"IIIrd Spocjfitwlions l0< Rood & Bridge Con11tucln~n 2010
Bridge Accessories)
bearings shall be free of blow-holes or impurities of any

size.
4
Forged steel shall satisfy the requirements of ASTM
A 788.
5
When nonshrink mortar or grout is specified, a
nonshrink admixture of a type approved by the Engineer
shall be used.
6
Only sufficient water shall be used to permit placing
and packing.
Stainless steel shall conform to the requi remenlll of

ASTM A167, Type304 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304
and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.91 mm and a
surface finish in the finished bearing better than or equal
to 0.2 IJm. Stainless steel in contact with PTFE sheet shall
be polished to a finish no less than 0.50 IJm.
7
Mixing shall be done by either hand methods or with
rotating paddle-type mixing machines and shall be
continued until all ingredienlll are thoroughly mixed. Once
mixed, mortar or grout shall not be retempared by the
addition of water and shall be placed within one hour.
6
Where ASTM is referred, equivalent specifications,
Eurocode for example, may be accepted.
11.1.3
11.1.3.1
Manufacture
11.1.2.2
Materiel Testing
Material certification tests to determine the physical

and chemical properties of all materia Is shall be
conducted in accordance with the appropriate
specification governing the material. The test certificates
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
2
Material friction test for sliding surfaces shall be
conducted either on samples taken from the same batch of
materials as those used in the prototype bearings, or on
finished bearings. The testing procedure shall be in
Specifications Article 18.1.5.2.3. The bearing or specimen
shall show no appreciable sign of wear, bond failure, or
other dafects.
Long-term deterioration test shall either be

conducted on samples or on a pair of bearings placed
back-to-beck. The testing procedure shall be In accordance
Article 18.1.5.2. 7. The following shall be cause for rejection
of the bearing:
i.
Damage visible to the naked eye on disassembly

of the bearing, such as excessive wear, cracks, or
splits in the material.
ii.
A coefficient of friction which exceeds two-thirds

the value used in design.
11.1.2.3
Bedding Material
Bedding material shall be of the type specified in the

contract documents or as ordered or approved by the
Engineer and shall be Installed to provide full bearing on
contact areas. Grout and mortar used for filling under
bearing or masonry plate shell conform to the
requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Sub-Section 8.14.
2
Materials for mortar and grout shall conform to the
requiremenlll of Sub-Section 5. 1 as complemented and/or
modified herein.
3
When the width or depth of the void to be filled is
less than 20 mm, the grading of send for use in the grout
shall be modified so that ell material passes the 2.36 mm
sieve.
4
Unless otherwise specified or ordered by the
Engineer, the proportion of cement to sand shall be one to
one.
The manufacturer shall certify that each bearing

satisfies the requirements of the contract documents and
this Specification, and shall supply the Engineer a certified
copy of material test results. Each bearing shall be marked
in indelible ink or flexible paint. The marking shall consist
of the location in the structure, the orientation, the order
number, Jot number, bearing Identification number, and
elastomer type and grade number. Unless otherwise
specified in the contract documents, the marking shall be
on the face that is visible after erection of the bridge.
Bearing assemblies shall be preassembled in the shop by
the suppJi er and checked for proper completeness and
geometry before shipping to the site.
2
The design of the bearing shall include necessary
provision to feci Iit ate the replacement of the bearing with
minimum interruption to traffic. The Special Specification
defines, where appropriate, the maximum lifting of bridge
decks to remove existing and install new bearings.
3
Performance for the system for protection against
corrosion shall not be less than 15 years to first
maintenance unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents. The system for corrosion protection shall be
subject to test in accordance with Table 1, Clause 5.3, BS
EN 13379 or other such criteria as may be additionally
recommended by the corrosion protection system
manufacturer as being adequate to demonstrate the ability
of the protection system to achieve life to first
maintenance as specified for the steelwork.
11.1.3.2
Manufacture Tolerances
Bearings shall be fabricated within the tolerances of

Table 18.1.4.21 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications. The Special Specification defines, where
appropriate, the class of tolerances A, B or C.
11 .1.3.3
Testing of Complete Bearings
Dimension Check: the dimensions of the bearings

shall be checked in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Article 18.1.5.2.4.
2 Clearance Test: in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Construction Specifications Article 18.1.5.2.5.
3
Bearing Friction Test: in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Article 18.1.5.2.6.
11~
~~
Milnltry of Tronapgf"t & Communlcadona
DGfli.T
~~<.::Bridge Accessories
In addition to the compression of 100 percent of the full

service dead load plus live load, the bearings shall be
checked for 50 percent and BO percent of the full service
dead load plus live load.
4
Bearing Horizontal Force Capacity: in accordance
Article 18.1.5.2.8. Failure or excessive deflection of any of
the components shall be cause for rejection.
Vertical Load Test: bearings shall be tested for
5
vertical load equal to one and a half (1.5) times the full
service dead load plus live load. The test shall be applied
in five equal increments and the test load held for one (1)
hour or until deformation ceases, whichever is the greater.
The load shall then be removed In equal decrements as
the load increments. A second cycle of load increment and
decrement shall be applied with the maximum test load
being held for (30) minutes. The load deformation graph
shall be plotted for both load cycles and the set
determined. If the set exceeds a value deemed to be
excessive by the Engineer, the Engineer may require all
bearings to be pre-loaded before installation. At the end of
the vertical load test, the bearing shall be dismantled and
the bearing surfaces examined. Damage visible to the
naked eye on disassembly of the bearing, such as
excessive wear, cracks, or splits in the material shall be
cause for rejection.
If one bearing of the sample fails, all the bearings of
6
that lot shall be rejected, unless the manufacturer elects to
test each bearing of the lot at his expense. In lieu of this
procedure. the Engineer may require every bearing of the
lot to be tested.
7
Tasting of the complete bearings shall be at the
Contractor's expense and will be witnessed by
representatives of the Engineer and the Employer. The
cost for providing faeii;Ues to the Engineer or his
representaUve for witnessing the test shail be borne by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure access to the
manufacturer plant for the Engineer's representatives.
8
The Engineer may waive any or all of the beari ng
tests.
11.1.3.4
Packaging, Handling and Storage
Prior to shipment from the point of manufacture,

bearings shall ba packaged in such a manner to ensure
that during shipment end storage, the bearings will be
protected against damage from handling, weather, or any
normal hazard. Each completed bearing shall have Its
components clearly Identified, be securely bolted.
strapped, or otherwise fastened to prevent any relative
movement, and be marked on its top as to location and
orientation in each structure in the Project.
All bearing devices and components shall be stored
2
at the work site in an area that provides protection from
environmental and physical damage. When installed,
bearings shall be clean and free of all foreign substances.
3
Dismantling of bearings at the site shall not be done
unless absolutely necessary for inspection or installation.
11-4
Bearings shall not be opened or dismantled at the site

except under the direct supervision of or with the approval
ofthe manufacturer.
11.1.3.5
Construction and Installation
Bearings shall be installed by qualified personnel to

the positions shown in the contract documents. Bearings
shall be set at time of installation to the dimensions and
offsets prescribed by the manufacturer. by the Engineer,
and as shown in the contract documents and shall be
adjusted as necessary to take into account the
temperature and future movements of the bridge due to
temperature changes, release of falsework, and shortening
due to prestressing.
2
Each bridge bearing shan be located within :t:3 mm of
Its correct position in the horizontal plane and oriented to
within an angular tolerance of 1 degree. Guided beerings
and bearings which rotate about only one axis shall be
oriented in the direction specified in the contract
documents to within a tolerance of 0.25 degree. All
bearings except those which are placed in opposil"'g pairs
shall be set horizontal to within an angular tolerance of
0.25 degree, and must have full and even contact with
load plates, where these exist. The superstructure
supported by the bearing shall be set so that, under full
dead load, its slope lies within an angulartolerance of 0.25
degree of the design value. Any departure from this
tolerance shall be corrected by means of a tapered plate or
by other means approved by the Engineer. If shim stacks
are needed to level the bearing, they shall be removed
after grouting and before the weight of the superstructure
acts on the bearing.
3
Metallic bearing assemblies not embedded in the
concrete shall be bedded on the concrete with a filler or
fabric material as specified in Paragraph 11.1 .2.3.
4
Where bearings are seated directly on steel work. the
supporting surface shall be machined so as to provide a
level and planar surface upon which the bearing is placed.
5
Bearings or masonry plates which rest on steel
supports may be directly installed on the supports,
provided the support is flat within a tolerance of 0.002
times the nominal dimension and is sufficiently rigid so as
not to deform under specified loads.
11.1.4
Measurement of bridge bearings shall be by the

number of each type of bearing furnished, installed,
completed in place and accepted. Bearings of the same
type but of different load or movement capacities shall be
measured separately.
2
Bearing tests, installation trials, bedding, nuts and
bolts, grout injection where appticable, and temporary
restraint of bearings where necessary due to the sequence
of deck construction, measuring devices for movement
and/or load, as well as plinths, downstands, masonry
plates ani:! all elements between the substructure and
superstructure shall not be measured for direct payment
Suhftnoto of On'lon. Stondrd 5pK!fintionJ '"' llo.1d &
Bridvo Comtruc;t!O<
Bridge Accessories)
but shall be considered as subsidiary works the costs of

which shall be deemed to be included in the rates for
bridge bearings.
4
Short-duration compression tests on bearings shall
be as described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 18.2.5.6 except that the compression
load shall be 200 percent of the rated servce load.
11.1.5
Basis of Payment

measured es provided above, wilt be paid for at the rete
for each type of "Bridge Bearingw as specified in the Bill of
Quantities. which rate shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, too.s, supp1ies
and other items necessary for proper completion of the
Work.
11.1.6

i)
11.2
11.2.1
(nr.)
Elastomeric Bearings
Description
Elastomeric bearings as defined herein shall Include

unreinforced pads (consisting of elastomer only) and
reinforced bearings with steel laminates.
Design of steel-reinforced elastomeric bearings shall

be in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications Method B defined in Article 14.7.5 or
Method A defined in Article 14.7.6 where the prov:sions of
the appropriate article are used.
3
Bearings shall be constructed as specified in the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications, Section 18, as complemented or modified
herein.
Alternatively elastomeric bearings may be designed

and constructed in accordance with Eurocode BS EN 13373 Structural Bearings- Part 3: 8aslomerlc Bearings.
11.2.2
Where elastomeric bearings are equipped with

sliding surface of polytetrafluorethylene (PTFEI and
stainless steel mating surface, the PTFE shall be as
specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 18.8.2 and the stainless steel as
specified in Article 11.1.2.1 of these Specifications.
11.2.3
Bridge bearing (type), vertical and
horizontal loads (kN), movement (mm)
Shear testing on finished bearings shall be as

described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 1B.2.5.B at constant compression
loads of 50 and 100 percent of the rated service load.
Materials
The raw elastomer shall be either virgn Neoprene

(polychloroprene) or virgin natural rubber (polyisoprene)
satisfying the testing requirements in Tables 18.2.3.1-1
and 18.2.3.12 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications. Test requirements may be interpolated for
intermediate hardness.
Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents,

the elastomer shall be Grade 0, 60-durometer.
3
Materials for elastomeric bearings and the finished
bearings themselves shall be subjected to the tests
described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Article 18.2.5. Material tests shall be In
accordance with either Table 18.2.3.1 1 or Table 18.2.3.1-2,
as appropriate. Frequency of testing shall be as specified
in Article 18.2.5.2.
Installation of elastomeric bearings shall be in

Specifications Article 18.2.6.
2
Where elastomeric bearings are equipped with
sl'ding surface of PTFE and stainless steel mating surface.
the fabrication requirements shall be as specified in
AASHTO LRFO Bridge Construction Specifications Arttcle
18.8.3.
11.2.4
Measurement of elastomeric bearings shall be by the

number of each type of bearing furnished, i nstalled,
completed in place and accepted. Bearings of the same
type but of different load capacities shall be measured
separately.
2
Bearing tests, installation trials, bedding, grout
injection where applicable, measuring devices for
movement andlor load. as well as plinths, downstends,
masonry plates and all elements between the substructure
and superstructure shall not be measured for direct
payment but shall be considered as subsidiary works the
costs of which shell be deemed to be included in the rates
for bridge bearings.
11.2.5
Basis of Payment
1.
measured as provided above. will be paid for at the rate
for each type of elastomeric bearing as specified in the Bill
of Quantities, which rate shall be full compensation for
furnishing ell materials, labor, equipment. tools, supplies
and other items necessary for proper completion of the
Work.
11.2.6
II Elastomeric Bearing (type), vertical and

horizontal loads (kN)
(nr.)
~~
Mlnitry of Transport & CotnmunicDlions
OGftLT
/'~<:::Bridge Accessories
11.3
Pot Bearings
11.3.1
Description
il.
11 .3.2.6 Sealant
Pot bearings shall :

i.
ii.
be adequate for the design loads and

movements shown in the contract documents or
specified.
be tested at the appropriate level.
2
Bearings shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, Section 14.7, as complemented or modified
herein.
3
Bearings shall be constructed as specified In the
latest edition of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Constructlon
Specifications, Section 1e. as complemented or modified
herein.
4
A"ternatively, the bearings may be designed and
constructed in accordance with BS EN 13375 Structural
Bearings - Part 5: Pot Bearings, as complemented or
modified herein.
5
All pot bearings including sliding bearing shall be
attached to the substructure and superstructure by
mechanieal fiXings or other approved methods.
6
The capacity of bolts fixing the bearings to the
substructure and superstructure shall be adequate to
resist solely the entire horizontal force w ithout
consideration of any friction forces.
11.3.2
Materials
1 1.3.2,1
General
Steel
1.
All steel except stainless steel components of the pot
and disc bearing shall conform to the requirements of
Section 6 for carbon steel or high-strength, low.alloy
structural steel for welding.
11.3.2.3
Stainless Steel
Stainless steel shall conform to the requirements of

Paragraph 11.1.2.1 item (51 of this Specification.
11.3.2.4
Elastomeric Rotational Element
The elastomeric rotational element used in the

eonstruction of pot bearings shall contain only virgin,
crystallization-resistant
polych loroprene
(Neoprene),
AASHTO M251 (ASTM 04014) or virgin natural
polyisoprene (natural rubber), AASHTO M 251 as the raw
polymer. The physical properties of Neoprene and natural
rubber shall conform to the standards stated herein with
modifications as follows:
i.
11-e
The Shore A durometer hardness shall be 50

10 points.
The elastomer shall be lubricated between the steel

pot and the top steel bearing plate with a silicon grease
which does not react chemically with the elastomer and
does not alter its properties within the range of
environmental conditions expected at the site or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
11.3.2.6
Sealing Rings
1
The sealing rings between the steel piston and the
elastomeric rotational element of pot bearings shall be
made of brass conforming to ASTM B 36/ B 36M for rings
of rectangular cross-section and ASTM B 121 I B 121M for
circular sections. The Engineer may, at his discretion,
approve other sealing ring material on the basis of test
evidence conforming to Article 14.7.4.5 of the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specificalfons.
11.3.2.7
Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) Sheet and Strip
PTFE sheet and strip requirements for pot bearings

shall conform to the provisions of AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specifications Article 18.8.1 or BS EN 1337-2
Sub-Section 5.2.
11.3.2.8 Other Sliding Materials
1
Other sliding materials shalt conform to the provisions of
BS EN 13372 Section 5.
All materials shall be new and unused, with no

reclaimed mate"'al incorporated in the finished bearing.
11.3.2.2
Samples for compression set tests shall be

prepared using a Type 2 die.
.:t
11.3.3
11.3.3.1
General
Comply with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction

Specifications as complemented or modlfled herein.
2
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with
written notification 30 days prior to the start of bearing
fabrication.
3
The finish of the mold used to produce the
e!astomeric rotational element shall conform to good
machine shop practice.
4
The PTFE sheet shall be bonded to a gritblasted steel
substrate using an epoxy resin adhesive under controlled
factory conditions in accordance with the instructions of
the adhesive manufacturer. The PTFE sheet shall be
recessed into its steel substrate for at least one half of its
th1ckness. If on a vertical surface, the PTFE sheet may be
mechanically fastened to the substrate. The anachment of
the PTFE sheet to its substrate shall be done in accordance
with the manufacturing requirements of AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Construction Specifications Article 18 8.2,
"Materialsw.
5
After fabrication, steel surfaces exposed to the
atmosphere, except stainless steel surfaces, shall be shop
painted or coated to protect against corrosion as specified
SUitanato of Omon. Ston.lrd Spoofic.uor., fo< Roo<~ & Bridg. Comtruct:g,
Bridge Accessories)
in Section 7. Surface preparation shall be as AASHTO

LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications Article 18.3.3.1.
i.
ii.
iii.
Stainless steel sheet shall be attached to a steel

substrate with an approved epoxy to ensure complete
contact and then sealed with a continuous seal weld. All
welding shall conform to and all welders shall be qualified
in accordance with the requirements of the current
AASHTO/AWS 01.5 M I 01.5 Bridge Welding Code. Except
as noted, all bearing surfaces of steel plates shall be
finished or machined flat within 0.0008 mmlmm. Out-of
flatness greater than 0.0008 mm/mm on any plate shall be
cause for rejection. The bottom surfaces of lower bearing
plates (masonry plates) designed to rest on bearing pads
shall not exceed an out-of-flatness value of 0.005 mmlmm.
Oxygen-cut surfaces shall not exceed a surface roughness
value 25 m, as defined by ANSI B 46. 1.
Gross bearing dimensions shall have a tolerance in

accordance with Paragraph 11.1.3 .2. of this specification
8
Every bearing shall have the project identification
number, lot number, and individual bearing number as
well as its location on the structure indelibly marked with
ink on a side that will be visible after erection.
9
Fabrication Requirements for the Pot:

i.
ii.
iii.
2
Material Certification Tests: The manufacturer shall
select, at random, samples for material certification tests
as defined in Paragraph 11.1.2.2 of this Specification,
bearings from completed lots of bearings for testing. The
manufacturer shall complete the required testing and
determine compliance with this specification before
submitting the lot(s) for quality-assurance Inspection,
testing, and acceptance consideration. The results of the
manufacturer's tests shall be furnished to the Engineer.
Certification shall be provided for all elastomeric elements.
Their material properties shall satisfy the requirements
specified and the tests described in Paragraph 11.1.3.3.
Additional tests may be required by the Engineer.
3
Testing by the Engineer's instruction:

i.
The pot shall be manufactured by welding or

machining from a single piece of plate.
The piston shall be machined from a single piece
of steel. The outside diameter of the piston shall
be no more than 0.760 mm less than the inside
diameter of the pot at the level of interface
between the piston and elastomeric rotational
element. The sides of the piston shall be beveled
to facilitate rotation.
If guides are used, they shall be attached to the
piston by welding or bolting.
11.3.3.2
For CoeffiCient of Friction

production bearing per lot.
Test:
Properties
Physical
Rotational
Element:
element per lot.
Efastomeric
elastomeric
of
one
one
Physical Properties of PTFE Sheet: one

250x400 mm sheet of PTFE material per
project.
Bearing Horizontal Force Capacity as
Paragraph 11.1.3.3: one production bearing
per lot for each of (a) fixed type and (b)
guided sliding type (guide test).
Vertical Load Test as Paragraph 11.1.3.3:
one production bearing per lot of each type.
ii.
At least one elastomeric element shall be tested

per lot of bearings. All exterior surfaces of
sampled production bearings shall be smooth
and free from irregularities or protrusions that
might interfere with testing procedures.
iii.
A minimum of 30 days shall be allowed for

inspection, sampling, and quality-assurance
testing of production bearings and component
materials.
iv.
The Engineer may select, at random, the

required sample bearing(s) from completed lots
of bearings and samples of the alastomeric and
PTFE materials for quality-assurance testing.
Lot Size: Sampling, testing, and acceptance

consideration shall be made on a lot basis. A lot shall be
the smallest number of bearings as determined by the
following criteria:
The manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer

the required number of complete bearings and
component samples to perform quality
assurance testing on the expense of the
Contractor In accordance with the following:
For Proof Load Test: one production bearing
per lot.
10 Fabrication Requirements for Sealing Rings: The

sealing rings shall be recessed into the elastomeric disc
and shall fit snugly against the pot wall. Rings of
rectangular cross-section shall be installed with their gaps
equally spaced round the circumference. The gap between
the ring and the wall shall nowhere exceed 0.25 mm. The
gap between the cut ends of the ring shall not exceed 1.25
mm.
11 Fabrication Requirements for Elastomeric Rotational
Element: The elastomeric pad shall have the same
nominal diameter as the pot. The elastomeric pad shall be
individually molded or cut from sheet and shall be made
of no more than three separate layers. of which none may
have a nominal thickness of less than 13 mm. The sealing
ring recess depth shall be the same as the total ring
thickness if rectangular rings are used.
Shall not exceed a single contract document or

project quantity.
Shall not exceed 25 bearings.
Shall consist of those bearings of the same type
regardless of load capacity. Bearing types may
be fixed or sliding types. Guided and non-guided
sliding bearings shall be considered to be a
single type.
111
"-./
M'nlatry of Trcnaport & Commun c11Hona
OGRLT
~~<::Bridge Accessories
v.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of transponing

all samples from the place of manufacture to the
test site and back or, if epplicable, to the Site.
Performance Characteristics for Proofl oad Test:
i.
Critical dimensions shall include the r;learance

between the piston and the pot and shall be
verified by the clearance test described in
Paragraph 11. 1.3.3.
ii..
A long-term deterioration test, as described in

Paragraph 11 .1.2.2 item (31 shall be performed
on one beari ng of each lot of pot bearings with
the sealing rings w ith rectangular crosssection
and sealing rings with circular cross-sections.
The bearing shall be load-tested to 150 percent
of the specified rated capacity at 0.02 rad. If the
size of the bearing prohibits adequate testing
with available equipment, the Engineer may
agree to test a prototype bearing with
comparable requirements.
jij.
During the test, the steel bearlng plate and steel

piston shall maintain continuous and uniform
contact for the duration of the test.
iv.
The bearing shall be visually examined both

during the test and upon disassembly after the
test. Any resultant visual defects, such as
extruded or deformed elastomer. or PTFE;
damaged seals or limiting rings; evidence of
metal-to-metal contact between the pot wall and
the top plate; or cracked steel, shall be cause for
rejection of the lot.
11.3.3.3
Installation
1.
Pot bearings shall be installed in accordance with the
contract documents and on the approved working
drawings. Upon final installation of the bearings, the
Engineer. In the presence of the manufacturer's
representative, shall inspect the beating components to
assure that they are level and parallel to within 2.6 mm/m.
Any deviations i n excess of the allowed tolerances shall be
corrected.
11.3.4
Measurement of pot bearings shall be by the number

of each type of bearing furnished, Installed, completed In
place and accepted. Bearings of the same type but of
d ifferent load capacities shall be measured separately.
2
Bearing tests, installation trials, bedding and epoxy
l njection where applicable shall not be measured for direct
payment but shall be considered as subsidiary works the
costs of whlt;h shan be deemed to be included in the rates
for bridge bearings,
11.3.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and ec:cepted work

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the rate
for each type of pot Bearing" as specified in the Bill of
Quant ities, which rate shall be full compensation for
furnishing aU materials. labor, equipment, tools, suppli es
end other Items necessary for proper completion of the
Work.
Sliding Coefficient of Friction Test:
i.
ii.
Hi..
For all guided and non'{Juided sliding type

bearings, the sliding coefficient of friction shall
be measured at the bearing's design capacity in
accordance with Paragraph 11.1.3.3 and
additionally on the fifth and fiftieth cycles. at a
sliding speed of 25 mm per min.
The sliding coefficient of friction shall be
calculated as the horizontal load required to
maintain continuous slidlng of one bearing,
divided by the bearing's vertical design capacity.
The test results shall be evaluated as follows:
The measured sliding coefficients of friction
shall not exceed three percent.
The bearing will be visually examined both
during and after the test. Any resultant
visual defects, such as bond failure, physical
destruction. cold flow of PTFE to the point of
debonding. or damaged components. shall
be cause for rejection of the lot.
Bearings not damaged during
the
testing of performance characteristics may
be used In the work.
11.3.6
il
11.4
Item In the Bill of Quantities

Pot Bearing (typel, vertical and horizontal
l oads (kNI. movement (mml
(nr.)
Bridge Expansion Joints
11.4.1
Description
11.4.1 .1
Scope
This Sub-section describes furnishing materials and

installation of expansion joints for bridge decks, ail as and
where shown on the Drawi ngs.
11A.1.2
Types of Joints
The joint construction shall be as described on the

Drawings and mey be one of the following types:
Buried joint within the bridge deck
Elastomeric sealed joints
Modullll' joints using neoprene box or bind
sections
Metallic finger joi nts
Asphaltic plug joint.
2
Unless otherwi se shown on t he Drawings, expansion
joints shillI be fully waterproof type.
H-8
Sultoncoto af Omon, St4ndard S~!iu!ioo, lor l\o4d e. Bridg Comtr~on 2010
Bridge Accessories)
3
The bedding and nosings of expansion joints shall be
considered Integral parts of the joint and the joint
manufacturer shall be responsible for the supply of all
constituent materials required for bedding end nosing of
joints et the time of supplying the joint.
11.4.1.3
References

AASHT02008
AASHT0200B
11.4.1.4
Highway

Specifications, 2"d Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
Design
Specifications, 3n1 Edition, 2004, 2008
Interim Revisions.
Submittals
2
The Contractor shall furnish detailed drawings of the
joint and method of assembly and installation procedure
for the approval of the Engineer.
3
Material certificates. signed by manufacturers and
Contractor shall be provided, certifying that the joints are
designed in accordance w'th AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications or equivalent standard end AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Construction Specifications or equivalent and that
they comply with the requirements of this specification.
Quality Assurance
Codes and Standards:

Construction Specifications.
AASHTO
LRFD
Bridge
2
The Contractor shall ensure that direct site
supervision of the first of each type of joint I s provided by
an experienced technical
representative of the
manufacturer and thereafter, by competent persons who
have been trained in the proper installation of expansion
joints.
11.4.2
Materials
11.4.2.1
General
Storage of joints, jointing materials, sealants and

other associated items shall be in accordance with the
2
The elastomeric, metallic, bituminous, cementitious
end resin based components used in the joint construction
shall all be strictly in accordance with the description in
the contract documents and the manufacturer's
specifications.
11.4.2.2
Asphaltic Plug Joints
Binder:
The binder used in the construction of an

asphaltic plug joint must have the following
characteristics:
remain flexible in cold conditions,
be stable in hot conditions,
be flow resistant.
ii.
The following tests shall be performed by an

approved laboratory at the temperatures
expected In use.. and a test certificate issued
before the asphaltic plugs are delivered to Site:
Extension Test,
Softening Point Test,
Flow Resistance Test.
and
If the type of expansion joints for a particular

application is not shown in the contract documents, the
Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, a
report well In advance, identifying the type of expansion
joint he intends to use for every structure.
11.4.1.5
i.
2
Aggregate: The aggregate shall be single-sized 20
mm aggregate to BS 63. It shall be a clean, dry stone with
a polished stone value of 60, and a maximum flakiness
index of 25, and shall bagged to avoid contamination.
11.4.3
11.4.3.1
General
The positioning of holding down bolts and

anchorage systems shall be checked for accuracy and
agreed by the Engineer before the casting of the concrete
for the joint and to locate holding down bolts or
anchorage pockets. The tern plates or forms shall only be
removed with the Engineer's consent. Threaded parts
shall be protected, kept clean and protected from
corrosion by a grease coating.
2
Where the carriageway surfacing is removed to
accommodate the bridge joint it shall be cut to a clear
stra' ght line for the full depth of the surfacing without
damage to the concrete substrate or the waterproofing.
3
Before installation of the joint. the concrete surfaces
shall be free from laitance, sand, clear and comply strictly
with the joint manufacturer's requirements.
11.4.3.2
Nosings
Construction of nosings at joints using epoxy mortar

and epoxy concrete shall be formed under the direction of
a competent supervisor experienced in the use of the
material. The work shall be carried out preferably in the
warm weather. The air temperature around the joint shall
be not less than 10 degrees C, which shall be achieved
artificially if necessary.
Concrete surfaces to which
nosings are applied shall be dry, sound and free from
laitance. Before application of the primary coat, loose
mate rial and dust shall be removed by an air jet tested to
ensure that no oi I is carried over from the compressor.
2
Unless otherwise specified, surfacing shall be carried
across the joint and then cut back to accommodate the
nosing. The cun'ng shall be done with a diamond saw to
give a clean edge throughout the depth of the material to
be removed. Masking material shall be provided to
prevent surfacing materials adhering to the deck where
nosings are to be formed and shall be adequately located
to prevent displacement by the paving machine.
11-9
~~
M niatry of Transport & CummunlcoUon
DGRLT
/"-.~<:Bridge Accessories
A primary coat of unfilled epoxy resin composition

shall be well worked in by brush to all surfaces with which
the nosings will be permanently in contact. at a uniform
rate of not less than 300 gm/square meter. The mortar
shall then be applied as quickly as possible while the
primary coat is still tacky.
4
The epoxy mortar and epoxy concrete composition
shall be approved by the Engineer. Aggregate shall be
either silica sand. calcined bauxite or other approved
synthetic or natural aggregate of suitable grading. The
particle size distribution shall be that which produces a
mortar with adequate strength and workability and
minimum voids. Aggregate shall be clean and completely
dry. Whichever type of aggregate is used, the epoxy
mortar or epoxy concrete constituents shall be thoroughly
mixed in a suit.1ble mechanical mixer. The sequence.
duration and temperatu re of mixing shall be in accordance
with the manufacture-'s instructions.
The mixed constituents shall be placed in position

within the time recommended by the manufacturer, well
worked against the primed surfaces and trowelled flush
with the adjacent roed surface to form a dense solid
nosing to the required profiles. Epoxy mortar shall
generally be compacted in layers not exceeding 50 mm
thick. Where an underlying layer is more than one hour
old it shall, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, be
primed with an unfilled epo)(y resin priming coat before
placing the ne)(t course.
11.4.3.3
cross the joints only by means of the ramps until the

bedding and nosing have reached full strength.
11.4.4
Bridge expansion joints shall be measured by the

linear meter of each joint type and size (measured by
movement range). Measurement shall be made from
outside face of parapet to outside face of parapet whether
or not the joint types over carriageway, verges and
walkways for a particular joint type are similar. Spacial
curb units, cover plates over walkways, epoxy mortar
bedding and epo)(y concrete nosing shall not be measured
for direct payment, but shall be considered as subsidi ary
works tha costs of which will be deemed to be included in
the unit rates.
11.4.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided above, will be paid for at the rates
identified in the Bill of Quantities. which rates shall be full
compensation for furnishing, installing, fixi ng and for
materials, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and all other
11.4.6
(i)

Buried Joint
movement range (
(lin.m)
Installation
The gap width shall be set, in relation to the

prevailing deck temperature, with the joint gap sides
parallel as described on the Drawings and within the joint
Seals shall
manufacturer's installation instructions.
remain in compression for the full range of joint
movement.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Expansion joints shall be of uniform width and shall

be accurately set or finished and aligned flush with the
finished carriageway surface. Care shall be given to
ensure that metallic components are not bent or deformed
during handling and installation.
The installation process shall strictly comply with

instructions given on the Drawings and by the joint
manufacturer.
(vi
(vii
5
During the placing and hardening of the bedding and
bonding materials. movement between the joint and the
substrate shall be prevented.
11 .5.1
7
Ramps shall be provided and maintained to protect
all expansion joints from vehicular loading. Vehicles shall
(lin.rn l
Modu lar joint with neoprene

insert, movement range ( I
(lin. m.)
Metallic finger jol nt with

neoprene insert
movement range ( I
(lin.m)
Metallic finger joint no ii'IStn
(lin.m.)
Asphaltic Plug Joint

movement range { I
11.5
6
When one half of the expansion joint is being set, the
other hell shalt be completely free from longitudinal
restraint. In particular, where templates are used to locate
the two sides of a joint, they shall not be fi)(ed
simultaneously to both sides.
Elastomeric {waterproof) Joint

movement nmge ( 1
movement range (
4
The expansion joint and the waterproofing shall be
formed so that a watertight seal is provided.
1110
(lin.m.)
Joint Seals and Fillers

Description

furnishing and installing joi nt seali ng and preformed
e)(pansion joint filler materials as shown on the Drawings.
or as directed by the Engi neer.
11.5.2
Materials
For preformed joint filler strips. refer to Section 5,

Paragraph 5,3,2,6.
Sutttannto ol Oman, Stondrtl Speci~llllon$ for ROild & Bridge Con1tr~on 2(110
Bridge Accessorie s )
2
For joint sealants, refer to Section 5, Paragraph
5.3.3.1 m.
11.5.3
For construction joints, refer to Section 5, Paragraph

5.3.3.6.
2
For contraction and expansion joints, refer to Section
5, Paragraph 5.3. 3. 7.
3
For waterstops, refer to Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.3.8.
11.5.4

No separate measurement is made for joint sealers

and fillers and no items are included in the Bill of
Quantities. The work shall be considered subsidiary to
other items of work in the Bill of Quantities.
11.6
Bridge Parapets and Railings
11.6.1
Description
This Subsection describes requirements far

furnishing and installing bridge para pets and railings as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
11.6.2
1 1.6.2.1
Materials
Materials of Construction
The materials of construction of the parapet shall be

aluminum alloy or structural steel or reinforced concrete.
11.6.2.2
Aluminum Alloy
Aluminum alloys used for bridge parapets and

railings shall conform with the requirements of AASHTO
M 193 and AASHTO M 219 or BS 1470, BS 1474 and BS
1490.
11.6.2.3
Structural Steel
Structural steel used for bridge parapets and railings

shall conform to the requirements of Section 6 "Structural
Steel and Other Metal Work". The anchorage system shall
be es shown on the Drawings or of a type approved by the
Engineer.
11.6.2.4
Reinforced Concrete
Reinforced concrete used for bridge parapets shall

conform to the requirements of:
SubSection 5.1 Concrete Materials and Mixes
Sub-Section 5.2 Reinforcing Steel
SubSection 5.3 Reinforced Concrete Structures
The anchorage system shall be as shown on lhe Drawings or
of a type approved by the Engineer.
11.6.2.5
Anchorage System
The anchorage system of parapets and rails, shall be

as shown on the Drawings and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. It shall be such that damaged
metal posts and rails can be readily replaced without the
need for cuning the bridge deck or copings or edge units
into which the anchorages are located.
11.6.3
During erection, the parapet units shall be securely

held in their correct positions until all connections and
fixings are complete and the post fixings have gained
adequate strength to develop the full holding down
moment. The assessment of the adequacy of the post
fixing shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. The
finished parapets shall be true to line and level throughout
their length.
2
Welding of aluminum shall comply with the
requirements of BS 3019 Part 1 and BS 3571 Part 1 and all
welding shall be carried out in the factory under controlled
environment. Welding of steel parapet units shall be
carried out in factory or at site in compliance with Section
6
3
The Contractor shall ensure the proper installation of
the posts and rails for metal bridge parapets by competent
persons who have been trained In the proper installation
of the type of bridge parapets to be installed, using tools
and procedures recommended by the manufacturer.
4
The rails and posts of parapets shall be closed
sections, presenting no visible seam welds or exposed
bolt heads. The shape and texture of the posts and rails
and the protective treatment to be applied shall be as
indicated on tha Drawings and no deviations and/or
alterations to these shall be permitted.
5
The standard of finish of reinforced concrete parapet
units shall conform to finish of approved sample units
made before main production commences. Where minor
blemishes and discolorations occur on production units,
making good with an approved epoxy mortar compound
will be permitted only with the express approval of the
Engineer. Units which are considered unacceptable for
use In the works by the Engineer shall be destroyed.
Considerable care shall be given during erection of
parapet units to avoid cracking or otherwise damaging the
concrete unit or its finish.
11.6.4
Bridge parapets and railings shall be measured by

the linear mater of each type of parapet and railing, based
upon the lengths and dimensions shown on the Drawings
or ordered by the Engineer
2
Full scale dyne mic testing or any other testing that
may be required, expansion joints, specially fabricated
units of posts and rails for nosing areas, special
requirements at junctions with transition walls, or guard
rails, grit blasting to produce the required surface texture
H1 1
~
~
Mjnitrv of Trnnsport &
Commun~cadona
OGAlT
/".~<:Bridge Accessories
anchoreges and holding down assemblies stitching and

making good to concrete and other ancillaries, will all be
considered as subsidiary works the cost of which shall be
deemed to be included in the rates for bridge parapets and
railings.
11.6.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above shall be paid at the rates
in the Bill of Quantities, which rate shall be full
compensation for furnishing and installing all materials,
labor, equipment, tools, tests. records and all other items
for completing the works as specified.
2
Where a concrete parapet is mounted with a metal
raW, both components will be measured as ot'!e item
completely furnished and installed.
11.6.6
Item in the Bill of Quantities

Concrete bridge parapet
(state type)
(lin.m,J
Concrete bridge parapet with

metal rail (state typel
{lin.m.l
(iill
Steel bridge parapet
(lin.m.l
(ivl
Aluminum bridge parapet
(lin.m.l
(v)
Steel pedestrian railing
(lin.m.l
(vii
Aluminum pedestrian railing
(lin,m.)
lil
(iii
11~12
12.1
General
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
DNcrlpdon
Refere.Materials
Conmuctlon and lnmlldfon
flequlrementl
12.1.4.1
12.1.4.2
12.1.4.3
12.1.4.4
12.1.4.5
12.1.5
12.1.8
12.1.7
Sub-gmle end Subbese

Curbs
Precast Concretelile PIIVing
Block Paving
Cut In-situ Concrete PevingJCurbing
Method of MuiUrement
Bal8 of Payment
ltemaln the Bill of Quantities
12-1
12-1
12-1
12 1
12-2
12-2
12 2
122
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-6
12-6
Sultanaro gf Oman, Stondar<l Specin.,llollalor flolld llo Btldgo ConslruaJan 2010 (S.COncl Draft)
Sidewalks, Paved Areas and Curbs
12.1
General
12.1.1
Description
BS 72631 :2001
This Sub-section describes requirements for paving

and curbs for sidewalks and other paved areas, including
precast concrete and natural stone paving, aggregate
bases, granular sub-bases and sub-grade, all as shown on
the Drawings.
2
Paving includes, as appropriate and shown on the
Drawings, hydraulically pressed precast concrete elements,
clay pavers, granite, basalt and cobbled pevi ng, sub-bases
and related accessories such as movement joints. In
limited cases, and only if specifically ordered by the
Engineer, cast in situ concrete paving and curbs may be
permitted, provided trial sample work is approved by the
Engineer.
12.1.2
References

Transportation Officials lMSHTO)
Highway
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete lBituminous Type)
M235M
Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin

Adhesives
American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)
D994-98 Standard
Specification
for
Preformed
Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)
C936M- 09
3
Standard
Specification
for
Solid
Concrete Interlocking Paving Units
British/European Standards
BS 7533-3:2005/A 1 2009
Pavements constructed with clay,
natural stone or concrete pavers. Code
of practice for laying precast concrete
paving blocks and clay pavers for
flexible pavements.
EN 1342:2001
Sans of natural stone for external

paving. Requirements and test methods
EN 1343:2001
Curbs of natural stone for external

paving. Requirements and test methods
BS 6717:2001
Precast, unreinforced concrete paving

blocks. Requirements and test methods
BS EN197-1:2000 Cement Composition, specifications

and conformity criteria for low heat
common cements
Materials
1.
Portland cement concrete shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5 and as shown on the Drawings.
including HDS Section 16, SD16.20.
2.
Precast concrete curbs, edgings and channels shall
be hydraulically pressed units to conform to BS 7263,
obtained from an approved manufacturer, and of the
sections and sizes shown on the Drawings
i.
Straight units shall ganarally be 900mm long but

shall be shorter where used for curves of radius
down to 12 meters,
ii.
Red ius curb units shell be used for curves of

radius less then 12 meters
and
M-33-99
12.1.3
PC concrete f1 ags, curbs, channels,

edgings
and
quadrants,
PC
unreinforced concrete paving slabs and
complimentary fittings:- Requirements
and test methods.
3
Precast concrete paving slabs (tiles) shall be
hydraulically pressed slabs to conform to BS 7263,
obtained from an approved manufacturer, and of the sizes,
shapes, colors and surface finish shown on the Drawings.
4
Granite blocks shall conform to BS EN 1342 and 1343,
approved natural local granite with sawn finish, and be
obtained from one strata of one quarry, free from faults
and to the shapes, sizes and patterns shown on the
Drawings.
5
Basalt blocks shall be approved natural basalt sets to
BS EN 1342 and 1343 with various finishes, obtained from
one strata of one quarry, free from faults and to the
shapes, sizes, and patterns shown on the Drawings.
Interlocking concrete blocks shall conform to BS
6
6717 (ASTM C 936), precast concrete interlocking block
pavers, obtained from an approved manufacturer and to
the shapes, sizes, colors, finishes and patterns shown on
the Drawings.
7
Interlocking clay pavers shall conform to 856677, be
obtained from an approved manufacturer and to the
shapes, sizes, colors, finishes and patterns shown on the
Drawings.
8
Stone cobbles: selected hard smooth, egg-shaped
beach or river cobble stones obtained from en approved
source and to the sizes shown on the Drawings.
9
Base, sub-base and sub-grade courses for paving
shall comply with requirements of Section 3 of these
standard specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
including HDS Section 16, 5D16.20.
EN 13139:2002
Aggregates for mortar
BS 882:1992
Specification for aggregates

natural sources for concrete
from
10 Preformed expansion joint filler shall meet the

requirements of M5HTO M-33-99 or ASTM D994-98
EN 9981:2003
Specification for marta r for masonry Rendering and plastering mortar
11 Cement-sand mortar mix for bedding of block pavers

shall. unless otherwise specified, be composed of:
EN 9982:2003
Specification for marta r for masonry Masonry mortar
i.
Ordinary Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 or, if

Instructed. white Portland cement to BS EN197-1.
ii.
Sand to BS 882. Table 5.
12 1
~
~
M,n,stry of Trnnaport & Communication OGRLT
_./'....
~<\Sidewalks, Paved Areas and Curb s
Iii,
Mix composition shall be Type -il" as BS 998

1&2, to give a 28 day compressive strength of
not less than 5 MPa. Cement sand ratio shall not
be less than 1:3 or 1:4 by volume; submit details
of proposed mix for approval.
12 Where approved by the Engineer, factory premixed

mortar to BS EN 9981 & 2. compressive strength at 28
days not less than 5 MPa, may be used.
13 Bedding sand for block paving shall be clean sharp

sand, free from deleterious salts and contaminants with
clay. silt end fine dust content of not more than 3% by
mass. They shall be obtained from a single source,
consistently graded according to the reQUirements of BS
75333, Table 2. Sand that will stain paving should not be
used. Bedding sand should be maintained at an even
moisture content which will give maximum compaction
during block laying.
14 Epoxy adhesive shall conform t o the requirements of
AASHTO M 235M, Standard Specifications for Epoxy
Resin Adhesive. for the type of applic;~tion required.
3
Where specified or instructed by the Engineer curbs
shall be bedded in adhesive. The adhesive shall be placed
uniformly on the cleaned pavement surface or on the
bottom of the curb sections in a quantity sufficient to
result in complete coverage of the area of contact of the
curb and the pavement, with no vo:ds present and with a
slight excess after the curb has been pressed in pia ce. The
curb shall be placed in position and pressure applied until
firm contact is made w ith the pavement. Excess adhesive
around the edge of the marker, excess adhesive on the
pavement, and adhesive on the exposed surfaces of the
marker shall be immediately removed. The curb shall be
protected against Impact until the adhesive has hardened.
4
Mixing of adhesive shall be performed in limited
quantities such that the curb sections shall be aligned and
pressed i nto place within five (51 minutes after mixing the
adhesive components. Any mixed batch of adhesion,
which becomes so viscous that the adhesive is not readilY
extruded from under the curb on application of slight
pressure, shall not be used.
12.1.4.3
12.1.4

Requirements
12.1.4.1
Sub-grade and Sub-base
The sub-grade shall be excavated to the required

depth and to t he width to receive subbase and paving and
to permit installation and bracing of the forms where
needed. The foundation shall be shaped and compacted to
an even surface conforming to the sections shown on the
Drawings. All soft and yielding material shall be removed
a11d repl eced with acceptable material.
2
Prior to commencing laying paving blocks, paving
tiles and stone paving. the prepared sub-grede surface
shall be cleared of loose and waste material and prepared
to receive sub-base as per Section 3, Clause 3.2.3.
3
Granular subbase shall be constructed where shown
or directed by the Engineer, and shall be placed in layers
not exceeding one hundred fifty (1501 millimeters in depth
a11d each layer shall be compacted to at least 95"l!o of dry
denstty.
12.1.4.2
Curbs
Curb sections shall be hydraulically pressed in

approved molds under conditlons of controlled
temperature and humidity. Sections shall be water or
steam cured until the concrete attains one hundred ( 1001
percent of specified strength. Curbs shall have a clean
finish with smooth surfaces. Segregation. honeycombing
or broken corners will not be allowed and remedial
measures will not be accepted.
2
Curbs shall be placed to the lines shown on the
Drawings or established by the Engineer. The Contractor
shell mark the location where each section is to be placed
and the marks shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
beginning work. No curb sections shall be placed over
longitudinal or transverse joints of the pavement surface.
122
Precast Concrete Tile Paving
Tiled sidewalks shall be constructed in accordance

with the dimensions and levels shown on the Drawl ngs or
as directed by the Engineer. All areas inside channelizing
islands shall also be provided with a sidewalk pavement,
unless otherwise shown Or'l the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
2
Precast tiles sha.ll be manufactured by an automatic
plant of the central batch high pressure type, erected in a
special yard reserved specifically for this purpose. The
plant shall be equipped w ith a double feeding system, one
for the upper layer, and another for the lower layer of the
tile. Manual intervention shall be a minimum.
3
Operation of the plant shd be such that It shall first
discharge enough mortar materials into the form for the
upper layer, and after preliminary vibration and uniform
leveling, the coarse m lxture for the lower layer shell then
be discharged Into the t ~e form. The high pressure
automatic device sh~rll be used only after a second
vibration and leveling of the material has taken place. Tiles
shall not be disturbed during setting of the concrete.
Curing of the tiles shall take place in a closed curing
4
room where the Contractor shan provide an automatic
steam curing syst em to be operated as approved by the
Engineer. The capacity of the curing room shall permit
acceptance and complete curing of the daily pia nt
production oftiles.
5
The period of curing shell be at least one full day at a
temperature of flftvf!Ve to seventy-five degrees Celsius
(55" to 75" Cl. This period may be subject to changes and
adjustments after direct tests have been made on the
production or as directed by the Engineer.
6
Tiles shaa not be imperfectly finished. and shall be
free from segregation. honeycombing, broken or damaged
corners and imperfect plan faces. Correction of defects by
polishing, retouching or any other means w ill not be
permitted. Approval of the t iles given bt( the Engineer at
Sultanatu or Ornon. Stan<lord Spec: nusiono for Road llo Bridgo Construe:= ;!010 15clnd Droll)
any stage of the work shall not prejudice the Engineer's

right to later discard any imperfect tiles. Final approval
shall be given only after the tiles have been completely
positioned in-situ. Rejected tiles shall be removed from
the site and replaced.
7
The following tests shall be carried out on sidewalk
to tiles to ascertain their suitability for the Work:
i.
Impact Strength
ii.
Flexural Strength
iii.
Abrasion Resistance
8
Impact Strength Test; this test establishes the
minimum height of fell of a steel ball weighing one kg.
which, when striking the tile in the middle, breaks it. The
product of the height of the fall by the weight of the ball is
taken as the Impact Strength, limiting value: 0.5 kg -meters
minimum.
Flexural Strength; this test is carried out by placing a
9
tile on two knife supports, with edges rounded with a
radius of one ( 11 centimeter, arranged parallel to the side
of the tile and ten {101 centimeters apart. The load is
gradually transmitted to the tile top surface, along the
centerline, by a third knife arranged parallel to the other
two.
The unit maximum bending stress= fifteen {151 Phb2 ,
where:
'P' is the total breaking load in kilograms, 'b' is the
width of the tile In centimeters and 'h' is the
thickness of the til e in centimeters.
Th a limit acceptance value for Flexure I Strength shall be
thirty (301 kilograms per square centimeter minimum.
10 Abrasion Resistance; this test is carried out with a
machine composed of a horizontal cast-iron disc, rotating
about its vertical central axis at uniform speed; a
horizontal diametrical crosspiece by means of which two
samples are pressed on the disc, at such a distance from
the center of the disc that the rei alive speed with respect
to the disc, is one meter per second; a second horizontal
diametrical cross-piece orthogonal to the first. which is
carried at either end; appropriate devices to let the
moistened abrasive flow onto the track; two pairs of
conveniently arranged brushes to guide the abrasive that
tends to escape under the samples. The samples, pressed
against the disc, rotate by means of a specie I mechanical
device, around their own vertical central axis, at the rate of
one turn of the specimen for fifty (50) turns of the disc.
Carborundum grit sufficiently coated with liquid mineral
oil with an Engler viscosity between five (5) and seven (71
at fifty degrees Celsius [50" C.) shall be used es an
abrasive. The grit shall pass Sieve No. 60 and be retained
on Sieve No. 100. Consumption of carborundum and oil
should be approximately twenty (201 and twelve (121
grams, respectively, per minute. The square sample, with
a surface area of fifty {50) square centimeters shall be
pressed against the disc by a total of fifteen { 15) kilograms
unit pressure of three tenths (0.3) kilograms per square
centimeter. The test is normally carried out with a d"stance
run of the grinding wheel offive hundred (500) meters. For

materials with a surface wearing layer different from the
rest of the tile, the distance run must be such that the disc
does not penetrate into the lower layer. The thickness of
the layer abraded in millimeters wTth a pressure of threetenths [0.3) kilogram per square centimeter for a distance
run of one thousand {1000) meters is taken as the
Abrasion Factor. This factor is determined by assuming
that the consumption is proportional to the distance run.
The limit acceptance value for the Abrasion Factor shall be
twelve [12) millimeters maximum
11 Tiles shall be laid with joints between tiles and
between tiles and curbs nominally 10mm wide,
completely filled with 1:2 cementfsand mortar or a grout
for the full thickness of the tile by use of proper tools.
during and after positioning of the tiles. Alltra nsverse and
longitudinal jonts shall be rn proper line and in the correct
pattern, to ensure a neat and workmanlike appearance.
12 As soon as the mortar or grout has partially set, the
Contractor shall rake all mortar material from the groove
formed by the two adjacent bevels, and from the first
three mm. depth of the joint, using appropriate tools.
13 When the mortar has sufficiently set, the Contractor
shall sprinkle the sidewalk with water and shall cover it
with plastic or nylon sheets to avoid evaporation of water
during the curing period The sheets shall be left in place
until completion of setting of the mortar and concrete, or
as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall then
remove all foreign metter, wood, concrete or mortar
lumps, etc., leaving the sidewalk in a neat, clean and tidy
condition.
14 In cases where tiles are required to be cut, due to the
presence of obstacles. poles, hydrants, etc., or in the
construction of driveways or side roads, etc., the
Contractor shall cut the tiles and/or substitute in-situ
concrete of at least the same quality as the tiles. The
Engineer shall decide, after trials, on the method to be
adopted. This operation shall be kept to a minimum. The
Contractor shall complete as much as practicable of the
sidewalk using precast tiles.
15 Where the sidewalk crosses the entrance to a shop or
a house the I evel of which is higher then the sidewalk, the
Contractor shall construct steps, formed by a curb and a
complete or partial tile. The steps shall be backfilled with
concrete of the same quality as specified for tile
foundations.
16 A step shall be constructed wherever the difference
in elevation between the entrance and the sidewalk is
more than three hundred [300) millimeters. The Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer, prior to commencing any
sidewalk construction, a list of locations where steps wi II
be required, together with design details for construction
of such steps.
17 Driveway pavements shall be constructed to the
same standards as specified for sidewalks.
12--3
'-....../~
Mlnletry ol TrPnP<>rt & Comrnunl<:atloo. DGRLT
~~<:Sidewalks,
Paved Areas and Curbs
1B The tolerances for sidewalk, drive way and median

paving construction shall be plus or minus six (6)
millimeters from the designed grade elevation.
12.1.4.4
Bedded and Interlocking Block Paving
Bedded btock paving shall be bedded in mortar and

laid to the pattern shown on the Drawings or directed by
the Engineer. A bed of stiff mortar should be spread and
leveled. Blocks shall be individually laid and hammered
down so that tops are level, leaving joints open. Joints
shall be carefully and thoroughly filled flush with the
surface of the blocks using mortar of stiff plastic
consistency. Finishing shall be neat and cleaned of any
mortar from the face of blocks before it sets. Joint widths
in stone block paving are to be a nominal 10 mm.
2
Interlocking block paving shall be laid and bedded in
accordance with the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified,
paving shall not be commenced until adjacent curbs,
edgings and channels have been installed and sufficiently
matured. Blocks shall be laid to the required pattern on the
sand bed and thoroughly compact with a vibrating plate
compactor es the work proceeds. After infilling at the
restraining edges; the same compacting effort shall be
applied over all areas, avoiding damage to edges and
adjacent work. Compaction shall not be conducted within
1 m of any working face. Un-compacted areas of paving
shall not be left at the end of working periods, except
wlthin 1m distance of an unrestrained edge. CompDCted
paving shall be checked initially and at frequent intervals
to ensure surface levels are correct Where unsatisfactory,
blocks shall be lifted, the bedding adjusted and blocks relaid as necessary. Dry bedding sand shall be brushed into
the joints, followed by the re-vlbration of the surfaces.
This shall be repeated until all joints are completely filled.
12.1,4.5
Cast In-situ Concrete Paving/Curbing
1
In situ concrete paving and curbing. where directed
by the Engineer, shall conform to the appropriate
2
Forms shall be of metal, wood, or other suitable
material and shall extend for the full depth of the concrete.
All forms shall be geometrically accurate, free from warp,
and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the
concrete without displacement. Braci ng and staking of
f orms shall be such that the forms remain in both
horizontal and vertical alignment until their removal. All
forms shan be cleaned and oiled before concrete is placed
against them.
3
Mixing and Placlng Concrete. The foundation shall be
lhoroughly moistened immediately prior to the placing of
the concrete. The proportioning and mixing of the
concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements for
the class of concrete specified. The concrete shall be
deposited in one course in such a manner as to prevent
segregat ion and consolidation by vibrators.
4
The surface of paving shall be finished with a
wooden float and light brooming. No plastering of the
surface will be permitted. All outside edges of the slab and
12-4
all joints shaQ be edges w ith a five 151 millimeter radius

edging tool.
5
Expansion joints for paving shall be In the locations
and of the dimensions specified, and shall be filled with
approved pre-molded expansion joint filler. Sidewalks
shall be divided into sections by weakened plane joints
formed by a jointing tool or other acceptable means as
directed. These joints shall extend into the concrete for
about one fourth (VI to one fifth (115) of the depth and
shall be approximateiy three (3) millimeters w ide. Joints
shall match as nearly IS possible adjacent joints in curb or
pavements. Weakened plane joints may be sawed in lieu
of forming with a jointing tool,
6
Construction joints in paving shall be formed around
all eppurtenonces such as manholes, utility poles, etc,
extending into end through the sidewalk, drive way. or
median. Pre-molded expansion joint fillet one (1)
centimeter thick shell be installed in these joints.
Expansion jo lnt filler of the thickness Indicated shall be
installed between concrete construction and any fi xed
structure such u a building or bridge. This expansion joint
material shall extend for the full depth of the concrete
construction.
7
Concrete shall be cured by membrane or water in
accordance w ith Section 5, 'Curing end Protection'.
12.1.5
1 Precast concrete tired paving, concrete and clay block

paving and natural stone paving shall each be measured
separately by the square met er for each type, authorized,
completed, and accepted by the Engineer based on the
horizontal dimensions shown on the Drawings or ordered
by the Engineer.
In-situ concret e paving, where specifically instructed
2
by the Engineer, shatl be measured by the square meter of
the area shown or instructed, stating the thickness. In-situ
concrete paving for irregular shapes or in locations where
other paving types are used, w ill not be measured
separately but will be deemed to be included in the area of
the adjacent paving.
3
lnsitu concrete curbs, where specifically instructed
by the Engineer, shall be measured by the linear meter of
completed and accepted work.
4
Precast concrete curbs of each type, including all
blinding and haunching, shall be measured by linear
meters. Depressed curbs at driveway entrances and the
l ike will not be measured separately but will be included
as a normal length of standard curb as specified .
5
Excavation for paving and curb shall not be
measured separately for payment but will be considered
as subsidiary work. except when such excavation is a part
of, and is measured in conjunction with, the roadway
excavation. In such instances, the excavation shall be
measured and included in the quantity of roadway
excavation as per Section 2.
6 Preparation of sub-grade, supply, transport and laying
sub-base and bedding courses. concrete bases incidental
Suhnnato of Omnn. Sundard Spec ic.t11ont ror Ro-'d &
Sd~
ConstnJc.tjon 20 0
to curbs and the like, finishing, cleaning and protecting

paving, and tests on materials shall not be measured
separately but shall be considered subsidiary work, the
cost of which is deemed to be included in the rates stated
in the Bill of Ouant'ties for the relevant items.
12.1.6
Basis of Payment
The completed and accepted work, as measured

above, will be paid for at the unit rates in the Bill of
Quantities, which shall be full compensation for supply,
transport and installation of all required materials,
equipment. tools, labor, and a ll other items necessary for
the proper completion of the Work as specified.
12.1.7
Payment for the work will be made under one or

more ofthe folrowing items:
i.
Precast concrete tile paving [type)
ii. Block paving [type)

iii. Natural stone paving [type)
[sq.m.l
[sq.m.l
[sq.m.l
iv. Cast in-situ concrete paving [type;

thickness)
(sq.m.l
Precast concrete curb [type)
(lin.m.)
vt Cast in situ concrete curb (type)
(lin.m.l
v.
12..5
Ref.
Tide
13.1
Roadside Barriers
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.3.1
13.1.3.2
13.1.3.3
13.13.4
13.1.4
Dacription
Referenc:es
Material&
Metal Components
Concrete Components
Delineators
Other Materials
Construction and ln.WIIetlon
Requirementa
13.1.4.1
Metal Guardra'ls
1311.4.2
Concrete Barriers
13.14 3
Impact Attenuetors
13.1.5
Method of Meaurament
13.1.8
Bn!ll of Payment
13.1.7
Items In the bin of Ouantltlea
13.2
Fence
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
Dncription
Referenc:es
Metarlals
Construction and lnatalletion
Requlnlmena
Method of Meawrement
Bull of Payment
13.2.5
13.2.8
13.2.7
PagaNo.
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-2
132
13-2
13-2
1~2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-4
13-4
134
13-4
13:4
13-6
13-5
13-6
13-CI
13-CI
Sultanata of Oman, St.>o>dard S~fm;..,, lot Road to Bridge Ccnstn.c:;, 2010
Safety Barriers and Fences)
13.1
Roadside Barriers
13.1.3
Materials
13.1.1
Description
13.1.3.1
Metal Components
Metal beams, guardrail elements and backup plates

for W-beam or Thria-beam rail shalt conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M180, Class A, Type 2.
Galvanized rail elements shall be designed to be
spliced at intervals not to exceed either four (41 or
eight (BI meters and such splices shall be made at
posts, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Rail
elements to be erected on a radius of forty-five (451
meters or less shall be shaped in the shop and the
radius of curvature shall be stenciled on the back of
each section of rail.
This Sub-section describes roadside barriers and

fences, including crashworthy metal beam, concrete
barriers end other safety barriers, barrier terminals, and
portable end permanent impact anenuators. This Sub
section applies also to reinstallation/retrofitting of metal
beam guardrail, concrete barriers and guardrail terminals,
impact attenuators and steel safety raifi ngs.
13.1.2
References

Transportation Officials (AASHTOI
Highway
end
AASHTOM160
Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Steel Plates, Shapes,
Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural
Use.
AASHTO M180
Standard Specification for Corrugated

Sheet Steel Beams for Highway
Guardrail
AASHTO M237
Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin

Adhesives for Bonding Traffic Markers
to Hardened Portland Cement and
Asphalt Concrete
Posts and miscellaneous barrier rail hardware; unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all steel posts,
plates. angles, channels, brackets, and anchor
assembly units shalt conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 36. Cold rotted post sections shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM A 653M, Grade B.
Swage fittings for anchor terminals shall be

machined from hot-rolled carbon steel conforming
to the requirements of ASTM A 576, Grade 1035, and
shalt be annealed suitable for cold swaging. A lock
pin hole shall be drilled through the swage fining
head to accommodate a seven (71 millimeter, plated,
spring steel pin to retain the stud in position. The
stud shall be steel conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A 449. Prior to galvanizing, a ten (101
millimetl!r slot for the locking pin shalt be milled into
the stud end. The swage fining, stud, and nut shall
develop the full breaking strBngth ofthe wire cable.
All bolts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

A 307, except those designated on the Drawings as
high strength shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 325 or A 449. All nuts shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 563M, Grade A or better,
except those designated on the Drawings as high
strength shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A 563M, Grade Cor better.
Galvanizing for all ferrous materials for guardrail,

guardrail anchor terminals, impact attenuators, glare
screens, and delineators shall be galvanized after
fabrication unless otherwise specified. Galvanization
shalt be in accordance with ASTM A 123M or ASTM
A 153M as appropriate.
All components shalt be fabricated and galvanized

for Installation without further drilling, bending,
cutting or welding. When field modifications are
approved by the Engineer, or when minor damage to
the galvanized coating occurs, the exposed surface
shall be repaired by thoroughly cleaning and
applying two (21 applications of paint as specified in
Section 7, Clause 7.2.6, "Zinc Oust-Zinc Oxide
Primer."
Impact Attenuators:
i. Rail elements for Thrie beam rail (used in Guard
Rail Energy Absorbing Terminal G.R.E.A.T.
American Society For Testing and Material
ASTM A36
Structural Steel
ASTM A653M
Standard Specification for Steal Sheet,

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized! or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealedl by the
Hot-Dip Process.
ASTMA576
Standard Specification for Steel Bars,

Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality
ASTMA449
Standard Specification for Hex Cap

Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/lOS/90 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength, General Use
for
Carbon
ASTMA325
Standard Specification for Structura I

Bolts, Steal, Heat Treated, 1201105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
ASTMA563
Standard Specification for Carbon and

Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A 123M
Standard Specification for Zinc (HotDip Galvanizedl Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products
ASTM A153M
Standard Specification for Zinc Coating

(Hot-Dipl on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A413M
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel

Chain
131
""'-..J~
Mlnllrv of Trunapott
a. CornmunlciOtlo" OGR~T
~~<:Safety Barri ers and Fences
Impact Anenuators) shall conform to AASHTO

M180, Class 8, Type galvanized. Rail element
joints shall be fabricated to lap not less thi n
thirty (30) centimeters and be bolted. The rail
metal, in addition to conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M 180, shall withstand
a cold bend, without cracking, of two hundred
(200) grads around a mandrel of a diameter
equal to two and one half (2!121 t imes the
thickness ofthe sheet metal plate.
ii. Restraining chains for G.R.E.A .T. impact
anenuators shall be twelve (12) mi llimeter
nominal size and shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 413M, Grade 28.
iii. QuadGuard metal work shall be fabricated from
either M1020 Merchant Quality or ASTM A36
steel. After fabrication. metal work shall be
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123M. All
welding sha n be done by or under the direction
of a certified welder.
iv. The QuadGuard system shall be assembled w it t!
garvanized fasteners. A ll bolts, nuts and wasl!ers
shall be Commercial Quality American National
Standard unless otherwise specified.
v. The OuadGuard diaphragms shall be made from
10 gauge steel Quad-beam sections. The
diaphragms shall be available in w idths of 610,
760 and 910 mm 12'. 2'-6" and 3'1. Two support
legs shall be welded to the Quad-beam. Ski
shaped plates shall be welded to the bottom of
the support legs. The diaphragms shall be
designed to lock onto and be guided by a
groundmounted, center monorail support
structure.
vi. The QuadGuard fender panels sllall be fabricated
from 10 gauge steel Quad-beam sections. Each
fender panel shall be dri lled and slotted in
accordance
with
the
manufacturer's
specifications so that when assembled in the
fie'd, the front end shell be bolted to a
diaphragm by means of the three (3) 15.9 mm
(SIB"} bolts.
vii. Impact attenuation devices with cartridges filled
with liquids, such as antifreeze agents, that may
become a skid hazard when impacted. shall not
be used; replaceable cartridges with foam-filled
cardboard, lightweight concrete and similar
materials w ill be acceptable. All units shan be
identified by identification labels fastened at a
protected but consp:cuous location.
13.1.3.2
Concrete Components
Concrete for post supports, buried footings, and

anchors and for concrete barriers and terminal sections
shall conform to the requl rements for concrete as
described in Section 5. Types and strength of concrete
shall be as stated on the Drawings and in the Special
Specification.
13-2
2
Reinforcing steel shall be of the size and grade
shown on the Drawings and shall conform to the
provisions of Sections related to "Reinforcing Steel" In
Section 5 of these Standard SpecifJCBtions.
13.1.3.3
Barrier Reflectors
Guardrail Reflectors: Metal W-beam and Thrie-beam

guardrail reflectors and associated hardware shall
conform to the requirements of the Drawings, Special
Specifications and M .U.T.C.D. (Manual of Uniform Traffic
Control Oevices). When shown on the Drawings or stated
in the Special Specifications, reflective sheeting shall be
fixed to the approach ends of meta l beam guardrail
terminals and be Type IV (microprismatic) high intensity
retro-reflectlve sheeting.
2
Concrete barrfet reflectors shall conform to the
requirements of the Drawings, Special Specifications. end
M .U.T.C.D. Epoxy resin adhesives for bonding de' ineators
to hardened Portland cement concrete shall conform to
AASHTOM 237.
13.1.3.4
Other Materials
Other Materials: Other materials shall be as shown

In the Drawings, stated in the Special Specificafons or in
the U.S. American Road Builders Transponation
Association (ARBTAI Bulletin No. 268 "A Guide to
Standardizad Highway Barrier Rail Hardware. Special
materials for impact anenuators shall be as specified by
the manufacturer.
13.1.4

Requirements
13.1.4.1 Metal Guardrails

Metal W-beam and Thrle-beam guardrail. shall be
installed at the locations shown on the Drawings or as
ordered by the Engineer. Posts shall be installed by
driving plumb to the required grades or set in concrete as
shown or directed by the Engineer. When the pavement is
within one 111 meter of the guardrail, the posts shall.
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. be set before
placing the pavement.
2
If ground conditions are such that pilot holes are
necessary to prevent damage to posts during driving. all
space around steel posts aftff' driving shall be filled with
dry send or fine gravel.
3
When posts are set in concrete, the concrete shall be
placed against the excavated earth unless otherwise
permitted.
4
Continuous lengths of rail or cable shall be installed
and alignment checked and adjusted before final
tightening of bolts, etc. Unless otherwise specified. bolted
connections shall be tor que to six (6) to seven (7}
kilogram-meters. Bolts that extend at least six (6)
millimeters but not more than twenty-five (25) millimeters
beyond the nuts shall be used. Rail elements shall be
erected in a smooth continuous line with the laps in the
direction of traffic flow.
Sultanat of Oman. St.no!rd 5-fl..-cn fot ~d 1'.1 Bndgo Cormtuc:ion 2010
5
Posts may be erected by driving with approved
mechanical devices. The method of driving shall not
substantially alter the crass-sectional dimensions of the
posts or materially damage the galvanization I coating.
Battered tops shall not be accepted. Posts which, in the
opinion of tho Engineer, are bent or otherwise damaged
during or after erection, shall be removed and replaced at
6
Damaged galvanized surfaces may be repaired, only
if so approved by the Engineer. Such surfaces shall be
repaired by thoroughly wire brushing and then applying
two coats of primer in accordance with Section 7, Clause
7.2.6.
7
Guardrail anchor terminals shall be installed at the
locations shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer
all in accordance with the Drawings and Special
Specifications.
13.1.4.2 Concrete Barriers

Construction of concrete barriers and terminal
sections shall conform to the Drawings and Special
Specification. Concrete barriers shall present a smooth,
uniform appearance in their final position, conforming to
the horizontal and vertical lines shown on the Drawings or
as ordered by the Engineer, and shall be free of lumps,
sags, or other irregularities. The top and exposed faces of
the barrier shall not vary more than more than six (6)
millimeters between any two (21 contact points when
tested with a four (41 meter straightedge laid on the
surfaces. Transverse expansion joints of one (ll
centimeter thick pre-molded filler shall be provided in all
concrete barriers at spacing not exceeding fifteen ( 151
meters center to center. All transverse expansion joints
will be weather sealed with a smooth and uniform bead of
durable sealant approved by the Engineer.
2
Concrete barriers may be precast, cast-in-place with
fixed forms, or extruded with slip forms at the Contractor's
option end approval of the Engineer. Concrete barriers
constructed by castinginplace with fixed forms shall
conform to the provisions of Section 5. Concrete shall be
Class 25 as per Paragraph 5.1.3.4.
3
Concrete barriers constructed by means of en
extrusion machine or other similar type equipment shall
be of thoroughly consolidated concrete, and the exposed
surfaces shall conform to the requirements of Section 5.
The Contractor shall furnish evidence of successful
operation of the extrusion machine or ather equipment by
constructing a trial section of barrier or by other evidence
suitable to the Engineer. Concrete shall be fed to the
extrusion machine at a uniform rate. The machine shall be
operated under sufficient uniform restraint to forward
motion to produce a thoroughly consolidated mass of
concrete free from surface pits larger than two (21
centimeters in diameter and requiring no further finishing.
The concrete shall be of such consistency that, after
extrusion, it will maintain the shape of the barrier without
support. The grade for the top of the concrete barrier shall
be indicated by an offset guide line set by the Contractor

and approved by the Engineer.
4
The forming portion of the extrusion machine shall
be readily adjusts ble vertically during the forward motion
of the machine to conform to the predetermined grade
line. A grade line gauge or painter shall be attached to the
machine in such a manner that a continual comparison
can be made between the barrier being placed and the
established grade line as indicated by the offset guide II ne.
Other means of controlling barrier grade may be
permitted by the Engineer. Expansion joints of the width
shown on the plans shall be constructed by sawing
through the barrier section to its full width. If sawing is
performed before the concrete has hardened, the adjacent
portions of the barrier shall be firmly supported with close
fitting shields. When sawing is performed after the
application of curing compound, the exposed faces of the
barrier In the vicinity of the joint shall be treated with
curing compound after sawing the joint.
5
If stationary forms for concrete barriers are used,
they shall be removed as soon as possible after the
concrete has set enough to maintain the shape of the
barrier without support in order to facilitate finishing. The
surface shall be free from pits larger than one ( 11
centimeter in diameter. The surface shall be given a final
soh brush finish with strokes parallel to the line of the
barriers. Finishing with a brush application of grout will
not be permitted. Surfaces shall be finished as necessary
to produce smooth, even surfaces of uniform texture and
appearance. free from bulges, depressions, and other
imperfections. The use of power sanders, carborundum
stones, or disks may be required to remove bulges or
other imperfections.
6
Exposed surfaces of concrete barriers shall be cured
by the water method" in accordance with the provisions
of "curing and protection in Section 5 Paragraph 5.3.3.12.
The Engineer may permit the concrete barriers to be cured
by use of curing compound" in accordance with the
provisions of Section 5, Paragraph 5.3.3.12 of these
Standard Specifications.
13.1.4.3 Impact Attenuators

G.R.E.A.T. system and other impact attenuators shall
be installed in accordance with the requirements
/recommendations I instructions provided by the
manufacturers and all to the approval and satisfaction of
the Engineer. A copy of these recommendations and
instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer upon
delivery of the materials.
2
The QuadGuard System shall consist of crushable
cartridges surrounded by a framework of steel Quadbea m
guardrail which can telescope rearward during head-on
impacts. The QuadGuard System shall have a center
monorail which will resist lateral movement during side
angle impacts. The nose shall consist of a formed plastic
nose wrap.
3
A bay describes a section of the QuadGuard System
consisting of a cartridge, a diaphragm and two fender
133 .
~~
Mlnlatry of TronRport &.
Commun~cl'lltlona
DGRLT
~~<Safety Barri ers and Fences
panels. Each bay shall be fined with an energy absorbing

cartridge. The outside of the cartridge shall be fabricated
from a weather resistant plastic. The front portion of the
system shall be fitted with Type I cartridges. The rear
portion of the system shall be fitted w ith Type II cartridges.
All cartridges shall include a cartridge replacement
indicator.
4
The rear end of each Ouadbeam fender panel shall
overlap and be connected to the diaphragm of the next
bay by means of a bolt and enlarged "mushroom" washer.
The bolt fits through the long horilontal slot in the forward
fender panel. This permits the movement. front to back, of
one set of fender panels relative to the panels in the
underlying-rearward bay. The back portion of each fender
panel shall be tapered to help maximize performance
during wrong-way, re-directive impacts.
5
The monorail support structure shall be made of
steel and be anchored to a specified concrete pad. The
monorail shall prevent lateral movement, vertical
movement and overturning movement of the diaphragms
during design impacts.
6
The nose section shall contain a nose cover and a
crushable cartridge and is not counted as a bay. The nose
cover shall be made from a plastic material formulated to
resist weathering. The nose shall attach to the front
diaphr.~gm. Standard colors shall be gray or yellow.
13.1.5
Guardrails of each type and. reinstallation of

guardrails, are each measured by the linear met er along
the front face, excluding terminal sections. Measurement
shall be based on the dimensions as shown on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
2
No separate measurement is made for posts. blocks,
plates, splices, bolts , nuts, screws. studs and other fixing
accessories nor for excavation and concrete post bases, all
of whK:h work is considered as su bsldiary to the guardrail
and their cost is deemed to be Included in the rates for
guardrait.
3
Guardrall transition sections. including hardware
necessary to meet the requirements of the installation.
shall be measured separately only when the transition
section is shown on the Drawings and listed In the Bill of
Quantities. Otherwise such work shall be considered
subsidiary to the standard guardrail section.
4
Concrete barriers of each type are measured by
linear meters, based on the dimensions shown on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer
No separate measurement is made for the barrier
5
base, reinforcement bars, dowel bars or concrete filling,
Excavation for the concrete barriers shall not be measured
separately but will be considered as subsidiary work
except when such excavation is part of and is measured in
conjunction with the roadway excavation. In such
instances. the barrier excavt t ion shall be measured and
included i n the quantity of unclassified excavation as
provi ded for in Section 2.
13-4 .
6
Guardrail and concrete barrier reflectors shall not be
measured for separate payment. Their installation will be
considered subsidiary to the constructron of the guardrail
or concrete barriers.
7
Terminals, terminal end sections, and Impact
attenuators shall be measured by the unit for each type
authorized, completed and accepted by the Engineer,
based on the number of units shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the El'l{lineer.
13.1.6
Basis of Payment
The completed and accepted work, as measured

above, will be paid for at the contract unit rates in the Bill
of Quantities. There will be no separate payment for posts.
Payments in accOt'dance with the unit rates shall be full
compensation for all r equired materials. transport.
equipment, tool s, labor, and all other Items necessary for
13.1.7

more of the following items:
WBeam G/rall, standard section (type) (lin.m.)
W-Beam G/rail, transition section {type) (lin.m.)
Hill W-Bum G/rail. terminal (end type)
(nr.)
(iv) Thrie Beam Glrail, st andard section
(lin.m.)
M
Thrie Beam G/rail transition
section (type)
(lin.m.)
(vii Thrl e Beam Glrall. terminal( end type)
(nr.)
{vii) Concrete Bar ri er, single face (type)
(lin.m.l
(lin.m.)
(vi iii Concrete Barrier, double face(type)
(ix )
Concrete Barrier, transition
Section {type)
(nt. )
{x )
Impact Anenuator (type)
(nr.l
{xl) Guardrail Re-inst allati on (type)
{li n.m.l
(i)
(ill
13.2
Fences
13.2.1
Description
This Sub-section describes furnishing end installing

fences, gates, and guards in accordance with the Drawings
and Speci al Specification, at the locations and to the Jines
and grades shown on the plans or ordered by the
Engi neer. The work shall include all foundation or/ and
additions needed to have a fully operational system.
13.2.2
References
American Society For Testing and Material

ASTMA 392
Specification for ZincCoated

Chain Ll nk Fence Fabric
Steel
ASTM A 53M 07 St andard Specification for Pipe, Steel ,

Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
Sultnata af Omn. St.>rn!Jd Spor;ofic.lttono l01 Roa~ II< 8ridgo C..n&trut:oon 2010
ASTM A501 - 07
Standard Specification for Hotformed

Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing
AST M A618M - 04 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed

Welded and Seamless High-Strength
Low-Alloy Structural Tubing
ASTM A123M-09 Standard Specification for Zinc {HotDip Galvanized! Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A153M-o9 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating
{Hot-Dipl on Iron and Steel Hardware
2
British Standards
BS4360 HR
13.2.3
Steel for general engineering purposes
Materials
Chain Link Fence. Chain link fabric shall conform to

ASTM A 392 (galvanized!. Mesh size shall be fifty {50)
millimeters nominal, and wire size shall be three and
seventy-six hundredths (3.761 millimeters diameter (No. 9
American Wire Gauge, AWGI before galvanizing. If
required by the Drawings or Special Specification, fabric
shall be plastic coated.
2
Tension wire for chain link fence and industrial fence
shall be a minimum of four and five tenths (4.51
millimeters diameter. Tension wire for other fences shall
be ofthe minimum diameter shown on the Drawings.
3
Posts and Braces. Circular steel posts and braces
shall be galvanized, conforming to ASTM A 53M-07,
Schedule 40 and shall be of the dimensions shown on
the Drawings. At the option of the Contractor, alternate
galvanized steel shapes having the minimum equivalent
bending strength in both directions may be substituted for
circular posts and braces.
4
Rectangular hollow sections shall conform to ASTM
A 501, BS 4360 Grade 43C.
5
End corner posts, straining posts and line posts,
along with braces and stretchar bars thereof, shall be of
the sizes and dimensions indicated in the Drawings. Line
posts shall be spaced at three (3.01 meters on centers
maximum, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Gate posts shall conform to the requirements of this
specification and shall be of the sizes and dimensions
Post tops she II be pressed steel, wrought iron,
6
malleable iron, or plastic caps to manufacturer's standard
as approved by the Engineer, designated as a weather
tight closure cap for each post.
7
Posts and braces for high tension wire fence she II
conform to ASTM A 618M-04, Grade 1.0 Material shall be
of the shapes and dimensions shown on the Drawings and
shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123M09.
B
All miscellaneous hardware shall conform to the
requirements shown on the plans, and shall be galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A153M-09.
9
Tie wire shall conform to ASTM A 112 (withdrawn
1990 w<th no replacement!, and shall be minimum three
and five tenths (3.51 millimeters diameter unless otherwise
shown.
10
Concrete for setting posts shall conform to the
requirements of Section 5, Sub-section 5.1 .3.4.
1 1 Reinforcing steel shall be of the size and grade
shown on the plans and shall conform to Section 5. Subsection 5.2
12 Materials for gates shall be of the sizes, dimensions
and types indicated in the Drawings.
13 Gate perimeter frames shall be fabricated of tubular
members. Additional horizontal and vertical members
shall be provided to ensure proper gate operation and for
attachment of fabric. hardware and accessories. Space so
that frame members are not more than two and forty five
hundredths (2.451 meters apart.
14 Gate frames shall be assembled by welding or with
special malleable or pressed steel fittings and rivets for
rigid connections. Same fabric as for the fenca shall be
used, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Fabric
shall be installed with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars
may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach
stretchers to gate frame at not more than three hundred
eighty (3801 mm on centers. Attach hardware with rivets
or by other means which will provide security against
removal or breakage.
15 Diagonal cross-bracing consisting of ten (101 mm
diameter adjustable length truss rods shall be installed on
gales, where necessary to ensure frame rigidity without
sag or twist, as approved by the Engineer.
13.2.4

Requirements
The Contractor shall stake all sections of fence as

shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer prior
to beginning work. Top elevations of all posts shall be
computed to follow a smooth grade with curves at
transitions. Cutting the tops from posts after Insta11ation
shall not be permitted. The required line of the fence shall
be cleared of all obstacles and debris which would
interfere with the line of the fence. Minor grading may be
required to achieve a smooth line.
2
Posts shall be set plumb to the required line and
grade in concrete footings. No wire or fabric sha II be
strung taut until line posts have been set for at least one
(11 day and corner posts for at least three (31 days. In
sandy areas or other areas of poor soil support, the
Contractor sha II enlarge the foeti ngs as required by the
Engineer to maintain adequate fence tension.
3
Wire or fabric shall be strung uniformly at the
required tension and attached to corner posts and brace
posts before permanently attaching to line posts. Any
significant sags or de-tensioning which occurs after
installation shall be corrected by the Contractor.
13-5
~~
MJnlatry or Tr:anport &
Comm~nlcfttlona
DGRlT
/".~<:safety Barriers and Fences
4
When fencing crosses ravines or other discontinuities
in the terrain causing gaps under the fence, the Contractor,
if so ordered by the Engineer, shall modify the installation
to the extent practical bv adding strands or additional
fabric so as to provide the required access control without
interfering with drainage.
5
Galvanized gates or fencing materials which are
constructed or repaired bv welding, cutting, or other work
which damages the coating shall be repaired by grinding
smooth all damaged surfaces and painting with two (2)
coats of paint specified in Section 7, Clause 7.2.6, "Zinc
Dust Zinc Oxide Primer" .
6
The materials incorf)Orated Into the fences and gates
shall be sampled, tested and evaluated in accordance with
the standards stated in Clause 13.2.2, all to the approval
and acceptance of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
adjust, redo or complement anv test result ordered bv the
Engineer.
13.2.6
Each tvPB of fence is measured bv the linear meter,

based on the horizontal length shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer. Measurement shall be from
center to center of end or corner posts. Gates and other
gaps shall be deducted from the total length.
2
Gates shell be measured by the square meter for
each tvpe, based on the nominal height of the gate
mu!tlplied bv the required distance between the adjacent
fence endfgate support posts.
3
No separate measurement shill be made for
excavation. backfill. grading, co!'ICrete footings I
foundations, or for any other material and work required,
all of which shall be considered su bsidiarv to fence or gate,
and whose costs are deemed to be included in the rates
for these items.
13.2.6
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work as

measured above w ill be paid at the contract unit rates
specified I n the Bill of Quantities, which rates shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, for all labor,
transport, installation, equipment, tools, supplies, and all
other items necessarv for the proper completion of the
Work.
13.2.7

more of the following items:
(i)
{ii)
(iii)
(iv)
lvl
1U
Chain Link Fence (tvpel(h:e!ght)

Uin.m.)
PedestrianfAnimal Fencing
(lin.m.)
ltvpe) {height)
{lin.m.)
Wire Fence{type) {heighl)
Sand Dune Fence {type)
{lin.m.)
{sq.m.)
Gate ltvpel
Ref.
11tle
14.1
Traffic Signs
14.1.1
DefCriptlon
14-1
14.1.2
General
14-1
14-1
14.1.2.1
14.1.3
14.1.3.1
Page No.
Standards
Materials
14-1
14-1
References
14-1
14., .3.2
Sign Classification
14-1
14.1.3.3
Genera ~
Requirements for Permanent
Traffic Signs
141
14.1.3.4
PostJ for Permanent Traffic Signs
14-1
14.1.3 5
Foundat.ons for Permanent Traffic

Signs and S gnals
14.1.3.6
Signs
14. 1.3.7
14-2
Sign Faces for Permanent Traffic

Signs
14.1.3.8
142
Sign Plates for Permanent Traffic
142
Manufacture and Assembly of

Permanent Traffic Signs
1-4-2
14.1.3.9
Covering of Permanent Traffic S igns
142
14.1.3.10
Depth and Marker Posts

(for Floodwaysl
14.1.3.11
14-2
Kilometer Posts 151cm spacing) and

Kilometar Reference Posts
(1km spacing)
141 .3.12
carriageway or right-of-way marking I

14.1.3.13
14-2
Delineator Posts (for edge of

14-3
Traffic Signs on Cantilevers

and Gantt'les
14-3
14.1.3.14
Preparation and Finish of Metal
14.1.3.15
Traffic Cones
143
14-3
14.1.3.16
lilashlng Beacons
143
Temporary Traffic Signs
14-3
Con.tructlon Requl,.menta
14-3
14-3
and Other Surfaces
14.1.3.17
14.1.4
14.1.4. 1
14.1A.2
Posts for Permanent Traffic Signs
14-3
Sign Plates for Permanent

Traffic S igns
14.3
Page No.
Title
14.1.4.4
Sign Faces for Permanent Traffic

Signs
14.1.4.5
Manufacture and Assembly of
14.1.4.6
Location and Enaction of Permanent
Permanent Traffic Signs
1-4-4
14-4
Traffic Signs
14-4
14. 1.4.7
Cover:ng of Perm-nt Traffic Signs
14-5
14.1.4.8
14-5
14.1.5
14.1.6
Bast. of Payment
14-5
14-6
14.1.7
Item~ in the
14-6
14.2
Road Markings
BHI of OuantitiM
14-5
14.2.1
Description
14-6
14.2.2
Meteria..
14-5
14-5
14.2.2 1
Thermoplastic Material
14.2.2.2
Liquid P.aint
Testing
1+-7
14.2.2.4
Painting of curbs
,. 2-3
Construction Requirement
14+8
14.2.2.3
1<4--B
14-8
14.2.3.1
Raised Rib {Profiledl Road Markings
14-9
14.2.3.2
Temporary Road Markings
14-9
14.2.3.3
Removal of Road Markings
14.2.3.4
Maslting of Road Mark1ngs
14-8
1<1-9
14.2.3.5
14.2.6
Longitudinal Road Markings Lateral

Tolerances
Method of Muaurement
Balli of Payment
Item~ In the Bill of Ou8fltitie1
14.3
Road Studs
14.3.1
14.3.2
Description
14.2.4
14.2.5
M.teria..
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-9
14-10
14.3.2.1
Permanent Retroreflecting
14.3.2.2
Temporary Retro~ecting
Road Studs
14-10
14.3.2.3
Ceramic Bunons
14-10
Road Studs
Foundations for Permanent Traffic

Signs and S ignals
14.1.4.3
Ref.
14.3.3
Construdlon Requirements
1,C.10
14-10
Ret.
14.3.3.1
:mre
Permanent Retroreftecting
Road Studs
14.3.3.2
Tempora!V Retroreflecting
Road Studs
14.3.3.3
Non retrorefteeting Road Studs
14.3.4
14.3.6
14.3.8
P.age No.
1oio10
14--10
Method of Moesurement
14-10
, ...10
Baals ot Payment
1...10
,..,,0
Traffic Signs and Road Markings
14.1
Traffic Signs
14.1.1
Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for supply

and erection of sign assemblies, comprising posts, clips,
post caps, gantries, sign faces and foundations.
14.1.2
General
14.1.2.1
Standards
All traffic signs, whether permanent or temporary,

shall be of the size, shape, color and type described in the
Highway Design Standard, Section 19, unless otherwise
approved by The Engineer. Signs thet are not described in
the Highway Design Standard must be specially approved
by the Employer and the Engineer. Where the use of
temporary traffic signs is proposed, the Contractor shall
obtain the approval of the Engineer and the agreement of
the ROP and the Concerned Authority for the use of the
signs at the locations proposed.
2
Signs that are changeable by means other than
manual operation require approval of their construction
and operating mechanisms by the Engineer. This
requirement is in addition to the need for the design of the
sign to be described in the Highway Design Standards or
otherwise approved by the Employer.
remain in position at the completion of the

Permanent Works.
14.1.3.3
Permanent traffic sign materials, construction,

assembly, test, location and erection shall comply with BS
EN 12899 where applicable and the requirements shown
on the Drawings or Schedules.
2
The sign plate shall be manufactured using 3mm
thick alloy aluminium sheet stiffened with alloy aluminium
rails or galvanized steel frame and designed to accept the
fastening clips. The sign face material shall be retroreflective sheeting applied to the aluminium sheet in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The
supporting posts may be galvanized steel or alloy
aluminium, as approved by the Engineer, specifically
designed to cope with the wind conditions of the location.
The sign plate shall be fixed to the post with stainless steel
clips and fasteners that do not pierce the face of the sign.
The posts shall be fixed to the concrete foundation as
described in Paragraph 14.1.3.5 of this specification.
3
Before the commencement of manufacture the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of The Engineer
three copies of:
i.
14.1.3
Materials
ii.
14.1.3.1
References
iii.
BD 94107 Design of Minor Structures (UK Design

Manual for Roads and Bridges).
2
BS EN 12899 Part 1 Fixed Vertical Road Traffic Signs.
BS 8408 Road Traffic Signs - Specification for

Microprismatic Sheeting Materials.
EN 1993 Design of Steel Structures.
EN 1999 Design of Aluminium Structures.
BS EN 13422 includes Cones and cylinders.
BS EN 12352 includes Flashing Beacons.
14.1.3.2
Sign Classification
The following classifications of signs apply:

i.
ii.
Permanent Traffic Signs:Traffic signs described in the Highway Design

Standard, or specially approved by the
Employer, designed to remain in position at the
completion of the Permanent Works.
Temporary Traffic Signs:a) Traffic signs defined in the Highway Design
Standards that comply with all the
requirements of a permanent traffic sign,
but which will not remain in position et the
completion of the Permanent Works
b) Traffic signs designed by the Contractor and
specially approved but which will not
General Requirements for Permanent Traffic

Signs
iv.
a detailed schedule (including location) of aII

traffic signs.
fabrication and sign face drawings for
'directional' signs end 'informative' signs.
fabrication and sign face drawings for any gantry
mounted signs.
fabrication and sign face drawings for any
illuminated signs.
4
The beck of each traffic sign shall have an indelible
label showing manufacturer, year of erection, sheeting
materia I class. sign face product. The text for the label
shall be in English and Arabic with a character height of 5
to 10mm.
5
Traffic signs shall be carefully handled at all times to
prevent damage and transported and stored in accordance
with the sign face or sign sheeting manufacturer's
instructions.
14.1.3.4
Posts for permanent traffic signs shall be as shown in

the Drawings or Schedules, shall comply with BS EN
12899-1, and shall be either.
i.
galvanized steel posts of tubular or rectangular

hollow section complying with EN 1993
(Design of Steal Structures).
ii.
aluminium posts of tubular or rectangular

hollow section complying with EN 1999
(Design of Aluminium Structures I.
2
Where, exceptionally, traffic signs are illuminated,
base compartments for electrical equipment shall be as
shown in the Drawings or schedules and shall be fitted
with vanda I and weather resistant locks to the approval of
14-1
~
~
Mlnlatry of Trnnsport & CantmunK:Dtkma
OGRLT
~
~<Traffic Signs and Road Markings
the e ngineer. Keys, in the quantities stated in the

Drawings or Schedules, shall be provided. Wherever
practicable, access doors shall be on the side of the
compartment furthest from approach lng traffic. In the case
of signs supported by more than one post, the
compartment shall normally be in the post furthest from
the carriageway.
14.1.3.8
3
Flange mounted sign posts, where specified on the
Drawings or Schedules. shall have holes or slots i n the
flange plate to accommodate the anchorage system.
Structural design of flange mounted sign assemblies shall
comply with Section 6 (Structural Steel and Other Metal
Work I
Where traffic signs are to be covered prior to use or

to show a new message, the following method shall be
adopted;
14.1.3.5
Traffic Signs
Manufacture and assembly of traffic signs shall
comply with BS EN 128991.
14.1.3.9
i.
Signals
ii.
3
Concrete foundations for multiple posts should
consist of a single t ong composite block.
Sign Plates for Permanent Traffic Signs
Permanent sign plates shall be as shown in the

Drawings or Schedules and shall comply w;th BS EN
12899-1
14.1.3.7
Sign Faces for Permanent Traffic Signs
Faces for permanent traffic signs shall be as shown

i n the Drawings or Schedules. and shall comply with BS
EN 12899-1.
2
Sign face material shall comply with ASTM 04956.01
Type IJI (encapsulated lens sheeting) (also known as High
I ntensity), or ASTM 04956.01 Type IV (microprismatlc
sheeting!. In locations where increased conspicuity is
required, such as chevrons and similar hazard warning
signs, sign face material shall comply with ASTM 0495601 Type VII material (microprismatic sheeting).
3
Testing of sign face materials shall comply with BS
8408 and BS EN 12899-1.
4
A warranty statement from the sign face sheeting
manufacturer must be provided stating that there is a
100% replacement guarantee for the effective shelf life and
performance life of the material being supplied of 9 years.
Failure to supply the warranty statement shall be cause for
rejection.
5
Deliveri es of sign face material shall be accompanied
by certification that all specifications are met.
Permanent changes to permanent signs
Temporary coveri11g of permanent signs (prior to

use I
A temporary opaque self adhesive plastic film
overlay shall be used to cover the sign face. The
overlay shall be compatible with the original sign
face and shall be applied and removed in full
compliance with the sheeting manufacturer's
recommendations.
2
Posts should be flange mounted to foundations as
shown on the Drawings or Schedules.
14.1.3.6
Covering of Permanent Traffic Signs
A perma11ent self adhesive plastic film overlay

shall be used to display the new legend. The
overlay shall be compatible with the original sign
face sheeting and match the appea ranee of the
original sign face and shall be applied In full
compliance with the sheeting manufacturer's
recommendations.
Foundations for Permanent Traffic Signs and
The type and size of foundations for permanent

traffic signs shall be as shown in the Drawings or
Schedules and shall comply with BD 94107 (Design of
minor structures. UK Design Manual for Roads end
Bridges!.
Manufacture and Assembly of Permanent
iii. Use of spray applications to temporarily cover

sign faces can be used, subject to the approval of
the Engineer. provided that the material is
compatible with the sign face m aterial and is
used strictly
in
compliance
with
the
iv. Temporary changes to permanent signs

A tern porary self adhesive plastic film overlay
shall be used to display the new legend. The
overlay shall be compatible w ith the original sign
face sheeting and match the appearance of the
original sign face and shall be applied and
removed in full compliance with the sheeting
2
The method of application ;md removal of temporary
covering is manufacturer specifc and their instructions
must be followed exactly to avoid damage to the
permanent sign face material.
14.1.3.10 Depth and Marker Posts (for Roadways)
Depth and marker posts shall be constructed to
withstand permanent immersion M-1 water and, in other
respects, shall be constructed as for permanent traffic
signs and be installed in the locations shown in the
Drawings or Schedules.
14.1.3.11
Kilometer Posts (5km spacing) and Kilometer

Reference Posts (1km spacing)
Kilometer posts and kilometer reference posts shall

be constructed as for permanent traffic signs and
1-42
Sultonot<l of Omn. Sto>ldRJ Specilicatrona rw ~d I. Bndg Construction 2010
materials, construction, assembly, testing, location and

erection shall be as shown on the Drawings or Schedules
and shall comply with BS EN 128991.
14.1 .3.12
Delineator Posts (for edge of carriageway or

right-of-way markingl
Delineator posts shall comply with BS EN 12899 Part

3. Post construction and color and type of reflective
marker shall be as shown in the Drawings or Schedules.
14.1.3.13
Traffic Signs on Cantilevers and Gantries
Where traffic signs are erected on cantilevers or

gantries the sign plates and sign faces shall comply with
the requirements for permanent signs specified in this
Section and the Drawings or Schedules.
2
Cantilevers and gantries shall be in accorda nee with
the Drawings or Schedules. Fabricated steel gantries shall
be in accordance with Section 6 (Structural Steel and other
Metal Workl and Section 7 (Paintl ofthis Specification.
14.1.3.14
Preparation and Finish of Metal and Other

Surfaces
Permanent traffic signs (and temporary traffic signs

where specified in the Drawings and Schedulesl shall be
protected a gal nst corrosion and finished in com pi iance
with Section 6 (Structural Steel and other Metal Workl and
Section 7 (Pai ntl of this Specification as applicable.
2
Posts, frames, purlins (stiffeners! and general finings
and fixings shall be protected against corrosion as
specified, in compliance with Section 6 (Structural Steel
and other Metal Workl and Section 7 (Paintl of this
Specification.
3
To prevent specular reflection, the backs of
aluminium alloy sheets forming plate signs shall be dulled
using a method to be agreed by the Employer or be
coated as follows:
i.
painted matt traffic grey, using a paint system

specified in Section 7.
ii.
covered with man grey non-retro-reflective

sheeting.
4
Electrical equipment cabinets and metal components
of electrical equipment in base compartments shall be
protected against corrosion as specified in Section15 of
this Specification.
Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or
5
Schedules. stainless steel shall be left untreated except
where the component is visible against the sign face when
it shall be covered by a compatible material of a color to
match that part of the face.
14.1.3.15 Traffic Cones
Traffic cones shall comply with BS EN 13422.
14.1.3.16
Flashing Beacons
Flashing beacons shall comply with BS EN 12352.
14.1.3.17 Temporary Traffic Signs

Temporary traffic sign materials, construction,
assembly, testing, location and erection shall comply with
the requirements for permanent traffic signs, and with BS
EN 12899 as applicable, and shall be as shown on the
Drawings or Schedules.
2
Where a temporary sign is to be erected it may be
fixed or frame mounted so that it can be easily relocated
or reused. Fabricated frames shall conform to Section 6
(Structural Steel and Other Metal Workl.
3
Temporary traffic signs Include all vertical sign types
and bollards and marker, depth, kilometer, kilometer
reference and delineator posts.
14.1.4
14.1.4.1
Posts shall not protrude above the top of the sign.
2
Signs erected on a single post shall be positioned so
that the post is in the center of the sign, unless otherwise
3
The fasteners used for fixing the sign to the post
shall have shear heads so that the hexagonal head of the
bolt shears off when the fixing is tightened, leaving a
tamper proof fixing.
4
As an alternative for item 3 above, theft resistant
methods of fixing can, with the approval of the Engineer,
consist of welding up appropriate areas offastening.
14.1.4.2
Foundations for Permanent Traffic Signs and

Signals
Pits for post foundations shall be excavated to the

sizes shown on the Drawings and cleared of all loose
material before placing of concrete and backfilling.
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 5 of
these Specifications and the Drawings, and where steel
reinforcement is used, be protected with two coats of
bitumen material in accordance with paragraph 5.10 3.6 of
these Specifications
2
Posts for all traffic signs shall be installed centrally in
circular or square concrete foundations to the dimensions
shown in the Drawings or Schedules and finished with a
minimum ground cover of 150 mm.
3
Where, exceptionally, traffic signs are illuminated,
provision shall be made for cable entry through the
foundation by means of ducting as shown on the
Drawings.
4
Surfaces above foundations shall be reinstated to
match the existing surrounding surface construction and
finish in accordance with the Drawings.
14.1.4.3
Sign Plates for Permanent Traffic Signs
Fabricated plate signs up to 1.2m in height and 2.4m

width shall be made of a single substrate sheet. Above
this size, the number of sheets shall be kept to a minimum
~
~
Minltrv oiTnonapQrt & CotTlm.,nlcntlon
OGI\~T
.../"'.
~<\:Traffic Signs and Road Markings
and the separate sheets shall be rectangular and of

comparable size and shape.
Connections shall be made at every point where a purlin

crosses a post.
2
Fabricated plate signs up to 2.4m wide shall have no
vertical joints. Above 2.4m wide, joints In the stiffening
extrusions shall preferably be positioned at a vertical
support. If not, then the vertical joints in the stiffening
extrusions shall be staggered so that joints are not less
than 1.0 m apart. Only one such joint in each horizontal
stiffening extrusion shall be permitted and all joints shall
be reinforced.
4
Where purllns are not adopted the sign stiffening and
framing shall be continuous in the horizontal direction.
3
Sign face pletes shall have aU corner points rounded
as shown In the Drawings. These should match cleanly
with the associated corner radius of sign face sheeting to
be fined.
14.1.4.4
Sign Faces for Permanent Traffic Signs
Sign substrates sltall be prepared to receive sign face

sheeting materials in compliance w ith the sheeting
2
All sign face sheeting shall be fixed in accordance
with the sheeting manufacturer's instructcons.
3
Only vertical and horizontal joints shall be permitted
and ag joints i n plastic sheeting shaJI be overlapped by not
less than 6mm. The overlap in the horizontal joints shell
be from the top. Bun joims in plast ics sheeting shell not
be used, except in overlay film, or if recommended by the
sheeting manufacturer,
4
All materials comprising the sign face, including the
background, border and legends shall be carefully
matched for color at the time of sign fabrication to provide
uniform appearance bot h by day and night. The sheeting
manufacturer's recommendations on color matching
methods shall be o bserved.
5
l,etters, numerals, symbols and borders shall be clear
cut, sharp edged and without cracks.
6
Any cutout letters, numerals, symbols and borders
shall be of material compatible with the sheeti ng to which
they are applied. They shall be app1ied in accordance with
the sheeting manufacturer' s instructions.
1
Sheeting materials Including letters, numerals.
symbols and borders shall be fully adhered and there shall
be no air bubbles, creases, cracks or other blemishes.
14.1,4.5
Manufacture and Assembly of Permanent

Traffc Signs
All sign plates, frames, purlins, posts and other

components shall have rough edges smoothed prior to
assembly.
2
Where framing and stiffeni ng are not an integral pan
of the sign plate their joints shall be welded or joined with
suitable brackets utilizing nuts, bolts and washers.
3
Where purlins are adopted they shall be attached to
each vertical member of the sign freme and the sign
stiffening and framing shall be continuous i n the vertical
direction. Purlins shall be spaced equally apart.
14-4
5
Rivets and other devices used for fixing sign plates to
their stiffeners or framework, or in the construction of
housings, shall be of a material compatible with the
materials being joined. Spacing of rivets or other fixing
devices shall be uniform and shall not elCceed t50 mm
around the outside edge of any sheet or section of sheet,
and shall not exceed 300mm on cross braces. Hollow
rivets shall not be used. Where sign plates need to be
stiffened this shall be achieved in a manner such that the
sign face materia l is not punctured or otherwise damaged
to accommodate the stiffening.
6
Rivets or other fi>cings must not protrude through the
sign face sheeting
An addit ional washer of neoprene, nylon or plastic

shall be used between the sign face and any metal nuts,
bolts, washers and screws to protect It from corrosive or
other damaging effects.
B
Where traffic sign posts are required to have flange
plates these shall be secured by anchorages and
attachment systems in accordance with the Drawi ngs. The
bolts shall be lightly greased before fina l installation and
they and their anchorages shall be installed so as to
achieve the loadings, torque settings and other
requirements in accordance w ith the Drawings and the
manufacturer's Instructions.
9
Sheet signs shall be connected to posts (or lighting
columns where permittedl by correctly sized stainless
steel clips.
10
Where ferrous components are permitted any
drilling of them shall be completed before the application
of any finish.
11 Prior to fitting any sign to any fighting column, the
Contractor shall seek the approval of the Engineer t o
ensure that the column loading is acceptable. No holes
shall be drilled in the lighting column except those whose
location and size are specified on the Drawings.
12 Traffic signs to be erected on lighting colUmns shall
have fixings compatible with the column cross section and
finish.
14 Variable message traffiC signs shall also comply with
these paragraphs.
14.1.4.6
Location and Erection of Permanent Traffic

Signs
The approximate location of each traffic sign is

shown in the Drawings and Schedules. Exact locations will
be as directed on Site by the Engineer and shall be
recorded as-built.
All posts shah be erected plumb and where two or
2
more posts are provided for any one sign, the faces of the
posts shall be aligned.
3
Signs erected on two posts shall have each post
positioned so that the dista nee from the center of the post
to the edge of the sign plate is 300mm unless otherwise
shown in the Drawings or Schedules.
tools, and other items necessary for the proper completion

of the work as specified.
14.1.7
4
Traffic signs mounted on posts, except those on
gantries, shall be erected to have their face plumb vertical
and be orientated at 95 degrees from the carriageway
centerline to reduce specular reflection.
i.
ii.
iii.
Highway sign, triangular, (height mm). (nr.)

Highway sign, circular, (diameter mm). (nr.)
Highway sign, rectangular, size
(finished sign area)
(sq m).
iv. Highway sign, octagonal,
(height mm)
(nr.)
v. Sign post support assembly
(nr.)
including foundation (type).
vi. Breakaway sign post support
assembly including foundation
(type).
(nr.)
vii. Overhead sign support including
Foundation (type).
(nr.)
The Contractor shall provide full proposals for the

erection oftraffic signs mounted on gantries or cantil avers
for approval by the Engineer.
6
No traffic sign shall be dismantled, resited or
removed without the prior approval of The Engineer.
14.1.4.7
Covering of Permanent Traffic Signs
Any traffic sign erected at such a time that its legend

does not relate either wholly or in part to the traffic
movement and route in operation, shall have its sign face
covered as specified in Paragraph 14.1.3 9 until such time
as its legend is applicable.
2
Under no circumstances shell adhesive tape or other
non approved adhesive material be applied to the face of
any sign.
3
Removal of any covering shall be carried out with the
minimum disturbance to traffic.
14.1.4.8
Removal of temporary traffic signs shall be carried

out as soon as they become superfluous or a hazard to
traffic. Methods of removal shall ensure the minimum
disturbance to traffic consistent with safety. Making good
shall be carried out immediately after removal of the
traffic sign.
14.1.5
Rectangular signs shall be measured by the area in

square meters of the sign face installed. The rates shall
include sign substrate, sign face and all fixing devices.
2
Triangular, circular and other shapes of signs shall
be measured by the number of each type as installed.
3
Sign posts support assemblies shall be measured by
the number of each type installed. The rates shall include
for the foundation and all fixings and painting or other
protection.
4
Temporary signs are not measured separately. Their
cost shall be included as part of the traffic management
requirements stated In Section 1, Subsection 1. 7 of the
Specification.
14.1.6
Basis of Payment

rate for highway signs in the Bill of Quantities which rate
shall be full compensation for supplying, fabrication,
erection, painting, fixing,
foundation,
excavation
backfilling, and for materials, transport, labor, equipment,
14.2
Road Markings
14.2.1
Description
The Subsection describes requirements for road

marking consisting of white or yellow lines, chevron
hatching, arrows, lettering and painting of curbs.
14.2.2
Materials
The materiel for markings on the carriageway shall

be either of the following, as shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer:
I.
ii.
14.2.2.1
Thermoplastic material to British Standard BS

EN1436: 2007, or
Liquid paint to British Standard BS EN1871 : 2000
and BS EN1436: 2007.
Thermoplastic Material
Type I road markings do not necessarily have special

properties that enhance retroreflection in wet or rainy
conditions. Type II road markings, on the other hand, are
road markings with special properties intended to enhance
the retroreflection in wet or rainy conditions. Type Ill road
markings are profiled markings designed for use on the
edges of major, heavily trafficked highways. Type I
markings sha II not be used without special instruction
from the Employer.
Thermoplastic road markings shall consist of binder,

resin, intermix beads, pigment, plasticizing oil and such
other constituents as necessary to reach the perform a nee
level required. The objective of BS EN1436 2007 is to set
the performance level that the thermoplastic road marking
must reach; it does not lay down specific percentages of
binder, resin, Intermix beads, pigment or other
constituents. Subject to the restrictions stated in this
Specification, the manufacturer is free to achieve the
required performance level in any way suited to his
manufacturing techniques. However, because pavement
temperatures in Oman are very high over prolonged
periods, and because hydrocarbon resins are a proven
145
~~
MiniKtry of Trnnaport & Communic.ntlona
OORLT
~~<Traffic Signs and Road Markings
cause of blackening in road markings on hot pavements,

hydrocarbon resins shall not be used. The Contractor shall
submit a certlficate from the manufacturer stating that the
thermoplastic road marking contains no hydrocarbon
resins.
3
The softening point of the thermoplastic road
markings shall be not less than the figures shown in Table
14.2.2.1 . The flashpoint for thermoplastic materials must
be greater than or equal to 240C and drying (tack free)
time should be between 2 and 10 mins. dependent on
ambient road surface temperature and wind.
Whlut
Type I Road Markings
.. -
Type II Road Markings
Qd ;t 100 mcd/mllx
....... .
Qd ~ 130 mcd/m2/lx
-- -
. .
Type Ill Road ~!rkings
Qd ~ 160 mcdfm2Jix
Yllow
_Type I Road M_!rk~s-
Qd ~ 80 mcdlm2.1hc
Qd ;t 100 mcdlmnx
~
Type Ill Road Markings
Qd ~ 130 mcd/m1Jix
95"C minimum
Table 14.2.2-5: luminance coefficient
Type II Ro!ld Markings
ssc minimum
8
The luminance factor !PI for dry road markings shall
be greater than the figures shown in Table 14.2.2.6.
110"C minimum
Whhlr
Tabla 14.2.2-1: Softening point

4
The skid resistance of the thermoplastic road
marki ngs (assisted if necessary by the application of drop
Or"! beads) shall be not less than the figures shown In Table
14.2.2.2. (Note: Tested using the pendulum test as
specified in EN 1341 for external paving. Skid resistance
has no units.)
Type IR oa'"d Marking_s
45minimum
45minimum
Type IU Road Markings
55 m inimum
5%maximum
5%maximum
0.50 minimum
I
II = 0..:20 "!inimum
II = 0.30 minimum
II"' 0.40 minimum
9
The luminance coefficient (Od) under diffuse
illumination under dry conditions, measured in
milllcandellas (mcdl shall after one year in use conform to
the figures shown in Table 14.2.2.5.
11 For the measurement of reflection under vehicle

headlamp Illumination, the coefficient of reflected
luminance RL is used. RL is expressed in mcdlm2/lx. Road
markings in the dry under vehicle headlamp illumination
shall conform to the figures shown in Table 14.2.2.7.
White
RL ~ 100
Type 11 Road Markings
RL;t 150
7
The luminance coefficient (Odl u nder diffuse
Illumination under dry conditions measured in
millicandellas {mcd) shall conform to the figures shown in
Table 14.2.2.5.
RL~ao
RL ;t 150
..
1.9 to 2. 1 g/cm
1.9to 2. 1 g/cm
10 The luminance factor (~I for dry road markings shall

after one year in use be greater than the figures shown in
Table 14.2.2.6.
6
The relative density of the thermoplastic road
markings, measured in grams per cubic centimeter, shall
be within the range shown in Table 14.2.2.4.
Type II ~oad Markings
'
Table 14.2.2-6: luminance factor
Table 14.2.2-3: Flow resistance
l'ype I Road Markings
'
Yt~llow
5
The flow resistance of the thermoplastic road
marking shall not be more than the ftgures shown in Table
14.2.2.3.
5%maximum
II=
Table 14.2.2-2: Skid resistance
.
'
II= 0.40 minimum
Type I R~ad Markings

II= 0.30 minimum
1.9to 2. 1 g/cm
Table 14.2.24: Relative density
--
Yllow
RL;t200
-.
RL;tzOo
-
~----------
Table 14.2.2-7: Reflectorization under vehicle headlamp

illumination (dry)
14-6 .
Sultam>to of Oon<>n. StlldrcJ Spodfica1ono ror Ro&d 11. Bridge Construction 2010
12 Road markings in rain under vehicle heedlemp

illumination shell conform to the figures shown in Table
14.2.2.8.
considered necessary for the acceptance of the materials

or for the control of their application
14.2.2.2
White
Type I Road Mar!cing!
The daytime visibility of road marking paint shall be

defined by the luminance factor Jl. The classes shown in
Table 14.2.2.10 shall apply.
RL. 0t 25
Rl.Ot 35
Rl.:iso
. ~.
Yellow
Type I Road Mer~ings
:rYP:I' _II J\oad ~!rk~l'lQS
RL~~5
Rl.;t35
Rlit50
Liquid Paint
Colour
ca...
l.lumlnance factor p
.LF5
White
LF6
--
LF7
Yellow
it0.30
it0.40
it0.50
it0.30
it0.40
LF1
LF2
Table 14.2.2-10: Luminance factor
Table14.2.2-8: Reflectorlzatlon under vehicle headlamp

lllumlnatlon (rain)
13 The x, y chromaticity co-ordinates for dry road
markings shall lie within the regions defined by the comer
points as shown in Table 14.2.2.9.
White
2
The x, y chromaticity co-ordinates for dry road
markings shall lie within the regions defined by the corner
points as shown in Table 14.2.2.11.
Corner
Point-No
Yellow
White
Yellow
y
X
0.355
0.355-
X
0.443 -
y
0.399 ~-
Corner
RointNo
-)
0.3(:15
0.305
Q.f!.45
0.455
o~355
0.3-55
0.443
0.399
0.285
0.325
0.465
0.535
0.335
0.375
0:389
0.431
<i.3o5
o:30s
0.545
0.455
0;285
0.325
0.465
o.53Ji
ii.335
!).375
0.3~
0.431
Table 14.2.2-9: Color

14 In order to prevent cracking of thermoplastic when
the plasticizing oil content is reduced to prevent
blackening of the road marking, good quality resins (such
as alkyd resins, rosin esters and maleic-modified resins)
shall be used in the manufacture of thermoplastic material
instead of the hydrocarbon resins. Road markings
showing more than minimal cracking during the
warranted life of the markings will be deemed to have
failed.
15 The Contractor shall warrant that Type I and Type II
markings will continue to achieve all performance
requirements of this Specification for a minimum period
of 1 (one) year from the time of application and that Type
Ill markings will continue to achieve all similar applicable
performance requirements for a minimum period of 3
(three) years from the time of application, when used on
the edges ofthe highway as yellow edge marking.
16 In no case shall any materials be laid more than 6
mm thick. Unless specified, all white markings shall be
reflectorized by means of spherical glass beads to BS EN
1424 premixed during compounding and additionally by
spherical glass beads to BS EN 1423 wet surface applied
during application. The glass beads shall not have more
than 1,000 ppm of Arsenic Trio)(ide, 200 ppm of Lead and
1,000 ppm of Antimony. The Contractor shall supply test
certificates showing compliance with these requirements.
17 Before delivery to site, or during the course of the
work, the Engineer may call for any tests that are
Table 14.2.2-11: Color
The contrast ratio lhlding power) for white end

yellow paints shall be not less than 96% for white and 90%
for yellow when tested in accordance with ISO 2814 when
applied with a doctor bl ede of 300pm.
4
The paint shall be free from skin and settlement that
cannot be reincorporated by stirring. Drying (tack free)
time should be between 5 and 7 minutes dependent on
ambient road surface temperature and wind.
5
The skid resistance of the pei nted road markings
(assisted if necessary by the application of drop-on beads)
shall be not less than 50.
6
For the measurement of reflection under vehicle
headlamp illumination, the coefficient of reflected
luminance RL Is used. RL is expressed in mcd.m-2.1x-1.
Road markings in the dry under vehicle headlamp
illumination shall conform to the figures shown in Table
14.2.2.12.
RL it 100
White
Yellow
RLUO
Table 14.2.2-12: Reflectorizatlon under vehicle headlamp

illumination (dry)
Road markings in rain under vehicle headlamp
7
illumination shall conform to the figures shown in Table
14.2.2.13.
RL<t35
White
RL:t35
Table 14.2.2-13: Reflectorilat fon under vehicle headlemp

Illumination !rain)
~~
Mlnlstry of Trnnapor-t & Cammunlcntiona DORLT
~~<:Traffic Signs and Road Markings
8
Testing of spherical gla$$ beads shall be done to
conform with BS EN 1423 for drop on materials and BS EN
1424 for premix glass bead$. The Contractor shall warrant
that markings win continue to achieve all performance
requirements of this Speclf.cation for liquid paint for a
minimum period of 1 {onel year from the time of
application.
9
Liquid paint is unsuitable for forming raised rib edge
line markings and should not be used for this purpose.
14.2.2.3
Testing
Testing for liquid paint shall comply with BS EN 1436

2007. The softening point, flow resistance and density of
road marking material should be carried out by a roads
test;ng laboratory. The manufacturer of the road marking
material shall provide a certificate for the material stating
these values. The responsibility for the accuracy of the
figures remains with the Contractor.
2
Testing of skid resistance shall be by use of a
portable skid resistance tester designed to carry out the
Pendulum test. This is common equipment for use In the
field or in a roads testing laboratory.
3
Determination of the luminance coefftcient (Odl and
the rellectorization {All shall be by use of e road marking
retro-rellectometer which is a portable unit suitable for
use on t ite.
4
Determination of the luminance factor {~I shall be
tested using a Reflectometer whi ch is a portable unit
suitable for use on site.
5
Before delivery to site, or during the course of the
work, the Engineer may call for any tests that are
considered necessary for the acceptance of the materials
or for the control of their application.
14.2.2.4
Painting of curbs
2
Application of road marking material shall generally
be by mechanized spraying equipment consisting of a
motor powered self propelled machine with compressor.
A m inimum line width of 100mm shall be sprayed in one
pass. The separate bead gun shall be synchronized to
spray glass spheres immediately onto the surface of the
road marking. An automatic mechanism shall be fitted to
produce broken or dotted lines as shown on the Drawings
without the need for pre-measurement.
If material is applied by hand methods., the
3
Contractor shall provide stenc ~s. speclalized labor and all
necessary equipment to ensure that results match the
quality and finish of the sprayed work, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. Drop on spherical glass beads shall be
hand applied to give a consistent covering over the whole
of the surface of the road marking between 350 to 400
grams per square meter.
4
All road markings shall comply with the dimensions,
angles and proportions stated in the Highway Design
Standards.
5
Where Indicated on the Drawings, curbs shall be
painted alternately black and ye ~ow to cover the entire
exposed surface. Changes in colors shall be made at joints
between curbs.
Obsolete or existing markings to be replaced shall be
6
removed by a purpose designed line removal machine
capable of operating between 600 and 2500 meters/hour. It
should not cause damage to the road surface. The working
width shall be adapted to the width of the marking line up
to a maximum of 400mm. Hand operated machines used
for removal of small areas of marking shall have a work
rate of 3 meters/minute.
7
The pavement shall be prepared in accordance with
the following:
I.
Chlorinated rubber paint for painting curbs shall be

plasticized and drying shall be solvent evaporation alone.
It shell have the properties give in Table 14 2.2.14.
P.roperty
Relative density
Viscosity at 21"C
Allow!ble lllmJt.
1.48 minimum
L65to70
Drying time
Approx 10-15 minutes
Coverage
3m2 per litra maximum
Luminance
coefficient
eo mcdfmt/lx minimum
Flexibility
--
1!.
.
..
Passes around 12m ni d iameter

Jmandrel
.
Chlorinated
' 9.0%
rul:lber content
Table 14.2.2-14: Paint for Curbs
14.2..3
Traffic shall be kept off markings until the installation

has fully cured.
1"-e
Where the marking is to be applied on concrete

carriageways, the transverse texturing shall be
freed from all traces of curing compound by wire
brushing or other approved means. Prior to the
application of thermoplastic material a tack coat
compatible with the road surface and the
marking material shall be applied in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
On surface dressed carriageways, all loose
chippings where the marking is to be applied
shall be removed prior to application. The
surface to be marked shall be claan and dry .
8
Road marking materials shall only be applied to
surfaces which are clean and dry. Markings shall be free
from raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and
free from streaks. Longitudinal road markings shall be laid
to a regular alignment.
9
Pre-marking sha be carried out manually on straight
lines and curves using a 100m long string, On strafghts the
pre-marking shall consist of 1 dot mark every 3m, and on
curves every 1m. The pre-marking dot shall be a circle of
40mm diameter cut into 2 equal parts by a gap of 10mm.
Sultannte of Omnn. Sill..Cord Specificlllions lor Rod a. Brido C.,n.,n><ton 2010
Longitudinal changes in line types shall be within 300mm

of the location specified on the Drawings.
BS 7962. The total thickness of original and masking

materials shall not exceed 6 mm.
14.2.3.1
14.2.3.5
Raised Rib (Profiled I Road Markings
Raised rib road markings shall only be used on

National and Arterial roads with full width hard shoulders
or other high speed roads (both single and dual
carriageway) with at leastl meter wide hard strips.
2
Raised rib road markings shall be yellow lines which
are conII nuous over the sections where they are specified
on the Drawings. Gaps shall be provided for drainage
purposes only where specified on the Drawings.
Longitudinal Road Markings Lateral Tolerances
For longitudi nel road markings, the I ateral tolerance

shall be within :1: 25mm from the designed position. Any
discontinuities between roed markings shall be replaced
with a smooth taper from one road marking to the other.
The length of the transition shall be derived from Table
14.2.3.1.
SpMd(kmlhl
T.,_
3
Raised rib road markings shall be in accordance with
the Highway Design Standards. Spacing of the transverse
raised ribs shall be 500 mm.
Upto60
l in 40
80
1 in 5
4
Raised rib road markings shall not be used adjacent
to hatched areas or central reserve crossings.
100
lin 50
120
1 in 55
14.2.3.2
Temporary Road Markings
Temporary road markings shall only be adopted with

the prior approval of the Engineer. They shalt comply with
the same clauses as permanent road markings, or if
required to be removable, be constructed only from a
proprietary preformed road marking material complying
with BS EN 1790.
Table 14.2.31 : Marking transition taper

2
Where studs are to be placed within the line the
centre line of the marking and the center line of the studs
must not be displaced by more then 15mm.
14.2.4
2
When temporary road markings are used on surfaces
that will continue to be used by public traffic after their
removal, any shadow trace remaining after their removal
shall be permanently obliterated. Preformed materials
shalt not be used for this obliteration.
Road markings of each type shall be measured by

square meters marked. Removal of road markings shall be
measured by square meters removed.
Temporary road markings constructed from a

proprietary preformed road marking material shall only be
adopted in I ocatio ns and on types of road surface as
shown on the Drawings and shalt comply with any other
requirement therein. The marking material shalt be new
and together with any primer shalt be stored and installed
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
within the recommended shelf life.

rate for Road Marking in the Bill of Quantities which rate
shall be full compensation for supplying, applying, surface
preparation, and for materials, labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and other items necessary for the proper
completion of the work as specified.
4
Temporary preformed road markings shall only be
applied to surfaces that are clean and dry. Upon rem ova I
they shall be disposed of off Site and if any making good
is necessary to the road surface it shall be satisfactorily
carried out before the road Is ope ned to traffic to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
14.2.6
14.2.3.3
Removal of Road Markings
The removal of road markings on surfaces that will

continue to be used by traffic shall be undertaken in a
manner that will avoid damage to the surface. The
removal of road markings shall be by mechanical means
only. The Contractor shall submit details of the system he
proposes to use to the Engineer for approval.
14.2.3.4
Masking of Road Markings
14.2.5
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Basis of Payment

Traffic lines (typal (material I
(mechanical application).
(sq.m.l
(sq.m.)
Raised rib road markings.
Special road markings
(typel, (material) ;(hand applied!. (sq.m.)
Curb painting
(sq.m.l
Removal of road markings
(sq.m.l
14.3
Road Studs
14.3.1
Description
This Subsection describes requirements for the

supply and installation of road studs.
When black masking materials are required to cover

existing permanent road markings, they shalt comply with
l+~
~~
Mlnitry cfTrBnaport & Communlcntfana
OORl.T
../"'.~<Traffic Signs and Road Marki ngs
14.3.2
Materials
14.3.2.1
Permanent Retroreflecting Road Studs
All retrorellecling road studs shall comply with BS

EN 14631 and 14632, and shall be instahed in accordance
with the manufacturer' s instructions
2
Retroreflccting road studs and components which do
not fall lnto a category of BS EN 1463. but which have type
approval of the Employer may be used If specifically
permitted by the Engineer.
studs shall be removed from the carriageway on

completion of the Works to the satisfaction of the Enginee;-,
14.3.3.3
Non retroreflecting Road Studs
A ll non retroreflecting road studs shall be installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 11'1
locations, and complying with any other requirements, IS
14.3.4
The bodies of the studs shall be aluminium or high

impact plastic and shall incorporate an integral plug at
least 60mm deep,
Road studs of each type shall be measured by the

number of studs installed.
4
fhcing of studs shall be by epoxy resin adhesive in
accordance manufacturers requirements.
14.3.5
5
The Contractor shall submit details of the road studs
he proposes to use together with the method of fiXing to
the Engineer for approval.
14.3.2.2
Temporary Retrcweflecting Road Studs
Temporary retroreflecting road studs shall be of the

fluorescent yellow type to BS EN 1463-1.
14.3.6
14.3.2.3
14.3.3
14.3.3.1
Permanent Retroreflectlng Road Studs
1
TraffiC shall be kept off studs until the resin adhesive
has fully cured,
2
Permanent retroreflecti ng road studs shall be
installed l n the locations and to any other requirements as
3
Road studs shall be filled so that the d isplacement to
the left or right of the correct line does not ellceed 1Omm.
The angular displacement of road studs shall not exceed
5".
4
Where studs are to be placed within the line the
centre line of the marking and the centre line of the studs
must not be displaced by more than 15mm.
5
Studs shall be lnstalted after the complet ion of the
wearing course and the Installation shall be carried out to
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as
agreed by the Engi near.
6
Studs shall be applied on clean, sound, dry surfaces.
Air temperature shall be greater than 5" at the time of
installation and when it wilt remain above 5" for the time
taken for the adhesive to cure.
Temporary Retroreflecting Road Studs
They shall not be used for a second application.

Adhesive used for the temporary retroreflecting road
1-4-10
Ceramic Buttons
Ceramic buttons may be used only in ellceptional

circumstances to supplement road marking only with the
approval of the Employer and Engineer.
14.3.3.2
Basis of Payment

rate for Road Studs in the Bill of Quantiti es which unit rate
shall be full compensation for supplyi ng, fixing, surface
preparation. and for materials, tabor, transport, equipment,
tools, and other items necessary for the proper compl etion
of the work as speci lied.
ReHecti ng road studs (type/color).
(l'lr.l
ii.
Non-reflecting road studs.
(nr.)
Suftanate of Om.n, Star.dti1l Spec I~ lor RaMI&~ Co~ :ZOll
Rtf.
Title
15.1
General
~age
No.
Ref.
Title
151
15.3.4
Method of Measu111ment
15.3.5
Basis of Payment
15.1.1
Scope
15-1
16.1.2
15.1.3
Design
16-1
Regulations end Sulndards

Factory Tests
16-1
15-1
15.1.4
16.1.6
15.1.5.1
Field Teats
General
15.1 5.2
Insulation Resislllnc:e Test
15-1
15-1
15.1.6
Ughtlng Columns Tests- Pre-shipment
15-2
16-2
15.1.7
15.1.8
16.1.9
Switchgear Tests
Completed Tests
Gener1111l Tec:hniCIII Conditions
16.1.10
Approval
16.1.11
16.1.12
15.1.14
EI'IICtlon
Manuals
Handling
Spa111s
15.1.15
151.16
Road Llglrtlng
Sign Lighting
16.1.13
15.1.17
15.1.18
16.1.19
16.1.20
15.2
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-3
15.4
15-4
15-4
15-4
15-4
Package Medium Voltage

Switching Stations
15.4.1
15.4.2
Description
Meterials
15.4.3
15.4.4
15.4.5
15.4.6
16.5
15-3
15-4
15.5.1
16.6.2
15.5.3
15.5.4
33kV and 11 kV Pole Mounted

Transformer Sub-Stations
Feeder P,illars
15.6.1
Description
15.6.2
15.8.3
Meterials
15.6.4
15.6.5
15.6.6
Basla of Payment
Items In the Bill of Ouantltln
15-5
16.2.1
Description
16-6
15.2.2
15.2.3
Materials
16-S
15-6
15.7
Elecbical Cables
15.2.4
15.7.1
15.7.2
De&crlptl'on
Materials
15.2.5
15.2.8
Method of MNsurement
Basta of Payment
15-6
15-6
ltema in the Bill of Ouantltlu
15-6
15.7.2.1
Low Voltage Cables
15.3
Package Sub-stations
15-6
15.3.1
15.3.2
Descriptfon
15-6
15.7.2.2
16.7.2.3
15.7.2.4
Medium Voltage (M. VI Cables

Met11l Gland Parts
Cabla Trays
Materials
Conatructlon Requlrementl
15-6
15-7
15.3.3
16-7
15-8
16-8
15-8
15-8
16-8
15-8
15-8
15.6
15-5
15-7
15-8
16-5
Method of Measu111ment
Basis of Payment
Items In the Sill of Quantities
16-7
Materials
Construction Requlrementl
Method of MeasU111ment
15-5
15-5
16-7
16-7
Deseription
15.5.6
Medium Voltage and Substation Work
15.5.5
BuTs of Payment
Baals of Payment
Generally
Medium Voltage Intake

Switching Stations
16.3.6
Page No.
15.7.3
15.7.3.1
Cable Jointing and Terminataon
15-9
16-9
16-9
15-9
15-9
16-9
15-9
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-12
15 12
16-12
15 12
15 12
15-12
15 13
Ref.
15.7.3-2
15.7.3.3
16.3.4
15 7.4
15.7.6
16.7.8
Title
P-~ge
Field Qua ~ty Control

lilrthing
Procect5on
Beals of Payment
Item In the BUI of Quentitfes
No.
15-13
15 13
15-14
15-14
15-14
15-14
16.8
Road Ughtfng Masts, Columns

1S.14
and Luminaires
15.8.1
16.8.2
15.8.2.1
15.8.2.2
15.8.2.3
15.8.2.4
15.8.2.5
15.8.3
15.8.4
16.8.6
15.8.8
Desc:riptlon
Meterillt
Muts 1nd Columns General
Columns
Htgh MIStS
Road Lighting Lumineires lind l.amPII
Flood Lights
Conttrucdon Requinlmenta
Bella of Payment
Item In the Bill of Quentitfes
15-14
15-14
1514
15-15
15-15
15-16
1518
15-18
15-19
15-19
15-19
16.9
Overliead Sign Illumination
15.9.1
16.9.2
16.9.3
16.9.4
16.9.6
16.9.8
Description
Meterfels
Conltructlon Requinlmentt
Method of MeiiUn~ment
Beall of P.yment
Items In the Bill of Quentitfes
15-19
15-19
15-19
15-20
15-20
15-20
16.10
Under Bridge Ughtlng
16-20
16.10.1
Description
Mltllrilll
15.10.2
15.10.21 Surfece Mounted Luminaires
15.10.2.2 Recessed Mounted Lum1naires
Conltructlon Requlmnenta
15.10.3
Method of MeiiUrement
15.10.4
15.10.5
Beall of Payment
Items In the Bill of Quentltle.
16.10.8
16.11
Traffic Signals
15.11.1
Description
15.11.2
Materilll
15.11 21 Generll
16-19
15-20
15-20
15 20
1520
15-21
15-2.1
15-21
15-21
16-21
15-21
15-21
1 ~21
Ref.
Title
Page No.
15.11.2.2 Contro ers

15.11.2.3 S ign.t Equipment
15.11.2.4 S ignal QJ)eration
15.11.3
Construction Requln~menta
1!5.11 .3.1 Cables
15.11.3.2 ControUer Root
15.11.3.3 Ducts
1511.3.4 Draw Pits
15.11 .3.5 Pole lnstl lllltlon
15.11.3.6 Miscell1neous
15.113'1 Completion
15.11.4
15.11.5
15.1t.8
Method of Me~a~n~ment
Bell of Payment
ltiii'M In the Bill of Ountltles
16.12
Overhetght Vehicle Detection

System
15.12.1
16.12.2
16.12.3
16.12.4
115.12.5
15.12.6
16.12.7
15.12.8
16.13
Dlllcriptlon
Design Criteria for Mzrteril!.
end Componentl
Operetlonel Requlrementl
Phytlcel Requlrementt
Construction Requln~ments
Method of Me1aurement
B1al1 of Payment
Emergency Roadside
Telepllone System
DelcriptJon
16.13.1
Reguletlorw end Standarda
16.13-2
Deflnltlona end Mode of Operation
16.13.3
16.13.4
Producta end Mlllerlall
15.13.4.1 PiU1r Des.gn and M1nufactura
15.13.4.2 Pidar Otmens1011s end We[gbt
15.13.43 lirengibi lity
15.13.4.4 PiNer Materiels end Color
15.13.4.5 IPRittnQ
1&.13.4.6 Vibrltlon 1nd Shocli
15 13.4 7 Wind
15.13.48 Temperature
1S.1349 Lightning Protection
15.13.4 10 Vermin 11101'1151
1521
1522
1523
15,23
1523
15-23
16-23
15-24
1524
1524
1524
15-24
15-25
15-25
11).26
15-25
15-25
15-25
15-28
15-27
15-27
15'27
15-27
16-27
15-27
15-28
15-28
16-29
15-29
15-29
>1529
1529
1529
15 29
15-29
15-29
15-30
15-30
Ref.
Title
Page No.
15.1 3.4.11 Vandali5m
15-30
15.13.4.12 Pillarldentification
15.13.4.13 Concrete
15-30
15.1 3.4. 14 Steelwork

16.13.5
Power Supply
15.13.5.1
Power Supply
15.13.5.2
15.13.5 3
16.13.5.4
Battery
Battery Charging
Solar Panel
15.13.8
ConltrUction Requirement.
15.13.6.1 Drawings
15.13.6 3
15.13.6.4
Anchor Bolt Assembly

Pi Mar Mo~onted Telephone
15.13.6.5
Grout ng ot Pillar Base
16.13.7
16.13.8
16.13.8
16.14
Method of M1181urament
Baals of Payment
Items In the Bill of OuantHies (Unit)
1530
15-30
1530
15-30
1530
16-31
11531
15-31
15.17
16.17.1
16.17.2
16.17.3
16.17.3.1
15.17.3.2
Civil Works for Electrical

Installatlons
15-31
Ui.14.3
15 14.4
15-32
o.talled Technical Specification
Remote Control Management Soflwall!l 15-33
Hardware
15-35
15-35
Method of Meauramant
Basia of Payment
15-35
15-36
16.16
Earthing
16-36
16.15.1
Ducriptlon
16.16.2
Materia Ia
15-36
15-36
16.16.3
Con.truatlon Reqalramenta
16-38
15.16.4
15.16.6
16-37
15-37
15.15.8
Elrth RMWanceTMt
Baals of Payment
15.15 .7
ltetm In the Bill of Quantities
15.16
Labeling, Testing and

Commissioning
15-37
16-37
15-37
16.16.1
Delcriptfon
15-37
15.16.2
Materlls
Conatruc:tlon Requlrementa
16-37
15-37
15-38
15-36
16-39
Bases for Poles and Equipment

Cable Trenches and Ducts
Itamain the Bill of Quantities
16-31
16-38
Materi.lls
16.17.6
15-31
15-37
15-38
Deeaiptlon
15-31
15-31
16-31
Page No.
Method of Meaaurament and Baals

of Payment
1S31
15-31
Dalc:ription
16.16.3
Labeling
Test ng and Commissioning
Method of Mea.uramant
Basis of Payment
General Requirements
ham a In the Bin of Ouantitlea
Title
15.17.4
16.17.6
16.14.2
15.14.8
16.14.7
16.14.8
15.16.4
15-30
15.14.1
16.14.5
1518.3.1
1616.3.2
15-30
Public Ughtlng Management
and Control System
Ref.
16-38
1539
1539
1!M0
15-40
16-40
Sultanate of Oman, Srndrd Sp.drtelllions lor ROJ<i & Bridg Conctruetioro 2010
Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
15.1
15.1.1
General
Scope
This Sub-section describes general requirements for

electrical systems, Including medium voltage substations,
packaged substations, cables and feeder pillars, road and
under-bridge lighting, traffic signals, illuminated signs,
detection system and emergency telephone system, and
all associated work. Specific requirements for each system
are given in the relevant Sub-sections of this Section.
2
Subsidiary lcomplementaryl items which are not
expressly specified but are necessary for completion of
the work shall be supplied and insta lied by the Contractor
and their costs are deemed to be included in the rates and
prices for the relevant work.
3
The power supply connection for the lighting
systems shall be coordinated with and obtained from a
nearby source assigned by the concerned local power
authority.
4
The Contractor shall pay all power connection
charges and fees imposed by the Local Power Authorities
and Municipalities, Including execution of all civil works
ltrench, ducts 1.
5
The work shall be complete in every respect for
satisfactory
operation
in
complia nee
with
the
specifications and standards I aid down by the respective
authority and as given herein.
15.1.2
Design
The location of light fittings, poles, feeder pillars,

distribution transformers and cables, etc. are shown for
guidance on the Drawings. Final locations shall be subject
to the road configuration, lighting calculations and
approval by the Concerned Authorities.
2
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer
and shall determine the exact position and location of ell
lighting and electrical equipment with respect to other
services and site requirements.
3
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper
lighting distribution on the road surface from the
proposed luminaires and other equipment after
Installation and commissioning and shall be fully
responsible for maintaining the entire road lighting
system during the maintenance period of the Works.
15.1.3
Regulations and Standards
The Contractor shall comply with the regulations and

requirements of the concerned authorities, and shall get
all necessary approvals of the shop drawings from the
respective authority after obtaining approval of the
Engineer. If the road lighting works are executed by a SubContractor, the Contractor has to ensure that the Sub
Contractor is approved by the Concerned Authority.
2
The quality of equipment shall be of the best grade
for each type as approved by the Engineer, even though
such quality may not be stated specifically in this

Specification.
3
All materials and products shall be new and
manufactured by manufacturers approved by the
concerned authority. Funhermore. they shall be sound
and uniform in quality, size, shape, color and texture and
free from cracks, warpage or other defects.
All warranties as applicable that are available from
4
the manufacturers shall be submitted to the Engineer in
original documents.
15.1.4
Factory Tests
All equipment and materials shall be subject to preshipment Inspection and testing at the manufacturers'
premises. The Contractor, in coordination with the
manufacturers of relevant materials shall arrange for the
pre-shipment inspection and testing by the authorized
representative of the Engineer at the manufacturers'
premises.
2
The
Contractor shall
make
all
necessary
arrangements and pay all expenses in this regard
including representation, travelling and transponation,
boarding, lodging and any other associated cost for the
pre-shipment inspection procedures and witnessing of
the tests at the manufacturer's premises. In lieu of the
above tests the Engineer, at his sole discretion, may
accept test certificates by an approved laboratory of
International standards.
3
The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer
and submit to the Engineer for approval, the complete
detai Is of tests to be performed describing the procedures,
test observations and expected results. All test cenificates
shall be In compliance with recognized international
standards as approved by the Engineer and the Concerned
Authority.
4
The Contractor shall ensure availability of all tools,
instruments, test equipment, materials etc., and all
qualified personnel required for the testing, setting and
adjustment of all equipment and materials including
putting the same into operation.
5
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the date
and time of test for each piece of equipment at least two
weeks in advance. The witnessing of tests by the Engineer
or his representative shall not absolve the Contractor from
his responsibility for the proper functioning of the
equipment, and for furnishing the guarantees. All test
results shall be supplied in triplicate.
15.1.5
Reid Tests
15.1.5.1
General
Upon completion of the installations, the Contractor

shall perform field tests on all equipment, materials and
systems. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of
the Engineer for the purpose of demonstrating equipment
and system's compliance with the Specification. The
Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval, complete
15--1
~~
MLnltry of Tronaport & Cummunicutlona
OGRll
~~<:Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
details of tests to b e performed, equipment used.

describing the procedure. test observations and expected
results.
15.1.5.2
Insulation Resistance Test
Before making connections et the ends of each cable

run or joi nt between cables, the insulation resistance test
of each cable section shall be made. Each conductor of a
mullicore cable shall be tested individually with each of
the other conductor of the group and also with earth. If
insulation resistance test readings are found to be less
than the specified minim um in any conductor. tile entire
cable shall be replaced and tests repeated on the new
cables. If cable joints are provided, then each cabl e
section shall be tested and joints made only after the tests
have been made satisfactorily. Fir~a lly the completed
cab~e length including the joints shall be tested.
2
AU switchgear shall be given an insulation resistance
test after installation, but befo1e any wiring is connected.
Insulation tests shall be made between open contacts of
circuit breakers, switches and between each phase and
earth. Refer to Sub-sectjon 15.16 for details.
If the insulation resistance of the circuit under test is
less t han the specified value, the cause of t he low reading
shall be determined and rectified. Corrective measures
shall Include dry-out procedure by means of heaters, if
equipment is found to contain moisture. Where corrective
measures are carried out, the insulation resistance
readings shall be taken after the correction has been made
and repeated twice at 12 hours interval
4
The max,imum range for each reading in the three
successive tests shall exceed 20% of the average value.
After tests have been made, the equipment shall be
reconnected as reqlrired.
15.1.6
Lighting Columns Tests - Preshipment
The tubular steel columns shall be tested and the

results recorded for each test by the manufacturer in the
presence of an authorized representative of the Engineer
in the manufacturer's premises. The material weight and
dimensions of columns as specified shall be certified by
the manufacturer. The columns shall be inspected for
compliance and will be rejected If they are found to be
outside the specified tolerances.
2
Loading Test:
The columns shall be cantilevered horizontally, rigidly

supported at base plate and toads applied at right angle to
the axis of the pole at the required point, i.e. at some
distance from top. Tests shall be as fQIIows:
Deflection test.
Permanent set test
Breaking load test
A sample comprising four columns shall be selected at

random out of each lot of 1000 and subjected to deflection
test. One column per thousand shall be tested for
15-2
permanent set test and breaking loild test. When the

columns in the Works are lim ited in number, the
manufacturer moy supply result of tests already done for
prototype testing on such columns, or supply calculation
based results, in lieu of carrying out deflection, permanent
set and breaking load tests.
3
Passive Safety of Support Structures:
If requested by the Concerned Authority, tests shall be

carried out on each type of coklmn in accordance with BS
EN12767: 2007 level 4. Costs of such tests for
columns/high masts will be Included ul'lder separate items
in the Bill of Quantit ies.
15.1.7
Switchgear Tests
Each circuit brea- er shall be operated electricallY and

mechanically or only mechanically if it Is not electrically
operated. All interlocks and control circuits shall be
checked for proper connections in accordance with the
wiring diagrams furnished by the manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer
2
The Contractor shall property identify the phases of
all switchgear and cables for connections to give proper
phase sequence.
3
Trip circuits shall be checked for correct operation
and rating of equipment served . The correct size arid
function of fuses. d isconnect switches, number of
Interlocks, Indicating lights, alarms and remote control
devices shall be in accordance with approved
manufacturer drawings. Name plates shall be checked for
proper designation of equipment served.
15.1 .8
Completed Tests
After any equipment has been tested, checked f or

operati on, etc., and is accepted by the Engineer. the
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection
of that equipment so that subsequent tasting of other
equipment does not cause any damage to the already
tested equipment.
15.1.9
General Technical Conditions
Electrical work shall include the submission by the

Contractor of shop drawings and calculations required by
the Specification, as well as the provision of literature and
samples for the approval process.
2
All plant and equipment shall be supplied with the
necessary fittings, accessories and parts for the complete
installation, irrespective of whether all such fittings and
accessories are listed In the Specification and Drawings.
Installations shal be complete, tested, ready for
3
operation and ful ty integrated with other parts of the
construction and the ut ~~ty supply. Trte Contractor shall
make available facilities for utility providers during
commissioning.
4
Electrical work shall comply with the concerned
authority rules and regulations. and be carried out in
accordance with the recommendations of the International
Sui!Mruo!e of Oman, Strdrd Spodficotiono tor Ra.d & Bridgtl Coni! ruction 2010
Electro-technical Commission (IEC) and in compliance

with the following:
Relevant standards issued by the appropriate
authorities in the Su Ita nate of Oman including
the Ministry of Transport and Communications
(MOTC).
BS 7671:2008, Requirements for electrical
Installations; (lEE Wiring Regulations (UK) as
published by the Institution of Electrical
Engineers, London, 17th Edition (or the latest
edition).
Engineering and safety recommendations of G39
'Model Code of Practice' of the lEE.
Recommendations for the Lighting of Roads for
Motor end Pedestrian Traffic - Cl E-115 or
equivalent and equal standards.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
5
Electric power will be supplied by the concerned
power authority at a defined voltage, 3-phase, 3 or 4 wires,
50Hz. It shall be distributed from sub-station feeder pillars
at 4151240 V, 3-phase, 4-wire having solidly grounded
neutral at the transformer neutral point. Single phase
equipment shall be connected between phases and
neutral in a way to balance the three phases.
plasticizer and shrinkage of the PVC due to high

temperature (uPVC).
15.1.10 Approval
Details of the manufacturers of proposed pi ant end
equipment shall be submitted for prior approval of the
Concerned Authority and Engineer. Approval of any
manufacturer will not constitute approval of his products.
The Contractor shall ascertain that the approved
manufacturers are capable of supplying the required
equipment and in conformity with the Specification.
2
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval, in particular, the following luminaire criteria
before placing an order:
i.
ii.
6
The voltage at any point in an installed power
distribution network shall not deviate from nominal
voltage level by more than 5% under normal system
operating conditions.
iii.
7
The equipment shall be capable of giving continuous
and trouble-free service in the conditions given in Table
15.1.9-1.1t shall be designed and constructed to withstand
full load operation when exposed to sun, dust storms,
corrosive agents, occasional heavy rain and a high level of
ultra violet radiation.
iv.
Maximum ambient shade
--
50"C
~Perature
Mhiimumramblent
-2"C
~p_er~u~
~imum temperatura of
metal surl~Jn_djr~i sunJig!!_t
IIO"'C
--- - - ---- - -
Humidity
Table
- Altitude
100%
1 5.1 .9.1 ~ O perating
As per pro.feCt
requirement
Conditions for Equipment
8
The component parts of each electrical system or
piece of equipment shall be the latest product of a single
manufacturer, of standard design and dimensions, and
similar parts shall have been in satisfactory service for at
least two years
9
The maximum gust speed at 1Om above ground level
in open level country for a 1 In 50 year return period shall
be taken as: 55m/s (198 kmlh)
10 PVC sleeves where used, shall be of the long chain
high molecular mass type capable of reducing the loss of
Detailed literature on each luminaire, lamp and

control gear including manufacturer's name,
catalogue number, rating, material specification,
overall dimensions, operating characteristics end
principles
Details of changes to standard luminaires if
proposed for adaptation to conditions of
i nstellation or to meet the Specification
requl rements.
Photometric data for lighting calculations
including polar Iight distribution curves,
coefficient of utilization, g Iare classification,
efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
Calculations of luminance and illumination levels
and glare, as recommended, using approved
software and methods
Fully equipped samples of any item requested by the

3
Concerned Authority or Engineer shall be delivered as
soon as possible to the Concerned Authority before
placl ng of orders for the material or products, without
hindering the planned program and progress of work.
4
The Contractor shell not order any electrical
equipment or part, plant or fitting before receiving
approval for it. The Engineer may verify the performance
and quality of the samples submitted by instructing tests
to be carried out. Approval of samples shall not relieve
the Contractor of his obligations regarding the suitability
of the equipment and their performance, once installed.
5
The Contractor shall submit for prior approval by the
Engineer detailed working drawings and shop drawings
showing the physical layout of equipment, location of
masts and columns, foundation details, erection end
installation details, and wiring diagrams. Details shall
include bolts, nuts, brackets, rods and any small or large
item that is necessary for the construction, all to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and Concerned Authority.
15.1.11 Erection
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
schedule of the parts and equipment to be erected. If
requested by the Engineer the Contractor shall open up for
inspection before erection any plant or equipment which
has been delivered to the Site partly assembled.
15-3
~
~
Mln.atry ot Transport & Communlc:Dtiot11S
DGRLT
..../"'-..~<Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
2
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the
correctness of the electrical and mechanical connections
to plant and equipment installed before it is
commissioned.
3
Operation of plant and equipment stil l under the
control of the Contractor but which is made live shall be
subject to a 'Permit to Work' procedure in a format agreed
wlth the Engineer and the respective authorities.
15.1.12 Manuals
l
Prior to the final acceptance of the installatlon the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six sets of
operation and maintenance manuals for the installed plant
and equipment. The manuals shall be A4 size in loose leaf
binders containing the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv,
v.
vl.
vil
Single ~ne diagrams of the complete network

properly labeled
Control, protection and circuit diagrams for all
equipment.
Setting up, commissioning and operating

instruction.
Trouble shooting procedures.
Maintenance instructions including schedules for
preventative maintenance.
Complete recommended spare parts list
including part numbers and the manufacture's
name, address. telephone and fax numbers.
Name of the manufacturer's local authorized
reptesentat1ve and service agent.
15.1.13 Handling
The Contractor shaU provide slings, lifting tackle and
cra nes for the sale handling of items supplied and shall be
responsible for obtaining and keeping up to date the
necessary test certificates for this ha ndling equipme nt.
Protection of surfaces and floors during instillation shall
be the responsibility ofthe Contractor.
15.1.14 Spares
Spare parts indicated in the Bill of Quantities shall be
supplied suitabty packed for transportation to Site and
long term storage. They shall include fastenings, lugs, and
screws needed for their attachment. Identification labe ls
shall be attache d to the outside and also enclosed within
the storage case.
2
Spares for routine maintenance shall be listed and
supplied In quantities equal to 5% {rounded up to the next
whole unit) of Installed quantities of each type of column,
cable, joint, lamp, control gear, circuit breaker, fuse,
lumlnaire, luminaire cover and associated bolts, nuts,
lampholders, etc.
3 Any additional spare parts recommended by t he
manufacturers, but not named above, shall be inc:luded in
the list
15.1.15 Road Lighting

The Contractor shall provide detailed computerized
calculations to demonstrate that the luminaires proposed
meet the criteria for illumination and luminance given in
the Specification, standards and shown on the Drawings.
2
Upon completion of a ~ghting installation as
specified the Contractor shah carry out measurements of
the illumination levels on the Site In accordance with
clause 15.16 and submit the results to show that the
design levels and uniformities have been achieved. The
maintained illumination and luminance levels shall be as
given in Teble 15.1,15,1,
3
Illumination lighting levels shall be measured for all
the traffic lanes,
:JJ
Ch~
Averege
Luminance level
Lav (cdlm')
lmalntlined)
Overall
uniformity
Uo= L..oJlav
Longitudinal
uniformity
of each lane
U =L..,..JL...
Maximum
threshold
Increment [Til
Road surface
characteristics
CIE classification
with a. = 0.07
Average
Horizontal
Illuminance
Eav. (LuJCJ
(maintained)
Illuminance ~
IJ
II II i2
1.6
0.4
0.4
0,7
0.7
0.75
0.7
0.4
I
0.6 I
-10%
10%
15%
15%
A3
A3
A3
R3
R3
25
25
12
35
~
35
' '
'
Uniformities
1:3
1:3
1:3
1:3
1:3
E..,JJ;.., ~ -- E..,,.n:,....
1:6
1:6
1: 6 ~1:6
1: 6
--I
rAJ: asphalt road surface with rough texture. slightly
specular!
Table 15.1.15.1: Maintained Road Illumination and
Luminance Levels
~
15.1.16 Sign Lighting

The illuminance level and uniformity shall be
calculated and measured on the sign surface at the
vertices of the grids defined by dividing it into 1m x 1m
squares and shall be better than the following:
Average illuminance {EAVJ : 200-400 lux
Uniformity IE..,.: E.,.,.)
15--4
0.4
0.7
Jl
~~
0.4
1,5
-.
: 1:6
Sultanat of Om.,n. St~nd>td Spoar.c~tiom ror Rood & Brid91 Cons1tue11on 2010
2
The luminaires or floodlights shall be of purpose
built design incorporating the specified size and type of
lamps.
3
The luminaires or floodlights shall be of pleasing
aesthetic appearance with high quality finish, and shall
comply with BS EN 128991, IEC 60598-1, IEC 605982-3,
IEC 60598-2-5 and other related parts of this standard as
applicable.
15.1.11 Medium Voltage and Substation

Work- Generally
Medium-voltage switchgear and control gear
standards and substation work, equipment and
component parts are to comply with the following
standards:
Common specifications:
IEC 62271-1
Metal-enclosed switchgear and centro1 gear for rated
voltages above1 kV and up to and including 52kV
IEC 62271 -200
High-voltage alternating current circuit- breakers
IEC 62271 100
Insulation coordination
IEC 60071
Alternating current switch-fuse combinations
IEC 62271-105
High-voltage A C. disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC 62271-102
Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and less than
52 kV
IEC 62271-103
Metering end protective current transformers (CTsf
IEC 60044-1
Metering and protective voltage transformers (VTsl
Capacitive IEC 60044-S(IEC 601861
Inductive
IEC60044-2
Relays
IEC 60255
Surge arrestors
IEC60099-5
Reading instruments
IEC60051
Watt-hour meters
IEC 60521,62052-11
62053-21 ,22,23
Power transformers
IEC 60076, 60354,
60076-11,10
60156
Insulating oil
IEC60296
Sulphur hexafluoride
IEC60376
IEC 60282-1
Fuses
Climate conditions
IEC 60721-3-3
and
IEC 607213-4
Neutral earthing resistance (when requirediiEEE std 32.
For all substations, switch lng and package stations, the
short circuit capacity rating, the low voltage control and
power supply where needed or other provisions, have to
be coordinated with the Concerned Authority and
provided accordingly.
2
Contractor shall provide danger signs in both Arabic
and English according to Omani standards made of heavy
duty corrosion proof metal, each of not less than 200mm x
300mm installed on all sides of substations, to clearly
Indicate to approaching people the hazard. These signs
shall include:
i.
Danger High Voltage.
ii.
Keep Out.
iii.
Telephone
contact.
number
of
emergency
Additionally, instruction plates shall be posted inside high

voltage rooms and shall help operating staff to evacuate in
case of emergency.

The provision of power supply from the Concerned
Authority to the assigned position of the feeder pillar,
including cable, (KWhmeterl, connections at both ends
and all necessary related civil works shall be given as a
unit.
2
Spare parts for routine maintenance and any special
spare parts ordered by the Engineer shall each be given as
items.

The provision of power supply to the feeder pillar
shall be paid by number of units, which shall include
coordination with the Concerned Authority and for them
to provide power supply to the feeder pillars, Including
subscription fees, supply and installation of breakers.
cables, KWh metering, execution and completion of all the
related civil works.
2
Spare parts shall be paid for according to the
comp,etely delivered items by type and quantities as per
the approved list.

Power supply connection to the feeder pillar. (nrl
ii
Spare parts (5% as per the approved list.
(LSI
15.2
Medium Voltage Intake Switching

Stations
15.2.1
Description

supplying, installing, testing and putting into operation the
M.V. switchgear which shall be in accordance with
concerned authority specifications and approval, at
locations indicated on Drawings.
15.2.2
Materials
Medium voltage intake and switching units shall

comprise panels containing the following equipment as
shown on the Drawings and as required by the concerned
authority:
i.
ii.
Circuit breakers for network control.

Circuit breakers for outgoing ci rc:uits.
The panels shall be equipped with floor mounting

framework, skid bases, internal wiring, labels and cable
15-5
~
~
Mlnletry <>I Tunspgrt & Cumnllmlcatlon OGRLT
./"".
~<:Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
sockets. The assembly shall allow for cable access from

below without dismantling any structural members.
2
The network control circuit breakers shall be
manually charged, spring operated, fitted w ith integral
earthing of the characteristics given by the Concerned
Authority.
3
Voltage transformers shall be installed and
connected to the primary side of the breaker, to supply the
lighting and small power for the switching station.
Voltage transformers shall be isolatable and fused on
primary and secondary sides.
4
The outgoing circuit breakers shall be manually
charged, spring operated. fitted with integr;ll earthi ng of
the characteristics given by the concerned authority and
as shown on the drawings.
5
Tripping of breakers shall be by direct acting primary
trip coil or by current transformer operated direct acting
trip coils. A neon i ndicator connected to a voltage
capacitor divider indicating voltage presence shall be
fitted on each circuit bre;~ker,
6
Intake stations shall be supplied with the necessary
accessories to form complete operating i nstaUations,
including the followlng:
Rubber gloves
Rubber mat extending the full length of the
equipment
iii. KV potential testers
iv. Spare fuses
v. Test plugs
vi. Safety and operating instructions
vii. Framed and glazed medium voltage line
diagrams
viii, Wall mounted cupboards, with mortice lock and
three keys each.
i.
li.
15.2.3
The Contractor shall coordinate with and get

approval from the selected manufacturer of the switching
plant on the proposed civil works before starting
construction.
The construction of the buildings shall comply with
2
the requirements of Subsection 15.17.
3
The equipment shall be lifted i nto position within the
station upon prepared foundations.
The station
switchboards may be Installed complete or in sections.
The units shall then be tested before and after incoming
and outgoing cables are connected.
15.2.4
The approved work shall be measured by the number

of medium voltage intake switching stations, installed in
station buJ,Idlng (excluding bulldingl and put into
operation after testing. and acceptance by the concerned
authority.
15- 6
15.2.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above will be pafd for at the unit
rate stated in tlte Bfl l of Quantities and shall be full
compensation for equipping, supplying materials,
installation, testing and putting Into operation, labor,
transport. equipment, tools, spare parts and other items
15.2.6
Medium voltage Intake switching station

{type) (voltage) (ratingl(reference drawings)
15.3
Package Substations
15.3.1
Description
lnrJ

supplyi ng, installing, testing and putti ng i nto operation,
factory assembled package sub-stations and connecting to
the medium voltage supply and the low voltage
dlsUibution network.
15.3.2
Materials
1
Package sub-stations shall be completely self
contained, factory assembled i n a totally enclosed, vandal
and weather resistant housing. ready for placing into
positi on upon a concrete base pad.
2
Package sub-station shall comprise of a single
integrated metal housing, with three totally segregated
compartments, accommodating MV switch-gear, MVII..V
distribution transformer and LV switchgear. Degree of
protection shall be IP 54 for switchgear (MV or LVI
enclosures and IP 23 for transformer housing. MV and LV
connections to corresponding transformer terminals are to
be insulated and inaccessible without the use of tools.
3
The MV live parts shell be completely enclosed in
lockable compartments, which shall be segregated for
maximum safety, but give the necessary access for
cabling and connections. IP5X minimum, in accordance
with IEC 62271. Cables shall enter and leave the
compartments from below. A chain link fence 2m high
shall be provided around the substation with a lockable
gate.
4
The medium voltage switchgear shall consist of two
(21 ring main SF6 switches and one switch-fuse {sealed for
lifel, with fuses mounted In a separate compartment.
Handle design is to ensure delay between closing and re
opening of main switch or earthing switch, to provide an
anti-reflex operation. It shall be Impossible to move earth
switch inadvertently into or from earth position except
when mai n switch Is In the open position. Indication of
switch position shall be mechanical, directly connected to
moving contacts. Each switch shall have a padlocking
device in the open, closed and earth positions. Semaphore
type indicators shall be provided to indicate on, off, earth
on eartlt off positi ons, protected wlth polycarbonate
SoltMnat of Otnan. S~ndatd Sptc;foc>llon for Ro.d II< Bti~ Conllruct10f1 2010
covers. The fuse access shall be interlocked to prevent it

being opened unless the switch is off and earthed at both
ends.
5
The ring main switches shall be fitted with cable
boxes and glands. The cables shall be connected to the
fixed mating contacts by flexible connectors provided with
a slotted hole.
Alternatively, MV switchgear compartment cable terminal
connectors shall be conical stress-rei ieving, epoxy sealad
end, bolted, straight/elbow, molded rubber, plug-in, or
other type, complete with all accessories as may be
suggested by manufacturer and approvad by tha
concerned authority.
MV switchgear compartment potential indicators
6
shall be neon indicators, provided at front of each unit,
one per phase, using capacitive potential divider to
indicate voltage at switch-disco nnector cable termInals.
7
MV switchgear compartment accessories are to
include the following:
i.
li.
iii.
Two N.C. and two N.O. auxiliary contacts on

each switch.
Ea nh fault indicator, operated by core-bel ance
type current transformer, located near and
outside cable box/ terminations with indicator
visible from the front and with automatic reset.
Shunt trip release on switch-fuse combination.
8
The transformer feeder switch shall have a trip
button or shall trip automatically by fuse operation. An
interlock shall be provided so that the switch-fuse cannot
be put back into service until the faulty fuse has been
replaced.
9
The Iow voltage switchboard shall be a separately
enclosed metal compartment with lockable doors within
the package housing and shell be of equal construction to
the feeder pillar. It shall consist of a triple pole and neutral
manually operated main circuit breaker of the molded
case pattern of the required ampere interrupfng capacity.
Overload and short circuit release mechanisms
comprising thermal and magnetic trips and earth leakage
protection (30mAJ, shall be provided.
10 Three ammeters fined with selector switch,
maximum demand fnd'cator and current transformers
shall be incorporated along with a voltmeter with se'ector
switch and protection fuse.
11 A sing~e phase socket outlet of 16-250 DIN rating
complete with plug top and a 12W fluorescent lighting
fitting of the integral battery/inverter emergency type, with
switching facility to allow emergency light to be initiated
shall be mounted adjacent to the low and medium voltage
switchgear panels and shall be prewired at the factory.
12 The low voltage panel circuits serving the lighting
shall be supplied through triple pole circuit breakers and
triple pole contactors (one set per circuitl which shall be
dual photo-electric cell controlted. The low voltage panel
a nd components shall meet the requirements specified In
Subsection 15.6. The package sub-station shall be fined
with a compartment housing the accessories to form a

complete operating installation as follows:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Rubber gloves.
Spare fuses.
Safety and operating instructions.
Medium voltage line diagram.
Low voltage circuit diagram with designations.
kV potential tester
Kilowatt hour metering as per requirements
Additionally, instruction plates shall be posted inside high

voltage rooms and shall help operation staff to evacuate in
case of emergency.
15.3.3
The Contractor shall agrea with the selected

manufacturer of the package sub-station on data ils for the
proposed civil works and shall have shop drawings
approved before construction starts.
2
The Contractor shell install the package sub-station
unit upon the concrete base using the appropriate lifting
gear to prevent damage. When correctly located, the unit
shall be bolted In position and tested before and after
connecting the incoming and outgoing cables.
15.3.4
Package sub-stations shall be measured by the

number of complete units supplied, Installed, tested, put
into operation end accepted by the Concerned Authority,
including time switch and connection.
15.3.5
Basis of Payment
1 The amount of comp'eted and accepted work measured

as provided for above will be paid for at the unit rate
stated in the Bill of Quantities and shall be considered 11s
full compensation for supplying and installing the substation, testing, puning into operation, handing over,
Including all materials, labor, transport. equipment. tools
and other items necessary for the proper completion of
the work.
15.3.6

Package sub-station (type) (reference)
(rating) (voltage)
(nr)
15.4
Package Medium Voltage

Switching Stations
15.4.1
Description

supplying, installing, testing and puning into operation
factory assembled package medium voltage switching
stations. and connecting to the medium voltage electrical
supply network.
15 7
~~
Mlnitry of Transpc::~rt & Communication
DGRLT
./"..~<(Road Lighting and Electrica l Installations
15.4.2
Materials
Package switching stations shall be self-contained;

factory assembled conformi ng to MV Switchgear
specification in Sub-seclion 15.3.
2
The switching station shall contain 3 extensible SF6
switch units with space for one additional SF6 switch. The
switches shall be fitted with cable boxes and glands
suitable to receive the incoming cables and shall have
operating positions at the front of the unit. The switching
mechanisms shall be Independent manual type.
3
Switching stations shall be supplied w ith accessories
as for sub-stations with the exception of the low voltage
circuit diagrams.
4
Emergency lighting if required by the Concerned
Authority, shall be coordinated with tl'le Concerned
Authority and be provided as specified in Sub section 15.3,
Clause 15.3.2 (11).
15.4.3
Construction requirements shall be as specified in

Sub-section 15.3, Clause 15.3.3.
15.4.4
Package medium voltage substations work shall be

measured by the number of units supplied, instaned, put
into operation, accepted by and handed over to the
concerr1ed authority, including connection to the MV
supply, fees. and the cost of power connection from t he
assigned source.
15.4.5
Basis of Payment

rate stated in the Bill of Quantities. which rate shall be full
compensation for supplying, installing the station. testing
and putting into operation, connection labor, transport,
equipment, tools and other items necessary f or the proper
15.4.6
15.5
15.5.1
Materials
Metal work shall be hot-dipped galvanized to BS EN

ISO 1461 and ASTM A123 and ASTM A153, whichever is
more stringent, after fabrication.
2
Transformers shall be painted by the manuf1cture;-.
Standard identifcatior; plates shall be fixed.
3
Bushings and insulators shall have a m inimum
Creepage value of 40mmlkV.
4
The transformer station supports shall be 'H type
construction, using 11m long, preservative treated,
wooden (Pinus Sylvestrisl poles type. The support system
shall be fitted with 4 stay sets, each comprising tubular
stay-rods. wood stay insulators. galvanized steel wi re of
minimum diameter 4mm end pole clamps. The poles
shall be fitted with galv11nized mild steel cross arms to
support the transformer.
5
The 11kV fuse units shall be 3 phase expulsion drop
out type with 900mm phase to phase spacing and fitted
with re-wireable fuse element s.
6
The 33kV switch fuse units shall be 3 phase, vertical
mounting, with 1050mm phase to phase spacing The
switch shall include a treated wooden, insulated,
operating handle at 1.2m from ground level. The fuses
shall be of the expulsion drop.out type, fitted with r
wireable fuse elements.
7
The t ransformers shall be the pole mounted type
with outdoor bushings on both medium and low voltage
sides and shall h$Ve the characteristics given in Table
15 5.21.
B
The low vonave units shall be 3 outdoor pole mount
porcelain cut-outs fitted with approprietely rated HRC
fu ses.
As indicated on drawings
Phasn
P.ackaga medium voltage switching

(type) (reference) (voltage).
15.5.2
Rating

~ation
Eng1neer. The t ransformers and 111 accessories shall

conform to the requirements, standards and specifications
of the concerned authority and the Contractor shall obtain
all necessary approvals from the Concerned Authority in
this regard.
Winding CoM ections:

(nr)
33kV and 11 kV Pole Mounted

Transformer Sub-Stations
-Tappings
15-- 8
3~
neutral sec ond~
- .-
.Qin 11 -
Impedance
Medium voltage off-cin:tlit

+5% to 5% i n 2,5%steps
Cooling
2
The capacity of pole mounted t ransformers shall be
as shown on the Drawings and or as directed by the
Star 4 wires sld earthed
Description

supplying, installing, testing and putting into operation
pole mounted transformer sub-stations and connecting to
the medium voltage supply on one side and the low
voltage distribut ion network on the ot her side.
Delta 3 wire prim ary
___ Oil filled natural
Temperature Rise:
Oil
Windings
40"C
50"C
Table 15.5.2.1: Pole Mounted Transformer Characteristics
Sultanate of Omen. Swldrd Spocifocrtionofor Road l!c B<idoe Consnoooon 2010
15 53
The Contractor sha I coordinate and agree the

location of pole mounted transformer stations with the
Engineer prior to commencing the installation. The pores
shall be installed In concrete at 2.2m centers for the 33kV
system and 1.8m centers for the 11 kV system .
testing and putting into satisfactory operation feeder

pillars for road lighting networks as shown on Drawings.
2
The Contractor shall submit data for approval,
including but not limited to the following:
i.
2
The Contractor shall install the equipment using the
appropriate lifting gear to prevent damage. The medium
and low voltage connections shall be made only after the
equipment is correctly installed and tested.
ii.
iii.
15.5.4
Pole mounted transformer substations shall be

measured by the number of units supplied, installed, put
into operation and accepted by the Concerned Authority.
2
The rate shall include for transformer, 11m long
preservative treated supporting wooden poles, platform
for mounting transformer, galvanized m ~d steel cross
arms, stay sets, insulators, post insui ators and support
assembly, 4mm diameter galvanized steel wire. 33kV or
11kV fuse units, low voltage HRC fuses and all other
necessary hardware, Gl guards and antk:limb'ng device,
earthing with or without chamber, 33kV or llkV
connections, connection to the medium voltage supply
and low voltage distribution network and all other
accessories.
15.5.5
Basis of Payment

rate stated in the Bill of Quantjties, which rate shall be
considered full compensation for supplying and insta IIi ng
the complete sub-station, including supporting poles and
platform, earthing, testing, connecting, putting into
operation, and for materi als, labor, transport, equipment,
tools, supplies and other items necessary for the proper
15.5.6
3
The Contractor shall submit drawings for approval,
Including but not limited to the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
15.6.2
External dimensions of feeder pillars

Details of base foundation
Details of breaker ratings, bus bars
Glands, joints, etc
Mounting details
Materials
Feeder pillars shall comply with IEC 604391 and /or

other equally approved standards
2
The feeder pillar shall be a Iota lly enclosed cabinet,
fully selfcontained, dust proof, weather proof, vermin
proof and suitable for mounting outdoors exposed to dust,
rain and direct sunlight (IP55).
3
The cabinets shall be reinforced free standing
structures, manufactured from 2mm thick steel wi1h bolted
reinforced corner construction. They shall be of the dwarf
type with a bolting down base for mounting on a pre
formed concreta pad suitably furnished for all incoming
and outgoing cables from below ground level within a
duct system.
4
Cab"nets shall have two hinged lockable doors to
provide full front access. The roof of the cabinets shall be
slanted and have water drip edges.

Pole mounted transformer substation,
[... KVA), 33KV/415V/240V, 3-phase, 4-wire,
solidly earthed neutral, (Ref. as
shown on dwgsl.
il
Construction details, standards to which pillars

comply, current carrying capacities of bus bars,
de-rating factors employed for breakers and bus
bars
Manufacturer's
catalogue
cuts
for
all
components.
Dimensional and electrical characteristics and
samples of breakers used
[nr)
Pole mounted transformer sub-station,
Moulded case
Circuit Breakers
MCCB's
{to IEC 609472l
Contactors
(to IEC 60947_.
11
( ... KVA), 1 1KV/415V/240V, 3-phase,

4wire, solidly earthed neutral,
(Reference as shown on drawings).
15.6
Feeder Pillars
15.6.1
Description
(nr)
This Sub-section descri bes requirements for

supplying, complete feeder pillar[s), installing, mounting,
Bus bars, 3
phase + full
neutral
Internal
Cabling
Four pole, equipped with overload

andshort'circuit release mechanism
comprising thermal and magnetic
tri!)!I(IEC 60947-2 sequence Ill).
TriplepOie, magnetic type , to
fnterrupt an inductive loadequal
to the lndiC!Ited rating.
Utilization Cat. AC Sa and AC 5b
Fullv insulated, rated 1.25 the main
incomil')g molded C!ISII breaker frame
size at 50 degres C, with .three
ammeters each fined with maximum
demand indicator with associated
current transformers, andvoltmeter
with selector switch and protection
fuse,
PVC/PVC single core 1000 v grade,
with copper conductors, rated as
reauired and suitably laced or clipped.
Table 15.6.2.1: Feeder pillar fittings
15-9
~~
Mtnlotry of Trunaport Be ConmunlcotkJn
DGRlT
~~<:Road Lighti ng and Electrical Installations
5
Feeder pillars shall be complete with equipment and
linings incorporating molde!S-case circuit breakers
controlling the main supply and the outgoing circuits.
Feeder pillars shall have the fittings given in Table 15.6.2.1.
welding silver alloy with arc quenching metallic devices of

approved construction. Cable term inals shall be solderless
anti-turn box lug or clamp type with set screws suitable
for copper or aluminum cables.
6
Equipment, busbars, and conductors within the pillar
shall be fully insulated such that there are no live parts or
connections exposed. The feeder pillar shall have a 50mm
x 6mm high conductivity copper main earth bar for
grounding purposes. A distribution diagram showM'!g
circuit connections, MCCB ratings, cables sizes and
references shaD be suitably fixed to the inside of the
cabinet door. Feeder pillars shall be secured against
unauthorized access by means of wedge locks protected
by brass plugs and operated by a special key.
7
A single phase socket outlet of 16250 DIN rating
complete with plug top and a 12W fluorescent lighting
fining of the integral battery/inverter emerge11cy type, with
switching facility to allow emergency light to be initiated
shall be mounted adjacent to the low panels and shall be
prewi red at the factory.
11 MCCBs generaly shall be thermal-magnetic type for

ratings below 600 A frame size, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings. MCCBs 600 A and larger shall be
electronic solid-state trip type. AD circuit breakers shall be
3-pole unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
B
Feeder pillars shall be finished with the fo llowing
Internal and external treatments:
i.
it.
iii.
iv.
De-rust.
De-grease.
One coat of sprayed zinc chromate primer.
Two coats exterior paint, dark grey to BS 381 C
shade632.
Th& low voltage distribution circuits serving the

9
street lighting installation shall be supplied through a
triple-pole contactor which sha II be dual photo-electric cell
controlled by two photocel s connected and mounted in
parallel with a timer .as specified below. An override
facility shall ba provided for maintenance.
al
Contactors sh!lll be, electro-magnetic type,

class AC 5a or AC 5b to IEC 60947-4. designed
to withstand large initial currents of discharge
lamps or tungsten lamp loads respectively, and
rated not less than overload setting of
protective device upstream. Contacts a ra to be
double break, silver cadmium plated, having
self-cleaning wiping action. Control is to be
provided by phase-neutral (maximum 240 VI
split-coil, for on/off activation by local andfor
by remote direct-wired means, Contactor is to
be mechanically latched. Control circuit is to
be fused. Auxiliaries are to include local pilot
lights, parallel remote indicating circuit, 2 N.O.
and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.
10 Circuit breakers shall be totally enclosed, molded

case, (MCCBs) constructed from high quality, high
temperature resistant, tropicalized, moulded insulating
materials, for normal operation at 70 deg. C within
enclosures. to approved standards, provided with quickmake, quick-break, trip-free switching mechanism
manually operated by front toggle type handle and
automatically tripped under oven:urrent conditions. Multipole breakers shall have common Integral trip bar for
simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts shall be non-
15- 10
12 Thermal magnetic circuit breakers shall include, on

each pole, a bi-metallic inverse time-delay over-current
trip element for smd overloads and instantaneous
magnetic over-current trip element for operation under
short-circuit conditions. Circuit breakers 250 A frame size
and larger shall have adjustable instantaneous trips.
13 Thermal over-current trips shall be compensated to
allow for am brent temperature higher at breaker than at
protected circuit or device. Compensation shall be
applicable between 25 and 50 deg. C. Where thermal
settings are adjustable, range of adjustment shall not
exceed maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.
14 When tripped automatically by over-current
condition, operating mechanism of circuit breaker shall
assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
15 Circuit breakers 250 A to 6001'630 A frame size shall
have interchangeable thermal and e lectronic trip units.
16 Non-Interchangeable trip circuit breakers shall have
sealed covers. Circu:t breakers with Interchangeable trips
shall have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.
17 Circuit breaker ratings shall be non-current limiting,
fully rated (100%1 with continuous duty at site conditions,
and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC 609472, sequence Ill (rated ultimate short-circuit breaking
capacity), and maximum trip rating as shown on the
Drawings. Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and
frequency shall meet IEC 60947-2 test sequence 1. 11.111 and
IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B.
18 Circuit breaker design shall allow addition of
electrical operator, control and interlocking functions,
under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and auxiliary
switches, padlocking devices, keylock devices, and the
like. Such accessories sh11ll be provided where shown on
the Drawings.
19 The photo-electric control shall consist of omni
directional cadmium cell thermal relay of high quality,
employing solid state photo-variable conductance
elements giving a 2:1 on/off ratio with sensitivity to switch
on lights when the dayOght illumination reduces to 70 lux.
This allows for the high pressure sodium lights striking
time, taking into account of the rather fast rate of daylight
intensity drop off in the region.
The photo electric cells shall be mounted at the top of the
nearest column or high mast or at the top of the feeder
pillar and connected to the feeder pillar.
20 A solar di!ll time switch shal be of the quartz,
electronic type, capable of operating for at least 100 hours
Sultanat11 of Oman. Srndud S!>ocif.cniom lor Rood & Bri<lvo Cons:ructr011
in case of power failure. Timer shall be of settab'e type

once throughout the year and to be set at definite periods
for switching on and off.
21 Instruments shall be housed in enameled. square,
metal cases for flush installation. Scale and markings shall
be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments shall be
within 2% unless otherwise specified.
22 Voltmeters shall be the moving iron type, w'th centre
zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal system voltage 90
degree angle. size 76x76 mm
Voltmeter selector switch shall be 7-pos'tion rotary type.
23 Ammeters (Number = 3) shall be moving iron type,
with centre zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal circuit
amperage, 90 degree angle size 76K76mm
15.6.4
Feeder pillars shall be measured by the number of

units supplied, installed, put into operation after testing
end ecceptance by the concerned authority.
15.6.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted 'work

rate stated in the Bill of Quantities which rate shall be full
compensation for supplying, installing feeder pillar,
testing. putting into operation tha pillar. and for labor,
transport, material, equipment, tools, photoelectric cells.
timer, supplies and other items necessary for the proper
Ammeter selector switch shall be 7-position rotary type.

24 Current transformers, shall be suited to the nominal
current of plant protected, short circuit level and burden.
Current transformers shall be of the indoor dry type, rated
secondary 5A. Rated primary current core size and
accuracy shall be determined from circuit data.
25 Voltage transformers shall be provided where
required, complete with primary and secondary fuses and
disconnecting device.
26 The feeder pillar shall have a separate compartment
containing a three phase kWH meter.
27
Wiring
Wiring shall be modular and neatly arranged on
master terminal boards with suitable numbering
strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where
required
ii. Connections shall be made at front of terminal
board and with no live metal eKposed.
iii. Metal cases of instrument, control switches,
relays, etc... shall be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to
nearest earthing bar.
iv. Control wiring shall be copper, PVC insulated, 85
degrees C, 600V grade, and PVC sheathed
cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon
rubber insulated cables shall be used in
proKimity to higher temperature components
and as flexible cable.
v. Wires shall be fitted w ith numbered ferrules of
approved type at each termination
i.
28 Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch

and pilot lamp shall be provided in feeder pillars
controlled by thermostat and/or humidistat where
required.
15.6.3
Construction requirements shall be as specified in

Sub-section 15.3, Clause 15.3.3 for package substation
work.
15.6.6

Feeder pillar, lsize, rating (A))
(No. of ways, type and reference)
(4151240V).
15.7
Electrical Cables
15.7.1
Description
(nr)
This sub-section describes requirements for

supplying and installing cables into trenches or through
pre-installed ducts, including connecting, terminating and
circuit testing.
2
The Contractor shall submit data for approval
including. but not limited to, the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Constructional details, standards to which cables

comply, current carrying capacities, derating
factors for grouping and temperature.
Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested
by the Engineer, other accessories.
Voltage drop calculations for each circuit in
schedule form.
3
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings, cables and other feeders shall have copper
conductors.
Cable conductors shall be stranded for
sections 4 mm and above, based on IEC 60228 Class 2.
Signal and control cables shall have solid conductors
unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords shall have
finely stranded conductors. Conductors of single-core
cables 25 mm2 and above shall be compacted. Multi-core
cables 35 mm2 and above shall be sectoral shape.
4
Conductor sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Conductors with cross-sectional area smaller than
specified will not be accepted.
5
Wiring insulation shall be color coded or otherwise
identified as required by the applicable regulations as
follows:
Neutral: blue.
Protective earth: green-andyellow striped.
15- 11
~~
Mfn stry of Transport & Cornmunicution
DGRlT
~~<Road Lighting and El~ctricallnstallations
Phase colors: brown, black and grey as appropriate.

6
Maintain color coding throughout installation.
Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is not color-coded
shall have engraved alphanumeric marks (L1. L2. L31 or
color coded heat-shrinlt.lble sleeves.
15.7.2
Materials
15.7.2.1
Low Voltage Cables
1 Unarmored cable shall be PVC insulated and shall

comply with BS 6004. Conductors shall be not less than
2.5mm2 cross section.
Single core PVC insulated (85 deg. C.) non-sheathed
2
single conductor cables for wiring in conduit shall have
ennealed copper conductors, compacted, generally with
concentric strands and i.nsulated with flame retardant,
moisture and heat resistant PVC/C to IEC 60227 and
IEC603321. suitable for wet locations and for conductor
temperature of 85 deg. C. 450n so V grade.
3
Multi-core PVC insulated (85 deg. C.l cables (0.6/1
kVI: shall have annealed. copper conductors, compacted,
insulated with PVC/C to IEC 60227, moisture and heat
resistant, suitable for wet locations and fully rated
conductor temperature of 85 deg, C, laid up, bedded with
suitable filler and sheathed with llame retardant PVC!ST2,
general purpose sheathing to international standards (IS
5831! 1984 and IEC 60502-11.
4
Cables within lighting columns, high musts and
si gns shan comply with BS 6004 and shall have separate
PVC (green striped ye!lowl insulated earthing cable
Installed. Cables for recessed lighting shall be 3 core
copper, utilizing one core for earthing.
5
Armored cable shall be PVC!SWAIPVC to BS 6346 or
BS 5467 and IEC60502- 1, IEC 60811 and IEC 60332-1.
Directly buried cables shall be armored type unless
otherwise Indicated on the Drawings.
6
Armored cab' es shall have single layer of galvanized
steel wire armor with flame retardant PVC!ST2 oversheath. Armoring shall comply with BS 1442 and shall
provi de 50To conductivity of phase conductor conductivity
as a minimum.
7
Cable covers for underground directly buried cable
protection shall be to BS 2484, with sand cushion around
cable and a layer of 200 mm w ide p rotective concrete
bricks over the sand along the entire route of the cable.
The bricks shall be laid in such a way as to provide equal
margin of cover on both sides of the cable. A warning tape
shall be laid throughout the length of the trench.
Cables shall be termi n1ted
at equipment
8
switchboards, and isolators, using mechanlcal cable
glands, In accordance with the m anufacturef's
recommendations.
9
Buildouts with cable lengths are required from
designers.
15.7.2.2
Medium Voltage (MVI Cables
Medium voltage cables. Insulation and rating shall

comply with BS 6622 and IEC 605022 for voltages up to 33
kV and IEC 60840 for voltages above 30kV up to 150 kV
(Um=170 kV). MV cables shall be capable of a conductor
operating temperature of 90"C under worst ambient
conditions at full load rating. Each ph1se shall be
identified by a distinctive marking on the cable. The cable
insulation grade (voltage designation! and manufacturer
shall be embossed on the cable over the sheath. The
semi-conductive layer shall be removable without the use
oftools.
2
MV cables shall be in accordance with the concerned
authority specification (MEW Standard DES 2
Underground Cable Installations).
15.7.2.3
Metal Gland Parts
Metal gland parts shall be brass, bright dipped, and

shall have a polychloroprene inner sheath, sealing r ing,
armor clamping cone. armor nut and captive
polychloroprene outer sheath sealing ring.
During
assembly the gland shall not induce torque in the cable
sheath or armor. A polychloroprene shroud shall be fitted
over the gland.
15.7.2.4
Cable Trays
Medium cable trays shall be galvanized steel, fl anged

with heavy duty folded reinforced edge. and slotted. Cable
channel shall be galvanized steel.
15.7.3
Before any underground and ducted cabling is

Installed, copies of the t est certificates from the
manu facturer shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The certificate shall show that the supplied
cable satisfies the appropriate standards.
The sizes of low voltage copper conductor cables shall be
as shown on the Drawings. Care shall be taken so that
voltage drop at the fa r end of the c1ble does not exceed
5% of the nominal voltage. Cables manufactured only by
reputed firms shaD be used, provided they fulfill all the
requirements of the Specification and the concerned
euthority standards.
2
Cable joints and terminations shall be completed
w ith the correct specified materials, tapes, stress cones,
glands, sleeves and bonds. Joints shall be made in
accordance
with
the
cable
manufacturer's
recommendations and BS 69101 . No through joints shall
be allowed in low voltage cables where adequate
manufacturer' s lengths are available.
3
A sample site-const ructed cable termination and
through-joint shall be submitted to t he Engi neer prior to
any jointing commenck1g on site.
4
Termination of cables shd be either crimped or
soldered. Through-joints shall be complete with
1~11
Suluonate ol Oman. Stndrd Sp::flc>liom for Road S< B~ Con&:ruchon 2010
Road Lighting and Electrfcallnstallatfons
manufacturer's recommended metal sleeves and shall be

located in a cable draw-pit
5
For underpass luminaires PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed, SWA cable shall be pulled through already
laid/buried uPVC ducts or conduits in underpass slabs or
concrete structures.
6
The pulling of cables through ducts or conduits shall
be started only after the conduit {u PVCt system ls
completely installed and all outlet boxes, junction boxes
etc. are fixed in position.
7
The contractor where not in conflict with these
Specifications shall carry out the requirements and abide
where necessary with Series 1400 (Electrical Work for
Road Lighting and Traffic Signs) and Series l500
(Motorway Communications) of the DMRB found under
UK Standards for highways.
15.7.3.1
Cable Jointing and Termination
i.
Through joints will not be allowed in feeder

cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths
are available. Where a joint is necessary, it shall
be made inside boxes, handholes or manholes.
ii. Through joints and terminations shall be carried
out strictly in
accordanca with
cable
manufacturer's recommendations, and made
with correct specified materials, boxes, tapes,
compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands
and bonds as applicable.
iii. Qualifications of operatives shall be submitted to
the Engineer prior to work commencing on site.
Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after
taping unless contrary to cable manufacturer's
recommendations.
Sample site constructed
cabI e terminations and through-joints shall be
submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing
work on site. Samples are to be constructed in
the presence of the Engineer and shall be
available for test and inspection in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
iv. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables
are to be purpose made, to prevent damage to
insulation in genera I, and to cable shielding of
MVcables.
v. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors shall be by
use of non-scratch scouring sponge and white
spirit or equal approved.
vi. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,
including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers
published
torque-tightening
values.
Where
manufacturer's
torque
requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.
15.7.3.2
Cable tests shall be carried out in accordance with

the requirements of the applicable regulations and
standards.
Perform the following in advance of independent

2
tests:
Test cables insulation resistance.
Test circuits continuity.
iii. Furnish a set of applicable specifications and
to
test
manufacturer's
recommendations
organization.
iv. Make power available at test locations.
i.
ii.
3
Schedule tests and notify Engineer at least one week
in advance of schedule for test commencement.
4
Provide megger testers of various ranges as
applicable, and HV test equipment as necessary for testing
MV installations. Use 1000 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V, and 5000 V
megger for initial checks on MV installations (up to 15 kVf.
5
On installations of medium-voltage cables and before
electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate
product capability and compliance with requirements.
6
MV Cable Testing: Provide cable test set with D.C.
output voltage and ampere range sufficient to test MV
cables. Cables are to be laid in position {trench or duct
bank), jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with
ends free of equipment and clear of ground.
7
MV Cable Testing: D.C. test voltage is to be applied
between core under test and the screen in steps, pausing
one minute or more eech step (first step being the A.C.
rms rated voltage of the cable, followed by two equal
stepsf up to maximum test voltage. At each step, and for
the last 515 minutes duration at maximum test voltage,
the ammeter {normally a micro-ammeter) is to be
monitored closely and recorded. If, except as voltage is
increased, the current starts to increase, test is to be
stopped and the installation inspected and tested for the
fault.
i.
ii.
iii.
15.7.3.3
Each cable/core is to be tested independently.

Maximum D.C. test voltage for grounded neutral
system is to be 3 times rated A.C. rms voltage of
cable.
Alternative test if approved by the Engineer, is to
apply A.C. rms voltage up to 1.5 times A.C. rms
rating of cable (26 kV for 17.5 kV cablef, applied
for 15 minutes, by an approved A.C. test set.
Readings are to be within same range and in
accordance with IEC 60502.
Replace or correct malfunctioning cables and
accessories at Project site, and retest to
demonstrate
compliance
until
reaching
satisfactory conditions as per international
standards/ regulations; otherwise. remove and
replace with new units and retest.
Earthing
The ermoring on cables shall be bonded to the

metalwork and to the earthing system in accordance with
the applicable regulations.
2
Shielded cable shell be earthed at terminations,
splices and separable insulated connectors. Earth metal
1S. 13
~~
M;nltrv of Transport & Communicodon
DGRLT
/"'--.~<:<Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable

i nsulated connector fittings and all hardware to be in
accorda!'lce with manufacturer's written instructions.
15.7.3.4
Protection
Provide final protection and maintain conditions. in a

manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to
prevent entrance of moisture Into the cables and to ensure
medium-voltage cables are without damage or
deterioration at hand-over.
15.7.4
Road lighting cable shall be measured in linear

meters for each size and type of cable as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, installed in duct
(excluding duct) or directly buried in trench (excluding
trench), complete w ith required accessories, including all
types of cable jointing and terminations, accessories such
as clamps, channels, clips, connectors, tugs, tapes and any
other item which is not stated above but is considered
necessary for completion of the work.
2
Underpass lighting cable shall be measured in linear
meters for each size and type of cable as shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, complete with
required accessories i ncluding cable trays, pulling of cable
in already installed/buried conduit or uPVC ducts in slab,
a~ type of jointing and terminations and any other item
which is not stated above but is considered necessary for
3
The approved cable work shall be measured by the
linear meter of cable installed plus an anowance of 2m at
each end for termination and jointing.
4
Trenches, ducts, warning tapes, and markers for
cables are measured separately under Sub-section 15.17.
15.7.5
Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted C!lble work

provided for above will be paid for at the unlt rates
stated in the Bill of Quantities which rate shall be full
compensation for supplying materials, installing, testing,
puning l nto operation, and for labor, transport, equipment
tools, supplies and other work items necessary for the
proper completion of the work as specified.
11.5
15.7.6

Electrical cable (type) (voltage) (size)
(lln.m)
15.8
Road Lighting Masts, Columns

and Luminaires
15.8.1
Description
This Sub--section describes requirements for supply,

erection upon prepared foundations and putti ng into
service road Eghting masts and columns complete with
operating mechanisms, brackets, luminaires, control gear
and cabling.
15- 14
15.8.2
Materials
15.8.2.1
Steel Masts and Columns General
Steel Masts and columns sha!l be fablicated from

steel, in accordance with Section 6, and hot dip galvanized
to BS EN ISO 1461 (inside and outside) or in accordance
with ASTM A123 and A385 to Engineers approval . They
shall be in sections not less than 10m in length, and shall
be joined on site by pressure over-lapping or slip joints
which shall have a minimum length of 1.5 times the
diameter of the joint. Columns up to 12m high shall be
supplied in one piece.
2
The walls of columns shall be a m;nimum thickness
of 3mm with a minimum ultimate strength of 370N/mmr
and a minimum yield strength of 240N/mmz. Masts 1nd
columns over 13m in height shall have a minimum w all
thickness of 4mm, a m inimum ultimate strength of
520N/mmz and a m inimum yield strength of 360N/mm 2
3
Masts 11nd columns when installed and fully
equipped. shall have safety factors in accordance with
Technical Report No. 7 ofthe Institution of Public Lighting
Engineers I UK): 2003 or latest edition. They shall be
capable of w ithstanding the gust wind velocity stated in
Clause 15.1 .9 blowing in the most unfavorable direction at
a height of ten meters above ground level. The deflection
at the t op of the mast or column shall not exceed 1/40 of
the heighL
With a w ind velocity of 198kmlhr on the full projected area
of column, bracket and luminaire(s) a factor of safety of 3
on m inimum tensile strength shall be mai ntained and
horizontal deflection at lantern position shall not exceed
1140.
4
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed
manufacturer's design calculation sheets and supporting
data to show that the masts and columns and foundation
designs respectively are safe and meet the above
requirements. The submitted calculations shall include the
following:
i.
The deflection at the top of the mast ot column at

the designed wind spee<i
IL The natural frequency ofthe mast or column.
iii. The critical wind speed f or resonance.
iv. The damping characteristics of the mast or
column.
v. The steel stresses under reso nant conditions.
vi. The value of acceleration at the top of t he miH1
or column under resonant conditions.
vii. Welding procedure details.
viii. Procedure details ei\Suring that the flange plate
is not laminated.
ix. Details of the joints between the mast or column
sections and between the bottom section and
flange plate.
x. Details of the base compartment w ith the
method of reinforcement at the door area and
means
adopted
for making
the
door
weatherproof
and
tamper-proof.
Sultanate of Om10n. SWldl'd Spec:ifo<:~om ror Road I!<
Br~ Cont:ruc110n
21110
All the above shall be submitted for approval by the

Engineer before manufacturing commences.
Delivery shall not be done until factory tests are
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5
A hot dip galvanized steel flange base plate of
sufficient (20mm minimum) thickness, free from
laminations. shall be welded to the base of the mast or
column, fully developing the strength of the sectf on.
Supplementary gussets shall be provided between the
bolt holes drilled In the flange. if necessary. The underside
of the flange and the inside of the pole to a height of
500mm shall be painted with bitumen. The outside of the
pole and the flange if under ground level shall also be
painted with bitumen up to ground level.
6
A door shall be provided In the masts and columns to
permit access to the circuit breaker assembly, junction box,
and winch (where provided) mounted on a backboard
made of durable non-hygroscopic material. The door shall
be weatherproof and fitted with a heavy duty lock. A
stainless steel 12mm diameter earthing bolt shall be
welded inside near the access door.
7
Where indicated on drawings and covered in the
BOO. masts and columns shall be painted with two (2)
coats of epoxy resin paint to an approved color or high
by
the
Concerned
gloss
finish
as
required
Authoritvlfngineer.
8
The Contractor shall produce a certificate from a
structural eng I nearing authority that columns and masts
meet the above requirements. In addition. an agreed
official testing authority's certificates shall be presented to
guarantee the life-time and resistance of the products
under worst climatic conditions.
9
The Contractor shall submit a guarantee from the
manufacturer stating that the design lifetime of the
columns and masts is a minimum of twenty five (251 years
after installation under the worst site conditions in Oman.
If any column or mast or any part thereof fails within the
guarantee period, subject to corrosion, the Contractor
shall replace them free of charge. Without this guarantee
the lighting columns and/or masts will not be
approved/accepted.
15.8.2.2
Steel Columns
Columns shalt carry either single or double

luminaires or any combination up to six luminaires as
shown on the Drawings and shall be of circular cross
section. Any special requirement for octagonal cross
section will be shown on Drawings or in design schedules.
2
The luminaires shall be rigidly fixed and bolted to the
column or column arms to prevent wind rotation or
vibration.
3
Columns with one or two luminaires shall be
connected over one phase and neutral. Columns with
three or more luminaires shall be connected over 3 phases
and neutral, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Bolted terminals and cable lugs of the sizes shown on
Drawings shall be provided with 3 phase and neutral
terminals, and for incoming and outgoing 3 phase 4 wire

cable. Terminal blocks shall be high temperature. nonInflammable, non-toxic material with high quality fixing
screws and individual terminal for each termination.
One circuit breaker, single pole 15 A shall be

provided for each phase leading to a luminaire. Circuit
breakers shall be compensated and rated for 50 deg. C
ambient temperature with interrupting capacity as
specified under other Sub-sections of the Specification,
and shall be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at
baseboard. Wiring shall be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core
85 deg. C conductor temperature. Cable shall be at least 4
mm copper conductor.
15.8.2.3
Steel High Masts
Masts shall be of the height specified on the

Drawings, hot dipped galvanized of multi-sided crosssection with a continuous taper made of formed sheet
steel, electrically welded. They shall be delivered to site in
sections and be the slip joint type. Masts shall be
assembled on site by means of pressure over-lapping or
slip joints which shall have a minimum length of 1.5 times
the diameter of the joint. Site welding will not be allowed.
2
The lumi naire rings or brackets shall be constructed
of galvanized steel in accordance with Section 6. Where
necessary. they shall be in two halves joined by bolted
flanges to permit removal. For masts with a moveable
luminaire ring, rollers with a serf canting mechanism shall
be provided made of water resistant non-marking material
with oil-impregnated bronze bushings.
3
The weatherproof wiring chambers shall have
terminal blocks. neutral bars, grounding bolts for electrical
connections, and facilities on the luminaire ring to allow
testing of luminaires while in the lowered position.
Cabling shall be in accordance with Sub-section 15.7. The
high mast cables shall conform to Technical Report No. 7
as given in Paragraph 15.8.2.1, Item 3.
4
The luminaire raising and lowering lead assembly if
fitted shall be manufactured of non-corrosive metals and
the operating cable sleeves shall be enclosed and run on
stainless steel shafts. The lu mlnalre ring or bracket shall
be supported by a 3-cable winching system. Flexible
stainless steel stranded aircraft cables entirely suitable for
the application. with factor of safety 5 times safe working
load of the winch, shall support the luminaire ring
assembly. Nylon or similar stops installed on the steel
cable shall support the luminaire ring assembly In extreme
lower position to within 900 mm above the base of the
mast. Provisions shall be made to prevent the power cable
from winding around the steel hoisting cable.
Arrangements shall be provided for the electricity and
support cables to be separated before passing over their
respective pulleys, and close fitting guides shall be
provided so that the cables cannot disengage from the
pulleys during operation. A steadying system shall keep
the luminaire ring in the correct top position preventing
rotation around Its vertical axis.
15- 15
~~
Mlnitrv of Tronsport & Communlcations. DGRLT
~~<Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
5
Winching systems shall have a lifting capacity of at
least double the weight of the luminaire ring assembly
and shall be fitted with an approved safety system to
control the ring assembly in the event of a suspension
cable failure.
6
Winches shall be capable of normal operation using
either a portable power tool or by hand, and shall
incorporate a torque limiter which can be adjusted and
locked. Winches shall be self-sustaining without brakes or
clutches which require maintenance and shaU be totally
enclosed and self-lubricating,
7
Termination of winch cables shall not involve
distortion or twisting of the cable structure. One full layer
of turns shall remain on the drum when the lumlnaire ring
is fully lowered or alternatively the drums shall be
grooved to ensure a t idy cable lay.
8
The head frame shall be covered by a shaped
protective aesthetic canopy as shown on the Drawings
and designed to give a coordnated appearance of head
frame with the luminaire ring when the latter is in the
raised position.
9
Two red aircraft obstruction lights within cast
aluminium bodies shall be fitted at the t op of each high
mast attached to the tumi naire ring and arranged to
project through the canopy. A transformer and relay shall
automatically connect the second lamp in the event of
lamp failure.
10 High mast distribution equipment shall be mounted
in a weatherproof enclosure on the baseboard of the lower
compartment of the high mast and shall comprise a back
plate chassis comp!ete with:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
1 x 60 Amperes triple pole main incoming

molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) and neutral
assembly for luminaire circuits.
1 x 20 Amperes single pole MCCB and neutral
assembly for each luminaire circuit.
1 x 15 Amperes single or triple pole MCCB and
neutral assembly connected to the incoming
supply and serving a 16A250V DIN or 16A-415V
DIN socket outlet complete with 3-pln plug to suit
the raising and lowering mechanism.
A multi-pin plug and socket outlet with guard
ring,
11 The breakers shall be designed, manufactured and

tested in compliance with IEC 60947 2 sequence Ill,
calibrated at 50 degrees C. The breakers shall have
interrupting capacity exceeding 10 kA.
12 The 16A250 V or 16A-415 V socket outlet for supply
to the portable raising and lowering power tool shall be
connected to the MCCB via a flexible connection to ensure
accessibility,
13 Each high mast supplying ground sign lighting shall
be equipped with an add:tional 15 amp circuit breaker to
supply the sign lighting installation. The circuit breaker
shall be installed inside the mast distribution box.
14 Masts shall be equipped with a lightning protection
air terminal of the correct height to provide the required
15- 16
zone of protection for the mast head frame and luminaires.

The terminal shall be bonded to the mast to ensure the
discharge is dissipated via the eanh and ground terminal
w ithout damage to the steel winch cables or electric cable.
15.8.2.4
Glass Reinforced Polyester (GRPI Columns
This specification is for columns applicable to coastal

roads In general, where heights of 4m to 14m are required
and as shown on layout drawings.
2
GRP columns shd
be manufactured by the
centrifugal casting process and shall withstand wind
speeds up to 220kmlhr.
3
GRP columns shall be highly resistant to impact.
deflection end bending, and shall be highlY safe in case of
1 collision, fire resistant (using special resins), electrically
non-conductive and safe without grounding.
4
GRP columns shall be corrosion proof, resistant to
chemical reactions, with UV protection against
weatherabiHty end shall have a guaranteed lifetime of 25
years. A reinforced lockable hinged access door of
minimum height of 300mm at a height from ground level
of 600mm shall be provided.
5
The columns shall be eit her of the burial type or the
flanged base type, with su itable cable access as shown on
drawing/details. Flanged base plates shall be of galVanized
steel equal in construction to flange plates used on steel
columns (15mm to 20mm thickness) with four anchor
bolts and convenient cable entry, bitumen coated on the
inside and outside. Pigment color range shall be
submitted with the proposal and color shall be selected by
the Engineer before approval is granted on the
manufacturer.
6
Standards for GAP columns shall be as follows:

Specific Gravity: 1.65 Kg I dm' (UNI7092n2)
Glass Fiber Content(% by weight) : 4555 %
iii. W ater Absorption: 0.5% (UNI ISO 62)
iv. E Modulus: 22000 ;t 2000 MPa IUNI 5819166)
v. Tensile Strength: 400 :t 50 MPa (UNI5819166)
vi. Flexural Strength: 350 :t 50 MPa (UNI 7219fl3)
vii. Compressive Strength: 200 ;t 50 MPa (UNI
4279fl2)
viii. Impact Strength: > 180 kJ I m (UN! 6062167)
ix. Dielectric Strength; 3-7 kV I mm (UNI 4291fl2)
x. Surface Insulation Resistance: 1010 - 10" 1: (UNI
428Bfl21
xi. Thermal Conductivity: 0.2 - 0.3 kCal I mc (UNI
7891)
xii. Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 15 - 17
11("C10'I (UNI6061167)
xiil. Temperature Class: F
xiv. Overall Length: 3-14m
KV. Top Diameter (3-7m poles): 60 mm
KVi. Top Diameter (8 -14m poles): 94 mm
KVii. Conicity (slopa to determine the bottom): 18 mm
per linear meter length
KViii.Steel fortification (at the top): required
xix. Steel base plate: optional
xx. GRP base plate cover: available
i.
ii.
Sultanate of Oman. StonrUrd SpodfltlltiOOI tor Road & Bri. Construct0011 2010
7
Tests and approvals for GAP columns shall conform
to the following Standards:
General Outdoor Lighting Pole Specifications:
ASTM- 04923-01
ii. Tensile Strength: DIN EN ISO 5272
iii. Elongation: DIN EN ISO 527-2
iv. Flextural Test. (bending I: DIN EN ISO 14125
v. Impact Bending Test: DIN 53435
vi. Rate of Burning: ASTM- D635-03
vii. Dielectric Breakdown Voltage: ASTM - D14997a
viii. DC Resistance: ASTM- D257-99
ix. Outdoor Weathering: ASTM- D1435-99
i.
Mechanical properties for GAP

conform to the following Standards:
i.
li.
iii.
iv.
v.
15.8.2.5
columns
shall
Tensile Strength; DIN EN ISO 527-2

Elongation at break: DIN EN ISO 527-2
Bending Strength: DIN 53390
E-modulus: DIN EN ISO 14125
Impact Strength; DIN 53435
Road Lighting Luminaires and Lamps
Luminaires shall be of the totally enclosed type,

complying with IEC 60598-1. IEC 6059821, and IEC 6059823 (a r latest versionl, dust protected and splash proof,
divided into two compartments. The first compartment
shall be protected by clear glass or acrylic polycarbonate
sealed to the frame and hinged and shall house the optical
system with polished and anodized pressed aluminum
reflector, conforming to at least degree IP 66 of IEC 60529,
under all operating conditions. The second compartment
shall consist of the electrical accessories (control gearl.
cable feed terminals and side entry mounting socket to at
least IP 54.
2
Luminaires shall be shock resistant and specially
designed to house required lamps, electrical gear and
accessories. Body shall be corrosion resistant, extruded,
pressure die--cast or fabricated aluminum alloy, optically
sealed, mechanically strong and easy to maintain.
Luminaire housing made from glass reinforced plastic or
other synthetic material shall not be acceptable.
3
Luminaire bodies constructed of fiber reinforced
polyester or pressed aluminum may be accepted subject
to approval of the Engineer and the quality of the product
and its resistance to heat from direct sunlfg ht and/or heat
emitted from the lampfcontrol gear. The decision of the
Engineer In this respect is final and not subject to
discussion.
4
Exposed metal parts of luminaires sha II be factory
finished, stove enamelled, with suitable corrosion
resisting paint capable of resisting heat emitted by lamp
during continuous operation, and under full sunlight
conditions. Color shall be agreed with the Engineer.
M:rror reflectors shall be single piece, with 99.5%
5
purity, anodized and glazed aluminium or die cast with
super-purity aluminium vapor-deposited, and coated with
transparent layer of silicon protection against wiping.
6
Luminaire protectors shall be heat and shock
resistant glass, mounted Into suitable frame assembly
fixed to body by captive screws, and secured by extra
safety clamps to allow replacement of protector and
reflector, for maintenance purposes without danger of tha
cover falling to the ground. Ozone resistant ethylene
propylene or approved equivalent rubber shall ensure
sealing of the front glass, to maintain tha required degree
of protection IP65.
7
Lamp sockets shall be high grade porcelain, mounted
in support brackets with provision to adjust lamps
vertically and axially. Lamp support and locking system
shall grip and prevent lamp movement in operation.
B
Ballast and control gear shall be mounted in
luminaire in separate compartment isolated to protect the
electrical accessories from the direct radiant heat emitted
by the lamp, and with enclosed terminal blocks fitted with
quick-disconnect electrical leads. Where required, control
gear shall be contained in the prewired box, having an
enclosure of IP 54, and mounted on luminaire ring
separately from luminaires.
9
Control gear shall be plug in type for operation at 240
V, A C. single phase, 50 Hz. Ballast shall be trop"calized
class H insulated, specially selected for particular type of
lamp used, and lamps shall be able to start with at least +I
10% variation of nominal voltage and continue in normal
operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds .
Control gear losses shall not exceed 10% of normal lamp
wattage. AFI suppression devicB shall be provided. Refer
to CISPR Power factor shall be compensated to at least
0.9 lagging or better.
10 Control gear (choke, capacitor, ignitor, etc.) shall be
suitable to stand up to 85 degrees C. ambient temperature
ofthe enclosu ra.
11 Internal connections shall be with hlgh quality heat
resistant wire insulated for 105 deg. C and with porcelain
connectors. Control gear shall comply with the IEC 60947
3 or relevant equivalent British Standard specification or
other acceptable International equivalent.
12 HAC ruse cartridges, suitably ratad and conforming
with IEC 60269, shall be provided, complete with base, for
protection of the luminaire. Fuse shall be rated to
withstand starting current and sha II bB preferably located
in centro! gear enclosure.
13 Terminal blocks shall be of the suitable screw-tunnel
type, clearly marked with arrangement to facilitate
maintenance, quick replacement and easy disconnection
of individual components.
14
Types of lamps are to be as follows:

a)
High prassure sodium lamps shall be type

SON-T (tubularl. in accordance with IEC60662
for dimensions and characteristics, and IEC
62035 for safety, with guaranteed average
rated life (down to 80% outputl above 12,000
hours, and having initial luminous output equal
to or above the following:
i.
16500 lumens for 150 W lamps.
15- 17
~~
Mlnltrv or T.ranaport & Comrnunleatlon OGRLT
~~~oad Lighting and Electrical installations
ii.
iii.
iv.
b)
High pressure mercury vapor lamps shall be to

IEC 60188, and shall i nclude quartz discharge
tube in an internally coated ovoid outer tube.
Coating shell be ytrium vanadate phosphur
with color temperature of 3300 deg. K.
Guaranteed rated life (down to 80% output)
shall be above 8000 hours and Init ial luminous
output above the following:
i.
ii.
iii.
cl
3800 lumens for 80 W lamps

Metal halide lamps shall comprise quartz

discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hard
glass outer bulb, operating on same principle
as all gas discharge tubes with iodide additives.
indium, thelium and sodium in the mercury
discharge, to increase intensity in three
spectral bands; blue, green and yellow-red with
high color rendering, Lamps up to 150 W shall
be provided with electronic ballast. Lamps shall
be to IEC 61167 with E40 base. Guanmteed
average life shall not be less than 10000 hours
and luminous outputs. after 100 hours burning,
shall be above the following:
i.
ii.
in.
d)

135000 lumens for 1000W lamps

90000 lumens fo r 1000 W lamps
Low pressure sodium lamps shall be type SOX

or SOX (E) and shall conform to IEC 60192:2001 ,
with guaranteed average life above 18000 hrs
and having inilial luminous output equal to or
above the following:
SOX type:
i.
il.
iiol.
iv.
v.
4800
8100
13500
22500
33000
lumens
lumens
lumens
lumens
lumens
for
for
for
for
for
35W
55W
90W
135W
185W
lamp
lamp
lamp
lamp
lamp
SOX Etype:
i.
il.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
1800 lumens
3600 lumens
5800 lumens
10500 lumens
17000 lumens
26000 lumens
for
for
for
for
for
for
18W lamp
26W lamp
36W lamp
66W lamp
91W lamp
131W lamp
15 Permissible base temperature shall not be greater

than 250 deg. C, and maximum bulb temperature not
greater than 550 deg. C. l amp burning posit ion for 2000
W, 240 V lamp is to be possible up to 75 degrees.
16 Multi-piece mirror reflectors may be accepted subject
to satisfaction of the Engineer of the quality of the product,
15- 18
and to the luminance and illuminance results achieved.

The decision of the Engineer in this respect is final and not
subject to discussion..
17 Luminaires sha n provide a distribution general ty in
accordance with IEC 605981, IEC 6059B-22,1EC 6059823,
cut-off or semi-cut-off classification, as required by the
design standards for type and class of road.
15.8.2.6
Flood Lights
Flood lights shall be totally enclosed type. weather,

dust and shock resistar.t, IP 65 to IEC 60529, and shall
conform to the requirements and types shown on
drawings or be of approved equal make.
2
Housing shall be of high pressure diecast aluminium
alloy, closed on front by hinged framed glass protector
highly resistant to thermal and mechanical shocks, and set
in position by at least eight heavy duty stainless steel
spring clamps with silicon rubber sealing gasket.
Enclosure shall be in accQrdance with IEC Publication
60598-25.
3
Ren ectors shall be high purity (over 99% reflectance)
anodized aluminium, secured In precision aligned internal
tracks to provide beam distribution required.
4
Connect ion box shall be located at rear of floodlight
body with gland connections to accept 4 mm2 PVCIPVC
three core cables.
Lamp and control gear shall be
mounted in two separate and lsoleted compartments.
5
Control gear shall be plug-in type, 240 V, 50 Hz,
power factor compensated to at least 0.9 lagging. Ballasts
and ignitors shall be of typa specially adapted for make of
lamps selected. Ignitors shall be electronic thyristor type.
Lamp shall be able to start with at least +/-10% from line
voltage, and with normal operation dips up to 20% for four
seconds. Compensation shall ensure that there is no large
increase In operating current during starting. Control gear
losses shall not exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in
control gear compartments shall be single core 2.5 mm2
copper conductors with suitable high temperature
insulation and sheath.
6
Exposed matal parts of floodlights shall be painted
with corrosion and heat resistant paint, resisting operating
temperatures attained In d irect sunlight while lamp is
burning.
7
Floodlights shall be located as shown on the
Drawings and mounted on specially designed brackets to
allow swiveling in any desired direction and locking firmly
in final position. Protractor scale shall be provided for
accurate setting
Bolted earthing terminal shall be provided In each

fitting.
15.8.3
Lighting
mastslcolumns
shall
be
handled,
transported and erected in such a way so as to avoid any
damage. Any damage to pole or galvanizing shall be made
good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Sult"n"to of Ornn. Sw1dtd Sptdfi lllont for Rod & Bridg. Cons:ruaion 2010
2
The lighting masts/columns shell be stored clear of
soil. ground water or other rust producing materials. The
fixing of poles shell be carried out in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and good engineering practice.
into operation, and for erecting material, labor, equipment

tools, supplies end other work items necessary for the
3
Mests/colu mns shell be bolted to concrete bases
constructed in accordance with Sub-section 15.17 and
erected in accordance with the mast manufacturer's
instructions. The column or mast shell be vertical to within
0.1% of its height. Final setting and adjustment of the
luminaires shall be carried out alter the masts are erected
and operational.
15.8.6
i.
ii.
Iii.
Items in the Bill of Quantlties

High mast assembly (typal (heightl (No
end type of luminaires! (reference dwg.) (nrl
Lighting columns (type I (number
of armsl (height) (type of luminalrel
(reference drawing. I
(nrl
(LumpSuml
Column/high mast testing
4
The Contractor shall be responsible until final hand
over for correcting the alignment of any column or bracket
to its or;ginal position except where it is due to vehicle
impact.
15.9
Sign Illumination
15.9.1
Description
5
Where lighting columns/masts are to be installed in
the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer and act as directed. He shall maintain
clearances from the power lines as the Concerned
Authority's requirements.

supplying, installing and putting into operation the
illumination of overhead and roadside signs where shown
on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
6
Masts/columns shall be erected to the height and
with the luminaires as shown on the Drawings. Each
luminaire shall house the required lamp oriented to give
the illumination and luminance on the road surfaces as
stated in Clause 15.1.15, (3land Table 15.1.15. 1.
7
Luminaires on columns shall be aligned parallel with
the long' tudinal profile of the road end set at go to the
centre line,
8
High masts incorporating mobile luminaf re rings
shall be capable of supporting a portable personnel cage
for maintenance. The Contractor shall provide the cage
which shall be capable of safely carrying two persons plus
servicing equipment.
9
The Contractor shall number all the columns/masts
with high quality paint using stencil for 50mm high
lettering. The numbering shall be at 1200mm from the
bottom of pole towards the road. The numbering shall be
in a manner as directed by the Engineer.
15.8.4
Each type of high mast assembly and lighting

column shall be measured separately and shall include
brackets luminaires/ floodlights, lamps, terminal blocks.
circuit breakers and switchgear, internal wires and cabling,
control gear, obstruction lights (if neededl, and earthing,
cable entries, mounting brackets/arms, complete as
specified, erected, tested and put into operation.
2
Testing of high masts and lighting columns, at the
factory and on Site, is given as an item, to cover for all
tests and reports and test certificates.
15.8.5
Basis of Payment

rates stated in the Bill of Quantities which rate shall be full
compensation for supplying, installation, testing. putting
15.9.2
Materials
Luminaires where used to illuminate signs shall be

wide angled floodlights of the totally enclosed type
conforming to IEC 605981, 2-5( Luminaires- Floodlights)
and BS EN 12899-1:2001 (Fixed Vertical Road Traffic Signs,
Fixed Signsl. The body of the floodlight shall be
composed of an extruded aluminum alloy box closed on
the front by a protector of vandal resistant glass. The
protection rating shall be IP 65 to IEC 60529.
2
The lamp and control gear shall be mounted in two
separate compartments. Alternatively, the control gear
may be housed remotely. Power factor compensation
shall be 0.9 or bener.
3
Photo-electric control units shall be of the plug-in
type. The control unit losses shall not exceed 10% of the
nominal lamp wattage. A device shall be provided for the
suppression of radio and television interference to CISPR
15 requirements.
15.9.3
The signs shall be adjusted and set correctly relative

to the venical plane and the road axis before the electrical
installation work is started. Floodlights and associated
fixings shall not obstruct the sign face viewed from the
road. Screening shall be added to the top or bottom
edges of the sign to prevent glare to oncoming traffic.
2
Sign supports and gantries are specified in Subsection 14.1.
3
Overhead gantry or cantilever sign lighting shall be
located and mounted as shown on the drawings.
Mounting shall be provided for each floodlight allowing it
to be swiveled in any direction and locked.
4
Feeder cable shall be routed via a duct in the
supporting frame or gantry up to platform height and
terminated into a non-automatic isolator switch. A circuit
15-19
~~
MJnltrv of Tronport & Cornmunlcation
OGRLT
.../"..~<::Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
breaker board within the enclosure shall distribute power

to the individual floodlights.
5
Roadside sign lighting shall be as described in Items
3 and 4 above, but with the adjustable mountings on lop
of support poles. The poles shall be positioned 1.8m in
front of the signs and parallel with the sign face and shall
be checked and shimmed to be perpendicular before
tightening down.
accessories. Body shall be one piece edruded aluminium

(magnesium silicon alloy) having a wall thickness of not
less than 2.5 mm.
2
Exposed metal parts of luminaires shall be factory
finished, stove enamelled, with corrosion resisting paint
capable of resisting heat emitted by lamp during
continuous operation. The whole assembly shall be
treated against corrosion by anodizing the aluminium.
The cable from the sub-station or feeder pillar shall

be routed into the pole via the duct in the base and looped
into a circuit breaker located behind the pole access cover.
3
Mirror reflectors shall be 99.5% purity, polished
aluminium reflectors and coated with transparent layer of
silicon protection against w iping.
7
Lighting where required for signs located in
sidewalks in urban areas shall be mounted on the top of
the sign supporting poles, projecting in front of the top
edge of the sign and braced.
4
Control gear shaD be mounted on a "plug-in" type
control gear tray, and shall be housed in a self contained
sealed box.
8
The earth of the cables shall be bonded to the earth
terminal of each enclosure.
15.9.4
Each type of overhead or roadside lighting assembly

shall be measured separately by the number of complete
floodlight installations sup pi ied, erected and put into
operation, complete with lamps, supporting steel work,
switchgear, control gear, interconnecting cables and
earthing as necessary.
15.9.5
Basis of Payment

rates stated in the Bill of Quantities which rates shall be
ful! compensation for supplying, installation, testing,
putting into operation, for materials, labor, transport,
equipment tools, supplies and other work items necessary
for the proper complet ion of the work as specified.
15.9.6
i.
ii.

Overhead sign lighting (gantry or cantilever I
(reference drawing. I
(nrl
Ro;tdside sign lighting (sign ref. no.I
(reference. drawing.I
(nrl
15.10
Under Bridge Lighting
15.10.1
Description

supplying, and l nstalling under bridge surface luminaires
1nd/or recessed lighting in prepared cutouts such as in
concrete structures.
15.10.2 Materials
15.10.2,1
Surface Mounted Luminaires
The fitting shall be totally enclosed, dust and jet

proof, conforming to at least IP65 of IEC 60529, and
conforming with IEC 605981, shock resistant and specially
desi gned to house the required lamps, electrical gear and
15- 20
5
Earth wire shall be connected through the plug and
socket connector to ensure that the earth potential is
maintained on the gear tray when it is being removed
from the lumina ire for maintenance purposes.
6
Luminaires shall have a hinged front glass with at
least 2 hinges assembly which shall comprise a clear
toughened glass plate, not less than 5.0 mm thick, capable
of swinging to the vertical position. The front glass
assembly shall seat on to a neoprene non rotting type
gas~et and once seated shall provide the required degree
of protection. Glass used shall be shatter proof (ofthe type
which once broken. no part of the glass will fall on the
carriageway!. Each luminaire shall have an HRC fuse for
protection.
7
Luminaires shall be complete with their mounting
accessories and shall be supported from unistrut
galvanized steel cha nne! fixed to the soffit of the bridge.
Fixing details shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
8
Lamp sockets shall be high grade porcelain, mounted
in support brackets with provision to adjust lamps
vertically and axially. Lamp support and locking system
shall grip and prevent lamp movement during operation.
9
Ballast and control gear shall be mounted ill
luminaire in separate compartment isolated from the lamp
and with enclosed term inal blocks fitted with quick
disconnect electrical leads, Where required, control gear
shall be contained In the prewired box, having an
enclosure of IP 65, and mounted on luminaire r ing
separately from luminaires. Control gear shall be plug in
type for operation at 240 V, A.C. single phase, 50 Hz.
Ballast shall be specially selected for particular type of
lamps used, end lamps shall be able to start with at least
+/10% variation of nominal voltage and continue in
normal operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds.
Control gear losses shall not exceed 10% of normal lamp
wattage. RFI suppression device shall be provided. Power
factor shall be compensated to at least 0.9 lagging.
15.10.2.2
Recessed Mounted Luminaires
1
Luminaires shall comply with IEC 605981, IEC 60598
22. and IEC 6059823
15.11
Traffic Signals
2
Luminaires shall be recessed flush mounted
weatherproof type including lamps, a frame for the
concrete opening and a housing for the control gear.
15.11.1 Description
3
The luminaire body shall be made from epoq
powder coated galvanized sheet steel or from extruded or
pressure die-cast corrosion resistant aluminium alloy.
Aluminium shall be anodized and painted grey.
This Sub-section describes requirements for the

design,
supply,
installation,
comm1ss oning
and
monitoring/rev! ew of traffic signal installations and all
associated signal equipment.
4
Luminaires within 4m of finished ground level shall
be v and aI resistant.
2
The terms used are as defined in the Highway Design
Standards.
5
The luminaires shall have a hinged front glass
assembly of prismatic toughened glass, not less than
15.11.2 Materials
6.5mm thick, fixed and sealed into a metal frame which

shall have a rapid closing device They shall be fitted with
'trimming plates' to provide a flush appearance.
6
The protection rating shall be IP65 to I EC 60529 for a II
luminaires in the underside of bridge superstructures and
luminaires in walls.
7
The optical system, electrical control gear and lamp
shall be mounted on a 'plug-in' type reflector gear tray.
The ground wire connection shell be taken through the
plug and socket connector.

The luminaire shall be fixed surface mounted or flush
with the concrate surface into a preformed non- corrodible
framed opening as pertaining to the lighting unit specified.
2
Wiring shall be dueled in conduits embedded in the
structure or hidden from view within the structure and
shall loop in and out of conduit boxes serving the
luminaires.
15.11.2.1
General
The equipment shall function satisfactorily for an

input voltage of 240v :t:15% and input frequency 50Hz 4%.
If required a form of automated stabilizer shall be
incorporated.
2
All signal equipment should be su' table for operation
in the climatic conditions of Oman. The equipment should
be operational between - 1sc and +60c, and resistant to
dust/sand contamination. A minimum of 5 years operation,
with routine maintenance, should be expected from any
installed equipment.
3
The equipment shall comply with the requirements
of the Highway Design Standards for timings, signal
sequence and associated detectors.
All signal equipment shall comply with the
4
interference limits given in BS EN 55015:2006 (Limits and
Methods of Measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of electrical lighting or similar equipment).
15.1 1.2.2
Controllers

Each type of lighting assembly shall be measured
separately by the number of lighting units (luminaire,
lamp, control gear, terminal blocks) supplied, installed and
put into operation.
Controllers shall be fully programmable and modular

in design to allow the replacement of faulty components
or the addition of extra circuit boards and features as and
when required.
2
Controllers should have at least the following inbuilt
modes of operation available for use:
i.
ii.
The quantity of completed and accepted work

rates stated in the Bill of Quantities which rate shall be full
compensation for supplying, Installing, testing and putting
into service, and for materials, labor, equipment, tools,
supplies and other work items necessary for the proper
support and completion of the work as specified.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
lC.
lCL
xii.
15.10.61tems In the Bill of Quantities

i.
ii.
Under bridge surface mounted luminaire

(type) (reference drawing.)
Under bridge recessed lighting luminaire
(type) (reference drawing)
(nr)
(nr)
Manual
FilCed time
Vehicle actuated
Urban traffic control
Pedestrian fixed vehicle period
Pedestrian vehicle actuated
Bus/1 ight rail transit priority
Part-time
Cable-less linking facility
Hurry ca"l
Emergency priority
Standby software flash mode
3
Controllers shall utilile solid state lamp switching
cards, with a maximum load per lamp switch card of 20A.
The switch cards should be able to support both ELV and
LV configurations.
4
Standard 240v Low Voltage (L Vl Controllers:
1~21
~~
Minltrv of Tronaport & Communication. DGRLT
I.
ii.
iii.
Shall be able to support between 24 and 36

phase outputs, arranged on up to 4 separate
phase driver cards, used as required.
Shall be able to support dimming facilities of
120v. 140\1 or 160v RMS.
Each output lamp switch shall be able to support
a 4A load. with a maximum total ll!fllp load on
the controller of 20A 30A.
Extra Low Voltage (ELVI controllers:

I.
li.
Iii.
Shall be able to support between 24 and 36

phase outputs. arranged on up t o 6 sepertte
phase driver cards, used as required.
Each output lamp switch shall be able to support
a 2A load, with a maximum total lamp load on
the controller of 20A - 40A,
Shall have a lamp supply voltage of 48v RMS
with a signal dimming option of 27.5v RMS
6
Controllers shall provide visual displays of the
cunent mode of operation and current stage I t im ings.
7
Controllers shall have the facility to allow testing to
be carried out via a handset port. This shall al ow minor

amendments to the controller configuration to be made,
and allow artlfteiel demands and extensions to be placed
in the controller for testing purposes.
Controllers shall have the facUlty to allow for onste
8
adjustments to be made to the signal t imings, via the
connection of a handset. These timings should include,
but not be limited to, VA maKlmum green times,
i ntergreens. detector extenson timings, detector fault
management (OFMI values, and the controller's timetable.
A ll signal timings Inputted this way shall be subject to predetermined limits, imposed for safety reasons during the
initial design.
9
It shall not be possible, through any hardware or
software failure of 111y component of the controller, to
give a right of way to two conflicting signal phases.
10 The controller shall have the facility to monitor oil
equipment connected to It, reporting failures as and when
they occur.
11 The controller shall have an integral lamp monitoring
unit that allows safety critical signal aspects to be
monitored for lomp failure and appropriate reporting
action taken when this occurs.
12 Should any single approach suffer a single red lamp
failure, then the controller shall report a red lamp failure
wamlng (Rt.F11
13 Should two or more red lamps fall on any single
approach, the controller shall report a second red lamp
failure (RLF2J and Inhibit conflicting pedestrian phases
from gaining right of way. On standalone pedestrian
crossings, the facility shall shut down all signals when this
condition arises.
14 A single red lamp failure condition can be self-reset if
the controller detects the lamp to be working again,
however a two or more red lamp failure condition shall
1522
require manual on-ste intervention of a maintenance

engineer before normal operation is resumed.
15 The controller shall have a fused miiSter switch to
isolate the controller. This fuse shall be of a rating
calculated from the cumulative load of all signal
equipment attached to the controller and dona on a site by
site basis. A fault on any signal circuit shall not cause
damage to the controller.
16 The electrical supply to the controller shall have its
own fused system which should not be isolated by the
controller switch.
17 It shall be possible to isolate all signal lamps by use
of a switch and fuse whilst retaining supply to the
controller.
1B Controller cabinets shall be housed in weather
resistant . dust resistant corrosion resistant cabinet. The
front of the cabinet shall have a full length locking door to
allow access to the control equipment. A swing frame
shall be provided to allow access to the rear wiring of
components. Smaller flap doors can be used to give
access to manual panel, telecommunication and electricity
coMectlons as required.
15.11.2.3
Signal Equipment
1
Signal poles shall be constructed of galvaniZed steel,
covered by seamless high density polythene. A terminal
block assembly shall be mounted on the top of the mast.
covered by a polythene cap.
2
Standard signal poles shall be 4m in length. 4.75m
poles may be used when the extra height would enable
benet signal visibility.
3
6m poles. with two signal heads mounted at d ifferent
heights, may be used on roads with high speed limits or
where a 4m or 4.75m pole would not provide sufficient
signal visibility. However, they should I'IOt be considered
as a preferred solution for signal installations where other
options exist .
4
Short 2m poles may be used at crossing points to
house a single pedestrian push button.
5
Signal heads shall meet the requirements set out in
BS EN 12368:2006. They shall be lightweight, modular
designs with a m inimum lens diameter of 200mm to
300mm. An signal heads shall contain anti sun-phantom
technology. LED signal heads may be utilized as well as
traditional tungsten bulbs.
6
Backing boards shall be provided on all signal heads
with an East-West alignment, to enhance signal visibility.
On other a ~ g n ments backing boards are recommended
and shall be provided if instructed by the Concerned
Authority.
7
For vehicle detection purposes on a v ehicle actuated
control strategy, above ground vehicle detectors may be
used instead of inductive loop facilities.
8
Where the 85th percentile approach speed is over
4kmlh. it is recommended that microwave. radlf or optical
devices be utilized. For stop-line detection of vehicles,
Sultnate of Oman. Sllndattl Sptefteliont fDr Rood & Brld!le ConoltU<'Iion 2010
pedestrian detection or where the 85th percentile speed of

vehicles is below 4kmlh, infra-red or optical detection is
recommended.
9
Inductive loops may be utilized where it is felt that
above ground detection is not suitable for site operation.
Where loops are to be installed they shall be 2 meters
apart in the direction of traffic flow, and consist of 3 cable
turns.
15.11.2.4 Signal Operation
The signal timing ranges shall be as stated in Table
15.11.2.1.
Lenadt (a)
&andllrd .Period
~
Minimum Green
4 - 50 (in 1s stBps)
Vehicle Extension
0.4 - 31.8 (in 0.2s steps)
Maximum Green
D- 255 (in 1s steps)
LBaVing Amber
3 (fixed)
2 (fi~Bd)
_Starting Amber
Inter-greens
D- 254 [in 1s steps}
?t~rting !ntBr-green
B- 12 (in 1s steps)
Phase Delays
o- 20 (in 1s steps)
Pedestrian Blackout
3 - 20 (in 1utaps)
Table 15.11.2.1 : Traffic Slgnallimlng Ranges

Provision shall be made for inter-green times
2
between stages, and the circuitry shall include safety
features to prevent simultaneous display of conflicting
green indications.
3
Manual operation may override all modes, except
UTC control. If manual operation is required at a UTC
controlled site, then the UTC computer shall remotely
disconnect its link with the controller.
4
The modes of operation
selection shall be:
i.
iL
iii.
iv.
available by manual
Cableless Iinking facility (CLF)

Vehicle actuated (VA)
Fixed time
Manual
5
Under vehicle actuated mode, when there is an
absence of demands, it shall be possible to revert to an all
red condition, flashing ambers, or a specified stage.
If the flashing amber is to be used during periods of
6
low or no demand, such as night-time, then the flashing
mode shall be preceded by a steady amber and the other
vehicle and pedestrian signals extinguished. The flashing
rate shall be between 55 and 85 per minute, with equal on
and off intervals. The flashing mode sequence shall be
ended by the signals reaching an 'all red' period for 3
seconds, followed by the normal start up sequence
leading to a right of way being shown on a predefined
start up stage.
7
Under vehicle actuated mode the controller shall
honor vehicle demands as and when they appear.
However, stage ski pping must not occur to service a

demand, unl ess the stage is demand dependant. In the
event of a stage being terminated by the expiry of a
maximum green period, a revertive demand shall be
introduced for that stage.
B
In fixed time mode, the controller shall cycle through
aU (or pre-defined) stages in a pre-set timing sequence.
In manual control mode, the operation of the stage

buttons shall cause the controller to move to, and to
remain on, the selected stage (subject to the expiration of
the m'nimum green period of the current stage and the
associated inter greenl. An indicative light shall be
provided to show the current state of the controller under
manual mode-
15.11.3 Constructlon Requirements

15.11.3.1
Cables
The wiring of all cables shall meet the lEE Wiring

Guidelines, 17th Edition (BS 7671 f.
2
All signal heads on a single traffic phase shall not be
connected to the traffic signal controller on the same cable
run.
3
For new cable runs, 16 core cables with t .5mm2
cores shall be used for both ELV and LV applications. In all
cable runs, 4 cores should be left disconnected for
redundancy purposes.
4
All cables shall be tagged in the controller to easily
identify which equipment or pole a cable is connected to.
5
Cable tags shell be colored red for cables carrying a
low voltage (LVI and yellow for cables carrying an extra
low voltage (ELV).
15.11.3.2
Controller Root
The controller cabinet shell be set on a concrete

plinth, if it is above ground, or in a waterproof pit if below
ground. Design of the plinth or pit shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval before the plinth or pit is
constructed. The cabinet shall be secured to the plinth or
pit base by suitable anchoring devices. Provision shall be
made for ducts and conduits embedded in the plinth or pit
for easy access for cables. Adequate permanent protection
shell be provided to keep the cabinet end its contents free
from damp, dust, vermin and any other harmful
conditions.
2
Alternative materials may be proposed for the
Engineer's approval, such as standard heavy duty plastic
underground pits and precast concrete plinths, which
satisfy the requirements for stability and proof against all
environmental conditions.
t5.11.3.3
Ducts
A system of ducting shall be provided so that all the

signal poles and the controller are inter-connected by a
duct network. Duct paths should be straight lines, linking
each draw pit in the network. Where a straight line is not
~~
Mlnltry of Transport &
Communic~tlon.
DGRLT
possible, due to sub-surface obstructions, a radius bend of

no more than 35" may be used.
ducts shalt be fixed within the base to connect to the

signals.
2
Ducts shall be laid a minimum of 600mm below the
carriageway surface or 450mm below the footway surface.
2
Where conditions prevent construction of the pole
base as stipulated above, the Contractor shall provide
poles with welded steel base plates and !mchor bolts to
provide stability, all as approved by the Engineer.
3
Whenever a duct network crosses a road, at least 3
ducts shall be provided under the carriageway.
4
Ducts shall be 100mm internal diameter as standard,
however, separate 50mm internal diameter ducts may be
used to carry the electricity supply and telecommunication
cables to the controller, but no other cables shall be
installed inside these ducts.
5
Spur ducts to the signal pole location, from the
nearest draw-pit shall be provided. These can be 50mm o r
100mm diameter depending on the number of cables to
be installed.
6
Polypropylene draw cords, break weight 5.5kN shall
be provided in each duct; these draw cords shall be
continuous over their entire length with no joints or knots
and shall extend one meter from each end of the duct.
They shall be replaced on each cable draw through so that
they can be reused.
7
Cable duct route identification markers in accordance
with MEW Standard OES 2 shall be provided at 25m
maximum spacing throughout the entire installat ion and
at terminations and bends In the route.
8.
Refer to subsection 15. 17 - civil works for electrical
and communication installations for any other conditions.
15.11.3.4
Draw Pits
Draw pits shall be either constructed of pre-cast

concrete rings; brick built or reinforced high density
polyethylene. Draw pits shall comply with BS EN 124.
2
Draw pits shall not be placed in the carriageway. If
this Is unavoidable. than a higher specification draw pit
shall be used, capable of withstanding the loading of
traffic.
3
A master draw pit, minimum size 600mm x 600mm x
600m deep, shall be constructed in front of the controller
location to allow the cables to be easily fed i nto the
controller housing.
4
When ducts cross a road, draw-pits, size 1200mm x
900mm x 900mm deep, shall be installed on either side of
the carriageway and in central islands and medians, to
assist with cable pulling. They should not be installed in
the carriageway or installed in a location t hat would
interfere with any pedestrian movement.
5
On longer cable runs, draw pits shall not be more
than 50m apart.
6
Where possible. drawpits shalt be located adjacent t o
signal poles to allow cables to be spurred off to the pole
installation easily.
15.1 1.3.5
Pole installation
Standard 4 meter high poles shell normally be set in

a concrete base minimum 600mm x 600mm x 650mm
deep. The depth shall be Increased for longer poles. Cable
15- 24
3
For high masts, the design of the concrete base and
anchoring devices shall be proposed by the Contractor.
based on structural calculations for the ambient conditions,
and shalt be approved by the Engineer before construction.
16.11.3.6
Cantilevers and Gantries
Where traffic signals need to be mounted on

cantilevers or gantries, those structures should be in
accordance with the drawings and schedules. Fabricated
steel structures shall be in accordance with Section 6
(Structural steel and other metal wort ) and Section 7
(Paint) of this Specification.
16.11.3.7
Miscellaneous
Upon completion of the work the controller base

shall be filled wlth a base sealant that dries hard to
prevent vermin infestation into the controller cabinet.
2
Ducts shall be sealed with a foam substance or wire
wool to prevent vermin infestation through the duct
network.
3
Rold markings at all installations shall be in
accordance with the Oman Highway Design Standards
and Sectlon 14 of these Specifications.
4
On approaches to all pedestrian crossing points,
special anti-skid road surfacing shall be laid 50m tram the
crossing studs in the direction of oncoming traffic. The
surfacing shall have a minimum skid resistance value of
55 when tested in compliance with BS EN 3262-12 ~2001 ,
15.11.3.8
Completion
All signal equipment shall be assessed on site after

installation Is completed by use of a commissioning check
list to ensure that the Installation is complete and
complies w ith the quality and functional requirements of
the Specification.
2
The Contractor shall
paperwork, to include:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
submit
final
closedown
Site layout drawings (as installed)

Timing sheets
Signals hand-over certifiCate, including test and
commissioning reports
Operation and maintenance manuals.

Traffic signal installations shall be measured by the
number of completed sets of signaling equipment and
materials installed, modified or modernized at any one
location and shall cover all requirements including
controllers, sensors. signal poles, signal heads, cables,
drawpits, ducts, foundations, ell completely installed and

commissioned.
operation exposed to sun, dust storms, corrosive elements

and the adverse climatic conditions at the location.
2
Cantilever end Gentry supports for traffic signal
heads shall be measured by type and number installed,
end shall include foundations, fixings end mounting.
3
Electronic equipment shall use components of
assessed quality in accordance with the system outlined in
BS 9000 General Requirements for a System for Electronic
Components of Assessed Quality, or other approved equal.
3
The unit rates shall be deemed to cover for all work
at each installation location, including design, submission
of drawings, obtaining approvals from all Concerned
Authorities, the supply, construction and installation,
transport, and all civil work and miscellaneous items and
close-out procedures.

The amount of completed end accepted work as
provided for above, will be paid for at the unit rate stated
in the Bill of Quantities, which rate shall be full
compensation for supplying materials, installation, testing
and putting into operation, for labor, transport. equipment,
tools supplies and other items necessary for the proper

Traffic Signal Installation
{location and des:gnation
shown on drawings)
ii
including foundation
15.12
(Lump Sum)
Overhead Traffic Signal Support

(type) {nr)
Overheight Vehicle Detection

System
15.12.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for the
design and installation of the system to detect over-height
vehiclellrucks approaching underpass and to display a
warning to alert drivers not to enter the underpass.
15.12.2 Design Criteria for Materials and

Components
The equipment shall be designed to operate on A.C.
240 volts single phase 50 Hz with a voltage variation of
plus 15 percent or minus 20 percent and frequency
variation of plus or minus four percent. If the equipment is
sensitive to voltage fluctuations within the above stated
limits, an automatic voltage stabililer shall be
incorporated in the system, along with a stand-by
uninterruptible power supply system for maintaining
system memory.
2
Equipment shall be designed and derated for
continuous operation under operating conditions
stipulated in Sub-section 15.1 . The variation in light
intensity caused by the shadow of passing clouds shall not
interfere with the proper operation of the equipment. The
equipment shall be suitable for uninterrupted full load
4
All equipment shall be to the approval of the
Concerned Authority. It shall have a proven in service
record, and documentary evidence of this shall be
submitted. Full environmental tests shall be carried out
on a production sample by an independent testing
authority and a certificate supplied to show the suitability
of the equipment for use in the specified environment.
5
Materials and components shall be the latest
technology and best of their respective kind and modern
practice, selected and treated so that no corrosion will
occur during the lifetime of the installation estimated at 20
years.
6
All wiring shall be neatly and securely fixed in
position in an approved manner. The wiring shall be in
high temperature PVC insulated cables or silicon rubber,
color coded for ease of identification. All terminals shall
be of adequate sile.
7
NEMA 3R liP 66 of IEC 605291 rated metallic
equipment enclosures shall be provided with terminals for
attachment of ground safety circuit.
B
Masts shall be designed and constructed to provide
adequate support and stability for the sign and shall be
suitable to support more than one assembly. They shall
be complete with base compartment and pole top
compartment complete with terminal chambers for
connecting incoming cables.
9
Masts shall be constructed from seamless steel,
tubular, with a wall thickness not less than 4.5mm and a
tensile strength of 520 MN/sq.m hot dipped galvanized.
No machining operation shall be allowed after completion
of the galvanizing process. Masts shall be painted with 2
coats of epoxy resin paint to an approved color finish after
completion of the galvanizing process as required by the
Concerned Authority I Engineer.
10 Signs shall be mounted on -brackets supporting both
top and bottom of the sign. Attachment shall be of
stainless steel clamps and mounting brackets which shall
incorporate a wiring duct for the sign wiring. The
attachment shall allow vertical and angular adjustment of
the sign assembly and shall be suitable for the sign
presentation.
11 Mounting heights of sign, the type of sign and the
signal presentation shall be as will be detailed by the
Concerned Authority.
15.12.3 Operational Requirements

All over-height vehicles or vehicle loads traveling
toward the tunnel shall be detected and a warning signa~
given. Vehicles traveling away from the tunnel shall be
ignored by the detection equipment. Detection of vehicles
15-25
~
~
MJnltry of Tronpcrt & Curnmunlcationa DGAlT
~
~<Road Lighti ng and Electrical Installations
traveling toward the tunnel shall be counted and recorded

on an Installed electronic counting device.
2
Tne detection system snell consist of visible red or
infra red source[s) spectrally matching detector[s)
mounted on poles positioned on opposite sides of the
approach roadway. The alignment and height of the
visible red or infra red beam shall be preset to identify
vehFcles over 4 25m above the roadway at the line of
detection or as requested by lhe Concerned Authority.
3
Positive measures shall be Introduced to warn
drivers of a potential accident if they proceed and ttl
instruct them not to continue, whilst causing the lei!St
possible disturbance or distraction to other motorists.
4
Warning and instructions for drivers of over-height
vehlcles shall be stated on the face of the warning sign
whk:h shall be illuminated internally, i.e., nature of danger
"OVERHEIGHT" and action to be taken { ~STOP" or "TURN
RIGHT" or "EXIT RIGHT" or "USE RIGHT !LEFT! LANE," or
"DO NOT ENTER" etc) If the driver proceeds. The action
must cause the driver to become alert to the extent the! he
should react as i~ructed .
5
Warning Sub-system shall consist of a flashing light,
an audible alarm, and an electronic message board.
Upon receiving lhe control signal from the detection
subsystem. this warning subsystem is to be activat ed 11nd
shall respond by alerting the driver to either stop the
vehlcle or take an alternative route. The warning
subsystem shall comprise lhe following:
i.
Warning message on LED di5play
ii. Loud audible alarm, 111 dB@ 3m

iii. Flashing Red warning light
15.12.4 Physical Requirements

1
The detector unit shall be solid state with printed
circuit boards and regulated power supply. The unit shall
be of modular tonstruction. It shall have an effective
range of 3m to 38m with a reaction speed range of one
{1)MPH (1.61 kmlh) to seventy-five {75) MPH {121 km!h) for
a 2 inch (5 em) diameter object 1 Inch (3 em) above the
detection height. It shall provide a fault reporting output
upon loss of space/detector power or total failure.
2
Sensors are to have NEMA 6P rated enclosures,
direction selection to be from a selection switch. No tools
or adjustment Is required.
3
Four LEOs and meter shall be provided for ease of
alignment and testing. Provision shall be made for the
eli mination of the effect of ambient light and an internal
environmental control element that reduces operational
failure from fog, condensation and insects. Dimensions
shall not exceed a maximum overall size of 18 x 15 x 10
inches [46 x 38 x 25 em). The housing shall be of high
grade extruded aluminum and sheet aluminum of not less
than 118 .. thickness, and weather sealed for rugged
durablllty and extended life. The mounting shall allow for
directlo11al adjustment and aiming after initial installation.
15-26
4
Two 118 inch (.32 em) boresight holes are to be
located at Top.Middle of each housing. Front and rear
screws are to be installed In these holes so as to insure a
weather t ight enclosure, and should be removed to allow
alignment of units. Looking through boresight hole from
rear of unit so as to see through the boresight hole i n front
of unit gives the installer a basic means of aiming the unit
in the proper direction. Focusing the unit on opposite
sides of the road in the center of the front boresight while
looking through the rear boresight hole ensures that a
general alignment Is accomplished. This step should be
done from both Transminer and Receiver Unit locations.
Fine tuning of alignment can then be done electronically.
5
The transmitter unit and the receiver units shall each
be provided w ith a barrier to protect the operating
equipment. The enclosure shall maintain its structural
integrity for the operationa l life of the equipment and shall
allow ready access for control edjustment and electrical
interconnection without the use of 1ny tools except a
Phillips head screwdriver.
6
Each of the equipment units shall be provided with
means for rigidly attaching the unit to a vertical cylindrical
pole without requiring any machi ning operation. The
attachment means shall not stress or deform the unit and
shall prevent the movement of the unit in any direction by
the force developed by wind. The mounting means shall
allow adjustment of the vertical position o., the pole. The
mounting means for the transmitter unit and the receiver
unit shall have the capability of adjusting the angular
orientation of the optical axis in both the horiZontal and
vertlcal plane over an angular range of plus or minus five
degrees from horizontal. The transmitter and receiver unit
shall be mounted to detect the presence of vehicles that
exceed the specified vertical height.
7
Warning sign shall meet all electrical (electronic
5pecifications and shall conform. in all essential elements,
with the provisions of the U.S. D.O.T, F.l-t.A. Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices. PIIStics on sign faces
shall be protected by LEXAN or other material providing
equal or greater defense against flying object damage or
vandalism. Signs sha ll be activated and time controlled
by the Detection unit. Lighting shall be provided by high
output fluorescent bulbs for message and incandescent
bulbs with parabolic reflectors for arrows at the top and
bottom of sign. Flashers on LED signs should be of
300mm diameter.
8
Sign housing shall be as indicated on drawings and
provided with rectanguler !shape) reinforced aluminum
capable of withstanding wind loading up 95 li.mlh and
provided with a sun shield projecting at least 36 em.
Letters and arrows shall be normally blanked out. When
iQuminated, arrows shall be red in color, but can be made
in any color specified UP 65 rating).
9
Unit mounting poles (shaft) shall be one or two piece,
adjustable height, seamless, round aluminum tube. Poles
shall Include a handhole centered 46 em above the bottom
of the shaft with a cover secured with stainless steel
screws, Base flange for the attachment of the shaft to the
SUltanate of Oman. Sr.rbtd Sl)fc:Hoc>tions Cor Rood & Brli!Qw ComttucloOn 2010
Road Lighting and Electrical Insta llations
foundation shell be a one piece cast socket of aluminum

alloy, with 4 anchor bo;ts for fixing to the concrete base.
10 Single core cables for internal wiring shall be 450n50

volt flexible PVC insulated copper in accordance with BS
6004:1984 or approved equal standard with high
temperature insulation where operating in high ambient
temperature condltions. The conductor size shall be in
accordance with the circuit requirements. Cables shall be
bunched, clipped and properly secured to form a complete
wiring loop.
11 Power and signal cabling shall be provided between
the receiver unit electronics and the junction box adjacent
to the mounting pole foundation. Power for the receiver
and transmitter units will be made available at the junction
box located adjacent to the mounting pole foundation.
12 A solar panel shall be supplied with the OVDS to
make use of solar energy for stand-by power to enable the
system to remain powered even under power failure
conditions for limited periods.
13 A fault reporting function would be incorporated in
the system to detect any malfunctions in the system and
alert the authorities.
14 All non current carrying parts of the equipment and

installation shall be earthed.
15 The armoring and screens of all multi-core cables
installed directly in the ground shall be bonded and
connected to the earth bar together with the earth core of
the electricity supply cable. A separate single core copper
PVC Insulated (greenlyellowl installed back to the
electricity supply point shall be provided if the Incoming
cable does not Include the earth.
shall be inserted in the excavation supported at the correct

level and grouted in. In-situ foundations shall be
constructed as shown on the Drawings with the concrete
poured around the reinforcing and holding down bolts
and consolidated in one operation.
7
The position of the anchor bolts and the level of the
top surface sha~l be exactly determined and adjusted. PVC
ducts of sizes shown on the drawings shall be installed in
the bases for cable access.

Over-height vehicle detection systems shall be
measured as the number of completed systems. The rate
shall include for supply and installation. testing and
commissioning of transmitter and receiver units, warning
signs, masts with interconnecting cables and earthing as
necessary, cables, including all foundations. ducts,
drawpits end assoc:ated c;vil work.

The quantity of completed and accepted work
rate for a complete operational system stated in the Bill of
supplying, installing, testing and putting into service, all
materials, transport, labor, equipment, tools, supplies and
other work items necessary for the proper support and

Overheight vehicle detection and
warning system (system complete)

Associated civil work for ducts, draw pits and pole
bases shell conform to Clause 15.17.3 - Construction
Requirements.
2
The Contractor shall supply and install the
underground ducts, construct the cable drawpits as
Indicated on the Drawings or as required on site for
installation of the cabres. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all excavation, draining trenches, forming
of duct assembly, backfilling, and removal of excess earth
and restoring finished grade to its original condition.
3
Ducts shall be as specified under Clause 15.7.2. They
shall be laid in trenches in close cluster formation.
4
Concrete pole bases shall be designed to take into
account the nature of the ground and the dead and
imposed loads of the pole and all attachments. They may
be pre-cast or cast in-situ as detailed on the Drawings or
as instructed by the Engineer.
5
The excavated hole for the pole base shall be well
cleaned and its sides compacted and the base and sides of
the excavation shall be lined with a heavy duty sheet
bitumen or polythene waterproof membrane before work
on the foundation properly commences.
6
Where pre-cast foundations are to be insta lied 1hey
(location shown on drawingsl
15.13
(nr)
Emergency Roadside Telephone

System
15.13.1 Description
emergency roadside telephone systems, including
detailed engineering, coordination, manufacture, supply,
transportation. delivery, installation, joint'ng, connecting
up, testing, commissioning, setting to work, training end
maintenance services during the warranty period. Work
includes:
i.
li.
iiL
iv.
v.
vi.
Coordination with Concerned Authority, existing

contractors, and providers of interfaced
systems.
Project management.
Planning management.
Detailed functional analysis until approval by
Finalization of system to the approval of
Supply of needed system equipment and
components.
15- 27
~~
Mlniatry or Transport&:
Communic~tt-lon
OGRLT
~~<:Road Lighti ng and Electrical Installations
vii.
Transport, unloading, and storage on the S ite of

the required equipment and components.
viii. Equi pment installation.
lx. System installation and configuration.
x.
System integration with interfaced and existing
systems.
xi. Complete testing of the system (unit tests.
integration tests, final acceptance tests, users'
tests. etc.).
xii. Training.
xiiL System implementation,
xiv. System roll-out,
xv. System maintenance after successful initial
proving period during Warranty,
xvL Supply of spare parts for 2 years,
xvil. System maintenance tools delivery,
xviii. Writing and delivering of documentation (user's
manual, maintenance manual. test reports, etc.)
xix. Testing of emergency roadside telephones in
the field.
xx. Commissioning of the installation.
xxl. Connection of emergency roadside telephones
to control center
15.13.2 Regulations and Standards

British Standards and Codes of Practice shall apply to
the design and installation of the syste m
2
The following BS are generally applicable and are
mandatory:
i..
BS3573: 1990 - Polyethylene-insulated copperconductor

te lecommunica tion
distribution
cable.
11.
BS EN60529: 1992
Specification for
classifiCation of degrees of protection provided
by enclosures.
IIi. BS 1363 - Specification for 13 A plugs, switched
and un-switched socket-outlets and boxes.
iv. BS EN 60898 Specification for minia ture and
moulded case circut breake rs.
BS 4293 - Specification for residual current
v.
operated circuit-breakers.
vi, BS EN ISO 14713: 1999 Protection against
corrosion of iron and steel in structures - Zinc
and alumi num coatings - Guidelines and ASTM
123,
vii. BS EN 1032712004 Hot dip zinc coatings on
steel sheet
viii. BS EN ISO 1461: 1999 Hot dip galvanized
coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles
Specifications and test methods.
lx. EN50082 1 Electromagnetic compatibility
{EMCI Ge neric standards Immunity for
residential, commercial and light-industrial
environments.
x.
BS EN 60068-2-78:2002 . Environmental testing Tests Test Cab; Damp heat, steady state ,
15-28
xi.
BS EN 60118-4:2006- Hearing a ids - Magnetic

field strength in audio-frequency induction
loops for hearing aid purposes.
xii. BS EN 60529;2004 Degrees of protection
provided by enclosures UP Codel.
xiii. BS 6305:1992- Ana !ague inter working and noninterference
requirements for Customer
Equipment for connection to the Public
Switched Telephone Network.
3
Other Standards - International Electro-technical
Commission (IEC):
l.
ii.
IEC60068 Environmental Testing

Specification for Concrete works. shall be as per
Civil
Works
for
Electrical
subsection:
Installations
4
Product Date: For each component including
descriptions, colors, complete technical specifications, and
manufacturer catalogues for all equipment and materials.
5
Factory Tests: All equipment and cables are to be
tested at manufacturer premises, and test certificates. are
to be submitted to Engineer before shipping and delivery
to site.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for approval
6
including, but not limited to, the following:
I.
iL
iii.
iv.
v.
Detailed system schematic diagram.

Detailed layout, locations, and installation of all
equipments.
Exact routing of d cabling and wiring.
Equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
we ights, require d clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location of each
field connection.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power,
signal, and control syste ms and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field
installed w iring. Identify terminals to facilitate
installation, operation, a nd ma intenance.
Include a single-line diagram showing cabling
interconnection of components.
15.13.3 Definitions and Mode of Operation

Description of eme rge ncy telephone ope ra tion
i.
ii.
iii.
The principle of this operation is that when a

call is initiated in the fie ld, the emergency
roadside telephone automatically calls the
phone number unique to that particular
telaphone . This unique ca lle d number is known
as the 'lndial' number.
The indil l number is connected to control
center CC (defined by the Concerned Authority}.
The PABX [private automatic branch exchange}
is programmed to d isplay on a screen:
a.
The pUiar number of the calling emergency

roadside telephone
b.
Its loca tion
c.
Any other information as required.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
From the pillar number and other information

programmed Into the PABX the CC operator
answering the call is able to identify the location
of the phone being U$ed. Including which side
of the carriageway, without the caller giving any
details.
The CC operators and the caller are able to
communicate clearly in a two wav {duplexl
manner.
In the event of a failure, the emergency road$ide
telephone can detect the listed defects and will
automatical.y initiate a call to the CC manager
and log the detail$ ofthe defect.
The emergency roadside telephone must have
facilities for it to be celled remotely by the CC
manager and perform the listed self-diagnostics
and report the results accordingly.
iv.
v.
vi.
15.13.4.2
ii.
Network supplier
a.
Telephone
equipment
shall
be
with
the
mobile
coordinated
telecommunications service provider.
b.
It is mandatory that the I ocal operata r be

used for the services.
Each Emergency Roadside Telephone is to have

a unique series of numbers :
a.
Pillar number
b.
The
india!
telephone
number
programmed to call the CC phone
number
c.
CC manager phone number
d.
Phone service number {SlM Cardl
e.
Serial number
f.
A four-digit
Number{IDI
g.
Personal
Monitoring of emergency roadside telephones

iii
Ca Is from the emergency roadside telephones

are handled and monitored by CC.
Pillar Dimensions and Weight
Height 1400mm :t: 100mm

Width 200mm :t: 50mm
Depth 130mm :t: 50mm
2
The pillar weight, including the phone equipment,
shall weigh less than 60 Kg.
15.13.4.3
Frangibility
The pillar and solar cell support combination shall be

so designed as to be frangible In the event that it is hit by
an errant vehicle. The frangibility requirements must
comply with the definition and requirements of BS EN 402:2004.
15.13.4.4
Pillar Materials and Color
The pillar shall be constructed from marine grade

aluminum with a minimum thickness 3 mm or extruded
aluminum with a minimum thickness 5mm.
15.13.4.5 IP Rating
The pillar shall be designed to IP55 (IEC 605291
I dentificati on
The Pillar number shall be allocated

based on local authority guidelines.
Button to initiate an emergency call to CC.

Bunon to annunciate recorded information.
Speaker to broadcast the ring tone and voice
communications.
Two microphones to record and monitor voice
communication, respectively.
lrDA interface with infra red port for
programming the telephone features in the
vicinity of the unit.
Two (211ocks with different keying to secure the
emergency roadside telephone module to the
enclosure {pillarl. Keying must be keyed alike
across the manufacturers' telephones.
The pillar dimensions shall be:

i.
ii.
Iii.
Supply of network facilities and equipment
i.
i.
ii.
iii.
The electronics enclosure shall be designed to IP66

UEC 6052912
15.13.4.6
Vibration and Shock
The emergency phone must remain operable under

the foil owing conditions of vibration: Three axes to; +l1.5mm 513Hz end+l-1g 13 150Hz tested.
Wind
15.13.4 Products and Materials
15.13.4.7
15.13.4.1
The emergency phone must remain operable after

withstanding wind speeds of up to 198 kmlh.
Pillar Design and Manufacture
The emergency roadside telephone shell be handsfree, vandal resistant and weather resistant.
15.1 3.4,8
2
The emergency roadside telephone shall be housed
in a pillar with on1y the solar cell being pole mounted.
The emergency telephone shall comply with the

following temperature requirements:
3
The emergency roadside telephone shali be housed
in a plinth mounted pillar of dimensions described in
Paragraph 15. 13.4.2
i.
ii.
iii.
4
The emergency roadsi de telephone shall have as a
minimum the following features:
iv.
Temperature
Storage temperatures range - 10"C to +70"C.

A minimum start up temperature of Sc.
An operating temperature range -toc to +70"C
continuous.
Storage temperature shock changes up to 10"C
:t: sc per minute.
15-29
~~
Mlnietry ofT<emsp.>rt
e. Comm<JnlciOtlot>
,..../"-.~<:Road Lighting and
15.13.4.9
OCiRLT
Electrical Installations
Lightning Protection
Primary protection shall be provlded using fitted gas

arrestors.
2
Secondary protection shall be provi ded using fitted
metal Olllde varistors.
15.13.5 Power Supply

16.13.6.1
1
The emergency telephone shell operate from either
of the following, as shown on the Drawings or instructed
by the Engineer;
3
Earth stake shall be fined with a conductor no less
than 6 mm bonding the earth stake to the base of the
phone pole and to an earth point within the electronics
enclosure.
i.
il.
The p111ar shall be pest and vermin proof. including

termites, ants, bees, rats and mice.
15.13.6.2
1
The pillar shall be vandal and Impact resistant to
prevent unauthorized access to the internal equipment.
Vandal and i mpact resistance can be defined as being able
to remain functional while withstanding moderate to
severe blows by hand held objects ln most circumstances
without suffering more than cosmetic damage.
2
The pillar shall be fitted with an automatic
tiltlllandalism alert feature with configurable sensitivity
settings with provision for the emergency roadside phone
to make maintenance call and log its location and
condition with the CC manager.
3
Access to the fixing bo!ts att~~thing the phone to the
concrete pad shall only be obtained from inside the
emergency telephone pillar.
15.13.4.12 Pillar Identification
International telephone symbols and pillar numbers
shall be installed on each side of the pillar.
2
The International telephone symbols and emergency
telephone pillar number shall be manufactured using
British Standard.
3
The telephone symbol shall be 150mm in height with
a spacing of 150mm from the top of the pillar to the top of
the telephone symbol,
4
The pillar number shall consist of 80 D N numerals
installed vertically down the pillar w ith a spacing of
150mm from the bottom of the telephone symbol to the
top of the first pillar numeral.
15.13.4.13 Concrete
1
A ll concrete and reinforcement for the bases and
anchor bolt assemblies shall be in accordance with Sub
section 15.17
15.13.4.14 Steelwork
A ll steelwork for the anchor bolt assemblies shall be
hot dipped galvanized in accordance with BS EN ISO
14713: 1999 and BS EN ISO 14761 : 1999.
15-30
Powered by a 240 V AC mains available from

the nearest light pole. where possible.
A fined solar panel and battery combination,
supplied by the Contractor.
Short circuit protection shan be provided.
15.13.4.10 Vermin Ingress
15.13.4,11 Vandalism
Power Supply
Battery
lhe battery shall have the fonowing characteristics;

Operating temperature range, 10" C -1-70" C
Sealed lead acid rechargeable
iii. Sealed and operational ill any orientation
iv. MaintellBnce free
Minimum 3 years float service life.
v.
vi. Recyclable
vii. No memory effect
viii. To provide a minimum of 7 days normal
operation under a primary source failure
condition. Normal operetion is based on 6 calls
per day at 10 minutes per call for 7 days, the
remaining time being Idle t ime.
i.
ii.
15.13.5.3
Battery Charging
The battery shall be charged with a solar cell or from

a 240V AC mains supply.
2
Thermal management of the battery charging to
prevent thermal runaway of the battery shall be
incorporated.
3
The power supply and charging system shall
incorporate battery management to monitor the status o f
the battery charge and maintain it at its rated float voltage.
4
Should the battery voltage fall below 90% of its
nominal float voltage an alarm shall be ralsed.
15.13.5.4
Solar Panel
1
The solar panel shall be of sufficient size and wattage
to ensure that the battery receives sufficient charge under
al l weather conditions.
2
A bird guard shalt be fined to the solar cell to
discourage birds from sitting on the eel ~
3
The solar cell support shall provide a minimum of 4.0
meters dearance between the ground and the solar cell.
such that the solar cell is not accessible without a ladder.
4
The solar cell shall be vandal resistant and attached
to the mounting such that it cannot be removed without
special tools provided by the supplier.
5
The solar panel shall be installed facing North and be
angled towards the sun, with the angle being dependant
on the latitude of the location.
Sultanat of Ornnn, Sundrt! ~fl('otiOOO fer Rood & Br~ CoRJINCioon 2010
15.13.6.5
15.1 3.6.1
After the installation of the emergency telephone, the

Contractor shall impact mortar grout under the pillar base.
Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare drawings to scale and

diagrams as follows:
i.
rr.
Iii.
Emargency
roadside
telephone
system
schematic
diagrams,
detailed
design,
connection diagrams, etc.
Construction drawings, lnclud'ng civil works
As-built drawings
All design development drawings, construction

2
drawings, and as-built drawings shall be submitted in hard
copy format as well as In electronic format In the
quantities specified below.
3
Quantity ofsubmittals
i.
ii.
iii.
15.13.6.2
Electronic Files: 1 set.

Reproducible hardcopies; 1 set.
Prints: 3 sets.
Concrete Pad and Pillar Foundation
A concrete pad, complete with anchor bolt assembly

and steel mesh. shall be constructed as detailed In the
Drawings, at each emergency telephone location.
15.13.6.3
Anchor Bolt Assembly

The emergency roadside telephone system shall be
measured by number of the complete systems, supplied
installed tested and put into operation. The unit rates sha II
include for all work, including design, supply and
installation,
per
road;
testing.
commiSSioning,
maintenance provision of all drawings and manuals and
all necessary civil works as specified

The emergency roadside telephone system shall be
paid for as a lump sum per completed system including
transportation. at the unit rate(s) stated in the Bill of
Quantities, which shall be full compensation for the
complete system supplied including the roadside
equipment, the network facilities [mobile telecom service)
implementation and putting into operation after testing in
accordance with the Specification.
15.13.9 Items in the Bill of Quantities (Unit)

Emergency Roadside Telephone System
The anchor bolt assembly shall Include four (4) nuts

and four (4) washers per assembly
2
Sufficient thread shall be provided on each bolt to
allow for the leveling of the pillar when installed. This
shall be not less than twice the sum of the nut, washer and
pillar base plate thickness.
3
All bolts shall be the same length with respect to the
vertical axis of the assembly. The anchor bolt assembly
shall be such that the pillar may be mounted parallel to
the road center line.
16.13.6.4
Pillar Mounted Telephone
An emergency telephone shall be installed on a

concrete pad at each location indicated on the Drawings.
2
Each pillar shall be installed on the anchor bolt
assembly and adjusted so as to be vertical. The pillar shall
comply with the requirements of the applicable British
code for structural design for uti Iity services poles for
stability.
3
The emergency telephone shall be installed such that
the buttons, speaker and microphones are facing away
from the direction of traffic flow such that a person using
the emergency telephone is facing the phone and
oncoming traffic.
The pole for the solar cell shall be installed on the side of
the pillar further away from the curb such that it does not
obstruct the view of the pillar number when viewed by
drivers approaching the pillar.
4
Refer to Series 1500 of the DRMB UK Standards for
highways for all these works.
Grouting of Pillar Base
[Road Ref. No.)
15.14
(Lump Sum)
Public Lighting Management and

Control System (PLMCS)
15.14.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for design,
supply, installation, tesfng and commissioning of a
complete PLMCS installed in feeder pillars, with individual
phase voltage stabmzation, dimming. monitoring, remote
control and remote surveillance suitable for later
connection to server based software for decentralized
operation.
2
The PLMCS comprises:

i.
ii.
iii.
Feeder pillar power controller

Switching functions
Remote control management software and
hardware
15.14.2 General Requirements

The PLMCS shall control the function of the ordinary
feeder pillars [ FP).
2
The PLMCS shall be installed at each feeder pillar
position and control all luminaries of that FP.
3
The PLMCS shall be capable of being upgraded later
to have full remote control, including remote servicing,
communication of alarms, downloading of recorded
I nformation. and reporting malfunctioning to a control
center.
15-31
~,.A/
MJnlatry of Transport & Communications.
DG~lT
../"-..~<:Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
4
The PLMCS shall work with all luminaires; HPS and
HPMV type, equipped with standard magnetic ballast,
Ignitor and PFC capacitor.
5
The PLMCS shall be capable of dlmming HPS and
HPMV lamps in a range of 100% 50% and stabilize the
voltage for MH and FL lamps. It shall be capable of
stabjlizing the output voltage for each phase individually
to -1-/-1% for input voltage fluctuations from 175V to 264V
and shall be able to increase the output voltage by at least
30V to compensate for low input voltage.
6
The PLMCS shall be designed to save between 15%
and 35% of energy on average and shall ensure up to
double the lamp life.
7
The PLMCS shall be completely static, that is with no
moving parts such as variactype' transformers and it
shall not contain triac based equipment.
8
The PLMCS shall be a universal system to work with
any brand of HPS, HPMV, MH or FL lamps, mixed in the
same system or circuit of the FP. It shall be independent of
the brand of lumii'\Bires used.
9
The PLMCS shall be operated via, and conform to,
the loca13-phase 4 wire. solidly earthed neutral, 415 VA C.
electrical system.
10 The kVa rating installed shall be based on full load
shown on the Drawings at pf of 0.8 and a spare capacity
of 30% for future connection of additional loads. In
addjtion each unit shall be de-rated by 30%.
11 Each FP shall have an automatic by-pass system. The
by-pass shall be activated automatically in case of any
malfunction of the PLMCS.
12 The local agent for the PLMCS shall have factory
trained and certified personnel to perform commissioning
and all servicing tasks.
13 The PLMCS shall be a field proven system with at
least 1000 similar products installed worldwide. The
chosen supplier shall have si milar systems installed in at
least 5 major cities in the Middle East.
14 The PLMCS shall use the latest technology, and
comply with international standards such as CE-mark. CEI
171311, EN 60439-1 and UL916. PLMCS shall be CE
marked and conform to such standards. Under no
circumstance shall the system induce harmonic currents
to the supply grid.
15 The PLMCS enclosure shaP be for outdoor
installation, IP 54 minimum to IEC 60529, for both the
power and electronic parts.
16 All system components shall be suitable for
operation within a temperature range from 10deg C to
-1-60deg C
17 Materials shall be certified to ISO 9002 quality
standard.
18 Load must be started at each switching on under
nominal conditions (2301240V RMS -1--1% each phase) even
if the input voltage is at 175V for a programmable time,
(th' s is very important to conserve the lamp life end
conform to the lamp manufacturer's warranty).
15- 32
19 The transition from lamp warming to plenned stage,

or any intermediate level regulation process. shall be done
without disconnection and shall be applied in maximum
steps of 2.2V. The process of d imming shall be even,
without visible steps in luminance,
20 The PLMCS shan incorporate a high accuracy
astronomical time clock which can be remotely controlled
from the control center.
21 Programming and reading of the parameters shal1 be
done via PC software, able to read the real time
measurement and to change all the parameters of the
feeder pillar, operable through either a direct cable
connection between the PC and feeder pillar or with GSM.
22 The supplier shall be responsible for installation,
testing and commissioning of the system and shall
organize a local 5days seminar for t raining.
23 The PLMCS shall mol'litor power, voltage, current
and power factor of each lighting circuit and additionally it
shall monitor all other inputs from the FP.
24 Communication to the PLMCS shall be via fiber optic
interface on TCPilP protocoL
25
Future optional features may include the following:

i.
ii.
iii.
The PLMCS shall have the optional capability in

future to add communication with each
i ndividual lighting point by means of power line
carrier (no additional cables). With this option it
shall monitor the proper functioni ng of each
lamp, ballast, ignitor and capacitor.
The PLMCS shall have the capability il'l future to
switch on and off each individual lighting poi nt
or advertising panel by means of power line
carrier (no additional cabl es).
Communication to the PLMCS shall be possible
via telephona modem, GSM modem, GPRS
modem, radio modem, RS232 i nterface or
RS48S interface.
15.14.3 Detailed Technical Specification

Power contro ller ei'IClosure shall have the following
features:
1..
li.
Iii.
iv.
v.
Housing fabricated of fiber-gtass reinforced

polyester or equatry approved material
Protection level: IP54 In accordance with IEC
60529 Standard
Color: RAL 7032 7035
Base frame made of hot dipped galvanized steal
Safety lock.
2
Main technical features of power controller shall
include:
i.
ii,
iii.
Supporting frame made of galvanized steel

Voltage control circuits as provided by
manufacturer.
Serial port RS232 or RS485 for communication
with PC and GSM, and up-to-date software of all
units.
iv,
v.
vi.
vii.
3
Connections;
i.
ii.
Microprocessor unit (PLC) for control of work

cycles, made of highgrede components,
suitable to operate within the temperature
range 10"C to +70"C Printed circuits with
galvanic insulation ofthe tracks.
Regulation end stabilization of voltage on load
side through static system without wave
dimming (wave-form shall remain perfectly
sinusoidal) for each phase independently.
Four pole main breaker, thermal end magnetic
protection, with rated current to suit the size of
controller with a short circuit capacity 50 kA.
Indicator lights: mains voltage phase colors.
xm. Lithium battery for buffering of RAM memory

and of the time clock, with 2 (two) year
autonomy
under
disconnected
mains
condotions; control of charging status, with
analogue measurement of battery voltage;
push button for disconnection during storage
period; hot replacement.
5
Features for future functions (upgradeable) shalt
include:
i.
ii.
Feeder terminals shall be 5 x 35mm'

Each FP shall have at least 4 outgoing circuits,
each terminated with 5 terminals 16mm' .
Configuration, quantity and circuit current rating
of each circuit shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
Functional features of power controller shall include:

Static by pass, no break execution, suitable to
operate any combination of mixed types of
lamps
ii.
Power saving of up to 40% depending on the
type of lamps connected.
Iii. Efficiency 98 5% (at full load, PF=1 I
iv. Stabilization of output voltage with accuracy +I
1% with input vo' tage 200 to 245 V Independent
for each phase.
v.
Stabilization of changes in mains voltage in
extrarapid time.
vi. Setting of the following parameters, separate
for each phase: starting voltage, full light
voltage, reduced light voltage, warm-up time,
ramp-up speed, ramp-down speed.
vii. Selection of dimming percentage and of the
corresponding time zones, up to 10 time zones.
viii. Availability of one preset yearly program, with
starting and operating cycles configurable in
accordance with seasonal factors and location.
ix. Availability of one customlzable yearly cycle
with different settings for each season and the
possibility to set up to ten time zones over night
time.
x.
Availability of fiva customized periodical cycles
with possibility to set the requested time, the
days of the week and up to ten time zones over
night time.
xi. Availability of one cycle controlled by analogue
input (4 20 me) suitable for dimming from
signal sent from a luminance sensor or any
other equivalent apparatus.
xii. Astronomical time clock with precision of :1: 4
minutes/year in a temperature range of 10 to
+70"C. or, alternatively, high accuracy clock,
with precision 1 minutes/year in a temperature
range 10 to +70"C.
i.
iil.
Alarms programming menu for values above or

below the preset thresholds of input voltage.
output vo tage, total current, power and PF.
Display of the following information:
a.
Input voltage of each phase
b.
Output voltage of each phase
c.
Active power of each phase
d.
Reactive power of each phase
e.
Power factor of each phase
f.
g.
Analogue input value (m A)
h.
Analogue output value (m A)
Recording of the following statistical data:

e.
b.
Hours of operation on line

Hours of operation in the by-pass mode
c.
Number of switching cycles of control

relays
d.
Stability of mains (steps/minute)
e.
Total energy consumption
f.
g.
h.
iv.
Frequency of each phase
Number of black-outs
Number of resets
Possibility to download the historical data
recorded In the controller, via portable PC
or modem or from the control center.
Provision for connection to a remote control

network designed for diagnostic and control of
the whole unit (remote servicing!.
15.14.4 Remote Control Management (RCM)

Software
Software shall be designed to operate a remote control
station for supervision and management of lighting
systems, with the features and functions listed in items l
to8, below:
General features:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Standard language is English; further locat

languages with text import during program start
up later on, should be possible
Installation on single PC (standalone) or in the
Concerned Authority's server configuration in
future.
Facility to share and to display data via internet
SOL database
~~
Ministry or Tranaport & CatnmunlcaUona
OGRLT
_/"...~<:Road Light ing and Electrical Installations
v.
Safety system for control of all accesses,

configurable for the function and the Concerned
Authority's control.
vi.
Customization of program options
vii. Facility to import and export data, already
present in external database, without the need
of manual fill-In
viii. Manual backup utility
ix. Window preference for simple access to the
mostused funct:ons.
Creation of log files of the performed
x.
operations,
xi.
Wide flexibility in customization
ix.
Data list management;
x:iv.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
Loading of data list of plant and components

(FP's. cables, luminaires. lamps, ballasts.
Ignitors. capacitors)
Management of data list by means of a tree
structure
Fill-in of plant and component data list from the
tree structure or directly from the maps
Utility functions such as copy, cut, paste, paste
special
Management capacity up to 30 towns, 300 FPs
and more than 30,000 objects with possibility to
extend without limit.
Identification (object can belong to more than
one group) and w<thout limitation in numbers
Management of groups by means a tree
structure; data searching and selection via
appropriate filters (with logic addresses)
Date rep!icate tool to revise and modify the
data list of elements
Facility to personalize the screen end
badground
Control panel for easy access to the different
program functions
)(.
xi.
xii.
)(iii.
xv.
xvi.
xvii.
4
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
15- 34
Communication vla serial cable or vla modem

(standard telephone PSTN, GSM, GPRS, rad1o
modem. TCPnP protocol on Ethernet)
Management of 5 modems at the same time or
5 TCP/IP channels.
Facility to configure the Interface modems for
only Incoming calls, only outgoing calls, only
manual calls, only automatic calls
Full automatic management of the connections
(automatic disconnection only when required)
Emulation In remote mode to enable d the
operations as if in front ol the controller
Manual connection to verify the controller state,
to perform a data-download, to synchronize the
clock, to program the operative parameters
Monitoring and recording on log files of the
commun"cetions procedure and e"ors
Diagnostics of communication based on the
errors and faulty answers from the field, with
activation of alarm to signal the most critical
connections
Plant management by active maps:
i.
Map management on three levels in case of a

wide area or on two levels i n case of
medium/small area
Up to 324 maps
Maps in whatever graphic format (JPG, BMP,
WMF, TIF. GIF)
Simple insenion of object i n the map
Facility to choose the objects to be displayed In
the map, only one object type at a t ime
Active objects which light-on because of alarms

Color l ight indicafjon in the quadrants at levels
one and two, indicating the presence of one or
more objects In alarm condition inside the area
iv. Facility to add, delete, remove. new objects
directly from the map
v.
Utility functions such as copy. cut, paste, paste
special
vi.
Full interactivity of the objects to open data list,
to display a mim ic panel or alarms or records of
maintenance activities or set-up , directly from
the map
vii. Zoom function in the detailed map
viii. Tools to navigate i nto the maps
ix.
{As an alternative to normal mapsl chart
module, to interface and interact with drawing
Autocad and/or shop files, with facility to import
automatically elements of chart system used
ii.
iii.
Communication:
L
Remote reading of operative parameters

(technical data. working cycles, clocks, alarms,
1/0 state, MEM modules settings), active alarms,
records of alarms (in partial or total mode),
record of measures. monthly data. etc.
Facility to download the last n records
Facility to program i n advance the operation to
be performed during the connection with the
controller in field
Remote writing and modification of the
operative parameters
Real time remote reception of alarms from the
plants
Alarms notification to the technician via SMS or
e-mail, based on customizable rules
Utility to plan the automatic: calls of the
controllers, including the possibility to choose
the operation to be performed, and the
management of errors in the communication
Remote plant override to switch the lighting
system on and off
Remote control of input/output relay
Mimic panel application:

i.
flemote diagnostic Identification by displ aying

the operational state of the controller and
relevant components on an lnterectlve on-line
diegram
Su!uonat of Oman. Standtd Si>ocificotioru lor Ro.od S. Btldge Cons:llJCiion 2010
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
6
Display of the state of equipment in real time

mode (when on linel or by records (from
database)
Identification by color code of alarms and
operational state of: breakers, limit switches,
contactors, relays etc...
Display of all measures done by the local
control module (voltage, current, power, power
factor etc.)
Manual override commands, in ONLINE mode.
controlled d' rectly from the m' mic panel
Events and data analysis:

i.
Events shall be able to be programmed in four

priority levels:
Teble, to display the events with predefined
customizable filters for each PC
xiii. Print out of log messages

8
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Personal computers shall be latest models and have

the following features:
Processor: Intel 2.0Ghz or over
RAM memory: 1 GB
Multi-serial with 5 ports COM (or in alternative
USB hub with converters) (if not used by TCPIIPJ
iv. Parallel port
v.
Printer with continuous paper form
vi. Doub:e HD with indicative capacity 40GB each
one (IDE or SCSI; same type]
vii. If the HD is SCSI type, the controller must be
SCSI U/160.
viii. Color video card that grants a definition of
1024x765 at leest.
ix. Minimum video memory card 32Mb
x.
Compatible back-up system
i.
ii.
iii.
Management of an appropriate printer for

recording alarms
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
7
Each alarm/event shall able to be configured to

send a message via SMS or e-mail
Display of data of the plant (measures, monthly
measures, alarms) through tables, graphs,
active mimic panel of the selected unit
Table to display data with predefined
customizable filters for each PC
Creation of customizable graphs for the analysis
ofthe most interested values
Availability of different types of graphs (line,
steps, cake, etc.)
Working parameters of contrail ers

i.
Data replicate tool, to revise and modify the

parameters of controllers
ii.
Facility to transfer and read each parameter
Hi. Automatic control of errors during the
parameter transfer
iv. Facility to program in automatic mode each
controller or groups of them
v.
Tool for automatic calculation of switch-on
hours of the plant, depanding on astronomical
clock parameters (for season and for year)
vi. Print out of data list and the groups of objects
vii. Print out of all related tables (streets, supports,
lamps)
viii. Table and graph print out, with filters, of events
ix. Table and graph print out, with filters, of
measures
x.
Table and graph print out, with filters, of
monthly data
xi. Report of the energy (theoretical, actual and
saving)
xi I. Detailed print out of the working parameters of
the controllers
Automatic
elaboration
of
programmed
maintenance plan, according to user's needs
and setta b"e parameters
Facility to customize maintenance operations
Print out of plan of activities
Recording of failures and unplanned activities
Recording of real activity done
Management of historical data
15.14.5 RCM Hardware
Bar graph for the analysis of the types of

events and the objects involved
Events in cases of: override controls.
communication problems, automatic celt
results, etc.
ii.
Maintenance module
I.
2
Operative system shall be as stated below or as
selected by the Concerned Authority:
1.
MS Windows 2000 Professional or Windows

XP Professional, or latest system (up-to-date]
complete.
Modems shall be:

i.
ii.
iii.
Modem standard for wired telephone line

(PSTN)
Modem GSM for SMS alarms
Modem GSM/GPRS for SMS alarm

The public lighting management and control system
shall be measured by the number of completed feeder
pillars controlled by the PLMCS, installed and
commissioned. The rate per feeder pillar shall include for
the remote control and management software and
hardware. and any transmission/ communication media
between the feeder pillar and the control center. Rates are
deemed to include for all work, including design supply,
transportation and installation, testing and commissioning
and instruction of the Concerned Authority's personnel in
operation of the system.

unit rate for PLMCS powered and controlled feeder pi liar
15- 35
~~
M'nrstry of Tronaport & Communications
OGRLT
~~<::Road Lighting and Electrical Installations
stated in the Bill of Quantities, which rate shall be full

compensation for supplying materials, installation, testing
l!nd putting into operation, for labor, equipment, tools,
supplies, earthing, training, and other items of work
necessary for the completion of the system(s) to the
satisfaction of the Concerned Authority, as specified.

PLMCS installation at ead'l feeder pillar
and all related communication and central
control facil ities.
15.15
(nr)
Earthing
15.15.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requ:rements for
supplying, installing, and testing earthing connections in
electrical installatiol1s, includiflg transformer neutral
earthing, maln earthing terminals or bars, exposed
conductive parts of electrical equipment. extraneous
conductive parts. and standby generator neutral earthing
where installed,
2
The Contractor shall carry out work in accordance
with the followlng:
BS 7671 chapter 54 (seventeenth edition)
or
IEC 60364554 (2004)
3
Prior to ordering materials, the Contractor shall
submit data for the Engineer's approval including, but not
limited to, manufacture r's catalogues for earth rods,
connecting clamps, earthing conductors, protective
conductors, bonding conductors, connectors and other
accessories, exothermic we lding kits and tools etc.. and
samples of conductors as requested.
4
The Contractor shall submit drawings for approval by
the Engineer, including, but not limite d to the following:
i.
iL
iii.
iv.
exact location of earth pits, rods and details of

installation and connections
exact routing of buried earthing conductors with
indication of cross-section, depth of laying and
cove ring
cross sectional area of all earthing ,protective
and bonding conductors
layout and details of earthing provisions at
substations,
switchgear,
distribution
panelboards etc., indicating fittings used,
insulation, plates ancs markings, passage and
routing of earthing conductors, conduit, s leeves,
grooves. niches etc. giving sizes and
dimensions of component parts.
15.15.2 Materials
Fittings, plant, equipment, ducts a nd cables used for
each earthing instillation shall be as specified In other
pe rtinent Clauses of this Section 15. Unless otherwise
15-36
specified, all earthing materiels and components shall be

of copper.

Exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of each
electrica l installation and the neutral point of the
distribution system shall be earthed. The earthing of the
distribution system shaA be made at the neutral point of
the transformers.
2
A separate 50mm x 6mm high conductivity e erth bar
shall be mounted on porcelain connectors in each
substation and feeder pillar housing The bar shall be pre
drilled with a minimum distance of 75mm between holes
and connected as follows:
i.
H.
Insulated cable:
a.
Transformer neutra l
b.
Earth mat
Bare cable:
a.
Switchgear frame earth
b,
Transformer frame earth
3
The Insulated cable shall be green-yellow striped
50mm' single core PVC fixed at regula r inte rvals with non.
magl"'etic Insulating cleats and terminated with suitably
sized lugs. The bare conductors shall be 35mm x 6mm or
50mm7 high conductivity copper tape or conductor fixed at
re gular intervals with purpose made brass saddles.
4
Each sub-station and feeder pillar earth mat shall
have two 16mm d iameter copper covered steel earth rods
of 2.5m length, connected together and to the earth bar.
Each rod shall be housed inside a concrete inspection box
recessed into the ground and fitted with a re movable
metal lid with the Inscription 'Earthing Rod'. An earth
resistance test shall be carried out on the earth bar at each
sub-station and feeder pillar. Three readings shall be
obtained on each of the two earth paths connected
individually and in paralle l. The results shall be tabulated
and submitted to the Engineer for approval.
5
The earth bar shall be labeled and the connections
idenlified. The insulated earthing cables for high mast and
lighting column circuits shall be earthed at the low volta ge
supply position at the earth bar,
6
At the masts and each last column on a circuit,
earthing shall be by connecting the earthing bolt to a
16mm diameter copper covered steel rod of 2.5 m length
minimum, driven into the ground a djace nt to the mast or
column to a chieve the required resistance (1 ohm
maximum). Bonding is to be by means of a 16mm2
stranded bare copper conductor. Each mast and column
s hall be bonded to the earthing cable. Where the supply
cable is looped into the column the earthing cable shall
not be cut. The final column in each distribution circuit
shall be bonded to a separate earth rod.
7
The earthing system at s ign lighting installations
shall be as specified for masts and columns.
8
Connections between rods and earthing tape or
cables shall be made by the 'Cadweld' process to produce
Suluonata af Oonn. Stndrd Sptdfic>tionlor R011d l!o BrldQtt Cons:ruction 2010
a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for

removable items of equipment only.
9
Protective conductors shall not be formed by conduit,
trunking, dueling or the like. Where armored cable is
specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective
conductor, if approved and if not otherwise shown on the
Drawings. In general a protective conductor shall be run
together with the lighting power circuit unless otherwise
waived by the concerned authority.
10 Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing

electrode and every bonding conductor to extraneous
conducting parts shall be Ia beled In accordance with the
applicable regulations, as follows:
'SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DO NOT REMOVE'.
15.15.4 Earth Resistance Test

Earth resistance tests shall be made by the
Contractor on the earthing system, separating and
reconnecting each earth connection.
2
If it is indicated that soil treatment or other corrective
measures are required to lower the ground resista nee
values, the Contractor shall submit proposals for
corrective measures to the Engineer for approval prior to
working on such measures.
The electrical resistance of the earthing circuit (ECCJ
together with the resistance of the earthing leads,
measured from the connection with earth electrode to any
other position in the complete installation, shall not
exceed one ohm.
5
Earth resistance test shall be performed as the
Engineer's requirements. The earth resistance of each
electrode shall be measured by means of resistance
bridge instrument and results recorded.

Earthing shall be measured by the number of
completed sets of earthing rods supplied, installed, and
tested. The Interconnecting work within the circuit shall
not be measured separately.

rate stated in the Bill of-Quantities which rate shall be full
compensation
for
supplying,
installing,
testing,
transportation, putting into operation and for materials,
labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other items
necessary for the proper completion of the work as
specified.
15.15.7 Items In the Bill of Quantities

i.
ii.
Twin rod earthing installation (location) (nr)

Single rod earthing installation (location) (nr)
15.16
Labeling, Testing and

Commissioning
15.16.1 Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for labeling,
testing
and
comm1ss1oning
of
electrical
and
communication systems installations and equipment. The
work is supplementary to the work specified in the
respective parts of this Section 15.
15.16.2 Materials
Labels shall be manufactured from sheet aluminum,
plastics or other approved non-corrosive inert material.
Text shall be die-stamped, engraved, painted or printed
with a legible life expectancy of 20 years. Finished labels
shall be permanently bonded, screwed, riveted, bolted or
wire-locked to the part as appropriate.

15.16.3.1
Labeling
The Contractor shall submit for approval a

comprehensive labeling and marking plan before work is
started. This shall include all factory labeled items as well
as field labeling.
Plant and equipment not labeled to the Engineer's
2
approval by the manufacturer shall be labeled by the
Contractor on the Site.
3
Equipment labels shall be simply and clearly written
in black on white or white on black in English and Arabic,
in accordance with the schematic diagram on the
installation drawings. Warning labels shall be red on
white or white on red lettering a minimum 15mm In height
Each item of plant, Including individual parts of a

4
package sub-station or control panel, shall be labeled on
the exterior of the respective casings.
5
Lighting columns and masts shall be fitted with
identification Ia bels of black lettering 50mm high on a
white background. The labels shall be attachad to the
columns by means of galvanized nuts and bolts positioned,
just above the access openings and facing approaching
traffic.
6
Control switchgaar labels shall indicate the voltage,
current rating and phase color, together with the
manufacturer's distinguishing mark. A separate label shall
state the service controlled by the switch.
7
Switchgear, distribution boards and apparatus shall
be included in an overall identification scheme and labeled
accordingly,
8
'Danger High Voltage' labels in English and Arabic
with red lettering and electrical flash shall be fixed to the
doors of each sub-station and switch station and be clearly
visible from the fence access gates.
9
The interior of each item of electrical equipment shall
indicate the phases by means of colored plastic sleeving
or discs.
15-37
~~
Minetry of Transport & Cunlmunlcatlon DGAtT
10 Circuit lists shall be mounted on the inside of

distribution board lids or doors. The list shall comprise a
printed sheet heatsealed into a semirigid clear plastic
cover.
11 Power cable cores shall be identified at their
terminations by colored sheaths of the heat or chemically
shrinkable type to Indicate the respective phases and
neutral. Where the core Insulation is suitably colored
during manufacture the colored sleeve may be omitted.
12 Local switches, switchfuses, isolators, lighting
fittings, and similar accessories shall carry engraved
identification plates to Indicate the circuit number and
phase to wh"ch the accessory is connected.
13 t.'edium voltage cables shall be clearly labeled
' DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE' in English end Arabic every 2m
of exposed length.
14 Prior to final testing the Contractor shall obta in the
Engineer's approval that the Iabering is intact over the Site
and that circult markers have been fined wherever cables
emerge from the duct system or enter a building.
15.16.3.2 Testing and Commissioning
Testing of the installations shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant regulations and standards
after completion of the work. The tests s hall be c11rried
out to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the concerned
authority. Manufacturer's test certificates shall be included
in the documented results submitted for approval.
2
Tests shall comprise the following:

Insulation resistance on MV equlpment
Including
busbars.
bushings.
through
insulators and feeder terminations, using a
5000 V megger, between phases, and between
phase and earth, with control and protection
circuits, lamps and similar compone nts
disconnected.
tnsulati Ol'l resistance on every cable and
insulator, power, control and reillY cin;ult ofthe
LV systems, using appropriate megger range;
500 V for installations rated below 500 V and
1000 V for installations rated up to 1000 V, in
accordance with the lEE Wiring Re gulations
(BS 76711 Subsection 612.
HV test, using power frequency HV test set, to
BOo/o of IEC withstand volta ge I 2.5 rated
voltagel for oneminute, between phases and
phase to e arth for each MV switchge ar and
transformer, disconnected.
MV cable tests as Subsection 15. 7, Pa ragraph
15.7.3.2.
Any other tests required by the concerned
authority standards, unless waived In writing
by the Concerned Authority,
3
The test and measuring apparatus provided by the
Contractor to carry out the testing shall be seated as
15 3&
appropriate and have current ca libration certificates issued

by an approved laboratory.
4
Advance notice shall be given to the Engineer of the
t esting program proposed together with a list of the
equipment to be used.
5
The Contractor shall re-test any item that fails. No
repeat test shall be carried out until the cause of fail ure
has been identified and removed.
6
After satisfactory completion of the tests the
Contractor shall obtain authorization from the Engineer
and the Concerned Authority to connect the power supply
to the installation.
15.16.4 Method of Measurement and Basis of

Payment
No separate measurement sha II be made and no
s eparate payment made for work of labeling, testing and
commissioning of the electrical and telecommunication
installations. The cost of this work is deemed to be
included in the unit rates for the respective items stated in
the Bill of Quantities.
15.17
Civil Works for Electrical and

Telecommunication Installations
15.17.1
Description
This Sub-section describes requirements for civil

work, including excavation. concrete, building work, and
duct work, associated with the electrical and telecoms
install etions.
15.17.2 Materials
Backfill material for excavations shall be as specified
in Section 2, Subsection 2.7 of these Specifications.
2
Concrete for column and pole bases, equipment
foundations and other structures shall be Class 30 as
specified in Sub-section 5.1. Reinforcement for cone rete
shall be mild steel in accordance with Section 5, Subsection 5.2 of these Specifications.
3
Anchor boits shall be as specifie d and shown on the
Drawings and as instructed by the Engineer.
Minimum standard shall be ASTM F1554, Grade 55,
minimum thread length of 10 inches, galvanized for a
minimum of 12 inches on the threaded end to the
requirements of ASTM A153. Ea ch is to be supplied whh
too hexagonal nuts and two flat washers, all to be hooked
end on the embedded side.
4
Buildings to house switchgear for the medium
vo;tage switching station shall be as shown on the
Drawings. They shall have adequate space for the
conce rned Authority's e quipment. If buildings are not
defined on the Drawings, they sha ll be constructed of
conventional materials with concrete foundations and
floor, blockwork walls, re ndered internally and externalfy,
and suitable waterproof roof, Doors shall be painted steel,
lockable, and complete with ventilation louvers and sand

traps. Foundations and floors shall incorporate trenches
and ducts for cables and bases for equipment.
Cable ducts shall be uPVC Schedule 40, UL listed, or
5
equivalent standard as specifi ad or shown on the
Drawings. Minimum requirements shall be non-sparking
type, suitable for direct burial in ground, minimum tensile
strength 500 kglcm1 , impact strength 5 kglcm 2 , supplied in
standard 6 m lengths.
6
Unless otherwise Indicated on the Drawings,
columns 8m through 16m shall incorporate a cast
aluminium breakaway transformer base and electrical
breakaway quick disconnect The base shall be designed
and constructed so that when used with the size and
weight of the column, the assembly shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO Standard Specifications for
Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and
Traffic Signals.
7
Transformer base and column combination shall be
designed, fabricated and tested to withstand the wind
loads described in Clause 15.1.9, and Paragraph 15.8.2.1.
8
The transformer base shall meet the following
5tandards:
ASTM 8108 alloy 5G70-T6 or alloy 356-T6 for the base
ASTM A325 for the bolts, ASTM A-563 Grade A for the
fiUts, both galvanized to ASTM A153.

15.17.3.1
Bases for Poles and Equipment
1.
Excavations for foundations shall be carried out in
accordance with Sub-section 2.7. Foundations located an
old backfill shall have the ground bearing material r~
compacted to the Engineer's requirements. The sides of
excavations for foundations that will be subject to uplift or
lateral forces shell be compacted and approved before any
concrete is poured.
2.
The position of anchor bolts in the concrete bases
shall be set by means of templates. The top of foundation
bases shall be horizontal to a tolerance :t0.25mm across
the width of an individual base.
Where shown on the Drawings duct stubs 300mm long
and to the diameter shown shall be provided in the
structural concrete. uPVC ducts shall be cast into lighting
column, mast and feeder pillar bases to run the incoming
and outgoing power cables.
15.17.3.2
3
When cables cross road, paved area or other services
or are buried i n slab, they shall be laid in protective ducts
of adequate size. The duct! conduit ends after installation
of cable shall be plugged to make them watertight by
means of bituminized hessian or equivalent material.
4
Cables shall be laid without sharp bends or kinks,
and if within 500mm of drainage ware, shall be contained
in a duct.
5
Stack shall be left in cables for which purpose the cut
lengths of cables shall allow about 3% more in the
measured length between terminations (Engineer will
verify the lengths of cablesl. At junction boxes, ample
slack shall be left to prevent straining of cable joints due to
settlement of ca b' e trench.
Cables shall be pulled in uPVC ducts or conduits with
6
care, preferably without the use of any lubricant. Where
necessary, and after approval of the Engineer, the cable
manufacturer's recommended lubricant shall be used. Use
of any kind of aii or soap will not be permitted.
Sharp bends or tees shall not be allowed. At road
7
crossings the duct shall have a bedding and surround of
concrete Class 30 and shall be laid at BOO mm below road
surface or as shown on drawings and directed by the
Engineer.
Prior to backfilling at duct location, the following
B
shall be completed:
i.
ii.
iii.
9
Where ducts rest over rocky soil, a layer of 200 mm
dune sand sha~ be spread, compacted and rammed in
order to create proper bedding for the duct. In waterlogged or unstable soil, a concrete base 200mm thick shall
be laid, followed by 100mm laver of dune sand on top of
the concrete as a base for the duct.
10 Spare ducts shall be provided wherever ducts are
used for MV or LV cable routing. 30% spare ducts or at
least one duct per run, whichever is greater, shall be
provided.
11 Cables, whether Installed in bare ground or in uPVC
ducts or conduits shall not be bent to a radius less than
that recommended by the cable manufacturers.
I.
ii.
Cable Trenches and Ducts
The depth of low voltage cable trench excavation

shall provide a minimum cover to the cable of 500mm in
open ground and sidewalks.
2
Cables shall be ducted where they run under or cross
below roads and shall not be at less than eoomm deep,
with a concrete cover of 100mm all around. Duct ends
shall extend minimum 600mm beyond road structure or
embankment where ducts cross the road
Placement of the approved type of draw card in

each duct section
Capping ducts at both ends
Recording the coordinates of both ends
iii.
iv.
Install cables as indicated, according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound
or lubricant where approved; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall
pressure values.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable,
rope, and basketweave wire/cable grips, that
will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use
rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.
Install
exposed
cables,
parallel
and
perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural
15- 39
~
~
Manlstry of Transport & Communication. DGRLT
~~<:Road Lighting and Electrical Inst allations
members, anel foUow surface contours where

possible.
v.
Install dlrect-buried cables on leveled and
tamped 100-mm bed of clean sand at bottom of
trench. Separate cables crossing other cables
or piping from those Items by a minimum of
100 mm oftamped earth.
Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs,
vi.
changes in direction, and buried splices.
vii. Install 'burled cable' warning tape 305 mm
above cables.
viii. Cable identification/route markers shall be
erected at 25m maxi mum spacing throughout
the entire length of the cable trench route and at
each bend or intersection. Refer to MEW
Standard OES 2 for all details.
ix.
In manholes, handholes. pull bo)(es, drawpits,
j unction boxes. and cable vaults, train cables
around walls by the longest route from entry to
exit and support cables at intervals adequate to
prevent sag.
x.
Seal around cables passing through fire-rated
elements using approved fire-stopping material.
xi.
Identify cables according to Sect ion 15.16l abelling. Testing and Commissioning.
the number and size of duct, including all bends,

couplings and bushings. Concrete encasement shall not
be measured for direct payment but shall be considered as
subsidiary item, the cost of which wUI be deemed to be
included in rates for the duct.
9
Cable markers. drawpits, handholes and manholes.
shall be measured by detail shown on drawings, and
number completed including an civil work and finishing
work.

The quantity of completed and acceptad work
rates for the items statad in the BUt of Quantities, which
rates shall be full compensation for supplying all materials,
formwork, construction, installation, testing and putting
into service, and for labor, equipment. tools. supplies,
transportation, and other work items necessary for th a

Building for medium voltage intake
switching station (reference drawing
and detai l)

Buildings for the medium voltage switching stations
sn ail be measured by the number of the constructed bloCk
work buildlngs, including foundat ions, concrete roof.
fence. and til necessary related civ!l works.
Bases for package substations shall be measured by
the number of concrete foundations including fence and
other builder's works, as per the approved related sho p
drawings.
ii
substatlon (reference drawing

and detail)
iii
4
Bases for the 33kV/11 kV pole mounted transformer
station shan be measured by the concrete base H type
const ruction for 11m poles, to the detail of Concerned
Authority, including all related civil works.
5
Bases for the feeder pillars shall be measured by the
number of concrete bases, including incoming and
outgoing ducts for cables and other builders work.
6
Trenches for directly buried cables shall be measured
by linear meter completed. including concrete tile.
warning tape and excavation and backfilling to levels and
dimensions as specified in the Drawings.
7
Bases for light ing columns/high masts shall be
measured separately each by the number of concrete base
and other related civil works, including all related civil
work as the column detail approved.
(reference drawing and detail)

jy
1S. o
(l'lr.)
H typa concrete foundation for

33kV, ow voltage pole mounted
transformer station (reference
drawing and detail)
(nr.)
H type concrete foundation for

11kVJiowvoltage pole mounted
tnJnsformer station (reference
drawing and detail )
vi
Co ~~e rete
vii
Trench for low voltage cable for:
viii
ix
(nr.)
one cable
(lin.ml
two cables
(lin.m)
three cables
(lin.m)
Trench for medium voltage cable for:

on e cable
(lin.ml
two cables
(lin.m)
Lighting column concrete foundation

!Type, ref. dwg)
)(
(nr.)
base for feeder piltar
(ref.dwg)
uPVC ducts shall be measured in linear meters of

mult~ e duct run installed In trench or in concrete
encasement. completed and accepted w ith reference to
(l"ir.)
Building for package

medium voltage switching station
3
Buildings for package medium voltage switching
stations shall be measured by the number of t he
constructed block work buildings, including foundations,
concrete roof, fence, and all necessary related civil worl!s.
(nr.)
Concrete foundation for package
(nr.)
High mast concrete foundation

CType, ref. dwg)
(nr.)
Sultntv of Oman. Stondrd Specifietiono fot Rood Ill Brldgo Construction 2010
xi
uPVC duct (size and nr)
xii
uPVC duct, in concrete encasement
(lin.m)
(size and nr)
(lin.m)
Cable marker as per MEW details
(nr.)
xiv
Manhole (type, dimension, ref. dwgl
(nr.)
XV
Hendhole or drawpit (type,
xvi
Cast aluminium breakaway transformer
xiii
dimension, ref. dwg)
(nr.)
base for column (height) (details,

ref. dwg)
(nr.)
15- 41
&uttanate of Oman. Standard Speclbtiona for fbld" Bricloa tll~tUd101'1201 0
Ref.
Title
16.1
l;andscape
16.1.1
Gllneral
16.1.1.1
16.1.1.2
Page No.
16-1
18'1
16-1
16.1.1.3
Summary
Related Documents
Definition11
16.1.1.4
StJbmittals
16-1
16.1.2
Materials
16.1.2.1
Trees and Shrubs
16.1.2.2
Ground Cov1=r
16.1.2.3
Palms
16.1.2.4
1611.2.5
1611.2.6
Grass Seed
Grass Sod (Turf)
Grass Plugs
16J1.2.7
16-1
16-1
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16.1.2.8
Grass Sprigs
Topsoil
16.1.2.9
16.11.2.10
Soil Amendments
Fertilizer
1S:3
16-3
16.1.2.11
Mulches
Stakes and,Guvs
16-3
16.1.2.12
16.1.2.13
18.1.2.14
lAndscape Edgings
EroslonControl Materials
16.1.2.15
Mlscel aneous Materiaia
16.1.3
16.1.3.1
General
16.1 ~3:2
Preparation
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-4
1&-5
16.1.3.3
Planting SoU Preparatio n
16.1.3.4
Ground Cover and Plant Bed

Preparation
16-5
Preparation for Grassed Areas

Excavation for Trees and Shrubs
16-5
16!5
Planting. Palms, Trees and Shrubs

Tree and Shrub Pruning
Tree and Shrub Guymg and Staki ng
Grass Seed'ng
16-6
16.1.3.5
16.1.3.6
16.1.3.7
16.1.3.8
16.1.3.9
16.1.3.10
16.1.311
16.1.3.12
16.1.3.13
16.13.14
16!7
18-7
18-7
Hydro-Seeding
16-7
Sodding
Pluggmg
Spngg1ng
16-7
16-7
16-8
Ref.
Title
Page No.
16.1.3.15
16.1.3.16
Requirements fer Siltisfactory Grass

Planting Ground Cover and Plants
16.1.3.H
Mulching
Installation of Edgings
16.1.3.18
16.1.3.19
16.1.3.20
16.1.3.21
16-8
Installation of Miscellaneous Materials 115-8
Cleanup and Protec:ti011
16-8
Disposal of Surplus and Waste
Materials
Warranty end Maintenance
16.1.4
16.1.4.1
Warranty
16.1.4.2
16-8
16-8
168
Maintenance
1&U
1611.5.1
Excavation, Soiling, Cultivating
and Grading
16.1.5.2
Grass Planting and Seeding
16J1.5.3
Tree. Shrub and Ground Cover

Ptant1ng
16-8
18-8
1&-8
16'9
16-9
16-9
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-10
18.1.6
Baals of Payment
16.1.7
hem a In Bill of Quantities
16.2
Irrigation System
16-10
16.2.1
Description I General
18'10
16.2.1. 1
16.2.1.2
16.2.1.3
16.2.1.4
16.2.1.5
16.2.1.6
16 2.1.7
Scope
16-10
Sehedu' es of Proposed Equipment

Approval of Equipment
161 1
16-11
Submttals
Dei1very, Storage and Handling
16 1 1
lnstal' ation and Checking

Spares
16-12
16-12
1612
16.2.1.8
Equ pment Labels and Charts
16.2.1.9
Operation and Instruction Manuals
16.2.2
Material
16.2.2.1
16;2.2.2
Pipes, Fittings and Accessor.es
16.2 2.3
16.2.2.4
Valves and Penstocks

Irrigation Equipment
Valve Operators and Accessories
16.2.2.5
Jo~nt ng
16.'2.2.5
Concrete and Metal Wo rk

Pumping Plant
16.2.2.7
Material
16 12
16-12
~~13
16-13
16-15
16-17
16-19
16-20
16-21
1&-21
Ref.
Title
Pa~;~e
16.2.3
Construction Requinlmenta
16.2.3.1
Excavation, Bedding and BaciCfilling
Pipe Laying - Genen~lly
16.2.3.2
16.2.3.3
Jointing
16.2.3.4
L:ine and Gradient
f.loatation
16.2.3.5
16.2.3.6
P-ipe Built Into Structures
F.ield Testing: Generally
18.2.3.7
Hydrostatic TeSiing of Pressure
18:2.3.8
P.lpelines
Visual Inspection Test
16.2.3.9
18.2.3.10 Deflection Tests for GRP Pipes
18.2.3.11 F.h,!shlng
16.2.3.12 F.ield Protection and Coating
18.2.3.13 Irrigation Gontrol
18.2.3.14 Contract Requirl!fTlents
16.2.3.15 Documentation
16.2.3.18 Maintenance P.rogram
Method of MIIMllrement
18.2.4
Baal of Payment
18.2.5
18.2.6
Item in the Bill of Quantities
No.
1&-21
1621
1621
16-22
1622
1622
11$!22
1622
18!23
18!23
18!23
18!23
16-23
16-24
16-24
16-24
18-24
16-24
16-26
16-25
Sultanate
Dr Oman. Srondard Spodflc.t/om for Road II. Blldll" Consln.o<l<an 2010

Landscaping and Irrigation
16.1
Landscape
16.1.1
General
16.1.1.1
Summary
This Section describes requirements for soft

landscaping and irrigation, inc Iuding the following:
i.
Trees and shrubs.
ii.
Ground cover.
iii.
Palms.
iv.
Seed.
v.
Turf-grass sod.
vi.
vii.
Plugs.
Sprigs.
viii.
Topsail.
ix.
Sail amendments.
X.
Fertilizers.
xi.
xii.
Stakes and guys.
2
Sub grade: Surface of subsoil after completing
excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately
beneath planting soil.
3
Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by
homogeneously blending mineral sails or sand with
stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or
planting soil.
4
Planting Soil: Native or Imported topsoil,
manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become
topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
16.1 .1.4
General: Submit the certificates, samples and other

information stated in this paragraph to the Engineer
before ordering materials or starting the relevant work.
2
Certification of product compliance to specified
requirements signed by manufacturer.
Mulches.
xiii.
Landscape edgings.
xiv.
Erosion-<:ontrol materials.
XV.
Miscellaneous materials.
xvi. Irrigation
2
Requirements for hard landscaping, paving and
curbs of sidewalks and areas adjacent to soft landscaping
are described in Section 12.
3
Landscape work shall be carried out by an
experienced landscape contractor whose qualifications
and resources are approved by the Engineer, including his
operatives and supervisors and equ'pment.
i.
Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard

products.
ii.
Analysis for other materials by a recognized

laboratory made according to approved
international standards.
iii.
Lebel data substantiating that plants, trees,

shrubs, and planting materials comply with
iv.
Certification of grass seed from seed vendor

for each grass-seed or mixture stating the
botanical and common name and percentage
by weight of each species and variety and
percentage of purity, germination and weed
seed. Include the year of production and date
of packaging.
v.
Certification of each seed mixture for turf grass

sod, plugs and sprigs, identifying source,
including name and telephone number of
supplier.
vi.
Certification of all soil amendments and

fertililers signed by product manufacturer.
4
Where tests and analysis on soil and products are
required by this Specification, they shall be carried out by
an agency approved by the Engineer.
16.1.1.2
Related Documents
Drawings and other Specification Sections, apply to

this Section.
2
Related Sections: The fallowing Sections contain
requirements that relate to this Section:
i.
Section 1 for protecfon of existing trees and

planting, topsoil stripping end stockpiling, and
site clearing.
ii.
Section 2 for excavation, filling, rough grading

and subsurface aggregate drainage and
drainage backfill.
iii.
iv.
Section 8 far subsurface drainage.

Section 12 sdewalks, paving areas and curbsw.
16.1.1.3
Definitions
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting

soil.
Submittals
Samples of each of the following:

i.
2 kg of mineral mulch far each color and

texture of stone t, in labeled pi astic bags.
ii.
Edging materials and accessories to verify

color selected.
4
Qualification data for firms and persons employed In
the work to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and address of architects/engineers and
owners, and other information specified.
5
Material test reports from qualified independent
testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of the following materials with
requirements indicated:
i.
Analysis of existing surface soil.
ii.
Analysis of imported topsoil.
16-1
~
~
Mfnlatry of Tronport & Communication
OGRLT
_/"'..~<Landscaping and Irrigation
6
Planting schedule indicating planned dates and
locations for each type of planting.
of palms Is measured from nursery ground line to base of

first frond.
7
Maintenance Instructions recommending procedures
to be established by the Employer for maintenance of
landscaping during an entire year.
Submit before
expiration of required maintenance periods.
2
Heights of palms are to be as indicated in the Plant of
Material Schedules shown on Drawings and shall have
corresponding root-ball diameters as follows:
16.1.2
Materials
16.1.2.1
Trees and Shrubs
Provide nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming

to ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by
transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fullybranched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects,
eggs. larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries,
abrasions. and disfigurement
2
Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades I
conforming to ANSI Z60. 1 for type of trees and shrubs
specified and shown on the Drawings.
3
label each tree and shrub with securely attached
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical
and common name.
4
Provide balled and burlapped trees and shrubs.
Container-grown lrees wiU be acceptable in lieu of balled
and bunapped subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations
for container stock.
5
Shade trees shall be single-stem trees with straight
trunk, well-bala 1\Ced crown, and conforming to ANSI Z60.1
for type of lraes required.
i.
Branching Height: 113 to 112 of tree height.
6
SmaU trees shall be small upright or spreading type,
branched or Ptuned naturally according to species and
type and with relationship to caliper, height, and
branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1 and stem form as
follows:
i.
Form: Multi-stem, clump, with 2 or more main

stems.
7
Deciduous shrubs shaD have no less than the
mi11imum number of canes required by and measured
according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of
shrub.
8
Broad-leafed evergreens shall be: normal-quality,
well-balanced. broadleaf evergreens of type, height,
spread, and shape conforming to ANSI Z60,1.
16.1.2.2
Ground Cover
Ground cover plants shall be established and well

rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and
with not less than the minimum number and length of
runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size indicated.
16.1.2.3
Palms
Palms shall have a crown of new leaves, proper color

of leaves of adult palms and sufficient hardiness. Palms
shall be supplied earth balled and hessian covered. Height
16-2
Palro HtiQh!
Root-ball Diameter
1.5 m
0.75 0.90 m
2.0m
0.90 - 1.10 m
2.5m
1.10 - 1.30m
3.0m
1.30 - 1.50 m
3.5m
1.50-1.80 m
4.0m
1.80 2.00 m
16.1.2.4
Grass Seed
Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed

complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology;
Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination
tolerances.
2
Seed species shall be as stated in the Special
Specification or shown on the Drawings for the particular
use and location, with not less than 95 percent
germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not
more than o. 5 percent weed seed.
16.1.2.5
Grass Sod (Tu rfl
Grass sod (turf) shall be first quar.ty, complying with

TPI's 'Specifications for Sod (Turfl Materials' in its
'Guideline Specifications to Sodding', Including limitations
on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects,
Provide viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture,
strongly rooted, capable of vigorous growth and
development when planted. Sods shall be nominal size
750mm x 300mm.
2
Grass sod species shatl be as stated in the Special
Specification or shown on the Drawings with not less than
95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed.
and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:
16.1.2.6
Grass Plugs
Grass plugs shall be as specified in paragraph

16.1.2.5 but with a nominal size 100mm x 100mm.
16.1.2.7
Grass Sprigs
Grass sprigs shall be healthy Jiving stems, rhizomes,

or solons with a minimum of two nodes and any attached
roots free of soil. of the species stated in the Special
Specification or shown on the Drawings.
16.1.2.8
Topsoil
1
Topsoil shall conform to ASl M 0 5268, pH range of
5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material m inimum, free of
stones 25 mm or larger In any dimension, and other
extraneous materials harmful to plant growth, obtained
from any of the sour~s stated below.
r.
ii.
iii.
16.1.2.9
Topsoi I Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled

on site. Verify suitability of surface soil to
produce topsoil meeting requirements and
amend when necessary. Supplement with
imported topsoil when quantities are
insufficient Clean tops oil of roots, plants, sods,
stones, clay lumps. and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth.
Topsoil Source: Imported topsoil from off-site
sources, obtained from naturally well-drained
sites where topsoil occurs at least 100mm
deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to
produce topsoil. Supplement with Imported
topsoil when required. Topsoil shall have a
physical and chemical analysis before any
amendments are added.
Soil Amendments
1
Lime shall be dolomite limestone conforming to
ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone, containing a
minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent, with a
minimum 99 percent passing a 2.36 mm sieve and a
minimum 75 percent passing a 250 micrometer sieve.
Aluminum
2
unadulterated.
sulfate
shall
be
commercial
3
Sand shall be cleaned, washed,
manufactured send, free of toxic materials.
natural
or
5
Peat Humus shall be finely divided or granular
texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially
decomposed moss peat or reed-sedge peat.
6
Peat Humus for acid-tolerant trees and shrubs, shall
be moss peat, with a pH range of 3.2 to 4.5, coarse fibrous
texture, medium-divided sphagnum moss peat or reed
sedge peat.
7
Sawdust or ground bark humus shall be decomposed,
nitrogen-treated, of uniform texture, free of chips, stones,
sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
When site treated, mile with at least 2.4 kg of
ammonium nitrate or 4 kg of ammonium
sulfate per cu. m of loose sawdust or ground
bark.
8
Manure shall be well-rotted, unleached stable or
cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by
volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free
of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, end
material harmful to plant growth.
9
Herbicides shall be EPA registered and approved, of
type recommended by the manufacturer.
16.1.2.1 0
3
Commercial fertilizer shall be commercial-grade
complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast
and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural
organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and
potassium in the proportions recommended in reports
from a qualified soil testing agency.
4
Slow-release fertilizer shall be granular fertilizer
consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potassium in the proportions
recommended in reports from a qualified soil testing
agency.
16.1.2.11
Fertilizer
Bone-meal shall be commercial, raw, finely ground;

minimum ol4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric
acid.
Mulches
1
Mineral mulch shall be hard, durable stone, washed
free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of
following type, size range, and color:
i.
Type: Crushed stone or gravel.
ii.
Size Range:
minimum.
iii.
Color:
Uniform tan-beige
acceptable to the Engineer.
grade,
4
Perlite shall be horticultural perlite, soil amendment
grade.
i.
2
Superphosphate shall be commercial, phosphate
mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available
phosphoric acid.
20 mm maximum, 6 mm
color
range,
2
Straw mulch shall be air-dry, clean, mildew- and
seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or
barley.
3
Peat mulch shall be peat humus as specified in
paragraph 16.1 .2.9, items 5 or 6 as appropriate.
4
Compost mulch shall be well-com posted, stable, and
weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture
content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing
through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to
10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert
contaminants and free of substances tmcic to plantings;
and as follows:
i.
Organic Maner Content: 50 to 60 percent of

dry weight.
ii.
Feedstock: Agricultural, food. or industrial

residuals; biosotids; yard trimmings; or source
separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
5
Fiber mulch shall be biodegradable, dyed-wood,
cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content
of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.
6
Non asphaltic tackifier shall be colloidal tackifier
recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry
application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors.
Asphalt emulsion shall conform to ASTM 0 977,
7
Grade SSl; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or
germination inhibitors.
16.1.2.12
Stakes and Guys
l
Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new
hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated
163
~~
Mlnllu.ry or Tranpon & CommunlcntJon. DGRLT
~""'<::Landscaping and Irrigation
softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other

defects, 50 by 50 mm by length indicated, pointed at one
end.
2
Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641M, Class 1,
galvaniledsteel wire, 2 strands, twisted. 2.7 mm in
diameter.
3
Guys for Palms: 5 mm diameter, 7-strand galvanized
wire in suitable lengths, with chafing guards of 13 mm
diameter PVC pipe, wire adjustments or turn buckles as
approved and 15 mm malleable iron ground anchors.
4
Guy Cable: 5 strand. 4.8 mm diameter, galvanized
steel cable, with zinc-coated turn buckles, 75 mm long
minimum, with 2 10 mm galvanized eyebolts.
5
Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic
hose at least 13 mm in diameter, black, cut to lengths
required to protect tree trunks from damage.
6
Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape,
white, 150 mm long.
Burlap: Jute of 0.20 kg/m2 or cloth having same
7
strength and resistance to tearing and capable of rotting in
the ground.
performance of work. Do not proceed with installat[on

until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2
Topsoil Analysis: Furnish a soil analysis made by a
qualified independent soil-testing agency stating
percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay,
and sandl, deleterious material, pH, and mineral and
plant-nutrient content of topsoil, Report suitability of
topsoil for growth of applicable planting materiel. State
recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and
potash nutrients and limestone, aluminum sulfate. or
other soil amendments to be added to produce
satisfactory topsoil.
3
Deliver packaged materials in containers showing
weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect
materials from deterioration during delivery and while
stored at site.
4
Deliver trees, shl'\lbs, ground covers, and plants after
preparation for planting has been completed and plant
immediately, If planting is de!ayed more than G hours
alter delivery, set planting materials in shade, and protect
from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots
moist,
16.1.2.13 Landscape Edgings

Polyethylene edging shall be proprietary standardblack polyethyle ne edging, 3 mm thick by 125 mm deep,
unless otherwise indicated, extruded in standard lengths,
wlth 225 mm steel angle stakes.
i.
ii.
Top Profile: Straight, with top 50 mm, 6 mm

thick.
Top Profile: Rounded.
i.
Heel-in bare-root stock. Soa k roots in water for

2 hours if dried out.
ii.
Set balle d stock on ground and cove r ball with

soli, peat moss. sawdust, or other acceptable
material.
iii.
Do not remove container-grown stock from

containers until time of planting.
iv.
Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored

on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often
as necessary to maintain root systems in a
moist condition.
16.1 .2.14 ErosiofiControl Materials

Biodegradable wood
Erosion-Control Blankets:
excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a
photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's
recommended steel wire staples, 150 mm long.
2
Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable twisted
jute o r spun-eolr mesh, a minimum of 0.5 kg/sq.m. with 50
to 65 percent open area.
Include manufacture rs
recomme nded steel wire staples, 150 mm long.
16.1.2.15 Miscellaneous Materials
Anti-desiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable
moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs.
Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and
mix according to the manufacturer's instructions.
2
Trunk-Wra p Tape: Two laye rs of crinkle d paper
cemented together with bituminous material, 100 mm
wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent
16.1.3
16.1.3.1
General
with
Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance

requirements and for conditions affecting
16-<1
5
Coordinate installation of planting materiels during
normal planting seasons fo r each type of plant materia l
required,
Coordinate planting pe riods with maintenance
periods to provide required maintenance from date of
handing over.
7
Proceed with planting only when existing and
forecast weather conditions permit.
16.1.3.2
Preparation
Lay out Individual tree and shrub locations and areas

for multiple planting. Stake locations, outline areas, and
secure the Engi near's acceptance before the start of
planting work. Ma ke minor a djustme nts as may be
required.
2
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements,
and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from
damage caused by planting operations.
3
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosial'l
or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing
water runoff or airborne dust to itdjacent prope rties and
walkways.
Sultanata of Om1tn, Stndard Specific.t10111 for !mod 1!. Bndge ContrU<:Iion 2010
16.1.3.3
Planting Soil Preparation
iii.
Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, p' ants, sods.

stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
2
Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topso'l at
rates indicated following soil physical and chemical
analysis. Delay mixing fertilizer if planting does not follow
placing of planting soil within a few days.
a. Spread
approximately
one-half
the
th"ckness of planting soil mix over
loosened sub-grade. Mix thoroughly into
top 100 mm of sub grade and then spread
remainder of planting soil mix.
3
For palms and tree pit or trench backfill, mix planting
soil before backfilling, and stockp'le at site ready for use.
4
For planting beds, mix planting soil either prior to
placing or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly
before planting.
i.
ii.
16.1.3.4
Mix lime with dry so'l prior to mixing fertilizer.

Prevent lime from contaeling roots of acidtolerant plants.
Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer, other than that
constituting a portion of complete fertilizers,
direelly to sub-grade before applying planting
soil and til ling.
b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow

for soil thickness of sod.
3
If grass is to be sown or pi anted in areas unaltered or
undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil
stripping operat;ans, prepare surface soil as fallows:
Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf.
Do not mix into surface sail. Remove stones
larger than 25 mm in any dimension and sticks,
roots, trash, and ather extraneous matter.
ii.
Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 150

mm. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers
according to planting soil mix proportions and
mix thoroughly Into top 150 mm. of soil. Till
soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.
iii.
o:spose of waste material, including grass,

vegetation, and turf, off site.
Ground Cover and Plant Bed Preparation
Loosen sub-grade of pianti ng bed areas to a

minimum depth of 150 mm. Remove stones larger than 40
mm in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other
extraneous materials.
2
Spread planting sofl mixture to depth required to
meet thickness, grades, and elevations shown, after rght
rolling and natural settlement. Place approximately one
half the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work
into top of loosened sub-grade to create a transition layer
and then place remainder of planting soil mixture.
Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 150 mm

but not less than required to meet finish grades
after light rolling and natural settlement. Do
not spread if planting soil or sub-grade is
muddy or excessively wet.
4
Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface
plane w ith loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within
plus or minus 13 mm of finish elevation. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the
immediate future.
3
Till soil in beds to a minimum depth of 200 mm and
mix with specified soil amendments and fertilizers.
5
Moisten prepared lawn area before planting if soil is
dry. Water thoroughly and aII ow surface to dry before
planting. Do not create muddy soil.
4
Remove existing unsuitable soil to a minimum depth
of 200 mm and replace with prepared planting soil mixture.
6
Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after
finish grading and before planting.
16.1.3.5
1
Preparation for Grassed Areas
Umit sub-grade preparation to areas to be planted.
2
Newly prepared sub grade: Loosen newly prepared
sub grade to a minimum depth of 150 mm. Remove
stones larger than 25 mm In any dimension and sticks,
roots, rubbish, and other exlraneous matter and dispose
off site.
i.
Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to sub

grade before loosening.
ii.
Thoroughly blend planting so:l mix off-site

before spreading, or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer directly to the
surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil
mix.
a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if
planting will not proceed within a few days.
b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing
fertilizer.
16.1.3.6
Excavation for Trees and Shrubs
Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and

with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to
assist drainage.
Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of
excavation.
i.
il
Bare-root trees and shrubs: Excavate at least

300 mm wider than root spread and deep
enough to allow setting of roots an a layer of
planting soil and with collar set at same grade
as in nursery, but 25 mm below finish grade.
a.
Shrubs setting layer;

planting soil.
b.
Trees setting layer: Allow 225 mm of

planting soil.
Allow 75 mm of
Balled and burlapped trees and shrubs:

Excavate approximately 1'12 times as wide as
ball diameter and equal to ball depth, plus the
following setting layer depth:
t~5
~~
MJnlt:r.try of Tron1port 6 CommunlcatJona. DGRlT
_../'...~<:Landscaping and Irrigation
iii.
iv.
a.
Shrubs setting layer:

planting soil.
Allow 75 mm of
b.
Trees setting layer: Allow 225 mm of

planting soil.
Container-grown trees and shrubs: Excavate to

container width and depth, plus the following
setting-layer depth:
e.
Shrubs setting layer: Allow 75 mm of

planting soil.
b.
Trees setting layer:

planting son.
l.
Place stock on setting layer of compacted

planting soil.
il.
Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of

balls and partially from sides, but do not
remove from under balls. Remove pallets, if
any, before setting. Do not use planting stock
if ball is cracked or broken before or during
planting operation.
iii.
Place backfill around ball In layers, tamping to

settle backfill and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When the pit is approximately half
backfi lied, water thoroughly before placing the
remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no
more is absorbed. Water again after placing
and tamping the final layer of backfill.
Allow 150 mm of
Pits for palms excavate to a depth not less than

1.6m below finished grade and to a diameter of
not less than 1.5 m and at least 1 m greater
than diameter of root ball. Break up bottom of
pits to a depth of 300 mm.
2
Dispose of subsoil removed from excavations. Do not
mix with planting soil or use as backfill.
3
Notify the Engineer if unexpected rock or
obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are
encountered in excavations.
i.
3
Set balled and bur lapped stock plumb and in center
of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent
finish grades as indicated.
4
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit
or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent finish
grades as Indicated,
1-t.ardpan layer: Drill 150 mm diameter holes

into free-draining strata or to a depth of 3 m,
whichever is less, and backfill with freedraining material.
4
Notify the Engineer if subsoil conditions show
unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub
pits.
i.
Carefully remove containers so as not to

damage root balls.
ii.
Place stock on sening layer of compacted

plant)ng soil.
iii.
Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to

settle backfi and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When the pit is approximately half
backfilled, water thoroughly before placing
remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no
more is absorbed. Water again after placing
and tamping the final layer of backfill.
Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out,

5
before placing setting layer and positioning trees and
shrubs,
16.1.3.7
Planting, Palms, Trees and Shrubs
Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1

with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position.
Do not prune to obtein required slzes. Take caliper
measurements 150 mm above ground for trees up to 100
mm caliper size, and 300 mm above ground for larger
sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for helght and
spread;
2
Deliver freshly dug and container grown palms, trees
and shrubs to the site just before planting. Do not prune
before delivery. except as approved by the Engineer.
Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald,
drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying
damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a
manner as to destroy natural shape. Maintain protective
covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs
during delivery.
i.
ii.
16~
Immediately after digging bare-root stock, piCk

root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable
material to keep root system moist until
planting.
Handle balled and bur lapped stock by the root
ball
5
Set bare-root stock on cushion of planting soil.
Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface.
and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle
with water until backfill layers are completely saturated.
Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while
working backfill around roots and placing layers above
roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
i.
Set collar 25 mm below adjacent finish grades,

ullless otherwise il'\dicated
6
Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 75 mm high
mound around the rim of the pit. Do not cover top of root
with backfill.
7
Wrap trees of 50 mm caliper and larger with trunkwrap tape. Start at base of trunk and spiral cover trunk to
height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the
width, and securely attach without causing girdling.
Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and insect
Infestation and take corrective measures required before
wrapping.
Remove suckers, flowering and fruiting parts and

approximately 30% of fronds from palms before planting.
Leave sufficient fronds to enclose and protect growing
bud, trim to 65% of original length, lift to surround
growing bud and burlap wrap and securely tie them in

position and leave on palm for around one year after
planting. Special attention is required to protect palm
roots from being bruised during digging and bur lapping.
16.1.3.8
Tree and Shl'\lb Pruning
Pl'\lne, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to

standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain
required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, do not cut tree leader; remove only injured
or dead branches from flowering trees Pl'\lne shrubs to
retain natural character. Shl'\lb sizes indicated are size
after pruning.
16.1.3.9
ii.
Tree and Shl'\lb Guying and Staking
Stake all trees of 50 to 125 mm caliper; stake trees

less than 50 mm caliper only if required to prevent
displacement by wind. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of
length required to penetrate at least 450 mm below
bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 1800
mm above grade. Set stakes vertical and spaced to avoid
penetrating balls or root masses. Support trees with 2
strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact
points with tree tl'\lnk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid
restraint of tree.
6
Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying
winds by applying compost mulch, peat mulch or planting
soil within 24 hours after completing seeding operations.
Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of 4.8 mm and roll
to a smooth surface.
16.1.3.11
i.
Mix slurry with no asphaltic tackifier.
ii.
Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded

in a onestep process.
Apply mulch at a
minimum rate of 15.3kgl92.9 sq. m dry weight
but not less than the rate required to obtain
specified seed-sowing rate.
iii.
Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded

in a twostep process. Apply first slurry
application at a minimum rate of 5.1-kg/92.9
sq.m. dry weight but not less than the rate
required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate.
Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch at a rate
of 10.2 kg/92.9 sq.m.
16.1.3.10 Grass Seeding

Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not
broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds B
kmlh. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in
two directions at right angles to each other.
i.
2
Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or

otherwise damaged.
Sow seed at the rate of 2.3to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq.m.
3
Rake seed lightly into top 3 mm of topsoil, roll lightly,
and water with fine spray.
4
Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:6 with
erosion-control fiber mash and slopes exceeding 1:4 with
erosion-eontrol blankets installed and stapled according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
5
Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6
by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a
minimum rate of 42 kg/92.9 sq.m. to form a continuous
blanket 38 mm in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread
by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
i.
Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil

with suitable mechanical equipment.
Hydro-Seeding
Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in

water, using equipment specifically designed for hydro
seed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended
into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.
2
Guy and stake trees exceeding 4.2 m high and more
than 75 mm calf per. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys
to stakes 750 mm long, driven to grade. Attach flags to
each guy wire, 750 mm above finish grade.
Support palms with 4 guy wires secured to ground
anchors and attached to palm at approximately two thirds
height. Adjust tension as necessary with wire adjusters or
turn buckles.
Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt

emulsion at the rate of 38 to 49 l./92.9 sq.m.
Take precautions to prevent damage or
staining of structures or other pia ntings
adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean
damaged or stained areas.
16.1.3.12 Sodding
Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting.
sod if dormant or if ground is muddy.
Do not lay
2
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints.
Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap.
Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent
courses. Avoid damage to sub grade or sod during
installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with
sub grade, eliminate air pockets, end form e smooth
surface. Work sifted soli or fine sand into minor cracks
between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid
smothering sod and adjacent grass.
i.
Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
ii.
Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood

pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended
by sod manufacturer but not less than 2
anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
3
Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours
of planting.
During first week, water daily or more
frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a
minimum depth of 38 mm below sod.
16.1.3.13 Plugging
Plant plugs in holes or furrows, spaced 300 mm apart
in both directions. On slopes, contour furrows to neat
levels.
16-7
~~
Ministry of Tronport & CommuniCDtlon. OGALT
~~<::Landscaping and Irrigation
16.1,3.14 Sprigging
16.1.3.18 Installation of Edgings
Plant freshly shredded sod sprigs in furrows 63 to 75

mm deep. Place individual sprigs with roots and portions
of stem in moistened soil, 150 mm apart in rows 250 mm
apart, and fill furrows without covering growing tips.
Lightly roll and firm soil around sprigs after planting.
Install plastic edging where indicated, according to

the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor with steel
stakes spaced approximately 600 mm apart, driven
through upper base grooves of edging.
2
Broadcast sprigs uniformly over prepared surface at
a rate of 0.28 cu. m/92.9 sq.m. and meehanically force
sprigs into lightly moistened soil.
i.
Spread a 6-mm thicl< layer of compost mulch,

peat mulch, planting soil or topsoil on sprigs.
II.
Lightly roll end firm soil around sprigs after

planting.
iii.
16.1.3.15
Water sprigs immediately after planting and

keep moist by frequent watering until well
rooted.
Requirements for Satisfactory Grass
Seeded areas: At ertd of maintenance period, a

healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has to be
established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with
coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 0.92 sq.m and
bare spots not exceeding 125 by 125 mm.
2
Sodded areas; At end of maintenance period, a
healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable lawn has been
established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
3
Plugged areas; At end of maintenance period, the
requi red number of plugs has been established as well
rooted, viable patches of grass; and areas between plugs
are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
16.1.3.19 Installation of Miscellaneous Materials

Apply antidesiccant using power spray to provide an
adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and
foliage. When deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery before moving
and egain 2 weeks after planting.
2
Set tree grate segments with adjoining surfaces as
shown on the Drawings, Shim up from supporting
substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 75 mm
minimum growth radius around base of tree; break away
units of casting, if necessary, according to the
manufacturer's Instructions.
16.1.3.20 Cleanup and Protection
1
During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work
area in an orderly condition.
2
Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape
operations, operetions by other contractors and trades.
and trespassers. Maintain protection during install ation
and maintenance periods.
Treat, repair, or replace
damaged landscape work as directed.
3
Promptly remove soil and debris created by planting
work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before
leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads. walks, or
otlter paved areas.
4
Sprigged areas: At end of maintenance period, the
required number of sprigs has been established as wellrooted. viable plants; ;md areas between sprigs are free of
weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
4
Erect barricades and warning signs as required to
protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain
barricades throughout maintenance period and remove
when instructed. Remove erosion-control measures after
g rass or plants are established.
Reestablish grassed areas that do not comply with

5
requi rements and continue maintenance until lawns are
satisfactory.
16.1.3.21
16.1.3. 16 Planting Ground Cover and Plants

1
Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials
Disposal: remove surplus soil and waste material

including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris,
and legally dispose of it off site.
Space ground cover and plants as Indicated.
2
Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots,
and backfill with planting soi~ Work soil around roots to
ellmlnate air pockets and leave a stight saucer indentation
around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after
planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet
soil,
16.1.3.17 Mulchi ng
1
Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, trenches, pl anted
areas .and other areas with mulch material as indicated on
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
2
Lay the mineral mulch where shown or directed,
average 75mm deep, and finish level with adjacent finish
grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
16-6
16.1.4
Warranty and Maintenance
16.1 .4.1
Warranty
General Warranty; The special warranty specified in

this Clause shall not deprive the Client Authority of other
rights that it may have under other provisions of the
Contract and shall be In addition to, and run concurrent
with, other warranties given by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract.
2
Speeial Warranty:
Warrant the following living
planting materials for a period of one year after date of
Completion, against defects including death and
unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from
lack of adequate maintenance. abnormal weather
Sultanat of Oman, Stoncfard Speafic.\~Qfll for R.,.d & llndgo
Cor~~trvctJan2':l10
conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents that

are beyond the Contractor's control.
i.
Trees.
ii.
Shrubs.
ii.
iii.
Ground cover.
iv.
Palms.
v.
Lawns and grasses.
Remove and replace dead planting materials

immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding
planting season.
4
A limit of one replacement of each plant material will
be required. except for losses or replacements due to
failure to comply with requirements.
16.1.4.2
Maintenance
Maintain trees, palm and shrubs by pruning,

cultivating, watering, weeding, tertii izing, restoring
planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy
supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical
position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects
and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.
Maintain palms, trees and shrubs for a period of 12
months following the date of Completion.
2
Begin maintenance of grassed areas immediately
after each area is planted and continue until acceptable
lawn is established, but for not less than the following
periods:
i.
Seeded areas:
Completion.
Lay out temporary watering system to avoid

walking over muddy or newly planted areas.
90
days
from
date
of
When full maintenance period has not elapsed

before end of planting season, or if lawn is not
fully established, continue maintenance during
next planting season.
Water grass at a minimum rate necessary to

ensure uniform moisture and growth.
5
Mow grass as soon as top growth is tall enough to
cut Repeat mowing to maintain grass at a height of 38 to
50 mm. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf
growth in initial or subsequent mowing. Do not delay
mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted.
Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and
subsequent mowing to maintain the following grass
height:
6
Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass
is dry. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at
least 0.45 kg/92 9 sq.m. to lawn area.
7
Maintain ground cover by watering, weeding and
fertilizing to establish healthy viable planting for a period
of 6 months after the data of Completion
16.1.5
16.1.6.1
Excavation, Soiling, Cultivating and Grading
Excavation and filling to reduce or make up I evels

specifically required for landscaping shall be measured in
cubic meters as the volume shown on the Drawings or
directed on site. Other excavation related to construction
is measured under Section 2.
2
Excavation for tree and shrub planting and for
ground cover pia nts is not measured separately but is
deemed to be part of the planting items
3
Planting soil for grassed and planted areas, whether
manufactured or imported, shall be measured together in
cubic meters as the volume specified or shown on the
Drawings or as directed on site.
ii.
Sodded areas:
Completion.
45
days
from
date
of
PIanti ng soi I for trees and shrubs and ground cover

plants is not measured separately but is deemed to be part
of the planting item.
iii.
Plugged areas:
Completion.
45
days
from
date
of
iv.
Sprigged areas:
Completion.
45
days
from
date
of
Rates for excavation, filling and soiling shall be

deemed to include, but not be limited to:
i.
marking boundaries of planting areas,
ii.
excavating by machine or hand, supporting

sides, trimming to slopes and finished levels
and keeping excavated areas free from water,
end disposal of surplus material,
iii.
applying fertilizers and herbicides to surfaces

to receive filling,
iv.
supplying planting soil from any source, laying

and cultivating and final grading of in situ
topsoil and topsoil filling,
v.
additional cultivation and application

herbicides during the fallow period.
vi.
prevention of erosion.
Maintain and establish grass by watering, fertilizing,

weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and other
operations. Roll, re-grade, and replant bare or eroded
areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn.
i.
In areas where mulch has been disturbed by

wind or maintenance operations, add new
mulch.
Anchor as required to prevent
displacement.
4
Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping,
hoses, and watering equipment to convey water from
sources and to keep grass uniformly moist to a depth of
100 mm.
i.
Schedule watering to prevent wilting, pudding,

erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch.
of
~~
Mlnlalty of Tronapo~ & Communication. DGALT
~~<:Landscaping and Irrigation
16.1.5.2
16.1.7
Grass Seeding and Planting
Each kind of g rass shall be measured separately in

square meters as the area shown on the Drawings or
instructed on site.
2
Rates tor grass seeding or planting are deemed to
include, but not limited to, the costs of:
I.
final cultivation and weeding of soli. waterir.g

and application of pre-seeding or planting
ferti!izer,
ii,
applying fertilizer after planting or seeding,
iii.
watering during establishment of grass,
iv.
first and subsequent cuts, including fertilizing

and watering,
v.
temporary protection.
vi.
maintenance and making good defects.
16.1.6.3
Each type of tree, shrub, palm and plant is measured

separately by number, stating the species, height or size
where appropriate. Botanical names are given in
descriptions
2
Rates for trees, shrubs, palms and plants are deemed
to include, but not limited to, the costs of:
i.
Re-cultivating topsoil in planting areas,
ii.
Setting out planting beds,
Iii.
Drainage of planted areas,
iv.
Excavating pits and holes including disposal

and breaking up bottoms.
v.
Cutting a nd treating roots. pruning and the like.

Including antidesiccant and tree wound
dressings,
vi.
Planting, including backfilling

planting soil and firming,
vii.
Watering and fertilizing after planting,
viii.
Supports to trees and palms including sta kes,

guys, ties a nd chafing guards,
he.
Trunk wrapping,
x.
Labeling,
xi.
Forking and/or raking soil a t completion
xii.
Applying mulches,
xiii.
Temporary protection,
xiv.
Maintenance and making good defects.
16.1.6
with
Basis of Payment
The landscape work, completed, a nd accepted by the

Engineer will be paid for at the unit rates for the relevant
items stated in the Bill of Quantities, which unit rates shall
be deemed to be full compensation for supply of all
materials, labor, transport, tools and equipment and
provision of all other items and services and ma intenance
for the complete work as specified.
16-10
Excavation, Soiling, Seeding and Cultivating:

i.
Excavating to reduce levels
(cu,m.)
ii.
Excavating topsoil for preservation
(cu.m.)
Iii.
Filling to make up levels
(cu.m.)
iv.
Topsoil filling to make up levels

and for planting
(cu .m .)
Grass Seeding and Planting:

v.
vi.
Grass seeding
Grass sods (turf)
(sq.m .)
vii.
Grass p lugs
(sq.m.)
viii. Grass sprigs
(sq .m.)
(sq.m.)
Trees, Palms and Shrubs
Tree, Palm, Shrub and Ground Cover Planting
hole
Items in Bill of Quantities
ix.
Trees (Type; Size I
(nr.)
x.
Palms (Type; Size)
xi,
Shrubs (Type; Size)
(nr.l
(nr.)
Ground Cover and Other Planting:

xii.
Ground cover plants (lype)
(ru.l
xiii.
Climbers (Type)
(nr.)
16.2
Irrigation System
16.2.1
16.2.1.1
Scope

furnishing, installing, testing and putting into service,
complete irrigation systems to provide water for the trees.
shrubs and grassed and planted areas around and
adjacent to the highway system, all as and where shown
on the Drawings.
2
The work includes all civil, mechanical and electrical
Works, pipelines, pumping sta tions, water tanks, filters,
fertilizer injection equipment, control valves. pressure
regulators and gauges, water meters, automatic or manual
controllers , and all incidentals and spare parts specified
and as appropriate for the particular Irrigation system
specified.
3
The irrigation system shall be as specified in the
Special Specification for the particular Project and shall be
of a type which will supply the quantities of water required,
on a "progra mmable" basis, The irrigation system shall, in
general, be either drip irrigation utilizing drip emitters
and/or sprinkler irrigation using either bubblers or
sprayheads.
4
When access to the domestic water supply is
intended, the Contractor shall liaise with the a ppropria te
a uthorities regarding the planning, design, construction of
the works and the subsequent operation of the irrigation
network. Back flow preventars (of the double check valve
type) shall be installed at points of connection to the
domestic water supply network.
5
The control head for each Irrigalion branch system
shall include all components as shown on the Drawings,
as required for the complete operation of the system. The
final size of all components of each control head for each
irrigation branch system shall be a minimum of 20%
greater than the demand load as submitted by the
Contractor, with the working drawings, in tabular form
drawn up as follows for approval:
Control
Head
No.
16.2.1.2
Irrigation
Controller
Capacity
at
Control
Head
(lltJhrl
Peele
Water
Demand
Uit/24 hr)
Apptox.
Working
Pressure
at Control
Head
(MN/sq.m)
Schedules of Proposed Equipment
Schedules containing full details of all principal items

of the irrigation system shall be submitted by the
Contractor together with his Tender. The Contractor shall
ensure conformity of the equipment with the requirements
of the Specification. Any additional information required
by the Engineer shall be provided promptly by the
Contractor.
2
A summary of irrigation equipment manufacture
including description, manufacturer, country reference
and catalog origin In a tabular format shall be included in
the Contractor's submission.
3
The Contractor shall supply equipment from the
manufacturer's lists with the characteristics indicated in
his Tender unless otherwise agreed.
4
Approval of a manufacturer does not necessarily
constitute approval of his product es equal to that
specified. The Contractor shall ascertain that the approved
manufacturers are capable of supplying the required
materials and/or equipment and shall ensure conformity
with the Specification in all respects.
16.2.1.3
Approval of Equipment
Equipment shall not be ordered until approved by the

Engineer. All documentation submitted regarding
equipment shall be In English except if otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents.
2
Promptly upon signing the Contract, 1he Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer 3 copies of the detailed
characteristics of all irrigation equipment proposed,
including catalogs (originals not copies) with Identification
references. Particulars shall be given of any
manufacturer's deviations from the Specification. The
Contractor shall also confirm that the selected irrigation
system equipment is robust, able to withstand rough
handling, and capable of supplying the specified
quantities of water on a programmable basis.
Tha Contractor shall, at his own expense, present
3
samples to the Engineer of the various valves, pipes,
fittings and other products proposed for use. Such
samples will be required only after approval of their
technical characteristics.
4
The Engineer may verify the performance and quality
of any samples by arranging for such tests as he deems
appropriate to be carried out, at the Contractor's expense.
Approval of samples by the Engineer shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations with respect to the suitability
of equipment or its final performance once installed, and
coordination of elements into a fully operational irrigation
system. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
compensation for the rejection of any sample by the
Engineer and shall be held responsible for any delay
resulting from such rejection.
16.2.1.4
Submittals
Product Data: Include pressure rating, rated capacity,

settings, and electrical data of selected models for the
following:
i.
Pipes and fittings.
ii.
Pumps/motor and related

electrical works
Iii.
Water hammer arresters.
iv.
Valves.
Include
aboveground
and
underground; general-duty, pressure-reducing,
manual and automatic control, and quickcoupler types.
mechanical
and
v.
Valve boxes.
vi.
Sprinklers and devices.
vii.
Specialties. Include emitters, drip tubes, and

other devices.
viii.
Controllers. Include wiring diagrams.
2
Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system, including
pi an layout and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow
characteristics of piping components.
Include water
meters, backflow preventers, valves. piping, sprinklers and
devices, specialties, accessories, controls, and wiring.
Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
3
Coordination Drawings: Show piping and major
system components.
Indicate interface end spatial
relationship between piping, system components,
adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.
4
Test Reports: Submit reports of tests on materials
and installations as directed by the Engineer.
5
Maintenance Data : Include in maintenance manuals
data for the following:
i.
Valves /surge control devices.
ii.
Automatic, pressure-reducing control valves.
iii.
Sprinklers.
iv.
Specialties.
v.
Controllers.
6
As-Built Drawings: At project close-out, submit
record drawings of Installed pipework and products, in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification,
Section 1, Sub-section 1.12. The drawings shall show the
location, with respect to the highway and other pipelines
and other permanent features, of all pumping stations,
1611
~
../"..../
M nletry of Trcnport
a. Communl=tlono
DGRLT
./"".~<:Landscaping and Irrigation
water tanks, irrigators, valves, pipelines, fittings and other

items incorporated in the Works. Thev shall also show the
sizes of all pipes, their pressure class or rating, and the
actual pressures as measured on the highest and lowest
spray heads commanded by each control valve.
7
Submit certificates of compliance from manufactures.
16.2.1.5
Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according

to tha following:
i.
Ensure that valves are dry and internally

protected against rust and corrosion.
ii.
Protect valves against damage to threaded

ends and flange faces.
~i.
Set valves in best position for handling. Set

valves closed to pre...ent rattling.
2
During Storage:
Use
according to the following:
precautions for valves
I.
Do not remove end protectors u ntess

necessary for inspection; then, reinstall for
storage.
ii.
Protect from weather. Store indoors and

maintain temperature higher than ambient
dew-point temperature. Support off ground or
pavament in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
3.
Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps.
Maintajn end caps through shipping, storage. and
handling to prevent pipe-end damoge and to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
4.
Protect stored piping from moisture and din. Elevate
above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor
when storing inside.
5.
Protect flanges. fittings. and specialties from
moisture and dirt.
6.
Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight.
Support to pravent sagging and banding.
7.
Manufacturer's recommendations on handling.
repairing, laying, jointing, anchoring, cutting and other
works for pipes and fittings are to be strictly followed.
16.2.1.6
The irrigation work shall be supervised by qualified

representatives of the Contractor and full facilities and
assistance shall be provided by the Contractor to enable
the Engineer to inspect or check the Works at any time.
Such Inspection or checking shall In no way relieve the
Contractor from any of his obligations. He may be
required to open up for inspection any equipment that has
been deHvered to the Site partly assembled.
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for making minor
adjustments to the location of sprinklers and specialties as
necessary to avoid pi antlngs and obstructions such as
signs and light standards subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
16-12
3
The Contractor shall be responsible for the
correctness and safety of all electrical and mechanical
connections for the irrigation system. before the system is
brought into service, including checking the proximity of
different metals to ensure no chemical reaction or
corrosion will occur.
16.2.1.7
Spares
At the commencement of the Contract the Contractor

shall submit a detailed list of minimum essential spares
recommended by the irrigation system manufacturer,
together with current prices and catalog identifications.
2
Lists of any additional spares recommended by the
manufacturers shall also be submitted, referenced to each
major item of equipment and showing the current prices
and catalog identifications.
3
The Engineer will se!ect the types and numbers of
spares he requires and will instruct the Contractor to
proceed with their purchase and delivery to the
Employer's store or depot. The spares shd be supplied
and suitably packed for transportation to the Site and for
long term storage and shall include all fastenings, lugs,
screws, etc. Identification labels shall be attached to the
outside and also enclosed within the package.
16.2.1 .8
Equipment Labels and Charts
Each piece of equipment shall have a certified

nameplate, permanently attached at the factory and in a
readily accessible location, printed or stamped clearly with
the name and address of the manufacturer, equipment
model number, serial number, date of manufacture,
performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature, or
other lim itations and other relevant data.
2
Aluminum tags 50 mm diameter and 1.5 mm thick
with stamped lettering filled with black print and with
heavy aluminum or brass hooks and chains shall be
provided in lieu of labels wherever the latter cannot easily
identify the equipment.
3
Charts ind1cating the schedules for equipment
lubrication, maintenance and essential operating
instructions shall be prepared, mounted on wooden or 6
mm dense hardboard back boards, covered with heat
bonded clear plastic laminate or framed under glass.
These charts shall be permanently fixed with four brass
screws at approved locations as directed.
4
Prior to preparing labels and tags, and maintenance
charts, a preliminary schedule shall be submitted for
approval. showing the equipment to be labeled or tagged
with suggested 11omenclature, and proposed maintenance
schedules.
16.2.1.9
Operation and Instruction Manuals
Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall submit

to the Eng;neer 6 sets of operation, maintenance and
instruction manuals relating to the irrigation system. The
manuals shal be A4 size, bound In loose leaf binders or
Sultan11te cof Oml'n. Standard Specifioltiom for Ro.d & Bridg C<lnl!rLICtlon20tO
booklets suitably enclosed and shall include the following

information:
I.
Setting up, putting into service and operating

instructions.
11.
Fau It location and repair procedures.
iii.
Maintenance instructions, including schedules

for
preventive
maintenance,
and
recommended lubricants and equivalents.
iv.
v.
to BS 4164 or hot applied bitumen to BS

3416, Type 1, grade d, minimum
thickness 1o mil.
uPVC Pressure Pipes

i.
Pipes shall conform to BS EN 1452 or to DIN

806118062, Series 4 and 5 or I SO 161 Class 10 &
16. Concrete encasement shall be used if cover
is less than 1 meter or greater than 5 meters.
Complete recommended spares list, including

manufacturers' names and catalog numbers.
H.
Fittings shall be to BS EN 1452 part 3 or DIN

8063 part 1 fabricated from pipe.
Names and addresses of manufacturers' local

authorized representatives and service agents.
iW.
Joints shall be to DIN 8063 part 1, socket spigot

wth rubber sealing rings shall be to BS EN
681 2.
16.2.2
Material
w.
16.2.2.1
Pipes, Fittings and Accessories
Pipes and fittings shall be protected from the

direct rays of the sun at all times by means of
reflective cover sheets.
Ductile iron pipe
i.
Ductile iron pipe for water shall be to BS EN

545 or equivalent. Unless otherwise indicated
in the Bill of Quantities or the Drawings, Class
K9 shall be used for diameters up to 500 mm,
Class KB for diameters 500 to BOO mm and
Class K7 for diameters greater than BOO mm.
ii.
Spigot and socket ended pipes shall be used

for straight runs and adjacent to elbows or
fittings. These joints shall be provided with
rubber gaskets, and an external thrust block is
required at elbows or fittings. Anchored or self
restrained joints shall be used for sections
adjacent to elbows in areas where space is
restricted or indicated on the Drawings or BOO.
Anchored joints are to be pushin, self
anchored type able to take up the axial forces
thus al!owing concrete thrust blocks to be
dispensed with. The Contractor shall submit
calculations verifying the number of restrained
joints required noting that pipe pressure
testing will be made when pipes are partially
backfilled.
iii .
Flanged pipes wherever specified shall have

screwed-on or caston flanges to sustain
working pressure of NP 16 minimum.
iv.
Flanges shall conform to BS EN 10922.
v.
Factory protection for pipes and fittings:

a.
b.
c.
Pipes shall be internally cement lined to

BS EN 545 with ordinary Portland cement
to BS EN 197-1 to specified thicknesses
Externally, pipe shall be coated with
metallic zinc to 85 EN 545 and followed
by a bitumen coat to BS 3416 of
minimum thickness 6 mils. A hot app'ied
coal tar based material to BS 4164 may
replace the bitumen coat.
Polyethylene PE Pressure Pipe
i.
Pipes and fittings with 110 mm (4"1 diameter

and larger shall be to ISO 4427, DIN 807418075
or AWVVA C906. Pipe shall be supplied in
straight pieces and not rolled on a drum. The
ends of each pipe shall be plain and suitable
for heat fusion. Pipe and fittings shall be
minimum class 12 kg/cm2, Dimension Ratio 9.3,
according to AWVVA C906 Table9 or ISO 3126.
ii.
Irrigation pipes smanler than 110 mm (4"1 in

d"ameter shall be according to ISO 4427, BS EN
12201-2 (PN121 or to DIN 807418075 class
12Kg/cm2.
iii.
Materials used shall have a standard PE codes

designation 3408 and 3406 with respective
minimum hydrostatic design basis of 1600 end
1250 psi according to AWVVA C906 Table 1. PE
Pipes shall contain a minimum 2% carbon
black well dispersed and shall be constructed
with UV stabilizer material according to ASTM
D2239.
iv.
Manufacturers shall provide certificat ion that

stress regression testing has been performed
on the pipe products. Materials shall also meet
elevated temperature requirements as given in
Table 2 AWVVA C906.
V.
Fittings shall be to AWVVA C906, extruded or

injection moulded suitable for class of pipe
required:
a.
For irrigation pipes with diameters equal

or larger than 50 mm (2"1 the following
fittings shall be used:
for similar size PE pipes joining use

PE bun-weld finings: to ASTM 03261.
for dissimilar pi pes sizes use PE

socket fittings that uses the electrical
Fittings shall be coated internally and

externally by dipping, or other method,
using hot applied coal tar based material
15-13
~~
M nlatry of Tronaport 6 Communication
DGRlT
~~<Landscaping and Irrigation
heating with the approp!'iate pipe

clamps according: to ASTM 02683.
b.
c.
vi.
vii.
For Irrigation pipes with diameters less

than
50 mm
12 1 use PVCIPP
compression fittings. The compression
fittings shall conform to BS 5114 with
minimum 12 kg/em' nominal pressure.
The use of insert and/or solvent welded
fittings for PE irrigation pipes shall not be
allowed thicknesses.
Joints for pipes and fittings shall be by heat

fusion and in strict accordance with pipe
manufactures recommendations. Joints shall
have a tensile strength equol to that of the pipe.
Fusion temperature,
interface
pressure,
alignment and cooling time, shall be accordlng
to manufactures recommendations.
Pipes must be marked at intervals of not more
than 2 m. with legible cast, stamped lettering to
show the following. as appropriate:
a.
nominal pipe size,
b.
type of plastic material in accordance

with designation code,
c.
standard dimension ratio SOR,
d.
e.
Initials and number of relevant standard,
f.
manufacturer name or trademark,
g.
dale of manufacturer:
pressure rating,
GRE Pipes and Fittings

i.
Pipes and Fittings: Conform to AWWA C950-07

or BS EN 1796 and BS EN 14364 or equivalent
suitable for 10 bar working pressure w ith a
minimum stiffness of 10000 Nlm2.
ii.
Resin: Use epoxy resin. The resin-curing agent

mixture will have sufficient chemical and
mechanical resistance to meet the imposed
requirements.
iii.
The reinforcement of thermosetting resin shall

consist of two types of glass with a low alkali
content
iv.
C-glass or polyester non-woven shall be used

as reinforcing material for the chemically
resistant inner layer (llnerl.
v.
Eglass shall be used as reinforcing material for

the structural wall. The reinforcing material is
to be provided with a special finish to assure a
good adhesion with the matrix.
vi.
GRE pipe and fittings shall have a resin-rich

exterior surface having a mini mum thickness of
0.5mm.
vii.
Flexible tensile resistant rubber seal lock joint

shall be used with a 0-ring seal and a locking
device on all end connections except those
adjacent to flanged fittings when rigid tensile
resistant flanges are required.
1614
viii.
Pipes and fitti ngs shall show no porosity when

tested in accordance with ASTM 0 2444 or BS
EN 1796 and BS EN 14364.
ix.
Samples made from pipe or fitting l ami nates

shall show no evidence of delaminating or
other Impairment when tested In accordance
with ASTM 0 570.
x.
The axial modulus of elasticity of pipes shall be

tested l n accordance with ASTM 0 2925.
xi.
The short-time hydraulic fail ure strength of

Qipe and fittings, snell be tested in accordance
with ASTM 0 1599.
xii.
The axial tensile stress for pipes shall be tested

i n accordance with ASTM 0 2105.
xiii.
The hoop tensile strength of pipes shall be

tested in accordance with ASTM 0 2290.
xiv.
The i ndentation hardness of pi pes and fitti ngs

shall be tested in accordance with ASTM 0
2583.
xv.
The glass content of the reinforced wall of

pipes and fitti ngs. will be determined in
accordance with ASTM D 2584
xvl.
The hydrostotlc design stress for pipes and

fittings will be obtained from the extrapolated
I ong term hydrostatic tests l n accordance with
ASTM 02992.
xvii. Joints shall be GRP double socket couplings

With rubber rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681-2.
The allowable angular deflection shall conform
to tha requirements of BS EN 1796 and BS EN
14364 Table 3.
xvlii. Transition couplings for underground piping
shall be to AIJI/WA C219, metal, sleeve-type
coupli ng same size as, with pressure rating at
SuiIanete of Oman. Standard Specific.~iom for Road & BNdg ComlrW<tl<lrl 2010
16.2.2.2
least equal to and ends compatible with, piping

to be joined
ii.
Construction: Non-rising stem, straight pattern

with flanged connections.
Valves and Penstocks
iii.
Material of Component Parts: Cast iron with

stainless steel trim.
Gate Valves: Cast Iron.

i.
Type: Size 50 mm and smaller to BS 5154

inside screw, solid wedge, rising stem and
screwed bonnet.
lt
Type: Size 65 mm and larger to BS 5163, inside

screw, solid wedge, resilient seated, for valves
350 mm and smaller and metal seated for
valves 400 mm and larger, bolted bonnet, nonrising stem type, suitable for NP 16 for
irrigation networks.
Iii.
Material of component parts from basic or

alternative materials listed in BS 5163.
iv.
End Connections; Size 50 mm and smaller

screwed end to BS 21.
v.
End Connections: Size 65 mm and larger

flanged end connection to BS EN 10922.
Operation: Valves larger than 400 mm diameter
a ra to have spur gear drive operated by
removable key. Valves smaller than 400 mm
are to be operated by hand-wheel.
vi .
viL
Factory Protection: Casting surfaces are to be

given an initial coat of protective paint
immediately after shot blasting and a second
coat on assembly. Protect:ve coating is to be
hot applied coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164 or
BS 3416 respectively. Thickness of coat to be
250 microns.
Operation: Manual operated valves are to have

hammer type hand-wheel and electric operated
valves are to have motor actuator.
Ball Valves
i.
Ball valves 50 mm and under shall be full port

of 2-plece construction, lever operated with
bronze body and stem, chromeplated brass
ball, replaceable PTFE seats and packing.
plastic coated steel handle, threaded end
connection for steel piping, and copper
compression or sol dar end connections for
copper piping.
ii.
Ball valves 150mm to 1200mm shall comply

with the requirements of AWWA C 507.
Check Valves
i.
Check valves shall be to BS EN 12334, swing.

straight, for horizontal use and suitable for
working pressure of 16 bars.
ii.
Material of Component Parts: Ductile iron from

basic materials listed in BS EN 12334 Table 5,
under 'copper alloy faced' column,
iii.
Special Requirements: Seating or facing rings

are to be renewable. An arrow showing
direction of flow is to be visible from outside
and cast integral with the valve housing.
iv.
End Connections: Either flanged to BS EN

1092-2, or screw ended to BS 21 to suit joints
specified for adjoining pipes.
v.

coat on assembly. Protective coating is to be
BS 3416 respectively. Minimum thickness of
coating shall be 250 microns.
Butterfly Valves: Cast Iron.

i.
Type: To BS EN 593, double flange with

resilient seating, for horizontal use and suitable
for NP 16.
11.
Size: For 350 mm and larger.
111.
Material of component parts shall be from

basic materials listed in BS EN 593 Table 3.
iv.
End Connections: Flanged to BS EN 10922.
v.
Operation by hand wheel. Maximum shut off

pressure against which valve is operated is to
be 15 kg/cm 2
vi.
iv.

given an initial coat of protective pa'nt
hot appliad coal tar or bitumen to BS 4164, or
BS 3416 respectively. Thickness of coat shall
be 250 microns.
Float Valves
i.
Type: Globe pattern, with two operating

chambers, sealed through piston disc.
ii.
Operation: Valves shall operate with a

float
valve
mechanical
compensating
controlling flow to tenk by modulating in direct
ratio to minimum fell in water level. Control of
valve is to be through mechanically operated.
three-position, four-way valve. Moving fourway valve control in one direction is to open
valve and moving lever in other direction is to
close-out valve. When lever is moved to centre,
valve will throttle in an intermediate position.
iii.
Valve positioning control consists of float

operated linkage mechanism for remote
mounting which feeds water level changes
back to main valve through low friction,
Globe Va lves
i.
Type: To ASTM A48/A48M grade 308 with

valve disc to ASTM A276 type 430, valve seat
to ASTM A276 type 420 and stem to ASTM
A276 type 403. Valve is to be suitable for a
working pressure of 16 bars.
1615
~../'.../ Mlnl~ry ol Tr.,napoo 6
Comm.,n!e41tlono. DGfiLT
flexible push-pull cable supplied by same

manufacturer.
iv.
Valve operating control consists of secondary

linkage mechanism functioning off common
lever connected to both mlin valve position
indicator rod and control valve position
I ndicator rod and control valve operating lever.
Minute changes in water level are transmitted
through pushpull cable to three-position, fourway control valva.
v.
Construction: Cast iron body to ASTM A126,

bronze valve trim and valve operating
mechanism to ASTM 862 and a !I stainless steel
valve float and pilots.
vi,
Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to

a thickness of 250 microns and external coating
of epoxy and nickel plating to a thickness of
250 microns.
stop valves. Vallles are to be suitable for

working pressures up to NP16.
8
Sluice Gates I Penstock
i.
Type: To AWWA C560, rising stam, having a

flat back for bolting to walt, suitable for 10
meters seating pressure and 4 meters offseating pressure, w ith standard conventional
closure and rectangular or circular aperture.
ii.
Material of Component Parts: Unless otherwise

specified on the Drawings, any materials listed
In Section 2 of AWWA C560 may be used io
manufacture except that materials identified as
being subject to de-zincification or dealuminumization are not to be used.
iii.
Operation: By Hoor pillar with gear box.

Maximum operating head from surfac;e o f
water to centre line of gate is to be 10 meters.
iv,
Factory Testing: leakage test to meet the

requirements of Sectiol'\ 6.3 of AVVWA C560 is
to be carried out on all sluice gates.
v.

BS 3416 respectively. Thickness of coat to be
at least 250 m [crons.
Air Valves
i.
U.
iii.
1616
Generally: Valves are to have cast iron body

and boiled cover to BS EN 1561 grade 14
minimum, rubber outlet seat, plastic or ebonite
ball, forged bronze screws and guide for ball
acting under pressure.
VaiVes are to be
dynamic type where there Is no possibility of
ball being drawn into orifice due to high air
velocities. Valves are to be factory tested to 1.5
times working pressure and factory coated with
coal tar or bituminous coating to BS 4164 orBS
3416 respectively. Thickness of coat to be 250
microns.
Double A ir Valves (or Combination Air Vallles):
These are required for relieving air under
pressure and In bulk. Large orifice releases or
admits air during charging or emptying of
mains while small orifice releases air
accumulated at summits of mains under
pressure. Large orifice area is to be equal to or
greater than inlet of valve. Valves are to be
fitted with nitrite rubber I ined butterfly valve
with nylon coated disc on stainless steel shaft
operated by lever handle w ith indicator and
locking thumb screw. Valves are to be flanged
to BS EN 1092-2 and suitable for working
pressures up to NP16.
Single Air Valves: Type 1 (or air vacuum valve)
for releasing or admitting air during filling or
emptying of pipes. Type II (or air release valve)
for automatically releasing, under pressure,
accumulated air at summits of mains. Air
valves larger than 50 mm are to be flanged to
BS EN 1092-2 and are to have nitrite rubber
lined butterfly valve with nylon coated disc on
stainless steel shaft operated by lever handle
with indicator and locking thumb screw. Air
valves 50 mm and smaller are to have B.S.P.
thread with brass or gun metal male screwed
Pressure Reducing Valves

i.
Types: Installed where shown on the Drawings

to pressure ratings and pressure settings
indicated, to automatically reduce higher inlet
pressure to steady lower downstream pressure
regardless of changing How rate and/or varying
inlet pressure. Valves are t o be high pressure
rating piston type and hydraulic p~ ot operated
type.
ii.
Accessibility: Maintenance is to be possible

without removing valve from pipeline.
iii.
End Connections: Flanged to BS EN 1092-2 to

pressure rating of 10, 16 or 25 as appropriate
and provided from factory with necessary bolts,
washers. nuts and gaskets.
iv.
Factory Protection: Internal coating of epoxy to

a thickness of 250 microns and external coating
of epoxy and nickel pleting to a thicll:ness of
250 microns.
v.
Piston Pressure Reducing Valves shall be of t he

spring loaded type, balanced out against
upstream pressure by high resistance piston
action, Valve shall control a constant
downstream pressure to a maximum variation
of +1- 10% and close tight with zero flow rate.
Accessories shall include two pressure gauges
w ith isolation cocks, one fitted upstream and
one downstream.
Sultn11t11 a f Otmm. Standrd Sl)lleiHcwon for Ra.d 1!. Bndge Consttl.ldion 2010
vi.
vii.
10
Diaphragm Pressure Reducing Valves shall be

pilot controlled, single seated, hydraulically
operated, diaphragm type globe valve. Control
system is to be sensitive to slight pressure
changes and is to immediately control main
valve to maintain desired downstream
pressure. Pressure setting adjustment is to be
made with single adjustment screw protected
by a housing that can be sealed. Body and
cover are to be cast iron, ductile iron or cast
steel depending upon operating pressure.
Main valve trim is to be stainless steel and
pilot system all stainless steel. Main valve is to
have single removable seat and resilient disc.
Diaphragm valve assembly shall be fully
guided by a precision machined stem with
bearings at both ends in the valve cover and
seat. Diaphragm is to be nylon bonded with
synthetic rubber. Valve is to have necessary
factory fitted pilot valves, small interconnecting
piping and accessories to perform required
functions. Pilot control is to be direct acting,
adjustable spring loaded. normally open,
diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when
controlled pressure is less than spring setting.
Control system is to include Y-strainer, fixed
orifice and isolation cocks. Pilot control system
is also to include flow control device to
regulate closing speed of valve. Valve is to
close tight at zero flow rete.
Type:
Pilot
controlled,
sing'e
seated,
hydraulically operated, diaphragm type globe
valve fitted with solenoid control valve to keep
main valve open when energized and to close
light main valve once de,energized.
i1.
Construction: Cast iron varve body and cover,

stain ~ess steel main valve trim and all stainless
steel pilot system.
IIi.
Controls: These shall comprise auxiliary

controls to permit adjustment of va ve opening
end closing speeds of up to 2 minutes for
opening and for closing.
lv.
e.
Adjustable opening speed control.

Adjustable closing speed control.
c.
No-return check valves.
d.
Ystrainers.
e.
Interconnecting stainless steel tub'ng and
unions.
v.
Operation: The valve shall have manual

open/close control {internal bleed) for manual
opening and closing of valve without
electri cally energizing the solenoid.
tv.
Operation: The valve shall have a brass flow

control stem for accurate manual regulation
and/or shut off of outlet flow.
v.
Construction: The valve construction shall be

such as to provide for all internal parts to be
removable from the top of the valve without
disturbing the valve installation.
12 Electric
Regulation
Remote
Control
Valves with
Pressure
i.
Type: Electric remote control valve as specified

above shall have a pressure regulating module
capable of regulating outlet pressure between
1 and 7 bars (15 and 100 psi).
ii.
Operation: Module shall have an adjusting

screw for setting pressure and Sch radar valve
connection for monitoring pressure. The
pressure sha II be adjustable from the pressure
regulating module when the valve is manually
bled.
16.2.2.3
Irrigation Equipment
Pop-Up Spray Sprinkler

i.
Type: Fixed, non-rotating spray or stream

spray adaptable for full circle, part circle, or
strip wetting pattern, suitable for installation
on a pop-up mechanism. Spray head to have
built in check valve and pressure regulated
stem.
l i.
Material: The sprinkler body, stem, nozzle, and

screen shall be constructed of heavy duty,
ultra-violet resistant plastic, with a heavy-duty
stainless steel retract spring.
iii.
Construction: Spray head to retract flush with

the finished ground level when not in
operation. When spraying, net pop-up height
to be 150 mm from finished ground level.
ill.
Performance: This shall meet requirements of

discharge and spray radius as specified on the
Drawings for the given nozzle pressure. The
sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation
rate nozzle with an adjusting screw capable of
regulating the radius of flow.
v.
Tests: The Contractor shall provide test results

carried out at factory substantiating required
perform anee (discharge and radius of throw at
Factory Protection; Internal and external

coating of epoxy as described for float valves.
Type: Normally closed 24 VAC 50160 cycle
solenoid actuated globe pattern with a
balanced pressure diaphragm design. The
be
i~.
Electric Remote Control Valves
i.
shall
Material: The valve body and bonnet shall be

constructed of heavy-duty glass-filled UV
resistant nylon end have stainless steel studs
and flange nuts; diaphragm shell be of nylon
reinforced rubber.
Accessories shall include the following:

b.
range
ii.
OnOff Solenoid Operated Valves

i.
,,
valve operating pressure

between 1.5 and 14 bars.
11H7
~~
MJnrstry or Troneport 6 CommunlentJooe
OGRLT
_/"'..~<Landscaping and Irrigation
prescribed operating pressure and height

above ground) and giving actual precipitation
rate and its uniformity as obtained for
uniformity test carried out using catch cans.
Pop-Up Rotor Sprinkler

i.
Material: The spri nkler body, stem, noule, and

screen shall be constru~ed of heavy duty.
ultra-violet resistant plastic, w ith a heavy duty
stai nless steel retract spring.
iii.
Construction: Sprinkler head to retract flush

with the finished ground level when not in
operation, When operating. net pop-up height
to be 100 mm from finished ground level.
v.
Type: Full or pan circle pop-up rotor sprinkler,

single nozzle. The part circle sprinkler shall
have adjustable arc coverage from 25" to 360".
The sprinkler shall have a built in check valve
and pressure regulated stem.
ii.
iv.
other components In the control head.

Backflow preventers shan only be installed i n
locations where they are readily accessible for
maintenance and testing and shall not be
located where any part of the device can
become submerged at any time.
Performance: This shall meet the requirements

of discharge, radius and rotation angle as
specified on the Drawings for the given nozzle
pressure. The sprinkler shall have a matched
precipitation rate noule, with an adjusting
screw capable of regulating the radius and the
flow.
Tests: The Contractor shall provide test results
carried out at factory substantiating required
performance {discharge and radius of throw at
prescribed operating pressure and height
above ground) and giving actual precipitation
rate and its uniformity as obtained for
uniformity test carried out using catch cans.
H.
Backflow preventers shaU be of the reduced

pressure type.
iii.
Backflow preventers shall be evaluated and

tested by an approved authority and certified
by the American Soc:iety of Sanitary
Engineering Standards 1013 {latest edition) for
reduced pressure principle backflow preventers.
Such valves shall also meet the performance
requirements of AWWA C 511.
iv.
Backflow preventers up to 75 mm In size shall

be of machined cast bronze body construction
and up to 150 mm rn size shalt be of cast iron
body construction with i nternal waterways
epoxy coated. stainless steel and/or br"ass
internal parts and stainless steel flange bolts,
durable. tight-seating rubber check valve
assemblies.
v.
Backflow preventers shall be suitable for

supply pressure up to 1.2 MN/sq.m 112
kg/sq.cml and for water temperature up to 44
degrees C. The operating range for flow and
ptessure loss shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
1!1.
The backflow preventer assembly shall consist

of a pressure differential relief valve l ocated in
1 zone between two positive seating check
valves.
The relief valve shall contain a
saparate means whereby free air will enter the
zone. and contai ned water will ba discharged
to tha atmosphere. when the valve i s fully open.
Bubblers
i.
Type: Pressure compens1t ing, of the full circle

umbrella or trickle discharge, with inlet screen.
ii.
Construction: Bubbler shall be of a

permanently assembled design constructed of
durable ultra-violet resistant plastic.
vii.
The backflow assembly shall Include 2 gala

valves for isolating unit, and 3 test cocks for
t esti ng the device to ensure proper operation.
iii.
Performance: Bubbler to operate at constant

flow discharge over a pressure range specified
on the Drawings.
viii.
Backflow preventers shall be designed for

irlli" e servicing.
Emitters
i.
Type: Pressure compensating, single outlet.
ii.
Construction: Emitter shall have self-piercing

inlet barb constructed of durable ultra-violet
resistant plastic.
iii.
Performance: The emitter shall have a selfflushing action to minimize clogging, and shall
operate at a constant flow discharge over a
pressure range specified on the Drawings.
Backflow Preventers
i.
1&15
Backflow preventers shall be installed In the

locations shown on the Drawings. Normally
for each control head in the system a backflow
preventer shall be installed upstream of all
Quick Couplings Valve
i.
Type: The qui~;k coupling valva shall be a twopiece type.
ii.
Construction: The valve body

constructed of heavy cast brass.
iii.
Cover: The cover shall be a dureble, protective

setf-closing, locki ng rubber cover.
iv.
Valve Operating Key; The valve shall be

opened and closed by a brass key supplied by
vtlve manufacturer having a 25 mm male top
pipe threads and 19 mm female top pipe
threads outlet. The valve throat shall have a
keyw~y with detent positions for regulating
water flow. Operating keys are to be supplied
shall
be
Sultanate of Omn. Stondonl Spedfi<Wono for Rad !o Bridga Comlruc!Jon 2010
landscaping and lrrlgation
at the rate of 1 per five valves installed or

fraction thereof.
16.2.2.4
to include output surge protection to protect

controller from power surges; to include one
arrestor for each valve wire and one for the
common or ground wire: to include a master
on-off switch.
Valve Operators and Accessories
General
i.
Gate, butterfly and ball valves are to be

manuai'Y or electrically operated depending
upon size, torque applied on valve stem or es
ii.
Valves 350 mm and smaller are to be operated

manually with a maximum applied torque on
handwheel of 100 Nm.
iii.
Valves 400 - 500 mm are to be operated

manually with a maximum applied torque of
150 Nm.
iv.
Valves of higher torque are to have appropriate

thrust bearings, slides and gearboxes to fulfill
these requirements.
"
Gate valves 600 mm and larger and ba I valves

are always electrically operated using thrust
bearings, gearboxes and motor actuators.
vi.
Butterfly valves 600 mm and larger are to be

either manually or electrically operated as
shown on tha Drawings .
vL
C.bling for Irrigation Control
r.
Low voltage wiring from automatic controllers

to remote control valves shall be direct burial
type, 600 volt solid copper single conductor
wire wjth heat resistant Insulation minimum of
0.4 mm thickness. The Contractor shall submit
proposed low voltage wire routing shop
drawing for the Engineer's approval prior to
installation. The low voltage wire shall be
encased in 5 mm diameter conduit.
ii.
Medium voltage cables shall conform to the

requirements of BS 5467, IEC 502, or other
approved comparable international standards
es applicable. Cables shall be 600/1000 volt
grade, multicore, stranded copper conductor,
crosslinked polyethylene (XLPEf insulated,
uPVC oversheather type. The service cab:e for
irrigation controllers shaH be 3 core 10 mm2
minimum.
iii
Conductors shall be annealed stranded copper

in accordance with BS EN60228. Conductor
insulation shall be moisture and heat resistant,
90 degrees C, grade conforming to the relevant
parts or BS EN 50363. The cable cores unless
otherwise approved shall be colored as
follows: Single Phase System: Red (phasef,
black (neutrall, green or green/yellow (groundf.
Programme Controllers
i.
II.
Type: Solid state or hybrid {combining electromechanical and micro-electronic circuitingf,

capable of fully automatic or manua I operation
of the remote solenoid valves, with dual
programme, independent station timing, 14
day calendar dial for every day or every other
day or any sequence starts, time-setting
control up to 60 minutes per station in 2
minutes increments 23 starts per day. The
number of stations to be as indicated on the
Drawings or in the Bill of Quantities. Maximum
number of 24 VAC so'enoid valves that can be
controlled by a station is 4. Controller is to
allow for valve power output to be interrupted
without affecting the controller timers.
Operation: The controller shall have a remote

pump start circuit to activate a remote pump
start relay to run the pump during the irrigation
cycle.
Operation: The controller shall allow for
opening the first remote control valve before
operating the pump and also for closing the
last remote control valve within 15 seconds
after stopping the pump.
iv.
v.
Installation: Controller shall be installed in

pedestal weatherproof, heavy-duty, locking,
steel cabinet adequately protected. Pedestal
mount shall include terminal strips for the
qu"ck connection of cables.
Electrical Features: Accept 220 V 50/60 cycle
current; to command 24 VAC solenoid valves;
The Controller without exception shall be of

the same manufacturer as the remote control
valve.
Valve Chambers, Boxes and Markers

i.
Valves shall be installed In chambers or boxes

of suitable size as shown on drawings for easy
access. Chambers and boxes shall be complete
with access covers, ladder rungs and other
inc:dentel works.
ii.
Unless shown otherwisa on the Drawings all

chambers shall be installed on a suitable base
for proper foundation and easy leveling to
pro per grade, and al so to provide for sufficient
drainage.
iii.
Valva markers showing the reference numbers

of the valves shall be of materials and to the
dimensions, shapes and details as shown on
the Drawings.
llalve Accessories
i.
Handwheels shall be to BS 5163, of cast iron

to BS EN 1561. Handwheels are to be marked
'CLOSE' with an arrow to indicate clockwise
direction of closure. Diameters and other
shall
be
to
construct! onal
details
16-19
~
./'.._/
Mlnlatry ol
Tronpo~ &
Communl=tlon . OGRLT
~~<Landscaping and Irrigation
manufacturer's standards. Hand-whee!s are to

be supplied at a r"te of 1 in 5 valves.
fi.
Valve caps shall be to BS 5163, of cast iron or

malleable iron to BS EN 1561 and BS EN 1562
respectively. Set screw of valve cap is to be
mild steel M12.
Ill.
Operation Keys: Combination prizing bar and

lifting key type, with 1.5 m vertical bar and 0.5
m horizontal bar. Keys are to be supplied at a
rate of 1 In 5 valves.
lv.
Elrtension Spindles for Gate Valves: Steel to BS

2470 M12, hot dip galvanized to BS EN 10240,
size 18 x 18 mm for valves up to 200 mm
diameter and 24 x 24 mm for valves 250 mm to
400 mm diameter. Length for each valve size is
to suit excavation requirements. Spindles are
to have cast iron or malleable iron cap and
coupling, to BS EN 1561,and BS EN 1562,
respectively, on both sides of extension spindle
(cap for operating spindle and coupling for
connecting to valve). Set screws of caps and
couplings are to be mild steel M12.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii,
Protection Tubes: Either uPVC or cast iron.

Shape, sizes and other constructional details
are to be to manufacturer's standards and/or as
shown on the Drawings. Tubes are to have
caps cin:li ng extension spindles.
a.
Heavy grade type A for carriageways

(wheel loads up to 11.5 tons).
b.
Medium grade type M for use where

heavy
commercial
vehicles
are
exceptional.
c.
Light grade type L for use in places

Inaccessible to wheeled vehicles
Lifting Key Sets: Malleable iron, supplied at the

rate of 1 per 5 covers installed or fraction
thereof.
Guards for Underground Stop Valves: PVC,
shape and size and other constructional details
to manufacturer's standards end/or as shown
on the Drawings.
i.
Generally: Valve boxes may be glass reinforced

plastic ( GRPI or plastic.
ii.
GRP valve boxes are to be designed to suit site

conditions and loadings. GRP is to be
manufactured from E-gfass type fibers and
iii.
Inside surface of valve box is to be hard,

durable, free of tackiness and free of bulges.
dents, ridges or other defects that result in a
variation of inside dimensions of more than 3
mm from that obtained in adjacent unaffected
portions of the surface.
iv.
No glass fiber reinforcement is to penetrate

interior surface of valve box wall, and any
glass fiber reinforcement on exterior surface
must be thoroughly impregnated with resin.
v.
Glass content wi ll be determined by ignition

foss analysis in accordance with ASTM D 2584
or BS EN ISO 1172.
vi.
Plastic valve boxes are to be manufactured

from high impact, acid and heat resistant, self
extinguishing, hard, durable, low coefficient of
expansion PVC compound.
16.2.2.5
Jointing Material
Generally
Surface boxes shall be to BS 5834 Part 2.

Frames and fids are to be cast iron to BS EN
1561, studs, bolts. I"IUts and hinge pins are to
be mild steel M12, chail"ls are to be mild steel
or wrought iron and lid is to have a suitable
identification marking cast on in accordal"lce
with details give., Ol"l the drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. Boxes are to be of
the fo~owing types:
Plastic Valve Boxes
16ZO
thermosetting resin and is to incorporate a

corrosion resistant finer. Glass fibers are to be
compatible with the resins used. Liner is to
comprise an inner face being a smooth hard
suitably reinforced resin rich layer. Exterior
surface of valve box is to be resin rich.
i.
Gaskets: Elastomeric full face 3 mm thick join!

rings to ISO 4633 or BS EN 681 2 w ith
dimensions to BS 3063.
ii.
Rings: Elastomeric to ISO 4633 orBS EN 681 2

with
dimensions
to
manufacturer's
recommendations to suit type of joint required,
iii.
Bolts and Nuts: ISO metric black hexagon to BS

4190, minimum tensile strength 433 MN/m2,
maximum elongation 17%. After fixing, bolt
projection shall to be maximum 6 mm,
minimum 3 mm.
iv.
Washers: Black steel shall be to BS 4320 or ISO

887.
v.
Dielectric joints shal l have insulating gasket

between Oanges and Tenon sleeves and
washers between bolts and nuts and Oanges.
Joints are to be suitable for operating pressure
of system.
Flexible Couplings
i.
Type: Gasketed sleeve type, to allow angular

deOection and axial movement of two joined
pipe ends and to maintain permanent, leaktight joint.
ii.
Components comprise one centre sleeve, two

end followers or flanges. two rubber
compounded wedge-section gaskets and
sufficient draw bolts and nuts to properly
compress gaskets. Tightening of bolts to draw
end followers together is to compress gaskets
Sultanat "' Otnan. Stndrd Speafic11tono fat Ro.d & Bnd; ConstrLIC1ior12010
landscaping and Irrigation
in recess between centre sleeve and followers

onto pipe ends to effect positive seaL
ii i.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Size: Couplings are to have diameter

specifically supplied for and to properly fit type
of joined pipe ends. Center sleeve is to be of
adequate thickness and whole coupling
suitable for minimum working pressures
Centre sleeve and followers shall be true
circular sections. free from irregularities, flat
spots or surface defects end formed from steel
mill sections with space between sleeve and
follower designed to provide confinement of
gasket.
Bolts shall be special steel having minimum
yield strength of 2800 kg/cm2 (40,000 psi) and
ultimate strength of 4200 kg/cm 2 (60,000 psil.
Bolts shall be track-head design to prevent
turning when nut is drawn up and threads are
to be rolled w'th a nominal diameter larger
than diameter of shank. Manufacturer shall
supply Information regarding recommended
torque to wh'ch bo' ts are to ba tightened.
Gaskets shall be synthetic rubber-base
compound with other products to produce
material which will not deteriorate from age,
heat or ellposure to air and which is resilient
and able to resist cold flow of material so that
joint will remain sealed and tight indefinitely
when subjected to shock, vibration, pulsation,
temperature and adjustment of connected
pipes.
Factory Protection: Coupling shall be factory
painted internally with 10 mils coating of epoxy
and externally with red primer to AINWA C203
Type B chlorinated rubber solution compatible
with bitumen, coal tar and general paints.
Installation: Couplings are to be assembled on
site in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to ensure permanently tight joints
under all conditions of ell pansion, contraction,
shifting and settlement.).
Dismantling Couplings
i.
Type: Couplings shall ensure extensible

connection between sections of pipework, to
be mounted next to valves to enable easy
dismantling from pipework or to permit joining
pipework when butterfly valve is removed for
maintenance.
ii.
Components: Dismantling piece shall be

flanged type composed of two parts, one
sliding Into the other, and a free flange to
compress a trapezoidal section seal to ensure
water tightness. Coupling shall have locking
devices to provide elements of complete
rigidity.
Iii.
Construction: All steel with flanges class PN 10,

PN 16 or PN 25 depending upon coupling
location on pipework.
iv.
Size; Couplings shall have diameter specifically

supplied for and to properly fit type of joined
ends of pipes and valves. Coupling shall
permit tightening of end flanges without risk of
misalignment. Seal shall be locked after end
joints are tightened.
Flanged Adaptor: Ferrous

i.
Material: Cast iron to BS EN 545.
ii.
Length of adaptor shall be 200 mm for

diameters up to 150 mm, 250 mm for
diameters between 200 and 300 mm and as
approved for diameters larger than 300 mm.
iii.
Factory Protection: Coated with bitumen or

coal tarto BS 3416 or 4164 respectively.
16.2.2.6
Concrete and Metal Work
Concrete shell conform to the requirements of

Sect'on 5, clause 5.1.2, reinforcing steel to Clause 5.2.2
and reinforced concrete to Clause 5.3.2. Structural steel
and other metalwork shall conform to Section 6, Sub
section 6.2 and as shown on the drawings. Structural steel
and other metalwork shall be painted and protected in
accords nee with Section 7.
16.2.2.7
Pumping Plant
Refer to Section 17 of the Specification.
16.2.3
16.2.3.1
Ellcavation, Bedding and Backfilling
All ellcavetion and backfill shall conform to the

requirements of Sub-Sections 2 3 - 'Road Ellcavation' and
2. 7 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures'.
2
All piping under pavements shall be installed in pipe
sleeves (ductsl to permit replacement at a later date.
Sleeves for irrigation piping shall be sui fate resistant
reinforced concrete pipe as specified in Section B, Clause
8.1.2. Locations and sizes of pipe sleeves are as shown on
the Drawings. Pipe and sleeves, or sleeves only, shall be
placed prior to or during construction of the highway. Any
piping installed after completion of the highway
construction shall be placed after jacking a pipe sleeve
under the pavement. The Contractor will not be permitted
to cut into the pavement for pipe install at ion.
16.2.3.2
Pipe Laying Generally
Lowering: The Contractor shall not lower pipe into

trench until pipe bed is brought to grade and approved. He
shall use ropes, wire slings, band slings, spreader beams
etc. as recommended by manufacturer for each type of
pipe and as approved.
2
Manufactured pipe shall be handled and assembled
in accordance, with the manufacturer's instructions. When
16-21
'-...,/~
Ministry of TranspOrt
a. Communication. DGRLT
../"".~<:Landscaping and Irrigation
pipe laying is not in progress, the Contractor shell close

open ends of pipes with properly fined temporary wooden
plugs or standard caps as directed
M material shall be carefully examined for damage

3
and tested in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
before laying to the satisfaction of Engineer.
4
The Contractor sha!! examine material to ensure
internal coating or lining and outer coating or sheathing
are undamaged. If damaged, the Contractor shall make
good or dispose of as directed.
5
The Contractor shall remove dirt and other materials
before lowering the pipe into the trench and verify the
pipe ins;de is clear from construction debris before
making joint.
6
Pipe on solid ground: The Contractor shaH cut holes
in bottom of trench to allow proper jointing and for barrel
of pipe to bear evenly on solid ground for its full length.
7
Pipe on granular bedding: The Contractor shall scoop
out locally at sockets/couplings to enable pipe to rest
un~formly on barrel and adjust to exact line and level.
After testing, the Contractor shall lay and compact further
granular material in 150 mm layers or as approved to
levels shown on the Drawings.
8
The Contractor shall lay pipe on an even formation
true to grade and line, with sockets (if anyl facing up the
gradient.
9
Pipe on concret e bed or surround: The Contractor
shall provide rectangular blocks of concrete Class 30,
made in approved moulds at least 14 days before use, and
approved hardwood folding wedges. The Contractor shall
provide two concrete blocks for each pipe, set and bone
into correct level on formation bottom and lay pipe
properly centered and socketed.
10 The Contractor shall insert two hardwood folding
wedges of width equal to width of concrete block between
body of pipe and block and drive together until pipe is
brought to exact level required. The Contractor shall leave
blocks and wedges undisturbed while pipes are being
jointed end concrete bed and haunch or surround are
being placed. The Contractor shall ensure b' ocks and
wedges are of sufficient size and strength to prevent
settlement of pi pes. The Contractor shall leave sufficient
space to enable joints to be made, tested and inspected.
16.2.3.3
4
Differing pipe and fitting m eterial: The Contractor
shall joint with adaptors as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
16.2.3.4
2
Deflection of joint: The Contractor shall not deflect
flexible joints beyond maximum permissible angles given
by manufacturer and/or relevant Standards.
3
Patent detachable and flexible joi nts: The Contractor
shall strictly comply with special instructions Issued by
Line and Gradient
In open excavation: The Contractor shall provide and

maintain sight rails end boning rods properly painted to
ensure correct alignment of pipe runs. Sight rails shall be
positioned eitlter vertically above the lines of pipes or
immediately adjacent thereto. At no time shall there be
I ess then three sight rails in position on each length of
pipeline under construction to any one gradient.
In heading: The Contractor sha ll provide and
2
maintain marks to establish line and level of pipeline.
Marks are to be fixed in each working shaft and two
further marks established in each length of heading.
16.2.3.5
Floatation
Prevent loll-! Whenever water is excluded from interior

of pipe, the Contractor shall place suffic:ant backfill above
pipe to prevent floatation.
2
The Contractor shall remove: any pipe that has
floated, correct the bedding and relay.
16.2.3.6
Pipe Built Into Structures
Treatment of external surface: The Contractor shall

thoroughly clean outside surface of pipes to be builti n
immediately before installation. The Contractor shall
remove protective coating to meta l pipes, where ordered.
The Contractor shall roughen clay and concrete pipes as
directed. The Contractor shall paint plastic pipes with
appropriate solvent cement and sprinkle with dry coarse
sand whilst wet The Contractor shall cut away sheathing
from sections to be built-in end after installation restore
protection up to external face of structure with approved
bituminous material.
2
Flexible joints: The Contractor shall provide two
flexible joints or flexible patented joints adjacent to
structures. The Contractor shall place first joint not more
than one pipe diameter from face of structure and second
not more than the following distances away from first:
i.
Pipelines not exceeding 450 mm: 2 pipe

diameters.
ii.
Pipelines over 450 mm and not exceeding 1000

mm: 1.2 m.
iii.
Pipelines over 1000 mm: 1.8 m.
Jointing
Manufacturer' s instructions shall be followed

regarding placement of bedding and backfilling,
cleanliness of joint surfaces, lubricant used, correct
location of components, provision of correct gaps
between end of spigot and back of socket for flexible joints
etc.
16-22
manufacturer's of proprietary joints when laying and

jointing.
16.2.3.7
Field Testing: Generally
Provision of test equipment: All items for tests shall

be provided on site before the test I.e. pressure gauges.
instruments, water etc...
2
The Contractor shd carry out tests In the presence of
the Engineer's Representative.
Sultant cf Oman, Sto!'l<!ard Spec:ifioot~ot~tlor Rold lie Bnd; C..l\ltruaion 2010
3
Fittings and joints: The Contractor shall permanently
anchor fittings before testing and leave all joints exposed
for chacki ng.
4
Test sections: The Contractor shall limit test sections
to not more than 500 m.
5
Test sections: The Contractor shall test pressure lines
between valve chambers whenever possible.
6
Test sections: No testing shall be carried out against
or through the pressure reducing valves. The setting of the
pressure reducing valves shall not be changed for testing
purposes.
16.2.3.9
Vi sua I Inspection Test
Timing: The Contractor shall cerry out test after total

backfilling of I angth under test.
2
l.imit of length to be tested at one time is three fulllength pipes unless otherwise approved.
3
Apparatus: The Contractor shall use rubber tyred
bogies which do not damage lining of pipe and an
adequate supply of electric lamps.
4
The Contractor shall check joints by means of feelers
to ensure rubber rings are correctly located.
7
Test plug: The Contractor shall secure end of main
and test pi ug by struts.
5
The Contractor shall check pipe barrel for visible
cracks.
B
Closed valve: The Contractor shall not test against a
closed valve unless there is no acceptable alternative.
16.2.3.10 Deflection Tests for GAP Pipes
9
The Contractor shall apply pressure by manually
operated test pump or, in the case of large diameter mains,
by power driven test pump, if approved.
The Contractor shall conduct deflection tests for GAP

pipes as required by the Engineer at 3 stages. Deflection
shall be measured at the spigot end at mid point and at
socket end.
10 The Contractor shall examine exposed joints and

repel r visible leaks.
11 Failure: Should a test fail, the Contractor shall locate
leak and replace or make good defective pipe or replace
and make good faulty joint and retest main.
12 Records: The Contractor shall keep test records in an
approved form and hand original copy to the Engineer
immediately after completion of test.
13 The Contractor shall carry out hydrostatic test while
pipeline is partially backfilled.
18.2.3.8
Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines
2
Stage 1: at completion of primary backfill (deflection
at this stage should be below 0.5%).
3
Stage 2: at final
deflection 2.5%).
backfill (Maximum allowable
4
Stage 3: six months after final backfill (maximum
allowable deflection 4.0%].
5
Pipes not passing the deflection tests at Stage 2 or
Stage 3 will be removed and replaced.
16.2.3.11
Flushing
Procedure shall be to AWWA C651.
The pipeline shall be filled slowly with water from the

lowest point. After filling with water, absorbent pipes shall
be allowed to stand for at least 24 hours before testing to
2
The Contractor shall provide equipment, gauges,
temporary connections needed for flushing.
The
Contractor shall arrange with the Employer to draw water
from existing sources.
2
Entrapped air shall be bled and pressurizing shall
then proceed until the specified test pressure is reached in
the lowest part of the pipeline section under test. Further
quantities of entrapped air shall be bled while the pressure
is being raised.
3
The Contractor shall flush mains in sections as
3
Unless otherwise specified, the test pressure shall be
equal to 1.5 limes the maximum working pressure of the
pipeline as shown on the Drawings or as determined by
the Engineer on Site, but shall in no case exceed 75% of
the factory hydrostatic test pressure.
4
The test pressure shall be maintained for one hour by
pumping using a separate test pump. Pumping shall then
be stopped for 2 hours, at the end of which time the line
sha II be re-pressurized to the original test pressure and the
volume of water pumped into the line recorded.
5
The pipeline shall be deemed to have failed the test if
visible leaks are detected (regardless of leakage being
within the allowable specified limit) or if the volume of
water pumped to restore original test pressure after the
period when pumping was stopped exceeds 0.1 liter/day
per km of pipe per mm of pipe diameter for each 3 kg/cm 2
of applied pressure for other pipe material.
4
The Contractor shall use washout valves and fire
hydrants to drain flushing water.
5
The Contractor shall flush main until effluent is clean
and then clean as directed. 1 to 2 times volume of pipe is
usually required for such flushing.
16.2.3.12 Field Protection and Coating

Iron pipes: Polyethylene encasement shall be to
ANSIIAWWA C105, Section 4.1 minimum thickness 200
microns and/or in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
2
Patented detachable and flexible joints and flanged
connections: The Contractor shall protect metal joints with
mastic compound and protective tape in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions and provide a minimum
overlap of 55%. The Contractor shall press out firmly all
folds and irregularities.
16-23 .
~~
Mlnl1try "' Trnnopon & C<>mmunlc,.tlono OGRlT
16.2.3.13 Irrigation Control
16.2.3.16 Maintenance Program
The 24V electrically operated irrig11tion solenoid

valves shall be controlled by the irrigation program
controller and positioned as shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed Maintenance

Program for approval, at least 2 months prior to putting
the irrigation system into service. This Program shall
include an Operation and Maintenance Organization Chan
and aDactivities incidental thereto.
2
The controllers shall be interlocked with the pumping
system to ensure that the pumps operate after the
irrigation valves are open.
3
The irrigation control electric cables. connecting the
irrigation program controDer to the solenoic:l valves shall
be copper PVC insulated and PVC sheathed. The sizes of
cables shall be commensurate with the distances between
the controller and valves, operatJng pressure and
manufacturer's recommendations. The cables shall be
approved for ground feeders directly buried and rated for
600/l,OOOV. They shall be clipped to the main water
pipework. Multi-runs of cables shall be bunched and tied
together at one m intervals using PVC tape and clipped to
the underside of the water pipework at 2 m intervals using
plastic straps.
To allow full flexibility of the system, each valve shall
4
have a separate control cable such that a ny valve
sequence control may be re-adjusted.
5
Where required, cable junction boxes shall be fitted.
These she~ be purpose made boxes fitted with fixed
connectors and suitably labeled. The boxes shall be fined
with glands and gasketed lid to ensure a fully dust tight
and weatherproof enclosure to 1Pti5.
6
Each solenoid valve shall be fitted with fixed
terminals inside an IP65 box and suitable for wiring from
the valve to be connected.
7
All cable cores shall be fitted with marker ferrules at
each end for ease of identification, and all valves shall be
fitted with identification labels.
16.2.3.14 Contract Requirements
The Contractor shall prepare working drawings of the
irrigation electrical system including all necessary
calculations and these shall be submitted in triplicate for
approval prior to commencing the Works on Site.
2
The Contractor shall submit, In triplicate, full details
of all equipment to be supplied for approval before firm
orders for the equipment Jre placed.
3
The Contractor shall submit As-Built" drawings of
the insta llation on completion.
4
The Contractor shall maintain the installation
throughout the Period of Mainte nance a nd sha ll keep a
detailed record of all malntena"ce and repair action taken.
16.2.3.15 Documentation
On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall
supply record, operation and mainte nance data. A single
llne diagram of the electrical installation shall be framed
and mounted in each pumping st1tion.
2
All equipment and circuits shall be properly labeled
a nd reference shall be included on the single line diagram,
1&-2
2
During the Period of Maintenance, the Contractor
shall maintain in proper operating condition all irrigation
equipment, pipes, valves, pumping stations, and
appurtenances. A record shall be kept of a n maintenance
and repair activities throughout the Period of Maintenance,
including the date, localion and type of work performed.
all repairs and replacement, activities and equipment
relevant to the Maintenance works. This record shall be
complete end acceptable to the Engineer.
16.2.4
Trench excavation and backfilling shall be measured

and paid for as indicated in Section 2, Clause 2.8.4.
2
Pipes shall be measured in linear metars of laid pipe
of each type, class and size, measured as a stra lght line
between the centers of consecutive coupling sections. The
distance between the two centers of the couplings on both
sides of any fitting or valve shall be included as pipe
length. No allowance will be made for cut ends and waste.
3
No separate measurement will be made for setting
out laying and bedding in trenches or fixing to structures,
thrust blocks. sleeves and ducts, jointing material.
couplings of any type, special fittings, connecting to
equipment and chambers, testing, ~ning and painting and
all other items and work to provide a fully functional
system as specified. all of which is considered to be
subsidiary work , the cost of which is deemed to be
Included in the rates stated in the Bill of Qu;mtities for
pipes
Valves shall be measured by the number of each type
4
and size installed completed and accepted. No separate
measurement shall be made for connections to pipes or
equipment, ancillary fittings. bolts nuts and gaskets, fining
and painting, loose keys spindles and hand wheels, valve
boxes or any other items required for a fully functional
unit, all of which is considered to be subsidiary work, the
cost of which is deemed to be included in the rates and
prices for the relevant items.
5
Irrigators, including sprinklers, bubblers and emitters
(excluding drip emitter distribution tubingl shall be
measured by the number of each type and size installed,
completed and accepted. The rates stated in the Bill of
Quantities are deemed to include, as appropriate, the
costs stated in item 4, above.
Drip emitter distribution tubing shall be measured by
6
the linear meter of each size installed, completed and
accepted. The rates stated in the Bill of Quantities shall be
deemed to include, as appropriate, the costs stated in item
3 above.
Sultanote o I Oma" Stnd&~d Spe<:ific~o!ll lor Rood & Sridgo Co0$tr"<tlon 2010
7
Irrigation program controllers shell be measured by
the number of each type or specification reference
installed. The rates stated In the Bill of Quantities shall be
deemed to include for all items and work required for a
fully operational system, including transport, electrical
installations and civil work.
8
Where spares are ordered by the Engineer, they will
be measured by number and paid for at the rates stated In
the Bill of Quantities for each type, size and class of spare
part authorized by the Engineer, purchased by the
Contractor, handed over. and accepted.
16.2.5
Basis of Payment

unit rates for the various items listed in the Bill of
Quantities, which unit rates shall be full compensation for
supplying, fabricating, connecting and testing, and for
labor, transport, materials, equipment, tools, and other
items necessary for the completion of the Work as
specified in Sub-section 16.2.
16.2.6
Pipe (type, class and diameter)
lin.m.
ii
Valves (type and diameter)
nr.
iii
Irrigation Program Controller (type)
nr.
iv
Irrigators (type and size)
nr.
Drip Emitter Distribution Tubing
vi
(type and diameter)
lin.m.
Spares for lrrigati on System (type,

class and size)
nr.
HiUi
Ref.
Title
17.1
Scope
17.1.1
Deactlptlon
17-1
17.2
Materials
17-1
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
17.2.4
17.2.6
1'7.2.5.1
17.2.5.2
17.2.5.3
17.2.5.4
17.2.6
17.2.6.1
17.2.6.2
17.2.6.3
17.2.6.4
17.2.6.5
17.2.7
17.2.8
17.2.9
Mlltlllwork Generally
BcKts, Inserts and Culhlona
Coven and Framee
Painting Metalwork
Piping and Appurtenance
Pipes and Fittings
Pipe Ac:ctlssories
Jointing Material
Valvu and Accu&oriea
Gate Valves
Butterfly Valves
Check Valves
Control Valves
Sundries
Method of Menui'Bment
S.ala of Payment
Items In the Bill of Ouanthlee
17.3
Equipment
Page No.
17.3.:1
General Requlrementl
Pumpe
17.3.2
17.3.2.1
Submersible Drainage Pump
17.3 2.2
Horizontal Pumps
17.3.2.3
High Pressure Booster Pumping Set
Employing Membrane Tank
17.3.2.4
H gh Pressure Booster Pumping Set
Employing Var~ ble Speed Pumps
17.3.2.5
Duplex Sump Pumps
17.3.3
Surge Tanka
17.3.4
Ovemead Mllterial H.ndllng
Equipment
17.3.4.1
Monorail Syostem
17-1
17-1
171
17-1
17-1
17-1
171
171
172
17-2
17-3
17-3
17-3
173
17-4
17-5
17-6
17-5
17-5
17-6
17-6
17-6
176
17-7
17-7
17~
179
17-10
17-10
17-10
Ref.
Title
17.3.5
17.3.5.1
17.3.6
17.3.6.1
17.3.6.2
17.3.6.3
17.3.7
17.3.8
17.3.9
Fertlllz.tlon Equipment
f;BI'tilizer Injection Equipment
Instrumentation and Controla
General
Level Controller Type IIC-1
Pressure Gau~s
Method of Meuuremant
Baals of Payment
hems In the Bill of Quantities
17.4
17.4.1
17.4.2
17.4.3
17.4.4
Pipe Llylng and Jointing

Valve lnstalllltlon
Pump lnstalletlon
Method of Measurement end Balis of
Payment
Page No.
17w11
11-1 1
17 11
17-1 1
17-11
17-11
17 11
17-12
17-12
17-12
17-12
17-12
11 13
17-13
Sultllnota of Om11n. S:o"ldord Specifot:~lonoiOt' Rood rt Sndgo Conttruc.ion 2010
Pumping Stations)
17.1
Scope
17.2.5
Piping and Appurtenances
17.1.1
Description
17.2.5.1
This Section describes requirements for the supply

and installation of the pumping stations, including pipe
works, pumps and other equipment, motor, control
centers, automatic controls, structural steel and other
supports, connections, valves. appurtenances and
ancillary materials, as shown on the Drawings or as
ordered by the Engineer.
Materials shall be supplied with the manufacturer's

certificate for each delivery, stating that products comply
with and have been factory tested in accordance with
specified Standards.
2
Unless otherwise specified in the relevant Standard,
products must have legibly cast, stamped or indelibly
painted on, the following marks, as appropriate:
Manufacturer's name, initials and identification
mark.
2
The descriptions of materials, equipment and
construction requirements given in this Section are
generic. Particular requirements for each pumping station
shall be as stated in the Special Specification and on the
Drawings.
Nominal diameter.
Class designation.
lniti als and number of relevant Standard
17.2
Materials
Length of pipe if shorter than standard length.
17.2.1
Metalwork Generally
Date of manufacture.
Angle of bends in degrees.
Metalwork Includes all purpose-made items shown

on the Drawings, including stairs, ladders, equipment
supports and the like.
2
Staircases, ladders and safety cages, shall be
fabricated from galvanized mild steel or aluminum alloy
as shown or stated in the Special Specification ..
Submersed steel structures shall be fabricated from
stainless steel.
17.2.2
3
Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall arrange to collect samples of the materials selected
by the Engineer, and transport them to, and have them
tested by an independent Laboratory.
17.2.5.2
Ductile iron pressure pipe: flanged pipe shall

conform to BS EN 545, Class K 9.
Bolts, Inserts and Cushions
Masonry expansion bolts approved types and shall

be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
ii.
iii.
2
U-bolts shall be welded to pipes at points of contact
and bolted to structural angle frame securely fixed to
structure.
3
Embedded
concreting.
inserts
shall
be
installed
during
Covers and Frames
Cast iron covers and frames shall be to BS EN 124

Grade B, heavy duty rectangular cover and frame. coated.
locking, solid top.
2
Steel covers and frames shall be fabricated steel
checkered plate, single seal lift out type, zinc protected,
and capable of supporting a load of 5 tonnes.
17.2.4
Painting Metalwork
All ferrous meta I surfaces shall be given one shop

coat of rust preventative paint primer and two coats of an
approved oil base or alkyd paint applied on Site, as
Fittings shall conform to BS EN 545, pressure

rating suitable to sustain the system working
pressure.
Flanged pipes shall have screwed-on or caston
flanges to sustain the system working pressure.
Flanges shall conform to BS EN 1092 with
pressure rating suitable for the system working
pressure.
Factory protection for water supply pipe and fittings:

i.
4
Spring cushions shall be used where a horizontal
pipe is subject to considerable vertical movement or
vibration.
17.2.3
Pipes and Fittings
Coated internally and externally by dipping, or

other method, using hot applied coal tar based
material to BS 4164 or hot applied bitumen
based material to BS EN 13000.
Factory protection for sewerage pipe and fittings:
i.
ii.
Internally: epoxy lined to ASTM C541. Lining

shall be held by centrifugal action.
Externally: coated using hot applied coal tar
based material to BS 4164 or cold applied
bitumen coating to BS 3416.
4
uPVC pressure pipe: pipe shall conform to BS 3506
Class C with outside diameters to BS ISO 119221.
I.
Fittings shall conform to BS EN 1452, injection

molded type joints shall be solvent welded to BS
EN 1452 Part 1.
17 1
'V
~
MlniDtry of Tronapart & Cotnmunicotk>n
DGflLT
~
~<(_Pumping Stations
17.2.5.3
Pipe Accessories
Ferrous flexible pipe couplings: types shall be

straight couplings to bridge two plain ended pipes of
same outside diameter and stepped couplings for pipes of
large diametrical differences. Couplings shall be with
center register.
i.
ii.
iii.
Material shall be malleable Iron conforming to

BS EN 1562 grade 20/10 or rolled steel to BS 970
060A12 with bolts to BS 970EN3A and rubber
rings to BS EN 681.
Coupllngs shall be able to take 6 deg. angular
deflections for sizes up to 600 mm diameter
reducing to 2 deg. for sizes up to 1800 mm
diameter.
Couplings shall be factory coated with cold
applied bitumen or hot applied coal tar
conforming to BS 3416 orBS 4164 respectively,
thickness 1 mil.
2
Ferrous flanged adaptors: material shall be cast iron
body conforming to BS EN 1561 grade 14 or mild steel
plate to BS 10025 and malleable cast iron flange to BS EN
1562 grade 20/tO or rolled steel to BS 970EN3A and
rubber rings to BS EN 681 .
i.
ii.
Length of adaptor shall be 200 mm for diameters

up to 150 mm, 250 mm for diameters between
200 and 300 mm and as approved by Engineer
for diamet ers larger than 300 mm.
Adaptors shall be factory coated with cold
applied bitumen or hot applied coal tar
conforming to BS 3416 orBS 4164 respectively.
3
Flexib' e pipe connections: flexible connections shall
be seamless bronze tubing w ith annular corrugations
covered wit h high t ensile bronze braid suitable for the
system working pressure.
Connect1ons shall have screwed ends for pipes
50 mm diameter and under and flanged ends for
plpes over 50 mm diameter.
Center sleeve and followers shall be true circular

sections, free from irregularities, flat spots or
surface defects and formed from steel mill
sections with space between sleeve and follower
designed to provide confinement of gasket.
iv. Bolts shall be special steel having minimum yield
strength of 2800 kg/em' and ultlm1te strength of
4200 kgfcm2 Bolts shall be track-head design to
prevent turning when nut is drawn up and
threads shall be rolled with a nominal diameter
larger than diameter of shank. Manufacturer
must
supply
Information
regarding
recommended torque to which bolts must be
tightened.
v. Gaskets
shall be
synthetic
rubber-base
compound with other products to produce
material which will not deteriorate from age.
heat or exposure to air and which is resilient and
able to resist cold flows so that the joint will
remain sealed and tight indefloflitely when
pul,sation.
subjected to shock. vibration.
temperature and adjustment of connected pipes.
vi. Coupling shall be factory painted internally with
200 microns coating of epoKY and externally with
red primer conforming to AWWA 203 Type B
chlorinated rubber solution compatible with
bitumen, coat tar and general paints.
vii. Couplings shall be assembled on site in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
ensure permanently tight joints under all
conditions of expansion, contraction, shifting
and settlement.
iii.
5
Dismantling couplings shall have an extensible
connection between pipe sections. and be mounted next
to valves to enable easy dismantling from pipe work or to
permit pipe joining when butterfly valve is removed for
maintenance.
i.
Flexib' e couplings: gasket sleeve type, shall allow

4
angular deflection and axial movement of two joined pipe
ends and to maintain permanent, leak-tight joint.
i.
ii.
172 .
Components shall comprise one center sleeve,

two end followers or flanges, two rubbercompounded wedge-section
gaskets
and
sufficient draw bolts and nuts to properly
compress gaskets. Tightening of bolts to draw
end followers together must compress gaskets in
recess between center sleeve and followers onto
pipe ends to affect positive seal.
Couplings shall have diameter specifically
pipe ends. Center sleeve shall be of adequate
thickness and whole coupling suitable for
minimum worklng pressures shown on the
Drawings.
ii.
iii.
17.2.5.4
Dismantling piece shall be Hanged type

composed of two parts, one sliding into the
other, and a free flange to compress a
trapezoidal section seal to ensure water
tightness. Coupling shall have locking devices to
provide elements of complete rigidity.
Construction shall be all steel with flanges
having rating matching adjoining pipes.
Couplings shall have diameter specifically
ends of pipes and valves. Coupling shall permit
tightening of end flanges without risk of
misalignment. Seal shall be locked after end
joints are tightened.
Jointing Material
Gaskets shall be elastomeric full face 3 mm thick

joint rings conforming to BS EN 681 wit h d imensions
conforming to BS 3063.
Sultonnt" of Ornn. Statldrd Specifi..-,on lor llo.Jd r. Bndgo Constn.r.;on 2010
Pumping Stations)
2
Rings shall be elastomeric conforming to BS EN 681.
Dimensions to manufacturer's recommendations to suit
type of joint required.
3
Bolts and nuts shall be ISO metric black hexagon
conforming to BS 4190, minimum tensile strength 433
MN/m2, maximum elongation 17%. After fixing, bolt
projection shall be maximum 6 mm, minimum 3 mm.
4
Washers shall be black steel conforming to BS 4320.
5
Dielectric Joints shall have insulating neoprene or
phenol gasket between flanges and phenol or
polyethylene sleeves and washers between bolts, nuts
and flanges. Joints shall be suitable for the operating
pressure of the system.
17.2.6
Valves and Accessories
17.2.6.1
Gate Valves
Cast iron gate valves: type shall conform to BS 5163,

inside screw. solid wedge. resilient seated, bolted bonnet,
non-rising stem type, suitable for the system working
pressure.
2
Material of component parts shall be from basic or
alternative materials listed in BS 5163.
3
End connections shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Flanged end connections shall conform to BS EN 1092.
Plain end connections shall be machined to suit joints
specified for adjoining pipes.
4
Casting surfaces shall be given an initial coat of
protective paint immediately after shot blasting and a
second coat on assembly. Protective coating shall be hot
applied coal tar or cold applied bitumen conforming to BS
4164 orBS 3416 respectively. Thickness of coat shall be 1
mil.
17.2.6.2
Butterfly Valves
Cast iron butterfly valves: type shall conform to BS
EN 593 with resilient seating suitable for system working

pressure. Component parts shall be from basic materials
listed in 85 EN 593 Tab!e 3.
2
For valves 100 mm and smaller, operation shall be by
lever arm. For sizes above 100 mm and up to 250 mm,
operation shall be by hand wheel. For valves 300 mm and
larger shall be gear operated.
3
Casting surfaces shall be given an initial coat of
protective paint immediately after shot blasting and a
second coat on assembly. Protective coating shall be hot
applied coal tar or cold applied bitumen conforming to BS
4164 orBS 3416 respectively. Thickness of coat shall be 25
microns.
17.2.8.3
Cast iron body shall conform to ASTM 126 Class

B or cast steel body to ASTM 21 6 Class WCB
depending upon working pressure and with
stainless steel seat ring to ASTM A 157 C9 noncorrosion shaft for attachment of weight and
lever and complete non-corrosion shock less
chamber to ASTM B 62. Valva shall be tight
seating and seat ring shall be removable.
Cushion chamber shall be attached to side of
valve body and constructed with a piston
operating in a chamber to permit valve to
operate without hammering action. Shock
absorption shall be by dry air and cushion
chamber shall be arranged for closing speed to
be adjustable to meet service requirements.
Valve disc shall be of same material as valve
body and shall be suspended from a stainless
steel type 303 shaft connected to the cushion
chamber through a stuffing box.
ii. End connections shall be as shown on the
Drawings. Flanged end connections shall
conform to BS EN 1092.
iii. Valves shall be factory protected with an Internal
coating of epoxy to a thickness of 120 microns
and external coating of epoxy and nickel plating
to a thickness of 120 microns.
i.
2
Cast iron check valves: type shall conform to BS EN
12334, swing straight panarn, for vertical use and with
pressure rating suitable for the system working pressure.
Material of component parts shall be from basic
materials listed in BS EN 12334 Tabla 5, under
'copper alloy faced'.
ii. Seating or facing rings shall be renewable. An
arrow showing direction of flow shall be visible
from outside and cast integral with the valva
housing.
iii. End connections shall be as shown on the
Drawings. Flanged end connections shall be to
BS EN 1092.
iv. Casting surfaces shall be given at factory an
initial coat of protective paint immediately after
that blasting and a second coat on assembly.
Protective coating shall be hot applied coal tar or
cold applied bitumen to BS 4164 or BS 3416
respectively. Thickness of coat shall be 1 mm.
i.
Silent check valves: type shall be non-slam, spring

3
loaded and suitable for installation in any position.
i.
Check Valves
ii.
Cushioned check valves: type shall be cushioned
type, counter-weighted metal seated check with attached
cushion chamber to permit valva to close without slam or
bang. Valve shall have a pressure rating suite ble for the
iii.
Valves 50 mm diameter and under shall be

screwed, with bronze body, seat and disc, 18-8
stainless steel spring, with pressure rating
suitable for the system working pressure.
Valves over 50 mm diameter shall be flanged,
with cast iron body, bronze seat and disc, 18-8
stainless steel spring, with pressure rating
suitable for the system working pressure.
Valves shall have straight guided disc with two
point bearing. Wearing parts including discs,
~~ M-o~try of Tronpart &
C(Jtnmunlcot,ans
OGRLT
.../"'.~yumping Stations
iv.
17.2.6.4
seats and other guide bushings shall be

replaceable.
Valves shall have flow area in excess of pipe area
for minimum pressure drop.
Control Valves
General: pump control valves, and surge control

valves, shall be automatic, hydraulically operated, pilot
controlled, piston actuated, single seated, globe or angle
pattern as shown on the Drawings, consisting of valve
body, piston assembly and cover with the piston assembly
as the only moving part. Valves shall be siZed for pressure
rating shown on the Drawings and shall be the product of
a reputable, approved manufacturer.
Valve body shall be cast steel to ASTM A216
WCB standard, flanged. with flange rating as
shown on the Drawings and containing a
removable seat insert. Main valve trim shall be
bronze to ASTM B 61.
ii. Piston assembly shall be fully guided on its
outside diameter by long stroke stationary Vports downstream of seating surface to minimize
Piston shall be
consequence of throttling.
bronze to ASTM B 62 with seal of stainless steel
toAISI140.
ill. Repairs shall be possible without removing valve
from line. Valve shall have no external packing
glands or stuffing boxes.
iv. Valve shall be supplied complete with factory
fitted pilot valves, small interconnecting piping
and accessories to perform required functions.
Pilot control system shall be stainless steel to
AISI type 303.
v. Factory protection shall be internal coating of
epoxy to a thickness of 120 microns and external
coating o f epoxy and nickel plating to a thickness
of 120 microns.
vi. Provide manufacturer with necessary and
pertinent data for setting control valves, at
factory, to required settings to suit individual
conditions of different pumping stations.
vii. Prior to shipping valves from factory, submit
shop drawings for approval giving factory
settings, range of adjustments. control diagram.
w iring diagram, size, arrangement and other
pertinent data necessary for approval by the
Engineer of every control valve ln the system.
Submit with the shop drawings detailed
i nstructions for field adjustment and setting,
installation, startUp end proper operation,
viii. Each control valve shall be tested individually at
factory and certified test results submitted.
ix. Provide the services of a specialized factory
techn' cian or engineer to set, test. adjust and
commission the control valves as specified.
x. Control valve pressure rating shall be suitable to
i.
17-4 .
2
Surge control valves: type shall be straight pattern,
specifically designed to prevent excessive surge pressures
In event of power faiture. Valve shall have pilots to cause
valve to open on either low pressure or high pressure
wave. Under normal operation, valve acts as relief valve
which can be set to open at any pressure above normal
operating pressure. At the same time, valve shell open at
any set pressure below its normal operating pressure.
Function shall be such that on power failure,
valve opens on initial down-surge in pressure (if
this surge is not already controlled by surge
chamber) and remains open until high pressure
wave returns end passes thro\Igh valve without
generating a large up-surge in pressure. After
high pressure wave has passed, valve closes
slowly in 2 minutes to prevent further pressure
surges. Valve also opens on high pressure
unless surge has been attenuated by surge
chambers.
ii. Operation shall be on differential piston principle
such that area on underside of piston is no tess
then pipe area, end area on upper surface of
piston is of greater area. Valve shaD operate in
1ny position without assistance of springs.
iii. Valve size shall be IS shown on the drawings and
pressure rating shall be suitable for system
operating and ant!cipated maximum surge
pressure. Valve shall be of extra heavy
construction throughout with body of cast steel
to ASTM A216 WCB and flanges conforming to
ANSI st1111derds. Internal trim shall be bronze to
ASTM B 62. Piston shall be guided on its outside
diameter by long-stroke stationary V-ports
downstream of seating surface to minimize
Piston shall be
consequence of thronling.
bronze and pilots stainless steel. Valve shall
contain rubber removable seat tnsert.
iv . Repairs shall be possible without removing valve
from line. Valve shall have no external packing
glands or stuffing boxes.
v. Pilots and accessories shall include the following:
i.
Low pressure pilot.

Pressure relief pilot.
Flow lim;ting device.
Needle valves.
Strainer.
Check valve.
Valve position indicator.
Pipe plug for pressure gauge.
Shut-off cocks.
Interconnecting copper tubing and unions.
Pilot mounting bracket.
Other
accessories
manufacturer.
recommended
by
Sultanule of Oman, Sr.ncbrd Specf1<11tionsiOt Rood!< Bndgt~ Cctnrtrue-.;an :i!'J1 0
Pumping Stations)
vi
17.2.6.5
Factory protection shall be complete epoxy

coating for protection against corrosion.
(iii)
(iv)
Sundri es
Hose Bibb: shell be a chrome plated metal bibcock,

15 mm male back inlet connection and 15 mm male, hose
thread outlet, with 15 mm chrome plated metal hose
coupling female threaded.
17.2.7
(v}
(vi)
(vil)
Metalwork including but not lim'ted to staircases,

ladders, and safety cages; bolts. inserts and cushions;
covers and frames; shall each be measured by number of
each item installed. Rates shall include for factory and on
site tests, fixings, preparing, priming and painting.
2
Pipes shall be measured by linear meter of each typa
and size of pipe. Measurement shall be of the center line
of pipes (overall), couplings, fittings and branches. Rates
for pipes shall be deemed to include all related pipe work,
including but not necessarily limited to:
Flexible
pipe
couplings
adaptors
and
connections.
Header pipes and dismantling coup ings,
Purpose made pipes and purpose made fittings.
Everything necessary for jointing.
Bends. tees, joints, unions, flanges, and pipe
fittings including cutting and jointing pipe to
fittings, valves end equipment
Pipe supports and support assemblies, hangers,
clips, anchors and guides.
Wrapping and waterproofing of underground
and or exposed pipes.
Pipe sleeves and packing.
Pipe cleaning priming and painting.
All other pipe and pipe work ancillaries'
necessary required or reasonably inferred.
3
Valves shall be measured by the number of each
type installed. Rates shall be deemed to include for factory
and on-site test, tests at Independent laboratories, all
fixing and jointing accessories.
17.2.8
Basis of Payment

provided above shall be paid for at the unit rates for the
items describes In the Bill of Quantities and shall include
for furnishing all materials, installation, civil, mechanical,
electrical, piping and miscellaneous works, testing,
commissioning, and putting into operation, maintenance
and all labor, transport, equipment, tools, supplies and
work as specified.
(viii]
(ix]
(x)
uPVC pressure
(state size)
Gate
size)
Valves
pipe
(lin.m.)
(state
(nr.)
Butterfly Valves (state

size)
(nr.)
Check
size)
(nr.)
Valves
(state
Silent Type Check

Valves (state size)
(nr.)
Control Valves (state

size]
(nr.)
Surge Control Valves

(state size]
(nr.)
Cushioned Type Check

Valves (state size)
(nr.)
17.3
Equipment
17.3.1
Materials and products: materials for pumps shall be

suitable for pump operating conditions and adequate for
total heads to which pumps are subjected. Corrosion
resistant materials shall be used. Assembly arrangements
shall include isolation of dissimilar metals to avoid
galvanic Interaction.
2
Pumps shall have factory plugged connections for
casing vent, drain and suction and discharge pressure
gauges.
3
Impellers and rotating assemblies shall be statically
and dynamically balanced at factory.
4
Packing rings shall be installed in alternata layers
staggered 90 degrees. Packing shall be tightened for seal
while permitting prescribed amount of leakage for
lubrication.
5
Pumps shall have shaft packing or mechanical seals
compatible with pump design and nature of liquid
pumped
in
accordance
with
manufacturer's
recommendations or as specified.
6
Pump operating point of specified flow and head
shall fall near the point of maximum efficiency as obtained
from manufacturer's published data.
7
Horsepower rating of pump drive motor shall ensure
non-overloading of motor throughout capacity range of
pump for Impeller diameter selected.
17.2.9
(i) Metal works (Type)

(iii Ductile Iron pressure pipe
(state size)
Lump Sum
Electric motors shall be suitable for available electric

current voltage and frequency. Motor speeds shall not
exceed 1450 rpm for 50 Hz. Motors shall be designed to
operate in 50"C ambient temperature.
(lin.m.)
175
~
~
MJniatry of Tronsport & CQmmunicnt!on DGRLT
~~yumping Stations
9
Shop drawlngs; The Contractor submit shop
drawings for each pump for approval, prior to shipment
from factory, as follows:
Certified performance curves showing job
number, customer and customer order number,
pump designation number shown on the
drawings, date of manufacture, model number,
pump size, Impeller diameter. Impeller type,
maximum impeller diameter pump can
accommodate, rpm, noise data, flow.head
characteristic curve, consumed horsepower
curve and pump efficiency curve.
Pump cross-sectional drawings showlnQ major
components with parts numbers t nd parts list
Pump outline dimensional drawing showing
overall dimens:ons, location of foundation bolt
holes and sizes, location and rating of suction
and discharge nozzles.
Recommended list of spare parts, where not
specified elsewhere.
Installation,
operation
instruction manuaL
and
maintenance
Details and wiring diagrams of factory supplied

pump controllers, starters, controls or other
electrical device or accessory.
Special instructions for field Installation and
connection of factory or field supplied electrical
device, control or accessory.
10 Shop tests: The Contractor shall submit for each
pump, certified results of shop tests made by
manufacturer, prior to shipment from factory, as follows:
Performance test throughout capacity range of
pump with specified design operating point
Indicated
on
pump
flow-held
clearly
characteristic curve.
Hydrostatic pressure test to 1 112 tim es shut-off
pressure of pump.
11 Pump test
information:
report
shall
include
the following
Pump data: pump designation number shown on

the Drawings, model number. serial number,
customer order number, flow. suction and
discharge pressures, shut-off pressure, rpm and
brake horsepower.
Motor data: make, model number. serial number,
horsepower rating. rpm, voltage, phase,
frequency, class of insulation, allowable
temperature rise, fuH loed amperes, locked rotor
amperes and actual voltage t nd amperes at all
test poims.
Starter data: make, model number. size, heater
sizes, ampere rati ng, line voltage, control voltage
and frequency.
17-6
17.3.2
Pumps
17.3.2.1
Submersible Drainage Pump
Non-clog, centrifugal, submersible, with guide-rails,

quick-disconnect type, suitable for drainage water
application and designed to permit quick and easy ground
level removal of pump from pit for service or inspection
without disconnecting or disturbing discharge piping and
electrical connection. Pump design shall permit pump to
be automatically co11nected to discharge elbow in a tight
and leak-proof manner without axial or lateral movement
and w ithout further adjustment. Pump shall be designed
t o withstllnd dry running.
2
Each pump shall be supplied complete with the
following:
Close-coupled
motor,
submersib!e
vertical
electric
Required length of durable multi-conductor

waterproof electric cab!e.
Special quick disconnect flange elbow with
Integral bracket for floor mounting and lower
guide rail holder.
Required length of stainless steel guide ralls.
Upper guide rail brocket.
Rail guided lifting assembly.
Lifting yoke and stainless steel chain for raising
and lowering pump.
3
Cosing shall be cast iron volute, to ASTM A48 Class
358 or 8S EN 1561 Grade 260, horizontally split.
Passageways shall permit smooth flow of liquid served
and shall be free from sharp turns and projections. Pump
volute bottom and impeller shall have easily replaceable
stainless steel wear rings.
4
Impeller shall be cast i ron to ASTM A48 Class 358 or
BS EN 1561 Grade 260, single ch;mnel type running in
volute, ca pable of passing solids w lth 75mm diam.,
suitable for service required, nonclog and dynamically
balanced for smooth operation. Impeller parts and
Internal parts including studs, nuts and screws shall be
stainless steeL
5
Mechanical seal system shall consist of two
independent seal assemblies and of materials suitable for
the application.
Motor shall have Class F insulation, designed for use
6
in hazardous locations, suitable for continuous duty, with
horsepower to ensure nonoverloading of motor
throughout capacity range of pump. Motor shall have cast
iron frame, stainless steel shaft, double mechanical shaft
face seals of carbonllungstan carbide. built-in thermal
overload protection and moisture sensing probes. Motors
shall be dimensioned to be sufficiently cooled by
surrounding environment or pumped media.
7
Pump and motor bearlngs shall be heavyduty,
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearing type, not
requiring re-lubricatlon on site.
i.
8
Pump shall be supplied from factory with required
number of level regulators of the pear-shaped type, with
internal coated type switch and weighted to be vertical in
air and horizontal in water without floating. Regulator
shall have three contacts to make it suitable for either
starting or stopping motors. Regulators shall have
necessery lengths of three-core electric cable and both
reguletor case end cable insulation shall be non-f;orrosive
material resists nt to and for application in liquid served.
Level reguletors shall be supplied from factory with
special cable hoi der bracket designed to guide and
support power and level regulator cable, Level regulators
shall start and stop pumps at pre-set levels through the
control panel. Levels shell be shown on the Drawings. In
the event of a feu It In one pump, control panel shall switch
off defective pump give an alarm signal and start stand by
pump. Starting sequence of pumps shall be automatically
alternated through the control panel.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
9
Pump motor control panel shall be weatherproof and
suitable for outdoor Installation, minimum IP 55 enclosure
protection, with lockable cover and completely assembled,
wired and tested at factory ready for installation with
simple external electrical connections. Panel shall contain,
but is not necessary limited to, the following:
vii.
vii i.
Motor starters.
Over-riding starter buttons.
Indicating lamps for pump in operation.
Casing: Cast iron, with Integral feet or other

means on volute to support weight of casing and
attached piping.
Impeller. ASTM A48 Class No 25 A or higher cast
iron, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cep screw.
Wear Rings: Replaceable type with material
suite ble for the application.
Shaft end Sleeve: High grade stainless steel shaft
and rated for minimum 1.5 times the working
pressure, and high-grade stainless steel sleeve.
Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating
ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and
flexible bellows and gasket.
Coupling: Flexiblespacer type, capable of
absorbing
torsion
vibration
and
shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section
thet can be disassembled and removed without
removing pump or motor.
Coupling Guard: Galvanized steel, removable,
and attached to mounting frame.
Mounting Frame: Factory coated welded-steel
frame and cross members, factory febricated
from ASTM A36/A36M channels and angles.
Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupling
guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting
holes for fieldinstalled motors.
Reset buttons for overload relays.

Electric alternator for required number of pumps.
24 V control circuit transformer.
Running hour meters to record time each pump
is in operation.
Accessories required for automatic operation of
pumps.
6
Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable
elignment. Motors: IP 55, squirrel cage induction type, and
fan cooled. Cooling fans shell be bi-directional so that
cooling is Independent of direction of rotetion and shall be
fabricated from non-rusting and non-sparking material.
remote
7
Motors shall have high efficiency and high power
factor at full load. All motors shall meet or exceed the
minimum efficiencies stated in the highest level in the EU
agreement of the LV motors (EFF11EFF2). All motors shall
bear the IEC reference and CE marking on the motor
nameplate.
10 Impeller and pump outer casing shall be factory

protected by shot blasting and priming with epoxy
suitable for duty. Casing shall then be given two coats of
epa)()' resin, to 125 microns thickness eech coat.
8
All motors shell be suitable for continuous heavyduty applicetion with a minimum service factor of 1.25;
alternatively, the next larger IEC motor size shall be
selected.
Auxiliary volt free contacts

monitoring and alarms.
for
Water level meter for water level in well.
17.3.2.2
Horizontal Pumps
Description: Horizontal, base-mounted, centrifugal,

flexible-coupled, rated for minimum 1.5 times the working
pressure.
2
Pumps shall be end suction, horizontal multi-stage,
or split case pumps, type as required by the Drawings.
3
End suction pumps: shall be back-pull-out. radial split
case design.
Split case pumps: shall be of axially split casing
4
design.
5
Construction Features
Motors shell be full voltage direct-on-line start.
10 Motor Insulation shall be class F, non-hygroscopic,

Class H varnish.
11 Motor temperature rise shall be limited to 70"C
above the maximum ambient tempereture of 50"C, as
measured by resistance
17.3.2.3
High Pressure Booster Pumping Set Employing

Membrane Tank
Packaged type, comprising multiple closeoi:oupled

pumps, membrane tank, interconnecting pipe work, valves,
pressure switches and electrical control panel all
completely assembled on steel frame, piped, wired and
delivered as a complete packaged unit ready for
17-7
~~
Ministry of Trnn~pcort & Communicntlons. DGRLT
../'""
~vumping Stations
installation and operation with simple piping and electrical

connections. One of the pumps shall be stand-by pump
Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and

connected as an integral part of unit.
2
Pumps shaO be close-coupled. centrifugal, single or
multi pie stage type, horizontally or vertically mounted and
driven by electric motor at specified rpm. Pumps shall
have self -adjusting mecharrical seats with carbon rotating
face running against stationary ceramic seat. Pumps shall
have closegrain cast iron or stainless steel casing and
mechanical seal housing, gunmetal. cast bronze, or
stainless steel impeller and stainless steel shaft.
Enclosure; IP 55.
Motor Controller: Full-voltage,
combination
magnetic type with under.voltage release feature,
motorcircuitprotectortype, and short-circuit
protective device.
Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay In
each phase.
Starting Devices: Handoffautomatic selectot
switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot device
for automatic control,
3
When the duty pumps are running together, they
shall supply the maximum demand specified. with the
remaining pump acting as standby. Under tow demand
conditions one pump shall supply sufficient water, with
remaining duty pumps acting as back up. Controls shall
automatically start second duty pump when one pump is
unable to supply demand and shall cut in standbv pump
on failure of any of the duty pumps.
4
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled, drip proof,
squi rrel cage type, weatherproofed construction for
operation in specified ambient temperatures.
Motor
horsepower shall ensure non-ovenoading of motor
throughout capacity range of pump.
5
Membrane tank shall be welded mild steel plate,
suitable for system operating pressure constructed in
accordance with BS EN 2861, Part 1, with cylindrical shell
and convex dished ends. Membrane tank shall contain
removable rubber bag and shall be pressurized with air at
factory to correct system operating pressure to provide
sealed air cushion eliminating uso of air compressor.
Tank shall have air valve of type permitting recharging on
site by small hand compressor or simple car type pump.
Rubber bag shall be guaranteed suitable for intended use
without daterloratlon and without bursting.
6
Membrane t ank shall be complete with factory
fabricated steel legs welded to tank before testing, air
charges connection, pressure relief valve and pressure
gauges.
7
Pumping set shall be automatically controlled by
pressure switches to start pumps on fall of pressure in
tr i and stop pumps on rise of pressure.
8
Interconnecting pipe work shall be galvanized steel
pipe and fittlngs to ASTM A53 schedule 40. Valves shall be
threaded, with bronze body and trim and have a pressure
rating suitable for system working pressure. Each pump
shall have swing type, nonreturn valve at discharge,
adiustable pilot-operated pressure regulating value at
discharge, adjustable individual suction and discharge
shut off valves, Discharge manifold shall have pressure
switches, pressure gauge and vent cock.
9
Control panel shall be heavy gauge mild steel sheet
finished w ith stove hammer paint internally and externally,
with minimum IP 55 enclosure rating. Control panel sllall
be automatic, with load control and protection function
and sh.-J contain, but shall not be necessarily limited to,
the following:
17-EI
Multipump. Sequence (lead-Lag-Lag) Starter;

Switches lead pump to one lag m ain pump and
to multipump operation.
Instrumentation: Unit suction and discharge
pressure gauges.
Alarm Signa l Device: Sounds
bocku p pumps are operation.
alarm when
Pump Duty Alternation Device: Switches the lead

pump.
10 Mounting frame shal l be mild steel hollow section
members reinforced against deflection and with bolt holes.
Steel surfaces shall be factory protected by shot blasting,
zinc sprayed to 75 microns thickness and given one coat of
prim ing paint.
External steelwork shall have one
undercoat and one top coat chlorinated rubber paint of
approved color to 75 microns thickness each coal Internal
steelwork shall have two coats black bitumastic paint. 125
microns thickness e.:h coat and suitable for service.
17.3.2.4
High Pressure Booster Pumping Set Employing

Variable Speed Pumps
Packaged type, comprising multiple closecoupled

pumps, membrane tank, interconnect ing pipe work, valves,
pressure switches and electrical control panel all
completely assembled on steel frame, piped, wired and
delivered as a complete packaged unit ready for
installation and operation w ith simple piping and electrical
connections. One of the pumps shall be standby pump
2
Pumps shall be closecoupled, centrifugal, single or
multiple stage type, horizontally or vertically mounted and
driven by electric motor at specified rpm. Pumps shall
have self-adjusting mechanical seals w ith carbon rotati ng
f ece running against stationary ceramic seaL Pumps shall
have closegrain cast iron or stainless steel casing and
m echanical seal housing, gunmetal, cast bronze, or
sta'nless steel impeller and stainless steel shaft.
3
When the duty pumps are running together, they
shall supply the maximum demand specified, with the
remaining pump acting as stand-by. Under tow demand
conditions one pump shall supply sufficient water, with
remaining duty pumps IICling as back up. Controls shall
automatically start second duty pump when one pump <s
SUitnnt Clf Ornan Standrd SpoC<fitO:oe>n for Road 1'.1 Bndgo Con.truc:icm 2010
Pumping Stations)
unable to supply demand and shall cut in stand-by pump

on failure of any of the duty pumps.
plus pilot device for automatic control. Retain

one of first two subparagraphs below.
4
Motors:
Variable speed,
with
pre-greased,
permanently shielded, ball-type bearings. Select motors
that will not overload through full range of pump
performance cu rva.
a. For duplex boosters, Automatic, Alternating

Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main
pump and to two-pump operation.
5
Membrane tank shall be welded mild steel plate,
suitable for system operating pressure constructed in
accordance with BS EN 286-1, Part 1, with cylindrical shell
and convex dished ends. Membrane tank shall contain
removable rubber bag and shall be pressurized with air at
factory to correct system operating pressure to provide
sealed air cushion eliminating use of air compressor.
Tank shall have air valve of type permitting recharging on
site by small hand compressor or simple car type pump.
Rubber bag shall be guaranteed suitable for intended use
without deterioration and without bursting.
6
Membrane tank shall be complete with factory
fabricated steel legs welded to tank before testing, aircharges connection, pressure relief valve and pressure
gauges.
7
Pumping set shall be automatically controlled by
pressure switches to start pumps on fall of pressure in
tank and stop pumps on rise of pressure.
8
Interconnecting pipe work shall be galvanized steel
pipe and fittings to ASTM A53 schedule 40. Valves shall be
threaded, with bronze body and trim and having a
pressure rating suitable for system working pressure.
Each pump shall have swing type, non-return valve at
discharge, adjustable pilot-operated pressure regulating
value at discharge, adjustable, individual suction and
discharge shut off valves, Discharge manifold shall have
pressure switches, pressure gauge and vent cock.
9
Control Panel: Factory installed and connected as an
integral part of boaster pump; automatic for multiplepump, variable-speed operation, with load control and
protection functions.
i.
ii.
Control
Logic:
Solid-state system
with
transducers, programmable microprocessor,
VFC, and other devices in controller. Install VFC
for pump motors larger than 25 Hp in separate
panel; same type as motor control panel
enclosure.
Motor
Controller:
NEMA ICS 2,
variablefrequency, solid-state type. Some manufacturers
may offer low-voltage controls. Revise "Control
Voltage" Subparagraph below if required.
a.
Control Voltage: 220 V AC, with integral

control-power transformer.
iii.
Enclosure: NEMA 250.
iv.
Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in

each phase.
v.
Starting Devices: Hand-off automatic selector

switch for each pump in cover of control panel,
b. For triplex or multiplex boasters, Sequence

(lead-Lag-Lag] Starter: Switches lead pump
to one lag main pump and to three-pump
operation.
vi.
Pump Operation and Sequencing:

sensing method.
Pressure-
a. Time
Delay:
Controls
pump an-off
operation; adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds.
vii. VFC: Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulatingfrequency converter for each pump.
viii. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to
transfer to constant-speed operation upon VFC
failure.
ix. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge pressure
gages.
x.
Lights: Running light for each pump.
xi.
Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when

backup pumps are operating.
Controls alarm operation;
a. Time Delay:
adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds, with
manual reset.
xii. Thermal-bleed cutoff.

xiii. Low-suction-pressure, Water-storage-tank, lowlevel cutout.
10 Where shown on the Drawings or Schedules. motor
control panels shall any or ell of the following:
i.
High-suction-pressure cutout.
ii.
Low-discharge-pressu re cutout.
iii.
High-discharge-pressure cutout
17.3.2.5
Duplex Sump Pumps
Components shall comprise two pumps, float switch

assembly with mechanical alternator. high water alarm
and electric control panel.
2
Pump shall be vertical. centrifugal, wet pit type, self
lubricating, to rest directly on sump floor, with vertical
motor connected to pump with steel tubular shaft housing.
3
Pump shall be supplied complete with the following,
factory assembled to form a self-contained, compact unit
ready for operation with simple discharge piping and
electrical connections:
Cast iron combination base and suction strainer.
Cast iron motor head box.
17-9 .
~~
Mlniatry or Transport & Communlc:Dtion
OGRLT
~~yumping Stations
Cast iron motor adaptor flange designed to carry

motor and float switch.
Electric alternator between duty and stand-by.
Steel tubular shaft housing.

Electric motor.
24 V control circuit transformer.
High and low level alarms.

Manual reset fall-safe alarm circuits.
Unsinkable plastic float and stainless steel rod,
Pilot tights.
Adjustable stops and counter-weight.
Moisture sensing relay.
4
Casing and cover shall be c!ose grained cast iron
volute of unlform quality, free from blow-holes, porosity
shrinkage defects, cracks and other defects.
5
Impeller shall be cast iron volute to ASTM A 48 Class
358 or BS EN 1561 grade 260, heavy open non.clog type
design, statically and dynamically balanced, over hung,

single suction, keyed and securely locked to stainless steel
shaft ol size to transmit required power without distortion
or vibration. Pump shaft shall be directly connected to
motor shaft through a flexible coupling. Motor adaptor
flange shall be machlned to close tolerances to ensure
permanent alignment between pump and motor.
6
Pump shall be fitted at drive end of shaft with grea5e
packed, deep groove, self-aligning, radia l thrust ball
bearing, mounted in dust-proof housing machined in
motor support base and having moisture proof seal
protection from sump vapors. Pump shall also have
bottom column bearing of renewable water-lubricated
type.
7 Motor shan be vertical, totally enclosed, squirrel cage,
induction type, permanently lubricated with sealed ball
bearings. Motor horsepower shall ensure non-overloading
of motor throughout capacity range of pump. Motor shall
be suitable for continuous operation in ambient
temperature specified.
8
Operation shall be automatic, float switch operated,
alternating start-up sequence.
One pump shall be
intended for normal operation, while the othe r for backup.
Standby pump shall start if abnormal flow exceeds one
pump capacity and in the event of a fault In other pump.
Fault condition in a pump or if flow exceeds pumping
c apacity shall actuate an alarm.
9
Float switches shall be base mounted, contact type,
enclosed in drip-proof and splash-proof enclosure.
Starters shaD be totally enclosed, wall mounted,
direct on-line type with no-volt and overload protection
and suitable for automatic operation.
10
Control penal shall be wall mounted, watertight,

completely assembled, wired and tested at the factory and
ready for installation with simple connections.
11
12
Control panel shall have minimum IP 55 enclosure.
Control panel shall contain all necessary accessories

for duplex pump operation, including, but not necessarily
limited to the following:
13
Main incoming isolating switch.

Magnetic trip circuit-breal(ers,
Magnetic starters.
Overload relays with thermal unit
Hand- off automatic selector switches.
17 10
Loss of power alarm unit.

Auxiliary, volt free, contracts
monitoring 1nd alarms.
for
remote
Cables, wiring and conduits shall be provided as

necessary for connecting control panel to pumps, float
switch assembly and alarm unit. Make connection as per
manufacturer's wiring diagram.
14
Impeller and pump outer casing shall be factory

protected by shot blasting and priming with suitable
epoxy. Casing shall then be given two coats of epoxy resin,
to 125 microns thickness each coat.
15
17.3.3
Surge Tanks
The membrane tank shall contain an interchangeable

bladder and be pre-charged with alr at the factory to
correct pressure to provide a sealed air cushion
eliminating use of an air compressor. Tank shall have air
va lve to permit recharging on site by small compressor.
Bladder shall be guaranteed by manufacturer for use on
pumped fluid without deterioration with time, and without
bursting. Tank shall be welded mild ste el plate for
operating pressure of 16, 25, and 40 bars (as shown on
drawings), with cylindrical shell and convex dished ends,
shot blasted and painted internally with bitumastic paint
and externally with zinc primer end hammer enamel paint.
2 The tank shall be horizontally installed and shall be
supplied from fa ctory complete with the following
accessories:
I.
Access manholes.
ii.
Hoisting hooks.
iii. Inflator valve.

lv. Flange and counter flange for fing of the
bladder.
v.
Flanged water connection.
vi. Pressure gauge.

vii. Level gauge system.
17.3.4
Overhead Material Handling

Equipment
17.3.4.1
Monorail System
System shall comprise e carrier with electric hoist

attached, for picking up tlte load at one point and
transporting it to destination on overhead tracking system
without re-handling.
Sultanata af Omn. Stone.,d Spoafimon lor Rood & 9ridgo
Ccmst~ion
2010
Pumping Stations)
2
Suspension system shall comprise hanger rod
assemblies with ball-and-socket or T-type joints, flexibly
constructed so that carrier wheels always contact rail on
each side. Rail sha II be sufficiently thick to carry load and
provide for wear with safety factor of 5.
3
Hoist and trolley shall be of low head room
construction to permit maximum lifting and shall
comprise standard assemblies with interchanges ble parts.
Hoist ropes shall be retained in position in drum grooves
by encircling spring-loaded steel rope bands and high
grade gunmetal rope guards. Rotating shafts shall be
splined to receive gears and mounted on ball journals.
Gears shall be protected by readily removable sheet steel
covers.
4
System shall be medium duty with 5 tonnes lifting
capacity, 10 meters standard lift and lifting speed B meters
per minute with 10% creep speed.
Trolley hoist shall be electrically operated, self
5
aligning, low headroom type comprising hoist and trolley
in compact unit designed to run on lower flange of 1-beam
with travelling speed of trolley 20 meters per minute.
6
Lifting mechanism shall comprise shock resistant
steel frame, with suspension members and covers, gear
drive system, positive action load brake, lifetime
lubricated and sealed bearings and drop forged alloy
swivelling and rocking load safety hook.
7
Trolley shall be electrically driven, with size to fit I
beam girder end with alloy cast iron wheels, heat treated
end machined to uniform diameter, mounted on sealed
heavy duty precision-machined anti-friction roller or ball
bearings lubricated for life. Trolley brakes shall have 50%
torque.
8
Hoist motion brakes shell stop motion under all
service and weather conditions, with lining material
producing constant coefficient of friction, not wearing
rapidly end not scoring. Brakes shall have 150% torque of
nameplate rating of hoist motor.
9
Controls shall be selective push-bunon control for
floor operation with emergency stop button, and designed
to NEMA Standards.
10 Electric motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled,
squirrel cage type, weatherproof and tropics lized (IP56
Class F insulation! for operation in ambient temperatures
up to 50 deg. C.
11 Steel surfaces shall be factory painted with one coat
etch primer and one coat gloss finish paint.
12 Safe working load shall be clearly marked in large
print on unit in English and Arabic.
17.3.5
Fertilization Equipment
17.3.5.1 Fertilizer Injection Equipment

1
Injector shall be of the Venturi type bypassed on the
main pipeline. The system shall consist of a fertilizer tank
with a minimum capacity of 1000 kg of dry chemical
fertilizer, having a hinged pressure-tight cover. The
connections from the tank to the pipeline shall be sized so
as to allow the required quantity of fertilizer to be

dissolved and dispersed In 45 minutes with normal group
operation.
All parts in contact with fertilizer shall be in corrosion
2
resistant material.
3
The Contractor shall provide spares suitable for a
period of 5 years pumping operations in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
17.3.6
Instrumentation and Controls
17.3.6.1 General
The Contractor shall submit complete control and
wiring diagrams for control systems for approval showing
control instruments, auxiliaries and accessories.
2
The Contractor shall provide accessories and
appurtenances as necessary and appropriate to
accomplish intended control functions, irrespective of
whether or not shown or specified, including switches,
relays, transformers etc.
3
The Contractor shall provide control wiring and
conduits as necessary and appropriate for complete
control systems, to the requirements of this Section as
4
Indicating instruments including pressure gauges
and level indicators shall each have a range such that
normal readings are indicated in middle of instrument
range.
5
Pressure gauges shall have a brass cock on inlet.
17.3.6.2 Level Controller Type LC-1

Controller shall be electrode type, using semiconductor technology, designed to be installed in wet
sump, to start end stop pump or to give high or low level
alarm signal.
2
Components shall include rigid electrode and control
head with power supply/relay circuit board and heavy
duty housing.
17.3.6.3 Pressure Gauges
1
Pressure gauges shell be Bourdon tube type,
minimum 100mm dial diameter, with flengeless back and
12 mm male threaded bottom connection, and graduated
in bars with 0.1 bar divisions.
2
Components shall include black finished cast
aluminium case; threaded black epoxy cast aluminium
ring with gasketed flash face, type 316 stainless steel
spring tube, stainless steel precision movement and
micrometer adjustment on needle.
17.3.7
1
Equipment and ancillaries are given separately and
measured by the number of each type installed. Rates for
equipment and ancillaries ere deemed to include, but not
limited to:
Factory assembled components and controls.
17-11
"J~
Ministry ot Transport & Comnun5cat,ona DGRlT
~~yumping S t ations
Loose equipment supplied by the manufacturer.
17.4
17.4.1
Pipe Laying and Jointing
Electrical connection and wiring.

Supports and fixation including supporting steal
worlc or concrete work.
Valves, strainers, flexible connections, conttols,
instruments and fittings as shown on the
Drawings.
Loose keys. tools and spare parts s specified.
Factory and on-site tests and test reports
Shop drawings. diagrams,
ma intenance manuals
instruction
and
2
Monorail system shall be measured as a Lump Sum.
complete, Installed, tested, and accepted.
Fertilizer injection system shall be measured ts a
3
Lump Sum, complete. installed, tested. and accepted.
4
Electrical work in connection with pumping stations
Is given separately and measured a.s a Lump Sum,
furnished, installed, tested and accepted and is deemed to
include aU electrical work shown or the Drawings,
described in the Specification or reasonably to be implied
as necessary for the proper execution of the work.
17.3.8
Basis of Payment

provided above shall be paid for at the unit prices for the
items describes in the Bill of Quantities and shall include
for furnishing all materials, installation. civil, mechanical,
electrical, piping and miscellaneous works, testing,
commissioning, and putting Into operation. maintenance
and all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and other items
necessary for the proper completion of the work as
specified.
Generel; examine materials carefully for damage.

Test for soundness in accordance with manufacturers
instructions before laying the plpe.
2
The Contractor shall examine materials to ensure
coafng or lining and outer coating or sheathing is
undamaged, If damaged, make good or dispose of and
replace, as directed.
3
The Contractor shall remove dirt and foreign matter
from pipe before lowering.
4
The Contractor shall clear construction debris from
inside of pipe before ma king joint.
5
When pipe lying is not in progress, the Contractor
shall close open ends of pipes with properly fitted
temporary wooden plugs or standard caps as directed
6
Jointing; manufacturer's instructions shall be
followed regarding cleanliness of joint surfaces, lubricant
used, correct location of components, provision of correct
gaps for flexible joints etc.
7
Flexible joints shall not be deflected beyond
maximum permissible angles given by manufacturer
and/or relevant standard.
8
For patent detachable and flexible joints strict ly the
Contractor shall comply with special instructions Issued by
manufacturers of proprietary joints when laying and
jointing.
9
The Cont ractor shall joint differing pipe and fitting
material w ith adaptors es recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
17.4.2
17.3.9
Valve Installation
Iii)
Horizontal Pumps
{nr.)
General: prior to installation, Inspection for

cleanliness of bores, seating surfaces etc. and for handling
damage, cracks, missing parts and tightness of pressurecontaining bolting shall be performed,
(iii)
High Pressure Booster Pumping

Set Employing Membrane Tank
{nr.)
The Contractor shall ensure that v1,1lves are in the

2
closed position before installation.
High Pressure Booster Pumping

Set Employing Variable Speed
Pumps
(nr.)
3
Valves must be operated through one complete
opening and closing cycle in the position in wh"ch they
shan be installed to ensure proper functlontf'g.
(v)
Duplex Sump Pumps
(nr.J
(vi)
Monorail System
Lump Sum
(viii
Fertilizer Injection SyS(em
Lump Sum
(viii)
Electrical Works
Lump Sum
(fx)
Instrumentation and Controls
Lump Sum
(it
(iv)
Submersible Drainage Pumps
{nr.)
4
Joint between valve and pipe must be set In the
manner specified for laying and jointing pipe and to
5
Valves shall be provided with concrete peds a.s
shown on the Drawings so that pipes do not support
weight of valve.
6
Valves without concrete pads shall be placed on firm
footings to prevent settling and excessive strain on
connectlon to pipe.
7
Valves shall not be used to bring misaligned pipe
Into alignment during installation.
11 12
Sultanate of Oman, Stonc!rd S!>oolic~ono lot flo,o~ t< l11idge Conot~o.; 2010
Pumping Stations)
8
All pressure-containing bolting ~bonnet, seal plate
and end connections! must be inspected for adequate
tightness after installation bur prior to field testing.
17.4.3
Pump Installation
Installation: realign pump and motor in the field after

grouting in base and connecting piping.
2
Support piping independently of pump nozzles.
3
Drains tor packing glands and base shall be piped to
nearest floor drain or sump.
4
Before operation, the Contractor shall ensure pump
is properly lubricated, rotating element rotates freely by
hand, casing is vented and full of water, direction of
rotation is correct, strainer is clean and suction and
discharge valves are open.
17.4.4
Method of Measurement and Basis of

Payment
No separate items are measured for the work

described in this Sub-section and no separate payment
will be made.
2
All work related to installation of pumping stations
and all general requirements and builder's work in
connection with the installation, including all work shown
on the Drawings, described In the Specification or
reasonably to be implied as necessary for the proper
execution of the work shall be considered as subsidiary
Work, which shall not to be measured for dlrect payment,
the cost of which will be deemed to be included in rates
for the items in the Bill of Quantities.
17-l3
Ref.
18.1
Title
Page No.
Locating and Protecting

Existing Utilities
18.1.1
18.1.1 .1
18.1.2
18.1.3
18.1.4
18.1.5
18.1.6
Submttals
Materials
Construction Requlrament.
Basil of Payment
ltema In the BID of Ouantltle~
18.2
Removing and Disposing of or

Relocating Existing Utilities
1S.1
18-1
18-,
18-1
18-1
18-1
18o1
1~2
18-2
18.2.1
18.21 .1
18.2.2
18.2.3
18.2.4
18.2.6
18.2.8
General
Submittals
Mateflals
Construction Requlrarnenta
Method of Me..urement
Balla of Payment
18l2
18-2
18-2
18-2
18-3
18-3
18-3
18.3
Future Utility Crossing
18-3
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
18.3.8
Deacrlptlon I General
Materials
Conatruc:tlon Requirement.
Balls of Payment
hems In the Bill of Quanthle8
18-3
18-3
18'3
18-3
18'3
18-4
Sultanata of OmQn, ~!andrd Spogflcoti,...lor llod ~ Bndgo t:onmuction 2010
Utilities)
18.1
18.1.1
Locating and Protecting Existing

Utilities
1
This Sub-section describes requirements for locating
and protecting existing underground services and plant
that are affected by execution of the Works but to remain
in their position, such as utility lines and underground
water streams (Falajsl etc. The full scope of the protection
work required will be determined after investigation by the
Contractor, and he shall prepare working drawings for
such work as directed by the Engineer.
2
Existing utility services and plant, and Falajs will not
be considered as obstructions as defined in Section 1. The
Contractor shall liaise with the utility owners and other
concerned authorities regarding such utility services, plant
and Falajs in all aspects of the work. The cost of locating
and recording their positions and of working around or in
proximity to tham is deemed to be included in the
Contractor's allowance for his obligations under Section 1.
18.1.1.1 Submittals
1
Submit coordination drawings showing pipes and
major system components. Indicate interface and spatial
relationship between pipes, system components, adjacent
utilities, and proximate structures.
Submit shop drawings of existing underground
services and plant to be protected Including plan layout
and locations, types and sizes.
2
At project close-out. submit record drawings

showing the protected pipes and related components with
sufficient details to allow for locating the pipes for future
maintenance.
18.1.2
Materials
other forms as instructed by the Engineer or the

concerned authorities.
3
Before commencing any work on site, the Contractor
shall send a 'Notice of Intent' including two sets of
drawings, plan work, construction method and safety
measured to all Concerned Authorities and shall obtain
information in the form of a formal notice and/or signed
drawing showing the location of all underground utility
plant and Falajs. The Contractor shall search for and
ascertain the exact location of the plant on site by making
trial pits and shall repair, at his own expanse, any damage
caused to the plant by his works, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and the Concerned Authorities.
4
Whenever, in the course of the work, water pipes,
irrigation pipes, drainage pipes, sewers, oil, gas pipes,
electrical or telephone cables, or other unforeseen items
are encountered, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer,
who shall issue the appropriate instruction for each
individual case.
5
The precise location of existing utilities and Falajs
shall be investigated and established by the Contractor in
consultation with the relevant Utility Operator. Service
supply lines damaged in the course of the search shall be
replaced with equivalent approved materials at the
18.1.4
Excavation and backfilling. whether by hand or

machinery, for searching and protection of existing utility
plant and Falajs including making trial pits shall be
measured as described in Sub-section 2.8. Clause 2.8.4,
and 1.8.3.
2
Split pipes shall be measured in linear meters of lald
pipe of the various sizes, measured as a straight line. No
allowance will be made for cut ends and wasta.
1
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Sub
section 5.1 and shalt be of the class instructed by the
Engineer. Reinforcing steel shalt comply with Sub-sect' on
5.2. Reinforced concrete shall comply with the appropriate
Metalwork should
comply with Section 6.
3
Concrete surround to pipes and ducts and concrete
for inverted bo)( culverts and for blinding shall be
measured as described in Sub-section 5. 1, Clause 5. 1.5.
The volume occupied by the pipe including pipe wall shall
be deducted from the gross volume of the concrete
surround and only the net volume of the concrete
surround so calculated shall be paid for.
18.1.3
4
Reinforcing steel shall be measured as described in
Sub-section 5 2, Clause 5.2.4.
1
requirements of Sub-Sections 2.3 - 'Roadway Excavat;on'
and 2.8 - 'Earthwork for pipe trenches'.
2
The protection of existing underground plant and
Fal ajs shall be carried out in strict compliance with the
requirements of the Concerned Authorities and utility
owners. The protection shall normally be in the form of
encasing the services or plant with a split 100 or 300 mm
diameter uPVC pipe wrapped with polyethylene sheets
and surrounded by concrete Class 15/20 or enclosing such
plant of large diameter such as oil or water pipes or Falajs
with an inverted concrete bo)( culvert or slab or in any
18.1.5
Basis of Payment
1
The quantity of completed and accepted work for
split pipes measured as provided for above will be paid for
at the unit rate in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate per
linear meter shall Include labor, materials, markers and
warning tape, equipment, transportation to and hauling
about the Site, loading, unloading and cutti ng, machining,
etc. of standard length pipes.
2
Excavation and backfilling shall be paid for as
indicated in Clause 2.8.5.
Concrete shall be paid for as indicated in Clause 5.1.6.
~~
MJnlstry of
..../"'..~<:Utilities
Trt~npgrt &
Con1munlcatklns. OGRLT
4
Reinforcing steel shall be paid for as ind:cated in
Clause 5.2.5.

3
Gravity pipes and pressure pipes shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-section 8.2, Clause 8.2.2.
18.1.6
til
18.2
18.2.1
Split pipe (diameter)
lin.m
Removing and Disposing of or

Relocating Existing Utilities
General
This Sub-section describes requirements for removal,

disposal or relocation/diversion of existing utilities. Full
scope of the relocation work required w ill be determined
after investigation by the Contractor and he shall prepare,
shoplworking drawings for the work, as directed by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall liaise with the utility
owners and other Concerned Authorities in all aspects of
the work.
2
Permanent removal and, relocation or diversion of
any existing utilities w il.l be ordered by the Engineer where
they obstruct the permanent work and where such utilities
need to be maintained in operation as required by the
utility owner. The Engineer may also order permanent or
temporary diversion of utilities when in his opinion it is
reasonable that this should be done for carrying out the
proposed work, but such orders will not normally be gven
where the services concerned cross the work area and are
either redundant or can be dealt with by the Contractor in
the normal course of work. The diversions ordered by the
Engineer shplt be paid for in the Contract, but any other
temporary diversion or removal required shall be at the
Contractor's own expense.
No service diversion shall be made without the
3
approval of the Engineer and the Concerned Authority.
18.2.1.1 Subm!nals
Submit coordination drawings showing pipes and
major utility components. Indicate interface and spatial
relationship between pipes, system components, adjacent
utilities, and proximate structures.
2
Submit shop drawings of existing underground
utilities and plant affected by the work including plan
layout and locations, types and sizes.
At project closeout, submit record drawings
3
showing the relocated services and related components
with sufficient details to allow for locating the utility for
future maintenance.
18.2.2
Materials
All material for relocation/diversion of utilities shall

comply with the specifications of the Concerned Authority
and shall conform to the following listed requirements.
2
section 5.1 and shall be of the class instructed by the
Engineer. Reinforcing steel shall comply with Sub-section
182
4
Electricity poles, ducts, handholes/manholes and
overhead and underground electricity cab!es, shall
conform to the requ!raments of Section 15 and of the
5
Telecommunicatlon ducts, handholes/manholes and
cables related to telephone works, shall conform to the
telecommunication authority specifications and details,
6
Sand and sieved backfill material free from stones or
other debris shall be provided for reinstating the !ranches
after the laying of ducts.
18.2.3
Prior to commencing the work, the Contractor shall

prepare layout drawings, proposed working method and
the t ime schedule for disconnecting and reconnecting of
the affected services and shall obtain approval of these
from the Engineer and Concerned Authorities. During the
w ork, the Contractor shall exercise great care not to cause
any damage to the exiting utilities.
2
Electricity, gas, oil, water, sewage, drainage,
i rrigation and telephone service lines which are identified
to be relocated shall be shown on the drawings, along
with the required re-routing. The full scope of the services
to be relocated cannot be determined at tender stage and
the Contractor shall allow in his rate for verifying or
revising the services that should be rerouted and
adjusting the proposed re-routing alignment and for any
varlallon in quantities, preparation of revised working
drawings, design, etc.
3
The precise locations of existing utilities shall be
investigated 11nd established by the Contractor In
consultation with the relevant utility owner. The
Contractor shall notify and obtain permission from the
Concerned Authority before interrupting any service.
Service supply lines damaged In the course of the search
shall be replaced with equivalent approved materials at
4
requirements of Sub-Sections 2.3- 'Road Excavation', 2.7
- 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures' and 2.8 'Earthwork for Pipe Trenches',
5
Removal of existing ut~ ities shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-section 2, Clause 2.2.2. Designated
salvageabla material shall be removed without
unnecessary damage, in sections or pieces, transported or
stored by the Contractor as Instructed by the Engineer.
Other material shall be disposed of off site.
6
Utility lines which should remain, but with added
protection. shall be shown on the drawings. Cavities left
by utilities removal shaft be backfilled to the level of the
surrounding ground and compacted.
Suit""" to of Om11n, 51r>efmf Spodfial\iono for Ro:ld Itt Bridge CGNtN<1ion 2111 D
Utilities)
7
During excavation, warning tiles or tape shall be
retrieved carefully and may be reused. The damaged
warning tiles or tape shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his own cost. Concreting and backfilling operations shall
be carefully executed to ensure that there shall be no
damage to the utilities.
2
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparation
of shop/\Norking drawings, procurement of material and
for following-upfco-ordination with the concerned
authorities in all maners relating to this work.
18.2.4

section 5.1 and shall be of the class instructed by the
Engineer. Reinforcing steel shall comply with Sub-section
requirements of Sub-section 5 3.
Removal and disposal of existing redundant utilities

ordered by the Engineer under Clause 18.2.1, Item (2),
shall be measured in linear meters of the length removed.
The rates shall include for all work elCcept elCcavati on as
stated in Item (4), below.
2
Removal and relocation of existing utilities shall be
measured in linear meters of the length of the relocated
work. Rates shall include for all work except excavation as
stated in Item (4) below.
3
Provision and installation of new utility services shall
be measured in linear meters of the length of new service
installed. Rates shall include for all work except excavation
as stated in Item (4) below.
4
Excavation and backfilling whether by hand or
machinery for removal, relocation/diversion of existing
utilities shall be measured as indicated in Sub-section 2.8,
Clause 2.8.4.
5. No work will be measured and no payment made for
work carried out by the Concerned Authorities nor for any
work in connection therewith by the Contractor unless
prior approval for payment is given by the Engineer
18.2.5
Basis of Payment

measured as provided for above shall be paid for at the
unit rate for each service stated in the Bill of Quantities,
which rate shall be considered full compensation for
locating, removing, relocating, installing and jointing of
utilities and for materials, labor, transport, equipment,
tools supplies and all other items necessary for the proper
completion of the work, except excavation which is
measured as stated in Clause 18.2.4,1tem (4).
18.2.6
(if
(il)
(iii)
18.3
18.3.1

Remove and dispose of (utility)
(sizefdescription)
lin.m.
Remove and relocate (utility) (sizef
description I
lin.m.
Provide and Install new (utility)
(size/description)
lin.m.
Future Utility Crossings


provt ston of pipe sleeves/ducts under pavements for
future utility crossings. Full scope of the work will be
determined according to conditions on Site.
18.3.2
Materials
2
Sleevesfducts shall be uPVC for small pipes less than
400 mm in diameter and concrete for larger pipes. Pipes
shall conform to the requirements of Sub-section 8.2,
Clause 8.2.2.
3
Locations and sizes of pipe sleeves are as shown on
the Drawings.
18.3.3
Before commencing any work on site, the Contractor

shall send a 'Notice of Intent' including two sets of
drawings, plan of work, construction method and safety
measures to all Concerned Authorities and shall obtain
information in the form of a formal notice and/or sgned
drawing showing the required location of sleeves for
future connection.
2
Sleeves/ducts shall be placed prior to or during
construction of the highway. Any piping Installed after
completion of the highway construction shall be placed
after jacking (thrust boringl a pipe sleeve under the
pavement. The Contractor will not be permined to cut into
the pavement for pipe installation.
3
Markers should be placed on both ends of the
sleeves/ducts. In addition a ropa should be installed inside
the pipe and tied at both ends to the markers underground
concrete support block or to an adjacent landmark.
4
All elCcavation and backfill shall conform to the
requirements of Sub-sections 2.3 - 'Roadway Excavation'
and 2.7- 'Excavation and Backfilling for Structures'.
18.3.4
Sleevesfducts shall be measured in linear meters of

pipe of the various types, classes and sizes laid, measured
as a straight line. No allowance will be made for cut ends
and waste. The rates shall be deemed to include for all
work including the laying of markers and concrete
surrounds, but does not include elCcavation as stated in
Item (21 below.
2
Trench excavation and backfilling shall be measured
and paid for as indicated in Clause 2.8.4 Item (41.
18.3.5
Basis of Payment
The quantity of completed and accepted work for

sleevesfducts pipes measured as provided for above will
be paid for at the unit rate in the Bill of Quantities, which is
18-3
~~
Ml11itrv of TranapQrt & CommunlcatiOf'ls
DGRLT
~~"'Utilities
deemed to cover all costs except excavation as stated in

Clause 18.3.4, item (21.
18.3.6
18-4 .

Sleeves/ducts (type] (diameter!
lin.m.
Ref.
Trtle
19.1
General
19.1.1
Description
19.2
Compaction Plant
19.2.1
19.2.2
19.2.3
19.2.4
19.2.6
19.2.8
Genel'lll
Pneumatic-Tired Rolle111
Hellll'( Pneumatic-Tired Rollei'IJ
SelfProponed Pneumatic-Tired Rollen
Tamping Rollera
1iitle
19-1
19.10
Heating Equipment
19-1
19.11
Mixers for Concrete Pavements 19-6
19-1
19.12
Portable Concrete Mixers
19-7
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-1
19.13
Truck Mixers and Agitators
19-7
19.14
Concrete Batch Plants
19-7
19.14.1
19.14.2
Automatic Concnrte Batchlng Plants
Tandem Two and Three-Whllllled

RoHera
19.2.7
19.2.8
Ref.
!?age No.
Vibrating Rollei'IJ
Trench Rollera
19-1
19-2
19-2
19.3
Miscellaneous Equipment
19.3.1
19.3.2
19.3.3
19.3,4
19.3.5
19.3.6
Dltc Harrows
Travelling Mixing Plant
19-2
19-2
19-2
19-2
19-2
19-2
19.4
Hauling Equipment
19-2
19.5
Weigh Bridges
19-2
19.6
Water Distribution Equipment
19-3
19.7
Hot Mix Asphalt Equipment
19-3
19.7.1
19.7.2
General
19.7.3
Additional Requirements
Mechanical Sweepera
Mechanical Rammen
Motai'Gradera
Rotary Speed Mixera
19-3
Additional Requirements
for Batc:h-Type Plants
for Continuous Mixing Plants
19.8
19-2
Spreading and Rnishfng

Machines
19-4
19-6
19-5
19.8.1
19.8.2
Asphalt Pavera
19-6
Aggregate Spreedera
19-5
19.9
Pressure Distributors
19-6
19.15
19.161
19.15.2
19.15.3
Genel'lll
Equipment for Concrete

Pavement
Gene1111
Subgrade Pre~ratlon Equipment
19-7
19-8
19-9
19-9
19-10
19-10
Miscellaneous Minor Equipment

for CollC(ate Pavements
19.16
19-6
Mechanical Concrete Spreadera

and Rnlshera
19.16.4
Page No.
and Basis of Payment
19-11
19-11
SultDnat Df Omnn. Srondord Spedfiartlans for Road & a dge CQnsltuaion 2010
Plant and Equipment)
19.1
General
19.1.1
Description
The plant and equipment used for the Works shall be

as proposed and itemized in the Contractor's approved
detailed program and equipment list, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
2
The plant and equipment shall be of sufficient power
and size and in sound and well maintained mechanical
condition to meet the requirements and produce a
satisfactory quality of work. All items shall be ready for
use when required by the Engineer, The Engineer may
order removal of unsatisfactory plant and equipment and
require replacements meeting his approval. Assessment
of capacity and efficiency shall be based on the actual
performance on Site.
3
Whenever either the Specification or the Engineer
requires use of plant and equipment of a particular size or
type the Contractor may request in writing, permission to
use alterative equipment. The proposal shall contain
evidence satisfactory to the Engineer that the output of the
alterativa proposed Is at least equal to that of tha specified
item.
4
The purpose of this provision is to ancourage the
davelopment of new or improved plant and equipment.
The Engineer may require trials in adva nee of the use of
the item in works construction.
5
If permission is granted, it shall be on the
understanding that it may be withdrawn at any time the
Engineer determines that results are not satisfactory.
Upon withdrawal of permission the Contractor shall use
plant and equipment originally specified and shall remove
and dispose of or otherwise remedy at his own expense
defective or unsatisfactory work produced with the
alternative. No compensation will be allowed for any
delay or additional costs incurred by the Contractor as e
result of implementation of this provision.
19.2
Compaction Plant
19.2.1
General
No item of plant shall be used that has in any way

been thrown out of its original balance by the application
of attachments not approved by the Engineer.
2
The Contractor shall provide the means of readily
determining the effective mass of each roller or wheel of
plant being operated. Any ballasting shall be included in
the weighing.
3
The mass and compactive effort, or load, applied by
the roller shall be as specified, or as appropriate to the
work being undertaken.
19.2.2
Pneumatic-Tired Rollers
These rollers shall have not less than 9 pneumatic

tires revolving on 2 axles. Tires on the front and rear
wheels shall be staggered so that they cover the anti re

area over which the roller travels. Under working
conditions rollers shall develop a compactive effort of not
less than 10kN per wheel.
19.2.3
Heavy Pneumatic-Tired Rollers
These rollers shall have a mass of not less than 25

tonne and shall consist of not less than 4 pneumatic-tired
wheels revolving in one transverse line. The width of the
roller shall be not less than 2.4m and it shall be
constructed in 2 or more sections in such a manner th et
each section is free to oscillate or move independently.
Under working condition the roller shall develop a
co mpactive effort of not less than 25kN per wheel.
19.2.4
Self-Propelled Pneumatic-Tired
Rollers
These rollers shall be of the oscillating wheel type

having not less than 1 pneumatic-tired wheels revolving
on two axles, and capable of being ballasted to the mass
required.
2
Tires on front and rear wheels sha II be staggered so
that tire sidewalls have a minimum overlap of 12mm.
Rollers shall operate smoothly and without jerking when
starting, stopping or reserving direction. Tires under
working conditions shall be inOated to pressures between
0.4 and 0.8 N/mm2 The roller shall be fitted with a water
system to keep all tires uniformly wet it necessary.
19.2.5
Tamping Rollers
These rollers under working conditions shall have a

minimum mass of 4000 kg per meter width of drum, and
each individual tamping foot shall develop a compactive
effort of not less than 0.7N/mm2 of tamping face area. The
width of the roller shall be not less than 2.4m and shall be
constructed in 2 or more sections so that each section is
free to move independently. It shall be fitted with cleaning
teeth at the rear.
19.2.6
Tandem Two and Three-Wheeled

Rollers
These rollers shall be selfpropelled or towed and

capable of being operated smoothly and without jerking
when starting, stopping, or reversing directions. The
steering shall permit the roller to be accurately directed on
the alignment desired. Roller drum wheels shall be
smooth steel and free from openings or projections which
will mar the surface on which the roller is operated.
Rollers shall be equipped with drip pans designed to
prevent oil, grease or petrol from dripping onto the work
surface. They shall be provided with adjustable scrapers
to keep the surface of the wheels clean.
2
When used on a bituminous surface, rollers shall be
fitted with water tanks and sprinkling devices which shall
19-1
~~
Miollry of Trftnl'pOtt &
Commurdc~tion
OGRLT
~~(\flant and Equipment
be used when necessary to wet the wheels and prevent

the bituminous mixture from sticki ng to them.
3
Rear wheels may be crowned at a rate of not more
than 1 in 288 for two whee!ed, and 1 in 320 for three
wheeled rollers,
Rear wheels of three-wheel rollers, shall be propelled

with a differential gear. The front wheel shall show no
noticeable crown and shall overlap the compacted area or
each rear wheel bv not less than 60mm.
19.2.7
Trench RoUers
These shall be self-propelled, steel wheel rollers,

capable of being operated smoothly and without jerking
when starting, stopping or reversing direc!lon. The width
of the wheel shall be not more than 500mm and diameter
of the compaction rolls shall be not more than 1.5m.
2
Wheels shall be smooth and free from openings or
projections which will mar the surface on which the roller
is operated. Rollers shall be equipped with drip pans
designed to prevent oil. grease, or gasoline from dripping
onto the work surlace. and shall be provided with
adjustable scrapers to keep the outface of the wheels
clean. The balance wheel of the roller shall be adjustable
in height to provide the slope of surlace required.
19.3
Miscellaneous Equipment
19.3.1
Disc Harrows
O:sc harrows shall be of the tandem type and shall be

of sufficient size, mass and number of discs to perform the
manipulation required
19.3.2
Mechanical Sweepers
Sweepers shall be constructed in a manner which

will permit the revolution of the broom to be adjusted in
relation to its progression and permit adjustment of the
broom height In relation to the surlace being cleaned.
Broom bristles shall be stiff enough to sweep cle~n
without cutting into the surface. Brooms with steel bristles
shall not be used.
19.3.3
Mechanical Rammers
Mechanical or power rammers shall have a mass

between 100 kg and 750 kg,
192
Motor Graders
Motor graders shall be self-powered and equipped

with an adjustable mold board. The cutting blade shall be
straight.
19.3.5
Rotary Speed Mixers
Rotary speed mixers shall be either of the power

take-off or self-powered type, equipped with a hydraulic
lift.
Vibrating Rollers
These shall be self-propelled or towed and have a

means of applying mechanical vibration to one or more
smooth steeldrum wheels. They sh11ll be fined with a
device. or provided with the means for. indicating the
frequency at which the roller is operating, which will be as
recommended by the manufacturer.
19.2.8
19.3.4
19.3.6
Travelling Mixing Plant
Travelling or stationary mixing plant shall be either

of the type which will pulverize the material to be treated
and mix it with the binder and the proper amount of water
without picking up material from the roadway, or the type
which elevates roadway material Into a pugmill for mixing.
Plant shall be fitted with a device which will accurately
control and measure the quantity of water used.
19.4
Hauling Equipment
Hauling equipment for construction materials shall

be vehicles having hydraulically operated dump bodies
suitable for depositing loose materials in a windrow or
into spreader boxes. Bodies shall be so constructed that
volume measurement can be accurately carried out. They
shall be constructed and maintained to prevent loss of
materials during hau ling operations. Dump controls that
can be operated from the driver' s seat shall be fitted.
19.5
Weigh Bridges
Weighing equipment tor truckhauled material shall

consist of platform scale accurate to 0.5% throughout the
range of use, Scales shall have a platform of adequate
length to weigh, in one operation, the longest truck or
truck-trailer combination which is in use on the works.
2
Scales shall be inspected
approved company as often as
necessary. Each certification shall
i nspection and the name of the
inspection.
and certified by an
the Engineer deems
show the date of the
Company making the
3
If no suitable company ex!sts, or if instructed by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall check and adjust the scale
in the presence of the Engineer, using the method
recommended bv the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of ten
25kg standard test weights for each scale on Site for
checking purposes.
4
The Contractor shall, when Instructed bv the
Engineer, make mass comparisons with other
permanently located scales that meet the approva l of the
Engineer. The comparisons shall be for the purpose of
providing information on the performance of the
Contractor's scle and will not be used as a basis for
adjusting the scale.
Sultanate of Oman. Stondotd Speci!icllions l01 Ro.od & Bn~ Cons!~
5
Access to the scale platform shall be maintained by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and a
suitable weathertight building shall be provided to enclose
the indicating mechanism Adequate lighting for the scale
operator's use shall be installed.
19.6
Water Distribution Equipment
Equipment for the distribution of water shall consist

of self propelled or towed tanks equipped with spray bars
and, when required, pumps to operate under pressure.
Pumps shall be of sufficient capacity to provide uniform
end adequate distribution. The tanks shall be mounted on
pneumatic-tired trucks or on pneumatic-tired trailers
pulled by pneumatic-tired equipment. The minimum
capacity of a tank shall be 4000 liters.
2
Distribution equipment shall be constructed so as to
permit accurate and uniform distribution of the desired
quantities of water, Control valves shall fully close with no
leakage and shall be constructed to operate from the
driver's seat, or provision made for an additional operator
to work control valves while the equipment is travelling.
19.7
Hot Mix Asphalt Equipment
19.7.1
General
Hot-mix plant shall be either of the batch-type or

continuous-type. Plant shall not be used to produce
mixtures concurrently for more than one contract unless
permission is granted by the Engineer. Plant units shall
be designed and operated so that they will function
properly and produce bituminous mixture of uniform
temperature and composition within the tolerances
specified.
2
The plant shall be approved by the Engineer before
production begins. It shall be fitted with adequate and safe
stairways to the miKer platform and sampling points plus
a room of
3
The plant shall be complete with a control room of
approximately 18m2 floor area for performing tests for
control of the mixture. The room shall be provided with
sufficient heat, natural and artificial light and air
conditioning, and be equipped with a desk, chair, drafting
stool, work bench 1m by 3m by 1m high with drawers and
cabinets below, service sink, water supply and electric
power outlets. First aid equipment, telephone, fire
extinguisher (having a minimum Underwriters Laboratory
rating of 2A10BC), and sanitary facilities shall be provided.
When approved by the Engineer a room conforming to the
above requirements, in e separate building. may be
substituted.
4
Guarded ladders shall be placed at all points where
access to plant operation is required. Access to the top of
truck bodies shall be provided by a platform or other
suitable device to enable the Engineer to obtain samples
and mixture temperature data. A hoist or pulley system
shall be provided to raise scale calibration equipment,
sampling equipment and other similar equipment from

the ground to the mixer platform and return. Gears,
pulleys, chains, sprockets and other dangerous moving
parts shall be properly guarded. Ample and unobstructed
space shall be provided on the mixing platform. Clear and
unobstructed passage shall be maintained in and around
the truck loading area which shell be kept free from
droppings from the mixing platform.
5
The plant shall be equipped with a dust collecting
system. Collected dust shell be stored in a hopper and
shall be fed to the boot of the hot elevator at a uniform
rate by a variable speed vane feeder or mechanical feeder
during the period when a full stream of aggregate is being
fed from the drier to the hot elevator. The accuracy of the
feeder shall not be affected by the head of material in the
collected dust storage hopper. A 'low bin' indicator shall
be required ahead of the feeder.
6
The plant shall be located where it can be supplied
with adequate storage and vehicle movement space.
Separate stockpiles of each size of aggregate shall be
arranged, with rigid partitions to prevent Intermixing of
different materials between adjacent stock piles. In
general, fine aggregates to be used in bituminous
mixtures shall be placed in separate stock piles before
they are placed in the cold bins. Aggregates shall be kept
separated until they are fed in proper proportions onto a
belt conveyor or into the boot of the cold aggregate
elevator. Aggregates shall be handled es to prevent
contemination and degradation.
7
When compartment aggregate feeders are used, the
width of the crane bucket shall not be more than half the
minimum width of the top of bin compartments and the
maKimum length of the bucket when tully open shall be at
least 300mm less than the length of the top of the bin
companment, When an end loader is used to charge cold
bins the maximum discharge width of the bucket shall be
600mm less than the width of the top of the bin
compartment.
8
The plant shall be provided with accurate mechanical
means for feeding each aggregate in proper proportion
into the drier so that uniform production shall be
maintained. Control of the total quantity of combined
aggregates fed to the drier shall be by a variable speed
system. Other methods may be proposed for approval by
the Engineer. Gates shall be capable of being locked or
bolted securely in the required position. A minimum of 4
bins and feeders will be required.
9
The plant shall be equipped with revolving cylindrical
drier or driers for heating aggregates to the temperatures
required when the plant is operating at its full rated
capacity.
10 Screens used in separating aggregates shall be the
vibrating type. The system shall be equipped with a
scalping screen having openings not more than 12.5mm
greater than the largest size of aggregate used in
preparing the bituminous mixture. The screening system
shall have a tailing pipe for removal of oversized
1 ~3
~~
M;nltrv or Tranport & Communk:ntian
OGRLT
~~<.Plant and Equipment
aggregate. The discharge point of the tailing pipe shall be

located so that it will not create a hazard.
11 Hot aggregate storage bins at sufficient capacity to
supply the mixer when lt Is operating at full capacity shall
be provided. Bins shall be arranged to give separate
storage of the appropriate proportions of mineral
aggregates. Separate dry storage shall be provided for
mineral filler and the plant shall be equipped to feed
material into the mixer. Each bin shall be provided with
overflow pipes to prevent backing up of material into
other compartments or bins. Each compartment shall be
provided with an individual outlet gate constructed so that
when closed there shall be no leakage. Gates shall cut off
quickly and completely, Bins shall be so constructed that
samples can be readily obtained.
12 Temperature recording shall be done either by
recording pyrometer or recording thermometer having at
least 2 terminals when a single drier is used and at least 3
terminals when a dual drier is used. The type and accuracy
of the recording instrument shall be approved by the
Engineer. Unless otherwise approved, one terminal shall
be installed at a suitable location at the discharge of each
drier and the others near the discharge gate in each bin
compartment used for fine aggregate. The temperature
recording instrument shall be capable of producing
accurate temperature charts for submission to the
Engineer after each day's operation.
13 The recording instrument shall be installed in a
position free from dust and vibration. If the instrument Is
not located to indicate clearly to the drum fireman the
temperature of the mineral aggregates at the discharge of
each drier, a non-recording pyrometer shall also be
installed In v;ew of the fireman.
14 Storage tanks for bitumen shall be equip ped to heat
and hold material at the required temperatures. Heating
shall be accomplished by steam coils, hot oil coils,
electricity or other approved means so that no flame shall
be in contact with the tank. Lines and finings shall be
steam, electric or hot oil jacketed. Provision shall be made
for sampling from the line leading to the weigh bucket if
more than one grade of bitumen is required for concurrent
operations. adequate storage and separate piping to the
weigh bucket for each grade shall be provided to prevent
intermingling. An armored thermometer or pyrometer
which wlll accurately show temperatures between
100"Cand 200"C shall be located in the line or within the
tank.
19.7.2
Additional Requirements for BatchType Plants
Equl pment for weighing and measurlng aggregate

shall include means for accurately weighing each size in a
weigh box or hopper suspended on scales and of ample
size to hold a full belch without hand raking or
overflowing. The gate shall close lightly so that no
material is abowed to teak into the mixer while a batch is
being weighed.
19-4 .
2
If aggregates are measured by volume in calibrated
compartments these shall form the weigh hopper and
shall be arranged so that the volume measurement of
each compartment and each batch may be checked by
mass. Means of checking the volume measurement shall
meet the approval of the Engineer.
3
The weigh scale shall be a spring less dial type with a
capacity of not more than twice the mass of the capacity
of the mhcer.
4
The mineral filler shall be weighed in the aggregate
hopper or measured by volume in a calibrated
compartment and shall be conveyed by means of a dust
elevator and screw conveyor system. The system shall be
so arranged that the accuracy of the feed will not be
affected by the head of material in the mineral filler bin.
The screw conveyor shall operate at such a speed that
small fractions of material to be weighed may be added
accurately. The chute used to introduce mineral filler into
the weigh hopper shall be so constructed that no material
1s retained in it after the required amount has been
deposited in the weigh hopper.
5
Equipment for weighing and measuring bitumen
shall consist either of a weigh bucket or a metering device.
If a weigh bucket is used it shall be a nontilting type and
shall be completely suspended from a springless dial scale
accurate to :t0.4%. The weigh bucket, discharge valve or
valves and spray bar shalt be heated and shall have a
capacity of at least 15% in excess of the mass of material
required in the batch. Heated, quickacting, nondrip
valves shall be used in charging the bucket.
6
Metering devices shall have a capacity at least 15% in
excess of the quantity of bitumen used in a batch. Controls
shall be constructed so that they may be locked at any dial
sening and wiB automatically reset to that reading after
the addition of bituminous material. The amou nt of
material which the Contractor will be permitted to mhc per
batch shall be determined by the Eng'neer. The m ixer
shall be a twln-shaft type. Drip pans shall be used under
the mixer where necessary to prevent moisture from
dripping onto truck loads of freshly prepared asphalt. Pipe
finings shall be tight. The mixer platform shall be
sufficiently rig id and of ample s!ze to provide safe and
convenient access to the mixer and other equipment.
7
The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate time
lock to control the operations of a complete mixing cycle.
It shall lock the weigh bo x gate after the charging of the
mhcer until the closing of the mixer gate on completion of
the cycle. It shall lock the bitumen bucket throughout the
dry mhcing period and shall lock the mixer gate
throughout both dry and wet mixing periods. The dry
mixing period Is defined as the interval of time between
the opening of the weigh box gate and the start of the
introduction of bitumen. The wet mixing period Is the
Interval of time between the start of the introduction of
bitumen and the opening ofthe mixer gate. Control of the
timing shall be flexible and capable of being set at
intervals of 5 seconds or less throughout a total cycle.
Sening of t ime Intervals shall be performed in the
Sultnata of Omftn, Slondlld S.,..
a~
t. Bridj,eCo ,.,
----------P--Ia_n_t__
a_n_d_E
__
q_u-ip
__
rn_e_n_t~~
presence of the Engineer who shell then lock the case

covering the timing device until such time as a change is
to be made in the timing periods. A mechanical batch
counter shall be installed as part of the time lock device. It
shall register only upon actuation of the asphalt weigh
bucket or valve release. II shall not register eny dry
batches or any materiel released during the operation of
filling the bins.
19.7.3
Additional Requirements for

Continuous Mixing Plants
A gradation control unit shall be included for

accurately proportioning each size of aggregate and
mineral filler.
2
Feeders shall be mounted under each compartment
bin. Each compartment bin shall have an accurately
controlled individual gate to form an orifice for
volumetrically measuring the materiel drawn. The feeding
orifice shall be rectangular with one dimension adjustable
by positive mechanical means provided with a lock.
Indicators marked in millimeters shall be provided on each
gate to show the gate opening. Bins shall be equipped
with tell-tete devices to indicate the position of aggregates
in bins at the lower quarter points. The condition of the
conveyor belt shalt be continuously checked and adjusted
to avoid segregation of the aggregates.
3
A cutoff system shall be provided which shalt
automatically stop mixing operations when any bin
becomes empty or when the bitumen reaches a level in
the tank where the specified quantity is not delivered to
the pugmill.
4
The plant shall include means for calibration of the
gate openings by weighing test samples. Provision shell
be made so that materials fed out of individual orifices
may be bypassed to individual test boxes. The plant shalt
be equipped to conveniently handle Individual test
samples weighing not less than 100kg. Accurate scales
shall be provided by the Contractor to weigh lest samples.
5
Interlocking mechanical controls or other positive
methods approved by the Engineer shall be provided to
synchronize the flow of aggregates from the bins and the
flow of bitumen from the meter or other proportioning
device. A revolution counter graduated in 0.01 revolutions
shall be visibly located on the plant. Means shall be
provided for checking by mass the flow of bitumen.
6
The heated mixer shall be capable of producing a
uniform mixture within job-mix tolerances. It shall be
equipped with a discharge hopper with dump gates which
will permit rapid and complete discharge of the mixture.
Paddles shall be adjustable for angular position on shafts
and reversible to retard the flow of mix. The spray bar of
the mixer shall be equipped with a pressure gauge. An
adjustable baffle or dam which can be locked or bolted in
position shall be placed at the discharge end of the
pugmill. The mixer shall have a nominal capacity of not
less than 50!/h and shall have a manufacturer's plate
giving the net volumetric contents of the mixer at the
several heights inscribed on a permanent gauge. Charts

shell be provided showing the rate of feed of aggregate
per minute.
7
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer the mixing
time shall be determined using the following formula The
mass shall be determined for the job by tests made in the
presence of the Engineer
Mixing time in seconds=
Pugmill dead caoecjtv fkgl

Pugm'll output lkg/s)
8
The pugmill shall be equipped with a discharge
hopper having a minimum capacity of 900kg.
19.8

Machines
19.8.1
Asphalt Pavers
Asphalt pavers shall be self-contained. power

propelled units provided with an ectiveted screed or
strike- off assembly, heated if necessary end capable or
spreading and finishing courses of bituminous plant-mix
material in widths appropriate to the typ' cal sections and
thicknesses shown on the Drawings.
2
Automatic controls of the paver shall be by a linkage
arrangement so that through the process of automaticel y
adjusting the screed thickness control, the asphalt can be
placed and finished to e predetermined grade and uniform
slope and cross-section. Manually controlled pavers may
be used if approved by the Engineer. Such pavers shall be
capable of spreading the mix in such a manner that no
supplemental shaping will be required.
3
Pavers shall be equipped with a receiving hopper of
sufficient capacity for the spreading operation. The hopper
shell be equipped with a distribution system to place
mixture uniformly in front of the screed. The screed or
strike-off assembly shall produce a finished surface of the
required evenness and texture without tear! ng, pushing or
gouging the mixture. When laying the mixture, the paver
shall be capable of being operated at forward speeds
consistent with satisfactory placement.
19.8.2
Aggregate Spreaders
Spreaders used in placing aggregates in layers shall

contain a strike-off plate capable of being adjusted so as
to place material in uniform layers from 10 to 300mm in
thickness. They shall be fitted with two end gates or cut
~ff plates so that aggregates may be spread in widths
varying up to the full lane width.
2
Spreaders used for surface treatment, shall be of a
mechanical type approved by the Engineer. They shell
distribute aggregate uniformly end shall be capable of
being adjusted so that spreading rate will not vary by
more than 1kg/m3
195
~
~
Minitry of Tranport & CommuniCBtion. DGRL T
~~<:,Plant and Equipment
19.9
Pressure Distributors
Pressure distri butors used for applying biwmen or

bituminous emulsions shall be mounted on self-propelled
trucks which she'.! be capable of operating smoothly at
speeds down to 1.0kmlh when used on construction end
at road speeds from 50 to 70kmlh when used for
transporting bltumen.
2
The bitumen tank shall have a capacity between 2000
liters and 9500 liters. Approval shell be obtained from the
Engineer pri or to use of a larger tank. The tank shall be
covered by a minimum of 25mm Insulation. It shall be
equipped with a removable access cover, an overflow pipe
and a suitable strainer located at the pump intake or the
outlet to prevent the passage of any material which might
clog the nozzles. A dial gauge visible to the spray bar
operator shall Indicate the contents of the tank at various
levels, and a pressure gauge shall show the pressure at
which bitumen is applied. The tank shall be fitted with an
accurate measuring stick.
3
The bitumen distributor shall be equipped with a
heating system. The system shall consist of hat flues
having sufficient radiat ion to give rapid circulation of hot
gases of combustion from one or more efficient smokeless
burners of the torch type, a circulating device to give
uniform heating of material, and a suitable fuel supply
tank.
4
The distributor pump shall be of a rotary positive
pressure type of sufficient size and discharge capacity to
apply uniformly the specified amount of bitumen in widths
up to 7.5m. It shall be driven by a petrol motor, other than
the vehicle propelling motor. The pump motor shall have
sufficient power to operate the distributor pump at the
required volume and pressure. If the pump motor is
equipped with a trai\Smission it shall have a governor.
Suitable housing or heating jackets shall be provided to
enclose the distributor pump and piping_
5
Spray bars of various lengths shan be used to spray
bitumen over widths varying from 1..2m to 7.5m. Spray
bars shall be arranged so that they may be traversed
lat erally over a distance of not less than 230mm t o match
joints and to clear obstructions. They shall be fitted with
spray nozzles to give uniform distribution of the material
in t he specified quantities. Means shall be provided to
stop t he flow quickly and to prevent it from dripping when
the flow is shut off. Means shall be provided for obtaining
samples o f material from the tank or from pl ping leading
from the tank to the spray b1rs.
6
A hand spray bar and nozzle having a suitable length
of flexible hose with packed couplings shall be provided
for applying material at intersections, shoulders and
similar locatlons.
7
A mercury thermometer with a stem extending into
the material or Into a well, shall be placed In a suitable
position in the tank to give the temperature of the contents.
8
A substantial platform for the operator shall be
provided at the rear ofthe distributor. It shall be so located
19--6
that it will provide a clear view of the operation of the

spray bars.
9
A tachometer shall be attached to the truck so as to
be visible to the truck operator and to enable him to
mai ntain the constant speed necessary for application of
the specified quantity of bitumen. Suitable charts shall be
prepared showl ng the truck speeds necessary to obtain
the required results. Alternatively, a synchronizer can be
used. The synchronizer shall deliver the specified quantity
of bitumen onto the road surface regardless of the speed
at the truck.
10 The distributor shall be calibrated in the presence of
the Engi neer before work is started and the Contractor
shall supply equipment, tools, al'ld materials for the
calibration.
19.10
Heating Equipment
The heating equipment shalt have sufficient capacity

to heat the bituminous material by circul ating steam or
hot oil through coils In the tank or by any other method
approved by the Engineer. Tanks which have defective
coils or which are without coils will be rejected unless
some satisfactory auxiliary means can be provided by the
Contractor to heat the material wit hout Introduction of
moisture. Use of 1ny equi pment to agitate bituminous
material while it i s being heated will be prohibit ed i f. in the
opinion of the Engineer, It changes the characteristics of
the material. Free steam o r hot oil shall not be introduced
directly into the material.
19.11
Mixers for Concrete Pavements
Paving mixers shall be the batch type and shall have

a rated capacity of not less than 0,75m3 of mixed concrete.
Mlxars having multiple mixi ng drums may be used. The
mixer shill be equipped with boom and bucket delivery
and the bucket shall be so constructed that it w ill
distribute concrete in a uni form and satisfactory manner,
The mixer skip shall be equipped with a bulkhead suitably
pi aced and capable of retaining a full batch of aggregates
and cement without spillage.
The mixer shall be equi pped with a batch meter for
2
counting batches and a t iming devic:e which automatically
locks the discharge lever until t he end of the mixing period.
The timing devi ce shall be equi pped with a bell adjusted
to ring eillch time the lock is released. If the timing device
becomes out of order the Contractor will be permitted to
continue while It Is being repai red, provided each batch is
mixed and me nually t imed for at least 1.5 minutes. If the
timing device is not In good working order within 72 hours,
further use of the mixer shall be prohibited until repairs
are completed.
3
The mixer shall be equipped w ith a water measuring
device wruch shall be capable of measuring and
dischargng the specified amount of water to :1: 1o/o. The
accuracy of measurement shall not be affected by
variations In pressure in the water supply. Water
SultanBt1t Dl Oman. Slndrd Specifiatians for Rood & BndQe ConslructJon 2010
measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank from

which the water measuring tank shall be filled. The
volume of the auxlli ary tank shall be not less than the
volume of measuring tank. Equipment shall be so
arranged that water pressure in the measuring tank cannot
exceed that due to the difference in elevation between the
two tanks. The measuring tank shall be equipped with an
outside tap to provide for checking the graduation on the
indicator unless other means are provided for readily and
accurately determining the amount of water discharged.
Means shalf be provided to automatically stop the flow of
water from the measuring tank when the desired quantity
has been delivered.
4
The type of equipment shall be such that the quantity
of water delivered shall not be affected by tilting the mixer.
There shall be no leakage and if the water measuring
equipment fails to deliver the proper quantity of water due
to the mechanical condition of the equipment, the
operation of the mixer shalf be suspended until repairs
have been made.
5
Pick-up and throw-over blades In the drum of the
mixer which are worn down 20mm or more in depth shall
be replaced with new blades.
19.12
Portable Concrete Mixers
1
Portable concrete mixers for incidental construction
shall be of the batch type. Mixers involving placing 25m3
or more in a single pour shall have a rated capacity of not
less than 0. 25m3 per batch. Other portable mixers shall
have a rated capacity of not less than 0.17m3 per batch.
The mixer shall be equipped with a batch meter, timing
device and water measuring device as specified in Clause
19.1 1.
2
Pick-up and threw-over blades in the drum of the
mixer which are worn down more than 20mm shall be
replaced with new blades.
19.13
Truck Mixers and Agitators
Truck mixers shall be of the type having a watertight

revolving drum, suitably mounted and fitted with blades
inside the drum. They shall be capable of combining
aggregates, cement and water into a uniform mixture and
of discharging the mixture without segregation. A truck
mixer shall have attached to it a metal plate on which is
stated its capacity In terms of volume of mixed concrete
for the various uses for which the equipment Is suitable.
2
Except when used exclusively for agitating premixed
concrete, trucks sha It be provided with a batch meter and
locking device capable of preventing discharge of concrete
before the required number of revolutions has been
obtained or with a revolution counter suitably mounted to
provide means of veril'ying the amount of mixing
performed. Water shall not be added to concrete in transit
from a pre-mix plant.
3
The water measuring device shall be capable of
discharging the specified amount of water with an
accuracy of 1%. If water is added during transit, the

measuring device may be mounted on the truck mixer and
an outside tap or valve shall be provided for checking the
graduations on the indicator, unless other means are
provided for readily and accurately determining the
amount of mixing water discharged. Provision shalt be
made to automatically stop the flow of water when the
desired amount has been delivered. If not mounted on the
truck, the water measuring device shall be located at the
site selected for adding water and shalt conform to the
requirements of Sub-section 19.1 1.
4
Equipment for weighing and batching materials
intended for truck mixing shall comply with the relevant
clauses of these specifications
5
Truck agitators shall be of the type having a
watertight revolving drum suitably mounted and fitted
with internal blades attached to the drum. Truck agitators
when fully loaded shalt be capable of maintaining the
concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of
discharging concrete without segregation. Agitators shall
transport and discharge concrete without leakage of
ingredients. A truck agitator shalt have attached to it a
metal plate on which is stated its capacity in terms of
volume of the pre-mixed concrete for the various uses of
which the equipment is suitable.
6
Concrete from central or pre-mix plants shalt not ba
in transit in truck mixers or agitators I anger than 30
minutes, measured between loading discharge and
commencement of pouring. If mora than one batch Is
required for charging a truck, the time of haul shall be
reckoned from the start of mlxl ng ofthe first batch.
19.14
Concrete Batch Plants
19.14.1 General
The plant shall be approved by the Engineer before
production begins. Bins, weighing hoppers and scales
shalt be arranged to the satisfaction of the Engineer so
that the weigh beam, dial or dial scale is in full view of the
operator controlling the gates. valves or belts that feed
material into the weighing hopper. The plant shalt be
equipped with a room as specified in Sub-section 19.7
2
Storage bins shalt have sufficient capacity for
adequate supply of material to weighing hoppers. They
shall be supported by a rigid framework on a solid
foundation. Bins shalt have adequate separate
compartments for each size of aggregate and for bulk
cement when used. The top of the fine aggregate
compartment shall be equipped with a tilted screen
having a maximum mesh size of 2.5mm through which all
fine aggregate must pass. Each compartment shalt be
designed to discharge material efficiently and freely into
the weighing hopper. Means of control shalt be provided
so that when the quantity to be obtained is being
approached the flow of material can be gradually retarded
and completely shut off, without leakage, at the moment
the desired amount has been discharged.
19 7
~~
M matry of Tronaport & CommunJcatlon. OGRlT
~~<.Plant and Equipment
3
Weighi ng hoppers shall be completely suspended
from scale and shall hang free and except as further
provided, shall have sufficient capacity to contain
materials to be weighed for one batch of concrete without
shoveling and without jiggling the hopper to keep bin
gates and chute openings free of material. Cement shaD
be weighed in a hopper and independent of the hoppers
used for weighing aggregate.
4
Batching equipment insufficient in capacity to weigh
materials required for a full batch will be permitted
provided the capacity of the hoppers is sufficient to weigh
3
all materials for at least 1m of concrete for any mixer of
rated capacity of 1m3 or larger. Disproportion between
botching equipment and the mixer shall not be so great
that more than 3 weighings of each material will be
required for charging the mixer.
5
Aggregate hoppers shall have a port or other
opening for removal of overload unless sufficient
clearance exists between the bottom of the bin gate and
the top of the hopper. The top of the cement hopper shall
be closed to prevel'lt escape of cement while It is being
weighed. Hoppers shall be designed to eliminate
accumulation of unused material and leakage through
discharge gates during weighing. They shall be capable of
discharging materi al efficiently and completely into batch
trucks or the mixer without the necessity of beating or
jiggling. If a hopper In the opinion of the Engineer does
not discharge material satisfactorily, it shall be provided
with a vibrator of sufficient frequency and power to
provide comp!ete discharge Weighing hoppers shall be
enclosed or otherwise protected against wind. When bins
are not available, mat erials shall be weighed in cont ainers.
End loaders shall not be used for loading the weighing
hopper.
Scales may be of either the horizontal beam or
6
springless dial type designed as an integral unit of the
batchlng plant and shall be of rugged construction. Beam
type scares used for weighing one size or kind of
aggregate shaH have one full capacity weigh beam.
Multipl e beam scales used in weighing more than one size
or kind of aggregate shall have as many beams as the
number of sizes or ki nds of aggregate to be weighed.
Individual beams shall have such capacities as will permit
the required mass of each size or kind of material to be set
off on a single beam. The scale shall be provided with
suitable lockouts so that weigh beams may be engaged to
weigh in the desired order.
7
Each weigh beam shall have some means placed in a
position from which it can be viewed without parallax by
the operator while charging the hopper, to indicate when
the beam Is In the proper balance position. Poises shall be
constructed so that they wiD be held firmly in position.
Beam scales shall have a provision such as a tell-tale d'al
for indicating to the operator that the required load in the
hopper is being approached. Such a device shall indicate
at least the last 1OOkg of load in the case of scales used for
weighing aggtegate and at least the last 50kg of load in
the case of scales used for weighing cement
1!).8
8
Springless dial scales shall be provided with suitable
markers inside the glass cover and in front of the dial
which may be set to show the position of the dial ind1c:ator
for the required load or various cumulative loads when
more than one size or kind of aggregate Is weighed in the
same hopper. Markers shall be in distinctive colors for the
various materials to be weighed.
9
The value of the minimum graduation interval of any
scale shall be not more than 0.2% of the batch mass and
not more than 0.1% of the capacity of the scale. The value
of the minimum graduation interval of any scale used for
weighing water shall be not less than 1kg. Scales shall be
designed and built so that accuracy within the maximum
tolerance of :1: 0.4% of the net load in the hopper will be
maintai ned.
10 When a beam scale is used for weighing cement 11
tare shall be provided end the weigh beams shall be
capable of being lifted out of the weighing position so that
the tare weight of the hopper can be checked after each
weighing operation to determine if ell the cement he's
been discharged into the batch.
11 Scales sha P be housed or otherwise protected
against the effect of wind in a manner meeting the
12 Ten standard 10kg we!ghts shall be available on Site
for use in calibrating and testing weighing equipment.
Weights will not be required when scales are calibrated by
t rained scale personnel with adequate scale testing
equipment and the calibration is observed by the Engineer.
13 Means of access for inspection purposes shall be
safe and shd meet the approval of the Engineer. In the
case of permanently located batching plants, means of
access shall be an inclined stairway with a handrail
located so that its upward flight will end on t he scale
operator's platform. It shall be firmly attached to the
supporting members of the bin. The weigh platform shall
have a floor of metal grid or 50mm thick timber planks.
19.14.2 Automatic Concrete Batchlng Plants

Automatic equipment for weighing, measuring,
batching and mixing materials for concrete shall conform
to Sub-section 19.11 except es modified and extended by
the following provisions.
2
Each batch shall be mixed for the fu tt period required
after all the materials have entered t he mixer end
recharging the m ixer shall not occur before the previous
batch has been discharged; When batching plants are
used for successive batches of the same size, the mixing
time adjusting control shall be capable of being locked.
3
Cement and mixing water shall be weighed or
otherwise measured within the tolerance of :1:1% of the
required quantity. Each of the aggregates, whether
weighed separately or cumulatively, shall be weighed
within the tolerance of :1: 1.5% of the respective required
masses. Interlocks shall be set so that the amounts of
materials will be delivered within the tolerance stated.
Sultan"t" of Omn. Stndard Spedfotlt!Ofll for Ro.d & Hndg Conctn.ctlon 2010
4
The arrangement shall be such that the scales of the
system can be conveniently checked for accuracy. Scales
shell be designed end built so that when dreg due to the
weighing control device is included, accuracy within 0.4%
of the net load in the hopper will be maintained.
5
When mixing water is measured volumetrically
provision shall be made for by-passing measured water
into a container for checking the accuracy of delivery. If
water is measured during the course of its flow into the
batch, means shall be provided to show at any time
during the flow, the amount that has entered. Devices for
volumetric measurement of mtxtng water shall
automatically reset at the initial position immediately after
delivery of the measured amount and be ready for the
next batch cycle.
6
The dispenser for an admixture shall provide a visual
indication that the admixture is actually entering the batch.
The tube through which it is conducted into the stream of
the mixing water shall be transparent, or shall have a
translucent section.
7
The plant shall be provided with gates, valves or
other suitable devices, which, when activated by a single
starting mechanism, shall set in motion the charging of
weigh hoppers or other containers and which, in weighing
or measuring any given material. shall end the charging
when the desired amount has been attained. It shell be
capable of having quantities preset on a central control
panel that will result in the correct measurement of the
material for each batch. Control adjustments shell be
capable of being performed on the same panel.
8
An over and under indicating device shall be
provided to show whether the amount of material
weighed is within the allowable tolerance. An interlock
shall be provided, firstly so that the charging device can
open or start only when the scale indicates zero load end
when the weigh hopper or container discharging gate or
valve is closed, and secondly so that the discharge gate or
valve can open only when the desired mass within the
allowable tolerance is in the weigh hopper or container
and when the charging device is closed or stopped. If
different kinds or cia sses of aggregates are weighed
cumulatively into the same hopper, control and interlock
shall be provided with respect to each increment of mass,
as required for material weighed into an individual hopper.
Mixing water end admixture may be measured
volumetrically.
9
Automatic batching equipment for weighing or
measuring batch quantities in increments shell be
provided with an automatic repeater having a counter that
can be set for the number of increments required and
allowing the required number of increments to be
accurately delivered and discharged into each batch.
10 The belching system shall be activated by a single
starting mechanism and be completely interlocked so that
the discharge gates or valves can open only when the
mixer is in the proper position for receiving material.
11 The Interlocking system shall allow the batch to enter
the mixer so that some water is In advance of the
remainder of the batch. Water shall then enter uniformly

while mixing is continued and ell water shall be in the
drum by the end of the first 15 seconds of the mixing
period.
12 Means shall be provided for easy adjustment from
preset quantities of aggregates and mixing water. Suitable
equipment indicating the amount of free water in fine
aggregate as it is baing botched shall be provided and the
quantities of tine aggregate and mixing water shall be
adjusted concurrently as concrete is being produced.
13 The weighman shall not interfere with the operation
of any part of the scale mechanism during the weighing
process for the purpose of circumventing the interlock or
causing malfunction of the equipment. The Engineer may
require that equipment be provided with a positive means
for preventing such interference.
14 Automatic and semi-automatic batching plant may
be constructed so that it can be switched to manual
control. However, when switching to manual control is
necessary, batching operations shall continue only until
repairs can be made, but not for a period exceeding 72
hours. If provision is made for switching to manuel
operation, then the scale or a scala follower shall be
placed within view of the operator, but not further then 6m
from the location from which the manual batching is being
performed.
15 Botching plant that does not fully comply with the
requirements prescribed for automatic botching shall be
considered as semi-automatic. The minimum requirement
for semi-automatic batching shall be gates, valves or other
suitable devices which open or start separately when
actuated by individual starting mechanisms to permit
material to be weighed or measured, and close or stop
automatically when the desired amount has been attained.
19.15
Equipment for Concrete Pavement
19.15.1 General
Flexible or curved forms of proper radius, made of
either metal or wood, shall be supplied for use on curves
of 30m radius or less. Straight side forms shall be of metal.
They shall be of adequate cross section and supplied in
sections not less than 3m in length. They shall have a
height not less than the edge thickness of the pavement to
be constructed, a base width equal to or greater than the
height and not less than 6mm in thickness, except that a
minimum thickness of 5mm will be permitted if the form is
of trapezoidal cross section. They shall have flange braces
extending outward on the base not less than 213 the
height of the form and spaced not more than 1.5m apart.
Sections shall have a steel pin at each end and at least one
intermediate pin; provision shall be made to lock pins to a
true grade. Locked joints sha II be provided between form
~~
Minlatry of Tra.nport & Cornn1unk::ot;on. OGRll
~~ylant and Equipment
sections which are free from play or movement end which

provide support end connection.
2
Forms shall withstand impact and vibration of the
compacting and finishing equipment without visible
springing or settlement. They shall be straight edged and
free from warp. Forms with an upper edge out more than
1mm l n 1.5m from a straight line will be rejected. The
longitudinal axis of an upstandi ng leg shall not vary more
than 2mm in 1m from a straight line.
3
When used, wood forms not of marine ply shall be
made of well seasoned, surfaced plank not less than
50mm nominal thickness, and shall be the full depth ofthe
concrete slab. Provision shall be made for rigid, smooth
connections and suitable means for securely fastening in
place to lines and profiles given.
4
The supply of forms shall be sufficient to permit their
remaining In place not tess than 48 hours after concrete
has been placed, or longer if deemed necessary by the
Engineer.
5
Mechanical form graders, if used, shall be so
designed that they may be adjusted and controlled to cut
to a given profile and produce a subgrade for the
pavement forms or for slip-form paver track as shown on
the drawings.
19.15.2 Subgrade Preparation Equipment

Subgrade planers shall be of steel and shall be
mounted on rollers when forms are used, or wheels or
tracks when slip-form paving is being employed. They
shall be equipped w ith steel cutting edges or cutting
rollers so designed that they may be accurately adjusted
vertically. A subgrade planer shall be of sufficient mass so
as not to rise under pressure from the material being
planed. The subgrade planer shall be capable of producing
cross sections i n accordance with the Drawings and shall
develop a centre deflection of not more than 3mm.
Subgrade finishing machines shall be of steel
mounted on crawler tracks and shall be equipped with
steel cuttl ng edges so designed that they may be
accurately adjusted vertically anel held in place firmly. The
subgrade machines shall weigh not less than 3175kg and
have such strength and rigidity that changing the supports
from wheels to centre will develop a deflection of not
more than 3mm.
2
3
Heavy subgrade templates shall be made of steel and
designed so that they can be moved backwards and
forwards In a vertical position. They shall be mounted on
rollers, wheels or tracks, adjustable vertically, end have a
total mass not less than 225kg for widths of 5m or more.
Test points shall be spaced not more than 150mm centre
to centre and be adjustable so t hat they may be set to
conform to the cross section of the subgrade.
4
Water supply equipment shall be of such capacity
and design as to provide an ample supply and adequate
pressure si multaneously for ell the requirements of
machinery, mixing, curing. wetting subgrede and other
features of the work.
19-10
19.15.3 Mechanical Concrete Spreaders and

Finishers
When pavement forms are used, mechanical
spreaders shall operate on the forms and when formless
paving is constructed they shall operate on wheels or
tracks. Spreaders shell be self-propelled and capable of
spreading the concrete mix to the desired cross sections.
They shall be easily adjustable to spread different
thicknesses of concrete.
2
Full width vibrators of the surface pan type, or
internal type with multiple spuds, may be attached to the
spreader finishing machine or may be mounted on a
separate carriage but shall not come in contact with joints,
load transfer devices, reinforcement, subgrade, subbase
or side forms. Vibrating impulses shell be applied through
apparatus designed for this purpose, and constructed to
operate satisfactorily ahead of the finishing machine.
Vibratory impulses shall be transmitted through the
concrete with sufficient intensity to compact it throughout
its entire depth and width. The pavement vibrator shall not
be used to level or spread pavement concrete.
3
Surface pan vibrators shall be designed so that
vibrating impulses are applied directly to the surface of
t he concrete. They shall be equipped with at least two
vibrating elements for each 3m width of pavement
vibrated. The operating frequency $hall be not less than
50Hz.
Internal vibrators shall be of a suitable design with a

minimum operating frequency of 100Hz. Vibrating
elements shell be so spaced that the concrete will be
compacted throughout its entire depth and width, w ith a
maximum vibrator spacing of 600mm .
Finishing machines shall be power driven and

equipped with at least 2 screeds fully end accurately
adjustable to produce a crowned, sloping or flat surface as
required. They shall be designed and operated to strike off,
screed and compact. The machine shall have ample
strength and sufficient power, and be geared to operate
consistently end smoothly.
6
Concrete finisher floats shall be either self-propelled
or attached to the finishing machine. They shall be fitted
with independent wheels which ride on the forms and be
of sufficient mass not to flex under the pressure of
concrete. The floats shall be easily adjustable from crown
to flat. They shall be at least 750mm long with at least
600mm in contact with the concrete. They shall be
designed to prevent tearing of the concrete surface or
ro II ing of the aggregate under the float. The float pan shall
be suspended from the frame, and be capable of
adjustment In both height and width. Once adjusted, it
shell hydraulically or by other suitable means be raised
from the operator's platform. When lowered it shall
automatically return to its present position.
7
Longitudinal float machines shall be so constructed
that travel of the floating mechanism can be adjusted to
conform to the pavement cross section shown on the
Drawings or formed by the finishing machine.
8
Formless pavers shall be self-propelled and fitted
with suitable devices for distr"buting, finishing and
spreading concrete to the full-width and thickness as
shown on the Drawings. The tracks shall be of sufficient
length and width to properly support the machine and its
load without causing depressions. They shall be equipped
with a strike-off screed and internal vibrators of sufficient
quantity to provide complete compaction regardless of the
depth of concrete placed.
19.15.4 Miscellaneous Minor Equipment for

Concrete Pavements
quality bass or bassine fiber not more than 120mm in

length. The handle shall be at least 300mm longer than
half the width of the slab and be readily adjustable.
10
Edging tools shall have a radius of 6mm.
19.16
Method of Measurement and

Basis of Payment
Plant and equipment used in the works will not be

separately measured for payment, unless provided under
a Oayworks arrangement, but will be considered
subsidiary to the construction work items for which they
are being used and which are contained in the Bill of
Quantities.
Hand vibrators shall be of the internal type,

adequately powered to operate under full load at a
frequency of at least 75Hz and shall have an intensity and
period of vibration sufficient to obtain thorough
compaction of concrete.
2
Headers shall be shaped to conform to the cross
section shown on the Drawings. They shal be of wood or
metal and of sufficient thickness and rigidity to provide a
vertical construction joint. Headers for continuous
reinforced pavement shall be of wood or metal, split
longitudinally to provide for the proper depth of
continuous reinforcing steel in accordance with the
Drawings,
3
Footbridges shall be durably constructed, readily
movable and so designed that no part of the bridge will
come in contact with the pavement at any time.
4
Hand operated longitudinal floats shall be not less
than 3.5m in length and 150mm in width. Floats shall be
properly stiffened to prevent flaKing and warping, and be
provided with handles.
5
Longhandled floats shall have a blade at least 1m
long and 150mm wide. The handle shall be long enough
to permit operation of the float from the shoulder.
6
Vibrating screeds used to strike off and compact
concrete by the hand method shall be durably constructed,
and shaped to provide the cross section shown on the
Drawings. They shall be 600mm longer than the width of
the pavement, sufficiently strong and rigid to retain shape
under all working conditions and be provided with
handles. It of wood, they shall be at least 70mm thick and
steel shod.
7
Standard 3m straightedges shall be made of suitable
material and maintained in accurate alignment. They shall
be fitted with a handle long enough to permit operetion of
the straightedge from the shoulder.
Belts shall be of canvas or canvas/rubber
8
composition, 2 to 4 ply, at least 150mm wide and 600mm
longer than the width of pavement.
9
Brooms shall be of the push type at least 450mm
wide. They shall contain no more than 3 rows of good
19-11
Ref.
Tftle
20.1
P.reamble
PagaNo.
20..1
20.1.1
20.1.2
20.1.3
Materials
2G-1
Quantities
20.1
2G-1
20.1.4
Symbols, Abbreviations
20.1.5
Deacriptlona
and Oeflnhlons
20.2
Worlc of Special Types
20.3
S...ltenate ol Omen. Slmdard SPK~r.c.tions lor Rood & Bndgo ConsiN<tioo
- --
Standard Bill of Quantities
20.1
Preamble
20.1.1
Materials
al
b)
c)
dl
20.1.2
The rules contained in this Method of

Measurement apply equally to both proposed
and executed works.
The Bills of Quantities are to be read and
construed in association with the Drawings. the
Specification and this Method of Measurement.
Information which is given on the Drawings
and/or in the Specification is identified by
crossreferences included in the descriptions of
work in the Bills of Quantities.
Where work cannot be fully described or where
the quantity of work required cannot be
accurately determined, it is given as a unit and
priced as a Provisional Sum. (P.S.)
Unless the term meter. used in this Method of
Measurement, is preceded by the words square
or cubic it is deemed to be linear.
Quantities
a)
Quantities set out in the Bills of Quantities are

the estimated quantities end they shall not be
taken as the actual and correct quantities for
ordering or purchasing of materials.
b)
Works shall be measured net 11s fixed in

position in eccord11nce with the rules contained
in this Method of Measurement or except
where otherwise stated In a measurement rule
11pplicable to the work.
c)
dl
el
20.1.3
a)
Dimensions used in calculating quantities ere

taken to the nearest 1 mm. (i.e. 0.5 mm and
over is regarded as 1 mm. Less than 0.5 mm is
disregarded).
Qu11ntities measured in tonnes are given to
three (3) places of decimals. Other quantities
are given to the nearest whole unit except that
any quantity less than one unit is given as one
unit.
Unless otherwise stated, where minimum
deductions for voids are dealt with in this
Method of Measurement they refer only to
openings which are within the boundaries of
measured areas. Openings which are at the
boundaries of measured areas are always
deducted irrespective of size.
Descriptions
Headings to groups of items in the Bill of
Quantities are to be read as part of the
descriptions of the items to which the headings
apply. General directions and descriptions of

items of work given elsewhere In the Tender
Documents are not genera fly repeated in the
Bill of Quantities. Reference must be made to
the Drawings, Specification and Conditions of
Contract for this information
b)
Dimensions are stated in descriptions generally

in the sequence length, width, height. Where
ambiguity could arise, the dimensions are
identified.
cl
Dimensions given in descriptions are

millimetres unless otherwise indicated.
dl
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Bill

of Quantities or herein, the costs of the
following are deemed to be included in the
rates for measured work:
in
i.
Labor and all costs In connection

therewith, Including transport,
ii.
Materials, products, goods and all costs in

connection therewith including transport,
iii.
Contractor's equipment and temporary

works, including but not limited to
construction plant, scaffolding, tools,
vehicles and the like, and all costs in
connection
therewith,
including
maintaining, adapting, relocating, clearing
away and making good,
iv.
assembling, fining and fixing materials,

products and goods in position,
v.
any method of fixing, fixing to any nature

of base or background including
preparation
and
providing
fixing
materials,
vi.
breaking down for transport and

installation and subsequent re-assembly
of composite items manufactured off site,
vii.
waste of materials, and for consumable

materials.
viii.
square, raking and curved cuning,
ix.
work at any location or height,
x.
work in small, isolated quantities,
xi.
protection of all work,
xii.
protection of all existing structures,

utilities, site improvements, trees and
vegetation, features, pavements and other
facilities on and adjacent to the site,
which are to remain upon completion of
the work,
all other enabling tasks, associated and
subsidiary components and items of
~~
Minltry of Tranport & Communlcotlona
OORLT
~~~Standard B ill of Quantit ies
work, which are indicated or reasonably

inferred from the Drawings and/or the
Specification and necessary to perform
and complete the work described,
xiii.
e)
establishment and overhead charges and

profit.
Except where items are included in the Bill of

Quantities and are priced separately by the
Contractor therein, the costs of the following
are deemed to be included in the rates for
measured work:
I.
xviil
setting out and survey work as required in

the Contract.
xix.
samples of materials and testing or

materials, including providing equipment
for testing,
xx.
design drawings, working drawings, road

cross sections, shop drawings, coordination, Installation and as-built record
drawings, operation and maintenance
manuals and the like,
xxi.
preparation and submittal of reports,

records, certificates, notices, proposals,
designs, details, calculations and other
information and data required by the
Specification,
xxii.
cost of work items for which there are no

direct
payments
and which
are
considered In the Specification and other
contract documents as subsidiary to other
items in the Bill of Quantities,
xxUl
allowance In unit rates for all other

requirements
services,
provisions,
liabilities and obtigalions contained in the
Ganeral Requirement$ and Conditions of
Contract.
site administration and security,
ii. insurances,
ill.
bonds and guarantees,
iv.
water for the works,
v. lighting and power for the works.

vi.
temporary facilities and temporary

accommodation for the use of the
Contractor and the Engineer.
vii.
temporary
telephones,
faxes
and
photocopying equipment for the u se of
the Contractor and the Engineer, and the
cost of local calls,
viii.
temporary
roads,
crossings and the like,
hardstandings,
ix. temporary fencing, hoardings, screens,

fans, f oot- ways, guardrails, gantries and
the: tike,
x.
giving notlees and making applicati ons to

all Concerned Authorities and owners,
inclUding the payment of fees, royalties,
taxes and charges in connection
therewith,
xi. safety, health and welfare of workpeople,

)IQ.
compliance w ith traffic regulations.
xiii. maintenance of public and private roads,

services and adjoini ng property,
xiv.
a)
Symbols,
Definitions
Abbreviations
and
The following symbols and abbreviations are

used in this Method of Measurement and in the
Bills of Quantities:
lln.m . .::
1ine1r meter
sq.m :
square meter
cu.m "
cubic meter
em '"'
centimeter
mm
millimeter
nr
kg
number
"'
kilogramme
'"
percentage
,.
%
tonne (metric)
removing rubbish, protective casings and

coverings and cleaning the works on
completlon,
LS.
lump sum
dn
nominal diametar
xvl.
drying the works,
Qty "'
quantity
xvii.
testing and commissioning of service

i nstallations including providing fuel,
Drg :
drawing.
M J]I c
Mega Pascal
PS "
Provisional Sum
xv.
20-2 .
control of noisa and pollution, prevention

of fire and compliance with all other
statutory and ge1111ral obligations,
20.1 .4
Sult1>n<1to of Oml>n. Stonclatd Spec;lficnono for FI<Hd l!.llndg CoiiSirudion 2010
Standard Bill of Quantities
bl
The following definitions apply to all work:
i. 'horizontal' means level or sloping work

not exceeding 15 degrees from the
horizontal,
20.1.5
a)
ii.
'sloping' means sloping work exceeding

15 degrees but not exceeding 80 degrees
from the horizontal,
iii.
'vertical' means work exceeding

degrees from the horizonta I.
iv.
'curved' means curved in any direction or

in more than one direction and to any
radius or radii, and includes curved work
to domes, vaults and the like.
80
Work of Special Types

Work of each of the following special types is
separately identified:
i.
work on or in existing buildings (i.e.

buildings existing before the current
project),
ii.
work to be carried out and subsequently

removed (other than temporary works),
iii.
work outside the boundaries of the site,
iv.
work carried out in, or under, water (i.e.

canal, river or sea waterl.
v.
work carried out In compressed air.
20-3

Standard Specification of OMAN

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Standard Specification of OMAN

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Ref.

Standard Specifications Generally

Keeping Site Cleer of Water

Control of Traffic and Access

Maintenance and Protection of Traffic

Itema In the Bill of Ouantltf11

Setting out of Worb

Surveying Equipment and Ac:cessorles

Abbreviation., Tltle end Tenna

Contractor' Wort Areas

Contractor's Site Facllttles

Items in the Bill of Quantities

Contractor' Compound and Buildinge

Site Fadlltles for the Englneer~mployer:

final Clean. Up on Completion

Maintenance of Ona-Way Traffic

Existing Underground Servicea and

Notices to Concerned Authoriti es

General and Contractual

Health. Safety and Environmental Program 1-8

Health, Safety and linvironment

Commencement. Pfogn~m and Progn~SS

Contractor' Review end Approval

Measufl!'nent and Buis of Payment

Control of Materials and Standards

Sources of Supply and Quality

Quality Cantrol Tests

Precedence of Mlllterials and Testing

Measurement and Basis of Payment

Contractor's SChedule of Plant end

Measurement and Buts of Payment

Contractor's Temporary Works

ProJect Sign Board

Meuun1mentend Basis of Peyment

Commemorative Plaque and

Meesurement and Baals of Payment

Measurement and Payment

General Method of Measurement

Standard Specifications Generally

The Standard Specification is generic. The

Abbreviations, Title and Terms

The following abbreviations used in the

American Association of State Highway

Throughout the documentation units of measurement

Mlnif'trv of Transport & CoolmunlcoUo"s DGRLT

Reference to Standards and Codes of Practice shad

The Works comprised by the Project are as shown

Tha intent of the Contract is to provide for the

The apparent silence of the Specifications, Drawings or

The Site of the Works Is as shown on the Drawings

Contractor's Work Areas

The Contractor shall make all necessary

uses which are essential for execution of the Contract.

Site Survey and Investigation

Before commencing work on Site, the Contractor

Measurement and Basis of Payment

No separate measurement or payment will be

Items in the Bill of Quantities

Contractor's Site Facilities

Contractor's Compound and

The Contractor shall establish a compound for his

Measurement and Basis of Payment

The Contractor shall be paid a two stage sum for